PROFESSOR SIR DOUGLAS MAWSON, Kt., O.B.E., B.E., D.Sc., F.R.S.

1882-1958

The basic biographic data concerning Sir Douglas Mawson are in them-

selves remarkable. He was born in Bradford, Yorkshire, in 1882, and came to

Australia with his parents as a child. He graduated as B.E, from the University

of Sydney in 1901 and, after two years’ geological work in the New Hebrides, as

B.Sc. in 1905. In 1905 he came to the University of Adelaide as lecturer in

mineralogy and petrology and was awarded the D.Sc. degree in 1909. In 1907-

1909 he was in Antarctica with the Shackleton expedition, and he led expeditions

organised by himself to Antarctica in 1911-14, in 1929 and in 1931. It must

also be added that his own expeditions were notable for scientific planning and

results, and that Mawson himself displayed superlative courage and endurance.

Shortly after his return from Antarctica in 1914 he volunteered for army service.

He was commissioned as a Staff Officer, and one of his assignments took him to

Russia, where he was concerned with the supply of munitions to the eastern

front. He was knighted in 1914, and in 1920 he became Professor of Geology

and Mineralogy in Adelaide. He was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society of

London in 1923 and in 1935-1937 he was President of A.N.Z.A.A.S. He received

numerous honours both State and academic from many countries.

These facts alone indicate a remarkable life and remarkable achievement,

but they give a quite inadequate picture of the man himself. Combined with the

reat explorer and scientist and the inspiring leader and teacher was a very

Fiat gentle man. It is possible here to deal with only one or two aspects of

his widespread activities, and particularly those associated with the Royal Society

of South Australia.

Mawson became a Fellow of the Society in 1905, served as a Councillor in

1941-1942, Vice-President in 1923-1924 and again in 1925-1926, and President

in 1924-1925 and again in 1944-1945. He was awarded the Verco Medal in 1931,

It was fitting that his election as an Honorary Fellow in 1955 was made in his

fiftieth year as a member of the Society.

Shortly after Mawson first came to Adelaide he was attracted by the good

exposures and striking nature of the rocks of the Barrier Ranges and the Broken

Hill area. The Society recognised the importance of his work in this region by

publishing two memoirs, “Chiastolites from Bimbowrie, South Australia” and

“Geological Investigations in the Broken Hill Area”, This form of publication,

much more elaborate than the Transactions and now discontinued, was reserved

for works of special merit. His work in the neighbourhood of Olary included

the first investigation of the Radium Hill deposit and gave him a special interest

in the minerals of uranium and other rare metals; an interest he retained actively

for the rest of his life. This same interest also first took him to the Flinders

Ranges, where he did a great deal of work on the Mount Painter minerals.

Visits to the Barrier and Flinders Ranges, originally undertaken for their

mineralogical interest, had:shown Mawson that these regions also gave wonderful

exposures of Proterozoic glacial rocks. His Antarctic experiences had given him

a profound interest in glaciology and it was early in the 1920's that he started

his systematic work on the rocks of the Adelaide System in the Flinders Ranges.

For thirty years this work continued and a series of papers published in the

Transactions of this Society must be regarded as classical contributions to a

subject of outstanding geological interest.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1959), Vol. 82.

2 MEMOIR AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

The fundamental interests of Mawson are shown by his insistence on the

importance of the physico-chemical aspects of geology. Apart from his purely

stratigraphic papers most of his work is supported by chemical data. He also

encouraged most of his students to become proficient in chemical work.

Although Mawson’s contribution to the publications and the official work

of the Society has been of outstanding importance, his less formal participation

in the meetings of the Society must not be overlooked. He frequently exhibited

specimens of unusual interest and entered into discussions with enthusiasm. In

this his interests and knowledge were by no means confined to geological sub-

jects but ranged widely. He had a particular knowledge and love of trees and

his advice was often sought by his friends.

Those who worked with and knew Douglas Mawson could uot fail to recog-

nise the quality of greatness, but they are also grateful to have known a very

human and modest and kindly man.

A.R.A.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1903. (With T. G. Taytor.) The Geology of Mittagong. Jour. and Proc. Roy.

Soc. N.S.W., 87, pp. 306-350.

1904. Preliminary Note on the Geology of the New Hebrides. Rept. Aust.

Assoc. for the Adv. of Sci., 10, p. 213.

1904. (With T. H. Lasy.) Preliminary Observations on Radioactivity and the

Occurrence of Radium in Australian Minerals. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W.,

38, pp. 382-389.

1905. The Geology of the New Hebrides. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. (3), pp.

400-485.

1906. (With F. Cuapman). Halimeda-limestones of the New Hebrides. Qrly.

Jour, Geol. Soc., 62, pp. 702-711.

1906. Mineralogical Notes. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 80, pp. 67-70.

1906. The Minerals and Genesis of the Veins and Schlieren Traversing the

Aegirine-Syenite in the Bowral Quarries. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 381,

pp. 580-607.

1906. On Certain New Mineral Species Associated with Carnotite in the Radio-

active Ore-body near Olary. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 80, pp. 188-193.

1907. Geological Features of Part of Eyre Peninsula. Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust.,

31, pp. 71-76.

1907. Mineralogical Notes. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 31, pp. 119-124.

1907. (With W. T. Cooxe.) The Phosphate Minerals from Elder Rock. Trans.

Roy. Soe. S. Aust., 31, pp. 65-70.

1907. The Wadella Springs and Associated Bog Iron Ore Deposit. Trans. Roy.

Soc. S. Aust., 31, pp. 77-78.

1909. Map Incorporating Route Survey of Coast Line and Hinterland of Portion

of South Victoria Land. Reproduced in “The Heart of the Antarctic”.

Heinemann.

1909. Notes on the Gem-bearing Gravels at Barossa. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.,

38, pp. 141-144.

1911. The Australasian Antarctic Expedition. Geog. Jour. (June), pp. 1-12.

1911. Chiastolites from Bimbowrie, South Australia. Mem. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.,

2 (3), pp. 189-210.

1912. Geological Investigations in the Broken Hill Area. Mem. Roy. Soe. S.

Aust., 2 (4), pp. 211-319.

. The Home of the Blizza

. Auroral Observations at Cape Royds Station, Antarctica, Trans. Roy.

SIR DOUGLAS MAWSON 3

. Pre-Cambrian Areas in the North-Eastern Portion of South Australia and

the Barrier, New South Wales. Repts. Aust. Assoc. for the Adv. of Sci.,

13, pp. 188-191.

. Lecture on: Proposed Australasian Antarctic Expedition, 1911. Repts.

Aust. Assoc. for the Adv. of Sei, 13, pp. 395-100.

. The Australasian Antarctic Expedition, 1911-1914. Geog, Jour. (Sept.),

pp. 257-286.

. Contribution to the Discussion on the “Past and Present Relations of

Antarctica”. Rept. Brit. Assoc. for the Adv. of Sci., Section D, 1914

Meeting.

. The Antarctic Expedition. Pub. in “Addresses Delivered before the

Canadian Club”. Montreal.

. The Australasian Antarctic Expedition, 1911-1914. Scottish Geog. Mag.,

31, pp. 337-360.

. The Australasian Antarctic Expedition, 1911-1914: Summary of Results.

Scottish Geog. Mag., 31, pp, 476-477.

Ay 2 vols. London: Heinemann.

Soc. $. Aust., 40, pp. 151-212.

. A Contribution to the Study of Ice Structures. Repts. Brit. Ant. Exp.,

1907-09. Geology, 2, pp. 3-24.

. Mineral Notes. Trans. Roy, Soc. $. Aust., 40, pp- 262-266.

. Petrology of Rock Collections from the Mainland c

af South Victoria Land.

Repts. Brit. Ant. Exp., 1907-09. Geology, 2, pp, 201-237.

. A Lecture on Some Features of the Antarctic Ice-Cap. Abstracts of Prac.

Geol. Sac. London, 1026, pp. 83-84.

. A Discussion on the Antarctic Ice-Cap and its Borders. Abstracts of Proc.

Geol. Soc. London, 1027, pp. 2-8.

. Maequarie Island, a Sanctuary for Australasian Sub-Antarctic Fauna.

Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc, A’sia (5.4. Branch), 20, pp. 1-15,

. Australasian Antarctic Expedition: Report on the Progress of the Publica-

tion of the Scientific Results. Repts. Aust. Assoc. for the Adv. of Sci.,

15, pp. 1-6.

. The Current Geographical Outlook. Repts. Aust. Assoc. for the Adv. of

Sci., 15, Section E, pp. 1-16.

. Leben und Tod am Sudpol. Brockhaus, Leipzig.

. Macquarie Island and its Future. Proc. Roy, Soc. Tas., pp. 40-54.

(With F. Coapman.) The Tertiary Brown-coal Bearing Beds of Moor-

lands. Trans. Roy. Soc, $, Aust. 46, pp. 131-147,

Igneous Rocks of the Mt. Painter Belt. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 47, pp.

376-387.

. Macquarie Island and its Future. Australian Zoologist, 3 (3), pp. 92-102.

. Notes on the Geological Features of the Meadows Valley. Trans. Roy.

Soc. 5. Aust.. 47, pp. 371-375.

Australasian Antarctic Expedition: Report of the Progress of the Publica-

tion of the Scientific Results. Repts. Aust. Assoc. for the Adv, of Sci.,

17, p. 139.

. Evidence and Indications of Algal Contributions in the Cambrian and -

Pre-Cambrian Limestones of South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust.,

49, pp. 186-190.

(With F. Caapman.)} Notes on Certain South Australian Fossiliferous

Terrestrial Formations of Recent Age. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 49,

pp. 91-95.

MEMOIR AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

. Records of the Aurora Polaris. A’sian Ant. Exp., 1911-14. Scientific

Repts., Series B, 2 (1), pp. 1-191.

. Some Aspects of Forestry in South Australia. Commemoration Address:

University of Adelaide. The Hassell Press, pp. 1-30.

. Additions to the South Australian Mineral Record. Trans. Roy. Soe. S.

Aust., 50, pp. 25-30.

. A Brief Resumé of Present Knowledge Relating to the Igneous Rocks

of South Australia, Repts. Aust. Assoc. for the Adv. of Sci., 18, pp. 229-274.

(With P. S. Hossretp.) Relics of Aboriginal Occupation in the Olary

District. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 50, pp. 17-24.

. Varve Shales Associated with the Permo-Garboniferous Glacial Strata of

South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 50, pp. 160-162.

. Wooltana Basic Igneous Belt. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 50, pp. 192-200.

. Geological Notes on an Area along the North-Eastern Margin of the North-

Eastern Portion of the Willouran Range. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 51,

pp. 386-390.

. The Paralana Hot Spring. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 51, pp. 391-397.

. Report of Glacial Research Committee: the Finke River Glacial Beds.

Repts. Aust. Assoc. for the Adv. of Sci., pp. 97-99.

. Unsolved Problems of Antarctic Exploration and Research. Problems of

Polar Research. Amer. Geog. Soc. Spec. Publ., No. 7, pp. 253-266.

. South Australian Algal Limestones in Process of Formation. Qrly. Jour.

Geol. Soc., 85 (4), pp. 613-623.

. The Antarctic Cruise of the “Discovery”, 1929-1930. Geog. Rev., 20 (4),

pp. 534-554.

. The Occurrence of Potassium Nitrate near Goyder’s Pass, MacDonnell

Ranges, Central Australia. Min. Mag., 22 (128), pp. 231-237.

(With C, T. Maprcan.) The Pre-Ordovician Rocks of the MacDonnell

Ranges, Central Australia. Qrly. Jour. Geol. Soc., 86, pp. 415-428.

. The Home of the Blizzard. Rev. ed. Jondon: Hodder and Stoughton.

. The B.A.N.Z. Antarctic Research Expedition, 1929-31. Geog. Jour., 80,

101-131.

. The Geology and Glaciation of some Islands of the Southern Ocean and

the new-discovered Antarctic Mainland. Qrly. Jour. Geol., Soc., 89, pp.

113-115.

Glacial Phenomena Committee. South Australia. Rept. Aust. and N.Z.

Assoc. for the Adv. of Sci., 21, pp. 464-465.

The New Polar Province. Roy. Inst’n. of Great Britain, pp. 1-18.

. The Arltunga and Karoonda Meteorites. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 58,

pp. 1-6.

. The Kerguelen Archipelago. Geog. Jour., 83, pp. 18-29.

. The Munyallina Beds: a Late-Proterozoic Formation. Trans. Roy. Soc.

S. Aust., 58, pp. 187-196.

. Wilke’s Antarctic Landfalls. Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc. A’sia (S.A. Branch),

84, pp. 70-113.

(With F. Coapman.) The Occurrence of a Lower-Miocene Formation on

Bougainville Island. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 59, pp. 241-242.

. Some Historical Features of the Discovery of Enderby Land and Kemp

Land. Geog. Jour., 86, pp. 526-530.

. Sir Tannatt William Edgeworth David. Obituary Notices of the Royal

Society of London, 4, pp. 493-501.

. South Australian Participation in Antarctic Exploration. Proc. Roy. Geog.

Soc. A’sia (S.A. Branch), pp. 1-6.

1935.

1936.

1937.

1938.

1939.

1940.

1940,

1941.

1942,

1942.

1943.

SIR DOUGLAS MAWSON 5

The Unveiling of Antarctica. Rept. Aust. and N.Z. Assoc. for the Adv.

of Sci., pp. 1-37.

Centenary Address No. 7: Progress in Knowledge of the Geology of South

Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 60, lvi-lIxv.

Antarctic Exploration. Pub. in “Centenary History of South Australia”.

Roy. Geog. Soc. of A’sia (S.A. Branch), pp. 338-350.

The most Northerly Occurrence of Fossiliferous Cambrian Strata yet Re-

corded in South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 61, pp. 181-186.

Cambrian and Sub-Cambrian Formations at Parachilna Gorge. Trans.

Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 62 (2), pp. 255-262.

Charles Chewings: Obituary Notice. Proc. Geol. Soc. Lond., 94, p. 117.

Further Discoveries of Sapropelic deposits in the Coorong Region of

South Australia. Pub. in “Oil Shale and Cannel Coal”. The Inst. of Petro-

leum, pp. 50-52.

The Mount Caernarvon Series of Proterozoic Age. Trans. Roy. Soc. S.

Aust., 62 (2), pp. 347-351.

Walter Howchin: Obituary Notice. Proc. Geol. Soc. Lond., 94, pp.

118-122.

The Cambrian Sequence in the Wirrealpa Basin. Trans. Roy. Soc. S.

Aust., 63 (2), pp. 331-347.

The First Stage of the Adelaide Series: as Illustrated at Mount Magni-

ficent. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63 (1), pp. 69-78.

Introductory Remarks. A’sian Ant. Exp. 1911-14. Scientific Repts., Series

B, 5, pp. 11-16 and 107-109.

The Late Proterozoic Sediments of South Australia. Rept. Aust. N.Z.

Assoc. for the Adv. of Sci., 24, pp. 80-88.

The Adelaide Series. Aust. Jour. Sci., pp. 25-27.

Catalogue of Rocks and Minerals Collected in Antarctic Lands. A’sian

Ant. Exp. 1911-14. Scientific Repts., Series A, 4 (13), pp..405-432.

Hydrological Observations. A’sian Ant. Exp. 1911-14. Scientific Repts.,

Series A, 2 (4), pp. 103-125.

Marine Biological Programme and other Zoological and Botanical Activi-

ties A’sian Ant. Exp. 1911-14. Scientific Repts., Series A, 2 (5), pp.

127-167.

Notes and Exhibits: Tillite and other Rocks from Hallett Cove, South

Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 64 (2), p. 362.

Record of Minerals of King George Land, Adelie Land and Queen Mary

Land. A’sian Ant. Exp. 1911-14. Scientific Repts., Series A, 4 (12),

pp. 371-404.

Sedimentary Rocks. A’sian Ant. Exp. 1911-14, Scientific Repts., Series A,

4 (11), pp. 347-367.

Middle Proterozoic Sediments in the Neighbourhood of Copley. Trans.

Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 65 (2), pp. 304-311

The Wilpena Pound Formation and Underlying Proterozoic Sediments.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 65 (2), pp. 295-303.

Geographical Narrative and Cartography. A’sian Ant. Exp. 1911-14.

Scientific Repts., Series A, 1, pp. 1-364.

The Structural Character of the Flinders Ranges. Trans. Roy. Soe. S,

Aust., 66 (2), pp. 262-272.

Macquarie Island: Its Geography and Geology. A’sian. Ant. Exp. 1911-

14. Scientific Repts., Series A, 5, pp. 1-194.

(With L. W. Parkin.) Some Granitic Rocks of South-Eastern South

Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67 (2), pp. 233-243.

MEMOIR AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

. The Nature and Occurrence of Uraniferous Mineral Deposits in South

Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68 (2), pp. 334-357.

(With W. B. Datiwirz.) Palaeozoic Igneous Rocks of Lower South-

Eastern South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68 (2), pp. 191-209.

(With E. R. Secnrr.) Granites of the Tintinara District. Trans. Roy. S.

Aust., 69 (2), pp. 263-276.

(With W. B. Datiwitz.) Scapolitized Dolomites of Yankaninna. Trans.

Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 69 (2), pp. 212-216.

(With E. R. Seenrr.) Porphyritic Potash-soda Micro-granites of Mount

Monster. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 69 (2), pp. 217-222.

(With W. B. Datuwirz.) The Soda-rich Leucogranite Cupolas of

Umberatana. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 69 (1), pp. 22-49.

(With E. R. Secnrr.) Barium-rich Aplitic Gneisses of Broken Hill. Trans.

Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 70 (2), pp. 277-293.

The Geological Background of South Australia. Handbook of Aust. N.Z.

Assoc. for the Adv. of Sci., pp. 5-11.

Introductory Note to A. B. Edwards: The Moorumbunna Meteorite.

Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 70 (2), pp. 348-349.

. The Adelaide Series as Developed along the Western Margin of the

Flinders Ranges. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 71 (2), pp. 259-280.

Australia’s Antarctic Territory. Australia, 1949: The Herald Year Book,

Melbourne. pp. 266-267.

. The Elatina Glaciation: a Third Recurrence of Glaciation Evidenced in

the Adelaide System. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 78, pp. 117-121.

The Late Precambrian Ice-Age and Glacial Record of the Bibliando Dome.

Jour. and Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 82, pp. 150-174.

(With E. R. Szcnrr.) Purple Slates of the Adelaide System. Trans. Roy.

Soc. S. Aust., 72 (2), pp. 276-280.

Sturtian tillite of Mount Jacob and Mount Warren Hastings, North

Flinders Ranges. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 72 (2), pp. 244-251.

Basaltic Lavas of the Balleny Islands. A.N.A.R.E. Report. Trans. Roy.

Soc. S. Aust., 73 (2), pp. 223-231.

. Occurrence of Water in Lake Eyre, South Australia. Nature, 166, pp.

667-669.

(With R. C. Spricc.) Subdivision of the Adelaide System. Aust. Jour. of

Sci., 13 (3), pp. 69-70.

. Professor Thomas Harvey Johnston: Bibliography, List of Titles of the

Published Works of Thomas Harvey Johnston, M.A., D.Se., late Professor

of Zoology at the University of Adelaide (with Biographical Introduc-

tion). Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 75.

. Programme of Australian Antarctic Exploration. Nature, 172, p. 479.

. The Willunga Basin: Introductory and Historical Notes. Trans. Roy. Soc.

S. Aust., 76, pp. 108-113.

. The Réle of Geology in the Activities of the Royal Society of South Aus-

tralia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S$. Aust., 77, pp. xii-xiv.

Symposium: Australia and I.G.Y. in Antarctica. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 69,

. 5-9,

. Knee Moulded Pots from the New Hebrides. Records S.A. Museum, 18

(1), pp. 83-86.

. Sturtian Glacial Horizon in the MacDonnell Ranges. Aust. Jour of Sci.,

19, pp. 162-163.

. Australites in the Vicinity of Florieton, South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc.

S. Aust., 81, pp. 161-163.

THE DISTRIBUTION AND FIELD RELATIONS OF THE GRANITIC

ROCKS OF PORT ELLIOT, SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

BY D.R. BOWES

Summary

Two closely-spaced intrusive phases of granite are postulated. The first intrusion was contaminated

by assimilation of country rock of the roof and is now seen as a porphyritic granite. The second

granite, an even-grained type, intruded the porphyritic granite but did not reach the meta-

sedimentary roof and so remained uncontaminated.

THE DISTRIBUTION AND FIELD RELATIONS OF THE GRANITIC

ROCKS OF PORT ELLIOT, SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

by D. R, Bowes*

[Read 10 April, 1958]

SUMMARY

Two closcly-spaced intrusive phases of granite are postulated, The first in-

Gusion was contammated by assimilation of country rack of the roof and is now

seen as a porphyritic granite, “The second granite, an evén-grained type, in-

truded the porphyritic granite but did not reach the meta-sedimentary 100t

and so remained uncontaminated.

The granitic rocks of Port Elliot, some 50 miles south of Adelaide, were

investigated by Browne (1920) who described two main types of granite, por-

bliyeitte and even-grained, and discussed their general distribution and field

relations,

Investigations uf the granite mass at Rosetta Head, 6 miles west of Port

Elliot, led the present author to postulate successive phases of granite intrusion

and the formation of the porphyritic granite by contamination of the cven-

grained type seen at Port Elliot (Bowes, 1954), The granitic rocks at Port

Elliot were also mapped at 24 in. =1 mile (Fig. 1) and the following wre the

salient points which emerged from this work.

The porphyritic granite, which makes up the major part of the cliffs at Part

Elliot, is similar to the granite at Rosetta Head and Granite Island (Browne

op. cit.) although the felspar phenocrysts are generally smaller and less abun-

dant. Numerous angular xenoliths of meta-greywacke are found and some

show metasomatic effects similar to these seen on Granite Island (Kleeman,

1937). The roof of the intrusion is not exposed although it is possible that

the large meta-greywacke mass on the western side of Green Bay (Fig. 1) may

be a roof pendant.

The even-grained outcrops are localized in two areas, viz. in the vicinity of

Green Bay and at about 600-700 yards N.N.E. of Commodore Point. There is

no suggestion of angularity in the shape of any of the masses of even-graincd

granite, most of the boundaries being arcuate, and ne xenoliths cf country rock

are present, The junction between the two granites is never knife-sharp and

it was found virtually impossible to decide between which crystals the contact

passes. Neither granite shows a reduction of grain sizc against the other and

some individual crystals at the margin give the appearance of having grown

across what may have been an original junction, -

The aplite dykes and scherl rock pipes cut across both granitic types.

it is postulated that the first granite intrusion, at the Tevel exposed, was

contaminated near its roof by the assimilation of meta-sediments to produce the

porphyritic granite, the magmatic character of which is indicated by the presence

of angular disoriented xenoliths. It has been suggested that a similar mechanism

produced the porphyritic granite at Rosetta Head and Granite Ishind (Bowes

op. cit.) although the larger and more abundant felspar phenocrysts in these

places probably resulted from the assimilation of albite- and chlorite-rich rocks,

* Department of Geology, University of Glasgow.

Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust. (1959), Vol. 82,

8 D. R. BOWES

The even-grained granite outcrops near Green Bay (Fig. 1) are postulated

as representing the tabs of small cupola-like masses intruded into the porphyritic

granite. This second granite intrusion, which contains no meta-greywacke

xenoliths, did not reach the roof of the first intrusion and so remained uncon-

taminated. Lack of chilled margins around the even-grained granite, the diffi-

culty of delineating the precise line of contact and the absence of xenoliths of

porphyritic granite in the even-grained granite suggest that the earlier intrusion

was still hot, possibly a crystal mush with residual magma, when the later in-

trusion occurred.

The aplite dyke injection and schorl rock formation followed the intrusion

of the even-grained granite and it is postulated that they were associated with

the late stages of its cooling.

REFERENCES.

Bowes, D, R., 1954. The Metamorphic and Igneous History of Rosetta Head, South Aus-

Australia. Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 77, pp. 182-214.

Browne, W. R., 1920. The Igneous Rocks of Encounter Bay, South Australia. ‘Trans. Roy.

Soc. S. Aust., 44, pp. 1-57.

Kuirreman, A. W., 1937. The Nature and Origin of the so-called Diorite Inclusions in the

Granite of Granite Island. Trans. Roy. Soc. $. Aust., 61, pp. 207-220.

PORT ELLIOT

GRANITIG ROCKS OF

VITVuLSNY HLNOS ‘LOITI LYOd 3O SHDOY DILINVUD FHL inhineec ba

SLINVES SILIdAHdHOd FI

SLINVYS CaNIVYS- NSAS ir J

aLivatoa

ANILSAVEL YVAN

VL Widy75 “W0s

— N3931—

sam

“t ays—

LN1lOd

AYOCOWNOD

SOME ACARINA FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW GUINEA

PARAPHAGIC UPON MILLIPEDES AND COCKROACHES AND ON

BEETLES OF THE FAMILY PASSALIDAE.

BY H.WOMERSLEY

Summary

This paper, the second of a series on certain families of Mesostigmata-Trigynaspida (Acarina)

paraphagic upon millipedes, cockroaches and Passalid beetles from Australia and New Guinea,

deals with the family Fedrizziidae. Twenty species in all are recognised, including two from the

Island of Buru, and fifteen are described as new. Two new genera Neofedrizzia and Parafedrizzia

are erected. The species Toxopeusia(Fedrizzia) strandi Oudeinans, 1927, from Buru is regarded as a

valid species not conspecific with grossipes Canestrini, 1884 from Queensland. Toxopeusia

vitzthumi Onds., 1927, also from Burn, is also considered a valid species and placed in the genus

Neofeclrizzia but differing from the other known species. Canestrini's Fedrizzia luevis from

Queensland is shown to be a species of Neofedrizzia.

SOME ACARINA FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW GUINEA

PARAPHAGIC UPON MILLIPEDES AND COCKROACHES AND ON

BEETLES OF THE FAMILY PASSALIDAE.

by H. Wowersiey

South Austrahan Museum

[Read 8 May, 1958}

SUMMARY

This paper, the second of a serics on certain, fayuilies of Mesostigmata-

Trigynaspida {Acarina) paraphagic upon millipedes, eorkrpaches and Passalid

beetles from Australia and New Guinea, deals with the family Pedrizziidae.

Twenty species in all are recognised, inchiding two drom the Island of Buru,

and fitteen are described as new, ‘Two new genera Neofedrizzia and Parafed-

rizgid are erected.

The species Toxopeusiu( Pedrizzi) atreneli. OQudemans, 1927, from Buru js

regarded as a valid species not conspecific with grussipes Canesteini, 1884 from

Queensland. Toxepeusia vitzthumi Ouds., 1927, also trom Buru, ig also eun-

sidered a valid species and placed in the genus Neofedrizzia but ditfering from

the other known species.

Canestrini’s Fedrizzia laevis from Queensland is shown to he a specics of

Neofedrizzia.

Pt, 2.—The family FEDRIZZLDAE,

( Mesostigmata-Trigynaspida. )

Taxopeusiidac, Oudemans, 1927, Ent. Ber. 7(156): 297.

(Type genus and species Toxopeusia strandi Ouds., 1927.)

Fedrizziidae. Trigdrdh, 1937. Arkiv. f. Zool., 29B(11): 5.

(Type genus and species Fedrizzia vrossipes Canestrini, 1884, )

The species belonging to this family are to be found associated with

Carabid beetles principally of the family Passalidac. They are small round to

oval strongly sclerotised mites with flatish venter and more raised convex dorsum.

The dorsal shield is entire and furnished usually with numerous pores and fine

setae, generally so minute and upstanding that only their bases are to be seen

and are difficult to distinguish fromm pures, In most specics the anterior of the

dorsal shield overlaps the gnathosoma as a hyaline cresceut- or sickle-shaped

portion devoid of pores or selae except the one pair of vertical sctac. In Neo-

jedrizxia scutata n. sp., however, this hyaline portion is extended backwards

and expanded laterally to form a shield, devoid of pores and with only some

minute setae laterally, which covers about two-thirds of the body before it

merges with the posterior of the dorsal shield. Anteriorly the shield underlaps

the venter to form a camerostoime, is confluent marginally with the ventral shicld

and underlaps again posteriorly to contour the ventral and anal shields. The

gnathosoma arises within the camerostome; there ure three pairs of hypostomal

setae and the labial cornicles are hyaline and thumb-like with a subapical ad-

pressed claw-like process; the palpi are 5-segmented, the basal segment is broad

with a pair of lung setae on the inner lamella, the specialised tarsal seta is 2-

tined; mandibles with both chelicerae dentate, the movable digit with long

hyaline processes two. of which ace blade-like and serrate, the others filamentous:

Trans. Roy, Soc. 8. Atist. (1959), Vol. 82.

2 TT. WOMERSLEY

within the postero-lateral angles of the camerostome is a triangular scleratised

plute (the “ayillac” plates of Sellnick in Ht.) of unknown function, The legs

are short, 6-segmented; [ is slender, antennaeform without tarsal caruncle and

claws; ILIV are stout, the tarsi with pretarsus, caruncle and indistinct claws,

femora of leg TV may be clongate without lamellae (Pedrizzia) or short and

swollen with lamellae and with a stout curved spine at the posterior Inner

corner (Neofedrizzid) or similac but without the stout curved spine (Parafed-

rizzia ).

fn the female sex the ventral shields consist of & tritostermum with paired

laciniass a single (rattsverse jugular shield separated [rom the anterior margin

of the sternal shield by a transverse suture and furnished with cne pair of setae

and one pair of pores; a sternal shield which is coalesced with the endopodal

shields of coxae [ and is much wider than long, the greatest width being across

the postero-lateral arzms which extend between coxac I and IL, it is furnished

with three pairs of setac and one pair of pores, the anteriar pair of setae (sternal

setao Il) are in the anterolateral angles, the other two pairs (sternal setae It

and IV) form a transverse rmwy cluse to the posterior margin; titppetl to the pos-

terioy margin of the sternal shicld is the sternogynial shield which is shaped

sumewlhat like an mverted bell-jar and is furnished with only one pair of pores

in the untero-lateral angles; at the posterior apex of the sternogynial shicld is

the small reduced mesogynial shield; the latigynial shields are long, narrow

aud strap-like flanking the sternogynial shield from the mesogynial shield to

the antery-lateral comers of the sternozynial shield; the ventral shield is Js ge

covering most of the venter, medially it extends forward on each side of the

sternugynial shield and between this shield and coxae IIL and IV with the

endopodal shields to which it is coalesced, between the outer margins of the

bit and coxac LU-IV it eatends forwards and is coalesced with the exopadal

shields, peritremal shiclds and anteriorly with the underlap of the dorsal shield

where it forms the camerostome. on the outer body murgins it is coalesced or

confluent with the dorsal shield, posterior of coxae LV its margins converge in-

wards fur some distance and are separated from the underlap of the dorsal

shield by a somewhat diagonal suture, its posterior margin is wide: and trans-

verse separated from the anal shicld by a transverse suture, it jas few if any

setae and its surface is in must spectes of Pedrizzia covered by a urid of fine

transverse striae eroxsecl hy short longitudinal ones, in other species it is quite

smooth; the anal shield is wide and triangular with the stat opening in the

posterior angle ane usually with a few short setae besides a pair of longer

paranal sclae; the stigmata are situated between coxae ID and IV and the peri-

tremes reach coxae 1; outside of the peritremes oppusite coxae UL is the atrium

of a large duct. the outer edge of the atrium being strongly selerctised.

In the mule the jugular shield may Le present und separated as in the

female. or it may be absent. When absent (Neofedrizzin) there is in front of

the auterior margin of the sternal shield a pair of anteriorly directed processes

of wiknown function; the rest o£ the ventral shields except the anal are all

coalesced to form a sterno-venttal shield with the genital orifice near the

antevior margin betweer coxue LE or between coxae If and III, the surface may

be furnished with a grid of fine striae as in the females of some Fedrizzia, or

it may be smooth; when a grid is present a forwardly curved line indicates

fusion of the ventral and sternal portion; tle anal shield is similar te that of the

female; in Parafedrizzia the anal shield is not demarcated, being coalesced with

the rest, as it isalso ovalesced with the ventral shield in the female of this genus.

Hitherto the only genus included in the family lus been Fedrizzia Canes-

trin}, 1884 (= Toxopeusia Ouds.. 1927) with F. gressipes Cunest., S84, as type.

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZIIDAE 13

In this paper eight species of Fedrizzia s. str. are recognised of which six are

described as new. Two new genera Neofedrizzia, with eleven species, nine of

which are new, and Parafedrizzia with one new species are erected. Of the

previously known species Fedrizzia (Toxopeusia) strandi Ouds., 1927, from the

Island of Buru has generally becn considered as the same as grossipes from

Diagram to illustrate main measurements uscd: L, length of idiosoma; W, width of idiosoma;

1, length of jugular shield; 2, length of sternal shield; 3, length of sternogynial shield; 4,

distance of apex of sternogynial from anterior margin of anal shield; 5, distance from apex

of sternogynial to apex of anal shield; 6, distance of apex of sternogynial from end of body;

7, length of anal shield; A, width of jugular shield; B, anterior width of sternal shield; C,

width of sternal shield at narrowest part between coxae II; D, greatest width of sternal shield

across postero-lateral arms; E, anterior width of sternogynial shield; I’, width between coxae

Il; G, width between points of angles between coxae IIT and IV; H, width between coxae:

IV; I, width of anal shield.

14 H. WOMERSLEY

Queensland. It is now regarded as a separate and valid species. Fedrizzia

laevis Canest., 1884, from Queensland is recognised as a valid species of Neo-

fedrizzia, as is also Toxopeusia vitzthumi Ouds., 1927, from the Island of Buru.

Drs, Camin and Gorirossi in their 1955 paper had before them an unde-~

serihed species in which the sternagynial shicld was rounded and not tapering

as in grossipes and in which the male lacked the jugular shield. On these char-

acters they suggest that their material belongs to a new and undescribed genus.

ie would now seem that they have a species of Neofedrizzia as diagnosed in

$ paper.

That the rounded or tapering character of the sternogynial shield is not a

good generic one is shown in the present studies by the occurrence of both

forms in both Fedrizzia and Neofedriazia.

For the discovery of several features in the morphology of these mites such

as the pair of pre-sternal processes in front of the anterior margin of the sternal

shield in those species (genus Neofedrizsia) in which the jugular shields are

absent in the male, and also the presence in the postero-lateral angles of the

camerostome of a small well sclerotised triangular plate, as well as for other

help and advice [ wish to record my grateful thanks to Dr. Sellnick.

Geographically species of this family will probably be found to occur in

the tropical and semi-tropical regions wherever beetles of the family Passalidae

and its allies occur. So Far, however, species bave been or are now described

from the Mohiceas. New Guinea, and the rain forest arca of castern Australia,

The following species are dealt with in this paper:—

Gonus Feprrzzia 5. str. Canest,, 1584,

grossipes Canest., 1884. Queensland, Australia.

sp. ef. “rossipes Canest., 1884 (Sellnick in lit.) Queensland, Australia.

sellnicki sp. nov. Queensland, Ausiralja.

carabi_ sp, nov. Aiyura, New Guinea,

derricki sp. nov. Queensland, Australia.

oudemansi Sp. DOV. New South Wales, Australia,

bornemisszai sp, nov. Queensland, Australia,

strandi (Ouds., 1927) Is. of Buru, Moluccas.

Genus NEOrEDIZZIA nov.

gayi sp. nov. Queensland, Australia.

canestrini sp. nov. Queensland, New South Wales, Australia,

cynala sp. nov. New South Wales, Australia.

camini sp. nov. New South Wales, Australia.

govirossiag sp. Nov. Queensland, Australia.

tragardhi sp. nov. New South Wales, Queensland, Australia,

brooksi sp, nov. Queensland, Australia.

vidua sp. nov. Queenslimd, Australia.

scutala sp. nev. Bulolo, New Guinea.

laevis (Canest., 1884) Queensland, Australis.

vitzthumi (Ouds., 1987) Is. of Buru, Moluceas:

Genus. PanarEDRIZZ1A nov.

buloloensis sp, nov, Bulolo, New Guinea

Key to the genera vf the family Fedrizziidae

1. Jugular shields coalesced medially to form @ transverse shield

separated from the sternal shield in both sexes, Sternogynial shield

rounded posteriorly to bell-jar shape with tapering sides and apical

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA PRDRIZZIDAR 15

knob, A triangular anal shield present or not, One of the two long

setao cm basal segment of palpi with 6-9 long branches, other nude,

Femora of legs U-IV elongate and truncheon like or short and wide

but without a strong curved spine at posterior angle. 2

Such jugular shields absent in male being eoalesced with sternal

shields in fesne of sternal with a pair of free or basully fixed forwardly

directed processes and the basal part of tritosteraym bulbous. Sterno-

gynial shield evenly rounded or bell-jar shaped. Anal shield present.

Both long setae on basal palpal segment only shortly ciliated. Femora

of legs H-IV short and broadly swollen with lamellae and with a

strong curved spine at posterior angle.

Genus Neofedrizzia nov.

Type N. gayi sp. nov,

2. Anai shield absent, coalesced with ventral shield in both sexes.

Elongate species widest behind middle in line of coxae LV. Femora

IIL and 1V short and swollen with lamellae, but with only a straight

normal scta at posterior corner.

Genus ie rade nay,

Type P. buloloensis sp. nov.

Anal shield present m both sexes. Rounded species. Femora III

and IV elongate, loner than wide and truncheon like, without lamellae,

Genus Fedrizzia Canest., 1854.

Type F. grossipes Canest., 1884,

Genus Freprrzzia Canestrini, 1884

Canestini, G., 1884, Acari nnovi vo poco noti Il, Acari dell’Australin—Atti del. KR. Institute

Veneto 11(6): p, TUT.

Type F. grossipes Canest., 1884.

=YToxopeusia Ondemans, A. C., 1927. Acarol, Aanteekeninjen, LXXNVIT. Bot Bey 7

(156): 227; Fauna Buruana, Acari, in Treubia 7, Suppl, 2: p. 60.

As differentiated in the preceding discussion and diagnosis of the family and

as in the key to genera,

Fedrizzia prossipes Canestrini, 1684

Fedrizzia grassipes Ganest., 1884. Atti del R. Inet. Veneto T1(6): p. 707, pl 8, figs, 1-2.

This species was originally described by Canestrini from specimens found

on beetles “allied to the European Geotrupes’ from Queensland collected by

the late Prof, F. Pulle of the University of Padova, Later, in 1927, and more

fully in 1928, Oudemans described the genus Toxopeusia with strandi sp, nov, as

type, from “in fungi” from the Island of Bury. This genus is now accepted as

synonymous with Canestrini’s Fedrigzia. In his figures and descriptions of

gtossipes Canestrini shows a moderately elongate oval form which however

differs considerably in the ratio of length to width as given by the quoted dimen-

sions, from that shown by his figure. The dimensions quoted in the deseription

are: length in both sexes 900, width of male 520p, of fenisle 530, which gives

u ratio of approximately 1-70: 1-0 for length to width. In the figures, assum

ing the length to be correct the width would be approximately 620, for the

male and 630, for the female or a ratio of length to width of approximately

1-44:1-0, This consideration suggests that the dimensions given in the text

should have been 620, and 630) respectively.

I am very greatly indebted to my colleague Dr, Max Sellnick of Hamburg

who has examined the types of both male and female of grossipes which were

16 H. WOMERSLEY

sent to him by Dr. Valle Parma, for the following measurements of these speci-

mens:

Type @: length of idiosoma 918,, width 6124 (which gives a ratio of

length to width 1:5:1-0).

Type 3: length of idiosoma 900.2, width 594u (which gives a ratio of

Jength to width of 1-51: 1-0).

These measurements confirm the view expressed above that the widths given

by Canestrini were probably an errur in printing.

Other dimensions of the type specimens for which I am also deeply in-

debted to Dr, Sellnick are:

Female.

Jugular shield (tetartosternum) 120, wide by 28» deep anbdialty.

Sternal shield, length medially 84,, width anteriorly 1004, width between

coxae If (i.e. narrowest part) 88, maximum width of postero-lateral

arms 304p.,

Sternogynial shield, 124y, long by 160, wide anteriorly, distance of posterior

vdge from anterior of anal shield 306, and from posterior edge of body

4586p.

Ventral shield, distance between coxae ILI 196u, between angles between

coxae IIT and IV 296% and between coxae [IV 176p,

Anal shield, eae wide by 135. long (deep) (ratio of width: Iength

-4: 1-0),

Male.

ugular shield (tetartosternum) 80% wide by ? long.

terno-ventral: width between antero-lateral angles 1204, between angles

between cuxae I and coxae III 288.; between angles between coxae III

and coxae IV 280p, width between coxae IL 84y, between coxao TIL 188

and between coxae IV 172, distance from anterior border to anterior

edge of genital orifice 60y, genital orifice 524 long by 72, wide,

Anal shield: 3202 wide by 125, long (ratio of width: length = 2-5: 1-0).

Fedrizzia sp. cf. grossipes Canest., 1854

Text fig. 1 A-K

Some few years ago I sent to my friend and colleague, Dr, Max Sellnick,

of Hamburg, some material of several specics of Fedriszta s.J. of which he very

kindly made dissections and studied them.

Amongst this material were a number of specimens from a Passalid beetle

from Imbil, Queensland (coll. J. F. Gay, 11th Sept., 1946) which, after compari-

son with the type male and female of F. grossipes Canest. received hy him from

Dr. Valie Parma, he considered (in lit.) to be conspecific therewith. A study

of Sellnick’s dissections and of other entire specimens and a comparison of their

detailed measurements with those given to me by him of the types of grossipes

convinces me that the Imbil specimens ure specifically distinct therefrom. In

the present study it is shown that the many species of the genera Fedrizzia and

Neofedrizzia ave very constant in certain specific characters as follows: {1}

overall size which varies but little and which does not differ much between

sexes; (2) the shape, whether morc or less rounded or more elongate; (3) the

dimensions of the anal shield.

However, in deference to Dr. Sellnick’s opinion as expressed in correspim-

dence I refrain for the present from giving a specific name to this species, com-

paring it with grossipes Canestrini.

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZIIDAE 17

Fig, 1—edrizzia sp. cf, yrossipes Cancst., 1884, A-F, H-K Female: A, yentral view; B,

venter (after Sellnick) showing camorostome, axillar plates and ornamentation; C. tritos-

ternum, jugular, sternal, sternogynial, and Jatigynial shields, enlarged; D, latigynial shields

separated from sternogynial; E, chelicerae; F, gnathosoma and palpi; H, leg I; I, Jeg TU;

J, leg Tt; K, leg IV; G, Male, tritosternum, jugular and. sternal shields.

1 male from Aulacocyclus sp. (Passalidae) from Dalby, Queensland, 25th Dec.,

1952 (coll. H. Geary). Also 1 male from Mastochilus dilatus Dalm., Washpool

Crk., near Tenterfield, N.S.W., 8th Oct, 1956 (coll. G. F. Bornemissza).

Description—Female (from Imbil),—Broadly oval to roundish in shape.

Length of idiosoma 1160p, width &70p.

18 H. WOMBRSLEY

Dorsum with numerous small pores or setae bases—if the latter than the

setae aré exceedingly minute and upstanding.

Venter—Base of tritosternum wider than long in the ratio of 10 : 9; jugular

shielt as figured, 146. wide by 42. long, with rounded anterolateral corners,

anterior margin straight and only indented medially, the single pair of setae

25 long enrved backwards and 61): apart, the one pair of lyriform pores T5y

apart and nearer to the posterior than to the anterior border: sternal shield

with the anterior margin transverse and 105, wide, sides contouring the edges af

coxae IL and continuing between coxae IT and U1 to a maximum width of 366u

between the ends of the postero-lateral arms, narrowest part just behind anterior

qargin 99p, posterior inurgin straight medially for 150, then curving posteriorly

fora width of 45, before running obliquely forwards to the tips of the postetu-

lateral arms of the shield, shield with three pairs of setae and one pair of lyri-

form pores, the setae are all short ca. 10» long, the anterior pair of setae are

47 behind the anterior margin and 70. apart, the other two pairs form a trans-

vers¢ row near the posterior border, the medial pair 38. apart and 28, from

each lateral, the single pair of pores are behind the anterior pair of setac 38

in Cront- of the posterior margin and 75, apart; the sternagynial shield is some-

what like an inverted bell-jar or cone with more or less pronounced apox, it is

1f1p long by 1694 wide anteriorly, ratio of width to length = 1-2: 1-0, with the

pair of Iyrilorm pores in the antcro-lateral angles 126, apart; latigynial shields

Jong and strap-like. widening just beyond the middle to the anterior end; meso-

gynial shield small and reduced; ventral shield as in the generic diagnosis, tts

Posterior margin transverse, straight and 400, wide, furnished with many minute

setae and pores; anal shield triangular 400, wide by 14, long, ratio of width

to length = 2°86: 1-0.

Gnathosoma as in generic diagnosis.

Legs—I 440y long, IL 480n, LU 510u, TV stout 812» (femur clongate expanl-

ing gradually to 164, wide at apex),

Male (from Smbil),—Of the same size and shape as the female.

Darsum as in female,

Venter—Jugular shield smaller and narrower than in the female and fitting

into a median depression of the anterior margin of the sternal shield, the setue

and pores are near the anterior margin, the setae 36« apart; sterno-ventral shield

as figured and in the genus, anterior margin 132 wide with a wide and fairly

deep excavation, the width across the arms between coxae Uf and IL 352”, and

between these and the untero-lateral corners it narrows tn 1034, it carries an-

teriorly oF the posterior of the genital orifice three pairs of minute setac and

two pairs of pores, the anterior two pairs of setae are in front of the orilice and

equidistant apart while the third pair is just posterior of the middle of the

orifice. the anterior pores are in the antero-luteral angics and the second anterior

of the Uvird pair of setae; the rest of the shield behind the orifice has a number

of pores and a few minute sctae; the genital orifice is larze 75 long by 103.

wide and is placed in a line between cpxac I and IM; the anal shield is ay in

the female, 408). wide by 139. Jong.

Fedeizzia sellnicki sp. nov.

Text fiz. 3 A-t

Types—Holotype female and allotype male from a Passalid beetle from Mt.

Lamington, Queensland, 1946 (cull, 7}, represented by three slides of dissec-

tions of each sex made by Dr. M. Sellnick and now in the South Austrslian

Museum.

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZUDAE 19

Other Material—Thrce females from a Passalid from Mt. Glorious, Queens-

land, 6th February, 1951 (coll. E. H. Derrick); two females and two males

from a Passalid from Dalby, Queensland, 28th February, 1925 (coll. H. Geary),

Description—Female holotype—Of the same general facies and size as in

Brosipes Canest. Length of idiosoma 1195,, width 928,, ratio length to width

= 1:28: 1-0.

SS af — s “See, ° . | A t X/

, = si a een “

L f . fs = a. eS we fo he We

fC a ; ‘ rf ¥ | te eal

= 5 - om \¢ i Py

' a x | SS

XS \ } ah we . a. Ny, tha le

ms, ' i Te eee etd ( Ny

‘PA A ae J ; 3

Fig, 2.—Fedrizzta sellnicki sp. nov., A-IT Female; A, ventral view; B, tritosternum, jugular,

sternal, stermogynial and latigynial shields enlarged; C, chelicerae; D, gnathosoma and palp;

E, leg 1; F, leg IL; G, leg M1; H, leg IV; 1, Male tritosternum, jugular and sternal shields,

Dorsum—Shield entire, covering the whole of the dorsum and underlapping

venter as in other species.

Venter—Base of tritosternum slightly longer than wide; jugular shicld as

figured 150» wide and 47, long (deep) with rounded antero-lateral corners,

a0 H. WOMERSLEY

anterior margin straight except for a median depression, with one pair of setac

ca. 30x long curved backwards and 6], apart and with one pair of lyriform

pores 75. apart and slightly nearer the posteriur than the anterior margin;

sternal shield with the anterior margin transverse and 122, wide, sides con-

touring the edges of coxae II and continuing between coxae IT and Il to a

maximum width of 366, between the ends of the postero-lateral arms, narrowest

just behind anterior margin 94, posterior margin lightly convex medially

for a width of 1694, then curving posteriorly for a width of 47 on each side

before running obliquely forwards to the tips of the postero-lateral arms of the

shield, shield with threc pairs of minute setae and one pair of lyriform pores,

the anterior pair uf setae im line with the narrowest part in the mid-line of coxae

Il and 65, apart, the other two pairs form a transverse row along the posterior

margin with the median pair 42 apart and 35, from the laterals, the single

pair of pores posterior of the anterior pair uf setae; the sternogynial shield_is

bell-jar shaped with the anterior margin wider than the length, 164 by 117,

ratio width to length = 1-4: 1-0, with a pair of lyriform pores in the antero-

lateral angles; latigynial shields slender and strap-like; mesogynial shield re-

duced: ventral shield as in the generic diagnosis, its posterior margin transverse

and 460, wide, with a few pores and at least one pair of setae apically; anal

shield triangular 450, wide 185 long, ratio width to length = 243: 1-0,

with a few pores and minute setae posteriorly besides the pair of longer paranal

setae.

Gnathosoma as in generic diagnosis.

Legs—Similar to grossipes Canest., 1 650, long, U 545p, IT 508., IV 870.

(femur long and gradually expanding to 174, wide at apex).

Male allotype om Imbil), Of the same general facies and size as in the

female.

Doersum as in the female.

Venter—Juguhir shield smaller and narrower than in female LU3y by 42

and fitting into the excavated anterior margin of the sternal shield, the single

pair of recurved setae are on the anterior margin and 51, apart, the single pair

of pores are more posterior and 56, apart; sterno-ventral shield as figured and

as in the genus, anterior margin 155.4, narrowest between midline of coxae

II 103, and widest across the postero-lateral arms 366y, anterior of the genital

orifice it carries a pair of minute setae in the antero-lateral angles 126 apart

and another 56, apart a little way in front of the orifice and about in line with

the middle of coxac I, and a third pair in line with the posterior edge of the

orifice und 1644 apart, a pair of peres lie about LQ in front of the second pair

af setae and the same width apart and a second pair of pores lie 10, behind

the third pair of setae and 188, apart, the rest of the shield posterior of the

genital orifice carries a number of fairly large pores and many minute setae,

the genital orifice is large 108, wide by 85» long and is situated in a line between

coxae IE and TNT; the anal shield is triangular as in the female and of the same

dimensions.

Gnathoasoma and Legs as iu female.

Fedrizzia carabi sp, nov,

Text fig. 3 A-I

Typés—Holotype female, one paratype female. allotype male and one paratype

$.,

male from a Carabid beetle from under a log at Aiyura, New Guinea, at 5,000

July, 1954 (Coll, H-W.).

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZILDAE al

Deseription—Female holotype—Of the same vencral facies of other species of

oe genus; rather small, length of idiosoma 835, width 638, ratio length to

width = 1-31: 1-0.

Dorsum—Shield entire covering the whole body and under-lapping ven-

trally as in other species.

Fig. 3—ledrizzia carabi sp. noy. A-H Female; A, venter; B, tritosternum, jugular, sternal,

sternogynial and latigynial shields enlarged; C, mandible and chelicerae; D, palp; E, leg I;

F, leg WW; G, leg Il]; H, leg IV; 1, Male, tritosternum, jugular and sternal shields,

Venter—Tritosternum with rather broad conical base and paired ciliated

laciniae; jugular shields coalesced medially to form a single transverse crown-

like shield, 105, wide anteriorly but narrower posteriorly where it contours the

antcrior margin of the sternal shield, 38» long, with one pair of curved fine

a2 H. WOMERSLEY

setae in anterior margin and 52, apart, and one pair of lyriform pores more

posterior: sternal shield coalesced with the endopodal shields of coxae LU, an-

terior iurgin almost straight 108, wide, sides curving inwards slightly in mid-

line of cexae IL to 894 wide and then outwardly around coxae II to a width of

282, between coxac I and IU, length of shield 103,, posterior margin straight

tor 127, then with a posterior projection 24, wide on each side and thereafter

rimning obliquely forward to the apices of the postero-lateral arms between

coxae il and III, with three pairs of setae and two pairs of pores, the anterior

pair of setae in line with middle of coxac I, the others in a transverse row

near the posterior margin, the inner pair 52, apart, and 19, from the laterals;

sternogynial shield shaped like an inverted hell-jar with straight anterior margin

}41p. and 141, long, ratio width to length = 1-0: 1:0, with one pair of pores

in the antero-lateral angles; latigynial shiclds long and strap-like opatnnrins the

sides of the sternogynial shield and partly hidden under the inner edges of the

anterior arms of the ventral shield, mesogynial shield very much reduced;

ventral shield large, occupying most of the venter as in other species, the trans-

verse posterior margin 330, wide, externally of the peritreme between coxse

MJ and I there is a duct or gland opening with the outer edge bow-shape and

well sclerotised; the anal shield is triangular with transverse anterior margin

330, wide, and the length 150, ratio width to length = 2-2: 1:0.

Giuthosoma, chelicerae and palpi as in other species.

Legs=I 410, long, U-IV stout and thick but not strikingly so as in grossipes,

Il 410, long, LU 376p, TV 4504, with the femur S98, across at apex.

Male allotype—OF the same general facies as the female: length of idiosoma

§35., width 638 pn.

Dorsum as in female.

Venter—Generally as in other species of the genus. Jugular shield separated

from sternal as figured 98, wide by 24) long, with one pair of setae on anterior

margin 70u apart, and one pair of pores; sterna-yentral shield anteriorly slightly

wider 122, than the jugular shield with lightly concave anterior margin, it mar-

rows to 103, between coxae HW and then expands to 282u across the arms between

coxae I and If; the genital orifice is fairly large TO». wide by 56 long, and

hes between coxae IT and TH; the anal shield is large, triangular with anterior

marcin 350, wide and its length 150p.

Legs—As in the female, I1-1V stout and thick, but 1Y not so markedly su as

in groxsines and sellnicki.

Rentrks—TVhis species is one of the smaller of the genus so far known and can

he separated as in the key to the specius.

The specimens are in the collections of the South Australian Museum.

Fedrizzia derricki sp, nov,

Text fig. 4 A-T

Types—The holotype female, allotype male and two paratype males from

Atherton, Queensland. The holotype and allotype were collected from Passalids,

April, 1945 (D. L. Collis) and the two paratype males from a Megisthantey sp.

(Acarina), 28th March, 1945 (D. L. Collis).

Description—Female holotype—A. medium sized species with Hye general facies

eg Fens: Length of idiosoma 928n, width 660.e, ratio of Tenth to width =

1-4: 1-0),

Dorsum—As in other species with the shield entire and under-lapping the

yenter; with few if any minute setae.

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZNDAT 23

Venter—Lritosternum with rather broad basal piece and paired ciliated

laciniae; jugular shields coalesced medially to form a single transverse shield

117». wide iy 32 long, with the anterior margin medially excavate to fit the

posterior margin of the tritostcernum, posterior margin straight and shorter than

Fig. 4.—Fedriazia derricki sp. nov. A-H Female: A, venter; B, tritostermum, jugular, sternal,

sternogynial and latigynial shields enlarged; C, mandible and chelicerae; D, palp; E, lex I;

F, leg I: G, leg U1, H, leg IV; J, Male, tritosternum, jugular and sternal shields.

anterior as figured, with a pair of setac 504 apart on anterior margin, and a

pair of lyriform pores; sternal shield coalesced with the endopodal shields of

coxae II, anterior margin straight and 90, wide, the lateral margins narrow

between coxae IT to $2y and then curve around. coxae II to a width across the

postero-lateral arms between coxae Il and III of 258,, the length of the shield

24 H. WOMERSLEY

is 77, the posterior margin is straight medially for about 1544, when it {s pro-

duced slightly posteriorly for a width af ca. 36% on each side where it runs

forward obliquely to the tips of the pestera-lateral arms, it carries tree pairs

of setae and ? two pairs uf pores (the anterior pair cannot be seen), the anterior

setae (sternal setae 11) are minute, the other two pairs longer and in a trans-

verse ruw near the posterior margin, the medial pair 274 upart and separated

from the laterals by 30.; the sternogynial shield is broadly bell-shaped as

figured, 154», wide anteriorly and 126. Jong, ratio of width to length = 1:22: 1-0,

it is lightly reticulate and carries one pair of lyriferm pores in the antero-lateral

angles; the latizynial shields are strap-like and contour the lateral margins of

the ptemnidgynial shield, being partially hidden under the inner margins of the

anterior inter-coxal arms af the ventral shield; the mesogynial shield is yery

small as figured: ventral shield large, occupying most of the ventral surface,

coalesced with other shiclds as in the genus, and with a straight transverse

posterior border 260, with a number of pores; anal shield triangular 260, wide

anteriorly by 127, Jong (deep), ratio width to length = 2-04: 1-0; the peri-

tremal shield is coalesced with the exopodal shields and only separated from

outer extension of the ventral shicld by a fine line, the stigmata lie between

coxne THT and IV and the peritreme runs forward to cyuxae 1; on the outer exten-

sions oF the ventral shield, fairly close to the peritreme in region of coxae IT is

the atrium of a large gland of which the outer edge is well chitinised and lipike,

Guathosame arising within the camcrostome formed by the anterior under-

lap wf the dorsal shield; hypostome, palpi and cheliccrae as in other species.

fegs—As in other species, | 520» long, antennaeform, angulate, with broad

base, without caruncle or cliws; M1-LV thick and. stout but not noticeably so as

in gfossipes, with short pretarsus, caruncle, and claws, IL 440,, TL 440., 1V

436 long, I-IV 6-seemonted,

Male allotype—General facies antl size as in female,

Dersum as in female.

Venter—Trilosternur as in femule; jugular shicld narrower than the anterior

width of sternal, 94n wide by 37, long with the posteriur border shorter than

anterior, fitting into the evenly excavate anterior margin of sternal, with a

pair of setae 40, long and 49, apart anteriorly und a pair of lyriform pores

posteriorly; anterjoy margin of sterno-ventral shield evenly concave 117 wide,

shield caaloseed with endopodal and ventral shields, although a fine line run-

ning fomwvard from coxae IV to almost coxae 11 and extending anteriorly ta a

short distance from the genital orifice indicates fusion of the ventral shield with

the sternal cum endopodal shields of coxac LH and TU, the posterior margin of

the ventral shivld is straight, transverse and 260« wide: the anal shicld is 280,

wide by 127, long; genital orifice between coxae I and TH 70. wide by Bly

loug and 474 from anterior margin.

Gnathosoma as in female.

Legs as in female.

Remarks—t am indebted to Dr. Sellnick for indicating the separation of this

species from vrossipes and the types are each represented in the Suuth Aus-

tralian collection by four slides of dissections made by him. The two para-

type males are entire mounts. The species is dedicated to Dr. EF, H, Derrick

from whom | have received over the years much interesting material.

Fedrizzia oudemansi sp, nov.

Text fix. 5 A-I

Types—Holotype female and allotype male and a paratype of each sex from

Mastochilus dilatus Dalm. from under a eucalyptus log at Glen Innes, New South

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZIIDAE 23

Wales (coll. G. F. Bornemissza, 9/10/56). One male from Mastochilus dilatus

Dalm. from Washpool Crk. near Tenterfield, N.S.W., 8/10/56 (G.F.B.).

Description—Female holotype—A rather small species with the general facies

as in other specics of the genus. Length of idiosoma 777, width 580x, ratio of

length to width = 1-34: 1-0,

Fig. 5.—Fedrizzia oudemansi sp. nuy, A-H Female: A, ventral view; B, tritusternum, jugular,

sternal, sternogynial and latigynial shields enlarged; C, mandible and. chelicerae; D, gnatho-

soma and palp; E, lew I; F, leg U1; G, lew 11; H, leg IV; I, Male tritosteruuin, jugular and

sternal shields.

Dorsum-—Shield entire, covering the whole of the dorsum and under-lapping

‘venter as in other species.

Venter—Base of tritosternum about as wide as long, with a pair of ciliated

laciniae; jugular shield as figured, 94 wide by 324 long (deep), crown-shaped,

anterior margin convex but with a median concavity for the base of the trito-

sternum, with one pair of long, 47, curved setae in the anterior margin and

26 H. WOMERSLEY

42, apart, with one pair of lyriform pores 37~ apart; stemal shield with the

anivrioy margin transverse and 84y, wide, sides contouruyg the edges of coxae

II and continuing between coxue Il and Lil ta a maximum width of 2204 be

tween the ends of the postero-lateral arms, narrowest just behind anterior margin

to 75, posterior margin straight medially for a length of 141, then extending

posteriorly for 23 on each side before running obliquely and sharply forwards

ty the tips of the posterolateral arms, shield with three pairs of setae and a

pait «iF lyritorm pores; the anterior pair of setae are minute in the antero-lateral

angles and 45y apurt, the second and third pairs of setae are lone to 194 and

fui a transverse posterior row with the medians 6]» apart and 21» from the

laterals, the pores are midway between the anterior and median posterior setae;

sternogynial shield wider than long 1504 by 1417p, ratio of width to length =

1-28: 1:0, with lightly convex but converging sides, anteriorly the margin is

transverse forming outwardly produced angles with the lateral margins, the

shield earries one pair of lyriform pores. in the antero-lateral angles and Mu,

apatt; Jatigynial shields slender and strap-like contouring the sternogynial shield

and partly hidden under the inner edges of the ventral shield; mesogynial shield

reduced: ventral shield as in the generic diagnosis, its posterior margin 400,

wide and straight, with a few pores and minute setae; anal shield triangular with

anterior margin 3522 wide and the length 1764, with a pair of paranal setae

ak long and with a few pores and minute setae, ratio of width to length =

B2s 10.

Cruthosoma as. in gevieric diagnosis.

Legs—Similar in general ta other species of the genus; 1 390u long, antennae-

form and somewhat angulate, IT and [fl 348n, TV 3704, LV with femur not much

longer than wide, but widening gradually to apex without any strong basal spine.

Male allotype—Of the same general facies as the female, Length of idiosoma

720, width 534),

Dorstim as in fernale,

Venter Jaguar shield smaller and narrower than in female, 70% wide by

25, long with a single pair of setac anteriorly 30, long and 52. apart, with one

pair of lyriform pores 50. apart; sternal, genital-ventral shields cvalesced to

form the sterno-ventral shield as figured und as in the genus, antovior margin

88. wide, narrowing between coxae II to 74y, and widest across the postero-

lateral arms between coxae IL and coxae LI to 206., the anterior setae lie in

the antero-lateral angles 50, apart, the second pair of setae lie just in front of

the genital orifice and are 52. apart, the pores lie 14 in frant of the secund

pair of setae, other setae and pores as far as can be seen as fizured, the genital

orlfice lies between coxae IL and III, it is 382 long by 47p wide, the anal shield

is shaped as in the female with a transverse anterior margin 385,, and its length

17d, the pair of long paranal sctae 33u.

Cnathosoma as in female.

Legs—As in female, 1 352, long, If and HL 325.2, IV 348p,

Fedrizzia bornemisszai sp, nov,

‘Veat fig, 6 A-T

Types—Holotype female, allotype male and paratype of cach sex from Mas-

tochilus diletus Dalm. from under a eucalyptus lug at Hampton, Queensland,

8/11/56 (coll. G, F, Bornemissza).

Description—Femele holotype—A fairly large species with the general facies

as in other species of the genus. Length of idiosoma 928,, width 730p, ratio

length to width = 1-27: 1-0.

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZIIDAE 27

Dorsum—Shield entire covering the whole dorsum and wnder-lapping on

to the venter, with many very fine short setae and pores, and with fine roughly

transverse widely spaced lines, otherwise smooth,

Venter—Tritosternum with short base about as wide as long, and a pair of

long ciliated laciniae; jugular shield wider than anterior width of sternal shield,

Fig. 6.—Fedrizzia bornemisszai sp. noy. A-H Female; A, ventral view; B, tritosternum,

jugular, sternal, sternogynial and Iatigynial shields enlarged; C, mandible and cheliccrac;

D, pulp; E, leg I; F, leg 11; G, leg HI; Ht Fae I, Male tritosternum, jugular and sternal

ields,

somewhat crown-shaped, width 130,, length (depth) 38, with one pair of

setae behind the anterior margin 55, apart and 25, long, a pair of lyriform

pores 55» apart, posterior margin straight and 110, wide; sternal shield as

gured, anterior margin 110y lightly concave for whole length, sides contouring

coxae IT with the shield narrowest in mid-line of coxae II to 94, and widest

to 242u between the points of the postero-lateral arms between coxae {I and

Ill, with three pairs of setae and one pair of pores, the anterior pair of setae

25 H. WOMERSLEY

ure minute and placed some distance, 251, back from the middle of the anterior

margin und 69» apart, the other two pairs of setae are also shurt and form a

transverse row close to the posterior margin, of these the medians are 50), #part

and 27, from the laterals, the pores are situated 14a behind the anterior setae

and a similar distunce apart; the sternogynial shield as figured, wider than

long, 1434 by 116, ratio width ta length = 1:23: 1-0; the surface is ornatnented

with a strong reticulation, the anterior margin is straight and the antero-lateral

corners project shortly laterally, the sides are convex as figured, the pores are

in the antero-lateral angles and 130) apart; the latigynial shields are narrow and

strap-like and contour the lateral margins of the sternogynial shield being partly

hidden under the inner edge of the portious of the ventral shield lying between

the coxue and the sternogynial shield; mesogynial shield small and reduced;

yentral shield as in other species of the genus and with the surface ornamented

with a fine grid of transverse lines cut by short longitudinal Jines, its posterior

margin aligns the anterior margin of the unal shield and is 376, long, it is also

furnished with 2 number of fairly large pores and some very minnte setae; the

anal shield is triangular, 376. wide anteriorly and 176, long, ratio width to

length = 2-21 < 1-0, with the surface, as in the ventral shield, the long paranal

setae are 25u long.

Gnathosoma as in the generic diagnosis,

Legs—Generally as in other species, | antennaeform and 533, long, I-IV

stout, Il 464u, TL 487,, 1V 730u, femur of leg IV truncheon-like, 258, long and

162, wide at apex.

Male allotype—Of the same general facies as the female. Length of idiosoma

O04, width 730pz.

Doarsum as in female.

Venter—Jugular shield crown-shaped, smaller than in female, 94y wide

by 33p long (deep), with the setae ca, 23, long and 33, apart. with one pair

uf Jyriform pores; sternal, genital and ventral shields coalesced to form the

sterno-ventral shield as figured and as in the genus, anterior margin 131m, the

sides contouring coxae [I-[V with the widest sternal portion between coxae IL

and {Hf and 305y between the postero-lateral arms; genital orifice large, situated

between coxae I, Gla wide hy 53p Jong; posterior margin aligned with anterior

margin of anal shield and 376 wide, surface of shield with some large pures,

minute setae and with a fine grid or mesh of transverse striations with short

lonigstuctnal cross lines; anal shield triangular, 376. wide and 126. long as

in temale.

Gnathasoma as in other species,

Legs as in female, 1 520 long, Li 464y, LL 4874, IV 696p.

Remurks—As in the key this species belongs to the grossipes, sellnicki, derricki

group in having the mesh or grid-like surface of the ventral shields in both

sexes. The other two known species, carabi and endemansi, have smooth nan-

ummamental ventral shields.

Fedrizzia strandi (Oudemans, 1927)

Torenensia. strandi Ouds,, 1927. Ent. Ber, 7 (156), p. 227; LO26, Piven BoruariieAcut

in Treubia, 7, Suppl. 2, pp. 60-66, Avs, GY-81.

The genus Toxopeusia with sirandi as type has generally been regarded by

asaralogists as synonymous with Fedrizzia Canestrini with grossipes Cancest,

from Queensland as the type. That the two genera are synonymous is un-

doubted but frum the specific features of the species of Fedrizziidae as brought

out in the present study strandi wenld appear to be a validly different species

from the Australian forms.

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZILDAE ao

Toxepeusia strandi was very fully described and figured hy Oudemans in

1928 trom two femules from “Station 12, Burn, 4-7 Feb., 1922; eoll. L. J. Toxo-

eus'; the habitat was given with a query. A male specimen from “Wai Eno

is Wai Temun, 700-1000m., 3rd Noy., 1922" is described as the male of the

same species,

For the female the only dimensions given are length of idiosoina 857p,

width 630, (ratio of length to width = 1-36:1-0). interpolating from his

figures, however, the anal shield is 408, wide by 150 long. or a ratio of width

to length of 2-72: 1-0; the sternogynial shield is wider anteriorly than long,

approximately 163. by 115, or ratio width to length of 1-42: 1-0.

Thus in dimensions strand is a broader species than gressipes with an anal

shield three times as wide as long as compared with an anal shield only slightly

more than twice as wide as long in grossipes. Other features shown in his de-

seription and figures of strandi in which this species differs from any vf those

found in Australia and New Guinea can be mentioned, Firstly he speaks of the

pair of vertical setae as being wide apart and show them as being wider apart

than in any other species. Behind these setae he describes and figures an

eye-like organ on the dorsal surface; no such organ which is probably a pore

has been observed in other species, On the ventral surface the pair of setae

on the jugular shield (tetartosternum) are shown as in the antero-lateral angles,

and not near to or Nanking the base of the tritosterpum. The tritesternum is

stated to have no base, but the drawings, Figs. 70 and 75, show this as is usual

in species of this genus, and over-lapped partially by the jugular shield.

On the above considerations ax well as from geographical locatinn, the

females. of strandé Ouds, must be regarded as a yalid species, not synonymous

with grossipes Canestrimi, 1884,

Whether the male described by Oudemuns as the same species is so, seems

somewhat uncertain. His specimen was much smaller, idiasoma 730, long by

590 wide, or a ratio of 1-237; 1-0, than the females; the anal shield with a

ratio of width to length of 2-7: 1-0. In the absence of definite hosts, and in

the fact that the male and females were from different localities, the

size suggests possibility that the male may not be conspecific with the female.

Kev to the species of Fedriszia Canest., 1884, s, str.

(largely based on females)

1. Larger species with length of idiosoma greater than 1000, Q

Smaller species, length of idinsuma loss than 1000p. 3

z, Sternogynial shield with the lightly convex sides gradually converg-

ing to the apex, 169, wide anteriorly by 141, long (ratio width to

length = 1-2:1-+0); anal shield 400, wide by 140, long (ratio width

to length = 2°86:13-0); femur of leg IV 2-23 times as long as it is

wide at apex. Length of idivsoma 11@0,, width 870e (ratio length to

width = 1:33: 1-0). Ventral shield with mesh or grid.

F. sp. cf. grassipes Canest.. 1584,

Sternogynial shield with sides medially almost straight and parallel

before curving inwards to the apex, wider anteriorly than long 164,

by 117 (ratio width to length = 1-4: 1-0): anal shield 450, wide by

185, lung (ratio width to longth = 2-43: 1-0); femur of leg IV 2-4

times as long as wide at apex, Length of idiosoma 1195p, width 928,

(ratio length to width = 1-25: 1-0). Ventral shield with mesh or grid,

F, sellnicki sp. nov,

H. WOMERSLEY

Anal shield more than 300, wide anteriorly. 4

Anal shield small, 260» wide by 127p long (ratio of width to length

= 2-04;1-0); sternogynial shield of nearly uniform width for first

half of its length, then sides curving in to apex, 154, wide anteriorly

and 126p long (ratio width to length = 1-22; 1-0); femur of leg IV

twice as long as it is wide at apex. Length of idiosoma 928», width

660 Geen length to width = 1-4:1-0). Ventral shields with mesh

or grid.

F. derricki sp, nov.

Anal shield less than 3604 wide, with ratio of width to length less

than 2-5: 1-0. 5

Anal shield greater than 380, wide. 6

Ventral shields with fine mesh or grid. Anal shield 324, wide by

135.4 long, ratio width to length = 2-4; 1-0; sternogynial shield wider

anteriorly than Iong, 1604 by 124y, ratio width to length = 1-3: L-0;

femur of leg LV twice as Jong as wide at apex. Length of idiosoma

918», width 612,, ratio of length to width = 1-5: 1-0.

F, zrossipes Canest., 1854.

Ventral shields smooth, without mesh or grid. Anal shield 330,

wide and 150, long, ratio of width to length = 2-2; 1-0; sternogynial

shield as wide anteriorly as it is long, 141p; femur of leg IV chovtar

and not so massive, only one fourth as long aguin us it is wide at apex. .

Length of idiosoma 8353p, width 638,, ratio length to width = 1-31 ; 1-0.

F. carabi sp. nov.

Ventral shields without grid or mesh. Anal shield 3824 wide by

176 Jong, ratio -width to length = 2-2: 1-0; sternogynial shield wider

anteriorly than long 150. by 117p, ratio width to length = 1-28; 1:0;

fernur of leg IV not much thicker than ITI, about 1-3 times as long as

wide at apex. Length of idiosoma 777p, width 580u, ratio length to

width = 1-34: 1-0.

F, oudemansi. sp. nov,

Ventral shields with mesh or grid. 7

A more broadly rounded species, length of idiosoma 928,, width

730, ratio of length to width = 1:27: 1-0. Sternal setae [I-IV very

minute. Anal shield 406. wide by 139, long, ratio width to length =

2-9:1-0; stermmogynial sbield reticulate wider anteriorly than long,

143, by 116p, ratio width to length = 1-23: 1-0, sides almost parallel

medially before curving to the apex; leg IV massive as in grossipes,

femur more than twice as long as wide at apex,

F. bornemisszai sp. nov,

A less broadly rounded species, length of idiosoma 857, width

630 ratio of length to width = 1-36: 1-0. Sternal setae longer. Anal

shield 408. wide by 150, long, ratio of width to length = 2°72; 1-0;

sternogynial shield ? smooth, wider anteriorly than Jong ca. 163, by

1J5p, ratio 1-42: 1-0, with gradually converging sides; leg TV not so

massive, femur ca. 1-6 times as long as wide at apex.

F, strandi Ouds., 1927.

Genus Ntorrprizzia nov,

The species. of this genus while having the general facies of the family

differ from both other genera Fedrizzia Canestrini s. str. and Parafedrizzia gen.

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDREZZLIDAE al

nav, in that a free jugular shield is absent in the male, In that sex in frant of

the anterior margin of the sternal shield there is a pair of stout antcriorly

directed provesses vf unknown function which overlie the bulbous base of the

tritosternum. In both sexes the two long setae on the second segment of the

palpi ure only shortly ciliated or barbed: The femora of legs IIT antl FV are

shurt and wide with a prominent thick curved spine at the posterior corners in

both males ind females, The anal shield is present as in Fedrizzia, The body

form may be somewhat rounded with curved sides ac more elongate with the

sides somewhat straightcr.

Type Neofedrizzia gayt sp. nov.

Neofedrizzia gayi sp. nay,

Text fir. 7 A-K

Types—Ilolotype female, allotype male, two paratype females and one para-

type male from a Passiic buetle tn rotten log frum Imbil, Queensland, 11th

Sept., 1946 (F. J. Gay). Three females and five males also from a Passalid at

Yurraman, Queensland, 29th Auy., 1935 (A.R.P.).

Deseription—Holotype female—A moderately large heavily chitinisedl species

with the general facies of Fedriazia s. str., broadly oval with rounded sides.

Length of tdiosoma 12104, width 850p,

Dorsum—Shield covering all the dorsum and under-lapping ventrally and

anteriorly to form the anterior margin of the camivrostome, marginally it is con-

fluent with or coalesced with the outer edge of the large ventral shield as far

hack as the posterior edge of coxae 1V then under-lapping the venter in a wide

strip contouring and separated by a suture from the posterior part of the ventral

and from the anal shield: dorsally a more hyaline sickle-shaped part is move

or less demarcated by a line from the rest and overlaps the gnathosuma; this

portion carries only the pair of vertical setae 47 long and 94% apart, but the

rest of the dorsal shield fs furnished with numerous pores but no perceptible

setae.

Venter—Tritosternum as figured with an elongate basal part 70» lon,

und with paired ciliated laciniae to 140, long; jugular shields coalesce

medially to form a single crown-shaped shield 146. wide andl 66» long (deep)

with the posterior margin 108. wide, with one pair of recurved setae on anterior

margin flanking base of tvitosternum 38» apart and ca, 23. long, with one pair

of lyriform pores subposteriorly; sternal shield coalesced with the endopodal

shields of coxae 1, 108, wide anteriorly, narrowing to 984 in midline of coxae

II then contouring coxac IT to a width of 3204 across the postero-lateral arms

between coxae I] and WIL, the shield is 146. long (deep), the posterior margin

is only lightly coneave for its whole width of 256. before running obliquely

forwards to the tip of the arms, with three pairs of setae and ? one pair of

pores. the anterior pair of setae (sternal setae TL) are more or less in the antero-

lateral angles and in trout of the pores which are rather wider apart, the other

two pairs of setae (sternal setac DL and LV) lie in a transverse row near the

posterior margin the medians being 654 upart und 19. from the laterals, all

three pairs of setae are short, ca, Lly, long; sternogynial shield longer than wide,

146. by 126 anteriorly with lightly convex converging sides and rounded apex,

with one pair of lyriform pares near the antero-lateral corners, in line with the

pores the shield is somewhat wider than the anterior maryin; lutigynial shields

strap-like contouring the sides of the sternogynial and largely lying beneath the

faner edges of the ventral shield (see Tig, 7 Ib and J): mesogynial shield re-

duced and covered by apex of sternogynial shield; ventral shiek! large occupy-

32 H, WOMERSLEY

ing most of the ventral surface, marginally confluent or coalesced with the dorsal

shield from the apex backwards to the region of voxae IV where it curves in-

wards to the antero-lateral corners of the anal shield and is contoured by that

part of the under-lapping dorsal shield, between the antero-lateral corners of

the anal shield it has a straight transverse margin separated by a suture from

the transverse margin of the anal shield, antero-laterally it is coalesced with

Fig, 7—Neofedrizzia gayi g. et sp. nov. A-H, J-K, Female: A, ventral view; B, tritastarnam,

jugular, sternal, sternogynisl and Jatigynial shields enlarged; C, chelicerav; D, palp; E_ leg

1; F, leg UI; G, leg III; A, leg IV; J, latigynial and mesogynial shields; K, atrimn of duct

between coxae IL and 1; I, Male tritosternum, pre-sturnal appendages and sternal shield.

peritremal and exopodal shields of coxae IL-IV, medially it extends. forwards

as two arms as far as posterior margin of the sternal shield and between the

sternogynial shield and the coxae on each side, with the endopodal shields of

which it is coalesced, the posterior margin is 520 wide and it is furnished with

numerous pores and a few minute inconspicuous setae; from the posterior edge

of coxae IV a fine line runs obliquely backwards and outwards towards the

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDHIZZUDAT 33

bady edge which it does not reach, from coxae ILL another fine line runs back-

wards and then curves forwards but does not reach the body edge, in the ont-

side junction of coxae Uf and U1 is the atrium of a large duct the inner edges

of which are strongly sclerotised; the peritremal shield is coalesced with the

endopodal and ventral shields, with the stigmata lying between coxze LI and

IV and the peritreme running forward as figured to come 1; the anal shield

is large, triangular, 520. wide on the transverse anterior margin and 220, long

(deep) with anus in the posterior angle, it carries many pores and 2 pair

long paranal setae 70p.

Gnathosoma—Much as in species of Fedrizzia; chclicerac as figured, fixed

digit with two strung and one smaller tooth, movable digit with a strong sub-

basal tooth and subapically with minute denticles, with many hyaline processes

tw OF which are blade-like and serrate, the others filamentous; palpi as figured,

trochanter large and broad with an inncr lobe anteriorly and two long harhed

selae, xpecialised scta on tarsus two-tined; the mouth parts together with leg I

avise within the camerostome, which in the lateral angles has a triangular

sclerotised plate (the “axillar” plate of Sellnick in Tit.).

Legs—All shorter than the body and 6-segmented, 1 slender and antennae-

form, strongly angled, tarsus without caruncle or claws, 552, long; IJ-IV shorter

and stout, tarsi with caruncle and paired claws, LL 508 long, TIL 508,

IV 557p, the femora of II-[V are shart and hroad, with distinct hyaline lamellae,

un If and IV the outer posterior angle of the femora carries a strong curved

posteriorly directed spime characteristic of the genus,

Allotype male—Ot the same sive and general facies us in the female,

Dormtm as in female.

Venter—Tritosternum with a large bulbous basal part, 840 long by S44 wide,

and a pair of cilfated Iaciniae 140, long; no jugular shield; in front of the deeply

caneave anterior margin of the sternal shield and lying above the base of the

tritostermim fg a pair of free anteriorly directed processes curved inwardly to

ome another and upically bilobed, these processes of unknown function are 4p

Jong and 33, wide as figured: the rest of the ventral shields except the anal are

coalesced into a single shield the anterior sternal margin of which is 150,

wide and deeply concave, sternal sctae I are long, 70x and 70» apart and lie

in the untero-lateral angles, sternal setae IL and Il are minute, IL 53» from I

and 334 apart, U0 6lje From ID and close t the genital orifice and 84u apart,

between the bases of setae 1 are a pair of round pores 33. apart and a second

pair of pores (lyriform) lie slightly posterior of setue TT and 61 apart, while a

third pair of pores also lyriform are about in ]Ine with setae If] and 145, apart;

the genital orifice is between coxae If and I, 94) wide by 47p long, and around

the posterior half on each side is a series of 8-9 pores; the anal shield is of the

site shape and dimensions as ii the female.

Ghathosoma and Legs as in female.

Neofedrizzia canestrinii sp, ny,

‘Text fg. S A-1

Types—Holotype female, allutype male. nine paratype females and four para-

type males fram a Passalid Aulacocyelus edentulus Mcl. from Hinchinbrook

Island, N, Queensland, 9th Sept, 1956 (G. F. Bornernissza),

Other muteriadi—1 male trom A, edentulus Mel., Hampton, Queensland, 3rd

October. 1956 (or -I.); 2 mules from ‘Tambourine, P date (A. M. Lea); 1 male

on Passalid, Atherton Tableland, Queensland, 28th March, 1945 (D. J. Coilis);

1 nale from A. edentulus, Wilson's Downfall near Tenterfield, New South Wales,

8th Oct,. 1956 (C.F.B,).

34 H. WOMERSLEY

Description—Holotype female—With the generic facies, but a rather small

roundish species, Length of idiosoma 812», width 638u.

Dorstum—Dorsal shield entire, covering the whole body and under-lapping

venter as in other species; it is smooth except for some fine longitudinal striae

circumferencially, and is furnished with many round small pores or the bases of

minute setae,

Fig. &8&—Neofedrizzia canestrinii sp. nov. A-H Female; A, ventral view; B, tritostermun,

jugular, sternal, sternogynial and Jatigynial shields enlarged; C, cheliccrae; D, gnathosoma

and palpi; E, leg I; F, Tew Il; G, leg 101; H, leg IV; I, Male tritosternum, pre-sternal processes

and sternal shield.

Venter—Tritosternum with elongate base 47 long and 25, wide, with paired

ciliated laciniae to ca. 110u long; jugular shield as figured, crown-shaped, 132.

wide by 47p long firsD) and the posterior margin 104» long, with one pair of

recurved setae flanking the base of the tritosternum, ca. 19 long and 30 apart,

with one pair of lyriform pores 11» in front of posterior margin and 36p apart;

sternal shield as figured, 104, wide anteriorly, the sides only narrowing slightly

from anterior angles, then coalescing with the endopodal shields. of coxae I

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GCUINEA PEDRTZZIIDAE SN)

contouring coxae IT and then running between coxae II and Ul to a maximum

width between apices of postero-lateral arms af 282,, pamelor margin straight

medially for 143, then sloping slightly Natkwards or 47» before numningg

obliquely forwards to the tips of the postero-luteral arms, with Ubree pairs of

setae all very short, the first pair (sternal setae IL) 164 hehind the anterior

margin and 44u apart, the second and third pairs of setue (sternal setae IT wud

IV) in a transverse row near the posterior margin, the medians 44, apart and

33, from the laterals, with one pair of lyriform pores 77» apart and 16. behind

sternal sctue IT, length (depth) of shield 66,; sternogynial shield as figured,

wider anteriorly than it is long, 124, by 99p, ratio of Jength to width = 1-0: 1-25,

with ruunded sides, which expand slightly behind anterior comers to a width of

137y; latigynial shields strap-like, contouring sides of sternogynial and some-

what hidden under inner edges of ventral shield as in other species; mes ial

shield reduced and obscured by the inner anterior margin of the ventral shield

and the bases of the latigynial shields; ventral shield large and covering most

ot the venter as in other species, its transverse posterior margin 400x, with a

number of round pores and minute setae as figured, the claviform processes are

present beneath the shield but inconspicuous: anal shield large trianvular, 400p.

wide by 9lp long (deep), ratio width to leneth = +-4: L-0, with many ronnd

pores and a few minule setae besides the paranal setae of 52 lenvth; the peri-

tremal shield and peritreme us in other species.

Gnalhosoma as in the type and other species of the yenus-

Legs all shorter than the body, I antennaeform, 4324 long, LW and ILL 400p,

IV 423q.

Allotype male—Facies, shape and dimensions as in the femate-

Dorsum as in female.

Venter—Tritosternum with bulbous basal part, 47» long and 47p wide with

subapical division, and paired ciliated laciniae ca. 110. long; pre-sternal pro-

cesses as figured, blunt and steutly horn-shaped curved inwards, each 27p long

by 16p thick medially, sterno-ventral shield as figurcd, anterior margin concave

umd 99. wide, genital orifice wider than long 604 by 55p, and situated bemyeen

coxae II and IIL, no pores marginally around the posterior half of the opening

but there is a slight bulge on each side in the mid-line; anal shicld of the same

shape and dimensions as in the female.

Gnathosoma and Legs us in the female,

Neofednizzia cynota sp. nny.

Text fig. 9 A-T

Types—Holotype female, allotype male, anc paratype female and two paratype

males from Mastuchitus dilatus Dalm. from Wison’s Downfall, near Tenterfield,

New South Wales, 8th Oct. 1958 (C.F. Bornemissza), Also 2 males and 1

female from same host from Washpool Crk., near Tenterfield, 8/10/56 (G.F.B.),

Deseription—Holotype female—Only u moderately rounded species, Length

of idinsoma 895,, width 638, ratio of length to width = 1-4: 1-0.

Dorsum—Shicld covering entire body wid under-lapping venter ay in other

species, with many small rounded pores and minute setae, surface smooth.

Venter—Tritosternum with clongate basal part 47» long by 23. wide, and

with paired ciliated laciniae to ca. 120u; jugular shield crawn-shaped as fi

113, wide by 49. long (deep), posterior margin 824, with a pair of recurved

setae On anterior margin flanking base of tritosternum 30, apart and 33, long,

with one pair of lyriform pores 11pm in Front of posterior margim and 38, apart;

sternal shield as figured, anterior margin 82, sides narrowing slightly just behind

36 Tl, WOMERSLEY

angles and then contouring coxae IL to run between coxae II and ILI to a maxi-

mum width of the postero-lateral arms of 247, posterior margin strate medially

for 110, and then sloping backwards slightly for 44 on each side before running

obliquely forwards to the tips of the postero-lateral arms, with three pairs of

setae and one pair of lyriform pores, the setae are all 20, long, the anterior

setae (sternal setae 11) are 19» behind the anterior margin and 44, apart;

Fig. 9—Neofedrizzia cynota sp. nov, A-H Female; A, ventral view; B, tritosternum, jugular,

sternal, sternogynial and latigynial shields enlarged: GC. chelicerae: D, palp; E, leg L F, leg

I; G, leg U1; H, Jeg IV; 1, Male tritosternum, pre-sternal processes and sternal shield,

sternal setae Ul and 1V form a transverse row near the posterior margin with

the medians 44, apart and 25, from the laterals, the pores are 60 apart and

22, behind setae Il; sternogynial shield as figured, only a little longer 118, than

wide anteriorly, its sides widen just in line with the pores to 124» and then con-

verge gradually in a rounded curve to the rounded apex, the pores are 96.

apart and lie 28, behind the anterior margin; the latigynial shields are strap-

like and contour the sides of the sternogynial shield as in other species; the

mesogynial shield is reduced and obscured; the ventral shield is as in other

species furnished with a number of round pores and a few minute setae, its

transverse posterior margin is 352, wide; the anal shield is triangular, 352,n

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZIIDAE 37

wide by 160, long (deep) giving a ratio of width to length of 2-2:1°0, the

paianal setae are 56, long.

Gnathoasoma as in other species.

Leys—All shorter than body, I antennaeform, 464, long, ULE 383,,

IV 406u.

Allotype tmale—Of the samme facies, size and dimensions as the female,

Dorsum as in female,

Venter—Tritostermum with a bulbous basa) part, 66» wide by 66p long, and

with paired ciliated laciniae ca. 120y long; pre-sternal processes short and stumpy

and apically truncate, 232 long by 23, wide, bent inwards; sterno-ventral shield

as in other species, anterior margin concave and 112. wide with blunt_antero-

lateral corners, genital orifice as figured lying between coxae IL, 55. long by

35» wide, with a short series of pores around the posterior margin as figured,

sternal setae I long 30, and situated in the antero-lateral angles of the shield,

anterior of these and behind bases of pre-sternal processes is a pair of small

lyriform pores; anal shield of the same shape and dimensions as in the female.

Gnathosome and Legs—As in female,

Remarks—Distinguished from other species as in the following key.

Neofedrizzia camini sp. nov.

‘Test fg. 10 A-K

Types—Holotype female. allotype male and one paratype of each sex from

Mastochilus dilatus Dalm. froin a rotten eucalypt Jog from Glen Innes, New

South Wales, 9th Oct., 1956 (G, BF. Borneniissze ).

Other material—1 male, Upper Williams River, N.S.W., Oct., 1926 (A. M.

Lea und E, W, Wilsow); 1 male in ? moss and lichen, Waratah, Tusmania (00

date): 1 male ona beetle, Mt. Clorious, Queensland, 6th Feb., 1951 (E. H.

Derrick).

Description—Holotype female--A rathor oval elangate species, of the generic

facies. Length of idiosoma 1160p, width 770p, ratio length to width = 1-5; 1-0.

Dorstum—Dorsal shield entire, covering the whule body and under-lapping

venter as on other species, Surface smooth with numerous small pores and

sume minute setae.

Venter—Tritosternum with elongate basal part 66. long by 33, wide and

a pair of ciliated laciniae ca. 120p long; jugular slield crown-shaped as figured,

150, wide by Gy deep, posterior margin 112, wide, with a pair of fine recurved

setae Hanking base of tritosternum 53, long and their bases 30p apart, with one

pair of lyriform pores 47» apart and 16, in front of posterior margin; sternal

shicld as figured, anterior margin 112y, sides contouring coxa¢e I and running

between coxae Ll and LL to form the postero-lateral arms with a width of 305p,

the posterior margin 258, is straight medially for 144, and laterally slopes

slightly backwards for 57). on each side before running obliqucly forwards ta

the tips of the posteru-lateral arms, with three pairs of setae and one pair of

lyriform pores, the setae are all finc and ca, 27% long, the first pair (sternal

setac IL) lic in the anterv-lateral angles 22, behind the anterior margin and

47 apart, the others form a Lransyerse row near the posterior margins with the

medians 60, apart and 30, from the laterals, the pores are 91 apart and 30,

behind setae El; sternogynial shicld as figured, slichtly longer than wide on

anterior margin 144, by 132, the sides expand to a width oF 151p in line with

the pores and then curve more ur less evenly to form a rounded shape, the

pores lie 41). behind the anterior margin and 110» apart; latigynial shields narrow

and strap-like contouring the sternogynial shield as in other species; the meso-

38 H. WOMERSLEY

gynial shield is reduced and obscured; the ventral shield is large and coalesced

with other shields as in other species, its transverse posterior margin is 510p

wide, the surface shows many small pores and some fine minute setae; the anal

shield is large and triangular, 5104 wide by 244» long (deep), giving a ratio

of width to length of 2-09: 1-0, the paranal setae are 40, long.

Fig. 10.—Neofedrizzia camini sp. nov. A-K, Female; A, ventral view; B, tritosternum,

jugular, sternal, sternogynial, lateral shields and claviform processes enlarged; C, tritostermum;

D, tectum; E, inandible and chclicerae; F, palp; G, lez 1; H, leg II; I, leg TIT; J, leg IV; K,

dorsxl shield; L, Male tritostermum, pre-sternal processes and sternal shield.

Gnathosoma—As in other species.

shege—All shorter than body, I antennaeform 590, long, IL and III 464p,

TV 520u.

Allotyne male—Of the same shape and dimensions as in the female.

Dorstum—As in female,

Venter—Tritosternum with bulbous basal part 704 long by 70u wide, and a

pair of ciliated laciniae ca. 120, long; pre-sternal processes short and stumpy

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZIDAL 39

curved inwards and with truncate apices, 424 long by 254 wide; sternn-ventral

shield as in other species, anterior margin concave 140. wide with blunt truncate

antero-lateral corners, genital orifice lying between coxae UI as figured 66.

long by 66, wide with a series of seven or eight pores around the posterior

half, sternal setae 1 38, long and situated in the antere-lateral angles of the

shield, other pores and small setae are present, some af which probably represent

sternal setae TL-IV and their respective pores; anal shield ot the same shape

and dimensions as in the Female.

Gnathosoma and Legs—As in the female.

Remarks—Distinguished from other species as in the tollowing key. The

species is named after Dr, J. II, Camin who has contributed much to the study

of the comparative morphology of the Mesostigmala.

Neofedrizzia gorivossiae sp, nov.

Text fig, 11 A-L

Types—Holotype female, allotype male and seven paratype females from Mas-

tochtlus dilatus Dalm. from rotting eucalypt log. Hampton, Queensland, Sth

November, 1956 (G, F. Bornemissza).

Description—Holotype female—A moderately large oval species widest in line

of coxae INC and then tapering somewhat belore becoming rounded pvsteriorl

from line of anterior margin of anal shield. Length of idiosotna 1020,., wid

696u; giving a ratio of length to width of 1:46; 1-0.

Dersum—Dorsal shicld covering all the body and under-lapping venter as

in other species, with many small round pores, anxl sume minute setae.

Venter—Tritosternum with elongate basal part, 32« long by 28, wide, with

a pair of ciliated laciniae to 140, long; jugular shield crown-shaped as figured

132u wide by 47» long (deep), posterior margin 19.1, with a pair of anterior

recurved setae ca. 37. long Hanking the base of the tritosternum and their bases

30x apart, and LO» in front of posterior margin; sternal shield as figured, an-

terior margin 99» wide, sides contouring coxae ILE and running between coxae

Ti and UT to form the untero-lateral corners of the posterc-lateral arms with a

maximum width of 275y, the posterior margin is straight medially for a width

of 124% then bends lightly backwards for Wy on each side before running

obliquely forwards to join the tips of the postero-lateral arms, with three pairs

of setae and one pair of lyrifurm pores, the anterior pair of setae (sternal setae

11) are ca. 25, long, 554 apart and lie 20, behind the anterior margin, the other

two pairs of setae (sternal setae ITl and 1V) form a posterior transverse row

with the medians 474 apart and 33, from the laterals, these sctae are alse ea.

254 long, the pores are 70, apart and 23, behind sternal setae II; sternogynial

shield as figured, antcrior margin 108,, length 131», the sides expand slightly

to a width of 131, in line of the pores to eurve and cunverge to a broadly

rounded apex. with one pair of lyriform pores 103, apart and 334 behind anterior

margin; latigynial shields strap-like and contouring sides of sternogynial shields

as in other species; nssoeyatal shield reduced and obscured; ventral shield

large, Occupying most of the venter and coalesced with all other shields exc

the anual, its posterior margin is transverse, 404» wide and separated from the

anal by a suture, it carries a number of pores and: a few minute setae; anal shield

large, triangular, 404, wide anteriorly and 202, long (deep) giving a ratio of

width to length of 20+ 1-0, it is furnished with a number of pores and some

fine minute setae, as well as a pair of paranal setae 56u long.

Gnathosoma—Ag in other specics.

40 H. WOMERSLEY

Legs—All shorter than body, I antennaeform, 5224 long, II and III 430p,

IV 464p.

Allotype male—Of the same shape and dimensions as in the female.

Dorsum—As in the female.

Venter—Tritosternum with bulbous base 85.2 wide and 70 long, with a

pair of ciliated laciniae 140» long; pre-sternal processes as figured, curved in-

“

Fig. Bie Waofeditelis Horivossiae sp. noy. A-K, Female: A, ventra)] view; B, tritosternum,

jugular, sternal, sternogynial and Jatigynial shields enlarged; C, tritosternum; D, tectum; EF,

mandible and chelicerac; F, palp; G, leg I; H, leg Il; I, leg II; J, leg IV: K, dorsal shield;

L, Male tritosternum, pre-sternal processes and sternal shield.

wards, 471 long by 23p. wide and with parallel sides and truncate apex; sterno-

ventral shield as in other species, anterior margin 136. wide, deeply and widely

excavated for the pre-sternal processes and base of tritosternum, sternal setae I in

antero-lateral angles and 47u long, antero-lateral angles of shield blunt, sternal

setac LL also moderately long ca. 23 and 52, apart and 33 behind setae I in

line with a pair of small lyriform pores 70, apart, 70, behind these is a pair of

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZITIDAF. al

larger lyriform pores 132, apart, otherwise 4 few round pores and several minute

setae, the genital orifice is 70x wide by 66), long and lies mainly hetween caxae

111, the posterior half is margined by a series of about ten pores. on each side;

the anal shield is as in the female.

Gnathosoma and Legs—As in the female.

Remarks—This species can be separated as in the key.

It is named in honour of Dr, Flora Gorirossi, joint author with Dr. Camin

vf their valuable contributions on the comparative morphology of the Meso-

stigmata.

Neofedrizzia tragardhi sp. nov.

‘Toxt fig. 12 A-K

Types—Hovlotype female, allotype maie, nine paratype females and five para-

type males fram Mastochilus dilatus Dalm. from a eucalyptus log, at Washpool

Creek, near Tenterfield, New South Wales, 8th Oct., 1956 (G. F. Bornemissza ).

Deseription—Holotype female—A large elongate oval species widest anteriorly

ut the middle and in line with coxae DT. Length of idivsoma 1369u, greatest

width 905, width across anterior margin of anal shield 744, ratio of length to

width = 1-51: 1:0,

Dersum—Shield covering entire body and uoder-liypping on to venter as in

other species, furnished with numerous small round pores and some obscure

minute setae, on the hyaline anterior portion with a pair of vertical setae 47,

long and 94) apart.

Venter—Tritosternum with elongate basal part 46 long hy 32» wide, and

a pair of ciliated laciniae ca. 160. long; jugular shield as figured, crown-shaped,

164, wide by 56u long (deep) and the posterior margin 127, with a pair of very

long 90, setae anteriorly and flanking base of tritosternum with their bases 38u

apart, with a pair of lyriform pores 10» in front of posterioy margin and 52

apart; sternal shield as figured, anterior margin straight, 127, wide, sides at Grst

slightly narrowing then contouring coxae JL to extend between coxae Il and

II) to form the postero-lateral arms with a width of 345,, posterior margin

straight medially for 170. then sloping backwards for 60, on each side before

running obliquely forwards to the tips of the postero-lateral arms, with three

puirs of setae and one pair of lyriform pores, the first pair of setae (sternal setac

I[} are very long and slender, 234 behind anterior margin, 80% long and TOs

apart; the other two pairs (sternal setae IIT and IV) form a transverse row

near the posterior margin, they are only about half the length of setue IT 33,

with the medians 75, apart and 23). from the laterals, the pores are 33,4 behind

setae [1 and 99, apart; sternogynial shield as figured, anterivr margin trins-

verse and 141, wide, the sides expand to a width of 152, in line of the lyriform

pores, then curve and converge to the rounded apex, the length of the shield

is 146n, the ane pair of pores is 384 behind the anterior margin and 113; apart;

the Jaticynial shields ure strap-like and cumtour the sternogynial shield as in other

species; the mesogynial shield is reduced and obseured: the ventral shield is

large, cualeseed with the other shields except the anal and occupies most of

the venter, its posterior margin is transverse and 615» wide, it is furnished

with many small round pores and a few minute setae; the anal shield is large.

with the anterior margin 615, wide and its length (depth) 302, giving a ratio

om length to depth of 2-04: 1-0; the paranal setae are 83u long.

Gnathosoma as in the cther species,

+ Legs—All shorter than body, I antennacform, 638 long, Il and UI 5890p,

626n.

42 H. WOMERSLEY

Allotype male—Similar in shape and size to the female.

Dorsum as in female.

Venler—Tritosternum with bulbous base 70a wide by 61, long, and paired

ciliated laciniae 160, long; pre-sternal appendages short and stumpy, 33 long

by 19, wide with truncate apex and turning inwards towards one another; sterno-

ventral shield as in other species; anterior margin deeply concave and 160,» wide,

sternal setae J strong in the blunt antero-lateral angles and 42, long, 56, behind

Fig. re TR es ge anee tragardhi sp. noy, A-l, Female; A, ventral view: B, tritosternum,

jugular, sternal, stornogynial and lateral shiclds and claviform processes enlarged: C, dorsal

shield; D, atrium of duct between coxace II and III; E, gnathosoma and palp: F, Jeg I: GC,

leg 11; H, leg III; I, leg IV; J-K, Male: J, bitosternbits K, pre-sternal processes and sternal

shield,

these and 85, apart is a pair of small lyriform pores, while 94», behind these

and 164 apart is a pair of larger lyriform pores, there are also other indistinct

pores and minute setae, the genital orifice is 70n long by 66, wide and lies be-

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FPEDRIZZAUDAE 43

tween coxae IIT, its basal half has a series of about eight pores on cach side;

the anal shield is as in the female.

Remarks—Other specituens are 10 females and 3 males from Mastechilus

dilatus Dalm. from Wilson's Downfall, New South Wales, Sth Oct., 1956 (G, P.

Bornemissza ); 3 Female and 4 males on a Passalid in rain forest at Eubenungee,

near Innisfail, Queensland, 11th Dec., 1945 (J. C. Bracks).

This species is remarkable for the long jugular and sternal setae and can

be scparated as in the key. It is dedicated to the noted Acarologist, the late

Prot. f, Trigardh, who laid the bases for the modern study of the comparative

morphology of the Mesostigmata,

Neofedrizzia vidua sp. nov,

‘ext fig. 13 A-K

Types—Holotype Female, allotype male, one paratype femule and three para-

type males fom a beetle from Mt. Glorious, Queensland, 6th February, 1957

{E. WL. Derrick).

Description—Holotype female—A large and almost round species of the general

facies of the genus, Length of idiosoma 1392u. width 1020p, giving a ratio of

length to width of 1:36: 1-0.

Dorsum—As in other specics with the shield covering the whule dorsum

and under-lapping ventrally as in other species, with numerous small round

pores and perhaps a lew minute sctae, Jaterally running backwards and out-

wards beneath the cuticle can be seen in this (and im some of the other species)

an irregular series of larger round dises which might be pores but do not open

ta the surface.

Venter—Tritosternam with clongate basal part, 70x long by 33x wide, with

a pair of ciliated laciniae 1504 long; jugular shield crown-shaped, 174p wide

hy 70. long (deep) and 13) wide on the posterior margin, with a pair uf short

recurved setac 32u long flanking the tritostomal base on the anterior margin,

with one pair of lyriform pores 19 in front of posterior margin and 52. apart;

sternal shield as figured, anterior margin 13lp wide, length of shield 117), sides

crintouting coxae IF then running between coxae Il and Til te form the posteriu

lateral arms with a width of 3764, posterior margin medially transverse for

180. then sloping backwards lightly for 75. on each side’ before nimnin

ibliquely forward to the tips uf the postero-literal arms of the shield, wit

three pairs of very short ca. 10-12» setae and one pair of lyriform pores, the

anterior setae (sternal setae IT) are 284 from the anterior margin and 56u apart,

the other two pairs form a transverse row near the posterior margin with the

medians 60 apart and 35» from the laterals. the pores ave 36p from setac IL

aml 103» apart; sternogynial shield as figured, as wide anteriurly as lone 146n,

the sides widen out in line with the pores to a width of 169, and then converve

in a fairly even curve to the posterior apex, with the lyriform pores 37, from

the anterior margin and 117» apart; mesogynial shield reduced and obscured:

lutigynial shields strap-like and contouring sternogynial shield as in other specics;

ventral shield Jarge occupying most of the yenter and coalesced with other

shields except the anal, with a transverse posterior margin 696% wide, with a

number of rormded pores and a few minute setae: anal shield large, triangular,

696. wide ou the anterior transverse margin and 336». Jong (deep) tiving a

ratio of width to length of 2-07: 1-0, paranal setae 85. long. :

Gnathosuma as in other species, ;

Legs—As in other species, 1 6604, H and ITI 522y, 1V 600p.

Ad H. WOMERSLEY

Allotype male—Of the same shape and dimensions as the female,

Dorsum as in the female.

Venter—Tritosternum with bulbous basal part 70, long by 75y, and a pair

of ciliated Jaciniae 150 long; pre-sternal processes short and stumpy, turned

in towards one another, 47. long and 23, wide with truncate apex; sterno-

Fig. 13.—Neofedrizzia vidua sp. nov. A-I, Female: A, ventral view; B, tritosternum, sternal,

sternogynial and Iatigynial shields and clayiform processes enlarged; C, dorsal shield; D,

ynathosoma and palpi; E, chelicerae; F, leg I; G, leg 1G, H, leg III; 1, leg IV; J-K, Male: J,

pre-sternal processés and sternal shield; K, tritosternum.

ventral shield as in other species, anterior margin concave, 131, wide, with blunt

obliquely truncate antero-lateral angles, sternal setae I 50, long, a pair of small

lyriform pores 56 behind setae I and 90, apart, another pair of long lyriform

AUSTRALIAN AND NE\Y GUINEA FEDRIZZ0DAR 45

pores 9. behind the Jast and 207, apart, several other rounded pores and

minute setac, genital orifice between coxae IL and Lil and 94. wide by T5y

long with a series of six pores on each side around the basal half; anal shield

as in the female with some pores and minute setae as well as the pair of paranal

setae 55p long, on the under-lap of the dorsal shield around the anal shield are

a mimber of small setae.

Guathosuma and Legs—As in female.

Neofedrizzia brooksi sp. nev.

Teat fg. i4 A-y

T'ypes—Holotype male, allotype female and one paratype male from a Passa-

lid, 7 rain eet Enbanangee, near Innisfail, Queensland, 11th December, 1945

(J. G. Brooks),

Pilea! Penida allotype—A moderately large species, with the general

facies of the family, but the sides medially rather straight than rounded and

sliglitly tapering backwards. Length of idiosoma 1276u. width 870u, ratio

lenvth to width = 1:47 1-0.

Dorswm—Shield covering, ull the dorsum, and under-lapping the venter

anteriorly to form the front margin of the camerostome, laterally confluent or

coalesced with the large ventral shield and under-lapping from coxac IV te the

end, the margins contouring the edges of the ventral and anal shiclds; iu Front

of camerostome with a pair of setae 56, long and ciliated,

Venter—Tritosternum with base 70 lang and subdivided, with paired cili-

ated laciniae 140, long; jugular shield united medially to form a erown-like

single shield, 164, wide by 56. long. posterior margin 132, and straight. with

a prur of yanuinvedt setae 474 long and 38, apart on the anterior margin flanking

the: base pf tritosternum, with a pair of lyriform pores subposteriurly; sterna

shield coalesced with endopodal shields of coxae II, 1404 wide anteriorly,

scarcely narrowing ta mid-line af coxae I and contouring coxae II to expand

to a width of 402, for the postcro-lateral arms between coxae II and TI, posterior

margin straight medially for abont 2284, and then running sliehtly backwards

fur about 95p on each side after which it turns sharply forwards to’ the extreme

tips of the postera-lateral arms, with three pairs of setae to S62 long and ? 2

pairs of pores, the anterior setae are in the antero-lateral corners and 70 apart,

the other two pairs (sternal setae [1] and Vv} form a transverse posterior row

in which the median pair are ca, 60u apart and ea. 30. from the laterals; sterna-

gynial shield as figured, anterior margin straight and 132, wide, sides expanding

slightly to 141. immediately behind anteriwr corners, then evenly rounded to

apex, length of shield 126, with one pair of |vriform pores in antero-lateral

angles; latigynial shields strap-like, widening a little in apical third, and can-

tuuting sides af sternogynial shield; mesogynial shield small, behind it are

faint indications of broad vaginal sclerites; ventral shield coalesecd with other

shields, except anul, as in other species, posterior margin straight, transverse and

5204 wide; anal shield larye, triangular, 520, wide ‘by 250». long, ratio width

to Jength 2-08; 1:0; parunal setae missing,

Gnathosoma—ITypostome, labial cornicles, chelicerae and palpi as in other

species of the génus.

Legs—As in other species, I 4754, IC 42, ITT 420u, 1V ST5ys.

Male holotype~With the general facies and size of the female,

Dorsum—As in female,

Venter—Tritosternuna with a bulbous basal part O88 lone by 75, wide and

subdivided near apex, with paired ciliated laciniae 1404 long; no jugular shield:

46 H. WOMERSLEY

in front of anterior sternal margin with a pair of anteriorly directed processes

AT pe long and 24, wide turned outwards and apparently fixed basally; sternal,

al, ventral and exopodal shields coalesced, anterior margin medially

47y, and 70», apart, ste

apart, HI 47. from IL

Vig, 14.—Neofedrizzia brooksi sp, noy, A-T, Feinale: A, ventral view; B, tritosternuiu, jugular,

sternal, sternogynial and latigynial shields and clavitorm processes enlarged; C, dorsal shield;

D, gnathosoma and palp; E, chelicerae; F, leg I; G, leg I]; H, leg TIM; 1, leg TV; J, Male

tritostcrnum, pre-sternal processes and sternal shield.

the genital orifice and 160, apart, with their attendant pores 188, apart; the

yenital orifice is rather small, situated hetween coxae LI and coxae III, 10» wide

y 38, long, on the postero-lateral corners are a series of tubercles; anal shield

as in female, 520. wide and 250, long, with numerous pores and a pair of long

paranal setae.

Gnathosoma and Legs—As in female.

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW CUINEA FEDRIZAILDAK 47

Neofedrizzia scutata sp. nov.

Text fe. 15 A-J

Types—Lolotype and 2 paratype females from a Passalid at Bulolo, New

Guinea, Sept. 3rd, 1954 (coll, HLW,).

Description—Yemale holotype—A large species uf the general facies of other

members. of the genus. Length of idiosoma 1276u, width 963, ratio length to

width 1-32; 1-0.

Dorsum—Shield entire and under-lapping venter as in other species ap-

parently withont setae or pores.

Venter—Tritosternum with moderate thick basal part and paired ciliated

laciniae; jugular shields coalesced medially to form a single crown-like trans-

verse shield 146, wide by 52» long, with almost straight posterior margin, and

the antcrior margin indented medially to accommodate base of tritosternum,

with a pair of long setae anteriorly and 47 apart, and a pair of lyriform pores

mare pusterior, sternal shield anteriorly slightly wider t posterior margin

of jugular shield 117,, sides nurrowing between coxae I to 108u, and then

vurving round coxae Il to form the postero-lateral arms with a width of 329,.

between coxae IT and IJ, length of shield 113,, posterior margin straight for

1264, then produced posteriorly for a width of 27p on each side, after which

it runs obliquely forwards to the tips of the postero-lateral arms, furnished with

three pairs of long 33« setae and ? two pairs of Iyriform pores, the anterior

pair of setae (sternal sctac EL) are about in line with the middle of caxae TT,

the other two pairs (sternal setae IIT anc TV) form a transverse row near the

posterior margin, the median pair 52» apart and 42» trom each lateral svta, the

anterior pair of pores could not be seen; sternovynial shield as figured like an

inverted cone with only lightly curved sides, 211), wide anteriorly and 160.

lang, with a pair of pores in the antero-lateral corners; the mesogynial shield

reduced as figured; latigynial shields strap-like and contouring sides of sterno-

gynial shield and rather hidden under the edges of the surrounding anterior

arms of the ventral shield; ventral shield large and coalesced with other shields

as in other species, the posterior straight transverse margin is 784» wide and

from its lateral ends a fine diggonal line runs inwards and forwards to the

inside of acetabula IV: the anal shield is separated from the ventral by a trans-

verse suture 764 wide anteriorly and 267), long, it carrics a pair of setae sub-

medianly and subanteriorly and a pair of longer paranal setae, as well as a

number of pores.

Gnathosoma—Mouthparts, palpi, chelicerae and hypostome as in other

species; Jablal cornicles two-segmented with apical segment and blunt hyaline

numb-like body with a smal] adpressed claw-like process subapically,

Legs—I 6-segmented, antennacform, fairly slender and angulated, tarsus

without caruncle ur claws, I[-1V stouter, IV with curved spine at posterior angle,

all tarsi with short pretarsus, caruncle and indistinct claws, T 600. long, IT 464,

IH 523u, IV S78p.

Male—Unknown,

Remarks—This species is described from the type specimens only. It is by

far the largest of the species ut present known and differs from the others is

indicated in the key,

Neofedrizzia laevis (Canest,, 1884)

Fedrizzia_laeoty Canestrini, 1884. Acazi dellAustealia Atti Ist. Veneta, 2 Ser VI, py.

706-709, Tav. VILL, ig. 3.

This species is only known from a single male found in “a collection of

sects from Queensland made by the late Prof. Pulle of the University of

Padova.

48 H. WOMERSLEY

A free translation of Canestrini’s description is as follows:

“Laneth 0-91 mm, width 0-66 mm. Known from a single specimen

of the male only. It differs from the male of F. grossipes in that the genital

aperture is placed somewhat further back between the third pair of legs;

it is semicircular or almost circular. Also it differs in the epistome (tectum)

which is in the form of a dentate spine approaching that of the Uropodids.

The shape of the body is oval, posteriorly rounded. All the animal appears

smooth; under a high laghifiosicre (Zeiss. Ocul. 2, Obj. D) it has very

short setae in contrast to the two Jonger ones found on the anal shield on

each side of the anal aperture.”

Frum the above the ratio of the lenyth to width of the idiosoma is 1-38: 1-0.

Interpolating from Canestrini’s figure of the ventral surface, the anal shield has

a width of 425. and a liength of 190, giving a ratio of width to length of

2-93:1-0. The femur of leg I'V is shown as short and broad, but the laminae

and posterior strong curved spine are uot observable.

He notes and stuns in his figure that the genital orifice is placed far back

between the third or even the third and fourth coxae. It is not clear in his

figure whether there is a jugular shield present or not although it could quite

wasily be absent,

This would seem to be a valid species of Neofedriasta, differing significantly

in the position of the male genital orifiee. In none of the many specimens ex-

amined during the course of this study have any males showing such a back-

ward position of the genital orifice been seen.

Neofedrizzia vitzthumi (Ouds,, 1927)

Toxopeusia vitzthumd Ouds., 1927, Ent, Ber., 7, 156, p. 228; 1424, Payna Buriiana, Acari, in

Treuhia., 7, suppl. 2, pp. 66-70, figs. 62-98.

This species was very fully described and figured from a single specimen

(or ? specimens) from “in fungi", Wai Eno bis Wai Temun, Buru, at 700-1000m.;

3rd Nov., 1922 (coll, L. J. Toxopeus), Only the female sex was found,

Although placed by Oudemans. along with sfrandi in his genus Toxopeusia

(Fedrizzia) it is readily seen from his drawings (1928) in spite of the lack of

the male, that this species belongs to the new genus Neofedrizzia on the follow-

inv features; (1) the femora of leg IV is short. and stout, with laminae, and prob-

ably with the posterior curved spine although this is not obvious in the figure,

2) the sternogynial shield has the antero-lateral corners curved inwards, ayd

3) only one of the two long, setae on the first [ree segment of the palp is ciliated

and that shortly so.

According to the description, the idiosoma is 745u long by 570% wide giving

a ratio of length to width of +3: 1-0; interpolating from Oudeman’s figures the

anal shield is 409» wide by 145, or.a ratio of width to length of 2-42 1-0; the

stenivgynial shield has the antero-lateral corners rounded inwardly so that the

widest part is slightly behind the anterior margin aad is 92,4, the anterior margin

is 80, the sides are straight and parallel and the posterior rouncled, it is L08u.

Jong, oF a ratio of anterior width to length of 0-73 = 1-0.

The species is otherwise quite distinct from the other specics known from

Australia and New Guinea as described in the present paper, and can he dis-

tinguished as in the key. ;

Remurks—OFf the above species of Neofedrizzia it seems likely that N. laevis

(Canest.) on the more pusterior position of the genital orifice of the male, will

nitimately require a new genus, but io the absence of the female it seems better

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA TEDRIZZUDAL 49

at present to retain it in Neofedrizzia. Neofedrizzia scutata sp. nov. is also

an anomalous species within the genus. Apart from the unique dorsal scute,

it is intermediate between I'edrizzia and Neofedrizzia in the shape of the sterno-

Fig. 15.—-Nevfedrizzia seutata sp. nov, A-K, Female: A, ventral view; B, tritosternum, jugular,

sternal, sternogynial and latigynial shields enlarged; C, ynathosoma and palp; D, camerostome

showing axillar plates; E, chelicerae; F, darsum; G, leg T; H, leg Il; I, leg Wl: j, leg IV;

K, labial cornicle.

gynial shield, which has the antero-lateral angles outwardly produced as in

Fedrizzia and not cvenly rounded as in all other species of Neofedrizzia. As

our knowledge of the family increases this species will most likely require a

new generic name.

Hi. WOMERSLEY

Key to the species of Neofedrizzia gen. nov.

Male genital orifice between coxae III or between coxae [J and

IV. Length of idiosoma 910u. width 660, ratio length to width =

1:38:1-0. Anal shield ca. 425. wide by 190, long, ratio width to

Jength = 2:93+1-0. Anterior hyaline portion of dorsal shield small

and erescentic. Female unknown.

N. laevis (Canest., 1884),

Where known mules with genital orifice between coxae LI or be-

tween coxac I and HI. 2

Anterior hyaline portion of dorsal shield large, expanded laterally

and posteriorly to about the level of anterior margin of anal shield, to

form u distinct scute without pores or setae except the verticals. Sterno-

gynial shield conical with lightly convex converging sides, wider an-

teridrly than long, 211, by 160, ratio width to length = 1-32: 1-0, the

antero-lateral augles are acute as in Fedrizzia, Anal shield 784, wide

by 267, long, ratio width to length = 2-93:1-0, Idiosoma 1276,

long by 963, wide, ratio length to width = 1-32: 1-0. Male unknown,

N. scutata sp. nov.

Anterior hyaline portion of dorsal shield small, crescent- or sickle-

shaped, not extending backwards beyond level of anteriur edge of

camerostome. Antero-lateral angles of sternogynial shield not acute,

evenly rounded, 3

Anterior margin of sternogynial shield equal to or longer than the

shield. 4

Anterior margin of sternogynial shield shorter than the shield. 6

Sternozynial shield as wide across anterior margin as it is Tong,

146p, with its sides and posterior eyenly rounded. Stemnal setae Il,

IE and IV minute, Anal shield 696. wide by 336, long, ratio width

to Jength = 2:07: 1-0. Pre-sternal processes of male stout and short

with truncate apex, and curved inwards; genital orifice with about 7

pores surrounding posterior half. Length of idiosoma 1392,, width

1020, ratio length to width = 1°36: 1-0.

N. vndua sp. nov.

Anterior margin of sternogynial shield distinctly longer than the

shield. 5

Pre-sternal provesses of male curved outwards and bluntly pointed

apically; male genital orifice Hanked posteriorly by about 8 pores on

each side, Sternogynial shield of female 132, wide on anterior margin

by 126 long, ratio width to length = 1:05: 1-0, Anal shield 520.

wide by 250. long, ratio width to length = 2-08:1-0. Length of

idiosoma 1276, width S70, ratio length to width = 1-47: 1-0.

N. brooksi sp. nov.

Pre-sternal processes of male short, bluntly rounded apically and

curved inwards to one another; genital orifice of male without any pores

flanking it on posterior half. Sternogynial shield evenly rounded Iater-

ally and posteriorly 124 wide anteriorly and 99p long, ratio of width

to length = 1:25:10. Anal shield 4062 wide by 139, long, ratio

width to length = 2-92:1-0, Length of idicsoma 812,, width 638,,

ratio length to width = 1-27; 1-0.

N. canestrinit sp. nov.

“1

10.

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZIIDAE 5)

Sternogynial shield with straight parallel sides and broad rounded

posterior, the anterior margin is 80n, and its length 109; ratio width to

Jength = 0-73:1-0. Anal shield 409, wide by 145, long, ratio of

width to length = 2:42: 1-0. Idiosoma 745, long by 5704 wide, ratio

of Jength to width = 1-3: 1-0. Male unknown.

N. ciizthumi (Ouds., 1927),

Sternogynial shield not shaped as above. 7

Pre-sternal processes of male basally free, ut least twice as long

as wide, inwardly curved and bilobed apically. Sternogynial shield,

146, long by 126. wide on anterior margin, ratio width to length =

0-86:1-0, with sides lightly convex and converging to a narrow

rounded posterior. Anal shield 5204 wide by 220 long, ratio width to

length = 2-36:1-0. Length of idiosoma 1210,, width §50,, ratio length

to width = 1-42: 1-0,

N. gayi sp. nov.

Pre-sternal processes of male not as above, short and stont, bluntly

truncate apically, curved inwards.

A small species, length of idiosoma $93,, width 638, ratio of

length to width I-4:1°0. Sternogynial shicld 103, wide on antericr

margin by 118». long, ratio of width to length = 0-87:1-0, Anal

shield 352, wide by 160, long, ratio width to Tength - 2:2: 1-0,

N, cynote sp. nov.

Large species, length of idiosoma 1000, or more. 9

Large, somewhat elongate species. idiosoma 1369p long, 905, wide,

ratio length to width 1-5: 1-0. Sternal setae [ and II very long and

slender, IIL and IV long but shorter than 1 and LL, Sternogynial shield

with lightly convex converging sides and romded apex, slightly longer

than it is wide on anterior margin, 1462 by 14], ratio width te

length = 0:96: 1-0, Anal shield 615, wide by 302, long, ratio width

to length = 2-04; 1-0.

N, tragardhi sp. nov.

Smaller species, length of idiosoma LOO, to 1200.. 1

Sternum of female with setae [I-IV fine and slender and modeyr-

ately long. Sternogynial shield bowl-like with evenly rounded sides,

132, wide anteriorly by 144, long, ratio width to length = 0-92; 1-0.

Anal shield 310, wide hy 244, long, ratio width to length = 2-09: 1-0.

Pre-sterna] processes of male, short, stout, apically truncate, about -as

long as wide, and bending inwards to one another, Idiosoma 1160.

long, 770n wide, ratio length to width = 1-5: 1-0.

N, cantint sp, nov.

Sternal setae shorter and not so fine. Sternogynial shicld longer

in proportion to width, anterior margin LO8m, length 13i,, ratio length

to width = 0-82: 1-0, with lightly convex sides. Anal shield 404).

wide by 202 long, ratio width to length 2-0: 1-0. Pre-sternal pro-

cesses of male somewhat longer than wide, stout, apically trancate

and only very slightly converging to one another, Idiosoma 10204

long, 696. wide, ratio width to length 1-46: 1-0.

N. gorirossiae sp. nov.

Genus PARAFEDRIZZIA nov.

Separate juyular shield (tetartosternum) present in both sexes, consequently

the male without the pre-sternal processes of Neofedrizzia. Sternogynial shield

52 H, WOMERSLEY

al female widest across the anterior margin with outwardly directed antero-

lateral corners as in Fedrizzia, sides. not evenly rounded, bell-jar shaped with

apical knob. One of the two long setae on basal segment of palpi in both sexes

with &8 Jong branches, the other nude. Femur of Jegs U-1V short and broad

with lamellae as in Neofedrizzia but without the strong curved spine at the

posterior corner. Anal shield coalesced with ventral shicld in both sexes.

Type Parafedrizzia buloloensis sp, noy.

Parafedrizzia buloloensis sp. nov.

Text fic. 16 A-K

Types—Uvlotype female, allutype male and six paratypes of each sex from a

Passalid in a rotten log at Bulolo, New Guinea, 3rd Sept. 1954 (coll, H.W,).

Deseription— Female holotype—A strongly chitinised dark brownish species, of

oveid shape but widest pusterior af the middle in line with coxae 1V, Length

af idiosoma 970p, width 680, ratio length to width = 1-42 1-0.

Dorsum—Shield entire uid covering the whole of the dorsal surface, an-

teriorly of coxae TV underlapping the venter and coalesced with ventral and

éxopodal shields, and anteriorly forming a camerostome, posteriorly of coxac

IV it underlaps as a rather broad strip separated from the ventri-unal shield

by a distinct strip of cuticle; dorsally the shield is furnished with numerous

circular pores, a number of lyriform pores and many minute setae, on the anterior

fnargin is a pair of vertical setae, 117. long, ciliated and 117» apart, on each

sidu of these are two short setac and a similar pair in between, on the dist is

an oval area with fewer setae outlined by a line of inwardly curved creseent-

like markings as figured.

Venter—Tritosternum with base not much longer than broad as figured,

with paired ciliated laciniac; jugular shield (tetartosternum) as figured, crown-

shaped, 117p wide by 47» long (deep) with one pair of slender setae anteriorly,

Sf. apart and about 50 long, with a pair of lyriform pores 42« apart; sternal

shicld as figured, anterior margin straight 89, wide, sides contouring coxae IL

with shield narrowest in mid-line of coxae [1 to 804, then expanding between

coxae I] and IIL to a width of 289, for the postero-lateral arms, posterior margin

strat medially for a width of 188. then curving posteriorly for 30% on each

side betore running obliquely forwards to tip of postero-lateral arms, with three

pairs of sctac and one pair of lyriform pores, sternal setae [1 47 lung and 47)

apart in the antero-lateral angles, HI and [V shorter 284 lang in a_transverse

rew near posterior margin, with the medians 42, apart and 25» frum the laterals,

pores 33, behind setae TI and 52, apart, length of shield 94; sternogynial shield

hell-jar shaped, anterior margin 179p, length 132y, ratio width to length =

1-35=1-0, sides sinuous and converging tu apex us figured, with one palr af

lyrifarm pores 10. behind anterior margin and 80x apart; latigynial shields strap-

like contouring sides of sternogynial and partly hidden under inner edges of

ventral shield; mesogynial shield reduced and partly obscured: yentral shield

large, eoalesced with the endopodal, exopodal and anal shields and occupying

most vf the venter with many small pores and small but obvious sctac; the

stip of under-lapping dorsal shicld contouring the margins of the ventri-anal

shield carries a row of about 5 fine setae on each side about 24, long, the anus

is situated in the pusterior angle of the yentri-anal shicld with the paranal setue

very minute; the peritreme is thin and reaches to coxae 1, with the stigma situ-

ated between coxae ILL and IV,

Guathosoma—As in the other genera of the family; Isbial cornicles swollen

with a small adpressed claw-like appendage; mandibles and chelicerae as figured.

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZIIDAE 53

Legs—As in species of Neofedrizzia, but the femora of legs I-IV without

any strong curved spine ut the posterior basal angle, I long 464. and antennae-

form, angulate, I-IV stouter with claws and caruncle, IT 440u, TIT 440p, TV 464p.

Male allotype—Of the same general facies as in the female. Length of idio-

soma 986u, width 696,.

Dorsum—As in the female.

Venter—Tritostermim similar to that of female; jugular shield crown-shaped,

1134 wide by 47» long (deep) with an anterior pair of slender recurved setae,

Fig. 16.—Parafedrizzia buloloensis g, ct sp. noy, A-J, Female: A, ventral view; B, dorsum;

C, tritosternun, jugular, sternal, sternogynial and latigynial shields enlarged; D, chelicerag;

E, gnathosoma; F, palp; G, leg [; H, leg IT; £, ley WI; J, leg LV; K, Male tritosternum, jugular

and sternal shields.

rather wide apart 60y, and ca. 50y long, with one pair of lyriform pores 44,

apart; sternal, ventral and anal shields coalesced together with cndopodal and

exopodal and the underlap of the dorsal shield as far back as posterior of coxae,

and then sepurated from the under-lapping dorsal shield by a narrow strip of

cuticle; with the genital orifice situated between coxae I] and wider than long

54 AH. WOMERSLEY

94, by 66n, without any pores around the posterior half; with setae and pores as

in Fig. 16 K; anterior width 108,, narrowest to 85p between coxae 1! and widest

between tip of lateral arms between coxae LU and ILL to 262,.

Cnathosoma—As in female.

Legs—As in female, [ 464, long, antennaeform, IT 406, TI] 406m, TV 464y.

REFERENCES

Casuy, J. H., and Gonmoss:, F. E., 1955. A Revision of the Suborder Mesostigmata

(Acarina) based on New Interpretations of Comparative Morphological Data, Publ.

No. Il, Chicago Acad. Sei, Jan. 17th, 1955, pp. 1-79.

Cawrstrings, G., 1884. Acari dell Australia, Atti Ist, Veneto 2, ser, VI, pp, 703-723,

Evans, GC. Q., 1955, A Review of the Laclaptid Paraphages of the Myriapoda with descrip-

tions of three new species ( Adarina-Laelaptidae). Parasitology 45 (3-4), pp. 352-368.

Ovupesrans, A. C,, 1927, Ent. Ber., 7 (156), p. 227; 1928, Fauna Buruana, Acari, in Treubia,

7, suppl. 2, pp, 60-70,

TrAcarny, 1., 1937. Zur Systematik der Mesostigmata. Arkiv, £. Zool, 29B (11), p. 3.

Tricarpu, 1, 1946. Outlines of a new classification of the Mesostigmata (Acurina) based

on comparative. morphological data, Kungl. Vysiografiska Sallskapets Handlingar,

N.F.Bol., 57 (4), pp. 1-37.

Turk, FY, A., 1948. Insecticalous Acari from Trinidad B.W.1. Proc. Zool, Soc. London, 118

(1), pp. 82-125.

Turk, F. A, 1953. A Synonymic Cutalogue of Brilish Acari, Pt. 1, Ann. May, Nat. Hist.

(12), € (1), pp. 1-99.

VirztHum, HL. Graf, 1945. “Acarina” in Bronns’, Klassen und Ordmmygen des Tierreich, 5 (4).

oki Since this paper has been in press the following record has been

noted.

“Fedrizzia gloriosa n, sp, Dark brown, quite oval, size about twice that of

the other two (Known) species. Margin of body with equidistant minute sctae.

Mandibles in both sexes with small chelae, larger chela with penicillate process.

All femora except first with wide marginal scale.

“Length 1250., width 800z,

“Habitat on coleopteron of the family Passalidae. Australia, ‘N.S.W.’.

Coll. Cl. Froggatt.”

The above is a free translation of the brief description published by Berlese.

“Brevi diagnosi di generi et specie nuovi di Acari’, Redia 6 (2): 376, 1910.

In view of our present knowledge of this family, such a brief description is

specifically unrecognisable, pending a re-examination of Berlese’s types which

are probably in the Berlese collection in Florence.

All that can be said at this stage is that on the description of the femora

of the legs it is probably a species of Neofedrizzia. Tt may be one of the larger

species of this genus described in the present study.

LARGE ARCHAEOLOGICAL STONE IMPLEMENTS FROM HALLETT

COVE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

BY H. M. COOPER

Summary

This paper records the occurrence at Hallett Cove, South Australia, of large stone implements both

primitive in type and in manufacture, some forms of which are described and discussed. Reference

is made to their similarity with material cultures discovered upon other long-abandoned native

camp-sites in South Australia and also in Asia. It is suggested that at least some of these implements

may represent one of the earliest periods in the succession of stone cultures employed by primitive

man during his occupation of Australia and termed Kartan.

LARGE ARCHAEOLOGICAL STONE IMPLEMENTS FROM HALLETT

COVE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

by H. M. Cooper’

[read 8 May 1938]

SUMMARY

‘This paper vecords the nccurrence at Hallett Cove, Swuth Australia, of Jarge

stone implements both primitive in type and in manufacture, some forms of

which are described and discussed,

Reference is made to their similarity with material enltures discovered, upon

other long-abandonect native: camp-sites in Sonth Australia and also m Asia.

Tt is suggested that at least some of these implements may represent one

of the earliest periods in the succession of stone cultures employed by primitive

man during his oceupation of Australia and termed Kartan,

INTRODUCTION

In 1934 the author discovered large stone implements of crude manufacture

upun cultivated land, recently ploughed, in a field below Hallett Cove Railway

Siding, about ten miles south of Adelaide, re-cxamined and referred to by Tin-

dale (1937). The area under cultivation has been extended considerably during

recent years exposing, apparently, the whole extent of the former camp-site, with

the exception of the’ western extremity where owing to the shallowness or

ahsence of any surface soil, due possibly to erosion, implements and waste

material lay exposed. ‘Thirty subsequent examinations have been carried out,

a total of more than 270 large implements being, feund. Successive ploughings

provided favourable conditions for collecting.

The camp-site, about 200 {cet above sea-level, is situated upon land gradu-

ally sloping towards the adjacent coastal cliffs and is bounded upon its southern

side by a steep gully along the bottom of which runs a small stream fed by a

permanent spring and swollen during the wet season by waters draining of

hilly country further inland, Siltstone outcrops are exposed near this spring and

also where the stream reaches the sea in its descent over several diminutive

waterfalls. Both outcrops exhibit similar material to that employed in making

the most efficient of the implements, A well-defined camp-site, exposed by

ploughing and somewhat similar in situation to that below the railway siding,

exists close by wpon high ground above the southern side of the intervening

ully already described. It yielded identical but fewcr implements and may

2 considered a part of the larger one.

The surface of this field below the railway siding, at its easterm or upper

end, consists of a compact red-brown earth which tends to become sandy in

nature as it slopes towards the gully, The soil at the western end, where the

main camp-site exists, is much lighter in colour, having an admixture of Kunkar

Travertine, frequently nodular in form which it overlays in places tou a very

shallow depth. The surfaces of many of the implements are covered, wholly

or in part, with a hard coating of calcareous matter (apparently derived from

close association with the underlying Kunkar Travertine bed) which in places

tends to mask the outline of secondary trimming. Additional implements were

* Hon, Associate m Anthropology, South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

Trans. Roy. Soc. 8, Aust. (1955), Val, $2.

o6 H,M. COOPER

discovered, more sparingly, at several places upon the high ground facing

Hallett Cove, more especially at its southern extreme above Field River. The

camp helow the raihvay siding, however, judged by the abundance of finished

material and discarded waste, denotes the main point of occupation hercabouts

during this perind. It possessed by present indications, moredver, the essential

requirements of a primitive people—a commanding view, a well-drained loca-

tion anda permanent water supply.

DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSIONS

The figured ypecimens, described herein, represent the principal types Found

upen the main camp-site below Hallett Cove Railway Siding and adjoining fields.

Tleve exist. in addition, many other large implements, roughly worked and

nondesvript in form which merely constitute a miscellaneous group of chopping

tools supplementary to those represented by the drawings.

An examination of the 270 and more large archaeological implements dis-

covered upon this camp-site indicates a standard of preparation ranging from

the rudest attempts at primary and secondary faking to secondary chipping.

both simple and stepped, of a tolerably high order.

The graduated improvement im stone working mav indicate that this

material culture persisted at Hallett Cove for a consideralle period of time,

It is somewhat difficult 1o conceive any reason or need for the employment

of so much inferior material in the preparation of Hhese implements eencrally

and although the siltstones more compact in texture respunded tolerably well

it was difficult ta control the direction of flakes it was desired te remuve in

the course of trimming those shaly in texture. -

Fine-grained quartzite pebbles. which fake with an excellent conchoidal

fracture and were highly prized and used almost exclusively by the recently

extinet Kaurna (Adelaide) Tribe, lie exposed at the font of the sea cliffs imme-

diately below the camp-site. Tindale (1957, 1) suggests, however, that access

ta this pebble bank may have becn impossible in Kartan times owing to the

existence of a talus which covered them. An excursion to the borders of the

sea at that time by Hallett Cove camp dwellers in search of food, therefore,

may have entailed a considerable journey, This section of the coast-line at

present is undergoing serious erosion from seawards.

A few small implements and discarded cores, mostly of quartzites and

Murindian in type, the most recent South Australian culture (Hale & Tindale,

1930) were found upon the Iallett Cove site but are eusily recugnisahle. They

are displayed as surface material at many places along the coast and wre uttrihut-

ahle ta the Kawna people.

The archaeological large specimens from Hallett Cove, gured hercin, indi-

vate the former existence of a culture consisting mainly of general purpose

chopping tool implements, semi-uniface in technique, and in addition a few

which served as cleavers, saws or knives, skin scrapers and pounders. It is

possible, therefare, that hunting, fighting and dumestic weapons were corce-

spondingly simple, being confined to roughly made spears, clubs, bark shields

and some crudely muunted tools such 2s those described elsewhere in this paper.

Pitting, bruising and battering. which are apparent upon the surfaces of many

chupping implements, suggest their casual use as hammers when the need

arose, ‘This occurs frequently upon pebble choppers of the Kangaroo Island

Industry (Cooper, 1943),

Twenty-five hammerstones of considerable size, many heavily battered or

broken, also upper and nether millstones were found at ihe Hallett Cove site.

LARGE STONE [IMPLEMENTS PROM PLALLETT COVE 37

They consist mostly of water-worn stones and angular blocks of indifferent

matcrial which would suffice, however, to meet the cardinal needs of primitive

man al this stage, including the trimming of the heavy, massive stone members

of his archaeological implement culture, in which tho fundamental principle of

weinht and bulk, as a means to an end, luxl not yet given way to lightness,

sharpness and a wider assurtment of types, The existence of many small ham-

merstones found in assoclation with more recent cultures indicates, apart from

other functions, a simple adjustment made necessary by the introduction and

prepuration of this series of new implements greatly reduvedl in size.

There is at the present time little infonnation available with which to de-

termine, with accuracy, the age of the large stone implements of South Aus-

tralia, all of which are tentatively und broadly assiyned to the Kartaw Culture

(Tindale, 1937). The approximate age of the Tartangan Culture, however

(Hale and Tindale, 1930), consisting of small, well-executed implements, ap-

parently much more recent, has been ascertained following Carbon 14 dating

of stratified material from ‘Tartanga and Cape Murtin, the respective dates being

6020 -- 150 B.P. and 8700 + 120 B.P. (Tindale, 1957, 3).

In the absenve of any time dating figures a few observations may be made

in the meantime which, when considered collectively, indicate that a cansider-

able period of time must have elapsed upon Kangaroo Island —the Kartan

Cuiture type Jocality —sinee the industry Hourished and later ceased to exist

there as also upon the mainland. Captain Matthew Flinders, I.N., who dis-

covered this ishand in March, 1802, found it uninhabited, with the native animals

totally fearless in the presence of man. Its typical pebble chopper industry,

exposed by ploughing, was concentrated, but unly su fur as the present cuust-

line indicates, xround the banks and fringes of inland swainps and creeks In

former heavily timbered country, now cleared. No skeletal material los been

recovered. Examinations of favourable situations amid extensive series of recent

sand-dunes, facing the shores in many places, have failed so far to reveal the

evistence of any camping grounds there. This would indi¢ate that the island's

large stone implement culture probably predated their formation, The period

and entry path of Kangaroo Island's former dwellers as well as those of their

departure—or local extinction—are unknown,

The Kanyeroo Island pebble industry is represented at the Hallett Cove

site by some examples, such as Fig, 8, and at other scattered places including

Artipenia Water and elsewhere (Cooper, 1943). Types similar to Figs. 5. 6, 7

and 14 appear upon Kangaroo Island, the adjacent mainland and further north,

It is probable, therefore, that most if not all of this material is related to the

same archaeological! origin, although not necessarily to any one particular period.

Some former camps, if of sufficient antiquity, may now Jie submerged within

ce present confines of the waters in the adjoining straits and the Culf of St.

‘jeent.

The #sistence at Hallett Cove ef many smal! pieces of slate, some showin

evidence of wear and capuhle of scraping skins to serve as cloaks, althou h

devoid of any regularity in shape, could indicate that at least a portion of the

Kartan oecupalion may have coexisted with a time of rigorous climatic condi-

tions, such as during the last Glacial Periud. They may be eavly and crude

equivalents of the beautifullyanade, slender slate scrapers used by the recently

extmet tribes of the Adelaide and adjoining regivns. ,

During April, 1953, the author discovered upon the eroded summit of a

red sand-dune, west of Port Augusta, a native hearth of burnt stones apparently

quite recently uncovered. Twelve well preserved teeth, including molars and

incisors, lay nearby in association with fragmentary hones, some showing evi-

5S H.M, COOPER

dence of fire and others reduced to powder by complete disintegration. Mr.

1. FH. Finlayson, Hon. Curator of Mammals, South Australian Museum, who

kindly examined the material, concludes that almost all can be reconciled with

a small phase of Diprotodon, Owen, eg. D, minor. Large stone implements,

sume similar to certain types figured in this paper, were scattered about upon

the adjoining surface. Whilst not ignoring a possibility that the presence of

the teeth and bones in this situation may be coincidental, the evidence of their

existence amidst such surroundings is significant and suggests the site of an

wneient tribal feast, or at least the place of its preparation,

ff sufficient firm evidence is later forthcoming which confirms the cowtem-

porancity of early man with Diprotodon, some of the thinner, heavy implements

of the Kartan Culture, including large saws, cleavers and choppers, would prove

cfficient working tools for employment in the preliminary prepanition of their

hides and flesh.

Movius (1944) in his detailed sutvey of stratified material in Asia describes

several types of large, crudcly trimmed implements assigned by him to the

Pleistocene Period which are identical with others figured in this paper, In

stratified deposits discovered there the massive block and pebble chopper indus-

trins, dependent upon weight for efficiency im use, tend te appear at mitch

eatlier periods than the later groups of small artefacts with Heir specialised

series of many types as represented in South Australia by the Murundian, Mudu-

kian, Pirrian and Tartagan Cultures (ale and Tindale, 1930).

The possible retention and continued manufacture by natives in subsequent

pethats of one or two implement types of the Kartan people, tu perform certain

waek bio heavy for their small artefacts, such as chopping throuzh boughs and

branches for the framework of their shelters, justifies some consideration. A

few of the Kartan-mad¢ implements, indeed, may have been used either in their

original state or with the addition of more advanced trimming. ‘The tempor-

ury overlappiny of some differing types, associated with twa succeeding cul-

tures, terminating with the extinction of the older, and also improvisation, such

as that referred to above, have been noted in South Australia and elsewhere.

Such instances, although of interest, appear to be merely of transient significance,

in ny way Interrupting the establishment of the incoming stone culture.

Although the extent of the antiquity of the Hallett Cove implements and

Hie Rartan Culture ay a whole remains indeterminate, indications including

those discussed above, suggest a period considerably earlier than the Tartangan

dating of 8700+ 12 B.P. Fnuinre investigations, indeed, may reveal that this

early heavy implement industry was one of Jong duration, necessitating its

eventual division into separate periods or even into additional cultures.

Although the stone implements of the Kartan Culture may appear ty) us

massive. rough and chimsy in comparison with the symmetry and beauty of

the Pirri point, the polished axe-head and the microlith which followed alter

them, there is no reason for supposing that these imperishable products, de-

veloped by primitive man, failed in the accomplishment of all that the maker

required of them in meeting the simple needs of his humble environment.

They represent, too, a great advance since the day when his ancestor sought

ty perecive upon the ground in some primeval forest, a random piece of rock

with which to fashion laboriously, iu defuult uf anything better, a clumsy spear

tio vetiph-hewn club.

The inventiveness of man, such as thut associated with the development of

this early culture. as with sv many others—primitive thengh it muy seem to Os

LAKGE STONE IMPLEMENTS FROM HALLETE COVE a)

when judged by civilised standards—represents, nevertheless, an essential part

of that vital strneture, founded upon trial anid errur, perseverance and success

$0 Necessary in his endless struggle for survival.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

It is desired to acknowledge, with appreciation, the assistance afforded by

the following: Mr, A, E. Stone, Hallett Cove, for permission te carry oul a pru-

longed and detailed examination of land below the railway siding whereon the

main collection uf implements wis made; Miss M. P. Boyce, Artist, South Aus-

talian Muscum, for the excellent drawings, Pigs, 1-21 ( Fig, 22 was drawn hy

the author) accompanying this paper; Dr, B. Daily, Curator of Fossils and

Minerals in the same institution, fur myst helpful aiteion in identifying Certain

rocks employed by the natives; and Me. V, P. Daly, Wilmington, for permission

to search his fields adjoining the banks of Beautiful Valley Creck.

REFERENCES,

Coorgn, H. M., 1943. Large stone implements from South Australia. Ree. & Aust. Mins,

Adelaide, 7, pp. 343-369,

Haur, I, M., and Trspacy, N. B., 1930, Notes on some human reqiains in the Lower Murray

Valley, South Australia. Ree, 5, Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 4, pp. 145-218.

Movius, H. L., 1944, Early man and Pleistocene stratigraphy in Southern and Basten Asia.

Papers of the Peabody Museum of American Archaeulugy and Etbnology, Harvard Uni-

versity, XIX, 3,

Tinvace, N, B., 1937, Relationship of the extinat Kanguroa Tslaucl Culture with Cultures of

Australia, Tasmania. and Malaya. Ree. $. Anst, Mus. Adelaide, 6, pp. 39-60,

‘Tinware, N. B., 1957, 1, Culture succession in South Eastern Australia from Late Plois-

tocent to the Present, Ree, $. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 13, pp. 1-49.

TixpaLe, N. B., 1957, 2. A dated Tartangyn implement site Ere Cape Martin, South-Bust

of South Australia. ‘Trans, Roy. Soc. S, Aust,, Adelaide, 80, pp. 109-123,

DESCRIPTION OF FICURED SPECIMENS

The inset sealé ig the equivalent of six inclws,

Pigs, 1-17 are all semi-unifuee trimmed implements

Hig. 1.—A large highly putinated and weathered flat block with rough primary flaking along

the frontal edge and twa sides of its buse margin. Weight 4 Tbs.

Fig. 2.—Large triangular block with secondary trimming confined to one straight chopplug

edge along its forward inargin. It represents a type well established upon this

camp-site although casual blocks of any snitahle shape were used in its construction.

Fig, 3—Roughly trimmed from an irregular water-worn block arotind its base periphery

except at the rear where the original cartes has been retained fur convenionoe in

use, Weight 5.4 Ibs. Figs. 1, 2, 3 and many others appear to be exanuples uf

two-handed. chopping implements intended for working in the direction of the

operator, ‘The largest Mallett Cove example weighed 6 ths.

Figs, 4, 5 and 6—Filat blocks, the latter two discoidul, All exhibit tolerubly good secondary

stepped trimming,

Fig. 7,—A well-defined trimmed core in which the margin of the Hat working hase has been

worn to such an extent hy use and retouching as to be overhung by its apex. Its

original form was possibly “horsehuof™ in shape, Vide Cooper, 1943.

Figs, 8 and 9.—Two pebbles with rounded and flat bases respectively; some stepped sveaul-

ary Wining. Examples in this group are similar to the more poorly executed spevi-

mens existing in the Kangaroo Island pebble chopper Industry (Guaper, 1943).

Fig. LO.—Flat-hased block with well-defined secondary. stepped faking. “Slug” shapudl,

Figs. 11 and 12.—Represent a type with working margius rmghly triangular in shape and

ending in a Bripedbieed pointed extremity, Also made [vom pebbles. Fig, 12 is

Min. in thickness; made fram) a stone with upper and lower irregular faces.

60 H. M. COOPER

Fig, 13—A large cleaver or saw; it is a thin flake implement. Length Sin,; thickness Lin.

Cleavers or saws are relatively rare here.

Figs. 14 and 15.—Two substantial Hake chopping or scraping adzes with well developed

percussion bulbs and striking platforms, both of which have been retained.

Figs. 16 and 17—Appear to be smaller examples of types represented by Figs. 13 and 11.

Figs, 18-22.—These five implements, representative of many others, display such crudeness

in preparation that they appear to have escaped general notice and it was only

the recurrence of so many similar cxamples which finally drew attmtion to their

existence. There seem to be at least two types, Figs. 18, 19 and 22, serving as

pounders and Figs. 20 and 21 for some form of scraping. They are finished, with

few exceptions, from smooth yellowish soft siltstones of the Pre-Cambrian Marinoan

Series, such as those present in the bed and upon the banks of the litle strear

previously referred to, No methodical preparation is indicated, althongh a little

extremely rough primary uimming has been attempted in order to produce the

desired shape. the natural form of the stone, with a little Making here and there,

is all that is evident in many cases, There are indications that at least some of the

implements in these two groups were fastened to_a crude form of wooden handle

or withy because certain individuals exhibit a slight grooving due to possible wear

whilst in others flakes have been roughly removed as if to make the haft more

secure. The improvisation of some rough method of handgrip in certain cases, by

means of gum or kangaroo hide, might also be considered, The softness and shaly

nature of the stone often employed suggest their unsuitability for any purpose

which involved undue stress. One possible use would haye been in the prepara-

tion of skin cloaks as proposed above—Figs. 18, 19 and 22 for pounding and

softening; Figs. 20 and 21 as scrapers, This group, with few exceptions, exhibits

intense patination, severe weathering and patches of calcareous coating. Examples

indicated by Figs. 20 and 21, if mounted and employed for cutting and scraping,

would have been more efficient if hafted broadside on. An examination of the

base of Fig. 18 discloses heavy wear upon one end of the working edge only,

indicating that it was held in such a manner that pounding and hammering were

concentrated upon that particular area. During Noyember, 1957, the author found

two isolated implements upon cultivated land alongside the banks of Beautiful

Valley Creek, Wilmington, 200 miles north of Hallett Cove. One was similar to

Fig. 3, the other being identical with Fig, 22, both in shape and in softness of

material. It is possible, therefore, that this latter type may have considerable

distribution.

LL OM. Goxprets

Sih ee owe

Il. M. Coorer

=“ ~S

Wess

H. M. Coorer PLATE 4

————

THE KANMANTOO GROUP IN THE STRATHALBYN-HARROGATE

REGION, SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

BY A. W. KLEEMAN AND B. J. SKINNER

Summary

This paper presents the results of structural mapping of the Kanmantoo Group in the area north and

south of Kanmantoo township. The mapping shows that the Nairne Fault does not exist. The

Kanmantoo Group lies conformably on the Marinoan series of the Adelaide System and the whole

succession was folded in post-Kanmantoo time.

THE KANMANTOO CROUP IN THE STRATHALBYN-HARROGATE

REGION, SOUTH AUSTRALIA,

by A. W. Kieeman anp B, J, Skinnun®

[Read 12 Tune 1958]

SUMMARY

This paper presents the results of structural mapping of the Kanmantoo

Group in the area north and south of Kanmantoo township, The mapping shows

that the Nairne Fault does not exist. ‘Yhe Kanmantoy Croup lies conformably

on the Marinoxn series of the Adclaide System and the whole succession was

folded in past-Kaumanitoo time.

INTRODUCTION

The area described in this paper lies on the eastern side of the Mt. Lofty

Ranges, trom Strathalbyn in the south to Harrogate in the north. In this region

a vast thickness of generally fine-grained, dark prey rocks outcrop, Originally

sandstones, greywackes and siltstones, they have been metamorphosed into

micaceous quartzites, arkoses, quarty-felspar-mica schists and andalusite-stauro-

lite schists. This group of rocks lies to the east of, and stratigraphically above,

& series of rocks which are correlated with the rocks of the Adelaide System,

typically exposed on the western slopes of the Mt. Lofty Ranges (Sprigg, 1942,

1946; Howchin, 1929).

Woolnough (1908), in referring to the racks he saw on the eastern slopes of

the Mt. Lofty Ranges, coined the name Barossian and misled by their meta-

morphism, believed them to be Archaean in age, Howchin, on the other hand,

considered all of the rocks east of the core of the ranges to belong to the Ade-

jaide System and correlated the Barossian of Woolnough with the upper portion

of the Adelaide System.

In 1953 Sprigg and Campana gave the name Kanmantoo Group to the

upper portion of the post-Archaean sequence in the eastern Mt. Lofly Ranges.

Although the name Barossian has precedence, it is not advocated on the grounds

that its reintroduction would cause unnecessary confusion.

The Kanmantoo Group, as generally understood from the definition by

Sprigg and Campana (1953), consists of greywackes and micaceous quartz-

ites with minor siltstones and shales in contrast to the quartzite, shale, limestone

association of the Adelaide System. Sprigg and Cumpina stated that the Kan-

mantoo Group Jay conformubly above Lower Cambrian Strata, which in turn

lay above the Adelaide System. However, for the whole distance from Birdwood

to near Macclesfield, the Kanmantoo Group was supposed to be thrown against

the Adelaide System by a fault, generally called the Nairne Vault (Sprigg et al.,

1951). The normal sequence of beds could supposedly be seen in the Maccles-

field Syncline und also in the Angaston region. We do not propose to deal with

the Angaston area in this paper.

In 1956 Campana and Horwitz disagreed with the fault hyopthesis of Sprigg,

mainly on the basis of mapping on the Milang and Yankalilla Sheets, and sug-

gested that the boundary between the two groups of rocks was a transgression

* Geology Department, University of Adelaide.

Trans. Roy, Soc, 8, Aust. (1959), Vol. B%

63 AL W. KLEBMAN ann B. J, SKINNIEK

and that Uhe Kanmantoo Croup was laid down directly on the eraded surface of

the Adelaide System rocks.

To attempt to resolve these conflicting hypotheses, and tu further an interest

in the Nairne Pyritic Formation, we have studied the Kanmantoo Group in the

grea dullined in the map (Fig. L). This map is on a relatively small scale, but

the more detailed maps ure lodged in the Geology Department, University of

Adelaide. Much of the mapping hus been very detailed and a complete presen-

tation of the data could only he effected on a scale uf 2 inches to the mile,

THE NAIRNE PYRITIC FORMATION

Pyrite and pyrrhotite bearing schists and quartzites outcrop for at Icast

65 miles along tlie regional strike. These beds have heen the subject of a more

detailed study (Skinner, 1958) and are believed tu be true sedimentary de-

posits and not subsequent replacements of favourable horizons. The pyritic

sediments as a whole have been called the Nairne Pyritic Formation though two

main sulphide bearing units and several minor ones exist within the formation,

We have followed the pyritic beds from near Harrogate tu within a few

miles of Strathalbyn. Over this whole distance the pyritic beds can be traced

by the characteristic “boxwork” in the weathered and ironstained outcrops, The

width of the pyritic bands varies greatly. At Shephard [ill the main or lower

band is 400 feet wide and another band, about 1500 feet higher im the sequence,

is only about 50 feet thick. The lower band persists strongly for about 8 miles

to the south, but 2 miles south of Barker Creek it pinches out, and after several

reappearances finally disappears ut a point uorth-east of Tinpot, The upper

bund reaches a thickness of 200 feet and can be traced us a strong horizon to

beyond Tinpot, about 2 miles furthee south than the lower band. [t then thins

out lo a width of only a few feet and cannot be traced with certainty for about

half a mile, It reappears as a thin horizon and then thickens to about 200 feet

agai, & miles north of Strathalbyn. After about a mile it ayain becomes thin,

and remains so until it finally disappears 14 miles north of Strathalbyn, The

breaks in continuity are due fo patches of allavium and deep svuil cover, as well

us thimning of the beds.

Both the upper and lower bands can be followed as continuons horizons

from Harrogate to near Tinpot with only minor breaks due to allavium in

creeks. They are always conformable with the other sediments and mineralogical

studies suggest that the sulphide and silicate minerals are compatible phases.

This leaves no doubt that the pyrites is an original sedimentary deposit. At

places a third or even a fourth band uppeurs either hetween the two main bands

or above the upper band. These minor bands are never greater than 10 feet

thick and are very limited in distribution,

North of flarrogate, White (1956) (see also White and Thatcher, 1957)

followed the Nairne Pyritic Formation till it meets the Bremer Fault to the east

of Birdwood. He alsa mapped it east of the Bremer Fault, sauth of Rockleigh.

Two bands of pyritic schist re-appear just to the west of the Bremer Fault south-

east of [Jarrogate, and are believed to be the Nairne Pyritic Formation.

Neav Macclesfield, pyritic beds were first met in 2 tributary of the Angas

River a mile south of the town. In the ereek sections the beds still retained

mueb of their original pyrite, but on the hill slopes only the weathered rock

emild be seen. From here the rocks can be traced south, with several smull

breaks, till they pass under the Recent (und Tertiary) cover south-west of

Strathalbyn, This pyeitic bed dips to the west and must obviously Jie un the

west limb of an uuticline, as was confirmed by structural mapping in the core

KRANMANTOGO GROUP

ba AES SUE me re 5 ee

STRUCTURAL MAP J, A

| er ‘Fe

OF THE | —_— ij f

STRATHALBYN—HARROGATE |“ je

REGION , A

- = = i | { yg

™N ey ff,

‘ Hl x : j. 1 gs

ae va \ \ cay } \

: | ' ee Ae BONNE

4, a a

aa! * SHEPHS =D

+ ee

| 1 4

! \

f : «, Nairn |

> ban pe ne

f eas ee

: \

SSS E

gor! % z

I Callington [ 1

~ | E

rR I,

~ ah

/ \j- t

Doe

wo ee |

“ Paty

f eff oodchester t

= ear |

ey A

|) I Aver ano Fermary cover

I Freed Anosiuste schis?

fi ==] Newrne lyritic Farmetian

b= EO Aeectesticld marbie

= | ;

E | digcetest reid & Mt Bat ker peachy

Quer ipite (base of Sturtiar)

Fault

Crust pone

Structure frend bine

ip af beading

Birect:on of tineations

735?

Dei ACS

6£ A. W. KLEEMAN asp B, J. SKINNER

of the anticline. There is little doubt that this is the Nairnce Pyritic Formation,

The gap in outcrop around the nose of the Strathalbyn anticline is small,

The wide extent, the continuity and excellence of outcrop make the Nairme

Pyritic Formation an excellent marker horizon in mapping the structures of the

Kanmantuo Group. It is the only satisfactory marker hurizon in the group, and

appears to separate two series of rocks of somewhat differing litholagy. Con-

sequently, it is convenient to diseuss the rocks above and below the Naitne

Pyritic Formation separately.

THE NOCKS BELOW THE NATRNE PYRITIC FORMATION

Over most of the area mapped the beds immediately below the Naime

Pyritie Formation are massive cross-bedded micaccous quurtzites and arkoses.

The Barker Creek cuts a magmifivent section through these beds. Here the

cross hedding is on a large scale, the individual units being ybeut 2 to 3 foet

thick in many instances. The quartzite of Mt. Barker Summit appears ta be

only «t local Jens uf pure: quartzite near the base of this formation, Simall out-

crops of glassy quartzite south of ML, Barker Summit also appear to be local

lenses Tear the base of the massive cross-bedded quartzite.

Below the massive cross-bedded quartzite, which is at least 2000 feet thick

i) Barker Greek, there are quarty-felspar-mica schists, mica schists, bands otf

andalusite and andalusite-staurolite schists (“Paringite” of Woolnough), thin

quartzites anal a few lenses of marble and of cule-silicates- These rocks do not oni-

crop well and underly a great belt of fertile agricultural Jand between Mt. Barker

town and Mucclesfield. Below this sequence comes a prominent group of quarts-

ites which Sprigg and Wilson (1954) placed ut the base of the Sturtian Series,

Near Macclesfield the Nairne Pyritic Pormation is underlain by about 1100

fect of juartz-felspar-micu schists (impure arkoses) followed by a thin band

of quartzite, some of it micaceous, known as the Macclesfield Quartzite. Below

this ugrin comes more qnartz-felspar-mica schist follawed by mica schists andl

andalusite-stancolite schists. The micaceous quartzite und arkoses are not sb

conspicuously current bedded, nov are they as thick as in the Barker Creek section,

hut they are undoubtedly the same horizon. There is, on the other hand, a strong

development of tle andalusite-staurolite schist forming the core of the Strathalhyn

Anticline, whilst a similar thickness of andalusite-staurolite schist is not found in

the Barker Creek, It is possible that the thickening of these rocks in the core of

the anticline is due to their plasticity during tectonic defurmation rather than a

sedimentary thickening since they are much contorted jn the core of the fold.

There is no evidence to sugwest that the Macclesfield Quartzite lies at the

same horizon as the quartzite of Mt. Barker Summit, [1 is, in fact, probable that

the Macclesfield Quartzite occurs near the middle of the micaceous quartzite

horizon and the Mt, Barker quartzite at the base, but the position is compli-

cated by a thickening of the micaceous quartzite horizan as it gees north.

Caleareous beds are found at several levels below the Nuimne Pyritic Forma-

tiuw, but none can be traced far alowg the strike, In the northern part of the

area there is a cale-silicate hand —a diopside-seapalite rock—near the base

of the micaceous quartzite horizon, Lt occurs on the Callington read south of

Mt. Barker Summit, but can only be traced a few hundred yards. South of

Macclesfield in the east limb of the Macclesfield Syncline, there is a small vut-

crap of calo-silicate rock a few hundred feet below the Nuirne Pyrttic Forma-

tion and ubove the micaceous quartzite. The position of this cale-silicate cor-

responds roughly with the Macclesfield Marble which has been mapped on the

west limb of the Macclesfield Syucline. On the west limb of the syncline the

KANMANTOO CROUP 65

marble is first seen south of Paris Creek, emerging from below Tertiary sands

and laterites, and can be traced easily to about 2 miles north of Paris Creek

where it is again chseured by sands and laterites. It is seen again just west

of the township of Macclesfield as a small outcrop. Another marble band occurs at

the base of the Marinoan as defined by Sprigg and Wilson (Echunga Sheet), It,

tuv, can be seen only in Bull Greck west of Paris Creek and in three places in the

north. We have seen this in several places, but we have not extended our map-

ping far enough down into the Marinoan to correlate its varity nceurrences,

There is nv evidence to suggest that there are any continuous marble beds

in the area investigated. Rather, the evidence suyeests that the marble beds

occur as small lenses, possibly at definite horizons, but nat with sufficient cer-

tainty to allow safe correlation over large distances,

Extensive cale-silicate horizons occur in the Woodside region but all of these

are below the vross-bedded micaceous sandstone and we have not mapped them.

THE ROCKS ABOVE THE NAIRNE PYRITLIC FORMATION

The sediments above the pyritic formation are in general more micaceous

and finer-grained than these below. The original sediments may fairly be de-

scribed as fine-grained greywackes and sillstones with minor shales, The bulk

of the rocks are quartz-felspar-mica schists, representing the greywackes and

siltstones. The shales, however, have produved schists containiny, micas, :nela-

lusite, staurolite, felspars and quartz. The andalusite schists are often very

conspicuous as they sometimes contain andalusite crystals up tu an ineh in length,

The development of large andelusite crystals is confined tn the cores of the

folds. On the limbs of the folds the andalusite schists are generally fine-

grained and inconspicuous.

The first notable andalusite sehist occrirs about 7000 feet above the lowest

pytite band. The base of this bed can be mapped for several miles in the nose

and un the western limb of the syncline near Dawesley. It is obvious that the

undalusite schist ig greatly thickened in the nose of this syneline because the

outcrop is much a along the road than it is further to the north or suuth.

In the Barker Creek section only a few narrow bands of andalusite aud anda-

lusite-staurolite schist are met. It is possible that in the area east of Dawesley

these schists reach their maximum development and that to the south they

grade laterally into mica schists. Higher in the sequence these peraluminous

eds grade up into normal mica schists and then into fine-grained quarte-felspur-

mica schists which persist to the top of the expused section, Small bands, how-

ever, aré found at several places in the Barker Creek and, as in the Dawesley

Svneline, they have been greatly thickened and contorted in the Callimuton

Syneline. It is with the structurally thickened audalusite schists that the Calling-

tun-Kanmaritvo mines are associated,

The andalusite schists above and below the Nairne Pyritic Furmation cannot

he distinguished in hand-specimen, They are always incurupetent relative to

the quartz-felspar-mica schists and tha quartzites, and consequently show ex-

treme contortion and thickening in the noses of the folds. On the limbs they

are thin beds which make poor oulerops and consequently they are nut satis

factory marker horizons,

METAMORPHISM

The zreywackes and siltstones which form the bulk of the rocks in the

Kanmautoo Croup lave recrystallised to fine-grained quartz-felspar-micu schists.

All of these rocks show the original bedding, and where foliation is present it

66 AL W, KLEEMAN ann TO J. SEINNER

generally follows the bedding. As in the Tungkillo-Palmer area (Kleeman and

White, 1957) the mica flakes often have a preferred orientation which differs

from the bedding plane, but this rarcly develops a foliation plane at an angle

to the bedding. In the more micaceous rock types, however, originally shales,

the hedding is often obscured by axial-plane foliation. ,

The peraluminous sbales have recrystallised to mica schists in which anda-

lusite, staurolite, kyanite, carnet and sillimanite occur. Sillimanite is only known

from wear Harrogate in a sillimanite-andalusite-muscovite-bintite rock and

kyanite in a similar assemblage from Shephard Hill, Andalusite and staurolite,

hoth together and separately, vcewr over the whole arca wherever rocks of a

suitable composition occur, White (1956) has shown that the sillimanite-

muscovite asscmublage is stahle in the area north-east of Harrogate, and it is

probable that there is a general increase in the grade of metamorphism from the

S.S.W. to the N.N.E. This is burne out by the absenee of andalusite and stau-

rolites € the south-west of Paris Creek west of the mapped area, However,

andulusite, stuurolite and garnet are to be fatind only a few miles north-west

of Strathalbyn,

‘The prominent ancalusite crystals in the andalusite schist give the rack a

more highly metamorphosed appearance than the surrounding fine-grained

quartz-felspar-mica schists. The copper mines of the Kanntantoo-Callington area

are associated with andalusitc and andalusite-staurolite schists and this led

Dickinson (1942) to suggest that the copper mineralisation was associated with

“highs” of metamorphism, There seems, however. nv evidence to support this.

The quartz, grains in both the andalusite schists and the cnartz-felspar-mica

schists are approximately the same size, and the coarse-grained Jook uf the

former rock is due solely to the large andalusile crystals and very obvious stau-

rolite and garnet crystals. The difference in appearance between the andalusite

schists and quartz-telspar-mica schists is therefore due to small differences in

original composition and has nothing to do with degree of metamorphism.

We believe that mineralisation in the Kanmantoo Group, other than the

Naive Pyritic Formation, is always associated with the andalusite and anda-

lusite-staurolite schists and is locelized by shearing or extreme contortion within

the incompetent andalusite and staurolitc-andalusite schists. ‘The Kanmantoe-

Callington mines are the most prominent group, but many others do accur. The

most tutstanding of the other mincs is the Wheal Ellen Mine, 5 miles north

of Strathalbyn. The mineralisation here is confined to a thin hand of gurnet-

staurolite and andslusiteanica schists enclosed in a massive scries af fine-

grained quartz-mica-felspar schists. Although the silicate minerals here are the

same as those feand in the Kanmantog Mines area, there is na spectacular de-

velopment of large crystals since the Wheal Ellen is on the limb of a Jarge

syncline. Sprigg and Wilson (1954) have mapped the Wheal Ellen as occur-

ring in a pyritic schist. The pyrite in this case is associated with the later

mineralisation and the rocks bear no resemblance to the Nairne Pyritic Forma-

Gian nor do they appear to be in any way associated with the Nairne Pyritie

Formation. Jt is unfortunate that Sprigz and Wilson did not satisfactorily

Jiterentiate between the two verv different rock types on their map,

STRUCTURE

The Kanmantou Group lies un the eastern limb of the “Mt. Lofty anticli-

novium” (Campana, 1955). This structure is overturned te the west due to

lateral compression from the east. Our mapping has shown no recognisable

break in deposition between the Adelaide System and the Kanmantoo Group and

KANMANTOO: GROUP oF

demonstrates that the two have folded together as one unit. The east limb of

the anticlinorium between the Archaean core of the ranges and the Bremer

Fault is diversified ly two synclines and an anticline. The Bremer Fault is be-

lieved by Kleeman and White (1956) to be the sheared west limb of another

anticline and a further succession of synclines and antiolines occur to the east

if the Bremer Fault. The structures east of the Bremer Fault will sot be dis-

cussed Further in this paper.

The syneline nearest to the Archaean core —the Macclesfield Syncline — is

well shawn by the uuterop of the Macclesfield Quartzite at the top of the

Adcluide System and by the quartzites at the base of the Sturtian Series lower

down in the Adelaide System. The Macclesfield Quartzite is broken in the

trough of the syncline and there is the suggestion of one, perhaps twe, minor

anticlines modifying the major syncline.

The major anticline —the Strathalbyn Anticline —is shown by the fold in

the Sturtian quartvites near Mt, Barker town, and by the presence uf the Naime

Pyritic Formation on both Jirabs of the fold near Strathalbyn. Unfortunately

the pyritic horizons have not been traced completely around the nose of the

fuld owing to cover of later rocks, but structural mapping confirms the auticlinat

structure. Along the main road frum Macclesfleld to Strathalbyn several minor

anliclines and synclines have been seen. In this areu there are several reversals

of plunge, measurements varying between 30° S$. and 20° N. No marker hori-

yon of any value can be traced over the axis of this anticline. Numerous bands

of andalusite-staurolite schist were found but they do not outcrop well and are

only seen where gully erosion has stripped the soil cover. The Macclesfield

Quartzite dics out on tHe westera limb of the Strathalbyn Anticline. Sprigg and

Wilsan (loc, cit.) in their mapping of the Echunga Sheet show this quartzite

cut off at the “Nairn Fault” but it can in fact be traced across the mapmed

position of the fault, A similar quartaite u few feet thick can be seen further

suuth but it ceases te be a mappable horizon.

Grasso and McManus (1954) mapped the Callington Syncline west of

Callington and extending north to Kanmantoo township. ‘Vheir mapping showed

complex. folding: and the complete absence of usable marker beds, In this area

the structures are very well shown by air photographs. We have traced the

syriclinal axis further to the north to within 2 or 3 miles south uf Iarrogate

where its location becomes mere difficult. A big band of andalusite-taurolite

schist which served as a marker horizon un the western limb of the syneline

east and north-east af Dawesley could not he identified on the eustern limb.

Moreover, us a consequence of the steep phmge (40-50°) and tight overturmed

folding all beds dip to the east and the two limbs are distinguished only by a

change of 20-30° in strike. There is little doubt that the fold axis passes a

short distance to the east of Harrogate and what is most probably the same

syticlinal structure is represented by two synclincs and an anticline in the Naime

Pyritic Formation north-east of Hnads (ill (see Mannum Sheet —Wite and

Thatcher, 1957).

Mast of Callington the Kanmanton beds pass under alhiyiuen of the Bremer

Valley but further to the north, near “Lucenbrae”, a series of tight folds — am-

plitude about 500 feet —indicate another anticline. This is, moreover, sug

vested by an outcrop of the Nairne Pyrite Horizons about 38% miles north of

“Lucernbriue". Here the pyritic heds pass into a minor syncline before helng

cul aff by the Bremer Fault. Traced to the south they become fivolved fn the

tight folding and probably turn back northward before heing lost under allu-

vium. This whole belt of folding merges into the Bremer Fault south-east

of Harrogate.

68 A. W. KLEEMAN ano B. J. SKINNER

In the vicinity of Shephard Hill the west limb of the Callington Syncline

is bent into a subsidiary anticline and syncline, This structure dies away ta

the south but hecomes more prominent in the Adelaide System beds to the

north near Mt. Charles.

THE BOUNDARY BETWEEN THE ADELAIDE SYSTEM

AND THE KANMANTOO GROUP

When the Kanmantoo Group was first defined the boundary between the

Adelaide System and the Kanmanton in the eastern Mt, Lofty Ranges was

considered to be a fault—named the Nairne Fault (Sprigg, op. ait,}. The rocks

inside the Macclesfield Syneline were considered to be Kanmantuw resting on

the Macclesfield Marble and separated from the bulk of the Kanmantoo Group

by the Nairne Fault. Much of the mapping was based on a supposed lithological

difference between the Adelaide System and Kanmantoo rocks, The Adelaide

System rocks are dominantly slatey and when metamorphosed form miva schists

which do not make good outcrops. The Kanmantoo rocks are dominantly grey-

wackes which form quartz-felspar-mica schists, and these form cuomspicudus

slabhy wuterops, On going eastward in the Mt. Lofty Ranges the change in

outcrop pattern is quite marked and the “Nairne Fault” largely coincides with

this line. Frum a point west of Shephard Hill to a point cast of Macclesfield

the “Nairne Fault” follows more or less closely the Thats of a thick series of

cross-bedded tmicaceous quartzites which outerop in the typical Kanmuntoo

style —although we would prefer to place them in the top of the Adeliude

System (Marinoan Series),* To the south of Macclesfield the Nairne Fault was

helieved to cut off the Macclesfield Quartzite. From this point the fault in

its further passage southward lay between Kanmantoo rocks on either side.

The only area on the Echunga Shect in which evidence for the Nairne

Funlt ig to be looked for is thus immediately south of Macelesfield. We consider

the Nairne Fault does not exist in this area for three reasons, Firstly, we Nave

found an outcrop of the Nairne Pyritie Formation which can be traced for at

least half a mile north of the supposed position of the Gutlt and for about a

mile south of the fault without any brek in the outcrop, and then with breaks

duu to poor outerop for another six miles south. Secondly, the axes of both

the Macclesfield Syneline and the Strathalbya Anticline can he traced unde-

vigted across the line of the fault, Although this does not preclude a fault with

a throw parallel to the axial plane of the folds it does preclude any fault which

was tequired to do what the Nairne Fault was supposed to du. Lastly, the

Macelesfield Quartzite which appears at first to be out off by the Nairme Euule,

docs iu fact cross the “fault” before dying out by change of facies. A thin,

white quartzite band can be seen interbedded belween quartz and felspar

mica schists for a few hundred yards south of the “fault”, und similiar quartaites

ean he seen further to the south. On the other side of the Strathalbyn Anti-

eline there is a eross-hedded micaceous quartzite in uw similar position below

the Nuime Pyritic Formation.

In 1956 Campana and Horwitz rejected the idea of the Nairme Fault and

suggested that the boundary was an unconformity. They said that the relations

° Owing to the fact thal the Adelaide System beds gn the eastern side of the Mt. Lofty

flanves wre of markedly differcnt sedimentary facies from those of the type loculities on the

western side, the division into Torrensian, Startiun and Marinean mivst be jentative only.

fn this paper we have followed the cutrent usage of Spriga et al. (1951, 1954). We lave

extended thiy usage by considering all the beds between the Startiin aul Kanmantoa to be

Miiringan.

KANMANTOO GROUP 69

ebserved between the Adelaide System and the Kanmantoo Group were due

to “erosion preceding the transgression of the Kanmantuo beds”, They also

inferred that the Adelaide System was folded before the erosion and subse-

quent transuression.

In the Macclesfield Syncline the Adelaide System beds pass up through the

Macclesfield Quartzite, the Macclesfield Marble and Nairne Pyzritic Formation

to the greywackes of the Kanmantoo Group. ‘here is au evidenee at all of

angular unconformity or any interruption in the sequenve of sedimentation.

Furthermore, it is apparent that the Adelaide System heds and the Kanmantuo

Group have been folded as a single unit,

Our mapping lias not revenled any evidence for a sedimentary break of any

kind from Paris Creek to Harrogate. North uf Harrogate White and Thatcher

(1957) suggested conformity between the Nairne Pyritic Formation and the

beds below. South of Paris Creek. however, Campana and Horwitz (1956)

state that the Kaumantoo Group overlies suecessively older rocks mmtil at Yan-

kalilla it lies on the Archaean,

This is beyond the limits of our mapping, although we have seen the

sections in several places. Mawson (1939) fas recorded rocks which are slightly

metamorphosed greywacke, similur in appearance to the rocks of the Kan-

mantoo Group, immediately above the quartzites of the Mt. Magnificent Ridge

(base of Sturtian Series), Mawson records about 2500 feet of Adelaide System

rocks below the topmost of the Mt. Magnificent Quartzites,

In the Grey Spur area further south Forbes (1957) records about 4000 Feet

of shale and quartzites overlain by greywackes and micacecus arkases.

In the Mt. Magnificent area the qnartzites of the Mt. Magnificent Ridge

ppear to be continuous with quartzites which Sprigg and Wilson (1954) place

at the base af the Sturtian Series. At Grey Spur there is no evidence upon

which te correlate the various rock types but the thicknesses measured suggest

that the transition from the Adelaide System rocks tu “Kanmantoo-type” rocks

ocurred at roughly the same time as at Mt. Magnificent.

ft is clear that in the Mt, Muyirificent avea greywackes and impure arkoses

appear to be vonformably wpon Adelaide System rocks of the Sturtian Series

whereas in the Mt. Barker area the vreywackes and impure arkoses do not

appear unlil high in the Marinoan Series,

There are three possible explanations for the superposition of “Kummantoo-

type” rocks on the Sturtian Series at Mt. Magnificent.

1. Campana und Ilorwitz (1956) have suggested erasiun of the upper part of

the Sturtian and of the Marinoan and subsequent deposition of Kanmantue,

They also postulate folding of Adelaide System rocks during this interval,

2, Non-deposition during Upper Adelaidean time and subsequent doposition of

Kanmanteo greywackes on ta Sturtian beds.

3. Deposition of greywackes in the Mt. Mugnifcent area during Adelaidean

jime while normal Adelaide System sediments were being deposited further

to the north.

Our mapping has shown that in the region between Harrogate and Paris

Creek the Adelaide System and Kuuntautor rocks have folded as a single unit

and we enald find no evidence for an carlier periud of folding involving only

the Adelaide System. The Adelaide System beds are folded in the McIlarg

Greek urca south Of Paris Creek but the Kanmantoo beds are folded also. Fault-

ing and lack of outcrops have obscured the detail in this area, but no unequivocal

evidence For unt unconformity can be seen.

70 A. W. KLEEMAN ane B, J) SKINNER

In the absence of Fossils and marker horizons, it is impossible to decide the

second and third hypothesis, but we feel that they explain the observed fucts

hetter than the hypothesis invulving uplift, folding and erosion of the Adelaide

System rocks as suggested by Campana and Horwitz.

THE BASE OF THE KANMANTOO GROUP

The definition of the base of the Kanmantoo Group in our area rests upon

the correlation of the Macclesfield Marble with the Delamere Marble and there-

fore with the Archeocyatha Marble. If we accept that correlation the base of

the Kanmantoo would lie at some indefinite horizon just above the Marble. The

Marble, however, does not outerop well and has not been located east of

Macclesfield. It is probably only of limited extent and lenses ont before reach-

ing the east side of the Macclesfield Syncline, although a small luns af a cale-

silicate rock has been found below the Nairne Pyritic Formation ip the eastern

limb of the Macclesfield Syneline. From our mapping it is clear that the lowest

member of the Nairne Pyritic Formation must be very clase to the base of the

Kanmantoo Group in the Macclesfield region. The lowest pyvitic band lies

about 1200 = 200 feet above the Macclesfield quartzite on the castern limb,

whilst the Macclesfield marble lies about 1000 fect above the quartzite on the

western limb,

A further justification for making the Nairme Pyritic Formation the base

af the Kanmantoo Group is that it obviously marks a boundary between two

contrasting but conformable series of sediments, Below the pyritie beds are

massive cross-bedded quartzites und arkoses, greywackes, shales, marbles and

vale-silicutes. Above the pyritic beds arc a vast thickness of very fine-grained

greywackes and sjltstones with minor shale bands. We do not consider that

thy pyritic heds mark a break in sedimentation.

CONCLUSIONS

This paper presents the results of mapping of the Kanmantoo Group rocks

in the area araund Kanmantoo township, It shows that these rocks rest con-

formably above the rocks mapped as Adelaide System, The mapping suggests

that the Macclesfield marble and quartzite are two lenticular beds of limited

exten( and quite useless as marker horizons. The correlation of the quartzite

of Mt. Barker Summit with the Macclesfield quartzite, as suggested by the

mapping of the Echunga Sheet, is incorrect. It is more probable that the Mt.

Barker quartzite represents a lens of pure quartzite in a dominantly arkosic

and greywacke series.

The contact between the Adelaide System and the Kanmantoo Group seems

to be one of definition on the Echunga Sheet. The earlier concept of a faulted

contact is disproven by the mapping of marker horizons and structural features

aeross the line of the supposed fault. The later suggestion of u transeressivn of

the Kanmantoa Group over the Adelaide System can neither he proved nor dis-

preved in this area. In the sequence of sediments we have examined there is

certainly no reason to believe that a break in sedimentation has occurred.

We propose that the base of the Naime Pyritic Horizon be defined as the

base of the Kanmantoo Group in this area, and until further evidence ean be

found, the beds immediately belaw the Nairne Pyritic Formation be considered

as Marinoun. The base of the Marinoan has not been considered.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Expenses in connection with this work were defrayed from the University

Research Grant, We are indebted tu Mr. KR. Offler for assistance with field work

KANMANTOO GROUP 71

and to Mr. B. P. Webb and Mr. B. P. Thomson of the Geological Survey for

helpful discussions.

REFERENCES

CGameana, B., 1955. The Structure of the Eastern Sonth Australian Range; The Mt. Loalty-

Olary Arc, Jour. Geol. Soc, Aust., 2, pp. 47-61,

Caarpeana, B., and. Horwitz, R., 1956. The Kanmantoo Group of South Australia considered

as a transgressive sequence, Aust, Jour. Sci., 18. pp. 125-9.

Dicxtnson, S. B., 1943, The Structural Control of Ore-Deposition in some South Australian

Copper Fields, Geol. Surv. S. Aust. Bull. No. 20,

Forues, B. G., 1957. The Stratigraphic Succession Eust of Grey Spur, South Australia, Trans,

Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 80, pp. 59-66.

Grasso, R., and MeManvs, J. B,, 1954, The Geology of the Callington Arca. Thesis for

Honours B,Sc., University of Adelaide (unpublished),

Howenrm, W., 1929. The Ceology of South Australia, 2nd ed., Adelaide.

Kieeman, A. W., and Ware, A. J. R., 1956. ‘The Structural Geology of Portion of the

Eastern Mt, Lofty Ranges, Jour. Geol. Soc. Aust., 3, pp. 17-31,

Mawson, D., 1939. The First Stage of the Adelaide System as illustrated at Mt. Magnificent,

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63, pp, 69-78.

Sxmne_p, B. f., 1958. The Geology and Metamorphism of the Naime Pyritic Formation —a

Sedimentary Sulfide Deposit in South Australia, Economic Geology (in press).

Sprice, R. G., 1942. Tho Coology of the Eden-Moana Fault Block, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8.

Aust., 66, pp. 185-214,

Spricc, R. C., 1946. Reconnaissance Geological Survey of Portion of the Western Escarp-

ment of the Mt. Lofty Ranges, Trans. Roy. Soc, §, Aust., 70, pp. 313-347.

Spricc, R. C,, and Campana, B., 1953. The Age and Facies of the Kanmantoo Group,

ae ee Lofty Ranges and Kangaroo Island, Sonth Australia, Aust, Jour. Sei, 16,

pp. 12-14,

Senicc, R. C., and Wirrrie, A. W. G., and Campana, B., 1951, Geological Atlas of South

Australia, Sheet Adelaide,

Sprics, R. C., and Wison, R. B., 1954. Geological Atlas of South Australia, Sheet Echunga.

Weare, A. J. R., 1956. The Granites and Associated Metamorphic Rocks of Palmer, South

Australia, Thesis for Ph.D., University of London.

Wate, A. J. R., and Tuatcner, D., 1957. Geological Atlas of South Australia, Sheet Mannum,

Wootnoucu, W. G., 1908. Notes on the Geology of the Mt. Lofty Ranges, ChieHy the

Portion East of the Onkaparinga River, Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 32, pp. 121-137.

NOTES ON WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FISHES, NO. 1

BY T. D. SCOTT

Summary

Seven new species from North Western Australia are described and figured. New localities and

ranges of distribution are given for seventeen Western Australian fishes. Sixteen further species are

recorded as new records for that State, and eight species, one of which is figured, are listed as new

records for Australia. Polynemus specularis De Vis is considered to be a synonym of Polynemus

multirudiutus Gunther.

NOTES ON WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FISHES, No. 1

by T. D. Scorr

[read 12 June 1958]

SUMMARY

Seven new species from North Western Australia are described and

figured. New localities and ranges of distribution are given for seventeen

Western Australian fishes. Sixteen further species are recorded. as new records

for that State, and eight species, onc of which is figured, are listed as new

records for Anstralia. Polynemus specularig De Vis is considered to he a

synonym of Polynemus multiradiqtus Gunther.

INTRODUCTION

During the past five years the Underwater Spearfishermen’s Association of

Wester Australia has sent to the South Australian Museum for identification, a

collection of about 500 onshore and reef-living fishes from that State. These

fishes, collected by means of the spear-gun, or multi-pronged hand spear, were

preserved in formalin, packed in 4-gallon collecting drums, and forwarded ta

the Museum. The accompanying notes on the specimens provided useful in-

formation as to the distribution, abundance and habitats of these fishes. In

many cases, coloured photugraphs were taken at the time of capture of the

specimens, and these have proyided useful records of life colouration.

This is the first of a series of papers dealing with the fishes of Western

Australia; T wish to express my thanks to the Underwater Spearfishermen’s As-

sociation of Western Australia and in particular to Mr. F. Barrett-Lennard for

his valuable assistance in the collecting of many of these specimens, and for the

most useful notes and colour photographs which he has placed at my disposal,

Family SYNODONTIDAE

Genus Saurnma Cuy, and Val., 1849

Saurida tumbil (Bloch)

Sulyna tuinbil Bloch, 1795, Nat. Ausl. Fische, 9, p. 112.

Two specimens measuring 155 mm. and 170 mm. total length were taken

at Point Samson, August, 1957, and Exmouth Gulf, November, 1954, respectively.

Add area 5 tu Whitley's (1948, p. 13) distribution of this species in Western

Australia,

Family MUGILIDAE

Genus Liza Jordan and Swain, 1884

Liza vaigiensis (Quoy and Gaimard)

Mugil vaigiensis Quoy and Gaimard, 1824, Voy. Uranie Physic,, p. 337, pl. 59, fig. 2.

A small specimen measuring 108 mm. total length was taken at Point Sam-

son, December, 1957, Add area 5 to Whitley’s (1948, p. 17) distribution of this

species in Western Australia.

Trans, Rey, Sac, 'S, Aust, (1959), Vol. 82.

74 T D. SCOTT

Family POLYNEMIDAE

Genus Potyxemus Linnacus, 1758

Polynemus multiradiatus Gunther

Polyneneus multiradiatus Gunther, 1860, Cat. Fish. Brit, Mus., 2, p, 324.

Palynemus specularis De Vis, 1883, Proc, Linn. ‘Sac, N.S.W., 8 (2), p. 285.

A small specimen measuring 145 mm. total length was taken at Point Sam-

son, August, 1957. This species was first recorded from Western Australia by

Whitley (1952-53, p. 29) as Polydactylus specularis (De Vis). The above

synonymy of P. specularis De Vis is suggested.

My thanks to Mr. T. C. Marshall for material from the collection of the

Department of Harbours and Marine, Queensland,

Family KPINEPHELIDAE

Genus Evineruiius Bloch, 1793

Epinephelus homosinensis Whitley

Epinephelus homasinensis Whitley, 1944, Austr. Zool., 10 (3), p. 267.

A specimen meusuring 315 mm. total length was taken at Point Samson,

August, 1957. Previously “recorded anly from the Ceraldton-Abrolhos region,

Wester Australia, where it is known as the “Chinaman God”, Add areas 4 and

5 to Whitley's (1945, p. 18) distribution of this species in Western Australia,

Genus Puecrrorpomus Cuvier, 1817 |

Plectropomus maculatus (Bloch)

Bodianus maculatus Bloch, 1790, Nat. Ausl. Fische, 4, p. 48.

A specimen measuring 258 mm. total length was taken at Point Samson,

August, 1955. Add area 5 to Whitley's (1948, p. 18) distribution of this species

in Western Australia.

Family PSEUDOCHROMIDAR

Key ro tur PsrupocHuRoMIDAE OF WESTERN AUSTRALIA

!. Dorsal spines more than 4 sei ae Stigmatonotus australis

Dorsal spines less than 4 " 5 * a. 2

2. Dorsal spines 2, palatines toothless... se ste ie a 8

Dorsal spines 3, palatines with teeth . ae tains win A

3, Ventral fins close together; a large pink spot on side of Badly!

Dampieria ignita sp. nov.

Ventrals separated by a scaly prio hody with 16 to 17 dark longi-

tudinal lines __.... . . itt Dampieria lineata

4. All dorsal and anal rays beached ue Leptochromis tapeinosoma wilsoni

Some anterior dorsal rays simple, the posterior rays branched _..... sine “EF

5, Teeth of vomer and palatines in 4 or 5 rows: lateral line scales

BOE BE) ee Pseudochromis (Assiculus) punctatus

Teeth of vomer and palatines in a single raw; lateral line scales

30 + 8-10 awe _. Pseudochromis (Devisina) fuscus

Genns DamprerniA Castelnau, 1875

Dampieria lineata Castelnau

Dampteria lineata Castelnau, 1875, Res. Fish. Austt., p, 30,

A specimen measuring 166 mm. total length was taken at Point Samson,

August, 1955. Add area 5 ta Whitley's (1948, p, 18) distribution of this species

in Western Australia.

WESTENN AUSTRALIAN FISHES

Damipieria ignite sp, 110¥.

Dies, IT Adiil4d Vii. C17. Br.é.

Tat. dine 87 + 21-23.

Length of head 48 mm. (4:1), greatest depth of budv 45 (4-4), greatest

width of body 23 (8-6) im the total length 198 mm. Height of head 1-2 in its

length, Lye 10 (1-3) in the snout, and 0°7 in the convex interorbital space.

Snont 13 (3+7) i the head.

Cleft of muuth very eblique, curved downward posteriwely, almost reaching

(he ventral profile, terminating below the anterior border of the eye, Tower

jaw louver than upper. Teeth in upper jaw iv several series. the eater row

Mig, 1 —Dempierta fynite sp. nov. xR),

enlarged, Twu pairs of canines in front, the outer pair larger, slightly carved,

Teeth in lower jaw uniserial laterally, 2 pairs of enlarged canines in front, of

esjual size, a patel of smaller teeth behind each pair. Palatines withuut teeth,

vumer with a single row of smull conical tecth,

Ten rows of cyeloid scales om the cheek. the upper scales the largest

Operculum with six to seven rows of Lirger scales. Freoperculum entire, oper-

ealum unarmed.

Head scales beginning between eyes, small and cycloid. Rest of hody covered

with ctenoid scales of mutlerate size, forming a low basal sheath on the vertical

fius. Lateral line interrupted belaw the twenticth dorsal ray, the upper part

separated from the lower by five rows of scales. Lateral line seales with a short

simple tube.

Dorsal long, originating ubove hindborder of operculum, consisting nf 2

weak spines and 25 rays, the posterior rays prolonged. Anal with 3 strouger

spines, the third the longest, but not equal to the eye dianreter. Veutrals close

(ngether, the third ray prodneed. Pectoral of moderate size. its length 1-5 in

the head, Caudal fin younded,

Colour in dleohol.—Body colonred a dark hrawn, with some traces of darker

longitudinal bands as in lineata. A large whitish oval pateh (which is pink in

life) on the sides, behind the pectoral fin, extending downwards to the ventral

protile, upward to the fourth row of scales below the lateral line, and hack-

wird ulmost ti the beginning of the lower lateral line. Dorsal and anal fins

with dark spots, anteriorhy, parallel dark bands posteriorly, these bands extend-

ing on to the caudal fin,

76 TY. D, SCOTT

Described from a specimen 198 mm. total length, taken Sharks Bay, May,

1954. Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. F2997, Further specimens

measuring 119 mm., 130 mm., and 156 mm. total Jength were taken at Pomt

Samson, December, 1957.

Affinities. —Differs from D, lineata in body proportions, in colouration, in the

more posterior insertion of the anal fm, and in the separation of the ventrals.

In D, ignita, the ventrals are very close together; D. lineata has the ventrals

more widely separated, and there is a scaly process between their bases.

Family TERAPONTIDAE

Genus Evruernaron Fowler, 1904

Eutherapon theraps (Cuv. and Val.)

Therapon theraps Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1829, Hist. Nat, Poiss., 3, p. 129, pl. 53.

A specimen measuring 138 mm. total Jength was taken at Point Samson,

August, 1955. This species was first recorded from Western Australia as Ther-

apon rubricatus Richardson, 1842, and Whitley (1948, p. 19) does not indicate

its distribution in Western Australia, except “N.W. Australia”, Add area 5 to

Whitley’s distribution of this species in Western Australia,

Family CARANGIDAE

Genus Caranx Lacepede, 1802.

Caranx bucculentus Alleyne and Macleay

Haring bupeylptiaa Alleyne and Macloay, 1877, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S, Wales, 1 (4), p. 326,

pl. U, fig. 1.

A specimen measuring 124 mm. total Jength was taken at Broome, June,

1955. Dorsal fin iviiisi,19. Anal fin iii,16, The straight part of the lateral line

commences helow the 6th dorsal spine, and bears 37 seutes. The five broad dark

cross-bars from the back to the middle of the sides, as noticed by McCulloch in

a specimen 123 mm. in length, are apparent.

A second record of this species for Western Australia.

Genus Exacatss Bennett, 1835

Elagatis bipinnulatus (Quoy aud Gaimard)

sexiole hipinnulata Quoy and Gaimard, 1825, Voy, Uranie Physic. (Zool.), 1, p. 363, pl. 61,

go.

A large specimen measuring 650 mm. total length was taken at Point Sam-

son, August, 1957. A second record for Western Australia. Add area 5 to

Whitley's (1948, p. 20) distribution of this species in Western Australia.

In this specimen, the two detached anal spines characteristic of the Caran-

gidae, have become obsolete with age.

Family LUTIANIDAE

Subfamily Luttantwar

Genus Luriaxus Bloch, 1790

Lutianus russelli (Bleeker)

Mesoprion russelli Bleeker, 1849, Verh, Bat, Gen., 22, Pere., p. 41.

A small specimen measuring 160 mm, total length was taken at Exmouth

Gulf, November, 1954. Above the lateral line there is a series of narrow bands,

passing obliquely upwards and backwards to the dorsal profile. Below the

lateral line, the specimen bears three horizontal wider bands, paralle] to the axis

of the body. The black, oval, lateral blotch, measuring 13 mm, by 9 mm., is

WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FISHES 77

almost entirely above the lateral line, and is situated below the junction of tho

posterior dorsal spines and anterior rays.

A new record for Western Australia,

Lutianus chrysotuenia (Bleeker)

Mesoprion chrysetacnia Blocker, 18351, Nat. Tijdsch. Ned. Indie, 3, ya. 170,

A specimen was taken at Point Samson, August, 1955. Add area 5 to Whit-

ley’s (1945, p. 21) distribution of this species in Western Australia.

Lutianus vitta (Quoy and Gaimard)

Serranus vitta Quoy and Gaimard, 1824, Voy. Uranie Physic. (Zool.), p. 313, pl. 59, fig, 3.

A smail specimen measuring 125 mm. total Jength was taken at Point

Samson, August, 1957. Add area 5 to Whitley’s (1948, p. 21) distribution of this

species in Western Australia,

Sub-lamily NemMiprentnat

Genus Nemmrerus Swainson, 1839

Key 10 THR AUSTRALIAN SPECIES. or NEMIPTERUS

1. Lower jaw with canine teeth 9.00 aes a 2

Lower jaw without canines __ ser thos =. me = 4

2. Eleven rows of scales below lateral line; body with yellow bands

N. taeniopterus

Fourteen rows of scales below lateral line; body without bands. ~ 8

3. Lower jaw with six canines; colour uniform _- ioe TE N. rebustus

Lower jaw with eight canines; colour brown above, silvery below

N. sundanensis

4, Posterior dorsal spines longest _.. “jie > — N, theodorei

Median dorsal spines longest _ . peo rig. @ Fe tee 5

5. Upper caudal lobe greatly produced _. vain toi ea N. aurifilurm

Upper caudal lobe not produced 0 nite wi iy" Nips 6

6. Upper jaw with three pairs of canines, cate tage . N. upeneoides

Upper jaw with one pair of canines... ote. N. samsonensis sp. nov.

Nemipterus samsonensis sp. noy.

Dx,9. PAG. Ajiii,7, Vib, C18. Br.6,

Lat. line 49-50, Lat. trans, 3:11.

Length of head 44 mm. (4-5), greatest depth of body 51 (4:0), greatest

width of body 25 (8-0) in the total Iength 200 mm. Height of head 1-1 in its

length. Eye 13 (1-2) in the snout and 0-8 in the tat interorbital space. Snout

15 (2-9) in the head.

Body elongated, not very deep, rather compressed. Mouth of moderate size,

horizontal, maxillary reaching ta posterior nostril. Jaws equal.

Bands of small pointed teeth in both jaws, narrowing laterally, with the

outer row enlarged. One pair of moderate canines in upper jaw, lower jaw with-

out canines. Palate without tecth. Lips rather thick.

Preoperculum rectangular, rounded at angle, smooth behind, Suborbital

rather deep, more than halt vertical diameter of eye. Posterior angle very

obtuse, the hindborder a straight line which when produced above reaches the

origin of the dorsal fin, Naked limb of prcopereulum about half depth of scaly

part.

Body covered with moderate ctenoid scales. Nape, operculum and cheek

scaly, rest of head naked. Three oblique rows of Jarue cycloid seales on cheek

Tb YT DR. score

below suborbital, leaving a naked linb below on preoperculum. Body svales

vontinned to end of caudal fin. Lateral line compleke, not sharply bent. cou-

sistinyy of unbranched oblique tubes. Ventral fins with an axillary process,

Dorsal fin consisting uf ten slender spines, the middle spines the longest,

Membrane between dorsal spines slightly emarginile. Posterior spitics styirtes

Fig. 2—Nemipterns samaonenyts sp. TOV. (#8),

than first says, Pectorals long, almost equal to head. Ventrals shorter, not

reaching to vent. Anal spines slender, the first very short, the third Jongest,

equal in length to diameter of eve. Anal cays longer than third spine. Candal

fin deeply forked, consisting of eighteen principal rays. Pseudobranclhriae present.

Colones in life--Body and head pinkish above, silvery below. A large dark

patel on the operculuin. A roamed dark patch on body immediately behind

lewd and below luteral line Fins pinkish, without any murkings-

Described from a specimen 200 mm. tetal length, taken Point Sarmsem,

November, 1954, Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. No, F2966.

Genus Sco.opsis Cuvicr, 1917

Seolopsis bilineatus (Bloch)

Anthias bilincatus: Bloch, 1793, Nat, Ausl. Pixehe 7p. 3.

Two specimens measuring 195 mm, and 96 mm. total lenuth Were taken at

Paint Samson, December, 1957-

The adult and juvenile specimens exhibit a considerable difference in cul-

oratiun and pattern. The colours in alcohol are us follows :—

Adult, greenish above, breast silvery. sides yellow, Two greyish-silver

stripes on sides, one arising immediately above the eye, the second from the

upper part of the eye, passing hackwards and upwards towards the dorsal pratile,

hut not reaching it. A third much broader stripe arises helow the eye, and

passes upwards obliquely to. end below ther ast dorsal spine and the fitst soft

ray, It is bordered above and below by a dark brown stripe. A black patel.

covey's the membrune and distal parts of the last two dorsal spines und first Fever

rays. Anal spines, first two aha rays and the membrane between them black,

Other fins hyaline.

In the juvenile, in addition to the three longitudinal stripes, there arises in

the interorbital space a naremw stripe whieh passes back to the beginning of the

dorsal fin. The three inferior stripes are all parallel and of approximately equal

WESTERN AUSTRALIAN TISHES 79

width, passing back obliquely to the dorsal profile, the interspaves coloured

dark brown. A black patch on the posterior part of the dorsal fin, as in adult.

In addition, there is a Jarge black ocellus on the membrane between the first

three dorsal spines. Anal fin black at the tip of the Jast spine and first two

rays. Other tins hyaline, without any markings,

A new record of this species for Austraha,

Family GERRIDAE

Genus Gesres Quoy and Gaimard, 1824

Gerres australis Castelnau

Gerres australis Castelnau, 1875, Res. Fish. Austr. (Vict. Offic. Rec, Phila. Exhib.), p. 43.

A specimen measuring 110 mm. total length was taken at Point Samson,

August, 1955,

Upper parts dark metallic blue, under parts silvery, the two colours sharply

defined by a line passing above the orbit and through the middle of the caudal

peduncle. There are 7 to & thin dark vertical bars on the sides, which become

more obvious in alcohol.

Add area 5 to Whitley’s (1948, p. 21) distribution of this species in Western

Australia.

Family POMADASIDAE

Genus Purctornyncaus Lacepede, 1502

Plectorhynchus chactodonoides Laccpede

Plectarhynchus chaetodonaides Lacepede, 18038, Hist, Nat. Poiss., 3, p, 134.

A specimen measuring 490 mm. total length was taken at Point Samson,

August, 1955. An adult specimen in which the first and second dorsal fins and

caudal fin are densely covered with large brown spots. Back, sides and upper

pineal pedunele similarly spotted. Pectorals. anal and ventrals a uniform dark

hrown,

Weber and De Beaufort (1936, p. 414) record the maximum size of this

species as 450 mm., but the specimen from Point Samson measured 490 mm.,

total length.

A new record of this species for Australia.

Plectorhynchus ordinalis sp. nov,

D.xii,16. PAT. Adi? Vas. C17, Br.7.

Lat. line 58-60. Lat. trans. 23 : 26-30.

Length of head 50 mm. (4-0), greatest depth of body 66 (3-0), greatest

width of body 21 (9-4) in the total length 194 mm. Height of head 1-0 in its

length. Eye 12 (1-7) in the snout and 1-0 in the convex interorbital space.

Snout 20 (2+5) in the head.

Body rather deep, somewhat compressed. Mouth small, slightly oblique,

scarcely protractile. Maxillary reaching to below posterior nostril. Lips thick.

Both jaws with several rows of small conical teeth, the outer row in hoth jaws

enlarged. No canines, Palatines and yomer toothless,

Prooperculum rectangular, sorrated posteriorly. Body and head covered

with small ctenoid scales, with the exception of the snout, lips and chin, Inter-

orbital scales extending forward to anterior nostril. Soft dorsal and anal fins

with a scaly sheath. Ventral fins with an axillary process. A row of six pores

on the chin, behind lower lip, Lateral line complete, gently curved throughout

its length, each scale with a simple oblique tube. Body scales above lateral

line much smaller than those below.

at T. DB. SCOTT

Dersal fin with 12 strong spines, the third and fourth spines the longest,

length 18 mm. Spines decreasing gently in length posteriorly, the last spine

not much shorter than the first ray. Pectorals of moderate length, equal to

length of ventrals. Ventral fins pointed, reaching tu vent. First anal spine

aes second spine the longest, length equal to greatest body width, Caudal

in truncate. , a

Fig. 3.—Pleetorhynehas ordinalin sp. nov. (* %)-

Colours in life—Body coloured blue-grey above, white below, Eight to

nine bright yellow longitudinal bands on the head, extending on to the body,

These bands remain distinct on the lower half of the heady, but become broken

up into a series of dots and short bands on the upper half. Twa distinct rows

ol similarly coloured spots along the entire length of the dorsal kn, All other

fins colonred a transparent light yellow.

Described from a specimen 198 mm. total length, taken Shacks Bay, May.

1954. Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. Nu. F3006.

Affinities —Similar te chrysotacnia Bleeker in bedy proportions and coloura-

tion, but differs in the dorsal fin counts (12 spines and 16 rays, compared with

13 spines and 19-20 rays in chrysolacni), and in seale counts.

Family MULLIDAE

Geotis Bansurensus Whitley, L931

Barbupeneus siguatus (Gunther)

Upenvus signatus Gunther, 1887, Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist. (3), 20, p. 59,

Two specimens measuring 180 mm, aud 211 mm. total length were taken

at Point Samson, December, 1957.

A new record of this species for Western Australia,

Family LETHRINIDAE

Genus LeTnarnicnticys Jordan and Thompson, 1912

Lethrinichthys nematacanthus (Bleeker)

Lethrinus nemutucaitthus Bleeker, 1854, Nat. Tidjdschr. Ned, Trl, 6, p, 409,

A small specirnen measuring 174 mm. total length was taken at Point Sam-

son, August, 1957, Add area 5 to Whitley's (1845, p. 22) distribution of this

species in Western Australia;

WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FISHES &1

Lethrinichthys, erected as a sub-genus by Jordan and Thompson, has been

regarded by previous authors (MeCulloch, 1929: Weber and de Beaufort, 1936)

as a synonym of Lethrinus. However, Whitley (loc. cit.) has raised the sub-

genus to generic status, the two genera being separated by the character of the

lateral teeth. (

Family SPARIDAE

Genus Myiio Lacepede, 1802

Mylio latus (Houttuyn)

Sparus tutus Honttuyn, 1782, Haarlem. Verh. Holi. Maatsch. Wet. 20 (2), p. 322.

D.xi12, P65 Adio Vas. C17.

Lat. line 50. = Lat. trans. 4:11.

A young specimen measuring 165 mm. standard length was taken at Point

Sumson, August, 1955.

Six curved incisors in each jaw. Upper jaw with 4 rows of molars on each

side, the outer row considerably fattened laterally. Lower jaw with 3 rows

of molars, the outer series not much flattened. A small dark blotch at the

origin of the lateral line, and a dark hind border to the operculum, No black

spot in axil of pectoral. Dorsal fins dusky, ventrals and anal without markings,

A narrow dark border to the caudal fin.

Family PEMPHERIDAE

Genus Pempneris Cuvier, 1829

Pempheris compressa (Shaw)

Sparus compressa White, 1790, Voy. N.S. Wales, p. 267, pl. 12, fig. 2. Ex Shaw MS.

‘Iwo specimens measuring 114 mm. and 131 mm, total length were taken

at Point Samson, December, 1957. This species was recorded from Western

Australia by McCulloch (1929, p, 234), hut was omitted from Whitley’s (1948)

list of the fishes of Western Australia.

Family CHAETODONTIDAE

Genus Mecarrotopon Guichengt, 1848

Megaprotodon strigangulus (Gmelin)

Chaetodon strigangulus Gmelin, 1788, Syst. Nat. ed. 13, p. 1269,

Two specimens measuring 145 mm, and 147 mm. total length were taken

at Point Samson, December, 1957.

A new record of this species for Australia.

Genus AnisocHaETonon Klunzinger, 1884

Anisochaetodon lineolatus (Cuy, and Val.)

Chaetodan lineolatus Cryier and Valenciennes, 1831, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 7, p. 40.

A small specimen measuring 145 mm. total length was taken at Point Sam-

son, December, 1957.

A new record of this species for Western Australia.

Genus CHaEronon Linnacus, 1758

Chaetodon lunula (Lacepede)

Poracentrus linula Lacepede, 1802, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 4, p. 307.

Two specimens measuring 185 mm, and 190 mm. total length were taken

at Point Samson, Deeember, 1957.

A new record of this species fur Western Australia.

82 T. D. SCOTT

Genus Euxputeors Fraser-Brunner, 1934

Euxiphipops sexstriatus (Cav. and Val.)

Tolacanthus sexstriatus Cav. and Vul., 1831, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 7, 0, 194.

Previous Australasian recurds: Cape Grenville, Queensland (AJleyne and Macleay, 1877, p.

277); Port Darwin, N.T. (Macleay, 1878, p. 352); Port Moresby (Macleay, 1853, p.

944): Darnley Is. (Ogilby, 1915, p. 105); Low Is., Queensland (Whitley, 1932, p. 288).

A specimen measuring 265 mm. total length was taken at Point Samson,

August, 1955,

A new record for W.A., and the most southerly record for this species to date.

Genus Heniocuus Cuvier, 1817

Heniochus acuminatus (Linnaeus)

Chaetadan ucuninatus Linnacus, 1758, Syst. Nat., 10, p, 272,

Previous Australasian records; Port Darwin and Port Fissington (Macleay, 1861, p. 94): Hood

Bay, New Guinea (Macleay, 1884, p. 263), Cape Byron Light, N.S, Wales (McCulloch,

1916, p. 193); northern N.S. Wales (McCulloch, 1922, p. SL).

A specimen measuring 155 mm, total length was taken at Sharks Bay, May.

1954.

A new record for Western Australia,

Gerius Cuarrovon Linnacus, 1758

Chactodon aureofasciatus Macleay

Chaetndon aurevfasciatus Macleay, 1878, Proc. Linn. Boc, N’S, Wales, 2 (4); p. 351, pl. 8,

fig. 3.

D.ri23. Aiii,19.

Lat. line 35-36. Lat. trans 13 ; 23-24.

Length of head 28 mm, (4-2), wreatest depth of body 88 (1-4), greatest

width of body 15 (7-9) in the total length 118 mm. Height of head 0-4 in its

length. Eye 9 (0-8) in the snout and 1-2 in the convex interorbital space, Snout

7 (4-0) in the head. Depth of body equal to standard body length. Depth of

caudal peduncle 11, equal to interorhital space.

A specimen measuring 118 mm, total length was taken at Point Samson,

August, 1955,

This specimen has the two bands across the caudal peduncle as scen by

Macleay in the juveniles of this species.

A new record for Western Australia.

Family AMPHACANTHIDAE

Genus Ampnacantueus Bloch and Schneider, 1801

’ Amphacanthus vermiculatus Cuv. and Val.

Amphucanthus vermiculatus ‘Cuvier and Valenciernes, 1835, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 10, p. 126.

A specimen measuring 293 mm. total length was taken at Point Samson,

December, 1937.

A new record of this species for Western Australia.

Amphacanthus chrysospilos Bleeker

Amphacanthus chrysospilas Bleeker, 1852, Nat. ‘Vijdschr. Ned. Indie, 3, p. 66.

A specimen measuring 250 mm. in length (to candal fork) was taken at

Point Samson, December, 1957.

A new record of this species for Western Australia.

Amphacanthus doliatus Cuy. and Val.

Amphacanthus doliatus Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1835, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 10, p. 132.

A specimen measuring 184 mm. in length (to caudal fork) was taken at

Point Samsan, December, 1957.

A new record of this species for Western Australia.

WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FISHES 83

Family TEUTHIDAE

Genus Teututs Linnaeus, 1766

Teuthis glaucopareius (Cuvier)

Acanthurus glaucopareius Cuvier, 1829, Regne Auim. ed. 2 (2), p. 224.

A specimen measuring 152 mm. total length was taken at Point Samson,

December, 1957.

A new record of this species. for Australia.

Teuthis triostegus (Linnaeus)

Chaetodon triostegus Linnucns, 1758, Syst. Nat, ed. 10, p. 274.

A specimen measuring 185 mm. total length was taken at Point Samson,

December, 1957.

Add area 5 to Whitley’s (1948, p, 24) distribution of this species in Western

Australia,

Family ACANTHURIDAE

Genus Naso Lacepede, 1802

Naso unicornis (Forskal)

Chactodon inieornis Torskal, 1775, Deser. Ant, p. G3,

A specimen measuring 335 mm. total length (excluding caudal filaments)

was taken at Point Samson, December, 1957.

Body coloured a uniform dark brown. Dorsal fin with narrow, dark longi-

tudinal bands. The horn on the forehead is very well developed in this specimen.

A new record of this speeies for Western Australia.

Naso lituratus (Bloch aud Schn.)

Acanthurus lityratus Bloch und Schneider, 180), Syst. Ichth., p, 216,

A specimen measuring 256 mm. total length (excluding eandal filaments)

was tiken at Point Samson, December, 1937.

Body coloured a uniform dark grey. The two bony spines on each side of

the caudal peduncle surrounded by a yellow oval spot. A thin yellow band

passing forwards below the cye and thence downwards to behind the angle of

the mouth. Lower lip light coloured. Dorsal fin black, bordered by a broad

cream hand, followed by very thin black band,

Anal fin bordered by a similar black band, otherwise dark grey. Pectorals

black, ventrals grey. Caudal bordered by a broad white band.

A new record of this species for Australia.

Genus Avanriunus Forskal, 1775

Acanthurus doreensis Cuv. and Val.

Acanthurus doréensts Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1835, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 10, p. 220.

A specimen nieasuring 220 min, (length to caudal fork) was taken at Point

Samson, December, 1957.

Jolours: Body, dorsal, ventral and anal fins a uniform dark brown. Pectoral

fin brownish at base, ils upper distal part yellow. A narrow white posterior

border to the caudal fin.

A new record of this species for Australia,

Family ZANCLIDAE

Genus Zancuus Cuy, and Val., 1631

Zanclus canescens (Linnacus)

Chaetodon canescens Linnaeus, 1758, Syst. Nat., ed. 10, p. 272.

Two juvenile specimens measuring 119 mm. and 140 mm. total length were

taken at Point Samson, December, 1957.

A new record of this species for Western Australia.

aa T D. scOoTT

Family POMACENTRIDAE

Genus Giyruisopon Lacepede, 1802

Glyphisodon coelestinus Cuv., & Val.

Glyphisodim evalestinus Cuvier and Valenciennes, (830, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 5, p. 464, pl. 135,

A specimen meusuring 115 mm, total Iength was taken at Point Samson,

December, 1957.

A new reeord of this species for Western Australia.

Genus Cruromis Cuvier, 1515

Chromis cinerascens (Cuyv, and Val.)

Heliases cineruscens Cuvier and Vatencicunes, 1830, Hist. Nat, Poiss., 5, p. 495.

Two specimens measnring 104 mm. and 115 mm. total length were taken

at Point Samson, December, 1957,

A new record of this species for Australia.

Family CORIDAE

Genus Cretmio Lacepede, 1802

Cheilio incrmis (Forskal)

Labrus inermis Forskal, 1775, Deser. Anim., p. 34.

A specimen measuring 202 mm, total length was taken at Point Samson,

December, 1957,

A new record of tliis species for Western Australia.

Genus THALAssomMA Swainson, 1839

Thalassoma septemtasciata sp. nov.

Dwiii,13. PIS. Adil. Vi. C14.

Lat. line 45-46. Lat. trans. 4: 16.

Fig. 4.—Thalussoma sentemfasciata sp. nov. (> %)-

length, Eye 10 (2-1) in the snout and 1-3 in the convex interorbital space.

Snout 13 (4-3) in the head.

Mouth sali, horizontal, not reaching anterior border of eye. Lips very

thick. Premaxilla only slightly protractile. Teeth pointed, in a single series in

WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FISHES 85

cach jaw, decreasing in size posteriorly. Two moderate canines in cach jaw,

Head naked, with the exception of a few scales on the upper part of the opercle,

About ten small scales before the dorsal.

Body cavered with moderate sized eyeloid scales, which form a basal sheuth

on the dorsal and anal fins. Lateral line following the dorsal profile for the

greater part of its length, sharply deflected below the tenth dorsal ray. Dorsal

spines short and slender, the first very short, the last spine the longest, but not

as long as the rays, Origin of anal slightly behind first dorsal ray. First anal

spine very small, third longest, equal to diameter 6f eye, Pectorals equal to

head without snout, the second and third rays the longest, decreasing unilormly,

the shortest ray one-fourth of the longest. First ray of ventrals produced,

reaching anus. Caudal rounded.

Colour in life —Body colour light blue, with seven darker bhie bands, the

width of the bands much greater than the interspaces. The first band arises in

front of the dorsal fin, and runs to the base of the pectoral. The second and

third arise below the spinous dorsal, and pass obliquely across the body, The

fourth to sixth arise on the middle of the soft dorsal membrane and run obliquely

In the base of the anal. The seventh: crosses the broad caudal peduncle. Caudal

fin bluish, with light spots, Dorsal fin uniform bluish, with a narrow light

burder to the soft part. Anal blue with light streaks, a broad light border the

entire length of the fin, The wpper five rays of the pectoral dark blue, the lower

part lightish, a broad dark band covering the distal part of the fin above, hecom-

ing obscure below, Head without any distinct markings, dark bluish.

Described from i specimen 214 mm. total length, taken Sharks Bay, May,

1954. Type in South Australian Museum, Rey. No. F2984.

MBatertal exaumined.—Two specimens, measuring 202 and 214 mm, total

éngth,

Affinities.Similar to T. hardwicki (Bennett) in body proportions and band-

ing on body, but differing in colouration, absence of bands on head and much

ahaa number of scales in lateral line (45-46, compared with 27-98 in hard-

mickt).

Genus ANAmpses (Cuvier) Quoy and Gainward, 1824

Anampses pterophthalmus Bleeker

Anampses pterophthabne, Bleeker, 1857, Acta, Soc, Se. Indo-Neerl, 2) p, BL,

Dixl2, PQ, Aaiil2 Wa. Cid.

Lat. line 52, Lat. trans. 9; 19,

A specimen measuring 119 mm. total length was taken at Sharks Bay, May,

1954. A new record vf this species for Australia,

Length of head 34 mm. (3°5), greatest depth of body 30 (4:0), greatest

width of body 13 (9-1) m the total length 119 mm. Height of head 1-4 in its

length, Eye 6 (1-8) in the snout and 1-5 in the convex interorbital space,

Snout 11 (3-0) in the head.

Mouth small, slightly oblique. Maxillary not reaching to below anteriur

acsteil, Lips thick. A single series of very small teeth in the jaws. Upper and

lower jaw with two prominent incisors, directed Forwards, compressed, with

cutting edges. No posterior canines.

Body somewhat compressed, covered with small cycloid scales, those on

hack and thorax much smallec than those of sides. Head naked, except for the

small pre-dorsal scales beginning behind the eye. Vertical fins without a basal

sealy sheath, About fourteen pre-dorsal scales, very minute, most of which

are embedded in the skin. Lateral line continuous, but sharply deflected helaw

bed DD. SCOTT

posteriar part of soft dursul tin, About 34 to 35 scales in its upper part, 11

seales in the lower part. Lateral line canals short and ujbranched.

Dursal spines short and slender, the last spine 8-5 mm., 4-0 in the head,

The lomgest ray 11 mm, equal ta the length of the snout, Pectoral fins short,

length 2-0 in the head. Ventvals very short, length 2-8 in the head. Third

Fig. S—Anampses plerophthalmus Bleeker (= %)

anal spine longest, length 8 mm., 4-2 in the head, Caudal mmnded. Caudal

pedunele compressed, rather deep, depth, 7-5 in the total length

Coleur in. ife.—Body colour dark brown. Median fins all dark brown, caudal

bordered by a narrow white band on He hind margin. A large black white-

edged acellus on the posterior dorsal and anal rays. Pectoral fins light yellow.

Anampses lennardi sp. nev,

Dix lS P12, AJjile Vis, C14.

Lat, line 29. Liat. trans. 4: &

Length of head 54 mm, (3-7), greatest depth of bady 61 (3-3), greatest

width of body 26 (7-4) in the total length 203 mm. Height of head 1-0 in its

length, Eye 7-5 (2-5) in the snout and 1:9 in the strongly convex interurbital

space. Snout 19 (2+8) in the head.

Mauth very small, rather oblique. Maxillary not reaching to helow anteriur

nostril, Lips thick, upper lip much thicker than lower, A single series of

minute tecth in the jaws. Both jaws with a pair of prominent anterior incisors,

directed forwards, compressed and with cutting edges. No posterior canines.

Bady oblong, compressed, covercd with large cycloid scales, those _be-

fore the dorsal and on the breast very smull and embedded in the skin. Leed

naked, except for the small pateh of pre-dorsal scales beginning behind the

eve. Vertics] fins without a basal scaly sheath. Lateral line continuous,

sharply deflected belaw posterior part of soft dorsal fin, Alout 19 seales in

upper part of lateral line, 8 in lower part. Eaeli scale with a rather Jong wn

branched cinal.

Dorsal spines very slender and dexible, gradually increasing in length pos-

terfimly, the last spine 14 mm,, 2°8 in the head. Pectoral fins short and rounded,

length 1-5 in the head. Wirst ray of ventral fins somewhat produced, reachin

past vent. Anal spines slender, the third longest, length 14 mm. 3-9 in the head.

Caudal margin rounded, caudal peduncle short and deep, its depth 28 mm,

7-2 in the total length,

WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FISHES *

Colour in life—Head, body and fins a bright yellow, with blue markings

ae figured, Three broad blue bars on the head, continued on to the middle

uf the body, ‘Uwo of these bars cross the snout, and a further bar crosses the

nape. Posterior part of body with blue bars and spots. Dorsal fin with a thin

blue marginal band, below which is a series of round blue spots, on the mem-

brane between the spines and rays, Membrane bluc between bases of spines

and cays. Pectoral fin plain yellow. Anal with thin blne hands as fi ured,

Spine and first ray of ventral fin coloured biue, rest of fin yellow. Caudal fin

yollow, with a thin bic band on the first and last ray.

Fig. 6—Ananpses lennarei sp. nov. (4%),

Deseribed from u male specimen 203 mm. total length taken at Point

Sumson, December, L957. Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. No, F024.

Matertal examined —Two specimens measuring 203 mm. and 189 mm. total

length,

Affinities. Similar to A, meleugrides Cuv. and Val. in meristic fealures but

differine, in body proportions and colouration, The ventral fin is much more

produced in Jennardi, the venteals of mefeagrides being shorter than the pectovals.

Genus Srevmoyents Gunther, 1861

Stethojulis rubromacula sp. nov.

Dixil, P13. Aidill VAS. Cla,

Lal. line 25-29, Lat. trans. 2:7,

Length of head 32 mm. (3'8), greatest depth of body 34 (3-6), greatest

width of body 17 (7-2) in the total length 122 mm, Height of head equal to

its length. Eye 5 (2-6) in the snout and 1-6 in the convex interorlitil space.

Snout 13 (2+5) in the head.

Mouth very small, oblique. Maxillary not reaching to below anteriar nosteil

‘Teeth small, incisifurm, in a single series in both jaws. No anterior canines, but

a small posterior canine at corner of mouth, Lips rather thick. Presnaxilla

slightly protractile, Head naked, except for a few small scales embedded in

the skin, beginning mid-way between the eye and upper augle of the operculum.

Five to six pre dorsal scales.

38 T. D seorr

Body covered with large cycluid scales, those of thorax larger than those

of sides. Pre-dursal scales smaller than those of sides. Vertical fins without a

basal scaly sheath, Lateral line following the dorsal profile, sharply bent down-

wards betore the caudal peduncle. Lateral line canals single, unbranched,

Dorsal spines shurt and slender, the first very shurl, smaller than the eye

diameter. Vhe last spine the longest, but not as Wg us the rays. Vertical fins

short, net reaching vent, First anal spines minute, the third laccrass, equal to

one cye diameter and a half, Pectoral equal to length of head without snout.

Caudal fin ranmiled, Depth of caudal pedtmele equal to snaut.

Fig. 7.—Sterhojalts cubromacala sp. nav (1),

Colour in fife—Body enlour olive green above, silvery white below. Three

liuht blue lines on the face. The first passes horizontally from the dorso-frontal

profile ta the middle of the eye, thence upwards to the upper anale of the oper-

culum, ‘The secand arises from the mouth and passes slightly obliquely upwurds

below the eye to the must posterior edge of the operculum, and continues on

tn the first 4 or 5 body seales above the pectoral fin. The third arises below

the mouth, passes upwards on to the cheek, thence almost horizontally to the

edge of the operculum. Upper part of head green, cheeks grading to yellow,

chim pink. Body with two light blue lines. The first arises immediately hehind

the pectoral fin, and passes backwards horizontally on to abont seven body

suales. The second arises below the base of the peetoral, and runs back hori-

zuntally, ending about five scales before the beginning of the caudal rays. A

dark band extends back from the end of this blue line across the caudal peduncle

on to three says of the caudal fin. The remainder of the candal, and all other

fins, are amber coloured. A large oval-shaped splash of red, immediatchy above

the base al the pectoral fin.

Described frum a specimen 122 mm, total Jength, tiken Sharks Buy, May,

1954. Mr. Barrett-Lennatd says that this appears to he about the maximum

size tie which this species sraws:

Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. No, F2993.

Affinities —Allied to S_ striziventer (Bennett) in metristic features bul difter-

ing iu body proportions, body colouration and number and distribution af

bands on head and body. The silvery longitudinal bands of sfrigiventer arc

blue in this species, and the brown spot on the posterior dorsal rays and hrown

cardal eress-hars are lacking.

WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FISHES a

Genus Cremixus Lacepede, 1802

Cheilinus chlorourus | Bloch)

Sneras chloroarus Moch, 171, Nat. Ausl Fische 5, p. 24, pl, 240,

A specimen measuring 232 mim, total length was taken at Point Simson,

August, 1957. Add area 5 to Whitley's (1948, p. 26) distribution of this species

in Western Australia.

Family BODIANIDAE

Genus Cuovnopon Bleeker, 184

Choeredon rubidus sp, nov,

Dixit? PAY Adit Vib Cad, Bre

Lat. line 28-29. Lae trans. 32: 9.

Length of liead 57 mm. (3-7), greatest depth of body 63 (3-3), greatest

width af body 28 (7-5) in the total length 210 mm. Height of head 1:1 in its

length, Bye 12 (1:7) in the snout and 1-3 in the convex interorbital space.

Snont 21 (2-7) in the head.

Mouth vblique, scarcely protractilo, reaching to below posterior nostril,

Upper lip thin, covered by preorbital when mouth is closed. Foor peg-like

canines in each jaw, the outer pair in the upper jaw much smaller than the

inner pair. Canines of lower jaw small, the outer pair slightly Hared out. Teeth

behind the canines coalesced, forming a serrated ridge. No posterior canine.

e. rs ne. 2

Fig, 7.—Stethojulis rubromacula sp. now. (#1).

Six te seven rows of small seales on the cheek. Operculum with five rows

nt much Jarger seales. Prewperculum finely denticulate. Scales on nape begin-

ning abave vertical (hrough hind border of preoperculuin. Body covered with

large cycloid seales, which form a low basal sheath on the dorsal and anal fins.

Lateral line cceplcte, without a sharp deflection,

Six predorsal scales, twelve to thirteen preventral scales, Scales on thorax

much smaller than on body. Dorsal spincs short but pungent, the membrane

behind them produced into a short filament. First spine equal to diameter of

eve, the second spine the longest. Soft dorsal pointed behind, the last ray almost

twice as long as the first.

Anal spins pungent, the third longest, but not as long as the first ray, Anal

fin pointed behind. Pectoral fin rather long, the longest rays 4:4 in the total

length. Ventrals pointed, reaching to the anus. Caudal truncate.

50 T. D. scoTT

Colour in aleohol.—Body and fins coloured a uniform reddish brown, the

fins without any conspicuous spots or markings. A small black spet on the back,

immediately below the cleventh and twelfth dorsal spines, and covering the

small scales forming the basal sheath of the dorsal fin.

Described from a specimen 210 mm. total length, taken Sharks Bay, May,

1954. Type in South Australian Muscum, Reg, No. 2985.

Affinities—Similar to C. vita Ogilby in meristic features and body propor-

tions. but differing in colour pattern, unevenly rounded shape of pectoral fin

and truncate hind margin to the caudal fin, The caudal fin of vitta is emarginate,

and the pectoral evenly rounded.

Genus Lrpmapxors Gill, 1862

Lepidaplois vulpinus (Richardson)

Lepidalpois vulpinus Richardson, 1850, Proe, Zool. Soc, Lond., p. 71-

A large specimen measuring 435 mm, total Jength was taken at Hamlin Bay,

Jamnary, 1955. Body and fins coloured a bright red. Membrane black between

the first five dorsal spines.

Add area 3 to Whitley’s (1948, p. 26) distribution of this species in Western

Australia.

Family TRIGLIDAR

Genus Pararnicia Ogilby, 1911

Paratrigla papilio (Cuv, and Val.)

Trigla pupiliiy Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1829, Mist. Nat. Poiss., 4, p, 80, pl. 73.

Two small specimens measuring 92. mo. and 95 mm. total length were taken

at Perth, September. 1954,

Add area 3 to Whitley's (1948, p. 30) distribution of this species in Western

Australia.

Family DACTYLOPTERIDAE

Genus Dacrytortena Jordan and Richardson, 1908

Dactyloptena orientalis (Cuv. and Val.)

Dactylapterus orienédlis Cuvier and Valeuciemmes, 1829, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 4, p. 134, pl. 76

A small specimen measuring 172 mm. total length was taken at Point Sarm-

son, August, 1957, Add area 5 to Whitley's (1948, p. 30) distribution of this

species in Western Australia,

Family OSTRACIONTIDAE

Gems Osreacton Linnaeus, 1758

Ostracion tuberculatus Linnaeus

Ostracion. thberculatus Linnaeus, 1758, Syst. Nat, ed, 10, y. 331.

Two specimens measuring 345 min. aud 153 mm. total length were taken at

Pomt Samson, December, 1957.

A new record of this specics for Western Australia.

Family TETRAQDONTIDAE

Genus OnmtecorpHona Whitley, 1934

Omegophora armilla (McCulloch and Waite)

LYetraodan armilla McCulloch and Waite, 1915, Frans. Roy. Sec. S. Austr, 39, p, 475, pl, 15.

A female specimen measuring 185 mim. total length was taken at Point Sam-

son, December, 1957,

Add area 5 to Whitley’s (1948, p. 32) distribution of this species in Western

Australia,

WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FISHES wl

An examination of 12 specimens of Omegophora armilla taken in Southern

Australian waters during the past few years, shows that this species exhibits

sexual dimorphism in its colour pattern. In the female the upper surface of

the snout, back and tail are dark grey, this colour continued on to the sides

behind the pectoral fins. There is a dark band passing from the eyes to helow

the snout. A black ring encircles the gill-opening and pectoral fin. The lower

three or four rays of the caudal fm are dark brown to black.

The colouring of the male is similar, with the following additions. Blue

spots on the head from the interorbilal space to tip of snout. Blne longitudinal

bars between front border of eye and tip of snout. Sides with blue spots extend-

ing, down to level of ventral insertion of pectoral fin. A thin blue horseshoe-

shaped bar cncireling the pectoral fin, situated on the outer side of the black

bar, and running parallel to it.

Family DIODONTIDAE

Genus Dropon Limnacus, 1758

Diodon holocanthus Linnaeus

Dindon holocanthus Linnaeus, 1788, Syst. Nat., cd. 10, p. 335.

A specimen measuring 128 mm. total length was taken at Point Samson,

December, 1957. This species is doubtfully recorded from North-Western Aus-

tralia by Whitley (1948, p. 32) in area 5. It has been recorded previously from

Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria, and erroneously recorded from South

Australia by McCulloch (1929, p, 435).

Family ECHENEIDAE

Genus Lerrecnenris Gill, 1864

Leplecheneis neucrates (Linnaeus)

Echeneis neucrates Linnacus, 1758, Syst. Nat., ed. 1), p, 261,

Duxxv,32. P20. A383. C17,

A large specimen measuring 462 mm. total length was taken at Point Sam-

son, August, 1955.

The edges of the soft dorsal and anal ure bordered with a thin white band.

Caudal with white margins, the central part black, A dark longitudinal band

on the sides of the body.

Add area 5 ta Whitley’s (1948, p. 29) distribution of this species in Western

Australia.

REFMRENCES

Aureyne, H. G., and Macteay, W.. 1877. Proc. Linn. Soc, N,S. Wales, 1, pt. 2, pp. 321-959,

Der Beavrort, L. F., 1940, Fish. Indo-Anst. Archipelago, &

Fraser-Bnonnes, A,, 1933. Proc. Zool. Soe. Land., pp. 543-599.

Macieay, W., 1878. Proc, Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales. 2, ph 4, pp. 344-307.

Macrray, W., I88t. Deser. Cut, Austr, Fish, 1.

Macrray, W., 1884. Prov. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, 7, pl. 2, pp. 2244250.

Mactiray, W., 1854, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S, Wales, 8, pp. 292-280,

McCurnnocn, A. R., 1916. Biol. Res, Endeavour, 4, pp. 169-200.

MeCuutoca, A, R., 1922. Austr, Zool., 2, pt. 3, pp. 86-130.

MeCunnoon, A. R.,.1929. A Check-list of the Fishes Recorded from Australia.

Ociwsy, J. D., 1915. Mem. Qld. Mus, 3, pp. 99-116.

Wauntry, G, P., 1932, Rep, Great Barrier Rect, 4, No. 9, pp. 267-316.

big ecp G, P., 1948. A List of the Fishes of Western Australia, W.A. Fisheries Dept..

Bull, No. 2.

Wurrney G, P., 1952-53. Proc, Rey. Zool, Soc, N.S. Wales.

IDENTIFICATION OF VOLCANIC ASH IN SOILS NEAR

MOUNT GAMBIER, SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

BY J. T. HUTTON, G. BLACKBURN AND A. R. P. CLARKE

Summary

Soil samples that have been unmistakably affected by volcanic ash and collected from within 2

miles of the Blue Lake, Mt. Gambier, may contain up to 40 per cent. of particles in the range

2p-50p diameter, and the particles in this range show a clearly defined straight line relationship

between their amount and size. This feature is interpreted as representing accessions of volcanic

ash. When a soil contains less than 4 per cent. of particles within this size group, it is considered

that there is no significant amount of volcanic ash in the soil. Using these criteria, volcanic ash has

been demonstrated in soils up to 10 miles from the Blue Lake and the approximate distribution of

the ash is shown on a map. Almost all areas within 4 miles received volcanic ash but at greater

distances the distribution was irregular. Ash soils were identified in the Mil Lei district 7 miles to

the north-east and in the Caroline Forest 7 miles southeast of the Blue Lake.

IDENTIFICATION OF VOLCANIC ASH IN SOILS NEAR

MOUNT GAMBIER, SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

by J. T. Hurron, G. Bracksugn ann A, R. P, Cranke*

[Read 10 July 1958]

SUMMARY

Soil samples that have been unmistakably affected by volcanic ash and

collected from within 2 miles of the Blue Lake, Mt. Gambier, may contain up

to 40 per cent. of particles in the range 2u-d0u. diameter, and the particles

in this yon show a clearly defined straight ine relationship between their

amount and size. "This feature is interpreted as representing accessions of

volcanic ash. When a soil contains less than 4 per cent. of particles within this

size sroup, it is considered that there is no signihcant amount of volcanic ash

in the soil,

Using those criteria, voleanic ash has been demonstrated in svils np to 10

miles from the Blue Lake and the approximate distribution of the ash is shown

ona map. Almost all areas within 4 miles reovived voleanic ash bot at greater

distances the distribution was irregular. Ash sails were identified in the Mil

Lel district 7 miles to the north-cast and in the Caroline Forest 7 miles south-

east of the Blue Lake,

INTRODUCTION

The extent of volcanic ash around Mt. Gambier is of particular interest

in South Australia, this being the best known of the few volcanic centres in the

State. A detailed geological map of the Mt. Gambier area by Sprigg (1951)

shows the boundary of this ash as no further than 3 miles from the Blue Lake,

but obseryations made recently during a reconnaissance soil survey of County

Grey suggested that the ash distribution extended to greater distances from this

centre, In earlier accounts there had been a claim by Howchin (1909) of

voaleanic ash as far as 7 miles north-east of Mt, Gambier and a denial of this

by Femer (1921) whose map of the ash distribution is similar to that given

by Sprigg (1951). The soils associated with the ash were described by Prescott

and Piper j 1929), who mentioned that the soil type is limited to within a 3 to

4 miles radius of the town, although in the north-easterly direction the limits

are less clearly defined than in the south. Some of the samples listed by

Prescott and Piper were taken, however, at distances greater than 4 miles from

Mt. Gambier.

4G analysis of charcoal collected from the sand immediately below the

bed of tuff at one site in North Terrace, Mt. Gambier, indicated an age of not

more than 5,000 years (Fergusson and Ratter, 1957) and this is taken to be

the maxinnim age of much of the volcanic ash ejected from the Mt. Gambier

cone,

FIELD OBSERVATIONS

The dunes of leached siliceous sands in the Mt. Gambier area are covered

by several feet of tuff near the mountain and the contrast of the brown to dark

brown soil and the compact tuff beds with the underlying loose white sand is

clearly seen in new road cuttings, pits and augor holes. At 3 miles from the

Blue Lake there is barely 2 feet of ash and at successively yreater distances

* C.S.LR.O., Division of Soils, Adelaide,

Trans, Roy. Soc. 'S. Aust. (1958), Vol, 82,

J. T. HUTTON, G. BLACKBURN anp A. R. P. CLARKE

t 1 +1F é g #0 as 6 S1e9

fd 1 ra P I £-0 s 8 OFEV

g I Lael z T £-0 Xx L 198V

g 1 9-0 MN | 2 G6FE

I 1 le-9 1 é £-0 cg ¢ LSSV

+9 & j | F691 ¥ g £0 ag | L eeev

61 | ¢ @ . Sr 8 9 F-0 aN L 63

SI & L OF BS F ¢ , 619 u g £0 "aN 9 | TééVv

Or 6 TL og 8 8 £-0 N $ | 9eV

LZ T 0 GL-99 rs é ai-g é z £-0 N i $ 6S8V

id if 0 LO-GP z j ; £0 aN F scey

or ; ma ! at 9% at or | &0 as | F TweV

— z I PELE z z | po-9l e € £-0 M F OSV

LG g 1 OF-SE | LI a £0 s g POEV

81 0 I €¢-98 re c R19 id é FO | MN ig LOFV

+09 oe | 46 | 8 04 61 €-0 MN é £osVv

0g , & T | Lg-g¢ ol 8 6-8 8 L £-0 a z ccey

+09 | @b . FL. 9t8 91 81 9-0 a z esos

#3 | O oe + He 1é 1g £-0 8 é ocev

9% 61 6r |e Ly 81 £0 8 3 GhEV

+09 - FT fl | O80R 08 ard ¥0 ct cal FOPV

% % “ul % % | ‘ut % % at

[fos pormng { | forquren yy | ofdureg

oy uyydeq |~ at es - DOUBISICT

pues duldjrepuy aoepins quy [fog sowpng

NS ..BG_I_CCVOw»SSSr

‘ioe-oL pue Ho[-g asuer Ut soptaed Jo asvqueosag

‘T ATAVL

VOLCANIC ASH IN SOILS 35

the layer of Compact tuff becomes thinner until it is no longer distingnishable

from the surface svil of the dunes. These surface soils, however, are muro like

the soils of the ash zone than those on the dunes of leached siliceous sands 10

or more miles away, It is thought to be signifioant that the crests of dunes 5 to

T miles from the Blue Lake have merited cultivation for cereals and after many

crops the surface soils still retain suffivient aggregation tu protect bare soil trom

erosion — circumskiieces which are not associated with sand dunes further from

Mt, Gambier.

Mt, Schanek, the volcanic formation T miles south of Mt. Gambier, is prob-

ubly similar to it in age and structure, but the area affected by its ash hag not

been studied in detail. The ficld observations of the soils near Mt, Schanck

suggest that there is an overlup of the zoncs of ash distribution from the two

centres and it is not possible, therefore, to clearly definu the suuthern limit of

ash from Mt. Gambier.

SAMPLES

Soils and tuff layers were inspected at many points in the district and it was

found that clearest evidence of volcanic ash could be obtained on the higher

sand dunes, especially those identificd by Sprigg (1951) as the Gambier and

Caveton dunes. On the flat land between the dunes thore is rarely such a

comirast in texture and colour between ash and underlying soil and sa most

sumples chosen for detailed study were from soil profiles associated with the

dunes, Altogether, 46 samples from 21 profiles were studied and in addition to

the surface samples, one or more simples from depths up to 6 feet were in-

cluded. The profiles were all located between 1 and 11 miles from the Blue

Lake, Mt, Gambier, and their location is shown in Fig. 1.

METHOD OF LABORATORY EXAMINATION

The inethod used was essentially that described by Hutton (1955) for the

particle size analysis of soils. The plummet balance was used to measure the

wmourt of material of particle size less than 5p, 10 and 50, as well as that

less than 2p and 20,, the usual limits for clay and silt plus clay. Material larger

than 204 was separated by an automatic decantation unit (Hutton, 1955) and

then divided mto 5 fractions using appropriate sieves. Ten points were thus

ubtained from which the particle size summation curves, such as those shown

in Fig. 2, could be drawn,

RUSULTS

The outstanding feature of the summation curves is the lineal portion he-

(ween 2p and 50,. Four typical curves are shawn in Fig, 2. For convenience

of comparison these curves show the distribution of the material greater than

2» and the straight line is considered to mdicate the unsorted fine yoleanic

ash, On a logarithmic plot, the mid point between 2 and 50 is 10 and henee

a straight line on the summation curve belween 2, and 50p is indicated by the

percentage in the range 2u to LO, being equal tu that in the range 10, to 50u,

Table 1 sets out some of the results obtained and it has been divided into two

parts to indicate the presence or absence of volcanic ash.

DISCUSSION

The results in Table 1 show that close to Mt. Gambier up to 40 per cent.

of the particles in the surface are in the range 2 to 50p but further out the

percentage of particles in this range falls off rapidly. When the percentage

is less than 4, it is considered that the accession of volcanic ash bas not been

significant,

96 J. T. HUTTON, G, BLACKBURN anp A. R. P. CLARKE

YOUNG MINGBOOL

>> Aza

npg MEL

BURNDA R.5.

‘BLANCHE

A4GTS.

ae)

ALLENDALE EAST

SS” f

PCUTHERN OCEAN

BOUNDARY OF VOLUANIC DEPOSITS, / ye APPROXIMATE LsttT OF VOLCANIC ASH

AFTER SERIGE f79st] GISTRIBUTION, DETERMINED FROM SOtL DATA

Main soi0s Samer Locations __ © A362 HunORED BOUNDARIES 0.

ATS, 9358

Fig. 1—Map of Mt. Gambier District Fase i area considered to have received accessions

of volvanic ash.

VOLCANIC ASH IN SOILS 97

By defining volcanic ash as material with more than 4 per cent. of un-

sorted particles in the range 2» to 50, it has been possible to delineate the

area around Mt. Gambier that came under the influence of the showers of ash

ejected during its volcanic activity. The boundary is naturally ill-defined but

within the limits imposed by the number of samples cxamined it is considered

that the area indicated in Fig. 1 received accessions of yoleanic ash.

Close ta the actual source, particularly if there is more than 20 per cent.

of material in the range 2u to 50,, the relatively igh amounts of acid soluble

phosphorus and potassium confirm the presence of material of igneous origin

(Prescott and Piper, 1929, and unpublished data, C.S.1.R.0., Division of Soils),

When, however, the amount of ash is low, phosphorus and potassiam may not

be reliable indicators, as both elements are translocated by plant growth and

tend to accumulate in the surface of soils.

The map showing the ash distribution supports the earlier claim by How-

chin (1909) of ash 7 miles north-east of Mt. Gambier. The irregular shape of

the ash zone north of Mt. Gambier may help to explain the difficulty mentioned

by Prescott and Piper (1929) of defining the north-easterly limits of the ash

shower as compared with the southerly limits.

100

+ tn a x

So oe So S

CUMMULATIVE %

—=

a +—___1— ab

z 5 if

20 sq 130 200 500

PARTICLE SIZE Al

Fig, 2—Representalive partiels size summation curves.

The distribution of ash indicated by Fenner (1921) was regarded by him

as being governed by winds similar in direction and velocity to those of the

present day, while Gill (1950) suggested that for south-west Victoria the pre-

vailing, winds approximately 5,000 years ago were from the north-west. ‘The

map presented in this paper suggests that the distribution depended mainly on

south-west, north-west and north winds, but it is quite possible that the irregular

distribution resulted from different wind effects prevailing during a limited

number of eruptions.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The work described in this paper was carried out as part of the research

programme of the Division of Soils, Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Re-

search Organization.

98 J. T. HUTTON, G. BLACKBURN anp A. R. P. CLARKE

REFERENCES

Fenner, C,, 1921. The craters and lakes of Mt. Gambier, South Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc.

S. Aust., 45, pp. 169-205.

Fercusson, G, J., and Rarrer, T. A., 1957. New Zealand 14C age measurements — 3,

N.Z. J. Sci. Tech., B 38, pp. 732-749.

Gut, E. O., 1950. An hypothesis relative to the age of some western district volcanoes,

Victoria, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic., 60, pp. 189-194.

Howcurm, W., 1909. In Howchin, W., and Gregory, J. W., The Geography of South Aus-

tralia, Whitcombe and Tombs, London.

Hutton, J. Ms 1955. A method of particle size analysis, C.S.I.R.O., Div. of Soils, Div. Rpt.

No. 11/55.

Prescott, J. A., and Pirer, C. S,, 1929. The volcanic soils of Mt. Gambier, South Aus-

tralia, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 58, pp. 196-202.

Spricc, R. C., 1951. Map of Gambier and Northumberland, 1 mile Geological Series, Geol.

Surv., S. Aust.

NOTES ON THE GEOMORPHIC HISTORY OF THE AREASURROUNDING

LAKES ALEXANDRINA AND ALBERT, SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

BY C. J. DE Mooy

Summary

The geomorphology of an area surrounding Lakes Alexandrina and Albert is discussed. Two

stranded coastal dune ranges were mapped in detail and tentatively correlated with the former

coastlines in the south-eastern Province by methods of photo-analysis. Three consecutive stages of

construction were recognized in the younger range. The origin and mode of deposition of the black

clay plains surrounding the lakes are discussed. Evidence of two former mouths of the

River Murray is presented. Crocker's hypothesis of formation of the present aeolian topography

during a Recent Arid Period (Flandrian transgression) is rejected. It is postulated that the

redistribution of sands by aeolian activity occurred in Pleistocene arid cycles and was interrupted by

periods of stability of the landscape. It is suggested that stages of construction of beach ridges,

periods of consolidation and soil formation alternated with periods of aeolian redistribution during

each glacial and interglacial cycle.

NOTES ON THE GEOMORPHIC HISTORY OF THE AREA

SURROUNDING LAKES ALEXANDRINA AND ALBERT,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

by C. J, pb—E Mooy*

(Communicated by R. G. Sprigg)

[Read 10 July 1958]

SUMMARY,

The geomorphology of aw area surrounding Lakes Alesandrinu and Albert

is discussed. Twa stranded coastal dune ranges were mapped in detail and

tentalively correlated with the former voastlines in the south-eastern Proyinue

by methods. of photo-analysis. Three consecutive stages of constriction were

recognized in the younger range.

The origin and mode of deposition of the black clay plains sutrounding the

lakes are discussed. Evidence of two former mouths of the River Murtay is

presented.

Crocker’s hypothesis of formation of the present aeolian topography during

a Recent Arid Period (Planidrian transgression) is rejected. It is postulated that

the redistrihntion of sands by aeolian activity o¢eurred in Pleistocene arid cycles

and was interrupted by periods. of stability of the Jandsuape. It is suggested

that stages of construction of beach ridges, periods of consolidation and soil

formation alternated with periods of acolian redistribution during each glacial

and interglacial vyele.

1. INTRODUCTION

Some information on the Quaternary geomorphic history of the area sur~

rounding Lukes Alexandrina and Albert emerged from an analysis of the land-

scape made during a reconnaissance soil survey (de Mooy, in press),

It is a complex area, The present and former coastal dune ranges abut on

the eastern slopes of the Mount Lofty Ranges. The stranded shorelines enter

the area from the south-east aud reach their lowest elevation here due to pro-

vressive downwarping in the same direction (Sprigg, 1952). Large tidal lakes

oveupy the central depression between the stranded coastal dunes and the

Mount Lofty Ranges. The River Murray and several smaller rivers discharge

into the lakes and flow through the Murray Mouth into the ocean, Waterlaid

deposits around the present lakes therefore have a lacustrine as well as a tidal

and estuarine character. Changing sea Ievels in combination with negative

peptone movement. and changing climatic conditions have influenced this

andscape.

The geomorphology and stratigraphic relationships of the surface layers

are the main sources of information. These are supported by limited micro-

palaeontological data. A soil survey, even on a reconnaissance basis, supplies

unusual detail about stratigraphical relationships of surface layers. In the area

under review it was found that the distribution of certain groups of soils mapped

at the level of the soil combination correlates well with the extent of the geo-

morphic elements of the landscape.

*C.S.1LB.O., Division vf Soils, Adelaide.

Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust, (1959), Vol, 82.

100 Cc, J. ue MOOY

IL GEOLOGY

The thickness of the Pleistocene cover of the region varies greatly. Howchin

(1929), dealing largely with country further east, gives an average thickness of

20 feet. The materials are largely sands, clays and lime. Limestone is abun-

dant: it is the aeolianite described by Crocker (1946a) with the exception of the

nun-tossiliferous limestone in the northern portion of the area (Seymour com-

bination, figure 1), which is referred ta us “travertine limestone” hy Crocker.

Underlying is-leyel-bedded fossiliferous Tertiary limestone, which also has

a variable thickness (Howehm, loc. cit.). The Miocene Murrayian Cult covered

the entire area and extended far over the New South Wales and Victoriun

border. ‘he Gambicr limestone and its equivalents, deposited during this trans-

gression, have been recorded in the area. Howchin (1929) recorded 60 ft.

thick Miocene marine beds from a bore at Cooke Plains starting al 159 It.

below sea level. King (1950) mentioned outerops of Miocene bryozoal lime-

stone in the area comprised by the Hundreds of Malcolm, Coolinany and Sey-

mour, The Oligocene "fanjublasy stage of the Gambier limestone was identi-

fied from samples taken during the soil survey from section 305, Hel, of Seymour,

by Dr. N. H, Ludbrook (personal communication), who also discovered Pligewne

deposits along the Murray cliffs between Tailem Bend and Wellington, Tate

(190U) identifiedl Eocene beds in the Hundred of Brinkley.

The Tertiary murine beds rest wpon Precambrian crystalline bedrock, usally

geanites of varviny composition, which outcrop in several places (eg. near

Tailem Bend and Lake Albert), Permian tillites and boulder clay have been

reported by King (1950) to occur above the bedrock and in depressions.

Ze Sey

==SEYMOUR—=— SHERLOCK:

f———} COOLINONG + Sour

Sos SS

~“

— KEP TO SOIL COMBINATIONS —

wuanG ST

Styvmoun ES

Sey BONNEY ;-GoG

My, SPL ENERO. eS

OLA MAALOOLM 22... St

a Vy OUNG-HUSBAND Fl

i Y, lasceciefon)

ae fy a.

FA 4 Lb fy

bd LLLP LA

Fig. 1-—Soil eambination mup.

Hf, GEOMORPHOLOGY AND SURFACE STRATIGRAPHY

(a) The Soil Combinations

The ares is composed of 7 distinct geomorphic units which are equivalent

ta soil combinations.

LAKES ALEXANDRINA AND ALBER'L 1OL

1, The Milang combination consists largely of alluvial and colluvial de-

posits of a clayey nature. It is situated on the eastern slopes and in the plains

at the foot of the Mount Lofty Ranges, which grade gently towards Lake Alexan-

drina. During upheaval and dissection of the Mount Lofty Ranges the Currency

Creek and Finniss River carried materials from the hills, including lateritic

gravel, which were deposited in the older terrace and plains along the rivers

(EC and RB in Figs, 2 and 3). This and two lower agegradational terraces

bear witness of former high sea levels (plate 1, fig. a). The middle terrace is

mapped as the Currency Creek-a association (CC-a), Its soils have textural

differentiation, The low terrace (CC-b) could correspond as to elevation with

Fig. 2—Fragment of soil association map showing river terraces along Currency Creek.

Legend figures 2 and .3: EC—East Currency association; RB—River Bank assoviation; CCa—

Currency Creck a association; CCh—Currency Greek h association; BI-—Black Swamp; W—

Oper water,

_ the Malcolm deposits (sce Fig. 1). It is remarkable that soil formation in both

deposits has been restricted to structural development and redistribution of

carbonates.

2. The Seymour combination may be regarded as portion of the Mallee

country extendimy eastward across the Victorian border. It consists of gently

undulating plains of Pleistocene age. It grades gently seaward and was traced

to some feet below sea level underlying the Malcolm combination, The materials

are predominantly coarse textured, redistributed by acolian activity, and com-

monly travertinized near the surface. West of the River Murray the plains

extend north beyond the surveyed area to the foot of a range, which it is sus-

pected represents a former coastal dune range, Its approximate position be-

102 Cc. J, pe MOOY

tween the 100 and 150 foot contour lines is sketched in Fig. 6. Its shape has

been influenced during formation by the River Murray. This suggests that

deltaic conditions prevailed in the plains south of Murray Bridge and in much

of the Seymour combination during this period of higher sea level. Repeated

redistribution of sands formed several N-S transverse dune ridyes in the Sey-

mour unit as well as a superimposcd WNW-ESE ridge topography.

Fig. 3—Fragment of soil association map showing river

terraces alone the River Finniss.

3, The Alexandrina combination is a steep former coastal dune range with

an aeolianite core, In places it is ridged to a WNW to ESE direction, No

geomorphological significance can be attached to the spur curying around the

Malcolm combination to the sonth. For reasons of soil mapping convenience

this spur of deep leached sands was included.

4. The Bonney combination is another stranded coastal dune system with

irregular or SW to NE trended undulating to hilly topography. It has a core

of aeolianite.

5. The Bremer combination was formed by alluvial activity of the Bremer

and Angas Rivers. The alluvium can be divided into an older and a younger

phase. The older deposits, the Bremer Plains and Lakes Plains associations have

eroded the ridged Seymour and Milang combinations. The material was sub-

sequently redistributed by aeolian activity to its present gently undulating topo-

graphy, which can be distingnished from the older surrounding country by the

absence of E-W sand ridges. Subsequently, soils of the Red-Brown Earth type

developed on the fine sandy micaccous sediments. Finally, up to LO feet of

ounger alluvial materials (Angas Plains and Langhorne Creek associations)

local y buried the soils formed on the older material. The latest deposition of

this material overlies the Malcolm clays, which in tum overlie the soils of the

older alluvium. The distribution of the old and young alluvial deposits in rela-

tion to the pre-existing ridged landscape is illustrated in detail in Fig, 4.

6, The Malcolm combination is largely composed of fine textured Tacustrine

and estuarine sediments at low elevation,

LAKES ALEXANDRINA AND ALBERT 103

7. The Younghusband association is the present coastal dune range con-

sisting. of unconsolidated calcareous sands. The area can be subdivided into

a relutively stable dune landscape, and a system of SW-NE drifting sands, which

= SCALE

LANGHORNE BANNe — V ' = Wilce

BEL MOELOULLN

NOTE: Sti/ mahbing units shen tha .BPo

— KEY 70 COMBINATIONS —

- BREMER Okder

A Younge

| LA MALCOLM

Fig, 4—Feragment of soi] association map showing the distribution vf the alluvial deposits it

relation to the older ridged landscape,

are moving in from the coast and gradually covering the former. The stable

dune landscape is steep, has a thick vegetative cover and decalcified swales,

Further subdivision of these units and greater detail is given in the soil

association map (de Mooy, in press).

ib) Stranded Coastal Dunes in the Area

The stranded coastal dumes in the area haye un ieolianite core. The term

aeolianite, variously named calcareous acvlianite, coastal limestone, sandy lime-

stune ur calearenite, has been used by Crocker (19462) for both consolidated

and unconsolidated windpiled caloareons material which consists Jargely of

sands, fragmental shells and furaminifera. Tairbridge et al, (1952) wave the

following general description: “Coastal limestone is a medium grained clastic

sediment in which the grains consist mainly of fragmental calcareous algae,

mollusea, foraminifera and bryozoa with yarying amounts of inorganic consti-

tuents and a cement of secondary calcium carbonate.” Aeolianite in the lakes

area is compuratively siliceous, which may be related to the proximity of the

Murray Mouth. It contains only small fragments of shells. This applies in a

larger degree to the Alexandrina than to the Bonney system,

104 . J. pe MOOY

1. The Alexandrina Coastline

The Alexandrina coastal dune range has a strong relief. It rises sharply

from Lake Albert to elevations of 100 and 150 ft. Here the range is up to four

miles wide. WNW-ESE sand ridges, pronounced in several places, have largely

been re-distributed presumably under a south-westerly wind component, The

regular soils are sandy, deep or shallow, and, without texture differentiation,

occupy swale positions in certain areas. The soils are separated from the under-

lying aeolinite by travertinized limestone which contains no shell fragments.

Commonly there are two sheets of this nature, separated by soil materials.

The Alexandrina coastline runs in approximately E-W direction. It can

be followed across the lakes to Goolwa and abuts against the foothills near

Middleton,

2, The Bonney Coastline

The Bonney coastal dune range runs parallel with the present coastline

and follows the inner edge of the Coorong. The accompanying dune range of

STAGES OF CONSTRUCTION OF THE BONNEY FORMER COASTAL DUNE RANGE

TRUMPLY POINT

— LEGEND —

STAGE 1 OF DUNE RANGES... Lv]

‘ 2° 7 . _ e fee

+ Bi, 4 pee e HBS

FORMER COORONG AREAS... fa]

SWAMPS AND LOW LYING FLATS . i232

25 FT CONTOUR b= opiania

Compited by

cy 2

ans AS x ¢ oe

Fig 5.—Stages of construction of the former Bonney coastal dune range.

approximately 1 to 2 miles width is relatively steeper than inland areas and

reaches elevations of 50 to 100 feet. This Bonney Range terminates at Pelican

Point on Narrung Peninsula, The soils can be easily distingnished from those

of the Alexandrina Range. The decalcified sandy soils directly overlie the traver-

LAKES ALEXANDRINA AND ALBERT 105

tinized crust of acolianite, which contains coarser and more shell fragments thay

the Alexandrina Kange, The leached sands have been re-sorted by wind action,

This has not Jed tu drastic separation from limestone arcas and the landscape

has preserved much of its original tepography,

Clouser examination of the morphology reveals that this unit was constructed

in three stages. The older stage is outlined by the 25 ft, contour, which Follows

the Bonney coastline for many miles along the Coorong in a_north-westerly

direction. At Magrath Flat it turns inland along the Princes Highway. East

of Meningic the coastal dunes smooth out to a large plain at an elevation of

approximately 25 ft. above sea level. This flat could represent a former Coorong

associated with the first stage of the dune range. This is confirmed by micro-

palaeontological information obtained from semi-consolidated calcareous sands

at 3 to 4 ft. below the surface in section 214, Hd, of Bonney (site 1 in Fig. 5).

The assemblage contains the foraminifera Lagenv, Cassicluline, Rotalia and

Globigerina. Nearby the micro-fauna consisted of Trileculina tricarinata

VOrhigny, Miliolinella oblouga Montagu, Elphidium simplex Cushman, Discorhis

dimidiatus Jones and Parker, Chara and Ostracoda. The foraminifera indicate

deposition under protected conditions in shallow water with limited access to

the sea, Suceinea shells occur sporadically in the assemblage. They could have

entered this Coorong with the wind trom the seaward dune ranges. The fauna

at site 2 (section 206, Ild. of Bonney) consists of Coxiella, Elphidium simplex

Cushman, five species of Ostracoda, Chara, and 2 small land gastropod and

indicates deposition in protected brackish water, into which gastropods are

readily washed,

During the second stage of construction the Bonney coustline was extended

to the place where Lake Albert comes nearest to the Coorong. If ts separated

from the previous stage by a strip of low-lying land where Coorong-like condi-

tions prevailed during formation of the dune. It has a somewhat lower eleva-

tion than the former Coorong East of Meningie and chains of pipeclay swamps

ceeupy the lowest positions, Cross-bedding in the acolianite was found ty

represent lagaonal deposition (site 3) similar to that taking place now along

the seaward side of the Coorong.

The final stage of construction took the Bonney coastline to Pelican Point.

There are chyins of swamps just inland of the dune range (unit 3 in Fig. 5) and

firmer channels which the River Murray maintained for some time between

the dunes of the second and third stage. If these swamps represent 2 Coorang,

it has a lower elevation than those of the first and second stages.

The subdivision of the Bonney dune range in three perts correlates well

with the distribution of various soils in the Bonney combination; the East-

Meningie, Meningie and Baker associations respectively (see soil map, de Mooy,

in press),

The East-Meningie soils are characterized by a grey surfuce sand, a bleached

subsurface merging into yellow sand and sometimes a thin, weakly developed

texture — B horizon,

‘Typical Meningie soils lack the bleached layer and the B horizon. The

Baker soil is an undifferentiated brown sand over aeolianite. On the basis of

the geumurphic history outlined above, it may be suggested that these suil

differences are primarily related to the factor time. If these striking differences

are indeed related to time of soil formation another older phase could possibly

he distinguished in the East-Meningie association, This phase includes the

sands near the Alexandrina system. Ifere boulders of Jaturite have formed on

the slopes: of limestone ridges exposed to south-vesterly winds, whereas com-

106 C.J, pe MOOY

monly in the Must-Meningie association only light ironstaining is found on lime-

stone. Also, the texture B horizon is better developed in this area,

The various stages as brought out by the 25 ft, cantour from ovilitary may

and modified by geomorphic and general soils evidence are sketched in Fig. 5,

3. The Relationships Between the Former Coastal Dunes in the Area

and those in the South-East

The stranded shorelines in the south-eastem province haye been studied

extensively by Tindale (1933 and 1447), Hossfeld (1950) and Sprigg (1952),

Sprigg mapped them in detail up te County MacDonnell and discussed their

dowawarping to the north-west under the influence of the rising Mount Lofty

Ranges. He calculated the degree of tilt uf varions dunes, starting from the ideu

(hat the Hats immediately in frant of the dune approximately represent the

original foreshore and that they were leycl when the dunes were formed, He

found a progressive decrease in dawnwarping from the older to the younger

dunes and therefore that the warping has been fairly continuous throughout

the formation vf this sequence. Using his figures and assuming that the rate

of downwarping of the dunes to the narth is constant, the tilt of these dunes

can be extrapolated over the remaining distance to fake Albert. The toe of

the Naracoorte Range would there be wt an elevation of 50 ft. above sca Ievel

(L.W.O.S.T., Port Adelaide) and at 13 ft. below at Narrung. The Peacock, East

Averiue apd West Avenue Ranges would he at respectively 50, 7 and 15 ft. below

sea level when reaching Lake Albert. The Reedy Creek Range would enter the

Hundred of Bonney at 7 ft. elevation and fall to 2 ft. below sea level near the

Murray Mouth. The Woakwine Rane would be at 40 ft. below sea level in

the Hd, of Bomey. It must be suspected that the tae of the dunes in the lakes

area which is commonly at a few feet above lake level, are adapted to more

recent deposition and not representative of the ancient shoreline, which may

be submerged, One uf the places where it is believed that the original Alex-

andyina shoreline can be observed, is south of Gookwa (plate 1, fig. b), This

fur end of the shoreline was probably near enough to the rising Mount Lofty

Ranges to be little influenced by downwarpine.

Ts relate the formations of the lakes area to the system of stranded coastal

dunes in the South-East more conclusive results than from elevations may be

expected trom a study of the topographic continuity of the south-eastern shore-

lines ¢o the north, The aerial photographs of the area between County MacDon-

nell and the lakes district were analysed by stereoscopic interpretation.

Sprigg's gevlogical map (1952) and a soil map of an urea surrounding Tin-

tinara (Jackson and Litchfield, 1954) provided basic information to extrapolate

from. The results are reproduced in Fig. 6, The geographical distribution and

nomenclature of the ranges as defined by Sprigg (1952) were adopted. The

West Avenuc and Peacock Ranges and an unnamed range following the Jand-

ward shore of the Coorong could he traced over a long distance northward into

Connty Cardwell, The unnamed range along the Coorong consists of two parts

with different topugraphy. They have been clistinguished as units 3 and 4 in

Fig. 6. Unit 3 is typified by a topography of beach ridges parallel with the

coastline. Towards the western fringe their height decreases, Unit 4 is an

undulating dune range without a special trend, [tis evidently older than unit 3.

[t is inconspicuous in County MacDonnell and was not mapped by Sprigg, Fur-

ther north in County Cardwell the proportions of the irregular dune landscape

of unit 4 increase, Simultaneously swamps gain significance in the ridged unit

3 and this terminates at Sult Creek, Unit 4 continues and ultimately becomes

part of the Bonnev dune landscape, which is a much larger formation. A

LAKES ALEXANDRINA ANG ALBERT 107

possible explanation for the asymmetry of unit 4 is a greater accumulation of

sands in the proximity of the former Lake Albert channel of the River Murray.

Another explanation is that other ranges as well cuntributed to the Bonney

landscape.

ji =

1 eflitrRay Brine

as \

TAILEM BENDYR,

#-——____ GEOMORPHOLOGICAL PHOTO-INTERPRETATION

Sma t MAP OF THE UPPER S.E. OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA |

' ay) — SCALE -

a ® te Mitts

—) eer

bv aT

WN te

BvRie page aoe Sy

re f Fs

th aH POL

\ 45 _——_—

—

\. \6 PY.

., ra 4 4 K = COM ALP YN ILL

fa ge pI — ——BCULAWDA |

Ty Fe ang a tia aeat 9%, “Sasuvasoar we

\ NY :

i Oe

= LEGEND SS

7 “

Ue PANGES WT SN “penn ce as at ‘

N -NE TREND ; YO @ .

Winey QRIENTANON [a 1 Bee —Speapener

SWAMPY AREAS TS gy i ec,

STEEP DUNE PANGES , UNDULATING _ oe

COUNTRY WITH WNW-ESE TREND... [ET Se}.

PLAINS & STEEP DUNE RANGES. WITH =

STRONG WHW~ESE TREND, 7]

PLAINS e SWAMPY AREAS WITH S a

OCCASIONAL WNW-ESE DUNES 8 |

FREELY DRAINED PLAINS... FB]

[| (RREBULAPLY UNDULATING COUNTRY WITH

PRENUENT BiNITE OUTCROPS. =)

) BLACK RANGE awe Ne ,

HNN RANE oT) AY 2 6 eS ty.

UNE ) oleae le 2 Se ees wa E\ ‘ Er YSN neti eT Waa >

STRANDED SHORELINES = XA ARE he

QUTCROPS OF BASEMENT ROCK... + Wi i 1 \ Ne 8 .

\ \\ AN, \ sarin

MASS

Fig. 6—Geomorphological photo-interpretation map of the Upper South-Rast.

Harlier correlations have been made by others. Tindale (1947) claims to

have traced the Woakwine Range over a distance of 230 miles from the Glenelg

River to Lake Alexandrina. We includes the East and West Dairy Ranges in

the Woakwine Terrace and mentions a break at Kingston. At Lake Albert

Tindale suggests that a later phase runs along the Coorong shore towards Hind-

marsh Island-and that an earlier phase forms the northern shore of Lake Albert

and runs down to Narrung and Point McLeay. Tindale attempted to trace the

Reedy Creck Range northwards to the River Murray. His Reedy Creek Range

correlates with Hossfeld’s (1950). It joins the West Avenue Range north of the

108 «). J. vp MOOY

Hundred of Murrabinna, County MacDonnell. This is shown as the West

Avenue Range on the present map in accordance with Sprigg’s nomenclature.

Tindale presumes that it can be correlated with a sandy ridge between Welling»

tun und Tailem Bend, primarily on considerations of height above sea level. He

does not account for differences in height with the South-East due to tectonic

movements, It follows further from the soil association map (de Muoy, in

press) that these deep sand ridges (Mason Till association) and their topo-

vraphy do not continue over long distunces.

Hossfeld (1950) and Sprigg (1952) in more recent work have shown that

the Woakwine Range bends out to the ocean and terminates at Gape Jaffa.

Sprigg claims that it is the Reedy Creek Range that can be followed from Vic-

turia ta the mouth of the River Murray. The course of the Reedy Creek Range

north of Reedy Creek (East of Kingston) is not clear from Spriggs map. He

mapped many parallel beach ridges, following the Coorong at the landside and

reluted them to more recent “Woukwine truncation” and “Anadara high" sea

levels, This Is unit 3 in Fig. 6. Since then remnants of an older dune range have

heen discovered amongst these younger ridges, und Sprigg (personal communt-

catinn) wow regards them as possible remnants af the Reedy Creck Range.

Some of them are shown on the Kingston geological sheet.

From a vombination ot this evidence with Fig. 6, it appeurs to he the Reedy

Creek Range (unit 4) that contributed to the formation uf the Bonney landscape,

Just nocth of the area mapped by Sprigg the distinct and straight shore-

lines disappear, due probubly to ihe effect of progressive downwarping in this

direction. The West Avenue Range and others to the east of it as well as the

fiterdynal swamps have been affected by strong redistribution of sands in an

E£-W direction.

The original limits of the various geomorphic units have been obscured by

this aeolian activity, Swampy areas traversed by occasional E-W stecp dunes

give the impression that the movement of sands oecurred when the ground

water level was lower than at the present time, The boundaries must be re-

garded as a simplified outline of the elements of the lanmlscape. Apart from

redistribution in E-W direction at a later stage, the ranges have also heen in-

fluenced during their formation by granitic outcrops. Granite is, for example,

deaponshie for the small inclusion of unit 4 in the West Avenue Range (see

“ip, 6).

‘The Naricoorte Range is discontinued at the nerthern limit of County Mac-

Donnell, Hossteld (1956) considers that it divides here and that one ranch

continues to the NW, This is known as the Black Range (unit 11), It is a

distinct formation which, however, shrinks to inappreciable sive towards its

northern extremity. An entire Cardife shell (identification B, C, Cotton) re-

covered From the wealianite at the northern limit of the range by Mr. G, Black-

burn and the author conficms its formation as a coastline. The Black Range

and the remains of the Hynam Range to the east of it (unit 12), although

older than the ridges to the west, have themselves not been affected by the

widespread redistribution of sands in E-W direction. They terminate SW of

Tintinana. Continuing in the same direction a range of considerable yolume can

be distinguished caonthiynicd from the hilly Mt. Boothby landscape characterized

by granite outcrops (unit 10), This range has a volume comparable to the

Alexundrina Range and meets the Alexandrina combination at the eastern limit

of the soil-surveved areca. The deep sands of the oncoming range are of the

Boney type (East-Meningie association, de May, in press) am it is clear that

they foin z bre oristing landscape here. They partly overlie the local Alexan-

drina soils which continue for some distance due east along the 100 foot contuur

LAKES ALEXANDRINA AND ALBERT 109

line, Portions of the Alexandrina combination and particularly the portion

mapped as the Ashville association during thre soll survey, possibly served as

u core for the forming coastal dune landscape as was the case with the Mount

Boothby unit. Perhaps it is significant in this vespect that Sprigg (personal

communication) claims that the coastal dune ranye running east of Keith ond

Tintinara in a north-westerly direction bends westward towards Binnies Look-

mut, A fraction of this range was mapped by Jackson and Litchfield (1954)

and is reproduced in Fig, 6. It probably joins np with the Naracoorte Range

via Mount Monster and is the same range as referred to by Hossfeld (1950)

as the West-Naracoorte Runge.

A possible connection between the south-eastern ranges and the Mount

Boothhy granite arc bus been obscured by a system of steep E-W sand hills

(unit 7), The regular alternation of ranges and interdumal swaps can no

longer be vecognived here. [t appears that the E-W alignment noticeable over

the entire area of County Cardwell has joined the ranges. ‘Tho roason may be

that the ranges converged here as suggested by [Tossteld (1950), possibly core

bined with the influcnee of pre-existing granite outcrops. The entire sheet of

E-W dunes could have been formed in the one operation, but for one obser

vation; no BAW orientation is obvions in a fringe along the Coorony, Here the

dominating trend is SW to NE (unit 4, Fig, 6), Going east across the boundary

between units 4 and 7 there is a merging increase of E-W orientation, while at

first the original trend is still recognraithle. This rather suggests that several

poriods of B-W trending are involved, alternating with SW-NE trending in

every newly formed dune range, The effect of each Following E-W redisiri-

bution of sands here overlapped and amplified the effect of the former, while

the fast Pleistocene coastal dune unit failed to experience E-W redistributinn

of sands. This possibly will be dealt with further in the discussion of the acolian

activity in the area.

From the mode of contact of the B-W dunes with the Black and Hynam

Ranges it appears that they crossed those ranges, while the latter showed no

sigus of instability or movement of their materials,

__Evidenly no complete tapographic connection of farmer coastlines can be

made. If further remains oceur in the E-W trended dune landscape, detailed

sails inspection could provide the information required to reconstruct a furthey

extension ot the ranges, H

The available information suggests that the Alexandrina Range of the

lakes area corresponds with the Black Runge, althouy) this has a considerably

smaller volume, and further with the Naracuorte Runge. The coastline was in

places deformed by pre-existing formations, sametimes having a granitic core,

During the list period of greater extont of the lakes Alesandrinu and Albert

there was extensive sedimentation in low-lying surroundings of the present

lakes. Its maximum extent is marked by the ontline of the Maleolm eombina-

linn (Fig, 1), Black, fine-textured nuiterials containing up to 70 per cent. clay

particles form the principal deposit. Jt is certain from the eantact of the Mal-

culm combinition with the surrounding country that this sedimentation ietivity

post-dates all other deposition and aeolian activity in the area with the excep-

tion of recent alluvial deposition along the Angas and Bremer Rivers (“yonnger

Uluvial deposits” in Fig. 4) and sand drift caused by human beings. — ”

The Malcolm deposits were laid behind the shelter of the present coastal

dune range as in extension of the alluvial clays alone the lower course of the

River Murray, The mode of depusition, althugh of estuarine character, varied

cunsiderably in Various portions of the area, Eust of the lakes Alexandrina and

hia C.J. pm MOOY

Albert there were shallow cmbayments where uear-lacustrine conditivns pre-

yvailed. Towards the island near the Murray Mouth brackish water sedimen-

tation occurred under greater tidal influence. In the Hindmarsh association

many sharply defined, curving depositionary creeks fingered out into the plains

( Pi. \ Vig. C), The deposition was a very slow process, continuing for a long

riod,

The original landscape was not disturbed. The thickness of the deposits

is related t) the topography of the landscape prior to flooding, Depressions

reecived more than rises which mav have only one foot af clay, A buried

sil overlying limestone can usually be detected within 6 feet from the surface,

Movement of water to and fro followed the low-lying central arcas and an occa-

gional well-defined connecting channel. Blind Creek which has previously been

mistaken for a former stream bed of the River Murray (Tindale, 1947) is

one. of them.

The maximum level of the deposits can be estimated from the extent and

maxinum level of the foodwaters of the River Murray in 1956, The 1956 flnads

are the highest on record. They were unable to inundate a considerable portion

of thy: Malcolm clays in higher positions. Records in the Engineering and Water

Supply Department state maximum flood levels of 111-3 ft. R.L. at the Goalwa

barrages, 113-05 ft. RuL, at Milang, 113-02 ft. R.L. at Meningie and 115-85 ft

R.L.. at Wellington, Taking the mean sea level at the Murray Mouth as 103-75

— WEY TO COMBINATIONS —

SEYMOUR.COMBINATION SS

MALCOLM ‘ ~~

—— FORMER AND PRESENT

LAKE BORDERS ___

MOTE S07 engine ernifs, stm oun, BPI

see woe @

~~ =» « 2s &¢ & 6

—~= SCALE

Q i

CHAINS BO ag 2 MLNS

«3958 ALC CRASS

Fig. 7,—Fragment of soil assooiation map showing three parallel borders of Lake Alusandlyina.

ft, R.L., it appears that a water level LO ft. ahove the sea is insufficient to cover

the entire Malcolm deposits. in addition to that, if subsidence is considered to

have been negligible, there is still shrinkage of the sediment to acconnt far.

The clay was probably subjected ta similar shrinkage as that in the hed of

Lake Albert for which Taylor et al. (1931) found a loss of volume of 80 to 90

per cent. on air drying, It means that the depositing waters reached a€ least

LAKES ALFEXANDRINA AND ALBERT 111

several feet above the present rises. River foods wuald have had to be banked

up by # higher sea level to reach this level. Traces of a 10 [t. bigher sea level

are abundant alone the Australian coast and it js possible that the Maleolm

deposits reached their greatest extent and height during that period,

Ketreat of the high lake Ievel occurred by degrees. During its maximum

extent Lake Alexandrina formed a_ border Fhrow rearrangement oF Iocal

materials. This border. B® -a in Fig. 7. runs three oviles east of the lake, parallel

with the present edge. and joius ridged land that preserved its original topo-

graphy (P d). On this ridge developed a soil profile with distinct texture

change, A second former lake border developed approximately one rile

from the lake. It represents a standstill of the retreating water level, or a

return after 2 more complete retreat. The coarse, sandy soil has no textural

development, it overlies the original heavy clay where this was not first removed

hy wave action, The third sandy border formed at the present lake edge, This

evidence can be correlsted with phenomena in those swales of the present

constal dunes, deep enough ta be affected by groundwater. The level of the

groundwater in the narrow dune range would fluctuate with the level of the

sex. It appears that pauses in the lowering groundwater formed concentric

rings in the sand whieh are now marked by diferent vegetation through different

salinity conditions (PL 2).

The origin of the material and the conditions of deposition are borne out

by micropalzeontological examination of saruples taken from the area east of

Lake Alexandrina, Tiutwitehere [sland and Ewe Island. The foraminifera as-

semblage reveuled considerable ditferuntiation in the conditions of sedimenta-

tion both geographically and between various sedimentary horizons of the one

profile. East of Lake Alexandrina no foraminifera could he found in the clay

deposits at sites 4, 5 and 6 in Fig. 7 to conflict with freshwater deposition, nor

in the buried soil at site 4. Ft is interesting that only a thin layer at 63 to 66

inches below the surface, at the top of the buried soil, bears witness of an inecur-

sion of brackish water by virtue of an assemblige including: Elphidium simplex

Cushman and Ostracedes,

On Tauwitchere Isiand (see Fig. 1) the microfauna including Trochennina

inflata Montagu is indicutive of brackish water deposition. Closer to the

Miuvay Mouth on Ewe Island the assemblage while reflecting more salme sedi-

mentary conditions also indicates that the materials were deposited while pro-

tected trom direct contact with the oeean, The microlauna consists of sponge

spieules and the foraminifera: Trochammina inflata Montagu, Discerbis sp.

Globigerina bulloides AOvbigny, Planorhulina medditerranensis dOrbigny, El-

phidium macellum Fichtel and Moll, and other Elphidium sp. and “Retalia

bercarit’ Linne. Some of the planktonic foraminifera on Ewe Island mav have

been washed through the nearby Murray Mouth, Evidently the present coastal

dunes were in existence priur ta depusition of the Maleolm. clays. This is in

accordance with the retreat of sea level by degrees, us is recorded by the

swales of the coastal dune range.

Subsequently the diatoms at site 4 were examined to render further in-

formation on the depositional envirunment of the presumed fresh wuter horizons

devoid of a foraminiferal assemblage. The diatoms Campylodiscus clypeus and

C. echenies ace common and there are a few specimens of Hyalodiscus laevis.

This is a brackish water assemblage, It remains the same with depth, but the

diatem content increases greatly at 57 to 60 inches, approaching the top of tie

buried soil, for which the foraminifera indicated a brackish environment. IE

dixtoms may be used to draw ecological eonvlusions for this area where the

112 OG. J. nr MOOV

environment yaried considerably with the distance from the Murray Mouth, it

would appear that freshwater conditions never prevailod.

(ad) Periodicity of Formation of gypsum and pipeclay

Deposits and Thetr Relative Ave

The material known 4s pipeclay in the Coorong flats is, in fact, 2 dolomitic

luke-marl deposit according to Mawson (1929), whereas Jack (1921) suggests

that the pipeclay at Meningie and along the Cooreng is Jour gypsum, Rather

similar material taken from swamps during the soil survey of the lakes area

proved by chemical analyses to be a mixtute of gypsum and dolomite. Pipeclay

swamps are found in depressions east of the lakes in places where Malcolm clay

deposits had no access. ‘They oyerlic undisturbed buried soils.

Jack (1921) extensively dealt with the varieties, distribution and origin

of the gypsim deposits of Sowth Australia, He discussed three possible sources

for gypsum deposits:

1, Decomposition of sulphicles to sulphates in the presence of limestone.

2, Derived from sea water when au arm of the sea is cul off by a bar,

permitting sen water intake to keep pace with evaporation.

3. Concentration from cyclic salts in evaporating areas, while excess sodium

and the more soluble salts would be carried to the sea by the gradual

eqreulation of groundwater.

He vousiders the “pipeclay” swamps near Meningie and Cooke Plains to he part

nf the tormer extension of Lakes Albert and Alexandrina, They were then more

readily accessible to sea water and would act as efficient evaporating pans. At

Cooke Plains gypsum dunes piled up subsequently.

This view is also taken by King 1196 ), who states that the gypsum deposits

are related geologically to the eld lake bed, where they crystallized. He re-

lates the formation of gypsum on the bed of the saline flats and the commence-

ment of accumulation in dunes tu the gradual emergence of the land after the

inundations during the high sea-level period of the middle Recent. King found

impure granular gypsum overlying concretionary limestone in shallow testholes

in the “pipeclay Hats”. The limestone carried an assemblage of marine fossils

“typical of the middle Recent period” including Coxiella, Diala lnuta and abun-

dant foraminifera,

The soil survey, however, has shown that the history of development is

somewhat more complicated. The “former lake bed” can be divided inte two

formations:

1 A low-lying purtion of the Seymour combinution where the “pipeclay”

and the gypsum dunes were formed (Fig. 8),

2 The black clay deposits of the Malcohn combination which extend from

Lake Aletantctna fo just east of Cooke Plains. They are a younger

formation and overlie the Seymour combination. It has been pointed

out that these materials, which probably originated during the latest

sreater extension of the lakes contain no foraminifera. This suggests

that the formation of the gypsum deposits at Covke Plains may predate

the formation of the lake bed indicated by the Malcolm combination,

They may be related to the top of the buried soil at 5 ft. depth below

the surface, which witnessed an incursion of relatively brackish water

according to its microfauna.

Conditions fur the accumulation of gypsum dunes apparently prevailed

pevindically. Howchin (1929) recorded several beds of gypsum alternating with

LAKES ALEXANDRINA AND ALBERT 113

sandy limestone in a bore at Cooke Plains. Actually, the Maleohn combination

abuts on smaller gypsum dunes at the windward side of the pipeclay flats 9

Fig. 8), which may represent an earlier pliase of gypsum dune formation. Older

gypsum dunes occur due west of Cooke Plains along the channel of the Murray

River (Fig. 7). Here they have subsequently been eroded and have undergone

several cycles of aeolian activity. Sands have been deposited over them, soil

profiles formed and stripped to limestoné making them identical with the soils

— KEY TO COMBINATIONS

SEYMOUR COMBINATION

SCALE O— MALCOLM ‘

CHANS BD gn I

168 PEL, KECLOULLS. GYPSUM DUNES

NOTE: Soi? nopybingy vrnits,..-stoan thon. BPaa

Fig, 8—Fraginent of soil association map joining Fig. 7 to the wesl and showing the geographic

relationships between the Maleolm deposits, pipeclay swamps and gypsum dunes.

of the Seymour combination. The gypsum is present in crystalline form, whereas

the dunes at Cooke Plains are unconsolidated and composed of seed gypsum.

One explanation for the false bedding described by Tate (1882) is that a

Pleistocene high sea level inundated these older dines.

(e) Former Mouths of the River Murray

Howchin (1929) has stated that the Coorong may represent a former outlet

of the Murray when the river had a more southerly position, from which it has

heen gradually driven northward by the encroaching sand ridge.

‘aylor and Poole (1931) suggested that the River Murray ut some stage

flowed through Lake Albert to join the Coorong, They recognixed silted up

river channels and mentioned a cut-of billabong in Meningie Bay, The soil

survey provided further evidence that the Murray at one stage maintained

some’ channels across the Bonney Range. A system of depressions (unit 5 in

Fig, 5) nearly joins the toe of Lake Albert with the Coorong. Presumably the

river channel through the present Lake Albert became confined to this passage

upon. construction of the third stage of the Bonney dune landscape, when also

he inlet of the ocean was transformed into the lake; contrary to Howchin’s

view the present coastline was not in existence at that time. Finally, the main

channel shifted to Lake Alexandrina.

Another former outlet of the River Murray wus Enund south of Goolwa (Pl,

3, Figs, a and b). Seaward af, and at lower elevation than the Alexandrina

shoreline, which is well preserved here, the small creek draining the Middleton

ll4 ©. Joe MOOY

association, and the estuarine Hindmarsh deposits converge to the site of a

former opening in the present dunes, The dunes are locally narrow and re-

latively low.

(£) Periodicity of Aeolian Activity and the Theory

of Pleistocene Climatic Changes

The strongly WNW-ESE orientated dune ridges of the Seymour combina-

tion are superimposed on a gently undulating landscape also originating, from

acolian activity, without such orientation, West of the River Murray it is clear

that after soils had formed the old landscape was stripped down to a lime-

erziched horizon by renewed acolian activity and remnants of the redistributed

sands formed the present dunes. Formation of this landscape required two

periods of instability and acolian activity (Pl. 4, Fig. a).

East of the River Murray three transverse dunes running approximately

north to south can be recognized. They have a considerably larger volume

than the E-W dune ridges. Ina section from Wellington to Sherlock (Fig, 9)

the first dune (Mason Hill association) is followed by an E-W ridged landscape

( Perkindoo association), ‘This peters out in stony plains (Tailem Bend associa-

z S 3 aad a

= =o 2 s =

2 a a

5s S55 5 &

SiS j MASON HUL-- | PEAKINDOO-4 J, 2, 3;35, G MOORLANDS ASSac™

Ze Zoo; Fiei, <=

Fe o,raws -

' * ;

]

}

APPRORIMATELY 24 MILES

Fig, 9—East-West section hetween Wellingten and Sherlick,

tim), "The second transverse dune (Covlinong-a) rises sharply from the pluins

and is followed by parallel longitudinal dunes (Coolinong-b) which merge into

stony plains. The third dime is the westernmost part of the Moorlands asso-

ciation.

The first system is differentiated inte: deep sunds (Mason Hill) on the dunes,

a ridged Jandscape with finer textured subsvils and plains with stoney soils.

This becomes lost in the eastern units. In the second system the soils of the

ridged Jandscape intrude upon the range itself and in the third dune the lime-

stone follows similarly. This suggests that the third dune has undergone more

stages of erosion and soil formation than the other two. An older aye for the

third dune is also indicated by the fact that it is overlain by the soil pattern

of the second dune in places. The formation of transverse dunes may be ex-

plained by repeated activity of the same winds which formed the longitudinal

dune ridges, Transyerse duncs could form where there is an abundant supply of

sands, whereas seif dumes could form when materials become scarcer. A con-

nection between the origin of the transverse dunes and the shores of former

extensions of Lake Alexandrina is unlikely, because the dunes arc parallel to

the gradient of the country.

The Alexandrina combination has also been influenced by several perivis

of wind activity as indicated by two sheets of travertinized limestone, overlying

aeolianite (Pl, 4, Fig. b), and finally there is the repeated formation of gypsum

dunes, mentioned earlier. ‘

Kiedistribution of sands in the Bonney landscape has not greatly disturbed

the original topography, A SW tu NE trend is evident in areas of steep topo-

Eraphy, If there has been redistribution of sands in an E-W direction the effect

LAKES ALEXANDRINA AND ALBERT tls

has been weak. It may be concluded that the formation of the Bonney land-

scape post-dutes all or at least most of the aeolian activity which resulted in

WNW-ESE dune alignment elsewhere, The situation in the Seymuur and

Bonney combinations is in agreement with the impression gained by stereoscopic

examination Vhat an E-W orientation is superimposed on the originally NE

treuding furmer coastal dunes in County Cardwell (units 6 and 7, Fig. 6) and

at the westernmost dune range (unit 4) has preserved its preduminantly NE

trend,

There is general agreement that the south-eastern coastal dune ranges date

from the Pleistocene. This certainly applies to the Bormey Rauye, which from

corelation with its suuth-castern equivalents may be related to the Great inter-

glacial (according to Sprigg, 1952), or the Penultimate Gluciation (according to

Tlossfeld, 1950). Hence the formation of WNW-ESE sand ridges of the older

wits in the area which actually extend over 4 large portion of southern Aus-

tralia also dates from the Pleistocene period. This is in conatrist with the hypo-

\hesis postulated by Crocker, who relates the distribution of leached sands to

u severe Recent Arid Period of some 3,000 to 6,000 veurs avo (Crocker, 1946a

and h), Further supporting evidence is that the alluvial deposits of the Bremer

combination eroded the older Seymour and Vilang combinations. which at that

time already had their E-W orientution fully developed.

Several soils formed on the Brenier materials lave been sampled and their

mechanical analysis compared with thuse from the Milang eombination in

Table 1. Firstly, it ts clear that the soil materials of profiles A227. 229, 232 and

38, representing the Milang landscape, have @ typical mechanival cumpasition,

They contain pruetically na_silt and have a rather constant course ta fine sand

ratio. These (Solodized Solonetz) soils have a very sharp texture contrast be-

tween the surface (A) and subsoil (B) horizon. ‘The ratio is ramarkahly con-

stant vertically also and both horizons are genetically strongly related, Sccundly,

the soils of alluvial origin of the Milang (A230, 331 and 239) and Bremer com-

binations have a much lower coarse ta fine sum ratio quite distinct from those

of the old landseape. They contain an appreciable amen of silt En this

respect the young alluvial soils (A400, 405 and 425) are best provided. These

figures indicate that no mixture of materials between the two units occurred,

not even in the small alluvial inclusions within the Milang combination; which

is to be expected if there were two separated periods of aeolian activity.

It wenld he untenable tu maintain that the sand ridges of the Milang com-

bination originate trom the Recent Arid Period. because in that case depusition

of the Bremer materials coupled with removal of portion of the ridged landd-

scape, follawed by acolian redistribution inte gently indulating plains without

specific trend, subsequent formation of mattre soily and deposition of the

Maleolm deposits as well as younger alluviuin should all post-date the Recent

Ark] Cyele. The geomorphology of the Jukes area is rather in agreement with

the hypothesis furthered by Fairbridye ef al. (1952) who concluded that evi-

dence in Western Australia corresponds closely with the conclusion reached in

Morocco that successive generations of ueolianites correspond to interglacial

periods. Kach major cycle of dunes and high shorelines was separated from

the next by erosional phenomena of a short period when sea level was consider-

ably lowered, The maxima of the pluvials correspond te the glacial maxima

when all the climatic belts migrated equatorwards and temperate-wet climates

interrupted the descrt conditions when the aeolianites were formed.

Fairbridge (1953) and also Hossfeld (1950) associated the suggestion that

erosive cycles occurred repeatedly during the Pleistocene period with the theory

C, J. pe MOOY

116

SE-0 ai $I L¥ LL = £-0 Str ¥ e9 9To1q

Temaqeur [BLA |e Bun0 x 12-0 SE rd Gz ") =o wr Gop | wwoy AvP yBary

euoysue'y

ureo] AeA

12-0) 8% UZ RE 8 a L-§ or v sure, sesuy

oI-0 LE ¥ I¢ f lest 08ST LOF V QF Sallag

&-0 eg 8 If L ea $LOL

0 8 IT rat) 6 Iv F0 10h V Bf Solty

9-0 6L — LP LG dq 1z-81 GO8 W Ig sotleg

Ge-0 it u er (i 1d 11-8 868 ¥ OG Seley

¢9-0 gt I 18 0% a SUFI 168 ¥ 6F Satay

pues

9-0 LE g +P oT 2a OE-£E O68 ¥ SULB]q LeuIeIg ToUIOIg,

9:0 Ls g 9L 1a FI-9

CFO a IT ig IV z0 688 ¥ OI salag

19-0 3¢ OT at Ta gia

20 rat 81 Fr : Vv TO 183 ¥ Z| slag

Perea) ig i) 1g Ta tal

{eMapeUL [BLAUTTy ve) F 9 LO IV 0) O88 V¥ LT sone Suey

F1 LG — (ira IF a It-L

yey UT 1 ¢ g gf Te Iv £0 Bes ¥ pues oT Aysy

ge if = er 9¢ | eV O8-ST

aap JSoM-SBO uqQ §-L ra = Ge eo l¥ £-0 FEE ¥ pues WANS quieg jULIpPIBexopy

7 i ae 1

§-1T OF € ra ir ea rea ae j 5

apes ST 8 £ Le 0g Vv xt) Lit V (¢9) SI seneg ANOULABS

3-1 $¢ T 8% IF jess ST-6

wee] 0-3 £ if 18 €9 IV 2-0 GEE ¥ pues uo4terp

8-1 68 = ae 6g 1a 98-08

adpl qsom-qsea jo adoye L-T e sort cE 19 IV 6-0 Che V pues woyAHpy

F-1 RG I Ro OF fs se

yy. UL F-T 9 g g& es Iv gO 6cz F Somag

Let Le = Le CF ea 0-91

- 9-1 0% = 8 FP Ta FT-E1 |

espll Jseai-ises UC) e-T I — 9 6& iV ¥-0 LEE V pues ssruUly Suyyyy

SyABIO yy be g ‘AL iT Qs ARO 4S a" ol ssi) UOZWOFT yqideq . ON Tos TWOTPBUIQULOTS

j ayuoig

~sisdpRUy [BOTUBTOeyYT

TT ATV

LAKES ALEXANDRINA AND ALBERT WT

ot wae changes as expressed by Flint (1945), Keble (1947) and Gentilli

$49).

Flint claims that glacial periods of the regions affected by glaciers Were

replaced by plovial periods al lowes latitudes, during which the climate was

relatively moist and cool while the interpluvial periods were characterized by

warmer and drier climates. His hypothesis, based on fluctuations of atmos-

pherie turbul:nee, allows for a number of erosive cycles during the Pleistocene.

Keble (loc. cit.) and Gentilli (loc, cit.) expressed the opinion that during

glacial maxima most of Australia was covered by humid, covl forest. This

would be due to the advanced temperate belt during the expansion of the

glaciers: During glacial minima the north would be under superhumid forest,

while the south would still fall in a subhbumid woodland zone. This would be

associited with the expansion of the wet equatorial belt. It follaws from this

that during each major glacial and interglacial cycle the arid climate belt would

move across the Australian continent twice, Hheoretically creating two cycles of

unstable vegetation and landscape in general,

Regarding the alignment of longitudinal dimes it relation Lo the prevailing

winds, Barkley (1935) pointed out that the direction uf the Mallee sand dunes

appears to be determined nol by lhe prevailing winds which are north in winter

and south in summer (s.i.c.) but by the direction ot the strongest gusts accom-

panying the change of wind,

The prevailing winds of the present day, however, create a north-casterly

trend in the coastal dunes and it is difficult to sec how the WNW-ESE dune

ridges could be in balance with them. Yet they are longitudinal dunes which

developed parallel to the direction of the dominuting wind at the time of their

formation.

Madigan (1936, 1935, 1946) showed that the sand dunes of the Australian

deserts are everywhere longitudinal tidges, There trend is parallel to the diree-

tion cf the prevailing wind, which varies: in different parts of the desert. The

general trend in the Simpson desert is to the NNW-

The hypothesis of migrating climatic belts offers an explanation For the

direction of the Mallee dune ridves, whereby the wind regime associated with

each climate is not affected. Southward shifts of the climatic belts duving

periods of decreasing glaciation can even account for recurrence of those desert

couditions, separated by periods of dominating south-westerlies.

Such a theory even if it is an over-simplification of the real climatic Auctua-

tions is quite able to explain the formation of the landscape in ageeement with

field observations: formation of the visible coastal dune ranges as unconsolidated

sands during Pleistocene high sea leycls, aeolian redistribution in SW ta NE

direction nnder snhsequent arid conditions, leaching of lime and sail formation

in temperate-wet climates of the glacial maxima, E-W redistribution of leached

sands under unstable landscape conditions during subsequent aridity and por-

hela coastal dune formation when the sea level dpproaches a new maximum

evel,

IV. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Grateful acknowledgment is made of the work by Dr. Ny tb. Ludbrook of

the Department of Mines, South Australia, who carried out the palacontological

determination of the environmental conditions of depusitiun frum soil samples

submitted,

Mr, B. ‘Tindale from Yarra Junction, Victoria: examined the diatoms,

Mr. G. Blackbur, C.S.LB.O., Division of Soils, contributed with very

helpful suggestions and criticism on the manuseript.

118 (. J. pe MOOY

‘The mechanical analyses were carried out under the direction of Mr. J. T.

Hutton, of the same division.

V. REFERENCES

Barruey, IL, 1935, Dune building in the Victorian mallee, Rept. A.N.Z.A.A.S,, 29, pp.

436-437 (abstr.),

Crocker, R. L., 1946a. Post-Miocene climatic and geologic history and its. significance in

relation to the genesis of the major soil types. of South Australia, Bull. C.LS.R. No, 193.

Crocker, R, L., 1946b, An introduction to the soils and vegetation of Eyre Peninsula, 5.A.,

‘Trans. Roy, Soc. $.A., 70, pp, 83-L07.

Famusnmocr, R. W., and Trrcnent, C., 1952. Soil horizons and marine bands in the coastal

limestones of 'W.A,, J. Proc: Roy. Soc, N.S.W., 86, pp. 68-87,

Famsnioce. R. W., 1953, Australian stratigraphy.

Fuixr, R. F,, 1945. Pleistocene yeulogy and the Pleistocene epoch.

Gentittt, J., 1949, Foundations of bird geography. The Einu. 49, pp, 85-129.

Hossreup, P. 8., 1950. The late Cainozoje history of the South-Bast of South Australia, Trans.

Roy. Soe. $.A,, 73. pp. 232-279,

Howcrin, W., 1929. Notes on the geology of the Great Pyap Bead (Loxton), River Murray

Rasin and remarks on the geological history of the River Murray, Trans. Roy. Sac. S.A.,

53, pp. 167-195.

Jack, KR. L., 1921. The salt aud gypsum resources of South Australia, Dept. of Mines, Geal,

Sarvey of S.A., Bull. No. S.

Jackson, E. A. and. Lrrenmenn, W. H., 1954, The soils and potential land use of part of

County Cardwell in the Coonalpyn Downs, South Australia, C.$.0.R.0.. Soils and Land

Use Series, No, 14.

Kesce, R. A., 1947, Notes on Australian Quaternary climates and anigration, Mem, Nat. Mus.

Vict,, 15, pp. 25-81.

Kin, D., 1950. Unpublished data.

Kine, D., 1951. Cooke Plains gypsum deposit, Mining Review (S.A. Dept. of Mines), No.

91, pp. 141-148.

Manican, ©. T., 19836, The Australian sand ridge deserts, Geogr, Rey,, 26, pp. 205-227.

MAneAN, C.'T., 1935. The Simpson desert and its. borders, J. Prac. Roy. Soc. N.S,W., ZL, pp.

503-434,

Mamcan, GC, T., 1946. The Simpson cesert expedition 1939: Scientific reports: No, 6 Geo

logy; the sand formations, ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 70, np. 45-63.

Mawson, D., 1929, South, Australian algal lunestones in process. af formation. Geol. Soc.

Loudon Quart. Journal, 85 (1V), pp. 613-623,

péE Mooy, C, J. (in press). Soils and. potential land use of the area around Lakes Alexan-

drina and Albert, South Australia, C.S.1.R.0., Soils and Land Use Series.

Sparec, R, C., 1952. The geology of the South-East Province, South Australia, with ‘special

relerence to Quaternary coastline migrations and modern beach developments, Dept.

of Mines, Geological Survey of S.A., Bull. No. 29.

Tate, R., 1882. Geological sectims about Wellington or north-east shore of Lake Alexan-

drina, Trans. and Proc. and Report Roy. Sac. $.A., 4, pp. 144-145,

Tate, R., 1900, Section of a well bore at Mulgundawa, near Wellington, $.A., Trans. Hoy,

Soe. S.A,, 24, pp. 109-111.

Taytor, J. K., and Pootr, H. G., 1931, Beport on the soils of the bed of Lake Albert, South

Australia, J, C,S.1-R., 4, pp. 83-95,

Tinvate, N, B,, 1933. Geulogical and physiographical notes, Tantanoola Caves, South-East

of South Australia, Trans, Roy. Soc, §$.A., 57, pp. 130-142.

TinvAre, N, 5B... 1947,. Subdivision of Pleistovene time in S.A. Rec, S.A, Mus., 8. pp. 619-652.

Du Moay PLATE |

Fig, a—YView of river terraces at Currency Creek. Micldle terrace (CGa) in foreground,

aii a te te ee

Fig. b.—Stranded shoreline near Goolwa, The toe of the dune (1) is situated above

the Jevel of the flats (11) in foreground,

De Mooy PiLare | (cont, )

Fiz. ¢—Detail of depositionary creeks in Malcolin combination on Hindmarsh Tsland,

The Murray Mouth just below the photograph is at the south of the island,

PLATE 2

ad purgsnysuno x uO ALES daap UI SOLE OLQUIIUOT)

“ppasuru

De Mooy

Dr Moos PLATE 3

ANDRINA RANGE

SiTE OF

FORMER

ia a is tics, ‘ *

Vig. b,—Site of possible former Murray Mouth looking south fron. Alexandrina Range,

Surt visible over low dunes,

De Moov PLATE «4

Vig. a—Gently vindulating limestone tindscape with superimpesed dune ridwes in

Seymour combination

Fig, bh—Two sheets of limestone overlying acolianite in the Alexandrine combination,

Grass is urowing on top of the lower limestone Tayer,

PLEISTOCENE STRANDLINES OF THE UPPER SOUTH-EAST OF

SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

BY NORMAN B. TINDALE

Summary

PLEISTOCENE STRANDLINES OF THE UPPER SOUTH-EAST OF

SOUTIT AUSTRALIA.

by Norman B. Tinpace

{Read 10 July 1953]

The Pleistocene Terraces of the South-Fast of South Australia have received

much attention because the low slope of the continental shelf has caused the

successive strandlines of the Pleistocene and Recent Periods to be spread out

over a width of more than 60 miles from the present coastline, enubling detailed

study of many minor phases elsewhere obscured by erosion and by compression

wit 2 much steeper continental margin. The present writer first contributed to

the discussion of this subject in 1933 and again in 1947.

On several journcys between Naracoorte and Keith since 1954 the Fore-

dune of the Naracoorte Terrace has heen closely followed and it was established

that it remains on the right of the observer all the way from Nuracoorte ta Keith,

there being a hinge or change of direction from north-north-west to nurth by

eust in the vicinity of Darwent Waterhole (Section 7, Hundred of Willulookz),

where outeropy of granite, furming Jow domes at or near former sea Jevel cause

local disturbance in the regularity of the dune linc, There ure other granite

uuterops in the Houdred of Marcollat and to the west. At a point three miles

eust of Keith the Naracoorte Terrace forc-dunes can be seen in section at quar-

ties in the vicinity of Section 51, Hundred af Stivling. The front of the dunes

appears to face a vast embayment forming the Keith flats which also at ene timc

seem to have been a lake. Vhe section was demonstrated to Dr, Brian Daily

an it brief visit to. Keith on 15 February, 1957.

Elevation of Keith R.R. Station on the former sea and Jake fluor Frenting

the Naracoorte Range is LOL ft, and the line of railway rises sharply te 210 ft.

ag it climbs the terrace escarpment towards Brimbago. Naracoorte K.R, Ste-

tion is at 189 #t, It is situated on a Hood fan ut the mouth of Naracoorte Creek

where it opeus on to the old sea Boor of Naracoorte times. Away from this

alluviated area the interdune flat in the vicinity of Naracoorte may be as low

as 120 ft. above sea level, as at Lake Roy about twelve mites north-north-west.

‘The interpretation placed on the maps of the Geological Survey and out-

lined in Bulletin 29 of the Mines Department of South Australia delineates the

Nuracvorte "lerrace as running north-westward in a direct continuation of the

line of the Terrace at Naracoorte (Sprige, 1952). The new facts indicate that

just beyond the point where their maps terminate there is a marked change in

direction,

Some revision may be necessary in cur views aud in particulur there may

have been less warping than postulated by Sprigg or it may have affected a

smaller area. The writer has formed the opinion, indeed, that the Naracoorte

Terrace reported as standing at approximately 145 ft. above present sea level

and vonsidered to be down-warped to ihe north at a tilt of 1-3 ft. to the mile,

may be less down-warped than has becn suggested, some part of the apparent

warping being an expression of differential erosion and sedimentation, and an-

other the diversion of the strandline to the north which alters our interpreta-

tion of the pusitions of the strands, Tt muy be significant that a feeble prior

river system has maintained itself across the area ever since this series of strand-

Trans. Roy. Svc. 5. Aust. (1959), Vol, x2,

20 N. B. TINDALE

lines commenced to form and the scale of warping docs not appear to have

induced rejuvenation or marked diversion as a result of the deformation.

Unfortunately, the testing of the area presents difficulties for, although very

uecurate survey heights are availahle for the South-East of our State, these

Leeome fewer and fail altogether towards the Upper South-East, leaving prin-

cipully the Railway Survey heights as the basic guide. JZowever, these observa-

tions may serve to draw renewed attention to earlier deductions by Tindale

(1933, 1947), Ie considered it possible to trace cach Pleistocene ‘strandline

werdss the area broken by granitic domes northward of the Ihindreds of Tand-

seer and Peacock, etc., in such a way as to link up with corresponding strand-

lines at roughly similar heights above sea level, along the Murray River, The

Marmon Jabuk Range north of Keith was considered, for example, to be a north.

ward extension of the “earliest Pleistocene dune Range”, which he then con-

sidered to be the Naracoorte Strand. [t can now be re-asserted that it is likel

to be part of a complex with a front of Naracoorte and a rear of Hynam strand-

line features representing an early Inter-Glacial sea margin ov margins, perhaps

of Milazzian date, The seaward face of the Naracoorte strandline can be

traced northward from the vicinity of Keith into the Hundred of Archibald

as an extension of the fore-dunes of the Naracoorte strandline. Tindale did

not differentiate between the Hyman and Naracoorte Terraves described by

Sprigy (1952) and his work must be read with this deficiency in mind.

‘The dual nature of the Naracoorte Terrace where it turns northward is

evident in the south-west corner of the Hundred of Wirrega. It was well

illustrated as early as in the May, 1905, edition of the Hundred of Wirega

inch-to-the-mile map. This shows by its delineation of the original vegeta-

tional pattern, the Naracoorte strandline in the south-western corner of the

Tundred, with Swede Flat compressed between it and what would probubly

equate with the older Hynam strand. This last named rons north-north-west

to east-south-east and is denoted by a belt of dunes, ranging from three and a

half to five miles in width. seaward from a line joining Sections 433 and 362.

In passing, it may be noted that Sprig interpreted the shallowing of the

present Coorong lagown in a southerly direction to be due to the progressive

northward down-warping he had postulated. Alderman and Skinner (1957)

have shown that precipitation of dolomitic limestone from Incoming sea water

is occurring and it may well be this activity which was wither the chief agent,

or at least another factor, in causing the shallowing of the Coorong lagouns

southward at a distance from the sea mouth.

REFERENCES

Atpenaran, A. F., and Skinner, HW, C., 1957. Amer. Sourn. of Scienoe, New York; 255,

pp, 561-367,

Hossrexp, P, S., 1950. Trans. Roy, ‘Soe. $. Aust., Adelaide, 73, pp. 232-279)

Sreicc, R. C,, 1952. Geol. Surv. of S, Aust., Adelaide, Bulletin 29.

Tinnatr, N. B., 1933. ‘Lrans. Roy. Sac, S. Aust, Adelaide, 57, pp. 130-142

Trspate, N. B., 1947; Ree. §. Aust’ Mus,, Adelaide, 8, pp. 619-652.

COMMUNAL EGG-LAYING IN THE LIZARD

LEIOLOPISMA GUICHENOTI (DUMERIL AND BIBRON)

BY FRANCIS J. MITCHELL

Summary

The following observations were made in the Mount Lofty Ranges, South Australia, between 1949

and 1955. It is suggested that the communal nests discovered indicate that this species may form

aggregation~ which possess a higher degree of social organisation than that usually credited to

reptile communities.

COMMUNAL EGG-LAYING IN THE LIZARD

LEIOLOPISMA GUICHENOTI (Dumeri] and Bibron)

by Francis J. Mrrcoe.i*

[Read 1L September 1958]

The following observations were made in the Mount Lofty Ranges, South

Australia, beltween 1949 and 1955. It is suggested that the communal nests dis-

covercd indicate that this species may form aguregations which possess a higher

degree of social organisation than that usually credited to reptile communitics,

OBSERVATIONS

On Ist May, 1949, at Waitpinga, South Australia, the writer observed

several small lizards emerging from the centre of a dead Gruss-tree stump

(Xanthorrhea) about 12 inches in diameter. On further investigation no fewer

than 211 eggs were found closely and uniformly packed in the suwdust-like

material which smrrounded the hard central core to a depth of about six inches.

Of these, 62 had hatched, many of the young being busily engaged digging

themselves to the surfave, and the majority of the remainder hatched in the

laboratory during the ensuing 48 hours. Of the 37 which failed to hatch, 31

cuntained fully developed embryos which had been dehydrated in transit lo

the laboratory, and the remaining six, which were much smaller, measuring only

& % 5 mum, were apparently infertile. Imrnediately before hatching the cess

measured 13 * & mm, Gravid females taken at the same locality between the

Tth and 14th November, 1948, exch contained three eges measuring 7 * 4 mm.

Fhe size of these eggs as compared with that immediately before hatching indi-

cates considerable assimilation of uid during development, the volume increas-

ing almost four times. On hatching the hzards measured 41 mm. and they grew

without external food to 47-48 mm.

In the hope of being able to observe the actual deposition of the eggs, a

further search of the area was made early in December, 1949, but no aggrega-

tions of more than fonr or five individnals were seen, and these small cliques

were found to inclide males. All females examined were still carrying eggs.

However, the investigation of potential nesting sites resulted in the discovery

of an old nest containing 29 egg-shells, These were inside another Xanthorrhea

stimp about two miles from the first site, The nest was old, and appeared to

have heen dug out hy a native rat.

Since May, 1949, all casual inquiries received at the South Australian

Museum concerning lizard’s eggs have been investigated, and this has resulted

in the discovery of four more communal nests.

On the 23rd December, 1953, a nest containing 49 cegs measuring 9 x 6

mim, was found in a garden at Stirling, South Australia, The eggs were buried

about two inches beneath the surface in loose loamy soil, and were exposed

when a small hole was being dug to plant a shrub. The eggs had been freslily

laid as the garden was only prepared for slanting during the previous week-end,

Specimens of L, guichenoit were abundant in blackberry bushes adjacent to

the garden.

° Curator of Reptiles, South Australian Museum.

Trans. Roy. Sec. S. Aust. (1959), Vol a3.

122 “oF. J. MITCHELL

On the 22nd January, 1955, a nest, estimated to contain over 100 eggs mea-

suring approximately i cm, long, was found in a heap of vegetable debris lying

against the wall of a wooden shed at Aldgate, South Australia. Unfortunately,

these eggs were not cxamined, but using EB. R. Waite’s “Reptiles and Amphi- -

bians of South Australia’, the obseryer, Mr. L. K. Clarke, of Adelaide, South

Australia, identified the embryos as L, metallicwma, The species metallicum and

guichenoti are closely allied and could easily be confused; L. guichenoti is the

common species in this district.

On the 4th February, 1953, another nest was discovered at Stirling, South

Australia. lt contained 88 eggs which were found lying side by side in a

hollow under a rotting log. The embryos were sufficiently well developed for

recognition as Leiolopisma guichenoti,

A nest containing “many dozens of eggs” was exposed during the ploughing

of a partly cleared paddock near Port Macdonnell, South Australia, during April,

1948. Some of the eggs had hatched, and the finder, Mr. G, H. Tilley of

Moorak, South Anstralia, captured several of the young and preserved them

in methylated spirit, together with a dozen unhatched eggs. These specimens

were presented to the South Australian Museum in Junc, 1955, and identified

as 1, guichenoti, (Specimens registered under $,A.M. R 3713.)

DISCUSSION,

Sociologists have accepted the greater majority of group behaviour in

reptiles as simple tropistic aggregation without a communal aim or internal

organisation. Although in the present case Uhe deposition of the eggs has not

been dircotly observed, the data suggests that the gravid females congregate

for the purpose of locating i common nesting site, Assuming this to be correct,

these lizards must possess a well-developed sense of recognition and be capable

of forming communities in which there is distinct couction between the indivi-

duals. Reviewing the observations it is difficult to conceive any other means

by which 30-70 Reiale lizards could independently seek out a single nesting

site. Furthermore, the nesting sites chosen do not appear to be unique within

the general environment. Vegetable debris and dead Xanthorrhea stamps are

abundant throughout the sclerophyllous scrub which forms the major habitat of

this species in Lhe Mount Lofty Ranges, while the 49 eggs discovered at Stirling

in December, 1953, were in the loose soil of a garden plot, all sections of which

appeared to be of uniform consistency and humidity.

The present evidence is fragmentary and inconclusive, but it is hoped that

the publication of these observations will stimulate the interest of other workers

who muy be able to undertake 4 complete field study of this interesting socio-

logical problem.

THE NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS AT HAAST BLUFF,

CENTRAL AUSTRALIA.

BY J. B. CLELAND AND NORMAN B. TINDALE

Summary

A general description is given of the country around Haast Bluff on the northern side of the

MacDonnell Ranges, Central Australia, and the native names for over 120 plants are given, together

with notes on use, if any, made of them by Aranda and Pintubi natives.

THE NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS AT HAAST BLUFF,

CENTRAL AUSTRALIA.

by J. B. Crecanwp ann NonmMan B. Trexpa.e

[Read 11 September 1958]

SUMMARY

A geyeral description is given of the counity ayournl Haast Bluff on the

northern side of the MacDonnell Ranges, Central Australia, and the native

names tor ever 120 plants are given, together with notes on wse, if any, mace

af them by Aranda ancl Pintubi natives.

INTRODUCTION

The Seventeenth and Kightcenth Anthropological Expeditions organised by

the University of Adelaide to study the natives, left Adelaide for Alice Springs

on 10th August, 1956, and 15th August, 1957, respectively, These Expeditions

were financed by a liberal grant from the Wenner-Gren Corporation for Anthro-

pological Research Incorporated (previously the Viking Fund) of New York,

supplemented by substantial assistance from the University of Adelaide and its

Board for Anthropological Research and from the South Australian Museum, and

by transport facilities granted by the Conmunwealth and State Governments.

The members of these Expeditions have been very much indebted to the

Minister for the Interior (the Hon, Paul Ilasluck), the Administration at Alice

Springs and the Department of Native Affairs and its officers for much help

and cordial assistance in making their investigations.

On arrival at Alice Springs, the party journey by motor vehicles to Haast

Bluff Aboriginal Reserve Station situated 15 miles S.W. from Haast Bluff (of

recent geographers), itself about 160 miles due west of Alice Springs and on

the Tropic of Capricom. Here, during a stay of about three weeks in each case,

an intensive study of the natives was made by various members of the purty.

Though the natives were detribalised, the Pintubi people from the Western Aus-

tralian border area only recently and imperfectly, and were im more or less

permanent residence at the. Government Station, they still retain much of their

knowledge of the natural history of their surroundings and readily supplied

names and uses of plants that were shown to them. During our stay, visits

were paid ta Blanche Towers, Mt. Palmer and Mt. Liebig, to Areonga im the

Krichauff Range and ta Hermamnsburg, to Mt. Wedge Station and Yuendumnu,

and to the Finke Gorge, at which places some additional plants were gathered,

After the plant was shown to the natives, it was placed in an envelope or

paper bag and given a number with the appropriate information, These plants

were then crudely pressed and at the same time similar specimens were placed

in a botanical press. On return tu Adelaide, the plants in the envelopes were

identified, and we would like to acknowledge the help we have received from

the State Botanist (Dr. H. Fichler); Dr. Consett Davis of the University of New

England; Mr. George Chippendale, Kotanist to the Animal Industry Division

of the Northern Territory Administration; and Mr, Dayid Symon of the Waite

~ Institiite. These specimens, seen by the natives, wil) be presented to the South

Australian State Herbarium.

Trans. Roy, Soc, 8. Aust, (1959), Val. 82.

itt J. B. CLELAND axe N, B, TINDALE

CENERAL DESCRIPTION OF HAAST BLUFF ABORIGINAL RESERVE

Hanst Bluff Reserve, commencing about 150 miles due west of Alice Springs

and straddling the Tropic of Capricorn, has an area of about 3,900 square miles-

Much of it is low, red sandhill country with a vegetation of its own. We were

camped at the eastern end on a mulga plain between the bald mountain masses

of the Haast Bluff Range, running west almost to Mt. Liebig, and the distant

Mereenie Range, the west end of the MacDonnells, padlvsally diminishing in

height. The northern section of this plain runs west to terminate between the

picturesque Blanche Towers and Mt, Palmer on the suuth and the Maast Bluff

continuation on the narth,

For descriptive purposes. this terrain can be divided into the plains, the

usuully dey watercourses, and the mountain masses with their gorges and talus

at the base where slopes were thickly vovered with gibbers.

THE MULGA PLAINS

The mulga (Acacia aneura) an the settlement is of (wo kinds, one with

the usual nactaw phyllodes, 3 to 8 cm. * 1 mm,, and the other (var. latifolia)

with broader glaucous foliage, the phyllodes 4 ta. § cm, * 5 to 8 mm. n. Theve

was much young mulga 2 to 3 feet high. Some of the young mulgas spread

out laterally for 5 feet when only 2 feet high, others tended to grow upwards.

Some half yrown trees have branches stretching out horizontally, but there seem

only the two kinds of adult trees here, in height about 18 tu 25 fect, There are

many mulga honey-ant holes with rounded raised rims 3 ta 4 ins. high, covered

with fallen mulga’ phyllodes, and about LO to 16 ins. across, with Several broad

openings to the nest in the centre, which is about 5 ins, wide. These mulga

ant holes are only seen in the mulga country and usually close to the bases af

the trees, Deep imegular excavations indicate where the natives have been

digging out the “honey hays”. The flowering of the mulga is probably irregular,

depending on the oecurrence mM rain. A few trees were coming into fower

during our stay, No honey could be tasted in the cylindrical spikes of flowers

but, as will be mentioned later, a sweet fluid exudes from the glund at the base

of the phyllodes when the sap is rising, and a lac seale, when it infests a tree,

may result in an abundance of sweet exudate,

At the time of our visit, a sea of a beautiful pink, due to the everlasting,

Helichrysum cassinianum, spread out under the mulga, to be replaced elsewhere

by white from Melipterum floribundion (the specific name well deserved ), ov

yellow, from HI, charsleyac. Very abundant und widely spread was the luwl

Composite bindi-eye (Culotis hispidula) with its painful spined achenes, tend-

ing, to fet into one’s clothing, following on the insignificant Howers. Very abun-

dant also was the Crucifer, Stenopetalum nutans, giving « rather dull yellaw

tinge to the surface when very abundant and having a rather unpleasant smell,

resembling the B.B.C. (bromobenzyl chloride) tear gas of the war. In driving

through where this was abundant the smell permeated ito the vehicle, whereas

the fragrance of the pink everlasting was almost confined to a nasegay uf it.

Another magnificent mass of colour was the dazzling brilliance in places af the

yellow flowers of Senecio gregorii, a brilliance almost painful to the eye when

the sun shone upon an acre or so iW an open space. Bassia convexula, with five

Beales on the fruits, was alsa very common with some B. cornishiana similarly

armed,

Witchetty bushes (Acacia kempeana) were abundant in places, and espect-

ally on light’ stony rises, Cassia bushes, chiefly C. eremophila vay. platypoda.

in uddition to the mula, the plints particularly used by the natives were the

NATIVE, NAMES AND USES OF PLAN'IS 125

berries of Solanum ellipticum, which may be fairly abundant, and the Asclepiad,

Pentutropis kempeana, seen occasionally scrambling up a mulga stem.

THE SAND-RIDGES

Low reddish Trivdia covered sand-ridges, rouning east and west, extend

north of the Haast Bluff Range towards Mt. Wedge. We passed over 40 miles

of these to the east of the Mount between the new aboriginal settlement of

Koolpunya and Mt. Wedge Station in part of the range of that name. Pic.

turesque graves of Desert Oaks (Casuarina decainseana) grew on many of these.

The seedling Casuarina becomes first a rather intricately branched shrub. It

then grows into a cylindrical small tree like a church-yard cypress, and finally

branches out laterally on top into quite an umbrageous head, Another feature

of the sand-ridges was the glaucous mallec-like Eucalyptus gamophylla with

its broad opposite leaves joined together at the stem. On many of the ridges

there was little else, but when the soil became more suitable, as towards Mt,

Wedge Station, various shrubs appeared between the T'rivdia, and the long

siphoned Nicotiana ingullu, much sought after by the natives, grew by the side

of the track, its fragrant white flowers scenting the air at dusk. Oveusional

hlnadwoods, corkwoods and whitewoods (Atalaya) were on the ridges and

some yellowish leafless shrubs of Exocarpus spurtea with a drooping bruom-

like appearance. Broad-leayed parakeclya (Calandrinia balonnensis) found

shelter under the Triodia. Several belts of Melaleuca glomerata, usually assu-

ciated with watercourses. were passed through and a couple of Salicornia

{Samphire) flats.

As far as this type of cuuntry is concerned, there did net appear to be much

uf use to the natives. The tobacco was, of course, important. The Iloulwood

Eucalypts might yield some “bloodwood apples” which contain a large juicy

female coceid, sind the wilehetty bushes (Acacia kempeana) conld contain the

grubs of that name in their roots. The Triodia near the north edge of this

country seemed larger, more exible and less prickly than that in the ridges,

and “Nosepeg", the Pintubi native with us, pointed out the red sand-encnisted

resinuvus tunnels on some of the leaves protecting the underlying Cuccid from

whieh Triodia (usually spoken of us ‘spinifex’) gum is obtained.

THE PLAIN BETWEEN THE HAAST BLUFF AND

MEREENIE RANGES

The country for the 27 miles tu Blanche Towers is nearly flat, There are

some belts of dense mulga and many patches of Triodiv in heavy sandy loam,

sometimes quite open with oceusional tall bushes of Grevillea juncifolia, Eueo-

lyplus papuena, and bloodwoud or Euc. gamophylla, Towards the western end

were muny fine Desert Kurrajongs with tall roamed boles and spreading

branches high up. growing in sandy loam. These were succeeded by Desert

Oaks, the half-grown trees vomicocylindrical. Often Hut, very hard termitaria,

uecurred amongst the THodia and tall ones, three to four feet and Hat-sided.

amongst the mulga.

THE WATERCOURSES

The watercourses have a vegetation of their own. Tu most vf them, the

Red Gum (Eucalyptus camaldulensis) with bluntly conical rather than rostrate

opercula, is ta be found as well as Solanums, Crotalaria dissitiflora, Coral Trees

(Erythrina vespertilio), the fragrant Prostanthera striatiflora, sedwes, grasses,

Cassias and other shrubs,

(26 J. B. CLELAND anv N. B, TUINDALE

THE MOUNTAINS AND HILLS

The mountains are covered with scattered Triodia tufts where the slope

permits them to grow. On the tops, as at Mt. Liebig, Acacias and other shrubs

may be found not scen lower down, In the gorges grow Native Ifup-bushes

di hi petiolaris), the Native Currant (Carissa brownii), Grevillea wick-

rami, tufts of scented grass, Sulamums, and many otber under-shrubs and herbs,

Native pines (Callitris glauca) are uncommon here, At Taliperta Spring near

Mt, Palmer, a permanent spring under the shadow of a ledge has given for many

centuries a shower-bath which has enabled something like five species of fern

to survive desiccation.

Triodia-covered rocky outliers of the Haast Bluff Range near the settlement

had scattered small trees of Eucalypius papuena and Eue. gamophylta

(shrubby), two species of Cassia, Acacia notabilis, Ac. patens, a Lycopodium-

like Acacia, a viscid species of Acacia and one with very long phyllodes, and

as tare lowly plants, scattered Goodenia ravenelit, an Indigofera, Kerandrinia

with its blue flowers, Grevillea wickhami, a daisy (Minuaria ?) and the fern

Notholaena.

In such types of country, the original Aranda, Kukatja and Jumu natives

and the intruding Pintubi of later years. successfully obtained the necessities

of tribal life. It is the object of this paper to record the names and uses of

the plants that were available to them. The uses comprise food plants, such as

herries, other fruits, cresscs, tubers, roots, grains, honey, gull-insects, ete; the

Native Tobaccos; woods for weapons and utensils; and plants used for adorn-

ment sand other purposes,

There are probably more than 1,200 species of vaseular plants in Central

Australia between 20° S. (passing through Tanami and well south of Tennant

Creek} and 26° §. at the South Australian border. One of us (J-B.C.) has

himself collected more than 530 separate species. During the 1956 Expedition,

133 specimens comprising 110 species of vascular plants and two fungi, were

submitted to the natives. During the 1956 Expedition, the number of speci-

mens was 165, consisting of 132 species. Some of these species were the same

us were submitted on the first occasion and this served as a check on the native

names that were given then. The total number of species including 3 varieties

shown to the natives was 191, On x rough estimate one might say that about

one-sixth of the vascular plants of the area were shown to the natives, This

list must comprise nearly all the species of economic use to them. There must

be a considerable number of small ephemeral plants that come up after rain

which are of no consequence to them, Of the total of 191 species, 55 had no

name or use, and a number of others had a name but were not used.

The uses of the plants can be placed under the following headings:—

Grains of grasses, winnowed and made into a paste:

Tragus ravemosus, Brachiuria piligera, Panicum deconipositum, Mragrastis

evlopoda, E. dielsii, Ductylocnemium radulans.

Other seeds ground into a paste:

Chenopodium rhadinostachyum, Portulaca oleracea, Acacia ligulata, Acacia

patens, Brachychiton grégorti (Desert Kurrajong ).

Seeds caten:

Casuarina decalsneand.

Currant-like berries:

Carissa Lrownii, Plectronia latifotia.

NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS 127

Tomato-like fruits: _

Solanum nemophilum, 8, ceaetiliferum, S. ellipticum, 8. eremophilum, S.

diversiflorum, S. phlomoicdes.

Other fruits:

Ficus platypoda, Rucarya acuminata, Loranthus murrayi, Enchylaena tomen-

fosa, Capparis mitchellit (native orange).

Leaves and secd-vessels eaten:

Marsdenia australis (leaves and young banana-shaped fruits), Cyanehum

floribundum (leaves and young fruits), Penfatropis kempeana (ieaves and

follicles),

Roots eaten:

Boerhaavia diffusa, Portulaca oleracea, Vigna lanceolata,

Leaves steamed:

Lepidium muelleri-ferdinandi,

Flowers sucked for honey:

Hakea ivoryi (corkwood), Eucalyptus terminalis (bloodwood ).

Ash used with Pituri:

Acacia sp.

Tobacco leaves chewed:

Nicotiana gossei, N. ingulba.

Piants used as medicine by steaming:

Though the idea may have derived from contact with Europeans who doubt-

less imputed medicinal qualities when there was an aromatic scent, it is

probably original. Steaming is used in all parts of Australia and steaming-

oven stones occur in deposits from the Pirrian Culture onwards, a period

of at least 4,000 years.

Prostanthera striatiflora, Stemodia viscosa, Eremophila gilesii.

Yielding adhesives:

Triodia basedowii, Xanthorrhoea thorntoni,

Apart from these vegetable sources of food, whose food values can be as-

certained if necessary in years ta come, the natives obtained animal foods in

the shape of Aesh (of marsupials, dingoes, small rodents, birds, lizards and

snakes), Of birds’ eggs and of insects (witchetty grubs from moths and beetles,

termites and their eggs, grasshoppers and locusts, female coccids in galls on

the bloodwood, und lerp), and honey from the mulga honev-ants and native

bees,

TILE SOLANUMS OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA

The Solanums of Australia are of considerable interest as being a source of

food far the aborigines. In fact, in Centval Australia one species, Solanum ellip-

ticwm, is of real importance as it is said to furnish small edible green tomatoes

all the year round and is a widely distributed species and with reasonable as-

siduity in the search (or it, numerous enough to furnish food on most occasions

and situations.

In South Australia, 26 species of Solanum are known, S. lasiophyllam hav-

ing been found in the Tomkinson Ranges. too late for inclusion in Black’s Flora,

Part LV, Second Edition, where the names of 25 appear, Of these five are

introduced species, S. triflorum, S, giganteum, 8, elaeagnifolium, S. sodomacum

and §, rostratum, none af which are edible.

Ewart and Davies in “The Flora of the Northern Territory” record 19

species with an additional one for North Australia, of which 9 occur in South

125 J. B. CLETAND awp N, B, TINDALE

Australia. The other eleven are mostly only recorded from the northern end

of the Territory.

Duwing the two expeditions to Haast Blulf Reserve, at least cleven species

of Solvaum were colleeted, five of these being find within a few yards of each

other in wush-aways Icading into 2 creek.

Of these, five species had few prickles and six were furnished with abun-

dant spines. Some of the latter supplied an important item m the diet of the

nomadic natives, and others were of no aeemmt in their ecology. The aborigines

readily recognise each species and have names for them, but to European eyes

the distinction was often difficult, ‘The following points we found useful in

recognising the different species of very prickly Solanums.

Leaves entire

Solamun ellipticum, Scmi-prostrate to scrambling with purplish tints on the

young foliage. The spherical green fruits marbled with white are hidden,

so that one turns the foliage over with one’s [out to pick the edible berries.

The prickles are not very aggressive sv that one can handle the bush with-

out being severely punished. There ave purple spines on the stems and

calyx and some pale ones on the petioles and even midribs but not else-

where on the leaves,

Solunum ellipticum var. Mr. J, M, Black reterred specimens like this to S. eremo-

philum, but Mr. R. V. Smith, of the National Herbarium of Victoria, says

our plants are definitely not $, eremophilum, This has smaller leaves thas

S. ellipticum aud lacks the purple tints. It is more or less prostrate and the

prickles are not aggressive. The edible fruit is like that of S. ellipticum.

Solanum quadriloculatum, This is an upright species abundantly furnished with

spines which make it difficult to collect specimens. The leaves are thicker

and broader than in S, ellipticum, but acute like them. The young foliage

may be purplish. The berries are more numerous and easily seen, usually

not quite round but somewhat pentagonal, showing five bulges, green be-

coming suffused with purplish tints before becoming hard and pale. Fruit

inedible, four-celled,

Leaves pinnate-lobed. or pinnatifiel

Solanum petrophilum. This resembles S, quadrilocnlatiam hut the leaves are

shortly lobed, The berry is hard and inedible. The prickles are very

averessive. The calyx lobes are narrow, acuminate, with prominent keels.

Solanum melanospermum, Myr, KR. V. Smith considers our plants as probably

referable to this species. They agree with the type in leaf lobing, tomentum,

spines, cte. Unfortunately, he adds that the type shows no flowers. [He

says it is not referuble to S. diversiflorum as we had suggested. Has deeply

lobed Jeaves and calyx lobes narvow and acuminate without prominent keels.

The fruit is an inch in diameter, pale yellowish yreen and edible.

Solanum sp. aff. with 8. phlomoides, A. Cunn, and 8, melatiospermum, F. Muell.

(RK. V. Smith). Has the remains of a large calyx still un the reflexed stem.

The calyx lobes are broad and there are pale prickles on the stems and calyx

und a few on the leaf veins. The large fruit is edible.

Sulunum ferocissimum, Upright, about a foot high, with small pale Howers and

narrow leaves hastate or cordate at the base, grew on the banks of a creck,

Fruits red and not eaten.

Selenum centrale and $. orbiculatum. Were growing in proximity to each other.

The former has a rnst-culoured tomentum with ovate bo oyate-oblong leaves

and calyx segments oblong-linear, It was not fuund in fruit which Black

described as ovoid, yellow, succulent and edible.

NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS 129

Selanum orbiculatum., Has thicker ubloug leaves which Black described as

sinuate-lobed, with a hairy calyx whose lohes are ovate-lanceolate, and

yellow globular berries.

Solanum sp. A sinall Solanum, only a few inches high, with an elongated berry

was found on an open plain north of Mt. Hay.

Selanim coactiliferum. Petals 4, edible sperical yellow fruit. Mt. Wedge Sta-

tion and sandy rises on Haast Bluff Reserve.

Selanum esuriale, With five petals and yellow edible fruit has also been [ound

in Central Australia,

THE NATIVE NAMES

The native names here recorded in several tribal dialects were trauseribed

by the one hand from information supplied hy different informants. It was not

convenient to keep a record of the name of cach mformant since it was some-

times necessary te refer the specimen to a whole gathering of interested om-

lookers before 2 decision was made. In all cases, unless specified to the contrary,

the words were spoken by a man of the tribe concerned and not repeated from

hearsay by one of another tribe. Where marked variations in pronunciation

were noted they are indicated. Principal differences are in the vowel sounds,

but there are also some interesting variations in stress. Some minor differences

may be ascribed to the modern reaction between the Aranda language us used

in formal mission teaching and the several versions of it being acquired by the

Western Desert tribes people as they come into the area. The Kukutja (Loritja)

have been closely associated for at least three generations with the Aranda, the

Juimu for two generations and the Ngalia and Pintubi only since about 1932,

Since the break between Aranda-like languages and the Western Desert ones

( Pitjandjara, Kukatja, Pintubi, ete.) is one of the more conspicuous ones in

Australia it will be of interest to have data enabling a clear-cut distinction to

be drawn between the plant names used east and west of this linguistic bound-

ary. The names are written in the system adopted by a Committee at the Uni-

versity of Adelaide in 1932. A convenient exposition may be found in Volume 64

of these Transactions, at page 147.

In the following list of plants, if the species concerned appears in Black's

Flora of South Australia, the authors name is not piven.

FILICALES

Cheilanthes tenuifolia (8lb). No name; grows on sides of creeks.

Notholaena brownii (44b), No name; grows only near water in gorges.

Marsilea, probably M. hirsuta (55h) Nardoo, No name; animal food, ao good

for miu,

PINACEAL

Callitris glauca (15a), Native Pine. kniilpuru, Pintubi, wanykarti, Nyalia.

‘alkyarta and ‘ilukwa, Aranda. Not used; appreciated only for the shade

it custs.

CRAMINEAE

Imperata ? (18a und 99a), talbalbi, Ngalia. Jalbulara, Aranda. A bladey grass

found only at springs such us Ulambaura where there is a permanent swamp.

The leaves agree with those of Dnperata cylindrica var. at Encounter Ray,

Dicanthium sericeum (107b and 108b), ‘tjawila, Pintwhi; ‘nam:a, Aranda

(Generic terms).

Bothriochloa ewartiana (130a). No native name, “only a grass”.

Cymbopogon bombycinus (68a). No native name.

130 J. B. CLELAND axv N, I, TINDALE

Themed australis (39a), ‘eria, Pintubi. “kalbulbi, Ngalia, ‘ara ‘ara, Aranda.

lt is used to stop the splash of water in wooden dishes while they are being

cutied on women’s heads.

Tragus australiqnus (76a), i:ka. Pintubi, ‘punda‘ro, Ngalia. jaka, Aranda, A

prickle grass; it provides ‘mi, i, a damper which is made trom the seed by

niilling between stones.

Neurachne mitchelliana (121a, 93b). ’mana, Pintubi. It has no native use.

Brachiaria piligera (129a, 135a). ‘mana, Pintubi. ‘etuta, ’indalurnka, Aranda.

The grass seed ix milled with watcr between stones:and cooked as a damper.

Digtlaria ammophila (1i7a). Has no native name, “only a grass”.

Panicun decompositum (07a, 75b). il’tja:dua, Aranda. eltja:tua, ‘jalka:ra,

Pintubi. Yields a good grass-seed food; ground with water between mill-

stones and cooked as a damper ("juma, Pintubi).

Pennisetum ciliare 1. (P. cenehroides Pers.) = Cenchrus pennisetiformis Hochst

et Steud. (138b). Buffle grass, Only a grass, a stranger.

Zygachloa (Spinifex) paradoxa (160b). Only a grass, ‘along sandhill’,

Aristida browniane (118a), Has no native name, “only a grass”.

Aristida arenaria (96a). ‘okari, Pintubi, "‘endalkora, Avanda. Grass caten by

animals, a prickly grass.

Aristida arenaria (71b). ‘ipiri, Pintubi. ‘jawila, Ngalia. ’endurukura, Aranda.

Tas sharp ‘spined heads’,

Aristida nitidula (164b). ’awila, jawila, Pintubi. ’endurukuru, Aranda. No use.

Enncapogon polyphyllus (81a). ‘jespari, Pintubi. ’man:a, Ngalia. ‘nam:a, W.

Aranda dialect, ‘taruka, E. Aranda dialect. Only a grass, not a food.

Enneapogon clelandii (5a, 149b). Has no native name and is of no use. Only

a grass for cattle, horses and sheep.

Enneapogon sp. (54a), Drumstick grass. Has nv native name, “only a grass”.

Danthonia bipartita (78a, 123a, 155b). Only a grass, of no use except to animals.

Triraphis mollis (105a). ’endurukura, Aranda, When the seed is taken in while

drinking water it causes an irritation to the throat, and is much disliked.

The seed pierces the gums of horses’ mouths causing an inflammation,

Triodia pungens (21a). ‘undia, Pintubi, ‘ju:ta, Aranda. This species is said

not to yield a gum; the Triodia from which the valuable native gum is ob-

tained is said to “look greasy”.

Triodia basedowii with gum (i01b). tjanbi, Pintubi. undia, Kukatja. ‘ju:sta,

Aranda, Vlowers and seed are animal food.

Eragrostis eriopoda (71a, 133b). wanunu, Pintubi. in’tjira, n’djira, Aranda.

The seed is vathered, milled with water between stones and cooked as a

damper.

Eragrostis dielsii (150b). ‘intjirintjira, Aranda, Provides seed for milling.

Chloris acicularis (23a). No native name, “only a food for animals”.

Daciyloctention radulans (80a). “purmdjari, Pintubi. ‘inda’lumuka, Aranda,

Seed is used in the same manner as that of Mragrostis ertopode. Is consid-

ered to be a good food.

CYPERACEAE

Cyperus xerophilus (35a). ‘laripulara, Aranda, A mark of water country.

Cyperus sp. (54b), an’garan’gara, Aranda. Found near springs, sign of water.

Fimbristylis nutans (Retz.) Vahl. (3la), 'ju:lumburn, Negalia. ‘laribulara,

Aranda. Not used. A sedge at Ulambaura, a permanent spring. The

Ngalia name tor the spring is hased on the presence of reeds, An Aranda

name for the spring is Paura.

NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS ISL

Scirpus litoralis (158b). ‘ankaranka, Pintubi. No name in Aranda. Lives in

spring water. ;

LILIACEAE

Xanthorrhoee. thortoni (48a). alugkuru. Ngalia. alunkuru, Aranda. It grows

in the sandhills in the MacDonnell Ranges and on the plains to the South.

Aborigines have never seen it to the north of the Ranges. It is of economic

importance to them because the resinous exeretion from it is made intu the

m which provides the most highly-sought-after form of hafting medium

or stones set in the ends of speurthrowers. This gum is known as ‘pal:a,

Negalia; ‘tjalana, Aranda.

CASUARINACEAE

Casuarina decaisneana (53a). ‘korukara, Pintubi. ‘karukara, Ngalia, arkapa,

Aranda, “There is good food in the seeds; pick out kernels, chew them

when green, they taste like milk.”

MORACEAE

Ficus platypoda (50a). ‘ili, Pintubi. ‘witjiriki, Ngalia. ‘tjuruka, Aranda. Figs.

ULMACEAE

Trema aspern (43b). Only a tree, no name. Grows only near water in gorges.

URTICACEAE

Parietaria debilis (159b) (onder rocks). “Only a flower, near water.” [Does

not grow near water.]

PROTEACEAE

Hakea lorea (143h). Corkwood. pirdwa, Kukatja, an‘tjuija, n’kwala, ndjujamba,

Aranda, Flowers yield sugar by steeping in water.

Hakea ivoryi (8a, 87a, and 1242), Corkwood. ’piriwa, Pintubi. bi:ru, Kukatja.

n’djuia, Aranda. When emus eat n‘djuia fHowers they are stupified and

cannot run and thus casily killed; it flowers in summer. Corkwood flowers

are steeped to get a black, sweet liquid. Use the bark, charred, to rub on

the breasts of women when the child has a sore tonguc,

Hakea leucoptera (126a, 85b). ‘marawukara, ‘marawakal, Pintubi. ilbunga,

Aranda, Used for making hut shelters; not used as root source for water

as is the case further south.

Grevillea juncifolia (92b), "jultukun, Pintubi. ‘kalin’kalinba, Aranda.

Grevillea striata (70b). ildeilba, Pintubi. ildi:Iba, Ngalia. ildi:tba, Aranda.

Grevillea wickhami (63a). ‘Vjaka, Aranda. No use.

SANTALACHAE

Execarpus spartca (43a). ‘wilpia, Pintubi. ‘winbaruru, Ngalia. ‘itjartitjarda,

Aranda. No use; il is plentiful on Mt. Wedge and in the sandhill country.

Eucarya acuminata (62a). Native peach. ‘manarta, Pintubi (occurs in country

to the south-west). ‘mayarta, Kukatja. ‘malba, Aranda. Sore trees grow

near Alalba, where it is a big tree; it is said by the natives to grow com-

monly along the southern side of the MacDonnell Ranges.

Santalum Laseeolataen (23b). kandurano, Pintubi. kanduraya, Kukatja. ‘kaluda,

Aranda.

LORANTHACEAE

Loranthus murrayi (om Acacia rhetinocarpa and Acacia aneura) (102a, 27b,

104b, 119b). ‘nantja, Pintubi, ‘mi:puru’pa, Pintubi. ‘tjangina, tjankanu,

Aranda, Fruit orange or red coloured, “eaten as a plum, very nice”.

132 J. &. GLELAND ann N. B. TOINDALE

Loranthus exocarpi (on mulga) (91b). “nantja, Pintubi. Edible fruits.

Loranthus gibberulus (on Grevillea wickhami and Grevillea striata, beeftwood)

(20b, 86b). ‘mi:purupa, Pintubi. ‘tjan’ga, Aranda, Bird food only.

Loranthus miqueliana (on Eue. gamophylla) (24b). The mallee (Lue.) =

‘warilja, Kukatja. lalba, Aranda. The mistletoe = im:ara, Kukatja. im:ara,

Aranda.

Loranthus maidenii (on mulga) (59a, 35b). etjitja (mulga), ‘tian’ga (Loran-

thus), Aranda, Children eat the sticky fruits in play; birds cat the fruits.

It has no further use other than us attracting birds which may be killed by

throwing a boomerang or stones.

CUENOPODIACEAE,

Rhagodia spinescens (89a, 38b), ‘bulam’bula, Aranda. Used as red paint for

the face; the ripe fruits are red.

Rhagodia nutans (1a, 87b, Sb). ‘iria, ‘erta, Aranda. Emu food; only a bush;

no Use.

Chenopodium cristatum (74b), ‘tjilka, Pintubi, ‘madara’madara, Aranda.

Food for kangaroo, emu and stock. ;

Chenopodium rhadinostrachyum (13a). ‘indyka, Aranda. The black seed ob-

tained from it is soaked and when swelled with water rubbed between stones

to make a damper,

Atriplex nummularium (LOla). Saltbush. ‘eria, Aranda. As an animal food it

attracts and concentrates guime for hunters,

Atriplex elucophyllum (69a). No mame. Only cattle, goat and sheep food.

Bassia selerolaenoides (6b). tjilka, Pintubi. “No good; only a flower,’

Bassia quinqnecuspis (94h). marawakalba, Kukatja. jeltja ‘ta:ndina, Aranda.

The Kukatja name meang literally ‘hand piercer’. it is often used as a generic

name for spiny plants. No use,

Kochia enchylaenoides (163b). Only a busb.

Sulsola kali (65a, 22b), tjilka:la, Kukatja, ‘elkala, ilkala, Aranda. Only an

animal food, —

Enchylaena tomentosa (7a, 90a, Gla). "jewcte’wete, Ngalia. indi;ndia, Aranda.

The red fruits are soaked in water and the liquid drunk like tea; it is very

sweet; use a ‘tartia, an especially shaped pitji (dish). for its preparation,

AMARANTHACEHKAER

Ptilotus nobilis (14a). No native name, only a Hower.

Gomphrena brownit (63b). Only a flower.

Alternanthera nodiflora (134a). Has no native name: no use, only a flower.

NYCTAGINACEAE.

Boerhaavia diffusa (55a). ‘waipi, Kukutja. ‘iap:e or ’jaipa, Aranda. Has a

long parsnip-like root; food,

PORTULACACEAE

Portulacea oleracea (83a). ‘wakati, Pintubi, ‘ngotjika, Aranda. Food; eat the

black seed; the roct is also eaten,

Calandrinia balonensis (17a, 52a, 16b). Parakeclya. ‘parkilja, ‘tjonni tending

to ’shonyi, Pintubi. partandjarupa, Negalia. -‘tjungi, Kukatja. ilkyoalia,

knilja, gemba, Aranda,

CAPPARIDACKAE

Capparis mitchellii (92a, 2b, 129b). Wild orange. ‘ulpundjatu, Pintubi,

‘ombultja:di, ‘umbutja:di, Kukatja. bultja:ta, mbultjeda, m/bartjada,

Aranda. Eat the fruit, “no seed, very sweet”.

NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS 133

Cepparis spinosa (145b). ‘uranini, Pintubi. ‘aratnaya, a’ro:tnaya, Aranda. Yield

a fruit which is eaten when ripe.

PHYTOLACCACEAE

Codonocarpus cotinifolius (66b, 8S5b), ‘kandurayu, Pintubi. ‘kaluta, kaludi,

kaluda, Aranda, Grubs ’mako ’kaluda, Kukatja, found on the roots are caten.

CRUCIFERAE

Stenopetalum nutans (70a, 26h). ‘enmart’enmarta, Aranda. Emm food.

Stenopetalum lineare (84a, 100b). ‘enmarta, Pintubi. enmarta, ’mourti murta,

Aranda. “Too ‘strong only fit for emus, makes you giddy if you try to

eat it.”

Lepidium rotundum (97a, 116a, 116b). ‘enmartsa, Pintubi. ju:taju:ta, Ngalia

and Pintubi. ’enmarta, ’enmatua, Aranda. Emu food. The same name is

applied te Glossegyne (Conpositue). Aranda eat it after steaming; Pintubi

do not use the steaming method of cooking greens and make no use of

‘enmurta,

Lepidium oxytrichum (1035b). ‘enmarta, Pintubi. ‘enmarta, Aranda. Emus eat

it. Aranda steam it.

Lepidium muelleri-ferdinandi (95a, 98a, 29b). enmota, Pintubi. inmutu,

Kukatja. ‘inmorta, enmarta, enmatua, Aranda. Plant steamed in a hole

with hot stones by the Aranda; the plants are enclosed in a covering of

Zygophyllum plants (Ijawuljawa). The steamed green is stripped off the

stems and eaten; the stems are then pounded to a meal and also eaten,

When stones are not available it is Jaid on heated ground on top of wet

grass, covered by more grass, then with colder sand, Enough heat is sealed

in to cook the food. The aborigines strip off the leaves and eat them, throw-

ing away the stems. A big heap is cooked and all cat together.

PITTOSPORACLAE

Pittusporum phillyreoides (102bh). wanukutu, Pintubi. ‘mara mara, Kukatja.

knauta, Aranda, Provides shade only; no other use.

ROSACEAE

Stylobasium spalhulatum (97b). "tulpulpa, Pintubi.

LEGUMINOSAE

Acacia ligulata (27a). Broad leaf wattle. ‘wardanska, Ngalia. ‘itjiruka, Aranda.

Seeds eaten. Grows at Ularmbaura Spring.

Acacia ligiuata, a form (on stony hill) (79b, 120b). wardaruka, wardaruka,

Pintubi and Kukatja. i:’turuka, /i:tjaruka, Aranda. Not used.

Acacia. notabilis (aus hitherto identified but really a new species) (31b). ‘itjiruka,

Aranda. Not used except as dry wood for fires; just like fronwood, very

good for fires.

Acacia patens (115b). ‘Inba‘luba, Aranda, Seed eaten, ground on a stone to a

meal; it makes a bean soup with water.

Acacia shrongylophylla (43b). Only flower, grows on the ranges.

Acaciu lycopodifulia (77b). No native name. ;

Acacia coriacea yar, angustior (83b). bagguna, Pintubi. pankuna, Ngulia.

‘panku:na, Aranda, Multi-striate phyllodes, 20 cm. *X 4 mm. Yellow

branches, grows on rocky hills. Use ashes for drawing with, Freshly

burned ashes of the leaves are mixed with native tobacco (mingulba) when

making a chewing quid,

134 }). B. OLELAND anu N. B.CTINDALE

Acacia aneura (15b, 72b}. Mulga at the settlement, Haast Blu Reserve.

‘wanari, Pintubi, Ngalia. i:'titja, ‘ustitja, Aranda.

Lac Scale (Austratachardia acaciac, Maskell) on Acacia anetira (131h),

‘lutandja, Aranda, Leyp scale and honey exudate on the phyllodes of the

mulga. According tu native belief “kapada:da, the larva of a Ceometrid

moth, is the leader (inkata) of the honey ant (jeramba) which gathers

this honey.

Honey on Acacia anewra (130b), Intandji, Aranda, A particular sonree of mulga

sngar is from the exudate of glands in the young taulga tips themselves,

Aborigines showed us that when viewed against the light the tips bore

gleaming beads of honey-like sap at the bases of the phyllodes. These

glistening particles (‘lutandja, Aranda) are supposed in native zoology to

hecome larger, form together along the stems and become the lerp scales

which yield sugar. The larva of a Geometrid moth of the mulga (species

not yet identified, but close to Amelora) occurs asa larya in many hundreds

un mulga trees; when the trees are disturbed the larvae lower themselves on

long silken strands so that the whole tree appears decorated with them;

the larva is called ‘kapada:da, Aranda, It is considered to be the leader

or inkata of the ‘jeramba, Aranda (honey ant) and causes it all to happen,

Heney avts gather and take the honey below ground to form the honey ant

“bags”, The ’kapada:da (Aranda) is knuwn also as nanda (Aranda) and

us punsa parutji:ta, Kukatja.

The lerp scales grow large and fall off on the ground whenee they may

We: gathered or are stripped from the twigs and soaked im water to make a

drink. Lerps are also eaten off by drawing the twigs through the mouth.

One of us (NVB.T,) some years aga, observed the extensive use of this

lerp scale in the Mann Range where the women’s lips were bleeding and

sore from the continual rubbing of them along the rongh twigs, In 195T

he found that a family group at Lightning, Rocks, Western Australia, had

heen living in this way for a week almost solely on lerp sugar. The amowot

of food available on these twigs is surprisingly greal and they can be seen

to be literally ronning, with honey-dew.

Acdcia dneura vay. latifolia (73b, 143b), Blue mulga, ‘Ielele, Pintubi.

ljalpiljaro, Nealia, i:t’itja il’paljata, Aranda. Seed caten, Honey-dew xt

the base of the phyllodes, ‘muni in’da:na, Aranda. Seeds gathered, parched

and ground for meal.

Acuciat hiolosericen (28a, 125b). ‘kalkadi, Pintubi. ‘intjira, Aranda. No use.

A wattle growing around Ulimbuara Spring. The same species in 1957 on

a rocky hill with Jac insects (Austrotachardia acaciae Maskell),

‘nkwala‘i:titia, Aranda, Eut the sweet scule (mako karuko), The jeramba

or honey «ints sometimes gather honey from these scales, Tree is named

‘pupa sume wurd us for dog.

Acaciu. brachystachya (106a. 82b) (probably) a mulga. wanka, wanari, Ngalia,

‘j:titja, Aranda, The ashes from freshly burned phyllodes are chewed with

pitjiri. Shrub not in Hower or fruit when collected, The phyllodes are

9-0 em, to 11-5 em. long and agree with this species, but it may be merely

a long phyllode form of A. aneura.

Acucia farnesiana (154b), Vlakwa = t'‘lokwa, Aranda. From the Hower comes

a seed which is eaten by parching and milling.

Acacia monticula, J. M. Black (80b), On rocky hill. No native name. Lacerated

bark, several nerves, much reticulation,

Cassia sophera (146h). ‘madara’madara, Aranda. Gocd medicine. Steep in

warm water, wash face with liquid and inhale the steam from the dish.

NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS 135

Cassia pleurocarpa (4b, 120b). ‘kalpukalpu, kalbirkalbir, Pintubi. ‘leilara,

Nelara, Aranda. Emu food only.

Cassia desolata (95b). ’pundi, Pintubi. ‘inkutinkuta, Aranda. For decoration

only.

Cassia eremophila (40a, 33b). ’aribi, pundi, Pintubi. ‘pundi, Kukatja. ‘wari,

Negalia. ‘pundi, ‘punda, Aranda. Has no important use; only a flower,

used, mainly because of its soft foliage, for brushing off flies.

Cassia eremophila var. platypoda (114a, 65b). ‘pundi, Pintubi, ‘punda,

Aranda.

Cassia artemesioides (22a, 55a, 30b, 78b). pundi, Pintubi. pundi, Negalia.

‘punda’punda, inkurtaankurta, Aranda, The flowers are used for decora-

tion, being inserted in the head hand as a fringe falling over the brow.

Brachysema chambersi (161b). omba. Sugar obtained from the flower called

‘nkwala omba, Aranda.

Crotalaria cdissitiflora (41b). Only flower; no name.

Iniligofera brevidens (126b). No name.

Indixofera basedowit (127b). “Too shrivelled for identification’, “might be

"pundi”,

Proviilen (148b). Pea. ‘woraka’ljilja, Aranda. No use,

Swainsona flavocarinata (15lbh). Only a flower, animals eat it.

Vigna lanceolata (19a). ‘papurti, Ngalia. ‘latjia, Aranda. The root of this

plant or the one for which the aboriginal informant mistook the leaf is

eaten; it is supposed to have a large tuber like a sweet potato.

GERANIACEAE

Hepeiiott eygnormmn ($2a, 40b, 64b), Has no native name and no use is made

of it.

OXALIDACEAE

Oxalis corniculata (34a), Native sour sob. ‘elkart'ilkarta, Aranda. Wallaby

food only.

ZYGOPHYLLACEAE

Zyeophyllum tesquerum (53b). “ilk’ywalja, Aranda. Animal food only.

Tribulus terrestris (75a). tjilka:la, Pintubi and Ngalia. ‘’jaka, Aranda. A

prickly plant which causes trouble by injuring feet.

EUPHORBIACEAE

Euphorbia drummondii (52b), ma’dara’madara, Aranda, Animal food,

Saleen wheeleri (57b). ma’daramadara, Aranda. Bullock and horse food

only.

Euphorbia clutioides (6a). ‘notanoto, Ngalia. ‘kwarakclilja, Aranda. Although

_ it has a name, neither the plant nor its milky sap has any use.

Phyllanthus sp. (36a), tjilkatjilkarupa, Pintubi. ‘pojor’pojorupa, Ngalia. Not

used, and is poisonous. ;

STACKHOUSIACEAE

Stackhousia muricata (140b), Only animal food, no name.

SAPINDACEAE

Atalaya hemiglauca (25b, 87b). ‘wanukutar, Pintubi. ilbara, ilpa’ra, Aranda.

Shade tree only.

Heterodendron oleifolium (115b). wanjikutu, Pintubi. knjira, Aranda.

Diplopeltis stuartii (84b), Only a flower,

Dodonaea petiolaris (47a). njalpilinj, Pintubi, anjilinu, Ngalia. walukara,

Kukatja. ‘ilpa’manda, Aranda, No special use except as a shade tree.

136 J. B. CLELAND anp N. B. TINDALE

RHAMNACEAE

Ventilago viminalis, Supple Jack (113a, 34b). _k’njira, aknjira, Aranda. Kan-

aroo and euro shade tree. A big tree and it gives good shade, When it

Fis a hollow stem find wild honey (ultamba) in it.

MALVACEAE

Malvastrum spicatum (112a). Has no native name, only noticed by them be-

cause of its flower,

Sida corrugata (47b). Only a flowér,

Sida virgata (144b, 156b). Only a flower bush, no use.

Sida inelusa (96b). alputadi, Pintubi. Fruit eaten.

Cienfuegosia gossipioides (49b), Only a flower.

STERCULIACEAE

Rulingia loxophylla (88b). No name, only a fower.

Brachychiton gregorii (51a). alta, Pintubi. malta, Ngalia, alta, Aranda.

"yaltatjita, Pintubi (the seeds). Eat the seeds milled, considered u very

fattening food.

DiLLENIACEAE

Hibbertia glaberrima (46a). ’jukuri, Ngalia.

MYRTACEAE

Eucalyptus camaldulensis (16a), Red Gum, ‘nyapari, Ngalia. ‘pira, ’pa‘ra,

Aranda.

Eucalyptus terminalis (103a), Bloodwood. a:rkanka, Aranda, Not used except

as giving honey when in flower. This bloodwood grows six to eight feet

tall on the slopes of rocky hills, and as larger trees on Hat ground.

Eucalyptus gamophylla (128b). ‘warilja, Pintubi. ‘lalba, Aranda. No use is

made of it,

Melaleuca zlomerata (lib). ‘ilbili, Kukatja. ‘ilbala, Aranda.

Melaleuca Tinophylla (42a). ‘ilbili, Pintubi. ‘ilbila, Aranda. Grows in the

sandhill country by watercourses.

UMBELLIFERAE

Didiscus glaucifolius (2a). Has no native name, emu food only.

APOCYNACEAE

Carissa browniit (33a, 85a, 93a, 17b, 18b), ‘yamunboro, ‘yamunburu, Pintubi.

‘manikitji, Ngalia, ‘manikitja, Kukatja. ‘inikitja, ‘lalitja, e’nukitja, e’nokitja,

Aranda. Grows at Ulambaura Spring. The purplish fruits are eaten; the

taste is considered by aborigines to be very sweet, a good food.

ASCLEPIADACFAE

Sarcostemma australe (15b). alk’yaiknai, Aranda.

Pentatropis kempeana (88a, 18b). ‘mana ’yaraka, Aranda. “Good tucker; cat

the leaves; when they find it while hunting, they always stop and cat their

fill of it.”

Marsdenia australis (21b). ondorono, Pintubi. ’ondorokno, Kukatja. al’tjeia,

Aranda, Eat the fruit,

CONVOLVULACEAE

Ipomoea sp. (in leaf only) (57b, 67b). Leayes and stem only used. No potuto,

only a flower. No name,

NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS 137

Contoloulus erubescens (152h). ‘tnalja tnalja, Aranda, All cooked and eaten,

steamed and stripped to yet only the leaves. Long lime ago lives on this.

It is cooked in the same manner as Lepidium.

Breweria rosea (48b). Only a flower.

Evolvulus alsinoides (58b). Only a flower, no use.

BORRAGINACEAE

Heliotropium asperrimum (7b). Only a flower.

Heliotropium undulatum (100a), Has no native name, “only a flower”.

Trichodesma zeylanicum (46b). Only a flower.

VERBENACEAE

Dicrastylis gilesii F. Mucll. (110b). Taliperta Spring, Mt. Palmer Range. Only

a flower.

Spartothamnella teucriiflora (76b). alk’neiak’neia, Aranda. Food for birds and

emis.

Clerodendron. floribundum (30a, 6la). ‘cremari, Ngalia. ‘eremarta, Aranda.

The purple fruit is eaten; also the carrot-like roots. Grows at Ulambaura

Spring.

LABIATAE

Prostanthera striatiflora (131a). tjiruka tjiruka, ’tjurika ‘tjwrika, Aranda, Pound

with stones; the plant is then put in a dish (wooden), water poured in and

heated with hot stones; allowed to go cold and the body washed with it; a

good medicine,

SOLANACEAE

Solanum centrale (77a, 90b). kararuba, kamburarupa, Pintubi. ’karalba,

kararupa, Ngalia, ‘katjara, Aranda, Agrees with a specimen from Liddle

Hill, with # rusty tomentum like this, identified by J. M. Black as S. centrale

which appears to be distinct from $, nemophilum. Leaves with a rusty

tomentum. Fruit ercen then yellow, slightly elongated, 1-7 * 1-2.em. Fruit

like a plum, eaten.

Solanum sp. (10b). With occasional small prickles thickened downwards on the

stems and even on calyx. Leaves with paler tomentum than S. nemophilum

but perhaps a form of this species. Not ‘wangi; only a flower.

Solanum orhiculatum (73a, 9b). ‘itumba, Aranda, kamburarupa, Pintubi.

Fruit green, spherical § mm. diam., becoming whitish and dry. Good fruit,

eaten.

Solanum. coactiliferum (100b, 166b). ‘itunba, Pintubi, ‘etunba, Aranda. It is

a food, The ‘mana, yellow spherical fruit, arc eaten,

Solanum elliplicum (64a, 74a, 125a, 8b, 56b, 60b, 68h, 99b, 121b, 122b, 123b),

’‘kuilpura, wayjki, Pintubi. wanki, wangi, Kukatja. wanki, Ngalia. Fruit

eaten at all times and is an important staple dict of emu, kangaroo, dogs

and people.

finan: etiqin var. (1274). a’leljaka, Aranda. The small green fruits are

24018) ond,

Solan guadriloculatum (ila, lla, 62b). ‘warakalukalu, Pintubi. arcilba,

‘erunalkna, Aranda, Only a kangaroo food; not the same species as wangi

though very like it, fruit not eaten,

Solanum quadriloculatum ? (162b). ‘wangi, Kukatja. alparandji, randa,

Aranda. Fruit is called karjera and is thought to be a far smaller plant

than ‘wangi.

158 J, B. CLELAND anv N. B. YINDALE

Selanum eremophilum (5b, 6b, 36b), “weiajeri, Pintubi, werinwerinba, Kukatja,

a'ljeljaka, Aranda. Yields wu fruit very nice to eat, Fruit 1 em, diameter,

green to pallid.

Svlanam sp. aff. with $8. phlomoides A, Cunn. and 8. melanospermum F. Muell.

(Ib, 12b, 13b, 103b, 165b, 167b). Lobed leaves. Fruit large on long re-

curved pedicles, long spines on calyx which is ribbed. ‘kura, *pura, Pintubi.

‘kura, “pura, Kukaya, ‘pivi, Aranda, Lzrge fruit, the black seed in this

fruit is thrown away, the skin and flesh only being eaten,

Solanum. melanospermuin F, Muell. (prob.) (37a, 51b, 59b). Both numbers 5lb

and 5Ub were given the sume native name as Solanum sp. aff. S. phlomotdes.

No. 5tb has deeply lobed leaves and delicate prickles on the stom, and

occasionally on the leaves und even on the calyx. No fruit. No. 59b has

rather short pale prickles on the stem and petioles but none on the Jeaves

and calyx. The leaves seem undulate, There is a whitish dried fruit about

1 cm. in diameter in a rather short recurved pedicel, These two plants are

considered to he probably §. melanospermum and the native identification

incorrect. One would naturally infer that their identification was more

likely to be correct than ours but it should be remembered that the natives

were shown a broken-off branch and did not see the plant growing with its

natural habit. ‘kura, ‘para, Pintubi. ‘*kuva, Kukatja. ‘kura, Nealia, ‘pigi,

Aranda. Large tomato-like fruit eaten, The black seed in it is taken out

and thrown away and is spoken of as ‘not good’, only the flesh and skin

being caten, Tt is called ‘good food’,

Solanum petrophilum (14b). Given the sume native name as Solanum sp. if.

8. phlomoides, Very numerous white spines up tu 1-3 cm, lung on the stem,

eammon on the leaves and on the calyx. Leaves shortly lobed, A dried

white fruit is 9 mm, diameter, This is considered ta be §. netrophilum

and the native identification incorrect. ‘kura, ‘pura, Pintubi, © ‘kura,

Kukatja. ‘pigi, Aranda. Ias a good fruit like a tomato which is eaten.

[The fruit of 8. petrophilum is hard and not edible.]

Datura leichardtit (1396). a’rangatrakata, Aranda. No use is made of it. Once

two boys ate these and they became drunk. Their mother wanted to know

what was wrong. Very “strong” and dangerous, only makes one drunk.

Nicotiana rotundifolia Lindl. (38a), mingulba, Pintubi. ‘mingul’mingulba,

Aranda, Not used by Aranda,

(70). ‘ingul’ingulba, Aranda. Chew it when nothing better is available.

Nicotiana gossei Domin. (56a). pitjori, Aranda. ingulba, Aranda,

Nicotiana sp. ? nov. all. N. gossei. Dr. H. Wichler, State Botanist, reports: “This

species is characterized by the long flowers similar to N. gossei aud N,

rotundifolia, the pubescence of N, gossei and N. rotundifolia, the short

calyx (ca, 9-11 mm.), the cauline leaves having not such a broad base as is

characteristic for N, gossei, and the inflorescence being more clongatcd than

in N. gossei and resembling more N. ingulba.”

(38). mingulmingulba, Kukatja. ingulingulba, Aranda. Not used for any pur-

puse by the Aranda. This species grows near water, The species on the

sandhills and the one on the ranges are chewed by all.

(32a). tjunbunbu, Nyalia, pitjuri, Aranda. This species is the hills tobacco

aml is considered a good kind.

(156a). jngulba, Pintybi, pitjuri, Arandis.

(ALI). mingulba, Pintubi. ingulba, Aranda. This Nicotiana is chewed with

ashes,

NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS 139

(141b). ingulingulba, Aranda. Some people use it as a tobacco, (The differ-

ences in native nomenclature and use are perhaps due to their mis-identify-

ing the inswflicient material. )

Nicotiana velutina (136b). mingulmingulba, Pintubi. ingulingulba, Aranda.

Sometimes men chew it when they have na pitjuri, It is wilted in hat ashes

but is not as good as ingulba.

(Nicotiana ingulba with its very long corolla tube wus also collected and is used

by the natives. However. 4 specimen was not submitted for the native

name. )

SCROPITULARIACEAE

Stemodia viscosa (104a). Has no native name, Has a strong smell; to make a

medicine, it is put in boiling water and allowed to cool; in use the head is

washed with the liquid. Tt is considered a good medicine.

BIGNONIACEAR

Tecoma doratoxylon (44a). ‘urtjanba, Pintubi. ‘winbiri, Kukatja. ‘wianbiri,

Ngalia. ‘janbara, Aranda. The wood of this shrub, because of its flexibility

and strength, is considered to bo the best spear wood. Short lengths are

spliced together when long ones are not available.

MYOPORACEAE

Myoporum montanum (147b), tjuruku tjuruku, Aranda, Used as medicine,

steep in water with hot stones in dish, wash head with it; very strong medi-

cine. “Heat branches in fire and spread down, lie on them for medicine.’

Eremophila latrobei (32b). kujilana, Aranda. Eat the bases of the flowers, pull

off flower and eat base; is very sweet sugar = nkwald.

Evemophila gilesii (24a, T9b). ‘molili, Pintutbi. *knjizslana, Aranda. Emu food,

also a native medicine; boil it, wash the hody with the liquid for the cure

ot body sores-

Eremophila sturtii (109a). “Kerosene Bush.” ‘inkotinkota, Aranda. Has no use.

Eremophila longifolia (20a). ‘yalurupa, Pintubi, Kukatja. tnuruya, Aranda.

Has no use,

Eremophila freelingii (124b). ‘aratja, Pintubi. ‘aratja, Aranda. Euros eat it.

Eremophila goodwini (50h). Only a flower, no food. Unpleasant smell,

RUBIACEAE

Plectronia latifolia (86a). awulura, Pintuhi. agia, Aranda, ‘This wild currant

is plentiful on the sandhills and on the ranges.

CUCURBITACEAE

Melothria maderaspafana (133a, 39b). ‘elkart'elk(w)arta, Aranda. Kangaroos

edt the fruits; has no other use,

Citrullus culgaris (60a). kura, Kukatju. pikia, Aranda. The introduced pie

melon, blackfellow melon,

CAMPANULACEAE

Isetoma petraea (157). “Euro fingers” is ore of names. ‘mara’kanjala, Pintubi.

‘raneratja, Aranda, “Very strong,’ Tf eat this with pitjuri it makes one

very drunk, very strong.

GOODENIACLAE

Goadenia larapinta Tate (25a). Has no native name,

140 J, B. CLELAND anp N, B, 'TINDALE

COMPOSITAE

Brachycome ciliaris (67a). Has no native name, “only a flower”,

Calotis latiuscula (109b). tjintatjinta, Pintubi, Kukatja, Aranda. Kangaroo and

emu food only,

Calotis hispidula (66a, 132b). tjilga, Pintubi. tongara, Aranda, Nuisance only

(frorn the spines); hard to find place to camp where there are none,

Siegesbeckia orientalis (12a). Has no. native name. Only a flower; no use

except that it is used to decorate the hair of girls.

Podocoma cuneifolia (142b). Only a flower.

Olearia subspicata (98b). Only a flower, no name.

Glossogyne tenuifolia (117b). ‘enomarta, enmorta, Aranda. Emu food.

Senecio magnificus (137b). ‘knulja, knamba, Ielena, ‘knuljaknambalelena,

Aranda, Only a flower.

Senecio gregorti (122a). Has no native name and no use, only a flower.

Helipterum floribundum (72a). Has no native name, only a flower.

Helipterum stipitatum (41a, 112b), eno:tji (a flower), Pintubi. ‘wamala-

‘wamula, Negalia, andata, Aranda. (The Aranda speak of it only under

this general name, meaning a Hower.) andata mara, a good or pretty flower.

Helipterum thomsoni (153b), Only a flower.

Helichrysum apiculatum (3b). "kembakemba, Aranda. “Only a flower.”

Helichrysum bracteatum (26a). Has no native name, “only a flower”.

Helichrysum ambiguum (9a). Has no native name and no use.

Rutidosis helichrysoides (4a, 114b). kembakemba, Pintubi. kembakemba,

Aranda. Not used.

Myriocephalus stuartii (29a, 108a). Has no native name, “only a flower”,

Calocephalus multiflorus (10a, 113b). Has no native name and is not used;

only a flower.

Sonchus oleraceus (79a). The introduced Sow Thistle. ‘ulbu’rulbura. “Came

with the white man; not eaten,”

FUNGI

Pisolithus (Palysaccum) tinctorius. awingura, Aranda. Said by the aborigines

to grow under mulga trees.

Phellorhina sp. No native name or use.

REVISION OF THE TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES - SCAPHOPODA.

BY N. H. LUDBROOK

Summary

The present paper is the first of a series revising the molluscan species described by Tate.

The scaphopoda are all lodged in the Tate Museum Collection, University of Adelaide.

REVISION OF THE TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES — SCAPHOPODA.

by N. H. LunsrooK*

[Read 11 September 1958]

SUMMARY

The present paper is the first of a series revising the molhuscan species «é-

scribed by Tate. ‘The seaphopoda are all lodged iu the Yate Museum Collec-

tion, University of Adelaide.

{NTRODUCTION

At the suggestion of Dr, M. F. Glaessner the writer has undertaken, on a

long-term basis, the revision of the type collection of mollusca described by

Ralph Tate between 1875 and 1899.

For the 50 years following the death of Tate in 1901 this material consti-

tuted the principal basis of Tertiary correlation in South Australia. Lt is now

desirable that the mollusca be revised and aligned with the microfaunas which

have been studied during the last six years at the University of Adelaide and the

South Australian Department of Mines.

The scaphopod species ure all in the Tate Museum Collection. They are

a small group of some significance in stratigraphic interpretation.

Phylum MOLLUSCA

Class SCAPHOPODA

Family DENTALUDAE

Genus Dentatam™ Linné, 1758

Type species (s.d. Montfort, 1810) Dentalium clephantinum Linné

Subgenus Denrarium s. str.

Dentalium (Dentalium) aratum Tate

pl.1, fiz. 3

Dentalium qratum Tate, 1887, Trans. Roy, Soc. $. Aust., 9, p. 192, pl 20, fig. 8.

Dentalium aratum. Tate, Harris, 189T, Cat, Tert, Moll, Brit. Mus., 1, p. 293.

Dentaliumn aratum Tate, Pilsbry & Sharp, 1898, Tryon’s Man, Conch., 17, p: 199.

Dentatium (Enisiphon) aratum Tate, 1899, Traus. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 23 (2), p. 265,

Dentulium aratum Tate, Chapman & Crespin, 1928, Rec. Geol. Surv. Vic. 5 (1), p. 159.

Denialium (Paradentalium) uratum Tate, Cotton and Ludbrook, 1938, Trans, Roy. Sue. 8.

Aust., 62 (2), p, 223.

Diagnosis—A small Dentalium with from 6 to 8 primary ribs narrower than

the interspaces with fine secondary riblets and threads developing anteriorly.

Strongly curved posteriorly, nearly straight anteriorly,

Description of Holotype—Shell small, fairly strongly arcuate, polygonal in

section with 7 strong primary ribs and fine longitudinal threads or riblets in

the interspaces. Ribs narrow, interspaces wide, shell strongly curved posteriorly,

straightening anteriorly, gradually tapering, Apex and aperture polyganal.,

Dimensions—Length 20 mm,, diameter at apex 1 mm., diameter at aperture

2 mm,, arc 2 mm.

* Department of Mines, Adelaide. Published with the permission of the Disetar oF Mines.

Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust. (1959), Vol. 32,

142 N. H, LUDBROOK

Type Locality—Cadell Marl Lens, River Murray, 4 miles below Morgan,

Hundred Cadell, Section G; Lower Miocene.

Holotype—Tate Mus, Coll., T 256A.

Material—On original tablet T 256 holotype and 25 paratypes in 3 rows: top

row numbered 1--l seven paratypes Muddy Creek, numbered 4 one paratype

Spring Creek; middle row numbered 5—5 four paratypes Gellibrund, the holo-

type, and 4 paratypes R. Murray; bottom row numbered 2 one paratype Fyans-

ford, numbered 3 two paratypes Schnapper Point, 6 paratypes R. Murray,

The origina] description cites the species as occurring in the Muloowurtie

Clays, but no specimens from this Jocality are in Tate's material.

Stratigraphical Range—Miocenc-?Pliocene.

Dentalium (Dentalium) latesulcatum Tate

pl. 1, fig, 1

Dentaliunt latesuclatum (err. pro latesulcatum) Tate, 1899, Trans. Roy. Sov. $. Aust.. 23

(2), p. 262, pl. 8, fig. 9.

Dentalium (Paradentalium) howchini, Cotton & Ludbrook, L938, Trans. Roy. Sac. S. Aust.

62 (2), p, 224, pl. 19, fig. 6,

Dentalium (Dentalium) latesuleatum Tate, Ludbrook, 1958, Trans. Roy. Soe. 5, Aust, 79,

pp. 1-2, pl. 1, figs. 10-14 (gives full synonymy ).

Diagnosis—A short thick solid Dentalium with 7 to 16 strong primary ribs

upproximately equal to interspaces ™m which secondary ribs may be developed

by intercalation,

Description of Holotype—Shell short, thick, solid, only very slightly curved,

rapidly tapering, sculptured with 10 strong primary ribs narrower than the inter-

spaces in which secondary riblets rise near the aperture by intercalation. Inter-

spaces irregularly and strongly crossed by growth striae which pass less con-

spicuously over the ribs. Apex with a notch. Aperture circular internally,

polygonal externally.

Dimensions—Leuyth 40 mm., diameter at apex d mm.. diameter at aperture

8 mm.

Type Locality—Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria; Grange Burn Coquiua,

Pliocene,

Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll,, T 16104.

Material—The holotype and 6 paratypes on ori inal tablet; specimens

labelled Dentalium elephantinum and recorded as such (Tate, 1890, p. 177)

Dry Creek Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Pliocene.

Subgenus Anwraris H. Adams & A, Adams, 1854

Type species (s.d. Pilsbry & Sharp, 1897) Dentalium entalis Linneé

Dentalium (Antalis) bifrons. Tate

pl. 2, fig. 2

Dentalium (2)bifrons Tate, 1887, Trams. Ray, Soc, 5, Aust. 8, pp. 192-3, pl. 20, fig, 5.

Dentalium bifrons 'Vate, Tate & Dermant. 1593, Trams. Roy. Soc. 5, Aust., 47 (1), p. 235,

Deutalium Lifrans ‘Vate, Harris, 1897, Mat. ‘ert. Moll. Brit. Mus, 1, 9 245,

Dentalium bifrans. Yate, Pilsbry & Sharp, 1598, Trydn’s Man. Coneli,, 17, p. 200.

Dentalinm ( Fissidentuliun:) bifruns Vate, Cottou & Ludbrogk. 1998, Trans. Roy. Sne. S. Aust,

62 (2), p. 222.

Diagnosis—A large solid, gradually tapering and only slightly curved Antalis,

finely ribbed in the posterior one-quarter, Obsolete or smooth elsewhere but for

conspicaous oblique growth lines, Apex with or without slit.

TATE MOLLUSCAN ‘TYPES 143

Description of Holotype—Shell large and solid, only slightly curved, more

so in the posterior one-third, nearly straight in the anterior two-thirds. Posterior

one-quarter with about 40 fine ribs which rapidly become obsolete. Anterior

portion of shell smooth, with microscopic and conspicuous oblique growth striae,

Shell gradually tapering over all. Apex circular in the holotype, without slit,

Aperture circular, only slightly oblique.

Dimensions—Length 92 mm., diameter at apex 2 mm.,, diamietcr at aperture

9-4 mm.,, are 3-6 mm,

Type Locality—Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; Grange Burn Coquina,

Pliocene.

Holvtype—Tate Mus, Coll,, T 255.

Matertel—On tablet T 255, the holotype and 2 paratypes from Muddy Creek,

aie paralype Spring Creek. One large topotype 96 mm. long with apical slit

3-5 mm.

Stratigraphieal Range—Miocene-Pliocene.

Dentalium (Antalis) sectiforme Tate

pl. 2) ig. 5

Dentualium. (Graptacme ) sectiforme Vate, 1899, Trans. Roy. Sou. $. Aust., 23 (2), p, 263,

pl. 8, figs. 6, Ga.

Dentaliim (Grapteucme) sectiforme Tate, Cotton and Lndbrook, 1938, Trans. Roy. Sac. S.

Aust,, 62 (2). p. 225.

Diagnosis—A small, slender Antalis, moderately curved, ‘sculptured poste-

riorly with fine riblets increasing by intercalation ftom about 16 at the apex to

about 30 where they become obsolete in the anterior quarter.

Descriplion of Heletype—Shell small, very slender and gradually tapering,

fairly thin but solid, glossy, translucent, sculptured in the posterior three-quarters

with fine riblets, 16 at the apex increasing by interealation to about 30 at the

anterior one-quarter where they become obsolete, but are still visible under

the microscope. Anterior quarter showing fine growth striae.

Aperture circular, peristome thin; apex with a short slit and small supple-

mentary pipe.

Dimensions—Length 11 mm,, diameter at apex 0-05 mm., diameter at aper-

ture 2-2 mm,, are 1-39 mm,

Type Locality—Muddy Creek, Victoria; Grange Burn Coquina, Pliocene.

Holotype—Tate Mus, Coll, T 1615A.

Material—The holotype and 5 paratypes.

Stratigraphical Range—Lower Pliocene of Muddy Creek.

Subgenus Fustraiwa Stoliczka, 1868

Type species (s.d. Pilsbry & Sharp, 1897) D. cireinatum Sowerby

Dentalium (Fustiaria) tornatissimum Tate

nl, 2, fizs. 6, 7

Dentalium (Episiphon) tornutissimum Tate, 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc, 8, Aust. 23 (2), p. 265,

pl. 8, figs. 7-7s.

Dentelium (Episiphon) tornatisximum ‘Vate, Cotten and Ladbrook, 1938, Trans. Koy. Soe.

S. Aust., 62 (2), p. 226-7.

Diagnosis—A very small solid Fustiaria with conspicuous annular grooves,

about 8 per mm.

Description of Holotype—Shell small but solid, nearly straight, sculptured

with incised annular grooves, varying from 10 per mm. in the apical portion to

less than 8 towards the aperture. Apex with a short terminal pipe, aperture

broken, circular in section. ;

144 ¥ N. H. LUDBROOK

Dimensions—Length 7-3 mm., diameter at aperture 1:37 mm., diameter at

apex 0:55 mm., are 0-27 mm.

Type Locality—Jemmy’s Point, Gippsland; Jemmy’s Point Formation, Kalim-

nan (Plivcene).

Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., 'T 1609.

Material—The holotype and paratype.

Stratizraphical Range—Kalimnan (Pliocene).

Subgenus Gapinina Foresti, 1895

Type species (monotypy) D, triquetrum Brocchi, 18]4

Dentalium (Gadilina) tatei Sharp & Pilsbry

pl. 1, fix. 5

Dentalium. (2?) triquetrum Yate, 1887, Trans. Roy. Soc, 5. Aust, 9. p. 193, pl. 20, fig. 3 (nen

Brocchi, 1814),

Dentalium tatet Sharp & Pilsbry, 1898, Trvon’s Man, Conch,, 17. p. 218 (nom, nov.).

Tontishtens. Keaaeelata } tatet Sharp & Pilshry, Tute, 1999, Trans, Roy. Soc, 8, Aust, 23 (2),

p. 266.

Dentalium (Gadilina) tatei Pilsbry & Sharp, Cotton & Ludbrook, 1938, Trans. Roy. Soc. §.

Aust., 62 {2), p. 227.

Diagnosis—A small but solid Gadilina, very slightly curved.

Description of HWolotype—Shell small, solid, smooth but for microscopic

growth lines, thick, only very slightly curved and only slightly tapering. Later-

ally compressed. Aperture broken, apex triangular in section.

Dimensions—Length 10 mm., diameter at apex 0-7 mm,

Type Locality—Adelaide Bore, Kent Town, glauconitic sands, Upper Eocene.

Hololype—Tate Mus, Coll, T 252A.

Material—The holotype and six paratypes.

Stratigraphical Range—Upper Eocene.

Subgenus LAkvinentansua Cossmann, 1888

Type species (o.d.) D. incertum Deshayes

Dentalium (Laevidentalium) acriculum (Tate)

pl. 1, fig, 2

Entaliy acriculum. Tate, 1887, Trans. Roy. Soe. S$. Aust., 9. p. 192, pl. 20, fiz. 11.

Dentalium lacteum Tate, 1887, ibid., p. 193, nun Deshayes,

Dentglium acriculum Tate, Pilsbry & Sharp, 1898, Man. Conch., 17, p. 197.

Dentalium. ( Laevidentalium) lacteoluin Tate, 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc, S, Aust., 23 (2), p. 264.

Dentalium (Fustiaria) acriculum Tate, 1899, ibid.

Dentalium (Leevidentalium) lacteulim Tate, Cotton and Ludbrook, 1938, Trans. Roy, Soc.

S. Aust., 62 (2), p. 226.

Dentulium ( Fustidria) acriculum (Tate), Cotton and Ludbrook, 1938, ibid.

Diagnosis—A small, smooth, thin, gently curved Laevidenialium.

Description of Holotype—Shell small, thin, subulate, gently curved, smooth,

Bolished, with microscopic growth lines. Apex with a slit, aperture circular,

obligue,

Dimensions—Length 33 mim., diameter at apex 0:85 mm., diameter at aper-

tore 2.5 mm., are. 2:0 mm.

Type Loecality—Muddy Creek, Victoria; Muddy Creek Marls, Lower

Miocene.

Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., T 251.

Material—On tablet T 251 the holotype and 8 paratypes (Muddy Creck);

on tablet T 253 originally labelled Dentalium lacteum Deshayes and later cor-

rected to Dentalium lacteolum Tate, six specimens Muddy Creek, one Gelli-

TATE MOLLUSCAN ‘TYPES 145

brand. Tate separated these from acriculum on the absence of the apical fissure

which is not regarded as a diagnostic feature. 3 of the paratypes of acriculum.

have no fissure and the two species are indistinguishable,

The annular striae of the type description are merely very faint growth

striae,

Stratigraphical Range—Lower Mioceuie.

Dentalium (Laevidentalium) australe Sharp & Pilsbry

pl. 2, fiz, 1

Entalis onnulatum Tate, S87, Trans. Roy. Soc, §. Aust, 9, pp: 191-2, pl. 20, figs. Ga, 6b,

non Gmelin, nec Meyer, nee Sandberver.

Dentalium australis Sharp & Pilsbry, 1898, Tryon’s Man. Conch., £7, p. 199 (nom. anut.).

Dentalium (Fustiaria) australe Sharp & Pilsbry, Yate, 1899, Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 23

(2), pp. 264-5. J

Dentalium (Fustiaria) australe Sharp & Pilsbry, Cotton and Ludbrook, 1938, ‘Trans. Hoy, Soc.

S. Aust, 62 (2), p. 226.

Diagnosis—A fairly large solid Laevidentaliim nearly straight in the adult,

with conspicuous fairly even growth striae. about 6 per mm. ~

Description of Holotyne—Shell stout, fairly large and evenly tapering, only

slightly curved, more particularly in the posterior one-third, Shell smooth but

for conspicuous incised and fairly even growth striae, generally about 6 per milli-

metre. Apex rounded with a slit about 3 mm. long. Aperture circular, not

oblique.

Dimensions—Length 65 mm., diameter of apex 2 mm., diameter of aperture

7 mm, are 2 mm,

Type Locality~Muddy Creek, Victoria; Muddy Creek Marls, Lower

Miocene.

Holotype—Tate Mus, Col., T 250A.

Material—The holotype and 3 paratypes, on tablet with siz mounted spect-

mens. The holotype is the second from the left, the paratype third from the left

ix a specimen 53 mm. long of which the apex with terminal pipe was Ggured

(Tate, 1887, pl, 20, fig. 6b).

Two specimens, the extreme left and the second from right on the tablet,

do not belong to the species but to a large undescrihed species on tablet ‘T258

with 4 specimens of D. subfissura from the Murray Cliffs.

The dimensions of the holotype are incorrectly given in the original de-

scription. j

Stratigraphical Range--Upper Oligocene-Lower Miocene,

Dentaliom (Laevidentalium) largicrescens Tate

pl. Ll, fig. 4

Dentatium largicrescens Tate, 1899, Trans. Ray, Soc. 8, Aust., 28 (2), p. 264, pl, 8, figs,

I, 10a,

Dentalium la¢gicrescens ‘Tate, Chapman & Crespin, 1928, Ree. Geol. Surv. Vic., 5 (1), p. 159.

Dentalium (Laevidentalium) largicrescens Tate, Colton and Ludbrook, 1938, Trans, Roy,

Soc. S. Aust., 62 (2), p. 225.

) Diagnosis—A_ short, solid, rapidly tapering and slightly curved Laeviden-

tatium.

Description of Holotype--Shell of moderate size, moderately thick, smooth

and shining with conspicnous slightly oblique growth striae. Shell rapidly

tapering, gently curved in the posterior one-third but only slightly purved to-

wurds the aperture. Apex circular, thick, with an apical fissure on the ventral

side, aperture circular, relatively thin, ;

146 N. H. LUDBROOK

Dimensions—Length 44 mm., diameter at apex 1-0 mm., diameter at aper-

ture 6°5 mm., are 2-5 mm.

Type Locality—Beaumaris, Victoria; Sandringham Sands, Blick Rock Mem-

ber, Cheltenhamian (Upper Miocene).

Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., T 16LL.

Material—On tablet T 1611, the holotype and five paratypes from Beaumaris,

one paratype from the Pliocene of Muddy Creek. One specimen Muddy Creek,

f Stratigraphical Range—Cheltenhamian (Upper Miocene)-Kalimnan (Lower

Pliocene )-

Dentalium (Laevidentalium) pictile Tate

pl, 2, fiz. 4

Entalis subfissura Tate, Tate and Dennant, 1896, Trans. Roy. Soe, S. Aust. 20 (1), p. 134.

Denvaliom yicenidenlibigi pictile Tate, 4899. Trans. Roy, Soc, 5, Aust. 23 (2). p, 263,

pl. 8, fig.

Dentulium (Laevidentaliam) pictile Tate, Cotton and Ludbrook, 1936, Trams. Roy, Suc. S,

Aust, 62 (2), p. 225.

Diagnosis—A strongly curved Laevidentaliem of moderate size, evenly

tapering.

Description of Holotype—Shell slender. of moderate size, gradually tapering,

strongly curved, smooth but for fine growth striae, dark grey to black in colour

me light bands, Apex slightly oval, with a short broad notch, aperture rounded,

oblique.

Dinu rsions=Derigth 52 mrm., diameter at apex 1 mm., diameter at aperture

5 mm,, are 6-5 mm.

Type Locality—Vable Cape, Tasmania; Oligocenc,

Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., T 1608.

Material—Tablet 'T 1608 with holotype and paratype only,

Stratigraphical Range—Upper Oligocene-Lower Miocene.

Dentalium (Laevidentalium) subfissura (Tate)

ni, 2, fig. 3

Entalis subfissura Tate, 1887, Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust, 9, p. 191, pl. 20, figs. du-b.

Dentalium subfissura Tate, Harris, 1497, Cat. Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus., (1), n, 296; Pilsbry &

Sharp, 1898, Man. Conch,, 17, p. 216,

Dentalium subfissura Tate, 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 23 (2), p. 263.

Dentalium subfissira Tate, Chapman & Crespin, 1928, Rec, Geol, Surv. Vic, 3 (1), p. 159,

Dentalium (Laevidentalium) subfissura Tate, Cotton & Ludbrook, 1938, Trans, Roy, Soe. 5,

Aust., 62 (2), p. 235,

Diagnosis—An evenly tapering and moderately arcuate Laevidentalivm of

moderate size.

Description of Holotype—Shell of imoderate size for the subgenus, thin,

subulate, slightly compressed dorso-ventrally, smooth except for oblique growth

striac, Apex small, subcircular, with a fairly broad V-shaped notch on the

ventral side and a small supplementary pipe. Aperture oblique, slightly oval,

dorso-ventrally compressed,

Dimensions—Length 46 mm., diameters at aperture 4 and 4:25 mm.

diameter at apex I mm, are 4 mm.

Type Locality—River Murray Cliffs 4 miles downstream from Morgan, Hun-

dred of Cadell, Section G. Morgan Limestone (Lower Mivcene).

Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., T 249A.

Material—On tablet the holotype and the following paratypes: River Murray

2, Muddy Creek 3, Gellibrand River 3, Spring Creck 1, Schnapper Point 2,

Aldinga Bay (Blanche Point Marls) 3, Corio Bay 1. Table Cape specimen was

TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES 147

evidently removed from the tablet and described as D. pictile, the holotype of

which just fits the unfaded space. T 258 consists of 4 topotypes from River

Murray, and one large Laevidentalium belonging to another species.

Also in the Tate Collection 1 specimen Dry Creek Bore, 34 examples un-

localized probably from Muddy Creek, 1 specimen from the Eocene of Adelaide

Bore, 12 specimens Schnapper Point, 12 specimens Blanche Point Marls, 11.

topotypes River Murray, 27 specimens Muddy Creek.

Stratigraphical Range—Upper Eocene to Lower Miocene. Common in

Lower Miocene of Murray Basin.

Family SIPHONODENTALUOIDAE Simroth, 1894

Genus Capuus Philippi, 1544

Type species (monotypy) Dentalie¢m ovvulum Philippi

Subgenus Gants Gray, 1847

Type species (0.d,) Dentglium gadus Montagu

Cadulus (Gadila) mucronatus Tate

pl. 1, tig. 8

Cadulus mucronatus Tate, 1587, Frans. Roy. Sue. §. Aust., 9. p. 193. pl. 20, fig. 10,

Cadulus mucronatus Late, Rarris, 1997, Cat. 'Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus,, 1. p. 287.

Cadulus mucronatus Tate, Pilsbry & Sharp, 1898, Tryon’s Man. Gonch., 17. p. 237.

Cadulus mucronatus Tate, 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc. $. Aust. 23 (2). p. 266,

Diagnosis—A small Gadila, bulging slightly to the anterior of the middle,

Genlly curved, fairly rapidly tapering at each end. Wider anteriorly than to.

wards the apex.

Description of Holotype—Shell fairly smal), solid, narroyy, gently arcuate

on the ventral surtace and bulging on the dorsal surface. Contraction towards

the anterior aperture fairly pronounced over 2 mm,; contraction to the posterior

more gradual over a Iength of 3 mm.

Aperture broken in the holotype, otherwise oblique, apex also broken, other-

wise rounded, sharp, and thickened within.

Surface smooth, polished, with slightly oblique growth lines and faint signs

of banding to the anterior.

Dimensions—Length 6-3 mm., ciameter at apex 0-7 mm., at aperture 1:0

mm., at swelling 1-63 mu.

Type Locality (here designated)—Muddy Creek, Victoria; Muddy Creek

Marls, Lower Miovene.

Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll... T 229A.

Material—The holotype and 14 paratypes in 2 rows mounted on card in box

mounted on tablet labelled “Cadulus mucronatus Tate pl. XX., fig. 10, Eocene

Muddy Ck., 1 Spring Ck.”

The holotype is the specimen ut the left of the bottom row.

There is nothing on the card to indicate which specimens come from

Maddy Creek and which from Spring Creek.

One large shell fifth from the left of the bottom row does not belong to

the species.

Stratigraphical Range—Lower Miocene.

Cadulus (Gadila) acuminatus Tate

ol. 1, fiz. 7

Cadulus aoumittatus Tate, 1887, Trans. Rey. Sac. S. Aust... 9, p, 194.

Cadulus (Gedila) acuminutus Tate, Pilsbry & Sharp, 1898, Tryon’s Mau. Conch., 17, p, L83.

Cadulus (Gadilz) aouminatus Tate, 1899, id, 23 (2). p, 266, pl. 8, fix. 12.

145 N. HH. LUDBROOK

Cadulus acuminatus Desh. Demmant & Kitson, 1903, Rec, Geol, Surv. Vic., 1 (2), p. 145,

Cadulius aeuminatus Tate, Ludbrook, 1941, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 65 (1), p. 104.

Cadulus (Gadila) acuminatus Tate, Ludbrook, 1956, id. 78, p. 5, pl, 1, fig. 2.

Diagnosis—A very small Gadila slightly curved and not bulging.

Description of Holotype—Shell rather thin, very small, slightly curved,

gently tapering anteriorly and slightly more so posteriorly. Dorsal face with

gentle curvature, ventral face somewhat more arcuate. Surface of shell some-

what eroded, otherwise smooth.

Apex circular, slightly oblique, thin; aperture small, cireular, thin.

Dimensions—Length 5-3 mm., diameter at the middle 1 mm., diameter at

aperture 0-75 mm.

Type Locality—Aldinga Bay; Oyster Beds, Pliocene.

Holotype—Tate Mus. Call., T 231A,

Material—The holotype (the middle specimen) and 2 paratypes mounted

be eard in tube on tablet labelled “Cadulus acuminatus Deshayes Miocene Al-

ing”,

Tate’s (1899, p. 266) explanation of his use of Deshayes’s MSS name is

sufficiently clear. Deshayes’s material has not yet been described; the tablet

as originally Jabelled is still in the British Museum.

Stratigraphical. Ranve—Pliocene of Aldinga Bay and the Adelaide Basin.

Cadulus (Gadila) infans Tatc

pl. 1, fic. 6

Catlilus infans Tate, 1899, “rans. Roy. Sov. S. Aust, 28 (2), p. 266, pl. 8, fig. 11.

Diagnosis—A very small Gadila, very slightly curved and slightly bulging in

the anterior one-third.

Description of Holotype—Shell thin, white, smooth, very small, shining,

slightly bulging in the anterior one-third and very gently tapering posteriorly,

slightly more so in the anterior third. Dorsal fuce nearly straight, ventral face

gently arcuate, Apex broken, apparently circular, aperture oblique, thin,

Dimensions—Length 3-2 mm., maximum diameter 0-51 mm., diameter at

aperture 0-5 mm., arc 0-05 mm.

Type Locality—Muddy Creek, Victoria; Grange Burn Coquina, Pliocene.

Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., T1614.

Material—The holotype only.

Stratigraphical Range—Pliocene.

REFERENCES

Crapman, F., 1916. Cainozoic Geology of the Mallee and other Victorian Bores. Wee. Geol.

Surv. Vic., 3 (4), pp. 327-430, pls, 43-78_

Crarman, F., Cresrin, f, and Kesre, R. A. 1928. The Sorrerita Kore, Mornington Peninsula.

Rec, Geol, Sury. Vic. 5 (1), pp. 1-195, pls, 1-12,

Corron, B. G., and Luperoox, N. H., 1938, Recent and Fossil Species of the Scaphopad

Gees Dentalium in South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. $. Anst., 6% (2), pp. 217-228,

pl. 13,

Dennant, J., and Krrson, A. E., 1903. Catalogue of the Described Species of Fossils (ex-

cept Bryozoa and Foraminifera) in the Cainozoic Fauna of Victoria, South Australia and

Tasmuniu. Ree. Geol. Surv. Vie. 1 (2), pp. 89-147.

LupproaoK, N. 1., 1956, The Molluscan Fauna of the Pliocene Strata Underlying the Ade-

lnide Plains. Part UW, Seaphapoda, ete. Trans, Roy. Soc, 8, Aust., 78, pp. 1-36, pls. 1, 2,

Prosarvy, TH. A., and Suanp, B,, 1897-8. Scaphopoda. Tryon’s: Manual of Conchology, 17,

* 1-280, ‘pls. 1-39.

Tate, R., 1886. The Scaphopoda of the Older Tertiary of Australia. “Trans. Ruy. Soe. §.

Aust, 9, pp, 190-194, pl, 20. -

Tarr, IL, 1890. On the Discovery of Marine Deposits of Pliocene Age in Australia, ‘Trans.

Rey, Soc. §, Aust, 13 (2), pp. 172-180.

Fig.

Tig.

Fig.

TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES 149

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

PLATE 1

1—Dentalium (Dentalium) latesulcatum Tate. Holotype, T 1610A, x 2-5.

2.—Dentalium (Laevidentalium) acriculum (Tate). Holotype, T 251, x 2-5.

3.—Dentalium (Dentalium) aratum Tate. Holotype, 'T 256A, x5.

4.—Dentalium (Laevidentalium) largicrescens Tate. Holotype, T1611, x2.

5.—Dentalium (Gadilina) tatei Sharp & Pilsbry. Holotype, T 252A, x 12.

6.—Cadulus (Gadila) infans Tate. Holotype, T 1614, x 20.

7.—Cadulus (Gadila) acuminatus Tate. Holotype, T 231A, x 10.

8.—Cadulus (Gadila) mucronatus Tate. Holotype, T 229A, x 11.

PLATE 2

1—Dentalium (Laevidentalium) australe Sharp & Pilsbry, Holotype, T 250A, x 2-5.

2.—Dentalium (Antalis) bifrons Tate. Holotype, T 255, x 1-5.

3.—Dentalium (Laevidentalium) subfissura (Tate). Holotype, T 249A, x2°-5.

4.—Dentalium (Laevidentalium) pictile (Tate), Holotype, T 1608, x 2.

5.—Dentulium (Antalis) sectiforme Tate. Holotype, T 1615A, x 10.

6.—Dentalium (Fustiaria) tornatissimum Tate. Holotype, T 1609A, x 9.

7.—Dentalium (Fustiaria) tornatissum Tate. Paratypc, T1609B, x 9.

N. H. Lupprook PuatTE |

PLATE

N. LL, LupsrooKx

SOME NEMATODE PARASITES FROM AUSTRALIAN HOSTS.

BY PATRICA M. THOMAS

Summary

Four species are described as new, and amplified descriptions are given of six other species. The

following are included: Capillaria miniopterae n. sp. (Miniopterus blepotis); Amidostomum

biziurae Johnston & Mawson (Biziuralobata); Nicollina echidnae Baylis and N. cameroni n. sp.

(Tachyglossusaculeata); Nycteridostrongylus uncicollis Baylis and Molinostrongylus dollfusin. sp.

(Miniopterus blepotis); Austrostrorzgylus thylogale Johnston & Mawson (Setonix brachyura) ;

Pharyngodon australis Johnston & Mawson ( Tiliquascincoides ) ; Porrocaecum (Laymanicaecum )

sp., immature ( Emusium balloti ) ; Amplicaecum mackerrasae nom. nov. syn. Ophidascaris varani

Johnston & Mawson ( Varanus varius ) ; Ophidascaris sp. ( Amphibolurus barbatus) ; Hedruris

longispicula n. sp. (Lygosoma challengeri); Abbreviata bancrofti (rwin-Smith) (Aspidites

melanocephalus ).

SOME NEMATODE PARASITES FROM AUSTRALIAN HOSTS,

by Parricta M, THomas®

[Read 11 September 1958]

SUMMARY

Four species are described as new, and amplified descriptions are given of

six other species. ‘Che following are included: Capillaria miniopterae n. sp.

(Miniopterus blepatis); Amidostomum bisiurae Johnston & Mawson (Biziura

lobata); Nieollina echidnue Baylis and N. cametont nu. sp. (Tachyglossus

aculeata): Nuyucteridastrangylus ticicollis Baylis and Molinustrongylus dollfust

n. sp. (Miniopterus blepetis); Austrostrongylus thylogale Johnston & Mawsoa

(Setimix brachyura); Pharyngodon australis Johnston & Mawson (Tiliqua

scincuides); Porrocaecum (Laymanicaccum) sp., imuiature (Emusium ballot);

Amplicaecum mackerrasae non. noy. syn, Ophidascaris varani Jolinston & Maw-

son (Varanus varius); Ophidasearis sp. (Amphibolurus barbatus); Hedruris

longispicula n. sp. (Lyzosone challengeri); Abbreviata banecrofti (Trwin-

Smith) (Aspidites melanocephulus).

LIST OF PARASITES ARRANGED UNDER THEIR ILOSTS

Amusium balloti Bernardi. Shark Bay, W.A. Porrocaecum (Laymanicaecum )

sp.

Hemiscyllium ocellatum Bonnaterre. Low Is., Qu. Proleptus australis Baylis.

Lyzosoma challengeri Boulenger. Springbank, Qu. Hedruris longispicula

Th sp.

Varanus varius Shaw. Mt. Nebo, Qu. Amplicaécrmt mackerrasae nom. nov.

Aspidites melanocephalus Kreftt. Cairns, Qu. Abbreviata bancrofli (Tewin-

Smith),

Amphibolurus barbatus Cuvier. West Burleigh. Polydelphis sp,

Tiligua scincoides Shaw. Brisbane, Qu. Pharyngodon australis Johnston and

Miutwson,

Biziura lobata Shaw. Pumong, S.A. Amidostomum hiziurae Johnston and

Mawson.

Tachyglossus aculeata (Shaw and Nodder). Kangaroo Island, 5.A,: Nicollina

echidnae Baylis; N. cameroni u. sp,; Glen Davis, N.S.W,: Nicollina echicdnae

Baylis.

Setonix brachyura Quoy and Gaimard, Rottnest Island, W.A, Austrostronzylus

thylogale Johnston and Mawson.

Miniopterus blepotis Temminck. Naracoorte, 8.A.: Nycteridostrongylus unci-

callis Baylis, Molinostrongylus dollfusi n. sp. Canungra, Qu.: Capillaria

miniopterae n. sp., Nycteridostrongylus uncicollis Baylis, Molinos(rangylus

dollfusi n. sp.

Capillaria miniopterae 1. sp,

(Figs. 1-3)

Four female und four male worms were taken from the slomach of Miniop-

teris blepotis from Canungra, Quecnsland.

The males are §-0-8-3 mm. long, the females 11-1-14-4 mm. The body

Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1959), Vol, 82.

152 POM, THOMAS

ile base of the vesophagus 41-47p, 61; at the widest part of the body 35-5y,

88-100.. The ratio uf oesophageal to intestinal regions is as 1;1+9-2-L in the

female and 1;1-6 in the male.

The eggs are about 50, by 25.4. The vulva lies cluse behind the end of

the oesophagus and its position is marked by # large tubular Aap of the cuticle.

The anus m the female is 20u from the rounded posteriar end,

In the male there are two lateral bursal Jobes each with a double-headed

bursal ray. Prebursal lateral alae are present. A spicule is apparently absent,

ur is su lightly cuticularised as to be invisible; the sheath does not project from

the body in any specimen; it is not spinos and appcars to be voluminous and

transversely striated.

The species differs from others from hats {np which preanal alae in the male

have been described, in the absence of spicules and in having a nonspinous

sheath, and in the absence of bacillary bands in the enticle.

Amidostomum biziurae Johnston and Mawson

(Figs, 4-10)

‘This species was first described from a single fomale specimen. A number

uf mates and females have now been obtained from the type host, Biziure lobata,

in which they cecurred in considerable numbers from under the lining of the

tizzatd in each of two birds examined. The species has been distinguished

rom others of the genus by the presence of anterior projections around the

mouth, and by the nature of the cuticle,

The length of the males is 7:1-8-1 mim., that of the females 9-4-11-5 mm.

The cuticle is annulated, cach annule being formed of a row of coarse bosses

of more ur Jess equal size; these latter are discontinued in the lateral lines and on

the tail of the female, Underneath this outer Jayer the cuticle is longitudinally

striated, but these striae are set obliquely over must of the body, running to-

wards the lateral lines, The anterior end of the worm is rounded and the

cuticle not inflated; around the mouth is » ring of six small triangular cuticular

eutgrowths. Six cephalic papillae are distinct. No epaulette-like structures are

present. unless these are represented by the ting of cuticular outgrowths.

The bueeal capsule is strongly built and measures in the female lip ex-

ternal, and 12. internal, diameter, and 7-8. in length. The large dorsal touth

is nat noticeably recurved, Other teeth if present are insignificant. The ooso-

hagus is 530-620 long in the male, 600-680, in the female; it is surrounded

the nerve ring a little in front of its mid-length, and shortly behind this, at

almost the saine level. are the excretory pore and the minute cervical papillae.

In a male in which the oesophagus is 500, long, the nerve ring lies 280p, the

cervical papillae at 340, and the excretory pore at 345y, from the anterior end;

in a Female in which the ocsophagus is 610. long these distances are respec-

tively 3004, 350, and 350u. The oesophagus is lined by several long thick

cuticularised bands, referred to by some authors us triturating rods, and these

are broken (each possibly projecting as a small tooth) just in frout of the nerve

ring, where the oesophagus is very slightly swollen. The oesophagus widens

slightly in its posterior third and ends fn an elongate bulb, into which te

triturating rods do not enter,

The female tail, 210-240, long, is strongly striated, though not mammillated,

and ends in an unstriated bulb. The distance of the vulva from the posterior

em of the body is 1/4-4-1/4-9 of the total body length, The vulva itself is a

wide slit. The eggs are 70-754 by 42-45,.

The spicules are 115-130, long. Each ends in two points of almost equal

length, of these the dorsal, sometimes shorter, is the narrower, and the other

NEMATODE PARASITES 153

wide and membranous, The gubernaculum is 70s long. A pair of lateral pre-

bursal papillae are present. The bursa is infolded along the outer edge of the

lateral lobes so that the tips of the rays are hard to see. A small dorsal lobe is

present, The arrangement of the lobes and rays is shown in Figs. 8, 9 and 10.

Figs, 1-10. Fius. 1-3, Capillaria miniopterae. 1, vulvar region of femule; 2, ventral, and 3,

lateral, views of posterior end of male. Figs. 4-10, Amidostomum bizturae, 4, dorsal, and

5, lateral, views of head; 6, oesophageal region; 7, tail of female; 8, posterior end of male;

9, ventral view of bursa: 10, dorsal ray. Figs. 1, 2, 3 and 8 to same scale; Figs. 4 and 5 to

saine scale; Figs. 6, 7, 9 and 10 to same scale,

The genus Nicotzina Baylis, 1930

Baylis in 1930 (p. 17) described two species of a new genus from echidnas.

He stated that neither of them appeared to be that recorded (unnamed) by

Nicoll (1914), because Nicoll described the worms as retaining their coiled

15d P. M, THOMAS

shape in lot alcohol, whereas those of Baylis were not coiled, Cameron in

1931 (p. 153) added another species to the genus, from a marsupial Sarcophilus

harrissi, and stated that this species assumnes the tightly coiled habit when pre-

served,

Of two echidnas recently dissected in this department, only one was pura-

sitised, and this had two species, one coiled tightly in a long spiral and the

other loosely curved. The latter are identified with one of the specivs described

by Baylis, but the former appears to be so fir undescribed, and may be thal

recorded hy Dr. Nicoll.

Nicollina echidnae Baylis, 1930

(Figs, 11-12)

A number of specimens were obtained from Tachyzlossus aeuleata from

Kangaroo Island, Six of each sex were measured. The specimens agree in

most points with those described from echidnas from Queenslind, The inales

are about the same size, the females rather longer, .3:2-6-5 mm. ancl 6: 7-8:1 mi.

long respectively, ‘Vhe body bears one lateral ala as deseribed by Baylis and

the cuticle posterior to the ceplulic inflation is longitudinally as well ay trans-

versely stiiated; it is, however, raised into broken longitudinal crests, of which

there are abuut two at the anteriye end and more in the wider part of the body.

The evgs are 30-35, by 70-80u, whereas those measured by Baylis are 55-7ay

by 30-334, These are the ooly points in which the new specimens differ from

the description given by Baylis. The spicule shape and length (340-390.) and

the dorsal ray of the bursu, are exactly as described. It is possible that the

Queensland specimens were vounver and the longitudinal crests were nor de-

veloped,

The mouth is surrounded hy six prominent lips, not figured or <dlescribed hy

Baylis.

Nicollina cameroni nu. sp.

(Pies 13-16)

A large number of specitnens were taken from Echidna aculeata from Kan-

givou Island. In the closely coiled hubit of the body the species resembles N.

sarcophili Cameron, but it difers from this species in the presence of two lateral

alae und in the shape of the spicules and at the dorsal ray. It is distinguished

from N. echidnae Baylis by the size of the dorsal tooth, the absence of marked

lougitudinal crests, the presence of two hiteral alae, the spicule length and the

shape and the coiled habit of the body, the Tast being distinct in both living

and fixed worms. The presence of the two lateral alae and the exact shape ot

the spicules do not agree with the original description of the venus, but it is

thought that the species nevertheless belongs among Nicollina species.

The males ure 4-5-5-2 mm. long, the femules 6+9-7-0 mm, The inilatee

nuchal euticle is coarsely striated and extends 95-1154 from the anterior and

of the worm. The succeeding cuticle is strongly but closely striated, and in some

perts of some specimens is finely rugose. There is some appearance of longi-

tudinal banding, in that the striac are less obvious at intervals, but the cuticle

is RUC raised into crests as in N. echidnae, The six lips are distinct, The buccal

capsule is well cuticularised, and the tooth is small, lying at the entrance to

tlie ossophagus, The oesophayus widens only very slightly at the posterior end;

ous 340-440. long in the male. 450-490. in the female.

The female tail is 140-1502 long with a terminal spine and lwo small sub-

terminal prominences. The vulva is 700-750, from the posterior end; the uteri

are opposed; the eggs are TH-7Tp by 37-384.

NEMATODE PARASITES 155

The bursa is particularly difficult to unroll, and its dorsal region is ob-

scured by granular inclusions; a distinct dorsal lobe is absent. € arrange-

ment of the bursal rays is shown in Figs. 15-16; the dorsal ray resembles that

of N. echidnae, except that the first branches are longer. In some specimens

there seems to be three final branches instead of two, but this appearance may

be duc to the granular nature of the bursa. The spicules are 400-5500 long,

slender and needle-like, without alac, The tips are different, however, the

right-hand one ending in a ball point and the left-hand one in simple point.

A lightly cuticularised elongate gubernaculum is present.

Nycteridostrongylus uncicollis Baylis, 1930

(Figs. 1T-i9)

Five adult worms were taken from Miniopteris blzpotis from Naracoorte,

South Australia, and seven males, two females, and three immature males, from

the same host specimens from Canungra, Queensland,

The adults, from the small intestine af the host, agree very well with those

described by Baylis. The measurements arc as follows: Length of mules 4-5-6-3

mun, OF females 4°5-6-5 mm.; length of cuticular inflation 35-70«; length of

ocsophagus 350-500, in both sexes, with the nerve ring 150-155 from the

anterior end and the cervical papillae and excretory pore at the same level. The

female tail is 70-801 long, The spicules are 510-600, long. In one broken speci-

men the tips are distinct; they are provided with a striated flange extending

from near the proximal end nearly to the tip; the spicule is hollow, more or

less cylindrical, and the tip does not appear to be split into several processes,

or, if so, these remain closely applied to one another,

The three immature males, probably 4th stage larvae, were from cysts in

the mesentery of the host. In the two shortest (2-8, 3-0 mm.), neither oblique

cuticular ridges nor cephalic inflation are present, and these arc ouly referred

to the species by their association with the third (4-0 mim, }, apparently slightly

older, specimen (Fig. 19), i which these ridges and the cephalic inflation are

distinct. In all three the rudiment of the bursa is present, and in the longest

there is some sclerotisation of the spicule.

Austrostrongylus thylogale Johnston aud Mawson, 1940

From Setonix brachyura, Rotmest Island, Western Australia.

Mr. Shelley Barker of the Zoology Department of the University of Western

Australia, who collected these specimens, states that the specics is exceedingly.

common in this host, up to 6000 worms having been ¢ollected from one animal,

The specimens are larger than those recorded from Thylogale eugenti from

Kangaroo Island, but the proportions and appearance are similar, The males

are about 6 mm. long, the female up to 7 mm, ‘he spicules are 4-5 rom. long

and in most specimens a small oval gubernaculum is visible, 20-30 long. The

eggs are alsa larger, 904 by 43p.

It is possible that the difference in size of the worms from the two localities

is constant and conmected with the isolation of cach on an off-shore island for

a considerable time. There is no other difference between them; it is unneces-

sary to propose a new spectes or yariety. A gubernaculum is not mentioned

in the original description, but it is very small and casily missed in a long

preserved specimen; those from Western Australia are newly collected and very

well preserved, and cven in these the structure is not always clear.

156 POM, THOMAS

Molinostrongylus dollfusi n_ sp.

(Figs, 20-24)

From Miniopteris blepotis fram Canungra, Queensland, and from Naracoorte,

South Australia.

This new species is very close to M. penousi Dollius, 1954. It is distin

guished from this species by the length of the spicule and by its shape as well

as by the presence of a well-developed dorsal lobe on the bursa and by the

longer cephalic inflation. The worms from South Australian hosts are smaller

than those from Queensland, but are believed to helong to the same species,

their measurements follow those of the Queensland ones in parentheses, The

drawing are taken from Queensland specimens.

The males are 3-5-3:7 mm. long (2-6-2-9 mm.) and the females 5-0-5°2

mm. (3-4-3-9 mm.), The cuticle is finely striated longitudinally and trans-

versely; the lateral alae start shurtly behind the cephalic inflation and extend

to the vulva in the female, behind which they are narrower and resemble the

other longitudinal bands. Jn the male they extend almost to the bursa. In

addition to the lateral alae there are a number of finer longitudinal ridges, four

on euch side, in the posterior oesophageal region, and seven on each side further

back. They extend to the tail region in both sexes, The cephalic papillae are

not distinct. The cephalic mflation is 50-554 long (48.) in the male and G0,

{e) in the female.

The length of the oesophagus is 3002 (300) in the male and 350-360.

(320-330,) in the female. The nerve ring is 160-170, (170) and the excretory

pore 220-250 (160-170) from the head in the male. The cervical papillae are

at the same level as the excretory pore.

The female tail ends in five conical processes, three long and two short, and

a spike 33 long. Including the spike, the tail length is 60-70p (50-552). The

vulva is not prominent, and lies 1+3-1-5 mm. (0-9-1-0 mm.) from the posterior

end of the worm. The eggs are 90-100, by 45-50, in the South Australian speci-

mens; none were present in those from Queensland-

The spicules in all specimens, have a very distinct and constant curvature

when seen in lateral view ( Fig. 22). The anterior end of the gubernaculum is

bent dorsal at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the posterior, longer, part.

The spicules are alate, the alae extending alomg the length of the spicule nearly

to the tips, where the spicule bifurcates, ending in two prongs, of which the

shorter, more median, is bent back into a hook, and the longer is gently curved.

The spicule length is 150-160 (130-140), that of the gubernaculum 50, (40).

The lateral lobes of the bursa are lined with hooks. of which the larger ones

are postero-dorsal in position and the smaller ones ventral and anterior, The

dorsal lobe is well developed and trilobed. The size and position of the rays

is best seen in Fig. 23. Prebursal papillae are present. ;

Pharyngodon australis Johnston and Mawson, 1942

Prom the laree intestine of Tiltqgua seincoides, Brisbane,

The measurements of the new material are as follows: Male—maximnum

breadth 130-160,; length of body 1-8-2-3 mm., of oesophagus 200-250.; distance

nf excretory pore from anterior end 530-640y; length of tail spine 40-70, (less

than length of bursa); spicule not chitinised. Female~breadth 230-250); length

of boty 3-2-3-8 mm.,, of oesophagus 300-400,; of tail 540-720», distance of an-

teriar end from excretory pore 500-530). oF vulva 600-630z..

P. australis was separate from P. tiliguae Baylis by the size of the body and

wf the eggs, the position of the excretory pore and vulva in the female, and

NEMATODE PARASITES 157

the length of the tail spike in the male. In this new material, the size, and the

positions of vulva and excretory pore agree with P. tiliquae, eggs are absent,

Neve wet par i"

vr ronm AMM rrgston

Arvunyangeatvntge sya 4 TE HNO ee

Figs. 11-24. Figs. 11-12, Nicollina echidnae,

Figs, 13-16, Nicollina cameroni.

16, dorsal ray. Figs. 17-19, Nycteridostrongylus uncicollis.

Ms cine ends of spicules; 19, posterior end of immature male.

€ ust.

23, ani of bursa; 24, tips of spicules. Figs, 11, 12, 17, 18 and 24 to same scale; Figs. 13,

14, 16 and 21 to same scale; Figs. 15, 20, 22 and 23 to same scale.

II, anterior end of male; 12, dorsal ray.

13, anterior end; 14, posterior end of female; 15, bursa;

17, posterior end of female:

, Figs. 20-24, Molinostrongylus

20, oesophageal region; 21, posterior end of female; 22, posterior end of male;

and the tail of the male agrees in every particular with P. australis. The author,

having seen specimens of P. tiliqguae, prefers to keep P. australis separate, at least

until larger numbers of specimens are available.

158 P, M. THOMAS

Porrocaecum (Laymanicaecum) sp.

(Figs. 25-29)

From Emusium balloti, Shark Bay, Wester Australia,

Only larval worms are present, although in at least two the rudiments of

the spicules are to be seen. The parasite is apparently common in the scallop

beds in this region. It is assumed that the adult will be found in some predator

of the mollusc, such as rays, from these waters.

The specimens are allotted to the genus Porrocaecum because of the pre-

sence of interlabia, elongate cesophageal yentriculus, and intestinal caecum. The

subgenera Porrocaecum s. str, and Laymanicaecum Mozgovoy are se arated by.

the presence or absence of a gubernaculum, a distinction impossible to muke

in the present case. However, as the former is found as adults in birds, and

the latter in elasmobranchs, it is assumed that the scallop parasites belong to

(Laymanicaecum), Only two species have so far been allotted to the subgenus,

P. laymani Mozgovoy and P. pastinaceae (Rud.) sensu Dollfus and Desportes,

1945 (Campana-Rouget, 1955, $29).

200

s0¢6

Figs. 25-37, Figs. 25-29, Porrocaecum (Laymanicaecum) sp. 25, dorsal, and 26, literal,

views of head; 27, region of ventriculus; 28, posterior end; 29, tail of young male. Figs.

30-34, Amplicaeeum mackerrasae, 30, lateral view of head; 31, dorsal lip; 32, en face view

of head; 33, tail of female; 34, tail of male. Figs. 35-37, Ophidascariy sp. 35, sublateral,

and 36, dorsal, views of head; 37, tail of male. Figs. 25, 32, 35 und 36 to same scale; Figs.

26, 30 and 37 to same scale; Figs. 27, 28, 33 aud 34 to same scale,

The length is up to 30-43 mm., the maximum breadth 750. The oesophagus

is 2-9 mm. long (43 mm. specimen), including the ventriculus which is 600,

long, 250, wide. The intestinal caecum is very short. no more than half the

length of the ventriculus; it may not be visible when viewed so that it is behind

NEMATODE PARASITES Ly

the ventriculus, but when the specimen is rolled over it is clearly seen as a

hollow diverticulum, It is possible that the length in the adult is greater.

The shapz of the lips is shown in the figures, Each bears a row of teeth

which in en face view show a rounded rather than pointed profile, The excre-

tury pore lies at the base of the ventral interlabium. The nerve ring lies 550,

and cervical papillae 7350,, from the anterior end.

The conical tail is 3004 long. In specimens in which a rudimentary spicule

van be seen, it is 4004 long (Fig. 29). At about midlength of the tail, in all

specimens, are two large lateral papillae. These are presumably the phasmids,

and they are present in the male as well as the female larvae.

Amplicaecum mackerrasae nom. noy.

(Figs. 30-34)

Two female, one male, and several immature specimens were taken from

Vuranus varius, Mt. Nebo, Queensland.

The presence of an intestinal caecum, distinct in whole mounts of the am-

mature specimens and on dissectica of the adult, showed that the species he-

longs to the venus Amplicaecum, but in other features closely resembies that

described as Ophidascaris varani Johnston and Mawson (1947, st The type

(and only) specimen of O. varani has been re-examined and a very thin intestinal

diverticulum, half of the length of the oesophagus, found to be present, The

species is therefore transferred to Amplicaecum but as the specific name in this

combination is preoccupied a new name is proposed, A. amuckerrast. The length

riven in the original description, 7 mm., is a misprint for 70 mm,

‘The species lies with those of the. gemus in which the vulva is anterior to

the midbody, the intestinal caecum about half the length of the oesophagus,

Le. A. brumpti, A. numidica, A. cacopi, and A, schoutedeni, It is distinguished

from all of these by the greater length of the spicules as well as by other small

points,

The length of the male is G7 mm., that of the female 102-108 mm. The

shape of the lips and configuration of the head is shown in Figs. 30 to 32. The

length oF the oesophagus is 6 mm. in the male, 7 mm. in the female, and that

of the intestinal caecum is a little less then half this. The nerve ring is at one-

eighth and one-ninth of the vesophageal length in the female and male respec-

tively,

The vulva lies in front of the middle of the body, 40-42 mm. from the head,

The eggs are abont 90 hy 60) in size, he tail of the female is rounded but

ends ina small spine, It is 80a long, less than the anal breadth.

The conical tail of the male is 60. long. There are 33 pairs of pre-anal

papillae and six pairs of post-anal, arranged as in Fig, 34. The spicules are

1-3 mm. long,

Ophidascaris sp.

(Figs, 35-37) .

Frou Amphibolurus barbatus, from West Burleigh, Quvensland, in the

retroneritoneyl] tissues,

Gnly One male is present. This is 56 mm. long; the body tapers in the

anterior half, the greatest breadth, 780, being behind the mid-length. The lips

have well developed dentigerous ridges. The interlabia are very short. The

vesophagus is 3-1 mm. long, the nerve ring is at 520, from the anterior end.

The specimen was dissected and no intestinal caecum could be found.

160 P, M. THOMAS

The tail is very short, 150u, while the anal breadth is 210u. There are 43

pairs of pre-anal papillae, one pair of double-headed adanal, and five pairs of

post-anal, clustered on the second half of the tail. The spicule is 4-38 mm.

long; no gubernaculum was seen.

Hedruris longispicula n. sp.

(Figs. 38-41)

From fygosoma challengeri, from Springbank, South Queensland.

The males reach 3-0 mm. in length, 115, maximum breadth. The females

are 4°0-5-0 mm. long, the width of the anterior part of the body (at level of

the nerve ring) 130-190, and that at the widest part 550-600u. The cuticle is

finely striated transversely and beneath these coarser longitudinal striae are

seen, in. both sexes. The head is short and there are no balloon-like inflations

posterior to the lips. The length of the oesophagus is 550, in the male, and

900u in the female, and the distance from the anterior end of the cervical papil-

lac, nerve ring, and excretory pore are respectively 130-140, 180-200, and 230-

2604 in the female, and 150,, 170, and 280. in the male. The vulva is 750

from the posterior end of the worm. The eggs are 55p by 25p, without lateral

protuberances, The anus is 500-550, from the posterior end,

0mm

Figs. 38-41, Hedruris longispiculu, 38, entire female; 39, head of female; ventral view;

AO, head of male, lateral view; 41, tail of male.

In the male the tail is 350» long and is coiled in two to three rings, for most

of which region the ventral surface anterior to the anus bears broken longitu-

dinal ridges, The caudal alae extend from just in front of the anus to near the

tip of the tail and support eleven papillae on each side. The spicules are 3004

long. A short (70j) chitinised bar lying anterior to the spicule appears to be

a gubernaculum.

NEMATODE FARASI'TES 161

In the shape of the head and lips the species is closest to H. tiara Van

Cleave & Mueller; it differs from this in the position of the vulva and the length

of the spicule, In the female the ratio between the maxitnuin body width and

that in the vesophageal region is greater than in any other species, though this

may be at least in part due to their being at a more advanced stage of egg-

bearing than the types of some other species. The spicules are almost as long

as the tail, whereas in only one other species in which the mule is describe

(1. spinigera Baylis) is it more than two-thirds of the tail length, and in other

species it fs half the tail length or less.

Abbreviata bancrofti (Irwin-Smith)

From Aspidites melanocephulus, from Cairns.

The type host of the Abbreviata bancrofti is an Australian gecko, Gymno-

ductylus platurus, and the species has not been recorded since. The specimens

from the snake, one male and two females, agree very closely in characters of

the head and tail and reproductive system, with Irwin-Smith’s description, and

cannot be allotted to any other species. It was poirited out by Chabaud (1956,

41) in his valuable revision of the physalopterans from reptiles that P. oligo.

papillata (Kreis, 1940) is very close to A. bancrofti.

The measurements of the new specimens are as follows: Male—18-7 mm,

long, oesophagus 2-6 mm, long (a seventh body length), spicules 1:25 mm,,

and 0-3 mm, long; female—14:7-18+3 mm, long, oeso awe 2-3-2-5 mm. long

(a sixth to a seventh body length), distance of vulva from anterior end 3°9-4°5

mm,, a quarter of the body length, ezys 43, by 23-26,

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The specimens described in this paper were very kindly sent for identifica-

tion fromm yarious institutions: those trom Queensland and. New South Wales

by Dr. M. J. Mackerras (Queensland Institute of Medical Research), from the

Western Australian scallop by Dr. K. Sheard (C.S.1.8.0., Fisheries Division );

from the wallaby by Mr. Shelley Barker (Zoology Department, University of

Western Australia), Other material was collected by colleagues of this Uni-

versity,

REFERENCES

Baviis, H, A:, 1930, Wonr new trichostrongylid nematodes from Queensland. Amu. and

Mag. Nat. Hist, 10 (31), 6, pp. 1-18,

Cameron, T. W. M., 1931. On o species of trichostrongyle from the Tasmanian devil. J.

Helminth, 9, pp. 153-156,

Camrana-Koucer, Y,, 1955. Parasites cle Poissons de met ouest-alvicains récoltés par J.

Cadenat. IV. Nématodes (1 ére Note) parasites de Sélaciens, Bull, Tast. rane,

Afrique Noire, 17 (3), pp. 818-834,

Cyranaup, A. G,, 1956, Essai de révision des physaloptéres parasites de reptiles. Ano. de

Parasit., Paris, 30 (1-2), pp. 39-52.

Do.irus, KR. P., 1954, Miscellanea Helminthologica Moroccana XIl-XVIEL Arcli. de 1'Inst.

Pasteur Moroc. IV (9), pp. 561-711.

Doiorus, R. P., and Desrorres, C., 1945. Sur Porrocdéeum> pastinacede (Rudolphi), In-

vonstance et variabilité du caecum intestinal. Bull. soc, Path. exot,, 38, pp, 93-99,

lnwin-Synti, V., 1922. Notes on uematudes of the genus Physuloptera. 'V, The Physalop-

tera of Australian lizards. Proc. Linn. Soc. New Siuth Wales, 47 (4), pp. 415-427.

Jonnsron, J. H., and Mawsow, P. M., 1940, Nematodes from South Australian. marsupials.

Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 64 (1), pp. 95-100.

Jurnston, T, 1., ancl Mawson, PB. M,, 1940. The Gallard collection of parasitic nematules

in the Australian Museum. Rec. Aust. Mus., 21 (2), pp. 110-115.

Jonnaon, T. H., and Mawson, P. M., 1847. Some nematodes from Australian lizards. Trans.

Roy. Suc. S. Aust, 71 (1). pp. 28-27,

162 P. M. THOMAS

Jounsron, T. H., and Mawson, P. M., 1947. Some avian and fish nematodes chiefly from

Tailem Bend, South Australia. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8 (4), pp. 548-553.

Krets, H. A., 1940. Beitriige zur Kenntnis parasitischer Nematoden, IX. Parasitische Nema-

toden aus dem Naturhistorischen Museum Basel. Zentr. fiir Bakteriol. Parasit. und Infek.,

Orig. 1, Abt. 145, pp. 163-208.

Moscovoy, A. A., 1953. (Ascaridia of animals and man.) Pt. 2, 616 pp. (Osnovy nema-

todologii) vol. 2. Moscow.

Nicoiti, W., 1914. Remarks on the worm parasites of tropical Queensland. Med. Journ.

Australia, Sept. 12.

Van Crrave, H. J., and Mueiien, J. F., 1932. Parasites of the Oneida Lake fishes. Pt. 3,

A parasitological and ecological survey of the worm parasites. Roosevelt Wild Life

Ann., 3 (3-4), pp. 161-334.

CYTOLOGICAL STUDIES IN THE GENUS DANTHONIA

BY K. ABELE

Summary

Counts have been made of the chromosomes of 28 Australian species of Danthonia. Counts of 24,

42, 48, 72 and 96 somatic chromosomes were recorded. A study of stomatal lengths showed this

character to be highly correlated with the level of polyploidy except in a few species. Except in

three species, increasing levels of polyploidy are associated with increased hairiness of the lemma.

No other conspicuous morphological character showed any relationship with the level of

polyploidy. Two species displayed intraspecific polyploidy, viz. D. caespitosa (2n = 24, 48 and 72)

and D. longifolia (2n = 24 and 48). The number of collections of D. longifolia was inadequate for

an effective examination of the geographic distribution of the two chromosome races.

Characteristics such as floret morphology, stomatal length and geographic distribution were not

entirely satisfactory as criteria for distinguishing the chromosome races of D. caespitosa.

The distribution and the interspecific relationships of polyp lo id’ levels in the genus Danthonia are

reviewed.

CYTOLOGICAL STUDIES IN THE GENUS DANTHONIA,

by K. ABELE*

[Read 12 June 1958]

SUMMARY

Counts have been madé of the chromosomes of 28 Australian species of

Danthonia. Counts of 24, 42, 48, 72 and 96 somatic chromosomes were re-

corded. A study af stomatal lenvths showed this character te be hilly cor-

related with the level of polyploidy except in a fow spocies.

Except in three species, increasine levels of polyploidy aré associated with

inervased hairiness of the lemma. No other conspicuous norphulogival character

showed any relationship with the level of polyploidy.

Two species displayed intraspecific polyploidy, vi. D. caespitosa

(2n = 24, 48 and 72) and D. Jongifolia (2n=24 ancl 48), The number of

collections of D, longifolia was inadequate for an effective examination of the

geographic distribution of the two chromosome races. Characteristics such

as floret morphology, stomatal length and geographic distribution were not en-

tirely satisfactory aa criteria for distinguishing the chromosome races of

D, caespitasa, :

The distribution and the interspecific relationships of polyploidy levels in

the genus Danthonia are reviewed.

INTRODUCTION

Some 10) species of Danthonia are known in temperate aud sub-tropical

parts of the world; many are valuable fodder grasses. The papers of Trumble

(1927), Richardson, Trumble and Shapter (1931), Trumble and Davies (1931),

and Cashmore (1932) deal with the taxonomy and agronomic value of the Aus-

tralian species of Danthonia; cleyen new species of Australian Danthonia have

been described by Vickery (1950), and more recently a revision of the Aus-

tralian species has been carried out by the same author (Vickery, 1956),

Several studies dealing with chromosome numbers in Danthonia have heen

made in the United States and South Africa (see “Diseussion’) and these have

included some Australian species. The present study was designed to examine

chromosome numbers and the possible occurrence of intraspecific polyploidy

in a range of Australian species.

The plants studied were collected from natural Australian habitats as plants

or seed. The individual plants were numbered, and specimens of most of them

ae prseived in the herbarium of the Waite Agricultural Research Institute,

elalae.

CYTOLOGICAL TECHNIQUE

The root tips for cytological examination were pretreated for four hours

in a 0-003 mol, solution of 8-hydroxy-quinoline (Tjio and Levan, 1950), and fixed

in acetic acid-alcohol, The pretreatment was adyvantageons in spreading the

metaphase chromosomes, so that even in cases of polyploidy the counting and

study of chromosomes presented few difficultics. Root tips were stained in bulk

using Feulgen.

Generally, there is no difficulty in germinating secd of Danthonia, The

dormancy shown hy some species following harvesting can be broken by ex-

* Waite Agricultural Researcl: Institute, the University of Adelaide,

Trans, Roy. Soc. 5. Aust. (1959), Vol, 82.

164 k ABELE

posing the seed, previously suaked in water, to a temperature of 2-3° C. for

a week. An exception is the seed of D. bipartita, which is difficult to germinate,

RESULTS

i. Chromosome numbers and morphology

The Australian species of Danfhonia examined in this study have 24, 42.

48, 72 or 96 chromosomes (Table 1), but in contrast with some species from

overseas none of the Australian material had 12 or 36 chromosomes.

TABLE 1.

Numbers of chromosomus.in Austtalian species of Danthorwi.

Species No.. Species No.

D. alpicola J. W. Viekery 24 | LD longifolia R. Br. 24)

D, euriculota J. M. Black 24 48 f

D, bipartity F. Muell. 72 D. nudiflora 'P, F. Morris™ 24

D, ceeapitosa Gaul, 24 PD. oncidentalis J. W. Vickery v4

48 D, pallida R. Br, 72

72 D, penicitiata (Labitl) Benuy. 24

D. curphoides ¥. Muell, 24 I. pilosa R. Br, a4

D. élelandsi JI. W. Vickory 48 DD. pilosa var. paleacea J, W, Virkery ut

2D. duitoniana A.B, Cashmore 24 D. procera J. W. Vickery Yb

D. eriantha Lind. 48 2D. purpurascens J. W, Viekury 72

D. frigida J. W, Vickery: 42 | D, racemosa var. obtusatt F. Muell. 24

BD, geniculnia VM. Black 48. | D. richardsunii A, BR. Cashmore 48

Dy induta J. W. Vickery 72 D, semiannelerie (Labill) R. Br. 24

Dz lacris JI. W. Vickery | 48 | 2. setaeea R. Br. | 24

D, linkit Kunth | 24

D. linkii var. fulen J, W. Viekery Tz

The chromusomes of all the above species are uniform in size and mor-

phology. Length is of the order of 4, except D. bipartita, which are 1-2,.

No morphological features such as differences in size, secondary constric-

tions or trabants have been seen. In several cases small particles attached to

the end of the chromosome were observed staining in Feulgen and closely re-

sembling trabants, but as they appear rarely and irregularly they could not be

definitely identified as such. This absence of sagrpbolagical differences accords

with the work of other authors except De Wet (1953), Calder (1937, p, 5, fig.

7) draws two somatic chromosomes of D. setifolia with apparent trabants, but

there is no mention of them in the text.

The bivalents ut diakinesis in pollen mother cells ure about 34 long, with

the exception of the bivalents of D. bipartita, which are about la long. The

diakinetic chromosomes in the pollen mother cells show bivalents only; no uni-

valents or multivalents have been observed at any stage.

For all species, again with the exception of D. bipartita, 4 complete ter-

minalization of the chiasmata of the bivalents by diakinesis is characteristic.

No terminalization of the chiasmata was observed in D. bipartita.

2. Measurements of stomata

Stomatal size is widely used as a criterion for assessing the degree of

polyploidy. It is considered to be a better index of the chromosome number

than the size of the pollen grains (Miintzing, tea

(a) In order to determine the extent to which length of the stomata in

Danthonia may be influenced by environmental factors two species of Danthonia,

D. duttoniana and D. richardsonii, were each grown under different environ-

165

CYTOLOGY OF DANTHONIA

¥S-0 ¥F-0 9L-0 29-0 LO-T 9F-0 LE-0 99-0 €¢-0 16-0 oT

BPO FE-0 69-0 8t-0 #8-0 98-0 620 19-0 TF-0 BL-0 “al

66-0 92-0 oF-6 Le-0 #9-0 L&-0 as-0 88-0 | 18-0 #o-0 %S

(2) (p) (0) (a) (2) (0) (P) @) =| a) (e)

ne i 1sOnUaTIOL IT

qIeOyTEATY

UUOSPLDY ML “fT Dunmwognp (7

£:0F | 3: 0F 9:0F | 9-68 | lt L-8& | 9-1F | o-0F o:0F uBeTy

2(60-0F) (60-0) all-0F)

0-0F £:68 L+0F paris 8-OF Lele 8: 0F 9-0F 6-0F aang,

TF 6-0F a-1F L+OF GF L-68 BSF L-TF L-OF 13k = PIPPUAT

6°68 £-0F 9°68 0:68 8-0F L-88 6-1F £°68 1-68 ld diy, | wuospsoyais “7

(ZL-0-F) (91-0F) (BT OF} n(8B-07) (83-07)

Ls £-98 | tne &-98 28 6-26 | o-96 | 9-98 9:28 | WRORT

2(80-0F) (80-0 F ) (11-07)

£-98 €-98 &-98 g-Le 68 L-98 9:98 6-2 ose

GLE 9-18 £-L8 9-18 1-L8 1*8& 9-18 T-Le 4-96 [PPH

£98_ 6-98 L-96 B°9E ¥-9€ L-O8 T-S€ 9:88 8° LE diy, pUnIUONND “TT

e(0T-0—) AFT-07F) (FIT-OF) (0-07) (02-07) |

(squauL (syueur |

8} IrauE -7801} JayBM Jo UBaTY) | ~Jeer} YYSIT Jo uveyr) | peyoruysar pewiuyesr | TeULION jeanou

~yeory quay anyaty qyST] syst

We | poyzorrgsor pouri01 popPoyBEr [BULLION pus yeuniow $| payauysor pue prey FRoy

jo weep quarry quary TayeAd 109B AL IOge AA JOPE AA 1078 A JB7B AA uw uo seroodg

| Burmoary | WOyBeg

@SNOYSsEs) Ul SurMost)

‘(SUOTOTU UT BYBUTOYS HT JO BJUSULEINS¥EUT JO

SUBOUL O18 SJUGULIVEI} [ENPLATPUL OJ BOUNTY) SUOT}IPUOD [eJUOUTUOTATO FUOIayIP JepUM UMOIZ YrUoYUDCT JO solDeds O44 UT BPVUIOYS JO SyUOMIAINEBOyT

“6 GIAVL

166 Kk, ABELE

mental conditions and the length of their stomata measuted. All plants were

abtained by dividing 2 single parent plant grown from secd.

One plant from each species was grown in the open and was well watered.

All the other plants were grown in pots in an open-sided glasshouse, Two

plants of each species were grown in full glasshouse light, while another pair

was covered with a perforated zinc iron cage admitting about 5 per cent. of

the light: One plant of cach pair was well watered, while the other was given

only as much water as was necessary to prevent killing. The growth of the

plants in the glasshouse was slightly retarded compared with the control plants

in the open, while plants receiving limited water showed a further reduction

in size.

The stomata on the upper surface of the leaf are restricted to the longi-

tudinal «ruoves whilst the lower surface is ungrooved and often has fewer

stomata, in some species even none. Sections m the upper surface were

used for the measurements.

The leaf subtending the inflorescence was called the first leaf, the other

leaves being numbered accordingly. In D. duttoniena the stomata of the first

leak, especially when this leaf was small, were sometimes shorter than the

storneta of the third leaf hy 2-3. In D. richardsonii. where the leaves are more

raluust, this difference could not be observed,

The third Jewf was used For the comparison of stomata developing under

yalicus environmental treatments. The length of stomata near the base ot the

lamiua, in the middle anid near the tip, were measured. In all cases the lengths

ut 100 stomata were measured. The results ave shown im Table 2,

Restriction of water or light supply led to significant but small decreases

in the lenvth of the stomata. The reduction due to water restriction was 3:4

per cent. in D. duttoniana and .3+7 per cent. in D. richardsonii, Stomata were

larger in the central position on the leaf than at the base or tip.

The duta establish clearly that differences in stomatal size due to grossly

varyinx environmental conclitions or to position on the feaf do. not exceed

Vulues of the order of & per cent, Substantially greater differences between

plants —evern between those grown under different environmental conditions —

may be properly regarded as being due to differences of genetic constitution.

{b) To study the correlation uf the stomatal length with the chromosome

Niunbes, measurecnetts were made on all species included in this study, “Uhese

were grown at the Tustitute under field conditions with the exception of D.

bipartita. Measurements of the stomata of this species were made on the leaves

of mature plants bronght from the John Mortlock Experimental Station at Yudna-

pirina, 250 miles to the vorth of Adelaide, where the mean annual rainfall (9in.}

is Much lower than at the Waite Institute (25in.).

In all cases the leaves taken for stomatal measurements were from plants

whose chromosomes had been counted. Stomata from the middle of the Tamina

of the third leat were selected for measurement.

The variation within most species was small. For instance, the rango of

variation in. stomatal size between plants of D. purpurascens was 60°+7y-61+ 4p,

in D. linkit var. fuloa A1-4yp-49-5p and in D. seniannularis was 38) 2u-40+3y.

Wide variation, however, was encountered in two species. Plants of D.

cnespitosa having the same chromosume number, 2n = 48, showed a range from

42-1a to 53-22. The variation is also wide in D. hipartita which showed values

amony six plants of 32-4, 33-4, 34:0, 37-0, 37-8 and 42-6. These ranges of

varialion in stomatal size in plants of D. caespitosa having 48 chromosomes

41-1), and in D. bipartita (10-22) arc each about as great as that within

¢ entire group of 10 species having 48 chromosomes (51-8p-41-2u = 10-6y)

LENGTHS OF STOMATA NA

167

CYTOLOGY OF DANTHONIA

O.PURPURASCENS

60>

OPALLIDA,

OGAESPITOSA 2.048.

65 +. QPROCERA,

BINDUTA.

DCLELANDIL

DGENICULATA

50+

DERIANTHA,

as MLAEVIS.

O.CAESPITOSA 203A,

DNUDIFLORA,

DRICHARESONI|, BLINKII VAR, FULVA,

BSEMANNULARIS. —__L. QLONGIFOLIA. 2.43,

4O-- RPENNICILLATA

DAURICULATE.

DCARPHOIDES. DBIPARTITA.

DLINKIL

ODUTTONIANA

3+ 1

DCAESPITOSA.IO7A,

DPILOSA,

ORACEMOS AVAR.OBTUSATA,

30+ DRACEMOS A.

DLONGIFOLIA.

DFRIGIOA

DPILOSAVAR.PALEACEA,

2N=224 2N=42 2n =46 anw72 2N= 06

MEAN STOMATAL LENGTHS PLOTTED AGAINST THE CHROMOSOME NUMBERS OF AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF DANTHO NIA.

Fig. 1—Mean stomatal lengths plotted against the chromosome numbers of Aus-

tralian species of Danthonia.

Be aed

Fig. 2.—The distribution of three chromosome races of D. caespitosa. Reference:

hollow circles = 24 chromosome D. caespitosa; full black circles = 48 chromosome

D. caespitosa; crosses = 72 chromosome D. caespitosa. Each symbol covers one

habitat from which the plant was collected for chromosome counting, except the

cross near Adclaide which covers 5 habitats. The position of the symbols in the

crowded areas is approximate only.

K. ABELE

168

opyendig *“q *(sBuLa

‘ppypod *q esIOASURIy aqruyep ou) Airey AloOA

WUOSPADY ILL *(T usengeq SITBy

papnf IBA wyUa) “CT ‘oynynoiuab +7 saproydano "(7 ‘ayuy-q | esuep yy sBul esvoasuway aqojduod z

susaspandind *( ueeAjoq sITBY Pos} 7RdS

‘pnpur °C puna “(tT MOF B UPA SBULI vsIaasuBs} ozo[durao 7

nsopdsane “(7

p4a904d *(T psopidsane * neopdsane * ‘paongas ‘(7 ‘vuDwmoynp “(7

DYFUDIA “CT ‘nyoynarann “qT ‘pyoowdyy "CT STULL esiaAsUBI} aqeydulos Z

osoyibuas °C

pLoyfibuo) “qr ‘saynquapia00 "CT

sultan) “(7 ‘stunnuunruas *CT aya[duios Buna aaddn jug

Dyn yiwued *(T ‘weopappd

‘IBA psopid “G7 ‘vsozid “

‘neoyipnu “(7 “psowaons "CT eqejduios dui samo] ATU

96=Ug eL=usg 8F= Ue Fo= UE Apoq suru] ey4

uo Suley JO JueMEZURIy

-seioeds ovueyjungy uvipesysny ut Aprojddjod jo jeae], eq} pue Apoq BUrUe] ey} UO BuleYy Jo yUSWIeZUPIIE oY} UseM40q diysuOTzE[eI Bt,

‘6 TIGVi

CYTOLOGY OF DANTHONIA 169

so far studied. The wide variation in D. caespitosa agrees with the morpho-

logical variability of this species and may be explained by the presence of

various races among the plants.

There is a marked positive correlation between chromosome number and

length of stomata (Fig. 1). The exceptions are few. D. linkii var. fulva and

D, bipartita, each with 72 chromosomes, have markedly shorter stomata than

other 72-chromosome species. D. nudiflora (2n = 24) has stomata slightly longer

than the shortest stomata found in the 2n = 48 chromosome plants. However,

the most conspicuous deviation from the correlation was found in D. frigida,

which grows in the alpine region of Australia and has 2n = 42 chromosomes.

The stomata were found placed deeply in the grooves and are extremely small,

measuring only 26-6p.

“a

{

Fig. 3.—Distribution of 24-chromosome D. cuespitosa. Reference: hollow circles =

the chromosome number of collected plants counted; black triangles = only length:

of stomata on herbarium specimens measured,

3. Interspecific polyploidy and morphological characters

The principal character used in the identification of species of Danthonia is

the abundance and arrangement of the hairs on the Jemma. ling an

examination has been made of the correlation between the hairiness of the

lemma and level of polyploidy (Table 3).

It is apparent that increasing levels of polyploidy are associated with in-

creased hairiness of the lemma. In some groups of species the relationship is

170 K, ABELE

particularly strong, e.g. all species with only a lower ring of hairs have 24

chromosomes. On the other hand three species show disconformity from the

general pattern, namely D. linkii, D. carphoides and D. procera.

4, Intraspecific polyploidy in Danthonia caespitosa

The taxonomic species D, caespitusa at present includes a complex of

forms distributed over southern Australia (Fig, 2). Collections from southern

States have been grown, and from these a number of distinct forms bave been

separated (E. L. Robertson, private communication), Of the 62 plants examined

oytologicallys 5L had 48 chromosomes, 5 had 24 chromosomes, and 6 had 72

romosomes,

The 24-chromosome group represents a morphologically distinguishable

form, designated “form 6” by E, L. Robertson. As shown in the Fig. 3, this

variant has been collected only from the drier areas of South Australia.

The contrast between a floret of this form and a 48-chromosome type is

shown in Fig. 4.

Cc Db

Fig. 4—D. cuespitosa. A, B—flowers of the 24-chromosome plant (A ventral, B

dorsal view); C, D—flowers of the 48-chromasome plant (C ventral, 9 dorsul view).

Two 72-chromosome forms are very distinct from each other, but only one

of them is distinctly different from the 48-chromosome group, ‘The former has

been found only in the Verdun-Ambleside area of the Adelaide Hills and possibly

represents a distinct yaricty or species. It has robust, tall stems (2-3 feet in

height) with glaucous-green foliage, entirely devoid of hairs except for the

short ligule.

The other form representing one collection from Ungarra, Eyre Peninsula,

has short, sctaceous, pubescent foliage, with very short basal sheaths, and yery

CYTOLOGY OF DAN'THONLA ii

slender stems, and is not readily distinguishable from some of the 48-chrumo-

somes material.

All of the other specimens uf D. cuespitasa examined had 48 chromosomes

and were of very diverse morphology.

DISCUSSION

1. Polyploidy in the genus Danthonia

Since the levels of polyploidy in the genus Danthonia in various parts of

the world are recorded as 2n = 12, 24, 36, 48, 72, 96 and 120, it is clear that

6 js the basic number of most Danthonia species, The only species having

2n=96 or 120 chromosomes haye been found in Australia, but uo Australian

species is yet reported with 2n=12 or 36.

Calder (1937) postulates a basic number of 7 for New Zealand species

with In =42. D. frigide is the only 42-chromosame species so far recorded

in Australia.

In view of D. frigida’s affinity with some New Zealand species (Vickery,

1956) which also have 42 chromosomes, and the fact that only bivalents are

formed at meiosis, 7 would appear to be a more logical basic number for this

Species.

: The counts here recorded are in agreement with the previous counts made

by other workers, except in three instances: D, pilosa, D. semiannularis and D.

Npartita,

” The different chromosome number recorded for D. pilosa by Calder (1937)

from that found by Stebbins (Myers, 1847) and by the author tay have re-

sulted from u wrong identification of the material. Chromosome counts were

made on D. pilose and D, semiannularis sent by Calder from New Zealand.

D. pilosa had the same number as found in Australian D. pilosa, ie, In = 24.

One of the two plants received as D, semiannuleris had 2n = 24 chromosomes,

the other was identified at the Waite Institute as D, cuespitusa, Calder has

advised that botanists in New Zealand do not recognise D, cuespitosa as graw-

ing in that country, and the 48 chromosome D. caespitosa had been identified

as a form of D. semiannularis.

If each identification is correct the difference in the chromosome number

of D, bipartita were De Wet (1954) faund 2n = 48 chromasomes and the author

2n = 72 (derived from 36 bivalents in diakinesis and counted in root tips} may

indicate that this species had developed intraspecific olyploidy. D. bipartite

stows only in remote arid areas of inland Australia, ate as mentioned ahove, is

ficult to germinate and grow. Brock (unbabtihed has recently counted

22 = 120 chromosomes in D_ indula in material sent to him from the Waite In-

stitute, but all material of D. induta examined here has shown 2n = 72.

2. Chromosome numbers and length of stomata

Apart from the high currelation of chromosome number and stomatal length,

and the aberrant species already noted, the principal point of interest is that D

procera with 2n = 46 chromosomes has shorter stomata than any of the 2n = 73

chromosome species. Though here based on a single species, this phenomenon

has already been reported in other instances. Yamamoto (1938) observed that

a hexaploid Rumex acetosa had smailer stomata than a pentaploid plant, Love

(1944) noticed in his studies in Remex acetosella that “from the hexaploid to the

actoploid state, however, a diminution in the length of stomata is calculated”,

Tischler (1954) mentions (p. 230) the measurements of Duffield, who found

that a hexaploid Acer rubrum has longer stomata than an actoploid plant of

that species. Apparently there is a limit beyond which the length of stomata

172 k, ABELE

ceases fo increase with further increase in number ot chromosomes, and this

may also be the case in Danthonia.

3. Intraspeelfic polyploidy

(2) Turning to intraspecific polyploidy, it has been shown that the levels

of ploidy in D. cuespitosa arc not wholly satisfactorily related ta morphological

charactors, ‘I'he 24-chroinosome form appears to be reasonably well-differen-

tiated and to have: a limited distribution (fig. 2), On the other land, the 72-

chromosome material inchides two very distinct growth forms, though each has

to date been reeorded within a very limited arca.

Present evidence dues not elucidate the origin of the 72-chromoseme race.

However, its collection frem the vicinity of both the 24- and 45-chromosome

types in South Australia would support the hypothesis of it being a hybrid

between these races.

Within the 48-chromosome material, which includes most af the Toaterial

collected, there is a considerable diversity of morphological characters. Roth

Nampfeldt (1938) and Love (1951) express the view that if more than one

chromosome munber is recognized in a taxonomic species, the species should

be re-examined taxonomically with a view to its subdivision, even though dit-

ferences in morphological characters prove to be small. In D, caespitosa, as now

recugnized by botanists, there is clear evidence for subdivision of the species

hased on chromosome numbers, and less sharply on morphological characters.

The limited amount of material examined suggests that in South Australia some

chromosome races may be geographically delimited im that the 24-chromosome

type appears to uccur only in the driec areas of the southern part of the State,

Collections could profitably be made from the eastern edge of the distribution

arca of the 48-chromosome type in Western Australia and in western New Sonth

Wales to determine the generality of this situation.

(b) D. longifolia, ta this species two chromosome numbers have heen

recorded, yiz,:

(i) Chromosome number 2n = 24, the length of stomata about 28p.

(Gi) Chromosome number 2n = 48, the length of stomata about 41.

As one one plant of D, fongifolia 2n = 48 and two plants 2n = 24 were collected,

na comment can be made concerning the existence or distribution of chromo-

some racos based on different chromosome numbers. No morphological differen-

tiation among the three collected plants could be observed.

The regular pairing of the cliomosomes and absence of multivalents at

meiosis would suggest allopolyploidy. As the species of the genus Danthonia

are recorded as bein siostly autogamous, the small degree of outerossing which

must have occurred would result in rapid stabilization of new chromosome races.

4. Interspecific relationships

Vickery (1956) used the characteristics of the lemma as the morphnloyies!

feature must likely to show the affinities of the various species within the genus

Daiithonia. Four series of species were postulated in this way

The first consisted of a single species D. bipartite which was relitively iso-

lated hoth in habit and floral character. Cytologically, this species ix unique m

that its chromosome morphology and hehaviour at meiosis differs from that of

all other species which tend to be rather uniform.

The second series was characterized by the scattered distribution of hairs

on the body uf the lemma. The chromosome numbers of these species were

24. 48 and 72. Vickery (1956) felt that the affinities of D. frigida appeared to

be with a group of New Zealand species represented by D. aunninghamdl, dD.

raoullig and D. flovescens rather than with this series. The cvtological evidence

CYTOLOGY OF DANTHONIA 73

supports this view as both D. frigida and these New Zealand species are the

only 42-chromosome species so far identified in the two countries.

The third series is centred on D, caespitosa and its extreme taxonomic

diversity has not been clarified by a cytological study, as species with chromo-

sume numbers of 24, 48, 72 and 96 have been identified in this group, quite

apurt from the complexity of D. caespilosa itself.

‘The final series have hairs of the Iomma represented only by isolated mar-

ginal and dorsal tufts, All species of this series lave 24 chromosomes,

A more extensive ecological and cytological investigation will be necessary

to clarify the complex of inter- and intraspevific polyploidy but a definite pattern

of relationships within the Genus is becoming obvious from the cytological and

inorphological evidence presented.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The author would like to thank Mrs. E. L. Rubertson, formerly Systematic

Botunist at the Waite Institute, for identifying and growing all the plants in-

eluded in this study. and Dr, K. W. Finlay. Messrs, F. M. Hilton and D. E.

Symon for their advice and criticism.

REFERENCES

GCarven, J. W., 1937. A cytological study of sume New Zealand species aid varieties uf

Danthonia, Linn, Suc. J. Bot., 51, pp. LY.

Casumore. A, B., 1952. An investigation of the taxonomic and woricultural characters af

the Danthonia group, Coun. Sei. Tndustr, Res, Bull. No, 69,

Darume'ron, C, D,, and Wri, A. P.. 1955. Chromasour: Atlas of Hlowering Planis, London.

Dg Wer, J. M, J., 1953, Nucleoli numbers in Danthonia polyploids, Cytologia, 18, pp,

229-234,

Dr Wer, J. M, J., 1954. The genus Danthonia in grass phylogeny, Amer. J. Bot, 41, pp.

204-211,

Love, A., 1944. Cytogenetic studies on Runiva sudgenus Acestosella, Hereditas, 80, pp.

1-136,

Love, A., 1951, Tuxunomie evaluation of polyploids, Caryologia, 4, pp. 263-284,

Moinrzine, A., 1937. The effects of chromosal variation in Jactylis, Horeditas, 23, pp. 113-235,

Myers, Ys AT, 1947. Cytology and genetics of forage urasses, Bot. Rev,, 13, pp. 318-367,

369-421.

Naxnereupr, J. A. 1938, Pow meruceana Nannf., n. sp. and Pow rivalorwn Maire and Trahut,

two inore tetraploids. of sect, Ochlapoa A. and Gr., aud some additionyl notes on Ochlapoa,

Svensk Bot. Tidsk., 32, pp. 295-321,

Ricuarpson, A. EB. V., Tuumsie, H, C., and Suarrer, RK. £., 1931, factors affecting the

mineral content of pastures, Coun. Sei. Industr. Bes. Bull. No. 49,

Strppins, L. C., und Love, R. M., 1941. A eytologieal stucly of C.ifornian forage grasses,

; Amer. J. Bot.. 28, pp. 371-382. :

Twenuen, G, 1954. Allgemeine Pilazenkaryologie. Erginzuogsband zum Band il, Zweite:

Lieferung, Burlin-Nikolasce:

Typo, J. EL, and Livan, A. 1950. The ose of oxyquinoline in chromosome analysis, Ann,

Est. Exp. de Aula Dei., 2. (1), pp. 21-64.

TktuMace, Ho C,, and Daving. J. G,, 1931, The roles of pasture species In regions uf winter

rainfall and summer druight, J. Coun. Sei. Industr. Kes,, 4, pp. 140-151.

Vioxgxy, J. W., 1950. New species of Danthonie DC, (Gramineae) from Australia, Con-

fributions from the New South Wales Natioual Herbarium, 1, pp. 296-301.

Vickery, J. W., 1956, A revision of the Australian species. of Danthonia DC, Contributions

from the New South Wales National Ierbariam, 2, pp. 249-325,

Yamamoto, Y., 1938. Karyogenetische Untersuchungen bei der Gattung Rumex, Memoirs of

the College of Agriculture, Kyoto Imperial University, 43, pp. 1-59

THE CHEMICAL COMPONENTS OF THE TEST OF AN AUSTRALIAN

LAC INSECT AUSTROTACHARDIA ACACIAE (MASKELL)

BY HARRY F. LOWER

Summary

The test of A. acaciae consists of chitin, protein, a dye, a wax, and a complex of lacs and lac-like

substances. Of the latter, which constitute more than half the dry weight of the test, none could be

identified as shellac. The dye and wax are also chemically distinct from those described from other

insects.

THE CHEMICAL COMPONENTS OF THE TEST OF AN AUSTRALIAN

LAC INSECT AUSTROTACHARDIA ACACIAE (Maskell)

(Homoptera : Lacciferidae)

by Hasuy F. Lower®

[Read 11 September 1958]

SUMMARY

The test of A. acaciae consists of chitin, protein, a dye, a wax. and a

complex of lacs and lac-like substances. Of the latter which constitute more

than half the dry weight of the test, none could be identified as shellac, The

dye and wax are also chemically distinct from those described from other insects.

INTRODUCTION

Among the Homoptera, certain groups within the super-family, Coccoidea,

are characterized by their secretion of large quantities of various waxes, or

resinous materials, or both, which they incorporate into their tests or “scales”,

This mode of forming a protective covering for the body is most highly de-

veloped in the Lacciferidae or “lac insects” of which Laccifer lacca (Kerr), the

Indian Jac insect, is the best-known species.

There is an extensive literature dealing with its most important commercial

product, shellac, and scattered references to insect waxes and dyes are to be

found. The literature of the two latter has recently been reviewed by Warth

(1956) and Fox (1953), respectively, while detailed accounts of the manu-

facture, physical and chemical constants, and industrial applications of shellac,

such as these of Gardner (1937) and Parry (1925), are mumerous. Apart from

Fox (op. cit.) whose interest is in the chemistry of animal dyes generally, and

Chamberlain (1923, 1925) who has provided the only complete taxonomic

study of the family, the literature is entirely technological. Not only is this so,

but its scope is limited to discussing three components of the test—shellac, wax

and dye—and these of the one species L. Jacca. Of the materials constituting

the remainder of its test, or of any of the components of the tests of other lacci-

ferids, nothing is known.

Austrotachardia acuciae (Maskell) is an endemic lac insect which is widely

but irregularly distributed throughout the dry inland parts of Australia, where

the environmental conditions admit of the growth of its host tree, Acacia aneurea

F. Muell. (mulga). The female secretes a thick, hard, brittle, dull orange-red

test (Plate 1) which, in addition to the normal chitin-protein complex, contains

over 60 per cent. of a variety of complex organic substances.

The material studied was collected from mulga trees on Yudnapinna Station,

50 miles N.W. of Port Augusta. Within the time at my disposal, practical diffi-

culties made impossible the collection of material in quantity adequate for the

complete examination of all substances present. Considerable distances often

separate affected trees, rarely are parts of more than one or two boughs of any

one tree infested, and in their colonies the insects are relatively dispersed. A

further restriction of yield was imposed by the need for confining selection to

° Waite Agriculiural Research Institute, University of Adelaide, South Australia.

Trans. Ros. Soc. 8. Aust (1959), Vol. 82.

176 HARRY F. LOWER

dead insects, to obviate contamination of the sample with the body fats and fuids

of living ones, Some extraneous matter was thereby unavoidably introduced

in the form of desert dust, and the webbing and frass of spiders and larval

scavengers. While the proportion of these was greatly reduced by subsequent

teatment, it is almost certain that the greater part of the inorganic matter

found was of external origin. Somewhat less than 50 g. of crude material were

collected from which ubout 35 g. of sample were prepared.

EXPERIMENTAL

(To obviate xvepetition throughout the paper attention is drawn to the fol-

lowing:

1, All drying was done to constant weight at 103° C,

2, “Ethanol” means absolute ethanol unless otherwise specified.

3, The substantive, luceoid, has becn coined for substances which, while

exhibiting many of the properties of the lacs. show by their mode of

formation that they have much in common with fatty acids.)

The crude material was dried and the resulting cake, after breaking, was

ground and as much as possible passed through a sieve of mesh diameter 0:246

mm. This eliminated webbing, and wood and leaf debris. The resulting powder

was vigorously stirred with water in a tall cylinder and allowed to stand until

the denser fraction had settled. The floating matter was then skimmed off, dried,

and ye-geound. This was the sample with which all work was done. Micro-

scopic examination of the sludge showed it to consist alrnost entirely of silt.

Three 10 g. portions of the sample were individually Soxhlet-extracted with

ether for 30 hr. The extracts were united, the ether distilled off, and the residue

collucted (Eatract A),

The residues in the thimbles were then further extracted with ethanol for

40 hr, The extracts were united and evaporated to dryness ( Extract B).

The residues in the thimbles, after drying, were digested under reflux for

10 hr. with boiling 5 per cent, hydrochloric acid, filtered under pressure, and

washed with hot water until free from acid. Filtrate and washings were evyapor-

ated ta dryness (Extract C )-

The residue was digested under reflux for 6 hr, with 200 ml. of 0-1 molar

boilins sodium carbonate solution. The mixture was filtered under pressure and

the residue washed with hot water until the washings were free from carbonate,

Washings and filtrate were evaporated to dryness (Extract D).

The residue was dried and weighed. It was then ashed, and the ash

weighed,

The ash was boiled in three changes of aqua regia, each for 15 mm, After

each boiling, the insoluble matter was allowed to settle and the liquid decanted.

The three extracts were united and evaporated to dryness (Extract £).

The residue remaining after treatment with aqua regia was heated to red-

ness for 5 min., covled and weighed.

EXTRACY A (Ether-soluble)

Extract A was a solt, deep orange-brown solid, It was boiled under reflux

for 12 hy. with 200 ml. of a proprietary wax solvent of high efficiency (sce note

at end), After cooling, the clear yellow solution was decanted and the residue

hoiled with three successive 50 jot portions of the same solvent, each For 6 hr.

The final extract was colourless and a drop of it evaporated without residue, The

extracts were united and the solvent distilled off. The wax, after solidification,

was twice recrystallized from a hot mixture of equal parts of chloroform and

ethinel (charcoal),

LAC INSECT AUSTROTACHAKDIA ACACIAE iy

After extraction of the wax, the residue was finely ground, well stirred with

cald chloroform and filtered. The filtrate was evaporated, dissolved in ethanol,

activated charcoul was added, and the mixture filtered. [Evaporation of the

solution gave a pure lac (Lac I).

The residue remaining after treatment with chloroform was dried, dissolved

in 10 ml. of ethanol and sufficient N/10 ethanolic putassium hydroxide svlution

added to convert the original dye present into a potassium compound (insoluble

in ethanol). The mixture was filtered and the potassium dye washed with hot

ethanol until free from lac and alkali. The potassium dye was then dried, dis-

solved in 10 al. of water and a slight excess of N/10 hydrochloric acid added to

te-form the original dye which precipitated. The dye was extracted with ether,

the solution washed twice with water, and the ether evaporated. The dye was

Iwiee recrystallized from hot chloroform,

THE WAX

The wax is soft and pale yellow in colour, Tts melting point is 60-2° C.

Tt has an acid value of 95, a saponification value of 235, an ester value of 140,

and an iodine number (Hithl) of 32:3, Approximately 6 per cent. of it is un-

saponifiable, This fraction consists of a hard, faintly coloured, wax-like material

of melting point 70-4° C. Lack of adequate material made further investigation

of the wax impracticable.

LAG ]

Lac I is a dark, reddish-black, very hard lac which is brittle and breaks

with a conchoidal fracture, It is very soluble in ethanol, chloroferm or ether,

but is insoluble in water, acetone or liquid hydrocarbons,

it has an acid value of 145, a saponification value of 302 and an ester value

of 157, About 3 per cent. of it is unsaponifiable and consists of a hard, cream-

coloured, wax-like solid melting ut §3-1° ©.

After removal of the unsuponifiable fraction, the solutiun was acidified and

again extracted with ether. On evaporation of this extract, the lac acids re-

mained as a solt, brownish-white, sticky mass comprising 55-6 per cent, of the

weight of lac used, They were recrystallized several times from acetone {char-

cual) and formed thin colourless plates having a melting point of 555° C.

THE DYE

The dye is upparently present as the dye aeid. It is soluble in water or

acids, irrespective of temperature. Hot concentrated sulphurie acid chars it;

hol concentrated. nitric acid vigoruusly oxidizes it. It is readily soluble iu cther,

ethanol of any concentration higher than 60 per cent., and somewhat less so

in hot chloroform. On cooling its solution in the latter, the dye separates as

glittering scarlet rhombic crystals, Depending on concentration, the coluur of

its solutions varies from dark blood red to yellow. Its absorption spectrum in

ethanolic solution is shown in Fig. 1.

On addition of sufficient ethanulic alkali tu solutions of the oriyinal dye, a

compound of dye and alkali precipitates. This is apparently insoluble ip all

liquids except water in which it is highly soluble. The colour of the solution,

epending on concentration, varics from blackish violet ta pale violet. Addition

uf ethanol to the solution precipitates the dye compound as a black, micracrystal-

line solid; addition of acids precipitates the original dye. From the almost black

saturated aqueous solution, the potassium compound crystallizes as black, glit-

tering prismatic needles having a violet reflexion. Its absorption spectrum in

aqueous solution is shown in Vig, 3,

178 HARRY F. LOWER

Over the range pH 6-9 to 8-5, its colour changes from orange, through red,

to violet, The colour is red at about pH 7:8 to 7-9.

mated |

PERCENTAGE

- =

“TRANSMISSION

ue!

20-

6so0 70

360 a50 550

WAVELENGTH my

Fig. 1—Absorption spectra of dye of A. acaciae.

A. Original dye in ethanolic eis Concentration: 0-03125

g./litre.

B. Potassium compound in aqueous solution. Concentration:

0-03125 g,/litre.

EXTRACT B (Ethanol-soluble )

The solid dark brown material was finely ground, digested under reflux for

10 hr. with boiling ethanol, and the residue twice digested (each for 5 hr.) with

fresh boiling ethanol. The three extracts were united, activated charcoal was

added, the mixture filtered and the filtrate evaporated to dryness (Lac II).

When ethanolic extraction was complete, about 54 per cent. of the original

extract remained as a flocculent material closely resembling precipitated copper

ferrocyanide in appearance. This was dried and weighed (Gel lac).

LAC II

Lace II is a hard, brittle, bright orange lac, very similar in erpcrtanse to

orange shellac. It melts between 140° C. and 142° C. Very soluble in ethanol

and somewhat less so in methanol, it is insoluble in any other of the commonly

LAC INSECT AUSTROTACHARDIA ACACIAE 178

used organic solvents, It has an acid value of 95, a saponification value of

246, and an ester value of 151, The unsaponifiable fraction comprised 2-4 per

cent, and consisted of a hard, yellowish, wax-like material melting at 96-1° C.

After removal of the unsaponifiable material by ether extraction, the mix-

ture was acidified and the resulting lac acid extracted with cther: the ether

extract Was evaporated and the residue thrice recrvstallized from hot acetone

(charcoal) forming golden-yellow, glittering scales whose melting point was

107:3° GC. On cooling the melted material, it solidified as a hard orange-yellow,

transparent, resin-like mass lacking the physical properties associated with fatty

acids generally. It is only slightly soluble in boilin ethanol, but is very soluble

in cold ether, chloroform, carbon disulphide or boiling acetone. From its solu-

tinn in the latter most of it separates on cooling.

Tile GEL LAC

This cinsisted of a brittle, black, vesicular mass which boiling ethanol

yestorcd to the original floceulent condition, It was insoluble in any of the

43 organic solvents and solvent mixtures tested.

When the solid is heated, it dces not melt but decomposes inte a spanuy,

carbonaceons mass evolving a dark dense vapour which condenses as dark red,

ail-like droplets soluble in ethanol forming a reddish solution,

It was hoiled with N/2 ethanolic potassium hydroxide and formed a deep,

hrownish-black, gpaque solution which passed unchanged through filter paper.

Ether extracted nothing from this solution. [t was then diluted with water,

placed in a separating funnel, sufficient hydrochloric acid was added to make

the mixture acid, and the whole was well shaken with ether. On standing, three

layers formed, The lowest consisted of an aqueous-ethanolic solution of potas-

siam chloride coloured yellow by a trace of impurity. The middle layer was

oily and black, and above this floated the orange ether laver. After running off

the bottom Jayer, the two upper ones were well washed several times with

water, allowed to stand, and then separated.

The black material was dried, dissolved in ethanol (charcual), filtered, and

again evaporated giving a black lac-Jike material (Laccord 1).

The ether extract was evaporated, and the residue recrystallized several

times from hot acetone (charcoal ) (Gel Jac acid).

LACCOID I

This is x highly polished, pitch-like material, very hard and brittle, readily

soluble in ethane! but insoluble in other solvents. On heating, it mells quietly at

abuut 127° C. Boiling it with either aqneous or ethanolic alkali re-saponifies it

furming a deep reddish-brown solution from which it can again be set free by

acidification. Prolonged boiling with fat or wax solvents dissolves nothing from

it, Its nitrogen content is 0°45 per cent,

THE GEL LAC ACID

From. its solution in hot acetone, the acid scparates as a decp orange, ap-

parently amorphous, material. On heating, it softens and finally melts at about

109° ©. On re-solidifying, it forms a transparent, glassy, deep orange-red,

brittle solid, It dissolves readily in fat solvents < in hot acetone, but is

insoluble in boiling cthanol. Aqueous or ethanolic solutions of alkalis readily

re-saponily it,

EXTRACT C (Hot HC) Extract)

As first obtained, this was an orange-brown solution which, during evapora-

tion, underwent chemical change so that the dark brown amorphous residue

180 TTARRY Ff, LOWER

could not be re-dissolyved in hydrochloric acid, nor was it soluble in any other

solvent tested. After boiling with ethanol, and evaporating the yellow solution,

a truce of a dark brown, mucilaginous substance remained. This was dissolved

in a little hot water, and the solition after decolorizing with charcoal and filter-

ing, gave a positive result with Mélisch’s reagent, but none with Feliling’s solu-

tiem. Since less than -O1 g. of material was available, further tests could nut

be performed.

The original residue contained 6-1 per cent. of nitrogen and probably can-

sisted largely of “humin” formed by decomposition of arnino-acids resulting from

hydrolysis of the proteins of the test by the hydrochloric acid used for the

extraction.

EXTRACT D (Sodium Carbonate Digest)

The sodium carbonate extract, on evaporation, left an almost black residue.

After boiling with water, a small quantity of black insoluble matter was filtered

off. Ether extracted practically nothing from the filtrate which was then acidi-

fied with hydrochloric acid, A dense precipitate formed, When the mixture

was warmed, this coagulated to a yellowish-brown rubber-likc mass. The imix-

ture was (hen evaporated to dryness and the residue digested three times (each

for 5 hr.) under reflux with boiling cther, The extracts were united and the

ether distilled off, leaving a lac acid,

After expelling remaining, ether, the residue was ground, dissolved in

ethanol (charcoal), filtered anc evaporated (Lacegid II).

THE LAC ACID

The erude lac acid was a soft, orange-coloured, wax-like material. It was

several times recrystallized from hot acetone (charcoal) and finally obtained

tis almost colourless plates (melting point 65-2° C.). When the acid was melted

and allowed to solidify it formed a soft, eream-coloured, waxy material.

LACCOLD I

This was a very hard, black, lac-like material practically insoluble in all

liquids except ethanol and methanol. I[t 1s extremely soluble in the former,

Boiling with aqueous or ethanolic alkalis quickly brings about its saponification.

From the solution it can be recovered by acidification, On heating, the solid

does not melt but swells, bubbles, and evolves dense fumes which on condensing

form an oil-like stain easily soluble in liquid hydrocarbons. Its nitrogen conteut

is 2:3 per cent.

RESIDUE REMAINING AFTER SODIUM CARBONATE EXTRACTION

The residue leH after sodium carbonate extraction, when dried, was a white

material resembling bleached paper-pulp, It was weighed, ashed, and the ash

then weighed. The loss in weight was assumed Lo be chitin,

ane ash, after treatment with aqua regia (presumed to be silica} was

weighed,

After weighing, the dry aqua regia extract was dissolved in dilute hydro-

chloric avid and the solution tested qualitatively for inorganic ions. ‘The follow-

ing were identified; Na~, K+, Ca~*>, Mz-+, Fe-++, PO,- ——, and SQy- -.

DISCUSSION

The major components af the test of A. aeweiae are shown in Table 1, Since

the dye, wax, and lacs I und II were separated in a relatively pure state, their

roportions are reasonably correct, The “gel lac” and the acid and sodium car-

onate extracts are mixtures af at least two and probably more substances.

Evidence obtained during the investigation proved that had more material been

LAG INSEGT AUSTROTACHARDIA ACACIAE £81

ayailable, the diversity of substances identified would have been much greater.

Frequently, traces only of certain organic compounds were isolated, the quan-

tities of which were too small for anything other than a very general classifi-

cation, The figures for silica and the inorganic ions «wre artificial; these materials

are almost certainly of extraneous origin and form no intrinsic part of the test.

TABLE I.

Principal constituents of the teat of 4. aencire.

Component Weight in grams Pareentage of weight

of tast

Dy 0-594 2-0

Wax i 2-BL6 f 7-8

Lie | 3-035 | 13-1

Live 1L 4-318 14-4

“Gul Lac’ | 5-027 16-7

“Thumin’* 4-(150 13-5

Sodiury Garbonale exteset 3350 11-2

“Chitin” | 4-038 13-5

Bilicas | 0-984 3-3

Thorganic iaud Q-101 0-3

Loss 1-262 43

30-00 100-0

Since no corresponding study of any other lac insect has been published,

Jittle comparison with allied forms is possible, The wax and the dye are both

chensically distinct from those of Laccifer lacca (sce Warth, 1956; Fox, 1953),

and the dye differs from any which has. been described from other insects. Of

the various members of the lac complex present, noue is shellac as is shown by

their solubilities, and acid, saponification, and ester values (see Gardner, 1937;

Parry, 1925). The two lacuoids separated are interesting compounds. In their

general behaviour they resemble high melting point lacs, but their mode of

chemical formation indicates a relationship to the Jac acids. They are not

present in the test as laccoids since their ready solubility in ethanol would result

in their extraction carlier in the analysis,

As the name “Inc insects” implies, production of lacs is. characteristic of the

Lacciferidae. In A. acacice they comprise over half the dry weight of the test,

but their biological significance in any species has never been explained, little

is known of their mode of secretion, and nothing of their metabolism or function.

Nove.—The proprietary wax solvent mentioned above is marketed by the Vacuum Oil

Company as “Stanvac Hexane”. It consists of 93-95 per cent. saturated hydrocarbons and

7-5 per cent. of aromatic hydrocarbons. The boiling point range (A.S./1M_) is from 662 C.

to 68-3° C.

REFRRENCES

Crampentiy, J. C., 1923. A systematic monograph of the Tachardiimae or lie iusects (Cac-

cidae). Bull. ent. Res., 14, pp. 147-212.

Gramuritm, J, G., 1925. Supplement to a monograph of the Lacciferidae ( Vachardiinae)

ot lac insects (Homopt.,, Coccidae). Hull. ent. Hes., 16, pp. 31-41.

Fox, D. ir Aninial Biochromes and Structural Colours, Cambridge University Press,

pp. 205-208.

Ganpner, H, A., 1937, Physical and Chemical Examination of Paints, Varnishes, Lacquers.

and Goulors, Eighth cdition, Institute of Paint and Varnish Reseurch, Washington, D.C.,

pp. 873-902.

Parry, E. J., 1925. In Allen's Commercial Organic Analysis. Fifth edition. Churchill,

London, pp. 290-299,

Wantn, A. H,, 1956. The Chemistry and Teclinclogy of Waxes. Second edition, Reinhold

Publishing Corp., New York, pp. 76-121.

Puate 1

Harry F. Lower

*syoosut

[enprArpur jo aouvrwodde jeurayxo moys 0} pesivjua y jo weg -%

(T9%SeIN) an1ovov vIpsvyonjo.ysny

ais = somes

“wg

“Wo3s UO sJoosUL Jo UONNIASICE ‘“T

STRANDED SEA BEACHES AND ASSOCIATED SAND ACCUMULATIONS

OF THE UPPER SOUTH-EAST.

BY R. C. SPRIGG

Summary

Highly detailed geomorphic information concerning the distribution of sand dune systems in the

upper south-east provinces of South Australia is provided. A large "stranded coast" embayment

encloses Tintinara and Keith as part of the earliest Naracoorte beaches, and with it the deep

Pleistocene shell deposits described by Tate (1898). This is the Tintinara "Bay". Suggestions are

made for the northerly continuation of the Kanawinka fault or its en echelon associations from

Naracoorte immediately east of Keith to the Marmon Jabuk Range. These fault escarpments did

much to fashion marine and lake coasts at about the beginning of the Pleistocene Era. A rapid

increase in quartz is found in modern beach sands north of Kingston towards the outlet of the

Murray River. This is held to be of principal importance in the development of the leached silicious

sand sheets in the upper south-east rather than simply podolization of high-lime beach sands. Wind

directions remain dominantly E.-W. during the course of all high sea level phases of the Pleistocene

(as evidenced by inland dune trends). The modern coastal dune structures, however, approximate

N.E. in conformity with prevailing wind patterns requiring a four or five degree southward

migration of the "Roaring Forty" prevailing westerly belt since the Pleistocene.

STRANDED SEA BEACHES AND ASSOCIATED SAND

ACCUMULATIONS OF THE UPPER SOUTH-EAST.

by R. C. Sprice*

[Read 11 September 1958]

SUMMARY.

Hichly detailed geomorphic imfornnation concerning the distribution of

sand dune systems in the upper south-east provinces of South Anstralia is. pro-

vided. A large “stranded coast” embayment encloses Tintinara and Keith as

att of the earliest Naracoorte beaches, and with it the deep Pleistocene shell

Reposits described by Tate (1898). This ig the Tintinara “Bay”.

Suggestions are made for the northerly continuation of the Kanawinka fault

or its en echelon associations from Naracoorte immediately east of Keith to the

Marmon Jabuk Range. These fault cscarpments did mnch to fashion murine

and Jake coasts at about the beginning of the Pleistocene Era.

A rapid increase in quartz is found in modern beach sands north of King-

ston towards the outlet of the Murray River. This is held to be of principal im-

portance in the development of the leached silicious sand sheets in the upper

south-east rather than simply podolization of high-line beach sands.

Wind directions remain dominantly E.-W. during the course of all high sea

level phases of the Pleistocene (as evideneed by inland dune tends}, The

modern coastal dune structures, however, approximate N.E. in conformity with

prevailing wind patterns requiring a four or five degree sovthwyrd migration

of the “Roaring Forty” prevailing westerly belt since the Pleistocene.

INTRODUCTION

Ground observations supported by widespread aerial reconnaissances by

the writer since 1954 have provided much new information concerning the his-

tory of this region. A highly detailed map compiled by the writer from the

latest aerfal photography by the Sonth Australian Lands Department goes far

to elucidate this history.

The present paper is one of a series, arising from efforts to obtain more

factual information on structural deformation of the larger sedimentary basins

in South Australia, during Recent geological times. The dating of certain land

renga in these basins are of particular interest in the search for commercial

oil.

This present paper is designed to deal with coastal migrations of the Jate

Cainozaic Era as they affect the upper south-east, In this respect it is supple-

mentary to earlier papers by N. B, Tindale (1933), P. Hossfeld (1950), R.

Sprigg (1950-2) and P. Du Mooy (1958), Of particular concern is the fate of

the older “Naracoorte” and “Hynam” beaches, as they trend north-north-easterly

from the Naracoorte vicinity beyond the immediate influence of the scarp-

forming Kanawinka fault. These beaches were known generally to strike to-

wards Tintinara where Tate (1898), Howchin (1929) and others had described

a thick section of “Newer Pleistocene” shell beds extending from 38 feet ahove

to 182 feet below moder sea-level.

Considerable land warping continued throughout the period of beach

formation, and strong differences of upinions amongst geologists still remain.to

° Geosurveys of Australia Ltd.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1959), Vol. 82.

184 RK ©, SPRIGG

be resolyed as to the effectiveness, and even the existence. and direction of

these compliqating movements.

GEOLOGICAL BACKGROUND

Qhutcropping basement rocks in the south-east are all acid igneous types

which Mawson (1943, 44, 45) has classified in three major yroups, “hey in-

chide the reddish granite of the Murray Bridge type in which fluorite is a not-

able accessory, also the yreyish porphyritic udamellites and granodiorites, and

finally the quartz keratophyxes considered to be effusive equivalents of the

adawinellites and granodioritcs, They are considered to be comagmatie with

similar intrusions in the eastern Mt. Lofty Ranges and southern Kaugaroo Island

4 the north and west, and perhaps with those of Dergholm to the south-east in

tcloria,

These granite rocks outerop in isolated inliers, as knolls and “whalebacks”

throughout the present region along the crest of the yo-ealled Padthaway buried

liarst (Sprige, 1952),

Permian glacials infll many glacial valleys in an ancient buricd topography

excavated in the foregoing terrain, Glacigenc sands and clays and boulder beds

are indicated in drilling, but these do not appear to outcrop in the area.

Mesozoia subgreywacke, coals,.and shales are present to a thickness of 3,000

feet in Robe Bore, but are not recorded iu the present area, ‘Ihree samples

between 1,400 and 2,630 feet in Robe Bore have been determined (Covkson and

Dettmann, 1958) as of Lower Cretaceous age.

Older Tertiary sediments of Locene age are principally paralic scdiments

with local lignite of the Knight and Buccleuch Groups (Ludbrook, 1957). They

are Overlain by normal marine limestones mostly of Upper Oligocene age.

Most of the present land surface is now blanketted by sands highly siliceous

in the north, but more calcareous to the south where they form “aeolianite”

dune rock. Travertinization is widespread where the calcareous element is

stronger, and Iaterization or soil hard-pan formation is conspicuous in restricted

areas,

THE (?) PLIO-PLEISTOCENE COASTS

There is no reliable indications as to the exact dating of coasts in this area.

At ubout the end of the Pliocene the sea receded completely from the “Mur-

ravian” Gulf of which the prescnt urea is part. This was accompanied by uplift

of an ancient N.N.W.-S.S.F. ridge known us the Padthaway Horst (Sprigy, 1952),

As Howchin (1929) had noted, the original mid-Tertiaury Gulf became a great

inland Jake or series of lakes behind this zencral zone. The engrafted River

Murray drained into it. The position of the sea coast during late Miocene tu

early Pliocene times fs not.known and may have retreated beyond the limits

of the modern coast, but certainly appears to have retreated at least to the

Padthaway Horst,

During Pliocene times the sea gained aécess to an elongate topographically

negative zone close by tle uprising Mt. Lofty Ranges, and massive ovster beds

extended along the general course of the Murray valley in this region, ag far

north as Morgan-

To the south of Naracoorte, there is a multiplicity of very obvious stranded

sea beaches mostly of Pleistocene ages, ‘hese haye been stranded in turn on

an upwarping but gently sewward slopiag plain (Fig. 2). Some complications

have been noted (Sprige, 1948, 1952: Hossfeld, 1950) by later inundation of

the lower (younger) beaches.

The best developed of the higher (older) stranded beaches occur at Nara-

eoarte against the Kanawinka fault scarp, developed in mid-Tertiary polyzoal

PB RAN

aN:

TANKS.”

BORDERTOWN

a 1 \

\ | ai .

i i iy} Be

I “eo (a!

Kent es?

ras.

Weds

,O0cOP! M\)!

vs c

0 our:

ee ws

BP.

es Ts-

1% MILes

ue yt!

Na Na in

OF THE

UPPER SOUTH EAST

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

SAND DUNE ASSOCIATION

O00 a6e)

100 e6E!

9 ; ; a

ia ih iu To) a >

v 3 2 ry 5 “4 * §

a a 8) 8 8 o

"7 n ) fd 9 = &

®BORDERTOWN

CAPE NORTHUMBERLANO

sree

ry]

Ds:

KINGSTON

% MOORLAN

seen

CAPE JAFFA

TAILEM BEN

of Australia kta

ae.

“153 a

L. ALBERT

24 «MILES

inezeic volcano

e sand dune complex

Stranded sea beach

Granite out¢rap

“Whit

Late Ca

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

DUNE COMPLEX

SOUTH EAST PROVINCE

STRANDED SEA BEACHES 18%

limestones, and attaining more than 100 feet high. Remnant sub-paralle] coastal

dunes oecur further inland at still higher levels marking the “Hynam™ and “bin-

nim” coasts, The Naracoorte duce has been tuken by Sprigg (1952) to be the

earliest Pleistocene dime, and the Hynam and Rinnum coasts on this assumption

would be uf Pliocene age,

Further to the south extensive oyster depusits occur inland from the Dismal

Swamps ou the “back” of the Mt. Gambier arch (Sprigg, 1948, 52), or Cape

Banks axis poesteld. 1950). These may or may not be time-equivalents of the

Murray Valley deposits to the nurth, They appear to be co-extensive with the

Plio-Pleistocene deposits of the Glenelg River at Heywood in south-western

Victoria described by Singleton (1934) as spanning this “time” boundary. The

western Naracourte beach is contemporaneous with these oyster deposits and

so « Plio-Pleistocene “boundary” age for this beach seems reasonable, The sea

at this time lapped at the foot af the Kanawinka fault searp.

The Naracoorte beach dune is compuund., Tt consists of two major ridges

separated a short distance (a few hundred yards) from the Kanawinka fanlt

at Narweoorte, which also appears tu have Formed a (slightly older) cvast,

Te the narth, the Jung facing aspect of the “west” Naracoorte component

af this beach dune trends consistently N.N.W. with only geatle arching more

lo the N.W, to with L5 miles of Keith, Here there appear numerous compli-

catiuns. Granites outerop boldly. and at least 3 or 4 coastal dunes appear vast

of the “Naracourte” trend, variously aeched into successive embayments con-

tralled in part by protecting granite “headlands” (Fig. 3). The younger of these

may he correlated with the west Narwcoorte dune and this interpretation is pre-

ferred. The next east includes several granite eminenves within its boundaries

near the southern end. Tle Mount Monster dune, next to the cast, may not

have been a complete cuast. but rather a string of granite islands “tied” by dune

accumulations. Further east the compounded Keith dunes make a pronvinent

coast forming the Tintinaru “Bay” and backed by ¢normuus east-blown siliceous

sand sheets which rise relatively sharply from the dune fore-front Ievel of 90-100

feet to 200 feet or mare, tt is not improbable that this dune skirts the northern

continuation of the Kanawinka fault or a reluted en echelon fracture and escarp-

meat,

The Keith “beach” can be traced north-eastward to opposite Tintinara (74

feet above sea level) beyond which it is lost beneath enurmous sand blows

originating from sbaut the seaward gramte “isluuds” of the Binneys Lookout

and Mt. Boothby “archipelago”, This and associated “blows effectively ohliter-

ate ull coastal dunes north of this lutitude. South feo Keith this Tintinara

“Bay” swings seaward to link with the Naracoorte trend, but in doing so, also

ix “tied” to the Mt. Monster archipelago.

Of the younger (lower level) dunes west of the “Naracoorte” Ine, most

of them louse their identity north of the latitude of Keith. Only the Peacock

dune can be traced beyond this limit, with the exception of the immediate sul

voastal “Reedy Creek” beach and others of the “Covrong” association.

In the region of the Morray Lukes to the north (Fig. 4) evidence of fonner

cixists is difficult to elucidate. Enormous sand sheets and “blows”, and lakes,

effectively blanket most of the evidence. The northem shore of Luke Albert has a

wently arched form and is backed by high sand dunes and is thought to represent

an old sea stand, probably the Naracoorte coast, Further west, constrictions on

Narrung Peninsula also suggest the trace of an ancient coast, possibly ane of

the “Avenue” beaches, from the south. This has been tentatively termed the

Loveday Bay Beach,

The role of the Mt. Boothby and Binneys Lookout granite whalebacks in

cuastal corifiguration can only be surmised, although the protection must have

C, SPRIGG

f Is if

STRANDED SEA BEACHES

‘ pt Pipa t 4

i y Iie ee Dade

hy LM eB es

ol ht’ the

cn (eeu

dy mata! N

1] a il Da ost

re y.

TS r

4 Hast 4

eke

‘ ifs

ha eetalt

LAKE

Nd ae Ta! Ly oe

A/a ees

Uy) a

fe eh et, cairip .

Pe AO ane ond

hte F

h i hee

GOLWA

Sass

< ~ + 5 r

7 fe es =

aes .

Cours . Lo

nw re

DUNE ASSOCIATION

LOWER MURRAY RIVER LAKES

SCALE O

Stet wet f te * *.

: re ter eae t 4H

fn3. opts 4 fe pees ¥ = re

Gaesurveys - 722. =

ared b

26-858 | Flan prep

i pes?

188 h, G, SPRIGG

had considerable influence on local coastal configuration. Presumably these

granite knolls formed archipelagoes and tied-islands and finally headlands in

successively younger stranded coasts. The outcrop undoubtedly facilitated

inland sand dnift, for the most massive “blows” surround these and extend for

20(t miles inland directly eastwards.

DISCUSSION.

{a} The Tintinara Marine Shell Deposits

Appreciation of the form of the stranded “Tintinara Bay” and associated

ouasts throws new light on several previously puzzling features. Tate (1898)

examined fossil shell assemblages from the Tintinara Railway Bore, and de-

clared them to he New Pleistocene. He recorded that “the total thickness of

New Pleistocene beds is 220 feet extending in depth from 38 feet above sea level

to 182 feet below it, All the examined species as a result of cormparison with

authenticated specimens ave, with threc exceptions, living in our local seas.”

Chapman (1914) following this evidence of deep shell beds extending well

below modern sea level. suggested the possibility of a rift valley or an earth fold

by which thé sea was admitted. Some overdeepening seems certainly to have

eccurred, and may have marked an ancient erosional valley, or as Howchin and

Tate suggested, a possible outlet of the Murray River.

The new view of the landward swing of the “East-Naracoorte” or older

coasts, as herein described, accommodates the Tintinara shell deposits within

the older Tintinara embayment. Tate's identification of “Newer™ Pleistocene

should he accepted cautiously in the absence of more precise determinations,

bast an older Pleistocene age would appear to be more in accordance with the

ach.

(h) The Northward Continuation of the Kanavinka Fault

Another problem concerns the northern extensions of the Kanawinka fault.

This gently arenate fault extends more than 100 miles from near Portland in

Victoria, west of Casterton and through Naracoorte, to disappear into the Nara-

coorte stranded coastal dunes only a few miles north of the latter town.

Topographic data is sparse in this direction. Railway gradients between

Tintinara (R.L. 62) and Keith (R-L, 101) are quite low (30 feet in 24 miles),

whereas to the east, the rise across the “Keith Coast” is 40 feet in 6 miles. This

could indicate the position of the projected Kanawinku fault extension or a

en echelon partner, Bat is also attributable to sand accumulation. No granites

outcrop west of this line.

To the north-west, numerous faults all trending N.W., W.N.W. or N.N.W.

continue the general zone of uplift, and certain of these mark the boundaries

of the Marmon Jabuk Range. (See Figs, 2and 6.) These relationships are being

discussed more fully in a parallel paper.

{c) Landwarping Movements,

Particular interest centres upon the extent of landwarping movements active

throughout the Late Cainozoic Era, which is widely known in Australia as the

“Kosciusko Epoch”,

A graph (Fig. 5) has been prepared of stranded beach “forefront” levels.

projected onto a sub-parallel plane taken along the general average trend of

the beach system. It is appreciated that true strandline, or other “datum™, may

vary plus or minus 10 or 20 feet or more along these situations. In general, haw-

ever, erosion and deposition along the fore-dune flats since the stranding of the

respective beaches will have acted to reduce these elevational differences. [ur

example, in the extreme south, on the axis of the transverse Mt. Gambier arch

STRANDED SEA BEACHES

Q ‘BI

AYVWNaY YVSN OL HOVE SNOWOOD sable hoe a gd

NOILDaS «= 1¥Di907035

4ines

PNBYE BWoOZOVILOYE PUCYoOM sue aH3201N

SKYE SHOZIVLIG> Apeq |9Ke ewan FIOZONIYD 3L¥1

esyubi] @ BRED SRuES eousk giep DIDZONW? BLT

g Big

GS das 82 eiratty p Meuneoay AE oaeens veg OF FE

SS === SISuT EA

WSoreT 13027935 pee BANgS TT STE ASOT VEATTWES

—_—_——

Nyasa, SNIMAEOM

= 3woTON

- * pe

—

«yond _—

—_ ee gaye

ana

YuyINILN!

AID Lys

FONINI

—_

HLNOW MIAH AvininW

note

BHanTS LAL

40 Slay

190 R. C SPRIGG

(or upwarp) Tertiary rocks are cxtensively exposed by sediment stripping,

whereas to the north the interdune Hats are progressively more deeply amnion

by later sediments. The graph, then, will tend to indicate rather a lesser amount

of Warping than has actually occurred,

The warping trends are quite obvious from the graph, indicating progressive

apwarp about the Mt, Gambier (or Cape Banks) line, with greatest downwarp

towards the foot of the (devclopmg) Mt. Lofty Ranges. It is this type of down-

wiki towards the eastern edge of the Mt. Lofty Ranges and the eastern

ogorthern margins of the Flinders Ranges which has exercised a major control

on stream patterns in the Murray River and Lake Eyre basins. These patterns

wre notably asymmetrical with all trunk streams trending towards, and finally

along, the base of the previously mentioned margins of these ranges, These are

also the zones of South Australia’s major lakes, The graph produced clearly

supplies the controls for this situation.

(d) The Origin of the Sands

Enormous volumes of white or cream colonred sands in vast shects extend

for up to 150 miles from the present coast almust directly eastwards into Vic-

toria (the “Big Desert” in the north, and “Little Desert” to the south), These

are the leached siliceous sands described by Crocker (1946) and others. Crocker

concluded the enormous volumes of sand to be “aeolian resorted leached A-huri-

zong from the former calcareous dunes ,. . the consolidation of the calcareons

dunes by downward leaching of lime and re-deposition in a B-C horizon, has

resulted in the formation of a residual siliceous A horizon. The stripping of this

siliceous horizon by acolian agencies during a snbsequent arid period, and its

re-sorting is considered to have led to the development of the large areas of

siliceous sand in the lower south-east”, :

Obviously these processes have played some part in the development of

the siliceous sand sheets of the upper south-east, and of some consolidated

“acolianite” dunes, but other more important factors have been overlooked.

Firstly, all coastal sands in the south-east are not dominantly calcareous.

Crocker (1946), for example, has quoted 5-35 per cent. insoluble matter as the

normal range of variation for “our Australian calcareous sands”. Analyses of

sands taken by Sprigg (1952) in the lower south-east certainly do indicate uni-

formly high lime content (65-95 per cent.) as suggested by Crocker (ie. 5-35

per cent. insolubles). However, these samples were all taken from the vicinity

of Kingston or south in a region notable for destruction of enormous shell popu-

Jations on open ocean surf beaches which lack river cutlets which would other-

wise provide non-caleareous sedimentary material. Kingston, for example, is

almost 90 miles from the Murray River mouth to the north, and 120 miles from

the Glenelg River outlet to the south-east.

A series of sand samples taken at intervals along the Coornng Beach north

from Kingston show a progressive increase in insoluble as follows:

vicinty \ - | Dune

100 ml. N. of Kingston (Surfers’ Beach, { H.T.L,

extreme north | ir 4 . {Dune

10 ml. 5.W, of Kingston » LL, IL-7

1 ml. N. of Kingston } nee =f

20 ml. N, of Kingston : Dune 28-9

40 ml. N. of Kingston ; Eee

“Dine 30-8

90 ml. N. of Kingston (Goolwa Barrage {H.T.L. 63-0

icinty J4-1

§1-6

795

STRANDED SEA BEACHES Ih

The progressive change in composition to the north is obvious and micro-

seopic examination reveals the increase in solubles to be almost entirely due

to quartz, although some silicate minerals are also present,

On this coast only one source is likely to be important in mducing the cam-

ositional change revealed, namely, those sediments introduced via the Murray

iver. Lesser sources are frum coastal erosion in Encounter Bay, and froin

submarine outerops of granite and/or Pre-Tertiary und Tertiary sedimentary

rocks. Littoral drift would tend to spread these insoluble products particularly

to the south from the Murray mouth which is eccentrically situated on the gently

arenate Coorong sea-heach.

A sommarshle state of affairs seems to have held throughout the period of

“stranded beach” formation in the south-east. North of about Kingston sand

blows extend increasingly further inland und finally become sufficiently massive

to inundate, and obliterate, all earlier-formed coastal heaches. Moreover, as ex-

pected, the cvarsely-grained acolianite of the south gives away to finer-grained

acolinite with obviously increased insoluble (quartz sand) content, in this more

northerly aspect.

North ot Keith, siliceous sand sheets reach euornnious dimensions, and extend

for up to 150 miles inland. With one or two exceptions, the northern boundary

of this sand lies about along the Jatitude uf Tailem Bend and corresponds wi

the northern limit of the settling basins provided hy the lakes before the Murray

River mouth. More northerly aecurnulations exteud east from about Jabuk and

Karoondsa. Two principal dune systems extend away from Jocal fault escarp-

ments and may possibly indicate former cuast furmation in earlier Plio-Pleis-

tocene times, or Huviatile activity.

A complication in the concentration of the heaviest siliveous sand slivets

north of Keith is apparent with the Naracoarte Beaches. Whereas the lower

level beaches, south of the Keith, cease to be smothered by later distrilrutiuns

of sands from successively younger beaches, these latter still produced large

easterly distributions extending almost south to Naracoorte. The presence of

granite knolls within these older coastal complexes, and associated outcropping

older Tertiary fluviatile sedimentary sources, may be sufficient source. There

remain, however, the possibilities of a more southerly oullet, here, fo the Murray

River, as suggested also by the overdeepened (? croded-valley) deposits of

fossil shells of Tintinara as described by Tate (1898) and Ilowchin (1928).

(e) Dominant Wind Directions

Relatively “inexhaustible” supplies of fine sand, free tu mave under cundi-

Lions of Favourable climate (and other factors), may provide excellent “fossil”

record of former wind patterns, Few areas could excel the south-east region in

this respect.

In this paper it is not intended to anticipate a much more exhaustive treat-

ment of the subject of “fossil wind regimes” as indicated by ovr Australian fixed

desert dime systems which is now in an advanced stage of preparation by the

writer. In this treatment particular consideration is given to “high impact force”

winds (uf 5 miles per huwr or more) which are considered most efficient in

transport of sand (other conditions of moisture content, vegetative caver, etc.,

being equal). Frequency-dominance of winds (in terms of direction) may or

tay not he a less important factor, assisting more in sweeping the interdune

corridors and producing bias in lateral avalanche tendencies.

The dune patterns reproduced herein (Pigs. 1 and 2) highlight the dumin-

ating influence of prevailing “high impact furce” westerly winds during mast of

the periods of active sand transport, The long axes of all] major sand necumm-

192 RK, C. SPRIGG

lations (inland from) West Avenue Range show this westerly factor yery clearly,

To the north this influence is,overwhelming whereas to the south some oblique

trends are superimposed on the still dominating westerly influence,

This westerly “dominance” is remarkable in view of modern wind patterns

for this same area which show a strong prevalence, both in relative frequency

and force of impact, for “south-westerlies”.. The sand drift lines of the medern

Coorong coastal dune reflects this direction quite faithfully. The most accepé-

able explanation for this seeming anomaly would appear io be that the present

lay wind pattern is strongly at variance with conditions obtaining during the

Pleistocene Period when the inland blows were most active. The dune pattern

of the Karoonda-Pinnaroo zone is strongly reminiscent of the modern active dune

system of the Waterhouse district in north-eastern Tasmania which are still

active under conditions of high rainfall. A plentiful sand supply and strong

force westerly winds are the controlling factors. ‘These are sufficient to negative

the influence of a strong, but quite comparable stunted vegetative cover in this

region, (Both are areas of deeply leached sands apparently with low nutritive

status of the sails.)

The directional change of dune stricture near the Murray River mouth is

from N90-100° E. to N35-45" E. This can best be explained by a significant

migration of climatic belts in geologically recent times suggesting also that our

modern climate muy not simply be that of a “Pleistocene Interglacial”.

Tt would appear, then, that the anticyclone belt is now removed further

south, The so-called “Roaring Forty” belt (an unstable zone at the best of

times} of high impact force westerly winds, and now passing over Tasmania,

would appear to have been located at least 4 to 5 degrees of latitude further

north. Moreover, there is no necessity tu invake arid periods to account for

these desert-like developments, although drought and aridity may well have

been significant factors. High impact force winds im areas of heavy and con-

tinuing sediment supply are adequate to overwhelm stunted vegetative cover

and lead to dune formation.

REFERENCES,

Cuarr, E. T., 1896. Notes on the Geology of the Ninety Mile Desert. Trans, Roy, Sou, 8.

Aust, Vol. 30,

Cookson, I. C., and Derratann, M. E., 1958. Cretaceous “mevaspores” und a closely asso-

ciated paid ag fram the Australian region. Mircrepalaeontology, 4 (1), pp, 30-49,

pts. 1-2 text, figs, 1-3, 1 table, .

Crocxur, Bi L., 1943. Post-Miocene Climatic and Geolugic [istary anil tts significance Jn

relation ta the Genesis of the major soil types of S. Aust, C.S.LB.0. Aust. Bull, No, 193.

Crarnsax, F., 1916. Crinozwie Ceolagy af the Mallee and other Victorian Bures. Ree Gel,

Surv, Vie., 3 (4).

Hossein, PB oS., 1950, The Late Cainozniv Mistery of the Sot Kast af South Australia

Trans. Foy. Soe. 5.A., 73 (2).

Hoyeran, W., 1929. Notes on the Geolagy of the Great Pyap Band (1oxton), River Murray

Basin and reniarks on the guological history of the River Murray. Trans, Hoy. Sac. S.

Aust., Vol. 53.

Luvanoox, N. H., 1957. A Reference Colunm for the Tertiary Sediments of the Soutl. Ans-

trilian Portion of the Murray Basin. Journ. Hoy. Soc. NSW., 30, pp. 174-180.

Srmicc, R, C., 1948 (1952). Stranded Sea Beaches of the south-cast of South Australia anil

aspects of the Theories of Milankavitch and Zeunur. Rep. 18th Int. Geol, Conuress

{Tondon, 1948),

Sericc, R. C., 1952. The Geology of the South-Eust Province, South Australia, with special

reference to Quaternary coastline migrations and modern Beach Development. Bull,

29, Geol, Survey, 8, Australia.

Sprice, R, C,, and BourAxorr, N., 1953. Summary Report on thr Petroleum Possibilities of

the Gambier Sunklands. Minmg Review, No, 95, S. Aust. Department of Mines.

STRANDED SEA BEACHES 193

Tinpace, N. B., 1933. Tantanoola Caves, Geological and Physiographical. Trans. Roy. Soc.

S. Aust., 57.

Tate, R., 1898. Two Deep Level Deposits of or over Pleistocene Age, Tintinara and Port

Pirie. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 22.

SterHens, C, G., ev aL. A Soil and Land Use Survey of the Hundreds of Hindmarsh, Young,

Riddock, Grey and Nangwarry, South Australia. C.S.1.R., Aust. Bull. 142.

SincteTon, F. A., 1939. The Tertiary Geology of Australia. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic., 53.

PRESUMED SUBMARINE VOLCANIC ACTIVITY NEAR BEACHPORT,

SOUTH-EAST SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

BY R. C. SPRIGG, M.Sc.

Summary

Three, possibly four, submarine ridges lying transversely to the general contour of the continental

platform opposite Beachport are interpreted to be submarine lava flows. A marginal submarine

valley accompanies one or more of them. The heads of these presumed flows coincide closely with

the epicentres of the 1897 and 1948 earthquakes, and this activity may represent the last phase of

the late Quaternary basaltic volcanicity in south-eastern Australia.

PRESUMED SUBMARINE VOLCANIC ACTIVITY NEAR BEACHPORT,

SOUTH-EAST SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

by R. C. Spricc, M,Sc,*

[Read 11 September 1958]

SUMMARY

Three, possibly four, submarine ridges lying transversely to the general

contour of the continental platfurm opposite Beachport are mterpreted to be

seanaeinr lava flows. A marginal submarine: valley accompanies one or more

of them.

the heads of these presumed flows coincide closely with the epicentres of

the: 1897 and 1948 earthquakes, and this uctivity may Tepresent the last phase

of the late Quaternary hasultic voleanicity in south-eastern Anistralia.

INTRODUCTION

Volcanoes have almost certainly been active beneath the sea opposite Beach-

pert in late Cainozoic, perhaps even geologically Recent times.

Ilighly scoriaceous basalts have been collected washed up on beaches at

many places from Beachport to Port MacDonnell. These may be the origin of

local “old timer” rnmours of volcanoes beneath the sea in this vicinity. Some

have contended that the basalts came from greater distances, and the inevitable

“clinkers” brought in with such samples, and also one example of imported basalt

ballast, dumped at local seaports, rather more confused the issue,

The writer, while an officer of the South Australian Geological Survey, be-

came interested in the fascinating possibility of submarine voleanicity in this

vicinity, during prolonged field activities in the coastal zone during 1949-51, but

at the time decided that the available evidence was insufficient, However,

Captain Little, commander of the survey ship Lachlan, with whom the writer

was associated during the Robe Harbour investigations, undertook several echo

sounding traverses across the local continental shelf, and reported a submarine

eminence off the coast between Robe and Beachport which appcared suggestive.

This “peak” has been Jocated on the latest hydrographic charts of the area which

form the basis of this contribution. Of special interest is that this position cor-

responds closely with the epicentres of the 1897 and 1948 earthquakes, and also

ties in with other anomalous submarine topographic features of the immediate

vicinity.

Late Cainoxoic Volcanicity

Readers are referred to publications by A. V. G. James (1949) and R, C,

Sprigg (1952) for summaries of volcanic activity in the local hinterland (Fig. 1).

A roughly east-west voleanic belt extends across southern Victoria into south-

eastern South Australia, ending rather abruptly, as far as outcropping evidence

goes, in Mt. Muirhead, in the Mt. Burr range. Two solitary centres of late Ter-

tiary activity occur much further to the north-west on Kangaryo Island. These

groups are the so-called “Newer Voleanics” as distinct from earlier Tertiary

voleanicity.

* Geosurveys of Australia Limited.

Trans. Roy. Soc. 5, Aust. (1959), Vol, 83,

Kk. C. SPRIGG

196

esibojasy sores = Shsidls py

Sain

09! oF)

Saula Oo n'y vate Papo

.L,.

Lp oo

I “81a

Saviy Jo ydag ¥ Ss

O21

MDs

“Op, VA

ocr

NVHIO

GY. 5

1H Wp? “

Mey

iy ni

“ste ~ i

Wig Pi

NAVAL MOS

UST.

VICTOR!

““S0uTH A

—

2/E-OS BOF 7397

YS PuUl SMO},

uHPspg samen,

(4034 4: /2da/ Das atoga

fy Slay mogs saunbes )

sadjua, ajupo}0A

OPS @

SUBMARINE VOLCANICITY wi

Fissure cruptions played a major role in the Victorian activity with the

extrusion of basalt sheets covering more than 10,000 square miles over the western

district plains and highlands. Near Portland, coastal eruptions poured out lava

streams whicli €ven now can be traced across the constline vut along the sea

floor, far oul to sea,

Tn South Australia the activity was cntircly basic, and the yurious yents

ean be related to presumed lines of fissuring, although true fissure eruption js

not obvious. Small flows usually proceeded cone formation, but the rapid

accumulation of steam quickly led to the growth uf large explosion craters.

In the Mt, Gambier vicinity, the earlier of these late Tertiary volcanoes, as

exemplified by Mts. Burr and McIntyre, are cunsidered to be late Plivcene to

Early Pleistocene phenomena (Sprigg, 1952), and the later group hy Mt. Gam-

bier are late Pleistocene. Other writers have placed the activity still later, and

N. B, Tindale and others, in drawing attention to possible references in local

aboriginal legends have suggested very recent activity. This is not impossible,

as even a short cycle of activity could well span the time interval concerned,

Late Catnazoie Faulting

Brief mention of faulting during late Tertiary and Quaternary times is im-

portant for its possible bearing on recent earthquake activity in the area.

Minor late Tertiary faults oceur throughout outcropping Tertiary limestones

in the Mt, Gambier area. They confurm well with the major geological struc-

tural pattern of the area, and the jointing (Spri¢g, 1952), and mostly they strike

W._N.W. or N.W. Fault dewnthrow is usually to the south-west, and the extent

of muvernent is generally small, T.nei of voleanic eruption may be aligned along

some of these. One of these, the “Tartwaup” line, would appear to pass out

beneath the sea near Beachport which is also the site of an unexplained extremely

sharp positive gravity anomaly (Department of Mines, unpublished information),

Earthquakes.

In view of the known late Cainozwic volcanic activity, and the considerable

arching (upwarping), occuring in the south-eastern area (Sprigg, 1952), it is

not surprising that two of the State’s major earthquakes have been ccntred in

this area in historic times, The first occurred on May 10th, 1897, and the second

on April 8th, 1948.

Mr. G. F. Dodwell (1909). the late Government Astronomer, in describing

the 1897 earthquake wrote that “tremors in the vicinity of Kingston . . . can-

tinued at intervals for some months, all appeared to point to a focus in the

ocean somewhere west of that neighbourhoed”, The earthquake showed a large

epicentral area and was recorded over southern Australia trom Streaky Bay and

well into Victoria. An isoseismal map (Fig. 2) prepared at the time suggests

an epicentre off the coast near Beachport The disturbance was aceorded the

value 9 on “Mercalli” scale.

According to local reparts by persuns still living, the shock dislocated the

lighthouse machinery at Cape Jalka, throwmg the light off its beam and spilling

the mercury at the hase of the lamp. A largo mass of acolianite nearby was

split, and portions collapsed into the sea. To the north-west of Mt. Benson,

upposite Nulook bark mill, the travertinsed limestone was cracked deeply, Ac-

curding to Mr, F’. Winter, a local resident, the tremors continued for same weeks.

The more recent tremar of 1948 had its epicentre beneath the séa 10 miles

north-west of Beachport. in much the same place as the 1897 earthquake. The

shock was less severe, even though it was felt as far as 250 miles away, At

Beachport, it cracked buildings, stepped clocks and dislodged crockery from

198 R. C. SPRIGG

shelves. Nearer Adelaide the tremor lasted from a few seconds to five minutes,

and in some areas it was proceeded by low rumblings.

The Evidence from Submarine Topography

Lt. Commander Little’s report of a rock eminence rising to 13 fathoms, but

lying approximately on the trend of the 25 fathom contour, raises considerable

le PT AUGUSTA

KINGSTON

ISOSEISMALS

OM MERCALLI SCALE FOR Op PROBE

EARTHQUAKE. - MAY 10, 1897 aNenngad

(AFTER —- HOCBEN)

3¢M™ GAMBIER

266-58 Plan prepared by Geosurveys of Australia ite SEP 3

Fig, 2

interest, The continental shelf in this vicinity is at about its narrowest expression

in South Australia. The trend of its outer margin is very direct, and almost due

north-west. A general contouring of the depth soundings (Fig. 3) produces a

gently sloping surface, steepening rapidly as it approaches the 100 fathom line,

and thereafter plunging increasingly rapidly into the Jeffrey abysmal deep.

Information is sufficient to show the broad form of this shelf quite clearly

SUBMARINE VOLCANICITY 199

except in a few zones. While appreciating the effects of personal bias, most of the

contouring is reasonably smooth, and can be readily reproduced by independant

investigators. However, several obvious anomalies stand out clearly. Three

PRESUMED

SUBMARINE LAVA FLOWS

ANO RELATED FRATURES ON THE

CONTINENTAL SHELF

SOUTH EAST SOUTH AUSTRALIA

Cate from Admiralty Chart (Ola

BEN few on Mai) wreparys oy Leasucreya of Anstraha be

Fig. 3

transverse ridges, and possibly a fourth, interrupt the trend of the general sea

floor contour boldly. In addition, valley-like depressions margin two of these

features.

The eminence recorded by Lt. Commander Little represent the apparent

abrupt landward termination of one of the ridges. Down-slope, it appears to

200 R. GC. SFRIGG

continue as a ridge for at least 12 miles, and is elevated 30 to 60 feet or more

above its surroundings. Unfortunately, the density of soundings is insufficient

to he more precise as to its exact morphology. The ridge is clearly elongated

across. the continental platform, in the direction of the steepest slope which is

algo tramsverse to the grain of faulting on the adjacent mainland. It is proposed

to call this feature “Little’s ridge”. The upper (?) termination of this feature

lies near the projected 235 fathoms contour, where it also appears to have its

greatest differential elevation above the local sea floor (summit at 13 fathoms).

‘This point is approximately 17 miles N60W of Beachport and 7 miles from the

nearest coast. There appears to be no deviation of the recently surveyed 100

fathom linc opposite this feature and it is prestimed not to extend that far.

A second prominent ridge structure also lying transverse to the genera!

contour of the shelf, occurs almost due west of Beachport. This will be termed

the Beachport ridge. The soundings suggest this to be similarly clevated 60

to 100 feet above the projected level of the local platform. In the absence of

suitably positioned soundings, the nature of its “head” is unknown. This ridge

almost certainly crosses the 100 fathom line, for the marine charts show a clearly

intended and definite outward bulging on the line at this situation. (This line

was resurveyed in “continuity” by the “Lachlan” and replotted accurately.)

The structure has elongation of twenty miles or more. A third ridge, apparently

only slightly less conspicuous, lies a few miles to the south; its form is quite

compzrable. It is termed the Rivoli ridge.

On the northern margin of the Beachport submarine ridge there exists 2

deep trench, apparently also trending in the direction of steepest slope. This

appears toe be an erosional feature, and the few random surroundings centred

on it indicates overdeepening to 100 feet or more. The valley may be of the

nature of a miniature subtree canyon, but more evidence is required to justify

this conclusion. The valley to the south of the Beachport ridge appears not

ta have been overdeepened, rather it appears to be present by virtue of the

existetice of the ridges on either flank.

Directly south of Beachport distant approximetely 20 miles, there is yet

anvther associated ridge and valley topographic “anomaly”. The evidence is

meagre in view of the paucity of local soundings, but the general indication is

similar to the foregoing. Its position is indicated on the plan, Interpretative

statistics on cach of these incompletely known features is given in Table 1.

TABLE Ef,

From Beachport

Min. dist. L | Max tiferred

Natge of Submarine from const ! Length elevation

feature (in miles) Distance | Direotion (miles) difterones

(miles) (iy fost)

Little's vidge 7 iy) NOW M+ | 368!

Beachport ridge 134 134 | Ssow 164 100

Rivoli ridge ll 12 s6uW Op Loo

Northumberland ridge 22 26 Slow (¥)3 tin

Beuvhport groove 13 17 due W ¥ Os

Northumberland groove 18 ; 20 BSW v4] Wh—

INTERPRETATION

Submarine earthquakes in 1897 and 1948 indicated epicentres to the north-

west of Beachport distant some 10 to 20 miles. This general zone encompasses

portion of the local continental shelf which carries several prominent ridge struc-

SUBMARINE VOLCANICITY 201

tures consistent in form with submarine lava Hows, The structures are remark-

ably persistent, extending for 10 to 20 miles or more in the direction of maximum

set Hoor slope. The more northerly ur “Little's” submarine ridge on present in-

formation has relatively greater prominence at its head, indicating perbaps re-

stricted erosion, and suggesting very “youthful” characteristics, if the volcanic

interpretation is correct. This location corresponds very closely with the caleu-

lated epicentral location of the 1897 earthquake. The 1948 epicentre admittedly

also very approximately located is placed somewhat nearer to the head of the

Beachport submarine ridge.

The nature of the (?) canyoning on the northern side of the Beachpurt

sulmnarine ridge is little known, It is possible that submarine density currents

have been concentrated about the former sea floor anomaly and lave lead to

active erosion by buttom density currents. As the landward portion of the

platform consists of Tertiary and Mesozoic sediments to more than 4000 feet

depth, these soft sediments are alsa predicted for the platform edge and would

be readily eroded.

Outcropping rock is reported on three of the four ridge structures, even

though the adjacent continental platform surface: is almost exclusively of sand,

shell or “coral” (? polyzoa). ‘This supports the lava flow interpretation, which in

the light of all the available evidence appears logical, The Hows would be

conecived to have had “tunnel” form with the chilled lava surfaces providing

crusts to insulate lava continuing to How. Portland vents were spread rather

more and produced wider and less regular flow associations, Relative sea

floor elevations of the order of 100 feet above the surroundings were produced.

‘The lava flow within Portland Bay originated on the land, but the position of

the sea margin at the time is not known. Its conrse beneath the existing sea

is clearly defined (Fig, 4). In its landward extension this flow has left some very

fine elongate lava caves where the central liquid lavas had drained away.

CONCLUSTONS

Three, and possibly four, presumed submarine lava flows erupted oppasite

Beachport in late Cainozoic times, The earthquake epicentres of the 1897 and

1948 correspond with these positions, and scoriaceuus basalt has been washed

upon the beaches along the local coast. The fows are of great length (10 to

2U miles or more) and one of them (the Beachport flow) is margined by a decp

trough on its northern side, possibly by submarine scouring by marine bottom

density currents,

There is no evidence, for or against, extrusion vf any of these presumed

flows during 4 low level phase of the sea. In either case, the lower portians of

the Hows must have becn below sea level even at the height of the generally

accepted 40 fathom or 240 feet maximum lowering. Tho Beachport structure

displaced the 100 fathom line markedly to seaward, @ fact which has been

clearly recognised in drafting the latest hydrographic charts, A lowering of

existing sea level by about 80 feet would be sufficient to expose the head of

Little's “flow”.

It is presumed that the “Hows” belong to the Mt. Gambier-Mt. Schank phase

af Jatest volcanicity, and in view of the associated seismic activity, may be the

latest of them all,

There is a need for more detailed echo sounding surveys to fully elucidate

these structures, and grab sampling of rock fragments would quickly verify the

presumed yoleanic nature, A search for volcanic glass or other material on the

open beaches near Beachport may alse help confirm these opinions,

202 R. C, SPRIGG

gor—fr

Oo - 7 __ Kp

eeon PISS

OPPOSITE

CAPE BRIDGWATER

VICTORIA

- >

fy!

g |)

\ MOOI)

Fig. 4

SUBMARINE VOLCANICITY 293

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

Appreciation is expressed for the kind co-operation of Mr. T. A. Barnes,

Director of Mines, South Australia, in making available the block reproduced as

Fig. 1 herein.

REFERENCES.

Dopweti, G. F., 1909. South Australian Earthquakes. Aust. Ass. ady. Sci. (12).

James, A. V. G., 1949, The last of the Australian Volcanoes. Walkabout, February issue.

Howcuin, W., 1918. The Geology of South Australia. Govt. Printer, Adelaide.

Spricc, R. C., 1947. Submarine Canyons of the New Guinea and South Australian Coasts.

Trans. Roy, Soc. S, Aust., 71 (2), pp. 296-310.

Spricc, R. C., 1952. The Geology of the South-East Province, South Australia, with Special

Reference to Quaternary Couast-line Migrations, and Modern Beach Developments. Geol.

Surv., S. Aust., Bull, 29.

THE CAMBRIAN-PRECAMBRIAN BOUNDARY IN THE EASTERN

MT. LOFTY RANGES REGION: SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

BY R. C. Horwitz, B. P. THOMSON AND B. P. WEBB

Summary

This paper presents the results of recent mapping by the Geological Survey of South Australia in the

eastern Mt. Lofty Ranges. The area covered forms portion of the Adelaide, Echunga and Milang

Sheets (1:63, 360 scale). In the north and south of the area, field evidence establishes an

unconformity between Adelaide System sediments and younger Cambrian sediments. An attempt is

made to locate the base of the Cambrian in the central region where both sequences are

conformable. The stratigraphy of the Adelaide System and the lowest beds of the Cambrian,

including the Kanmantoo Group up to the Nairne pyrite formation, is outlined. The facies variations

of these sediments are described.

THE CAMBRIAN-PRECAMBRIAN BOUNDARY IN THE EASTERN

MT. LOFTY RANGES REGION: SOUTH AUSTRALIAt

hy B. C. Hoxwirz,* B. P. Tuomson* ann B. P. Wess*

[Read 11 September 1956]

l. SUMMARY

This paper presents the results of recent mapping by the Geologiea) Survey

of Senth Australia in the castern Mt. Lofty Ranges. “Whe area covered forms

portion of the Adelaide, Echunga and Mikmg Sheets (1:63, 360 seale). Ip the

north and south of the area, Geld evidence establishes an vuconformity between

Adelaide System sediments 2nd younger Cambrian sediments, An atteuypl is

made to locate the base of the Carubrian in the central regi¢n where both

sequences aré conformable. The stratigraphy of the Adelaide System and the

lowest beds of the Cambrian, including the Kanmantoo Group tip to the Nairne

pyrite Boestaitiony is ontlined. The facies variations of these secliments ate de-

Scriupen,

(a) History

Metamorphosed Cambrian sediments, now known as the Kanmantoo Group,

form the extreme eastern flank of the Mt. Lofty Ranges. Until some seven years

ago there was much doubt as to the age of these sediments, and the opiaion was

held by many geologists that they were cither Archaean or Late Proterozoic.

This was due mainly to inadequate regional mapping. Harlier, Madigan (1925)

had assigned a Cambrian age to these sediments farther south on the Fleurieu

Peninsula, where the metamorphic grade is Jow. ;

Systematic mapping of the region on 1 inch to 1 mile sheets by the Geo-

logical Survey of South Australia led to the publication in 1951 of the Adelaide

Sheet (Sprigg, Whittle and Campana ).

The schistose metascdiments on the eastern side of the Sheet were assigned

ta the “Kanmantoo Series” of (?) Early Palaeozoic age and the contact with

Adelaide System rocks to the west was interpreted as a fault (the Nairne Fault).

A similar interpretation was adopted for the Gawler Shect (1953) and in part

on the Echunga Sheet (1954).

Mapping of the Jervis and Yankalilla Sheets (Campana and Wilson, 1954,

19542) represented a major advance in the understanding of the geology of the

“Mt. Lofty Ranges. This work clearly demonstrated the correlation uf the Ade-

laide System sediments along both flanks of the Archaean core of the Ranges

and the closure of these sediments to the south. The earlier Cambrian correla-

tions of Madigan were confirmed and led toa the proposal by Sprigg und Cam-

pana (1953) to the name “Kanmantow Group” for the cluracteristic marine

“flysch” facies overlying Cumbrian phosphatic slates and limestones. A thick-

ness of the Kanmantoo Group execeding 30,000 feel was recognized on the

Jervis Sheet. This great thickness suggested to Sprigg and Campana that the

upper boundary. of the Kaumantoa Croup may extend inte the Ordovician,

As a result of prelimimary mapping on the Milang Sheet in the Ashbourne-

Mt. Magnificent area, Campana and Horwitz (1956) interpreted the Kunmantoo

* Geological Survey ot South Australis,

+ Published by permissiun of the Director of Mines, South Austrulia.

‘Trans, Roy. Soc. S, Aust. (1959), Vol. 82.

206 K. GC. HORWITZ, B. P. ‘THOMSON anv B, P, WHEE

Group as a transgressive sequence on Ue (?) Cambrian aad older rocks. One

important result of this interpretation was the inference that the eastern bound-

ary of the Adelaide System in the Mt, Charles arez (Adelaide Sheet) and

further north was marked not by a fault (the Nairne Fault) but by an uncon-

formity with the younger Kanmantuo Group. More detailed mapping on the

Milang Sheet later led Horwitz (1958) to the conclusion that both the Kun-

mantoa Group and basal Cambrian were transgressive, viz.i—

“Towards the east a great thickness of detrital socks ave found... . [t is

a deeper geosynclinal Cambrian equivalent and transgressive on the Adelaide

System. In this region, changes of facies also affect the Adelaide System.”

Unpublished mapping by Coats on the Truro Shect demonstrated that the

basal Cambrian (Angaston and Stockwell marbles) and overlying Kanmiuntoo

sediments were best interpreted to be transgressive on the Adelaide System.

Kleeman and Skinner (1958) do not accept the evidence for Cambrian trans-

gression un the Adelaide System and prefer to explain their field evidence in the

Struthalbyn-Harrogate region as the result of complex facies changes in the

upper members of the Adelaide System and arbitrarily place the base of the

Kanmuantua Group at the Naimne pyrite formation, stratigraphically well above

the base of the Kanmantoe Group as established by the Geological Survey.

Honwvitz commenced feld work on the Milane Sheet in 1954, initially under

the direction of Caropana. Horwitz subsequently mapped on this Sheet the

stratigraphy and facies variations of the Adelaide System and the basal Cam-

brian sediments and lawer members of the Kunmantoo Group and thereby was

able ty recognize an unconformity between Precambrian and Cambrian sedi-

ments.

In 1958 Webb mapped the Mt. Charles area (Adelaide Sheet), This map-

ping ¢stablished relationships between the Adelaide System and basal Cambrian

sediments. which can only be satisfactorily explained as an unconformity,

Thomsun in Jate [987 eommeneced a study of the stratigraphy of the Kan-

mantoo Group on the Milung Sheet and extended it north and south on to the

adjoining sheets. This mapping proved that the Nairne pyrite formation, and a

related shaley Facies extended sonth from Macclesfield to the Southern Ocean

near Victor Harbor (Fnecounter Sheet). The thick arkose formation below the

Nairne pyrite formation was also found by Thomson to be one of the persistent

tnajoy units in the whole of the exposed Kunmantoo Group on the mainland.

All three writers have examined together numerous sections of the Marinoan

and Lower Cambrian on the Echunyga and adjoining sheets.

The recent mapping of the Kanmantoo Group on the Milang and Encounter

Sheets was done in collaboration with A. R. Crawford. Valuable and enthu-

siasti¢ assistance was given by University students K. J. Mills, T. BR. Pontifex

and R. CG. Brown,

(b) The Problem of the Base of the Cambrian

Daily (1956) gives an excellent account of this problem as applied to the

Suuth Australian Cambrian generally. Lower Palaeozoic fossils have not yet

been recognized on the eastern side of the Mt. Lofty Ranges. This fact makes

the pusitioning of the hase of the Cambrian in that region a task involving strict

attention in the field to the mapping of stratigraphy, lithology and structure of

the sedimentary units. This work must be extended to a regional seale before

oven fairly reliable conclusions can be drawn, The writers believe that this

stage has now heen reached, Restriction of observations to small local areas

is inadequate and misleading beeause of facies changes in both Cambrian and

CAMBRIAN-PRECAMBRIAN HOLNDARY 207

Precambrian sedimentary units. Anuther fuctur to be cunsidered ts the variation

in grade of regional metamorphism.

The hase of the Cambrian on the western side of the Mt. Lofty Ranges at

Sellick Hill has been taken by Campana and Wilson (1954b) to occur helow

a dominantly limestone sequence, the upper member of which contains Lower

Cambrian fossils including Archacveyatha. Duily (1956, p, 134; Horwitz and

Daily,1955, p. 54) on palaeontological evidence suggests that this approximates to

the base of the Cambrian. The Sellick [ill limestone sequence or its meta-

morphased equivalent is overlain by phosphatic shale. In this paper these two

units will be referred to as the “basal Cambrian”, At Carrickalinga Head on

the Yankalilla Sheet, Campana and Wilson (1954u) found the phosphatic shale

to be overlain by a greywacke-shale sequence which they took to be the basal

member of the Kanmantoo Group, They found this sequence to be preserved

in a structurally complex area on the fervis Sheet to the south where the phos-

phatie beds finally turn north across the axis of the regional anticline and eun-

tinue up the eustern flank to the vicinity of Delamere,

Spricg and Campana (1953), in. dealing with the Kanmantoe Group on the

eastern side of the Ranges, tentatively correlated the Macclesfield marble horizon

with the basal Archaeocyatha Jimestone.

Subsequent mapping on the Milang Sheet lias enabled more previse curre-

lations to be made. Horwitz (1958) mapped a marble similar to that at Maccles-

field in the Fiiniss River Gorge near Mt. Magnificont. This marble overlies u

black phosphatic and pyritie shale which can be reasonably correlated with the

hase] Cambrian phosphatic shale on the Yankalilla and Jervis Sheets where it

overlies the Archaevcyatha limestone, The Finniss River marhle js, therefore, om

the basis of this correlation within the Kanmantoo Group. Similarly, it is be-

lieved that the Macclesfield marble is a member of the Kanmantoo Cronp be-

cause it is stratigraphionlly 2000 feet above the Macclesfield quartzite (Plate 3),

Near Ashbourne this quartzite is immediately overlain by abeut 150 feet of

black pyritic and (?) phosphatic slate, which is here correlated with the phos-

phatié shale at the buse of the Kanmantoo Group. ‘This slate dies ont to the

north of Ashhourne where it either lenses ont ar changes facies to a thin-bedded

greywacke,

In the Ashbourne area, Morwitz (1958) recognized the Hallett Arkose

formation of the Marinoan Series. This observation showed that the underlying

marbles there, previously interpreted as (7?) Cambrian (Campana and Horwitz,

1958) helonged to the Hrighton Limestone formation of the Sturtian Series,

These findings narvawed considerably the problem of locuting the base

of the Cambrian in this region and at the same time presented strong, evidence

fir 1 Cambrian (pre-Kanmantoo Group) transgression on the Adclaide System

rocks.

Since the uceessirily generalized definition of the Kanmanton Group by

Sprige and Campana (1953), many geologists have tended to associate “prey-

wucke facies” solely with the Kanmantoo Group. Iorwitz (1958), however,

has found in the Bull Creek-Ashbourne area that a restricted greywacke facies

occurs in association with the Marinuan Hallett Arkose and also localiv deeper

in the Proterozoic seyuunce, This is generally in contrast to the Proterozoic

facies on the western funk of the regional anticlinorium.

The interpretation of Kleeman and Skinner (1958), however, represents

aun extreme development of this concept. By shifting the base of the Kan-

mintoo Group upwards to the base of the Nairne pyrite formation, and Includ-

iny the underlying arkose and greywacke sequence in the Adelaide System, they

208 fh. GC. HORWITZ. B. PL THOMSON ann B. 1 WEBB

have made stratigraphic correlations which are not compatible with field evi-

dence for the region,

(¢) The Scope of the Paper

In this paper an attempt is made ty locate the base of the Cambriai sedi-

ments in the region between Mt. Magnificent (Milang Sheet) and Mt, Charles

Kast (Adelaide Sheet), a distance of about 84 miles. "The purpose of this. study

is to provide a basis for fixing the Precambrian-Cambrian boundary for the

future publication of the Barker and Adelaide Sheets of the 4-mile series af

Geological Atlas of South Australia, The emphasis has been on lithological aud

stratigraphic observations. The interesting structural details, which are readily

available in the field, are described unly in so far as they have a bearing on

the solution of local stratigraphical problems. No atteampt is made here to deal

fully with the variations in metamorphic grade which show a general increase

fam south-west to north-east. The original sedimentary character of the rucks

at the northern end of the area are in many cases still readily recognizable in

the field, Very useful aid has been given. particularly in the classification of

some of these rocks, by petrographic studies carried out in the Mines Depart-

eeend labortirien both personally by and under the direction of A, W. G.

Whittle.

It, CROLOGICAL EVIDENCE

(a) General Lithology, the “Kenmantoo Facies” and

“Adelaide System Facies”

The much abused term “greywacke” has been loosely adopted by many

Suuth Australian geologists as synouymous with the Kanmantoo Group rocks.

Greywackes (as defined by Pettijohn in 1957) appear to be most abundantly

developed in the Kanmantoo Group rocks immediately above the Nairne pyrite

formation. Below this formation, exclusive of thin, ine-grained phyllites mem-

hers, there are local greywacke units und a variety of sediments covering a

range of grain size and composition from sub-greywacke to arkose. Similar

compositions have been found by Forbes (1957) for his Strangway Hill Beds,

Inman Hill Formation and Brewnhill Beds in the Grey Spur region which lies

in the south-western portion of the Milang Sheet and extends on tu the En-

counter Sheet. All these beds have subsequently been demonstrated to belong

ta the Kanmantoo Group,

These sediments have a variety of field characteristics which may be sutm-

marized as Follows:

(i) Culour, Drab grey on weathered surface. Often finely mottled by dlis-

seminated ferramagnesian minerals,

(ii) Texture. Dlomogeneous and granular texture is a feature of thick-

bedded members. When struck with u pick these rocks do not generally frac-

ture readily, due to the “woody” character of the rock structure. This “woody”

character is presumably due to the binding wbility of the fine-grained matrix in

which the detrital grains are set. On weathered surfaces the outer layer of the

rock may be slightly friable. particularly if close to the Tertiary laterite level.

(iii) Outerop Shape. Generally, shapes are rounded to sub-rounded, de-

pending un grain size, silice content and degree of cleavage or schistosity de-

veloped,

TRocks of the Kanmantoo Croup are generally of the above type, but, in the

area dealt with in this paper, local horizons and lenses of sediments with similar

characteristics occur thronghout the Adelaide System, In this paper the term

“Kanmanton facies” is ased to include all such rock types. Such occurrences in

Wairne pyrite formation

Arkase

ea* s50'

Greywacke

Marble (Macclestield & finniss River)

Greywacke & slsve

+ SRM Chae

CAMBRIAN

Morble & cate silicate tenses

uv)

Phuyllite & greywache

Lenticular quartzite &cale silicate lenses

UNCONFORMITY (in North £ South of area)

Slate, minor guarizive &

greywacke af tog

Gritty pebblyarkose & guartzife

Brighton Limestone

Slate BRN ae Miedoch bil)

My HA MS 7.

Sturt Trltite MAL

- 4

Quartzifes He

—-

BS"00'

(PROTEROZOIC)

ADELAIDE SYSTEM

ARCHAEAN| |TORRENSIAN | STURTIAN |MARINOAN

Predominantly siltstones

Conglomerate & sandstone

UNCONFORMITY

aan

Schist, gress, pegmatite

bcale sificate

Mapped gedlagical boundary .------~- -~~-~- ------ —

Boundary drawn trom local trends ~....--+-+----- ~~~ 7

lniferred boundary —.--.----------+-------+--+---= 9 *+-----

Ry 7

bey

GAWLER | EAS EQS . ies ee 5

»,

Carrickalinga Head JF

e ne

35'10'

Sheets magped fine unpublished) .. TRURO

Aarantad GYOUD - 22.01. -.22 6.2. EL

\eh

Location of columnar sections SHOWN | «

Mn Frate M1 oo.

“

OL Ae}

rslem Hill

fast 35'(5'

STRATHALBYN

I36"55

GEOLOGICAL MAP

PORTION OF EASTERN MT.LOFTY RANGES BETWEEN

Cy ees MT. CHARLES & MT. MAGNIFICENT

=NLARGEMENT| SHOWING CAMBRIAN- PRECAMBRIAN STRATIGRAPHY

So 2 3 5

MILES

Conpiled trom bee Survey S.A. /imile series geological maps, and later magpirg

4y #0 Horwitz, 8 F Thomsen & BP Webb.

CAMBRTAN-PRECAMBRIAN BOUNDARY 2)

Proterozoic time heralded the general change Eo unsorted sediments, which de-

veluped in the vicinity of the Mt. Lofty Ranges and extended an unknown

distance to the east in Cambrian time.

The normal “Adelaide System facies” can he considered t6 occur in the type

seotions near Adelaide (Mawson and Sprigg, 195(})-

Pelitic rocks form the greatest proportion of the whale Adelaide System

seqynence on the castern side of the Ranges. This ix clearly illustrated by the

great thickness of approximately 20,000 fect of slate and siltstone in a total

thickness of 31,700 feet as shown in the legend of the Adelaide Sheet, although

it is now believed that more detailed mapping and structural interpretation will

considerably reduce these figures.

The thickness of 10,000(+-) feet for the Adelaide System shown in Plate IT

has heen largely determined on the eastern side of the anticlinorium om the

Milang Sheet. “This agrees with recent measurements on the Echunga and

Adelaide Sheets for Sturtian and Mavinoun Series, Other features of the “Ade-

laide System fucies”, apart from the tillites, arkose and dolomites, are the hard,

white quartzites with 75 per cent, or more quartz, associated with the Stonyfell

Quartzite, the Sturt Tillite and the Hallett Arkose. Apart from the Mt. Barkey-

Macclesfield quartzite and lower minor members such quartaites do not occur

in the Cambrian. ‘

It is in the Marinoan that the “Kanmantoo tacies” und the “Adelaide System

facies” overlap and intertungue to the greatest extent,

(bh) Stratigraphy

The generalized stratigraphy of the region is outlined on Plate 1,

(1) Archaean

Campana and Wilson {1954b) describe these rocks on the Yankalilla and

Jervis Sheets as schists, gneisses and stressed granites. Gneisses range from

quartz-mica to sillimanite-garnet gneisses. Basic dvkes and pegmatites, in part

pussibly of Proterozoic or Palaeozoic age, are also present.

Strong schistosity is developed in the metasediments und in places in the

besal beds of the Adelaide System. ‘he metamorphic grade of the Archiean

is generally much higher than the Proterozoic and Cambrian rocks, but has

been to a large extent obscured by retrugrade changes caused by Palaeazoic and

earlier folding and shearing.

(2) Proterozoic: Adelaide System

The Proterozoic succession in the southern part of the Mt. Lofty Ranges

on the Fleuricu Peninsula shows some interesting facies variations. As previ-

ously recorded by Sprigg, Whittle and Campana (1951), rucks to the west of

the Archacan core differ in facies from those to the east. Despite these facies

Variitions some good marker beds persist on both flanks of this structure (Mt.

Lafty Anticlinorium of Campana, 1955a). The succession can he summarised

as follows—further detuils being shown on Plate TL ;

(i) Torrensian. The lowest members are the Basal Crits and Conglomer-

ates (Howchin, 1906) or the Aldgate Sandstone (Mawson and Sprigg, 1950).

This formation vanes in thickness from 200 to 700 feet. Boulders are usually

present at the base. The basal formation is overlain, on both limbs of the anti-

clitiurium by a sequence, less than 4000 feet thick, in which siltstones or their

metamorphic equivalents (phyllitic siltstones or siliceous schists) predominate.

_ There is, however, a difference, for on the eastern side of the Archaean core

bands of greywacke are interhedded with the siltstones. Al] of these sediments

ure correlated with the Torrensian Series, ‘The wpper limit had already heen

chosen as such on tle published sheets.

210 Rf. C, HORWITZ, B. P, THOMSON anv B. P. WEBB

These sediments persist to the northern limit of the area here described, ta

the north and west of Mt. Charles where the metamorphic grade has converted

them to quartzite-sericite-muscovite schists. Here, one specimen examined by

PLATE It

PROTEROZOIC—CAMBRIAN SUCCESSIONS

SOUTHERN MTLOFTY RANGES

WEST OF MT COMPASS EASTERN SIDE OF Mt LOFTY RANGES

(AFTER F.C HORWITZ \958) BETWEEN MFCHARLES & MT MAGNIFICENT

meseY Base ot Marne gyre Rarrenation

| Grass-devtled ardor, Bcc graynwote

Thinbedied gremsihe aint kite

Atsowestiatc! wmenbie

Beaver! crates ond silstones with

lranerenonts 8 ptogehates analy

Limentone Arivttoctpea tha Aimeniare |

Cea eden Meggy titetnads Besdly |

pee Fied vi Surya, — 1

CAMBRIAN

Pyrite, phosphatic a graphiti shite

ME Barker—Maccles Pele guarteite

Aardle & calesivcate lenses

Phylites arid grepaache

leggy harestane saherdeazed arit

Walersasing with quentzifep

orecderdod Sepilivorcus witesees,

KANMANTOO GROUP

z2 precise witiaty eng Cele-siticate tenses and

Se Dares SEY PONIES. -—| Ce eatissse- gunirieite & sardvane,

BR] (testes, pebon bere ga [eearenigy dasha Lereres

[Cinevebie A feriencing pyarsfter pres ‘ M Thin quartzite bends

[tie Beauy ators dann, eberokehy = “veetagrerphpiives satwrdeavled end

SAPOfORES, gaa pUrBhY Sealer aie asing with gepwaches

er dedses! gritty ouhiny arose

x Melt dosase watts oevk |

dj martes, nnckote of tilde sot

sity payliifes wilh grepwerte

ebshagongnrs TY

dnterredtotd, gritty, petal orate

bsntts wile lgmunafed seesyareir

sad Shales. Called? Araase

ARINOAN

enthuse: mennive aed Mbpgy

Himestage, watt aad gala tig m7

Lbarts “Srghton. Lrmasto:

f denbcater, mrosrives Maggy mane,

polite ana dalemirie ip Dante

\ Orighton J imasvare

(RRNA MO CvcCareasy gate

sitstofes acd shafts “lapley

vive Mgfes”

Fite af toa “Star h Biete?

wr iiihde at san, Stuer Filtre”

trfenbecten sitters s guartidtes

near Ask doung, daiditier'

tenses, “Beker Grau”

trpure telspathle silistores,

5 ey otyiites on SCANT s, wiht

washe Seesigomeat 7

Y @erhex.

STURTIAN

tater bedded xirsranet 4 guartetex

dace! grhase of bauidler .

teases. "Belair Craw”

amoure (sispathre siltstones, 490014 joo-200 & "

werbewers welt be Savas of

WAOSE AIT Qs

{ Singé on oouive haces F eriare

an puarizres,

ADELAIDE SYSTEM (PRoTERazoIc)

Cangtormrates Henchan,

Arkese arc’ grits parsing 7S

davtage dea.

, " »

ktgute Samisron (Basal Grit

4, en aie

Aisgule Sarastare (Bera? Grits >

sd Canginmeratas Fawcrlas (seeks

Arkaos af gate with dearer Ae ke

Legs of Bare,

tes UNCONFOAMITY

UNCONFORMITY

p__, ADEE

TORRENSIAN

f 4

Sait grelns, pegrante

Lb | inteth, pnetts, peprietiVe anet | ze Polite

ralcinicare

Whittle was found to have the composition of a greywacke and to contain traces

of sillimanite,

(ii) Sturtian. The Yorrensian Series is overlain by well marked bands of

quartzite (usually three) with boulder beds and coarse arkoses, interbedded with

slate and greywacke lenses.

CAMBARTAN-PRECAMBRIAN BOUNDARY 211

Tillite sometimes overlies these beds. The quartzite and the tillite are cor-

related with the Belair Group and Sturt Tillite of the type section near Adelaide

(Mawson and Sprigg, 1950), These lower beds of the Sturtian are yery con-

stant in facies on the Milang Sheet and on the eastern side of the anticlinorium

measure 1000 feet in thickness. Further north the quartziles decrease in number,

but persist to Mt. Charles East, where they are terminated by the Cambrian

mncontormily. Howchin (1929) recurds tillite in the upper members in the

vicinity of Mt. Barker township.

Overlying these lower Torrensiun beds is a comstant succession, 2000 feet

in thickness, of laminated siltstones and shales with limesteme hands and lenses

tawards the top. These sedituents, which are yaluable markers, ave correlated

with the Tapley Hill Slates of the type aren, Near the base of this sequence the

slates are blueish in colour and show traces of pyrite. In a similar stratigraphic

position, immediately south of Mt, Charles, a low gerade schist was fering, by

Whittle tu have a typical greywacke eoniposition.

Local marble lenses are interbedded with the Tapley Ifill Slates which

themselves are alsu Tucully culeareous, In the northern part of the area these

beds are represented by Aagyy cule-silicate rocks. The Sturtian Series ends with

the Brighton Limestone, represented by a white marble, which persists along the

strike for [ene to five miles in places, and may reach a thickness of over 100 feet.

(iii) Aferringen. ‘The lowest beds of the Marinoun Series are arkosic sand-

stones, interbedded with silky phyllite, greywacke, gritty and pebbly arkuse

(Hallett Arkose) aud gritty marble. These arkosie beds are locally lenticular,

but combine to form a well-defined and easily recognisable unit reaching a

thickness of over 2000 feet. In the northern part of the area in the vicinity of

Murdock Ifill cale-silicate horizons develop at the top of the sequence anil are

apparently Huncated at the unconformity hy the overlying Cambrian sediments.

Of interest are the local pockets or tillite occurring with arkoses and greywacke

in the vicinity of Mt. Barker Creck (Howchin, 1929) and near Bull Greek

(Ticrwitz, 1958 ).

The upper sequence of the Marinoan Series is finer grained and is noticeably

phyllitic throughout the region. Andalusite-staurolite schists develop in this

whit to the north, “Che thickness varies from 1000 te 2400 feet, the maximum

thickness being observed in the vicinity of Macclesfield (see Plate III). At the

top of these beds, near Bull Creek, quartzite members, gencrally not exceeding

one foot in thickness, occur and are interlensed with phyllite and fine-gruined

preywacke. These quartaites disappear to the north and are here provisionally

interpreted as the thin eastern) extension of the Pound Quartzile, a facies de-

veloped very extensively towards the north-west of this regiun. [t is also possibly

present on the western side of the anticlinorium as thicker sandy seyuences that

occur extensively at the top of the Marinoan (see Plate 11),

(3) Basal Cambrian

(i) Mt. Magnificent-Ashhourne Area, Since it ts i this area that the

starting point for the Cambrian correlation by Hie region under discussion is

assnmed, it will be discussed in some detail,

Phosphatic slate and underlying marble lenses which we correlate with hasal

Cambrian sediments are exposed in the hed of the Finniss River. This sequence

continues north for three miles where it changes to fine-grained phyllitic grey-

wacke Which is folded in a tight syncliné-anticline structure. The sreywacke

overlaps uncunformably the underlying Sturtian quartzites which being more

rigid were deformed by imbricate thrusting during the major folding process.

A north-east striking feult near McHarg’s Creek is developed on the un-

conformity and the “Kanmantoo arkose facies” is there in contact with Marinoan

R. €. HORWITZ, B. P. THOMSON anv B. P. WEBB

LOUIE of Bf

ee tie a ——_—— | UP

dd gosh cone cone copl 9 oeuluzays AINYNOGHSVY

SSONVY ALJOTIW NYSLSVS eS] — f.

SNOLLY T3YxOD DIHdVHSILVYELS TWIS WHNOZOH S . LNADIINDYA LAN

OTAlSSIIDOVIN \ {

SSTYVHD iN

40 HLNOS W33YD

S8\tW 2| HaMyVE iW

ALINYOSNGINY

SVONV Y3Ald

us N

ALINHOANG ONT Semprren

oe ea

pan van fh CE at Sacer Se

A LIWHOINOSNN

~ PS iZLevno

HLS DY PY RO

“

a Syke

tt pee

~layEem Asay

aqgyVN—__

a1g14ea DS vN

Spanien

PADSI- SCAR A

NF j

LACES

irons

th Salve

CAMBRIAN-PRECAMBRIAN, BOUNDARY 213

sediments. A dark phyllite, possibly equivalent to the phosphatic slate, cmerges

frum the fault contact and is exposed in a syncline one and a half miles north-

vast of McHarg’s Creek.

Overlying the phyllites ave fine-grained greywackes which become courser

in grain size until the sequence is represented by coarse crass-bedded urkuse.

The eastern limb of the syncline is sheared out to the sauth and develops

into.» steeply dipping north-south stretchhrust. To the east of the thrust the

structural setting is even more complex, Isolated exposures of black pyritic

slate occur overlying thin (2) Cambrian quartzite west of the main road. This

slite is believed to be the equivalent of the Mt. Magnificent phosphatic and

yyritic slate. On the main roud, one mile north of Ashbourne, the black slate

is well exposed in a deep cutting, where it is folded into a tight anticline with

a quartzite core, The slate is repeated in a suecession of steep plunging anti-

dlines which are disposed in an en eehelon pattern to the south and finally plunge

below the arkose of the Kanmantoo Group near Ashbourne. The slate finally

emerges from this anticlinal environment as an cast facing limb and persists

for one and a half miles north of the main road cutting, where it is underlain by

the Macclesfield quartzite as described above.

(ii) The “Basal Quartzsite’, Nerthwards from the main road cutting the

heds underlying the Macclesfield quartzite diverge in stike to the west and

greywackes und interbedded slates appear in the sequence. The sequence ap-

pears to be continudus down tea lentionlar quartzitic unit which is well expused

in vuterop at Bull Knob Trig. Below this quartzite, which is provisionally re-

ferred to as the “hasal quartzite”, typical Marinoan phyllites appear, The quartz-

ite and related sandstones can he followed intermittently to the north around

the Macclestield syncline. Abuut one mile cast of Macclesficld the “basal quartz-

ite" is exposed in the nose of the Strathalbyn anticline which al this point planges

gently south below andalusite schists containing minor ereywacke bands. The

unit reappears one and one-third miles south as massive quartzite in a domal

structure, the result of a pitch reversal, Local cale-silicate minerals aré here

developed at the base of the quartvite. The quartzite can be followed for

alamt one mile north along the castern limb of the Strathalbyn anticline where

it gradually changes facies to a massive greywacke. The greywacke in turn

hecomes increasingly phyllitic in character like the underlying Marinoan sedi-

ments and it cannot be located with certainity in the field at the latitude of Bugle

Ranges. Structural evidence shows that the stratigraphic position of the basal

member is loeated approximately midway between the Hallett Arkuse to

the west and the Mt. Barker quartzite to the east. At this stratigraphic

level one mile east of Wistow, greywackes reappear, and continue north to the

Mt. Barker Creck. Tere a well defined greywacke and quarizite sequence is

exposed which continues with interbedded phyllites up to the persistent cale-

silicate bed at the base of the Mt. Barker quartzite. Quarizite, massive crey-

wacke and arkose continue to one mile north of Naiene, Further nurth the

formations thin gradually and converge in strike. The “basal quartzite” is re-

Presented hy discontinueus lenses of white quartzite assaciated with lenses of

diopside granulite rocks. These rack units persistently maintain a northerly

strike to the northern edge of the area, in contvast to the general east-west

strike of the Adelaide System rocks to the west.

(iii) The Macelesfield-Mt. Barker Quartzites. Massive quartzite is ex-

posed about une mile north-west of Macclesfield where it reaches 1000 feet in

thickuess. If can he followed south-west to the northern boundary of the Milang

Sheet as descrlhed above. This formation lenses out or intertongues with grey-

wackes one und a half miles south-vast of Macelesfield, on the eastern limbs of

PLATE iv

tbh bb bee ene ott

foe degeret seo piste t

3 3

& FS

CAMBRIAN-PRECAMBRIAN BOUNDARY 215

the Macclesfield syocline. Tectonic thinning appears to have contributed in

part te the disappearance of the quartzite. Tle greywackes at this stratigraphic

level cantinne séuth and enter the complex folds that are part of the major

struchye cumprising the Strathalbyn anticline. A massive quartzite outcrops

tw anda half miles south-cast of Macclesfield, Analysis of the stricture shows

that this quartzite approximates closely the stratigraphic level uf the Maccles-

Reld quartvite.

The roussive quartzite can be followed north fur fifteen miles to the northern

boundary of the Echunga Sheet where it forms the Mt, Barker ridge. On the

Adelaide Sheet the quartzite is concealed by younger sediments south of Mue-

deck Hill, Lenticular quartzites outcrop north-east of this point und the strikes

gently converge to the north. In Inverbrachie Creek the mast casterly

quartzite has been taken to represent the Mt. Barker quartzite horizon. This

formation is associated with cale-silicate lenses which may be correlated with

the diopside granulite exposed in Mt. Barker Creck at the hase of the Mt.

Barker quartzite, This calcareous metasediment can be followed inter-

mittently fo the south for five miles, We believe that it fs an echo oF the

more vigorous limestone sedimentation af the basal Cumbrian in the Sellick

Hill region. Considerable support is given to this interpretation trom the regional

geology to the north of Mt. Charles. A thick marble horizon, which underlies

greywackes, occurs three-quarters of & mile cast of Mt, Torrens. On the Gawler

Sheet marbles also occur west of Mt. Kitchener, The thick marble sequence in

the basal Cambrian on the Kaponda and Truro Sheets indicates a carbonate

sequence vomparable in thickness with the Sellick Hill urea.

(4) The Kanmantoo Group

By definition the Kanmantoo Group commences at the top uf the basal

Cambrian phosphatic slate. Good sections are obtained in the Finniss River

east of Mt. Magnificent and in the vicinity of Ashhourne (see Plate IIL). Here

the lowest beds are lenticular massive greywackes interbedded and intertungne-

ing with phyllites, the latter increasing in proportion in the ascending sequence.

At 1200 feet above the bise is the white marble lens of the Finniss River. At

2300 feet above the base, thick cross-bedded arkoxe suddenly appears in the

sequence. The contaet with underlying phyllites can be readily mapped to the

yerth and south. In the Ashbourne section the same arkose appears al 1200

fect above the base, and is here 3000 feet thick.

North of Ashbourne the base of the Kanmantoo has been taken at

top of the Macclesfield quartzite, although the precise location is proh-

ably several hundred feet above this level. In the Macclesfield section (Plate

Ifl, section 3) phyllites and greywackes extend for about 3300 feet above the

quartzite and inchide the marble member which is approximately 200 feet thick.

This marble may he contempsraneous with the Finniss River marble and also

with a cale-silicate horizon reported by Kleeman (personal communication)

one and a quarter miles north-east of Mt. Charles East. ‘The arkose formation

in the Macclesfleid section is only 1600 feet thick. The proportien and thick-

ness of the coarse arknse facies increases to the north until it occupies all the

stratigraphic column between the Nairne pyrite formation and the Macclos-

field-Mt, Barker quartzites as seen in the urea between sections 4 and 6 on

Plate [In section 5 the basal Kanmantoo sequence is thin-bedded atkose and

phyllite. The typical coarse cross-bedded arkose docs nat appear until 1200

feet above the base. The finer-grained facies appears to lens ont completely

to the south and in a larye degree to the north. The thickness of the Kanmantoo

Group sequence helow the Nairne pyrite formation varies from 4400 to 5200

gio RK. 0. HOBRWITE, Bo. THOMSON axp TP, WEB

feet between sections 1 and 5. In these sections the coarse arkuse Varies from

1600 to 4700 feet. This range of thickness can only be satisfactorily explained

as the result of facies vurtelions within the sediments (as indicated on Plate L11).

‘The 10,000 feet thickness uf coarse arkose in section 6 and 10,000(—) fect

in section 1 can be attributed largely to original sedimentary thickening, This

is shown by the divergence of strike lines north-east of Murdock Till.

(ce) Structure

(1) Sedimentary Struefures

Minor sedimentary structures such as slump bedding sre found in 4 few

places in the greywacke facies of the Marinoun Series as also are fine scale

eross-beddiny and graded-bedding.

fn the coarse arkose of the Kanmantoo Gronp both shimping and erass-

bedding are developed in some localities on a large scale. Beds up to three

feet in thickness may show intense slump folds and cross-hedding has an am-

plitude of up to four feet between topset and bottomsct beds.

The most spectacular large-scale sedimentary structure is in the vicinity ut

McHare's Creek near Ashbourne where a north-east contact between cast-

north-east trending Matinoan sediments and north-sonth trending Kanmantoo

arkose marks approximately the boundary of a zone of rapid thickening in the

arkose possibly related to a fault line which was. active during sedimentation.

The geometry of the structure demonstrates that the hinge linc, formed by

intersection uf hedding planes with the plane of the contact, plunges steeply

south-east and that the present surface in this locality represents a section of

the Gambrian basin, The contact has been the locus for later local Laulting-

(2) Tectonic Structures

In the Mt. Magnificent-Ashbomne area the tectonic structures have their

strongest development. East of Mt. Mugnificent the incompetent Lower Cam-

brian sediments are lightly folded and strongly sheared between the Adelaide

System quartzite and the Archacau core to the west, and the resistant block of

coarse Kanmantoo Group arkose to the east, The arkose block has also been

theust against the underlying unconformity with the Adelaide System. Near

Ashbourne, the right-handed en echelon of domes of basal Cambrian, although

Jocally overtummed in plunge, represents in miniature the regional pattern of

folding. This is consistent with the zig-zag and elliptical patterns of en echelon

folding described by Campbell (1955), The en echelon pattern is repeated

along the axis of the Strathalbyn anticline which is a composite structure made

up of numerous individual anticlines, Thesco structures, however, are not us

tight as those in the Ashbourne area,

The en echelon pattern is preserved on the Adelaide Sheet in the Me.

Charles area where the unconformity traces in plan 4 sinuous course reflecting

the Paleozoic folding. The individual folds in the thickened Kammantoo Group

to the east appear ta dic out as they approach the unconformity, whereas the

folds to the west in the Adelaide System appear to plunge beluw it, The pattern

aud degree of folding established in the Adelaide System priur ta Cambrian

sedimentation is difienlt to establish, We believe that it was most probably

monoclinal in character. ;

TV. CONCLUSION

(a) Valiclity of Stratigraphic Correlations

In the absence so far of fossil and isotope dating evidence for inferring a

Cumbrian age for the sediments in the area dealt with in this paper, the wrilers

have aecepted the lithological and structural evidence. An important key luri-

CAMBRIAN-PRECAMBRIAN BOUNDARY 217

zun is the phosphatic slate of the Mt. Magnificent area, Evidence for accepting

this as a member of the basal Cambrian is as follows:

(i) Considering the evidence in section. At aboat ten miles west of Mt.

Mugnificent in the Sellick [ill area. on the western side of the Mt, Lofty Anti-

clinorium, the Lower Cambrian calcarequs sequence is overlain by the phos-

platic shale horizon, A lithologically similar sequence, facing east, is ubserved

eust of the Mt. Magnificent quartzite, whieh is iiterpreted as marking an un-

conformity in this area, the limestone being restricted to small lenses at the

incontermity,

(ii) Considering the evidence in plan. ‘The cross-hedded Kanmantno

irkose has been followed south by une of us (B.P.T.) on to the Yankalilla ane

Jervis Sheets, where in the vicinity of Delamere, phosphatic slate and marhle

appear at approximately the same stratigraphic interval below the arkose as they

do at Mt. Magnifleent. From this point the succession can be followed with

minor interruptions to the Scllick Hill locality. Ficld evidence north uf the

Adelaide Sheet has already been discussed (see “Basal Cambrian” above). The

writers believe therefore that the most reasonable interpretation of the evidence

now available is to inelude the ML. Maynifivent slate aud marble in the basal

Cambrian,

The dating of the “basal quartzite” as lower Cambrian in the area between

Ashbourne and Mt. Charles hus been intuenced by the discovery of a gritty

arkose (Horwitz, 195%) at the base of the Cambrian sequence an the Milang

Sheet north-vast of Sellick [Gl This arkose would imply a hiatus and chance

in condition of sedimentation in this area towards the end of Pound Quartzite

time and possibly into the earliest Cambrian, We correlate this change and

possible disconformity with the folding and erosion of the Adelaide Syste)

which took place farther east during this time interval, The possibility remains

that the Macclesfield-Mt. Barker quartzite represents the equivalent of the

Pound or ABC Range Quartzitc, The writers consider this unlikely and assume

that the uncontormities exposed at Ashbourne and Mt. Charles are the result

uf contemporancous transgression.

(b) Tectonic History

The tectonic history, commencing with the Upper Proterozeiv, is summur-

ized as follows:

(1) Deposition of Torrensian sediments on Archaean.

(2) Sturtian and Marinean sedimentation and continued slight variations in

stability in the region.

(3) Local uplift and erosion of the Adelaide System in the Mt, Lufty Runges

revion at the close of Marinvan time; probably due to positive movernernt

of the Archaean core. Sedimentation continuous la the east during this

period.

(4) Transgression of Cambrian on the eroded and folded Adelaide System

platform. relative increase in the rate of sedimentation to east and west

of the present Mt. Lofty Anticlinorium.

(5) Sedimentation of the Kanmantoo Group marked by the intermittent but

relatively rapid subsidence over eroded areas of the Adelaide System.

(6) Pre-Pernian Palaeozoic orogeny; deep folding of the Adelaide System; meta-

morphism of the Kanmantoo Group and the castern zone of the Adelaide

System sediments; granite intrusions; positive movement of the Archaea

basement.

(7) Prolonged erosion of Pre-Permian mountain terrain and associated arching,

warping and faulting with the formation of localized younger sedimentary

218 Kk, GC. HORWITZ, B. P. THOMSON anu B, P. WERRB

basins and continental areas, These phenomena are still active and wre

responsible for the present physiography of the region,

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The authors express their gratitude to Mr, T, A. Barnes, Director of Mines,

and Mr. L. W. Parkin, Depnty-Director of Mines, for granting permission to

publish and prepare this paper. They are very grateful to Mrs. BE. N. Teesdule-

Smith for carefully checking the M.S. and to Mr. Peter J. Brown and Mr, Bruce

Thomas for their drafting of the plates.

REFERENCES

Camenenn, J. D., 1958, Hi echelon Folding, Econ, Geol., 53 (4), pp. 448-472.

Campana, B., 1953. Geological Atlas of South Australia, Sheet Gawler. Geol. Suev, S. Aust,

Castpana, B., 1955. The Ceology of thy Gawler Military Sheet, Rep, Invest. Geol. Surv,

S, Aust., 4, 24 pp.

Campana, B, 1955a. The Structure of the Eastern South Australian Rariges. The Afount

Lofty-Olary Are. J. Geol. Soe. Aust., 2, pp. 47-61.

Campana, B., 1958, The Mt. Lofty-Olary Region and Kangaroo Island, being Chapter T of

“The Geology of South Australia”, by M. F, Glaessner and L, W. Parkin (Ed.). J. Ceol.

Soo. Aust, 5 (2), pp. 3-27,

Campana, Bi, and Horwirz, R., 1956. The Kammunten Group of South Australia Considered

as a Transgressive Sequonce, Aust, J. Sei, 18 (4), pp, 128-129,

Campana, B., and Wirson, B., 1954. Geological Atlas of South Australia, Sheet Jervis. Geol.

Surv. 5. Ast.

Campana 3i., and Witson, B,, L85da. Ceologleal Athi of South Australia, Sheet Yankalilla.

Geol. Sury. 8. Aust.

Camrana, B., and Winsen, By 1954b, ‘Whe Geology of the Jervis and Yankalilla Military

Sheets. Rep. Invest. Geol. Surv. S. Anst,, 3, 26 pp,

Coats. A, P., and THomsow, B, P,, L958. Geological Atlas of South Australia, Shect Truro.

Geol. Surv. S. Aust, in press.

Dany, B., 1956 The Cambrian in South Australia, EL Sistema Cumbrico, su Palaeogen-

grafia_y el Problema de su Base. Part 1 20th Tntetnat, Geol. Cougress, Mexico, pp-

91-147.

Dicgmson, S, B., and Coats, BR, Pi, $957, Geological Atlas of Sonth Australia, Sheet

Kajpiinda. Geol. Surv. S. Aust.

Fores, B. G., 1957. Stratigraphic Seeeession East of Crey Sonr, South Australia, ‘Trans.

Roy. Soa, &. Aust, 80, pp. 39-66.

Horwitz, R., 1956, Geologie de la Region de Mt. Coripuss, Australie meridionale. D» es Se,

Thesis, Unity. of Lausanne. Unpublishix!,

Hoawirz, R., and Daizy, B.. 1958. Yorke Peninsula, heiny Chapter IT of the “The Geolngy

of gene fasbealia by ML FE. Glaessoer aud L. W. Parkin (Ed.). J. Geol. Soe. Aust., 5

(2). pp. -60. ; .

Hoawitz, R., and THomson, B, P,, 1958, Geological Adas of South Australia, Sheet Milany.

Geol. Surv. 8, Aust, in press.

Towcun, W., 1906. The Geology of the Mount Lofty Ranges. Dart I. Trans. toy. sae

S. Aust,, 30, pp. 227-262.

Howcum, W., 1929. On the Probable Ovcurrence of the Sturtian Tillite near Nairne and

Mount Barker. Trans, Koy, Soc. $8, Aust,, 53, pp. 27-32.

Kieeman, A. W., and Ssinnen, B, J., 1959. The Kanmantoo Group in the Strathalbyn-

Harrogate Region, South Australia. ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. &. Aust., 82, pp. 61-71

Manican, ©. T., 1925. The Geology of the Fleurieu Peninsula, Part The Goast from

Sellick Hill to Victor Harbor. Trans. Roy. Suc. S. Aust., 49, pp. 198-212.

Mawson, D., and Spricc, R. C,, 1950. Subdivision of the Adelaide Systum, Aust. J. Svi.,

13 (3), pp. 69-72.

Perryoun, F. J., 1957. Sedimentary Rocks, 2nd ed. N.Y., Harper, 1957. 715 pp.

Space, R. C., and Camrana, B., 1953. The Age and Facies of the Kanmuntov Group. Aust,

J. Sci., 16 (1), pp, 12-14.

Semoc, H.C, Wurirren, A. W. G., and Campana, B., £951. Guological Atlas of South Aus

tralia, Sheet Adelaide, Geol. Surv, S. Aust.

Semce, A. C., and Watson, B., 1954. Geologieal Atlas of Sonth Australia, Sheat Kchuaga

Geol. Surv. S. Aust.

Trontson, B. P., and Crawrorn, A. H., 1958. Geological Atlas of South Australia, Sheet

Encounter. Geol. Surv, S. Aust,, unpublished,

A WIDESPREAD PLIOCENE MOLLUSCAN FAUNA WITH

ANODONTIA IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

BY N. H. LUDBROOK

Summary

A shallow water molluscan fauna with large pelecypods including Anodontia sphericula (Basedow)

is described from transgressive Pliocene sediments occurring from Fishery Bay on Eyre Peninsula

to Moorlands in the Murray Basin.

A WIDESPREAD PLIOCENE MOLLUSCAN FAUNA WITH

ANODONTIA IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

by N. H. Lupsroox*

[Read 11 September 1958]

SUMMARY

A shallow water molluseun fanna with large pelecypods including Ana-

dontia sphéricula (Basedow) is described trom transgressive Pliocene sediments

occurring from Fishery Bay on Eyre Peninsula to Moorlands in the Murray Basin.

INTRODUCTION

At widely separated localities in South Australia, thin, apparently syn-

chronous Pliocene limestones and sandstones carry a fauna characterized by an

abundance of large pelecypods. The most conspicuous and interesting is a large

globular shell the size of a flattened tennis hall, casts of which readily weather

out. from the limestones. These globular casts have been variously known as

Dosinia greyi Zittel and Meretrix sphericula Basedow, but the adductor impres-

stons ae the pallial line are those of the Lucinidae. The only complete speci-

men so far recovered consists of a pair of valves recorded by Howchin (1936,

p. 7) from the Cowandilla Bore at 470-485 feet. From this specimen it has becn

pogeibie to identify the genus Anoedontia to which Basedow’s species should be

referred,

DISTRIBUTION OF THE FAUNA

The molluscan assemblage has been identified from as far west as Fishery

Bay on southern Eyre Peninsula to Moorlands in the Murray Basin, Many of

the outcrops represent strand lines of the transgressive shallow seas distinguish-

ing this part of the Pliocene. Deposition took place in shallow bays, the abun-

dance of Pectinidae indicating sandy bottoms and of Ostreidae the existence

locally of restricted conditions favourable to the development of thick oyster

beds. Not all oyster beds occurring in the Murray Basin were contemporaneous

with the present fauna. There has been a tendency to regard those of the

western margin of the Basin as belonging to u single unit, but this is not so.

The stratigraphic levels at which oyster beds occur still awaits the result of de-

tailed mapping and examination of the vertical ranges and associated faunis

of the three species which occur in the Loaton Sands and Norwest Bend Forma-

tion — Ostrea hyotidoidea, O. sturtiana, and OQ. arenicola.

Most of the Pliocene outcrops are very thin, seldom exceeding five feet in

thickness, They were deposited in markedly transgressive seas, At both Fisherv

Bay and Moorlands the conglomeratic limestones overlap bedrock, of which

pebbles up to small boulder size are caught up in the limestone. The probable

margins of the sea at this time are indicated in Fig. 1; areas known to have been

inundated are shaded.

® Palacontologist, Department of Mines, South Australia; published with the permission

uf the Director of Mines,

Trans, Roy. Soc. 8, Aust. (1959), Vol. 32.

220 N. H. LUDBROOK

On Eyre Peninsula at Fishery Bay, at the south end of Sleaford Bay, 20

miles south-west of Port Lincoln, basement granite pebbles occur in limestone

with molluscan moulds and casts of Anodontia sphericula, Vasticardium sub-

maculosum, Fulvia tenuicostaia, Miltha hora, Antigona cognaia, Cassis (Hypo-

cassis) salisburyensis, all of which have been identified from casts weathered

from the matrix. This assemblage is represented in the molluscan fauna of the

Dry Creek Sands. The material from Fishery Bay was collected by R. K. Johns.

The occurrence in Deep Creek, Hundred of Poynton, 20 miles south-south-

west of Whyalla, has been described elsewhere (Miles, 1954, p. 25).

‘o

in)

& iwunvaten puRING PLIOCENE.

@ LOCALITIES WITH PLIOCENE FAUNA,

@ DOUBTFULLY GONTEMPORAMEOQUS WITH

PRESENT FAUNA,

Fig. 1—1l. Fishery Bay; 2. Hd. Poynton; 3. Wallaroo; 4, Hd, Moorowie; 5. Giles

Point; 6, Edithburg: 7. Hd. Menzies; 8. Redbanks; 9. Adelaide: 10. Hallett Cove;

11. Aldinga Bay; 12. Tailem Bend; 13. Moorlands; 14. Waikeric.

On Yorke Peninsula, Pliocene sandy limestones outcropping on the coast at

Edithburg and entered in wells west of Edithburg, were described by Basedow

(1901) and correlated with other Pliocene occurrences then regarded as of

Miocene age, From the Edithburg material Dr. Basedow described four mol-

Jusean species including Meretrix sphericula and Campanile iriseriale. Base-

dow’s types and also the type material of Tellina basedowi, which according

to Basedow (1901, p. 148) was deposited in the Museum of the University of

Adelaide, have disappeared.

Recently, Mr. E. J. Carmichael, of Yorketown, has collected assiduously

from the Pliocene on his. property on Section 140, Hundred. of Moorowie, where

the limestone is burned for lime and underground water is obtained at shallow

PLIOCENE FAUNA WITH ANODONTIA 221

depth at the base of the formation where it rests on Permian till, Mr. Car-

michael's interest has greatly helped in replacing some af the Basedow types and

in identifying the extent uf the Plivcene in sou Yorke Peninsula.

At Edithburg itself 3 feet of Pliocene sandy limestune ciivered by 15 feet

of kunkar is exposed at Point de Mole at the foot of the steps leading to the

old bathing pool. Limestone blocks with abundant Chlumys ontiaustralis and

Spondylus spondyloides are strewn at high tide level, From this locality the

neotype of Curdita dennanti was collected by Mr. Carmichacl.

Two miles north of Coobowie at Giles Point, Section 319, Hundred of

Melville, a three-foot oyster bed in sandstone is exposed above high tide level

at the base of low cliffs 27 feet high. Tellina basedowi was re-collected from

this exposure. Associated molluscan species are Ostrea arenicola and Chlamys

(Chlamys) antiaustralis; the foraminifera include Cribrobulimina palystoma,

Triloculina trigonula, Diseorbis dimidiatus, Elphidium adelaidense, LZ, setatum,

“Rotalia’ beccarii, and Marginopore vertebralis. The oyster bed is overlain by

92 feet of mottled clayey sandstune with a gravel bed at the base. This is nsually

considered though not proven to be of Pleistocene age.

From the wall 20 feet below the surface of a well on Section 200, Hundred

of Melville. 14 miles west of Edithburg, A. A. Gibson recently collected a sample

of sandy limestone with Chlamys enticustralis and Chlamys (Equichlamys)

palmipes, This appears to be the well described by Basedow (1901, pp, 146-7),

No Pliocene has been observed north of Giles Point on the eastern side of

Yorke Peninsula although some marginal limestones near Kulpara and Clinton

lithologically resemble the characteristically sandy limestones of the Pliocene.

The limestones at Kulpara and Clinton, however, carry Austrotrilline howehini

and locally Lovenia and Menoastychia, they are of Lower Miocene age.

On the western side of the Peninsula two exposures are known near Wal-

larou, one at Point Hughes 1 mile west-south-vest and a second 2 milés north

of the tewn on Section 925, Hundred uf Wallarna, where Pliocene limestone

with abundant molluscan moulds and casts was formerly quarried for flux for

the smelters, The fauna, identified from latex casts, includes abundant rather

small moulds of Anodontie sphericula and Diastoma provisi, with Cucullaen.

An interesting exposure of the Pliocene occurs on Kangaroo Island. Lime-

stone boulders collected by E, P. O'Driscall on Section 268, Hundred of Men-

zies, 11 miles west of Kingscote, cayry abundant Chlamys antiaustralis in asso-

ciation with Ostrea, mostly juveniles, *? Cardita sp., Barbatia SDs Cueullaca sp.,

Chlamys (Hguichtemy) consobrina and Diastoma provisi. Although no basalt

was actually seen by Mr. O'Driscoll during his. short visit to the locality, the

limestone has been baked by the basalt which occurs to the west of Kingscote,

The fauna is consequently poorly preserved, mainly as casts, moulds, and hard-

ened shells in reddish and grey limestone.

Along the eastern coast of Gulf Si. Vincent the Pliocene occurs discentinu-

ously from Aldinga Bay to Adelaide, and the exposures at Aldinga, Hallett Cove

and Adelaide have been described by many authors. The sequence in the Dry

Creek Sands of the Adelaide Plains Basin is, however, understood only in general

terms at present; only one of the molluscan faunas has been deseribed ( Lud-

brook, 1954-8) and no zoning of the foraminifera has been undertaken.

An exposure of Tertiary beds at Redbanks on the River Light was described

hy Howehin (1912) and correlated with rocks of Older Tertiary (“Eocene”)

ave elsewhere in South Australia, Some anachronons features of the malluscan

species collected from this locality led to the recognition (Ludbrook, 1957, p.

17) of a very thin remnant of Pliocene calcareous sandstone overlying Miocene

limestone {Howchin’s Eocene),

222 N. H, LUDBROOK

The general features of the occurrence have been adequately deseribed by

Howchin, The Tertiary beds consist of from 12 to 15 feet of hard fossiliferous

yellow limestone (calcarenite), gritty near the base, carrying the echinoids

Lovenia “forbesi T. Woods", Pibularia gregata, and the pelecypods. Lentipecten

sp. and Hofrigonia semiundulitu, The associated microfauna contains Amphi-

stegina lesson, Calearina verriculata, Notorotalia howchini and species of Gat-

dryina, Dorothia, Nonion, Cibicides, and Cassidulina. An echinoid band occurs

near the top of the limestone, with abundant Loventa, Monostychia, Fibularia

and Lentipecten, together with Kotrigonia semiundulata and Placotrochus.

Krosion has considerably obscured the contuct between the top of the echinoid

band anc the overlying thin remnant of leached white calcareous sandstone with

chalky remains of Glycymeris convexe. Where it is best exposed under Pleis-

tocerne mottled clays, the sandstone rests upon poorly fossiliferous Miocene

ealcarenite with echinoid spines, sponge spicules, and miliolid foraminifera; else-

whicre if may be represented by a coarse grit resting on the echinoid band of the

limestone. Howchin (p. 17) noted the rich fossil content af this “thin siliceous

layer”, It is obvious Irom the megafossil assemblage that this is not a bed of

the anderlying Miocene, but a retmant of the Plincene Dry Creek Sands en-

ciuntered in borings in the Adelaide Plains Basin,

Qne small, loose boulder frum the echinoid band of the Miocene carries,

vertical ta the bedding, a mould of the boring mollusc Pholas on the infilling

uf a lube bored into the limestone. An irregular junction betwoon limestone

and grit is also visible on the same houlder.

The Redbanks exposure probably represents the north-eastern margin of the

Plincene sea in this part of the St. Vincent Basin. Although the total exposure

is only about § feet Fin and 1 foot thick. the followig molluscan species, some

of which are restricted to the Pliocene, have been identified: Nuculuna verconis,

Glycymeris converxa, Cucullaea sp., Chlamys antiaustralis, Cardita compte, Miltha

hore, Notocallista (Striacallista) sp., Dentalium lofesuleatum, Turvitella. aericula

adelaidensis, Diastoma provisi, Thericium ftorri, Polinices substolida, Contes

(Floraconus) adelaidae. “Retalia® beccarii is associated with this assemblage.

Overlying the Tertiary marine beds are about 40 feét of Pleistocene muttled,

mainly red, clays and loam.

At Tailem Bend the low cliffs forming the eastern bank of the Murray River

are composed of fine caleareuus loosely cohereat sandstone with abundant Mar-

einopore vertebralis visihte «m weathered surfaces. In this area the Miocene

has been partially or wholly removed by erosion and Pliovene sands rest directly

on grey limestone of the Ettrick Formation. 2): miles south of Tailom Bend on

the stock route adjacent to Section 321, Hundred of Seymour, well preserved

mollusca occur in a bed of Ostrea arenicola 25 feet down the low cliffs. The

splendid specimen of Spondylus spondyloides (Pl, 2, Fig. 1) was callected at

this locality with Chlamys (C.) antiaustralis, Chlamys (hquichlanys) palmipes.

and Afiltha hora.

The associated microfauna is similar to that of the Dry Creek Sands.

The sample taken on the eastern hank ut Jervois punt contains a shallow

water formaminiferal assemblage with Marginopord vertebralis and “Rotalia”

bececarii in abundance. in association with Trochammina inflata. Clavulina multi-

nurernta, Cribrobulimina polystoma, Quinqueloculina costata, Triloculina tri-

sonula, T- tricatinata, Peneroplis pertusus, Discorbis cdimidiatus, Rotorbinelle

eycloelypeus. The foraminifera of the oyster bed with Spordylus, 24 miles

south of Tailem Bend, include “Rotalia” becearii. with Quinquelocelina costatna,

Q, pelyzona, Trilovulina tricarinata, Guttuline irregularis, G. problema, G. regina,

Stemoidella elesntissima, §, kagaensis, Discorbis dimidiatus, Rotorbinella cyclo-

PLIOCENE FAUNA WITIT ANODONTIA 233

clypeus, Planulinoides biconcava, Planorbulina mediterranensis, [Iphidium

adelaidense, E.. rotatum. E. macellum, E, advenum.

The Pliocene at Moorlands has been described by McGarry (1953, p. 87).

Five species of molhisea occurring in this locality were recorded by Mawson

and Chapman (1922, p. 136). Thin, highly fossiliferous sandy and gritty lime-

stone with large slate pebbles overlies hedrock on Section 6, Hundred of Sher-

lock, on the roadway where it is thinly covered with kunkar, and to the south

of the roadway. Anadontia sphericula is abundant, in association with Macoma

basedowi, Chlamys (Equichlamys) consobrina, Diastoma provisi, Barnea tiara,

Anapella variabilis, and doubtfully identified Antigona cognata,

The distribution of the fauna at these localities is tabulated below.

The sandy limestone quarried at Waikerie as a building freestone also con-

bei ARR GPnE sphericula and Diastoma provisi with moulds of Polinices and

Mytilus.

DISTRIBUTION TABLE

x a

& 3 =]

oa FI

: a] #| £ IS 4 |< a

B18) a | 2 Ios) o | B a

732) R Clew, 6/5) 2 | 2

7 2 s ojo 4] 8 5 S a

= a on ~E [-s g os a ai

ie |S £| 2 |s"| 2) e|/S] 2

s/f |e) a [s m3) 5

els |= = 2) | Fe

ale | a] ie Ale] a

= - E. ae 4 paged se at

Cucullaea sp. x | x | x | x le |

Glyaymeria convera 1 : x

Ostrete urenicote { 0 x we | cf | x

Chlamys antiaustralis x oO}; x» |x | x | x x

Chlamys (Byutehlamys) consabrina x oO] x x | of

Ohlamys (Equichlamys) polmipes | x OC | aes) ese | cof

Chlamys (Bquicklamys) subbifrons 3 x 0

Spondylus snandyloides 7 x | |] x | x

Glans deroreuente | )

Anouantia sphericula x x x x! O | x | x

Antigona cognata x

Dosinin (Phoeosomna) edithburgerisis | 1 0

Luciolina alihingae | )

Mucome busedoun. x ; | 0

Anapella variubilés x 0 | x

’ ree |

Diastona Prats x 1 & x 0 | » x x

Cumprinile triseriale x x x | 0 |

0 Type locality

x Occurrence noted.

SYSTEMATIC DESCRIPTIONS

Family PECTINIDAL

Genus Canamys Réding, 1798

Subgenus Crnamys s, str,

Chlamys (Chlamys) antiaustralis (Tate)

Synonymy: Ludbrook, 1955, p. 30.

Observations—The species was well figured by Gatliff and Singleton (1930,

pl. 2, fig. 3; pl. 3, figs. 6, 7; pl. 4, fiz. 10). It occurs commonly in calcareous sand-

stones carrying the present fauna.

224 N. H. LUDBROOK

Subgenus Equrcuiamys Iredale, 1929

Type species (a.d.) Pecten bifrons Lamarck

Group of Chlamys (Equichlamys) bifrons (Lamarck)

Three species described by Tate, Pecten consobrinus, P. subbifrons and P.

palmipes, are each morphologically close to variants of the living Chiamys

( Equicklamys) bifrons, the type of which is in the Lamarck Collection in the

Museum of Natural History, Geneya. These either represent allopatric popu-

lations of a single Pliocene species or are Pliocene subspecies of a single polytypic

species of which hifrons is the living South Australian representative. The

amount at material available is, however, too limited for satisfactory compara-

tive study.

Chlamys (Equichlamys) subbifrons (Tate)

pl. 1, fie, 1

Pevten subhifrons Tate, 1882, p, 44; 1886, p. 104, pl. 3, fy, 2.

Diagnosis—A rather small Equichlamys with 12 square-cut bifid ribs equal to

the interspaces, cut into riblets in the early stages by a median groove and into

4 or 5 riblets by dichotomous grooves towards the ventral margin. Main inter-

spaces and rib grooves shagreencd,

Deseription—The holotype figured by Tate is a juvenile right valve, narrower

than the adult. Shell of small to medium size, weakly inflated, height (in the

juvenile) yreater than the length, auterior-dorsal and posterior-dorsal margin

slightly concave, ears large, unequal, posterior ear triangular, with 5 rays with

shagreen interspaces; anterior ear larger, upper margin directed slightly upwards,

lower margin with a broad but not very deep byssal notch, 6 rays, the upper

bifid and much broader than the rest which are divided by one or two grooves,

interspaces shagreen.

Main shell sculpture of 12 square-cut ribs, equal to the interspaces. Ribs

cut into riblets by onc increasing to three square-cut grooves towards the ventral

margin. Riblets more or less granular, about 13 granules in 10 mm. Grooves

shagreen. Interspaces between main ribs shagreen with a secondary riblet de-

veloping by intercalation. Valve margin squarely undulating,

Dimensions—Height 30, lenvth 28 mm.

Type Locality—Pliocene, “Government Mouse Quarry”, Adelaide,

Location of Holotype—Tate Musenm Collection, University of Adelaide,

T 959A,

Material—The holotype and 4 paratypes, Adelaide.

Observations—The holotype is an ornamented phase of the species. The

granules are not always present on the ribs which in juvenile paratype D are

shagreened over.

Chlamys (Equichlamys) consobrina (Tate)

pl. 1, fig. 2

Synonymy: Ludbrook, 1955, p. 31.

Diagnosis—A fairly large Equichlamys with about 8 low radial folds. Falds

and interspaces covered with narrow radial riblets increasing by intercalation to

about 100 in the adult: Interspaces shagrecn.

Description—Holotype left valve, Shell not fully grown, of medium size,

maderately inflated, height equal to length, equilateral, anterior-dorsal and pos-

terior-dorsal margins concave, ears large, unequal. anterior ear triangular, with

PLIOCENE FAUNA WITH ANODONTIA 235

10 narrow radial riblets separated by broader shagreened interspaces, posterior

eat subtriangular, carrying narrow radial riblets, outer margin broken but

apparently very gently sigmoidal, upper margin straight. ;

Shell with 8 low folds strongest at the middle and almost obsolete anteriorly

and posteriorly, both fulds and interspaces carrying 3 or 4 flat, slightly granular

tihs with shagreened interspaces a little wider than the ribs. Valve: margin very

gently undulating,

Dimensions— Height 67, length 67 mm.

Type Locality—Pliocene, Aldinga Bay.

Location. of Holofype—Tate Museum Collection, University of Adelaide,

T 9378.

Material—The holotype. one paratype (adult 85 x 85 mm,), 5 topotype

fragments; wne yourly preserved specimen in limestune, Moorlands,

Chlamys (Equichlamys) palmipes (Tate)

pl. 1, figs, 3-6

Pecten palmipey Tate, 1886, p. 105, pl. 5, fig. 4; pl. 7, figs. 4a-db.

Diugnosis—A fairly large Equichlamys with 9 strong broad ribs on the right

valve and § narrow elevated ribs on the left valve, ribs and interspaces covered

with Hat, square-cut riblets up to 15 on each rib on the right valve. Interspaces

shagreened. !leight greater than length, Dorsal margins conspicuously concave.

Description—Lectotype, Shell fairly large, roundly triangular, incquilateral,

slightly incquivalve, higher than long, anterior-dorsal margin shorter than pos-

terior-dorsal, but both relatively short, coucayve, ventral margin strongly convex.

Kars large, unequal.

Right valve with 9 strong broad subrectangular ribs with U-shaped inter-

spaces. The ribs in the median part of the shell are straight and radial, but both

anteriorly and posteriorly they become increasingly concave. The two horder-

ing the dorsal margins are separated from the adjacent ribs by a narrow inter-

space, which varies in intensity in individual specimens, It seems, therefore, a

matter of individual preference as to whether the valve is regarded as having 7

(Tate, 1886) or 9 ribs, Ribs broadening and fattening ventrally. Interspaces

shagreened. Fars unequal. Posterior ear triangular, outer margin slightly in-

clined to the vertical, with 11 radiating riblets yrooved towards toe. wniBo, An-

terior larger, upper margin directed slightly upwards, outer margin convex,

lower margin with a broad shallow byssal notch.

Left valve rather flattened im the mumbonal region, anterior dorsal margin

shorter than posterior, concave; posterior-dorsal margin concave; ventral margin

roundly convex, profile narrowly undulating. Valve with 8 narrow inverted U-

shaped ribs with deep interspuces twice as wide as ribs which widen and flatten

ventrally, Ribs and interspaces currying riblets developing by intercalation

from ahout 3 per rib in the middle of the shell to about 7 at the ventral margin.

Interspaces between ribs and riblets shagreened. Ears unequal. Anterior

larger than posterior, triangular with 5 primary and radiating riblets with a

secondary riblet developing in each interspace; posterior subtriangular, upper

margin sloping downwards, outer margin meeting it at 115°,

Dimensions--Height 75, length 72, inflation (beth valves) 27 mm.

Type. Locality—Pliocene, Edithbureg.

Location of Lectotype-—-Tate Museum Collection, University of Adelaide,

2A,

226 N. H. LUDBROOK

Material—The lectotype and paratype T932B, both complete specimens

except for damage to posterior-ventral margin of holotype. One complete

javenile with smooth ribs and 4 valves, Tailem Bend; 1 valve in limestone with

Chlamys antiaustralis, well at 20 feet, Section 200, Hundred of Melville, 1% miles

west of Editlhburg.

Observations—Tate’s description was based on two specimens, both of which

were figured. The larger T 932A (figured 1886, pl. 7, figs. 4a-4b), of which Tate

gave the approximate dimensions, is. chosen as lectotype.

Family SPONDYLIDAE

Genus SpoxpyLus Linné, 1758

Spondylus. spondyloides (‘l'ate)

pl. 2, fif. 1

Synonymy: Ludbrook, 1955, p. 34.

The magnificent specimen (pl. 2, fig. 1) Tate Mus. Coll. F 15470, with both

valves intact was collected south of Tailem Bend in calcareous partially coherent

sandstone,

Family CARDITIDAE

Genus Gians Megerle, 1811

Type species (monotypy) Glans trapezia = Venus trapezia Linné

Glans dennanti (Tate aud Basedow)

pl. 2, fivs. 2, 3

Cardita dennanti Tate and Basedow, 1902, p, 132, pl 2, fig, 4.

Diagnosis—A subtrapezoidal inflated Glans with about 20 rather broad

nodulose ribs, S

Deseription—Nevtype. A single right valve of moderate size, broadly sub-

trapezoidal in outline, strongly inflated, solid. Umbo prominent, inflated, strong]:

prosogyrous, situated at one-third from the anterior margin. Lunule small,

cordate, escutcheon well defined. Anterior-dorsal margin almost straight, an-

terior margin arcnate, posterior-dorsal margin gently convex, posterior margin

obscured by matrix, ventral margin gently convex. Sculpture of about 20 broad

nodulose ribs wider than the interspaces. Ribs and interspaces crossed by irre-

gular growth lines. Inner valve margin coarsely crenulate. Hinge fairly broad,

damaged, but showing a strong, high, prominent, triangular 3b.

Dimensions—Ieight 23, length 24, inflation (une valve), 10 mm,

Location of Neotype—S:A. Muscum No, P 12657.

Type Locality—De Mole Point, Edithburg,

Material—The neotype only. Although the dimensions are greater, the speci-

men collected by Mr, E. J. Carmichael from Point de Mole is so like the figure

of the holotype that there can be no hesitation im selecting it as the neotype.

Family LUCINIDAE

‘Genus ANononTrA Link, 1807

Anodontia Link, 1807, p. 156,

( Loripinus Monterosato, 1883, p, 91).

(Kophysemu Stewart, 1930. pp. 37, 186; non Anedontia Stewart, 1930, p. 179.

Anodontia Link, 1807, Eames, 1951a,

Type species (monotypy) Anodontia alba Link = “Venus” edentula Linné

PLIOCENE FAUNA WITH ANODONTIA

Anodontia sphericula (Basedow)

pl. 3. figs. 1, 2, 3: pl. 5, figs, 1, 4

Meretrix arasiul, Basedow, 1902, p, 13], pl 2, fiz, 2; Wewchin, 1935, pp. $4, 39 1936,

pp, ,

Diagnosis—A large glohose Anodontia, thin shelled, sculptured with irregu-

lar growth lines about } mm. apart, with very fine secondary threads between.

Hinge edentulous, anterior adductor well within pallial line, rectangular, about

20 mm. * 6 mm., posterior adductor subtriangular, about 10 x 10 * 15 mm,

Description—Shell large, thin, transversely orbicular, strongly inflated, sculp-

tured with fine distinct accremental ridges a botik 1 mm. apart in the middle of

the shell with fine secondary irregular microscopic threads between them and

Hany fine short microscopic radial striae discernible on some portions of the adult

Strett,

Anterior area narrow, marked externally by a slight interruption of the con-

centric ridges which fold over on a slight nmbo-ventval furrow. Posterior area

muruw, less conspicuous than anterior area but similarly separated from the

main part of the shell by a slight depression from the umbo to the posterior

ventral edge.

Umbo small, smooth, sharp, not prominent, prasogyrous, situated anteriorly

in the ratio 26:37. Anboriog vee margin almost straight, directed slightly

upwards, meeling the anterior end in a broad curve. Posterior-dorsa! margin

relatively Jong and gently convex; gently descendent towards the posterior,

inceting the posterior murgin at x rounded obtuse angle. Ventral margin

strongly convex.

Hinge edentulons, ligament long, uarrow, bounded by a ridge. Anterior

adductor long, rectangular, within the pallial line and diverging from it at un

angle of about 20 degrees over three-quarters of its length, 21 mm. lony, 6 mm.

wide in the Cowandilla hypotype, Posterior addnctor snbtriangular, pointed

dorsally with straight sides each 10 mm. long, ventral side convex towards the

ventral margin, about 15 mm, long. There is a conspicuous umho-ventral ridge

bardering the inner side of the posterior adductor and a less conspicuous furrow

extending from the inner margin of the anterior adductor in a broad sigmoid

curve towards the posterior end of the hinge at the top of the pedal retractor.

Pallial line simple, area outside pallial line smooth, inside granular,

Dimensions—Neotype height 72, length 82, inflation (cast, both valves, 47).

Ilypotype, Cowandilla Bore, height 57, length 63, inflation (both valves) 31 mm.

Type Localtiy—Edithburg,

Location of Types—South Australian Museum, Neotype P 12658; Ilypotype,

Moorowie, P 12659; Hypotype, Cowandilla Bore, 470-485 feet, Tate Mus. Cuall.,

University of Adelaide, F 15471.

Material-The neotypé and 2 topatypes collected from Edithburg in the

Hawchin Collection, S.A. Museum, | specimen 305 from Giles Point in collec-

tion of E. J. Carmichael, 9 specimens, Hundred Moorowie, Section 140, E. J.

Carmichael Collection. 4 casts Wallaroo, 2 casts Aldinga, 2 casts Moorlands, 3

casts Fishery Bay; 17 fragments Cowandilla Bore, 1 valve Bore, Hundred of

Munno Para, Section 4251, S.A. Mines Department Collection; Hypotype F 15471

placed in Tate Collection.

Olbservations—The whereabouts of the helotype are not known, but there

hus been no difficulty in finding specimens tn replace it, The hypotype fram

Hundred of Mosorowie is a large example, partly decorticated but with a fair

amount of the outer shell layer still remaining. 22 adult specimens were mea-

224 N. H. LUDBROOK

sured, the average dimensions of which were height 64 mm., length 71 mm.,

inflation 43 mm., umbo-anterior 29 mm., umbo-posterior 42 mm., ratio height:

length 0-901, ratio umbe-posterior-:nmbo-anterior 1:44, In the adult the height:

length ratio varies fram 0-90 to 0-95, in the juvenile from 0-50 to 0-95; in the

adult the position of the umbo is more central in the ratio UP; UA is 1-23:] 63;

in the juvenile the ratio UP:UA is 1-00:1-61.

Large globular casts of this species are very common in the limestunes,

With the removal of the shells by solution, the casts readily weather out. Casts

appear to be similar to those of Anodontia pharaonis (Bellardi) occurring in the

Eocene from Spain to India (Cox, 1936, p. 32; Eames, 195lb, pp. 390-2). A.

philippiana (Reeve) from North Queensland is a close living relative. The

species, or one very close to it, also occurs in the Pleistocene sandy limestones

af the Eyre (Roe) Plain south of the Hampton Scarp in the Enela Basin.

Furnily DOSINILDAR

Genus Dosixts Seopoli, 1777

Type species (manolypy) Chama dusin Adanson = Venus concentrica Bort

Subgenus Prracosema Jukes-Brown, 1912

Type species (o.d.) Artemis japonica Reeve

Dosinia (Phacosoma) edithburgensis sp. nov.

pl 3, fia, 4

Dosinta grayii Zittol, Baseduw, 1901, p. 147 (non Zittel).

Diagnosis—A. fairly large suborbicular Phacosoma, moderately thin-shelled,

sculptured with fine, erect ridges about 2 mm. apart, with about 8 fine striae on

the interspaces and ridges. Pallial sinus deep, triangular, with apex about the

middle of the median umbo-ventral line.

Description (Holatype)—Shell large, suborbicular, umbos inflated, promi-

nent strongly prosogyrous, lunule deeply impressed, somewhat sagittate.

Escutcheon narrow, deep. Sculpture on adult portion of shell consists of narrow

concentric ridges about 2 mm, apart with finely striated interspaces.

Hinge plate moderately narrow, partly obscured by matrix. Hinge of right

valve with long, narrow, high grooved posterior cardinal, a prominent bevelled

median cardinal and a narrowly triangular entire anterior cardinal. Anterior

lateral portion of hinge obscured. Pallial sinus not visible in holotype.

Dimensions of Holotype—Height 66, length 65, inflation (both valves) ap-

proximately 34 mr.

Paratype—Internal cast with a good deal of the original shell. Part of the

pallial sinus visible, broadly triangular, deop, inclined, with apex directed to-

wards the anterior cnd of the hinge at the probable position of the anterior ad-

ducter; apex at about the middle of the median umbho-ventral line.

Type Locality—Edithburg, Pliocene.

Loeation of Types—Tate Museum Collection, University of Adelaide, Holo

type F 15467, Paratype F 15468.

Obsercations—This is one of the shells recorded by Tate as Dosinia grayii

Zittel. It is a larger shell with only a superficial resemblance to D. ( Kereia}

greyi Zittel from New Zealand and has not so far been collected from any other

locality than Edithburg. Two specimens in the Tate Collection from “Miocene,

Gippsland Lakes*—probably Jemmy's Point Formation (Pliocenc)—appear to

be long to Kereix, although the hinge is obscured. They are somewhat similar

PLIOCENE FAUNA WITH ANODONTIA 229

ta but not conspecific with greyi, Marwick (1926, p. 570) has noted that the

Japanese subgenus Phacosome is not known tu occur in New Zealand before the

Lower Pliocene.

Family TELLINIDAE

Genus Macoma Leach, 1819

Type species (monotypy) Macoma tenera Leach = Tellina calcarea V.inné

Macoma basedowi (Tate)

pl. 4, figs. 3, 4

Tellina basedowi Tate in Basedow, 1901, p, 148, pl. 3.

Diagnosis—A fairly large suborbicular-triangular Macoma with slightly irre-

gular concentric lamellae up to about 1 mm. apart and faint radial striae visible

in oblique light.

Deseription—Interior cast and portion of right valve selected as neotype.

Shell of moderately large size, suborbicular-triangular, probably tairly solid, sub-

equilateral, gently Inflated, Umbos prohably small, antemedian. Anterior-

dorsal margin nearly straight, gently sloping; posterior-dorsal margin longer,

gently arcuate, more steeply sloping. Anterior margin roundly arcuate, pos-

terior margin more narrowly arcuate, Ventral margin roundly convex.

Scnlpture of sharp concentric lamcllae widely spaced and gencrally about

6 in 4 mm., the interspaces crossed by numerous faint radial striae. Pallial sinus

widely rhombic, apex at about the posterior one-third.

Dimensions (internal cast)—Height 32, length 36, inflation 15 mm.

Type Locality--Giles Point, near Edithburg.

Location of Neotype—Tate Museum Collection, University of Adelaide,

V’ 15469.

Material—The neotype and 2 topotypes, Giles Point, 2 miles north of Coo-

bowie; 4 specimens Moorlands, Section 6, Hundred of Sherlock.

Observations—The species appears to have features in common with Tellina

pitatica Hedley, 1918, collected by Basedow in the Buccaneer Archipelago. The

pallial sinus is similar in shape to that of piratica.

Genus LactoLtina Iredale, 1937

Type species (o.d.) Tellina quoyi Sowerhy

Laciolina aldingae sp. nov.

pl. 3, fg. 4

Telling lato Tate, 1887, p. 164, non Quoy ond Gaimard.

Diagnasis—A large Laciolina with conspicuous concentric sculpture cunsist-

ing of crowded siriac on the outer layer, the inner layer and shell interior with

broad concentric ribs about 2 mm. apart. Anterior margin rounded, posterior-

ventral margin rostrate with fairly strong flexure.

Description—Shell large, subelliptical-subtriangular, only moderately inflated.

Umbos small, snbmedian. Anterior of shell broken in holotype, posterior dorsal

margin apparently straight, fairly steeply descending, posterior end produced,

rostrate, strongly flexed, ventral margin convex.

Sculpture on surface layer on undecorticated portion of valve vonsisting

of fine irregular crowded concentric striae about 4 per mm. Decorticated she

with broad rounded concentric ribs about 2 mm. apart on median part of shell.

Pallial line only partly visible, pallial sinus not known.

230 N. H. LUDBROOK

Paratype an internal cast showing anterior margin; anterior-dorsal margin

steoply sloping, anterior end narrowly rounded.

Dimensions—Holotype: Length (estimated) 125, height 75, inflation 28 mum,

Material—The holotype and two paratypes, | doubtful topotype.

Type Locality—Aldinga Bay, Pliocene,

Location of Types~Tate Museum Collection, University of Adelaide, holo-

type T 1210A, paratypes T 1210B, 1210C.

Observations—Tate (1587) referred the Aldinga specimens to the Recent

“Tellina lata Quoy and Gaimard” on description and figures. A splendid series

of the Tellina lata Q. and G. group has been generously made available on Joan

from the Australian Museum; Lacioliia quoyi (Sowerby) (? = Tellina lata Q.

and G.) C 15874 Hargraves Collection, from New Caledonia; Laciolina ehloro-

leuca (Lamarck) C 15873 Hargraves Collection, New Caledonia; Laciolina

quoyi ? attracta Tredale C 62322, Heron Island, Queensland; Laciolina quoyi

attracta Iredale Paratype C 62323 Lord Howe Island; Laciolina francesae Iredale

Paratype © 59874 Roy Bell Collection, Norfolk Island. From these it is clear

that the Aldinga Pliocene species is distinct both in its dissimilar sculpture and

in the strongly rostrate posterior margin. The state of preservation of the fossil

renders the generic location a \Ittle doubtful. The low. rather narrow pallial

sinus of Laciolina is not confirmed,

Family MACTRIDAE

Genus ANAPELLA Dall, 1895

Type species (o.d.) Anapa triqueta Hanley

Anapella variabilis (Tate)

pl. 4, figs. 5,6

Anapu variabilie Tate, 1887, p. 172, pl. 17, figs. 5a-Sh.

Anapella ucriabilis Tate, Ludbrook, 1955, p. 76 (synenyuy),

Diagnosis—A small rather tumid subtrigonal Anapella with a rather narrow

hinge.

Description—Uolotype, left valve. Shell small for the genus, tumid, sub-

trigonal, inequilateral, thin but solid, umbo inflated, prosogyrous, anterior margin

moderately narrowly arcuate, posterior dorsal margin longer than anterior dorsal

margin, Anterior dorsal margin incurved near the umbo. Surface sculpture

with fine growth ridges about J mm, apart near the umbo but increasing to about

4 per mm. towards the ventral border, Fine striae about 7 per mm. in the inter-

spaces.

Hinge with a deep triangular resilifer. Dorsal tnargin deeply and narrowly

notched under the umbo by the resilium. A grooved, oblique, narrowly

triangular anterior cardinal bordering the resilifer with a small secondary denticle

overhanying the resilifer at the top of the anterior cardinal. Both anterior and

posterior laterals long and thin.

Anterior adductor moderately large, subovate, near the anterior-ventral

margin, posterior adductor subovate at the posterior end of the hinge; pallial

line simple.

Dimensions—Length 17-5, height 13-5. inflation (left valve) 6-5 mm.

Type Locality—Blanche Point, Aldinga Bay, Pliocene.

Location of Types—Tate Museum Collection, University of Adelaide, Holo-

type T 1209A, Paratvpes T1209.

PLIOCENE FAUNA WITH ANODONTIA Sul

Material—Holotype and 13 paratypes on Tate's original tablet; external

moulds. on limestone, identified from latex casts, Moorlands; specimens from

Adelaide Plains Basin Government Bore No. 20, Woodville South, 362-380 feer

associated with a larger species of Andpella (? pinguis Crosse and Fischer), and

a megafauna distinct from that described by the writer from the Dry Creek

Sands.

Class GASTROPODA

Family CERITHIIDAK,

Subfamily Campaniuinar

Genus Campanite Bayle, 1884

Type species (s.d. Crossman, 1906) Cerithium giganteum Lamarck

Campanile triseriale Basedow

pl. 5, figs, 2.3, 4

Campanile triseriale Basedow, 1902, p. 130, pl. 2, fig. 1,

Diagnosis—A. Campanile of normal size for the genns, sculptured with three

rows of tubercles the adapical row axial. coarse, usually about 4 in 5 mm., separ-

ated by interspaces of the same size, median row narrow, set on a narrow cord

mm, wide, about 7 in 5 mm., adapertural row oblique, on a rib about 1 mm,

wide, 6 tubercles per mm.

Desvription—Neotype. The neotype has been selected from the Howchin

Collection in the South Australian Museum. It is a broken specimen tightly

embedded in limestone with nine adult whorls only the posteriur of which is

visible externally. The original description and figure given hy Basedaw are

consistent with the neotype, the estimated dimensions of which are height 130

mm., diameter 40 mm,

Hypotype. Mould in limestone, north side of Aldinga Bay, south of Blanche

Point described from latex cast. Shell large, isostrophic, multispiral, turriculate.

Early whorls (about 15) missing, 17 whorls remaining in a height of 90 mm,

Whorls narrow, flat regularly sculptured with 3 rows of tubercles, the adapical

row broud, one-third width of whorl, with broad tubercles 3 in 3 mm, in the

last whorl, separated by approximately equal interspaces, median row of tubercles

ou 4 narrow, well-defmed cord, about 1 min. apart, adapertural row bordering

the suture, with oblique tubercles about 4 in 5 mm. in the last three whorls.

Location of Types—Neotype, South Australian Museum, No. P 12660, Hypo-

type, South Australian Museum, No. P 12661.

Type Locality—Edithburg, Plioeenc.

Observations—Seven good specimeiis of the original shells of this species

aro in the South Australian Museum with the locality label “Bore”. The preser-

vation leaves little doubt that the shells are from the Dry Creek Sands of the

Adelaide Plains Basin. It is unfortunate that the locality has not been recorded

as these are the only well preserved specimens showing the carly part of the

shell so far obtained; they are also the only record of the species from the

Dry Creek Sands,

In the early whorls a narrow somewhat irregular cord occurs between the

adapertural row of tubercles and the suture; this cord is gradually engulfed and

tlisappears on later whorls. The aperture is obliquely rhomboid, siphonal canal

strongly retroflexed,

Associated Species—Associatcd with the pelecypoda and one gastropod de-

sevibed above are several species the synonymy and descriptions of which have

heen published previously. These are included in the distribution table,

232 N, H, LUDBROOK

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

1 am indebted te Messrs, F, P, O'Driscoll, R. K. Johns and A. A. Gibson of

the Geological Survey of South Australia for collecting material and tu Mr. E. J.

Carmichael, of Yorkctawn, for the loan and donation of material, to Dr. D,

MeMichael, of the Australian Museum, Dr. B, Daily, of the South Australian

Museum, and Miss Mary Wade, of the University of Adelaide, for the loan of

specimens, and to Miss Basedow, sister of the late Dr. Bascdow, fur assistance in

endeavouring te trace Dr. Basedow’s types,

The illustrations are the work of Miss G, E. Num, Assistant in the Palaeon-

tology Section, Geological Survey of South Australia, The photographs, Plate 5,

were kindly supplied by the South Australian Muscum.

REFERENCES

Basenow, H., 1901, On the Occurrence of Miocene Limestones at Edithburg and their

Biratiaranliienl Relationship to the Kocene of Wool Bay, with Description of a New

Specics by Prof. R. Tate. Trans. Roy. Svc. S, Aust., 25 (3) , pp. 145-148, pl. 3.

Rasevow, H., 1902. Descriptions of New Species of Fossil Mollusca from the Miocene Lime~

stone near Edithburg. ‘rans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 26 (2), pp, 130-132, pl. 2.

Cox, L, R., 1936. Fossil Mollusea from Southern Persia (Iran) and Bahrein Island. Mem.

Geol. Sury, India, Pal. Ind. ns. vol, 22, Mem. 2, 69 pp,, 8 pls.

Eames, F. E., 195la. The Type Species of Anudondia Link, 1807. Proce. Maluc. Soc. Lamd.,

28 (6), pp. 232-233.

Bames, F. B., 1951b. A Contribution to the Study of the Eovene of Western Pakistan and

Eastern India. B. The Description of the Lamellibranchia from Standard Sections in

the Rakhi Nala and Zinda Pir Areas of the Western Punjab and in the Kohal District.

Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. Lond., Ser. B. Biol. Sei. 627, vol. 285, pp. 311-482, pls. 9-17.

Ganuter, J. H., and Smvcteton, F. A., 1930, On the Relationship of “Pecten” asperrimus

Lamarck and “Pecten” antigustralis Tate, with a Description of an Allied Fossil Parm-

Prne. Roy. Soc. Vic, 42 (2) (ms.), pp. 71-77, pls. 2-4, ‘

Hepiey, C., 1918. Molluscs, in Basedow, H. Narrative of an Expendition of Exploration in

Narth-Western Australia, Trans, Roy, Geog, Soc. Aust. ‘S.A. Branch, 18, 1916-1917,

pp. 263-283, Text fig, 1, pl 41.

Howcnm, W., 1912. On an ontlier of Older Cainoxoic Rucks in the River Light near Mal-

lula. Trans. Roy. Sov. $, Aust,, 36, pp. 14-20, pl. 1.

Howctuin, W., 1935. Notes on the Geological Sections obtained by several Borings: sitnated

on the Plain between Adulaide and Gulf St. Vinesat, Part trans, Koy. Sov. 5, Aust.

59, pp. 68-102,

Howcets, W., 1936. Tdem, Part 2--Cowandilla (Government) Bore. Trans, Roy. Suc, §,

Anst., 60, pp. 1-34.

Inepace, ‘J, 1937. Middleton and Elizabeth Reefs, South Pacific Qeean. Anst Zunl., 8

(4), pp, 232-261, pls. 15-17.

Lauvwroox, N. H., 1954-1958. The Molluscan Fauna of the Pliocene Strata onderlying the

Adelaide Plains, Pt, 1, 1954, Trans. Roy. Suc. $.A,, 77, pp. 42-64, pt. 2, 1955, fd, 738,

pp. 18-87, pls. 1-6; pt, 3, 1956, id., 79, pp. 1-36, pls, 1-25 pl, 4, 1957, id., 80, pp. 17-58,

ple. [-4; pt. 5, 1958, id., 81, pp. 43-111, pls. 1-6.

BanyICh Ja ra The Vencridac of New Zealand. Trans. NZ. Inst.. ST. pp. 567-636,

pls. 35-54,

Mawson, D., and Crarman, F., 1922; The Tertiary Brawn-Coul Bearing Beds of Moorlands,

Trans. Roy, Soc. S$. Aust., 46, po, 131-147,

MrGaury, D. f., 1953. Geology of the Moorlands Brown-Coal Field. 5S. Aust. Dept. Mines,

Min. Rev,, 94, pp. 82-90,

Mites. K. R., 1954. The Geology and Iren Ore Resourees of the Middluback Range Ares.

Guol, Surv, S, Aust, Bull. 33.

Srawany, R. B. 1930, Gabb’s California Creticeous and Tertiary Type Lamellibranchs,

Avad, Nat. Sci, Philad. Spec. Pub. 3. :

Yar, R., 1882. Diagnoses of New Species of Miocene Fossils from South Australia. Trans.

Roy. Sac. S, Aust., 5, pp. 44-46. °

Tare, B.. 1886. The Lamellibranchs of the Older Tertiary of Australia, Part 1, ‘Trans. Hoy.

Soc. §. Aust., 8, pp. 96-158, pls. 2-12,

Yare, 4., 1887, The Lamellibranchs of the Older Tertiary of Australia, Part 2. Trans. Hey.

Soe. S, Aust., 9, pp. 142-200, pls. 14-20,

Fig.

Fig,

Fig.

Vig.

Fig,

Fig.

Fig,

Fig.

PLIOCENE FAUNA WITH ANODONTIA 233

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

PLATE 1

1.—Chlamys (Equichlamys) subbifrans (Tate). Holotype, T 959A, x 2.

2.—Chlamys (Equichlamys) consobrina (Tate). Holotype. T 937B, x 0-75.

3.—Chlamys (Equichlamys) palmipes (Tate). Lectotype, T 932A, left valve, x 0-73.

4—Chlamys (Equichlamys) palmipes (Tate). Lectotype, T 932A, right valve, x 0-73.

5.—Chlamys (Equichlamys) palmipes (Tate). Juvenile, Tailem Band, left valve,

x2. Mines Dept. Coll,

6—Chlamys (Equichlumys) palmipes (Tate). Juvenile, Tailem Bend, right valve,

x2, Mines Dept. Coll,

PLATE 2

1.—Spondylus spondyloides (Tate). F 15470, x1.

2,—Glans dennanti (Tate and Basedow). Neotype, S.A. Mus. P 12657, x2.

3.—Glans dennanti (Tate and Basedow). Neotype, S.A. Mus. P 12657, x 2,

4.—Laciolina aldingae Ludbrook, sp. nov. Holotype, T 1210A, x 1.

PLATE 3

1.—Anodontia sphericula (Basedow) Hypotype, F 15471, left valve, x1.

2.—Anodontia sphericula (Basedow) Hypotype, F 15471, right valve. x 1.

3.—Anodontia sphericula (Basedow) Hypotype, F 15471, exterior, x 1.

4.—Dosinia (Phacosoma) edithburgensis Ludbrook sp. noy., Holotype, F 15467, x 0-85.

5.—Dosinia (Phacosoma) edithburgensis Ludbrook sp, nov., Holotype, F 15467, x 0-85,

PLATE 4

1.—Ostrea arenicola Tate. Tailem Bend. S.A. Mines Dept., F 196/58, left valve, x 0-75.

2.—Ostrea arenicola Tate. Tailem Bend, S.A. Mines Dept., F 196/58, right valve, x 0-73.

3.—Macoma basedowi (Tate). Neotype, F 15469, x 1:5.

4.—Macoma basedowi (Tate), Neotype, F 15469, x 1-5,

5.—Anapella variabilis (Tate). Holotype, T 1209A, x 3-7.

6.—Anapella variabilis (Tate). Holotype, T 1209A, x 3-7.

PLATE 5

1.—Anodontia sphericula (Basedow). Neotype, Edithburg. S.A. Mus., P 12658, x 1,

2.—Campanile triseriale Basedow. Latex cast of hypotype, P 12661, x 1.

3.—Campanile triseriale Baseclow. Neotype, Edithburg. S.A. Mus,, P 12660, x I,

4.—Cast of Anodontia sphericula and mould of Campunile triseriale hypotype, in lime-

stone, Aldinga Bay. S.A. Mus., P 12661, x 1.

(All photographs by courtesy of S.A. Museum.)

Pate 1

LL Lupsreok

N. H. Lupsrook PLATE 2

N, H, Luppsrook PLATE 3

N. H, Lupsprook PLATE 4

H! -

N, LL Lupinoox Pure 5

THE CORRELATION BETWEEN SALINITY AND RIVER FLOW IN THE

ALICE SPRINGS TOWN WATER SUPPLY

BY B. R. JEPHCOTT

Summary

The results of an investigation into the relationship between recharge of the Alice Springs basin and

the salt content of the town water supply are presented.

THE CORRELATION BETWEEN SALINITY AND RIVER FLOW IN THE

ALICE SPRINGS TOWN WATER SUPPLY

by B, R. Jercorr®

communicated by T. N. Lorman

[Read 9 October 1958]

SUMMARY

The results of an investigation into the relationship between recharge of

the ad Springs basin and the salt content of the town water supply are pre-

sented.

INTRODUCTION

Alice Springs is nestled in the heart of the Macdonnell Ranges and is com-

pletely surrounded by hills. The average annual rainfall is of the order of 10

inches and evaporation is about 100 inches. Hence, knowledge and conserva-

tion of water supplies is all important.

The water for the town has always been obtained from wells or bores sunk

into the porous structure which forms the water-retaining beds underneath the

town itself. The basin is recharged by infrequent Cowie of the Todd River.

Estimates of the capacity vary from 900,000,000 gallons (Owen, 1954) to

330,000,000 gallons (Jones, 1957), but regardless of this, with a peak summer

loading of the order of 3,500,000 gallons per week and a winter loading of

about 1,500,000 gallons per week, there is, at the moment, considerable margin

for error in estimation of volume since either capacity far exceeds the drain per

year.

Pumping, at the time of a survey in 1954, was performed at four major

points, namely, Town Wells, Army Wells, Bent Tree Well and Todd River

Well. Since then, numerous other town supply bores have been opened and

there are many private wells or bores which do not feed into the town mains.

The depths and pumping rates. of the town wells and bores used for this

investigation are given in Table 1 and their positions are indicated on Fig, 1:

TABLE 1.

Nuine | Depth | Oapacity used.

‘Town Wells (2) | 23°9" | 2,000 gallons per hour ench.

No, 1 Army Well 25'4° t 3,000 gallons per hour

No. 2 Army Well 277" 6,000 gallons per hour

Todd River Well | our 8,000 gallons per hour

PRELIMINARY INVESTIGATIONS

Owen (1954) performed a survey of the Alice Springs basin and found that

the most important additions of water to the storage are made from the river

when, and shortly after, it flows. Water also enters the basin from the west at

* Chemist, Animal Industry Branch, N.T, Administration.

Trans. Roy. Svc. 5. Aust. (1959), Vol. 82.

236 B. R, JEPHCOTT

the west corner of the town aerodrome, probably a small quantity from the

north-west towards the Railway Station and also from the west near the southern

boundary of the town aerodrome. These additions are likely to be more saline

than the river water and he considered this point should be checked by analyses

of water from the bore used by Connellan Airways.

The only early analyses available are those performed by the author in

October, 1953.

Fig. 1. Map of the Alice Springs area showing the localities of the principal wells

supplying water to the town. The dark areas represent stony ranges providing the

Jocal watersheds. 1. Todd River Well. 2. A.1.M. Well. 3. Town Wells. 4, Mount

Gillen Motel Bore, 5. Bent Tree Well. 6. Army Well No. 1. 7, Army Well No. 2.

8. Heavytree Gap Well.

ALICE SPRINGS WATER 237

TABLE 2.

1 2 3 4

Bicarbonate 165 ppm | 110 ppm | 213 ppm | 311 ppm

Chlaride 25 30 70 165

Sulphate 1) ig 4n 105

Floride O16 0-08 0-44 O72

Calcium \ 24 20 20 35

Magnesium 14 8 16 tt)

Sodium 30 27 91 198

Silica, Ferric anc other oxides 4 4 9 63

Total Salts (parts per million) 276 209 459 897

Total Salts (eraing per gallon) 19-4 44-6 42 63

Where: 1, Todd River Bore.

(

Fig. 2,

aso

3, Power House Tank,

4. Army Well No- 2.

| {s a

es Fe ee 2

| ae Pe:

alia

eps

SATE

ee Co ee 0

eter ce

ony

PPT Te

RELATIVE FLOCD VOLUME

3. Town Well 6-in, main,

Composition of monthly samples of water fram the Town Wells,

The positions of the sources of samples 1, 2, 3 and 4 are shown on Fig, 1.

It is interesting to note the increase in salt content to the south.

The above

results suggested that the Army Well may mark the southern limit of potable

water. These observations indicated that a more detailed study would be im-

portant.

MAIN INVESTIGATIONS

Monthly water samples from four sites, Town Wells, Nos, I and 2 Army

Wells and Todd River Well, were collected as from September, 1954, Mt. Gillen

Motel from August, 1955, and Australian Inland Mission (Lot 75) from April,

238 B. KR. JEPHCOTT

MOUNT GILLEN MOTEL

1955 256 ~ 1957

AS OND|J FMA

aval HEH [ae

| |

JASON Div FM

F read alsscevko FOLLAS

| |

Soe

4400

jean 197 |

SECC

Eas

4,200

/.0090

2 —

EE ————————eEE—EE———————————————————

Pine Al

—

‘,

-X

~ *,

ta I ie)

780

mx | | |

ena

xo |

oe ae

Le |f

x 4

| x [eo |

2 ere

“oe

Sk ea =

| tl PP

pete st

Fat

Ex)

AA TA | | es

ic)

Rr che ts

aoe

| kL |

100 2 RELATIVE FLOOD VOLUME

Fig, 3, Composition of monthly samples of water from the Mount Gillen

Motel Bore.

ALICE SPRINGS WATER S39

1956, until April, 1957. The results were plotted for 14 different factors, but

only eight were finally considered of any significance. All thesc samples were

collected as near as possible to the 18th of each. month.

The methods used were:—

Nitrate: The standard method using Phenoldisulphonic acid (Am. Public Health

Assoc., 1955),

ARMY WELL No2

en naaa

#00

PPP Pret

woot LI i clot" |

merry ith te seaatea

fAQ i TH | Nd

oH TTT Br UT

tt Lt ae i HE

1 Bee lana

Saal Gama Conan

30D ® RELVTNE FLOID VOLUME.

Fig, 4, Composition of monthly samples of water from Army Well No. 2,

—

Fluoride: A modification (Jepheott, 1953) of the method of Huckaby, Welch

and Metler (1947) was used.

Chloride; Estimated by the universal method of Fr. Mohr.

Sulphate: The standard Gravimetric method (Am, Public Health Assoc., 1955)

was used,

Bicarhonate and Carbonate: Estimated by using selective mixed indicators

(Murray, 1954).

Sodium and Potassium: Estimated by Flame Photometry, Collins and Polkin-

horne (1952),

240 B. R. JEPHCOTT

Calcium and Magnesium: Determined by the Schwarzenbach method (1948)

as modified by Diehl et al. (1950).

Hardness: Determined by the Schwarzenbach method (1946), (1947) and

(1948), as modified by Betz and Noll (1950).

RESULTS

The results are as presented in Figs. 2-7 and are tabulated with one co-

ordinate being parts per million salts, and the other being time in months. The

mid-position of each of the monthly values coincides with the 18th day of that

month.

The times of river flow are as shown, and an estimate of the relative strengths

of How is mdicated.

INTERPRETATION

(I). Lag Period. Wilson (1957) observed that the lag period between

river How and filtration to the six watering points were us in Table 3.

TABLE 3.

(1) Todd River Well | Immediate.

(2) Town Woll 8-10 days.

{3) Army Well No. I | 2 months,

{4) Army Well No, 2 33 months,

{5) Lot 74 (A.T.M.) | Y divs.

(6) Mt, Gillen Motel | A months.

However, the following factors make these generally nnreliable:

(a) From Fig. 5 (Army Well No. 1) the lay appears more closely to approximate

one month than two months, this being especially noticeable in the sodium,

bicarbonate, total hardness, and total dissolved solids.

(b) From Fig. 4 (Army Well No, 2) the lag would again be nearer one than 3%

months. However, the Storm Water drain near No. 2, which has a most

irregular How depending on the distribution of the rain, may account for

certain very quick responses —e.g., end of February, 1956, especially in the

sodium and free alkali levels.

(¢) Normally the height of the water table will influence How rate—i.e., a low

this is not obvious in the graphs due to the regular distribution of the river

flows and the masking effect of the heaviness of the February, 1956, flow

after one of the longer dry spells.

(1) The size of the flood on the river bed influences the filtration rate —i,e., a

small fow may not even reach the furthest points and the amount of re-

charge will be relatively small —e.¢., the medium flow in March, 1955, did

not create the magnitude of salinity drop of the two flows in July and

August, 1955, the combined flow of which amounts to quite a large factor,

especially since the porons structure above the basin would still be quite

moist from the first How. All relevant graphs show this marked response

after this dual flow, Naturally, the size of the flood is determined by volume

which in itself is dependent on duration of How, and speed of flow which

is in itself dependent on the head of water. The following observations

were made for the period September, 1954, to April, 1957 (Table 4).

241

ALICH SPRINGS WATIER

Vanni

Fig. 5. Composition of monthly samples of water from Ariay Well Na. 1

RELITVE FLOOD VOLUME

olh ee

agles

2a0

200 l

100 H

2 abba

oo {here |

Oo al | pF |

Mt Seer

“S mite eaaape SzIp i

apecbe ert | INT UL | | TRE

RELATIVE FEOOD VOLUME

Fig. 6. Composition of monthly samples of water from the Todd River Well,

242 B. R. JEPHCOTT

is)

|_|

| |

|_|

Zoo 1

Ve PCH

Fig. 7. Comparison of the analyses for Total Dissolved Solids. for all wells.

2 RELATIVE F003 VOLUME

> Fe tt,

z 2

, ARMY WELL

, No.)

: yo

ARMY WELL

‘ ' No.2.

2 8 gy

\ TOWN

t WELLS

, TODD RIVER

WELL

! SA MOVELL

u MOUNT GILLEN

MOTEL

‘

RELATE FEC

Fig, 8, Comparison of the analyses for Floorides for all wells.

ALICE SPRINGS WATER 243

TABLE 4,

Strength of flow relative

Date Strongth of flow to Feb,, 1956

Mid October 1954 Mediu 10%, 7

Mid March 1965 Medium 7 ee

Early July 1955 “Tl tay ~ 50%, .

Harly August LO54 Very amalll 2.2%),

End. February 1058 : 3 Very heavy | 100%, a

End June 195 a Very small “2. b)

Hence the major effects should be noticed after the How at the end of July

to early August, 1955, and the end of February, 1956, and in practice, this

is so, especially as already stated in the dual July-August, 1955, flows.

(IL). Individual Responses. On first examining the Figs, 2-8 it appears

obvious that the responses of chloride, fluoride and sulphate is seldom indicative

of river flaw, especially with the No. 1 and No, 2 Army Wells and the Town

Wells, Atter the largest flows the fluoride (Fig. 8) in the No. 2 Army Well

actually inereased and similarly with No. 1. The response of chloride and sul-

phate tollows w most irregular pattern.

This then leaves two other ions, namely, sodium and bicarbonate. two other

factors partly dependent on bicarbonates, numely, total dissolved solids and free

alkali, and the overall picture of total dissolved solids (Fig, 7).

Naturally, it is best to examine the uncomplicated facturs first to see if

their response is simple and in this, such is the case. Sodium and bicarbonate

respond truly if due allowance is made for time lag and flow strength.

With bicarbonate, in every case, a response is noted, the most obvious being

the Army Wells No, 1 and No. 2 and the Town Wells, Allowing the five-month

lag for Mt, Gillen Motel, the fall is quite accurate.

Sodium likewise responds to flow in the correct pattern and duplicates the

responses of the bicarbonate.

The two ions combined must have, in the majority of cases, a greater effect

than all other ions slice, apart from isolated cases, the total dissolved solids

fall with river flow,

CONCLUSIONS

In the waters from wells in the Alice Springs basin the most sensitive indi-

cators of the basin recharge are sodium and bicarbonate, these two combined

having an effect on the total dissolved solids.

REFERENCES

Amenican Pusurc Heanry Assc., 1935. Standard Methods for Examination of Water, Sew-

age and Industrial Wastes, Lt edition.

Betz, J. D., and Noun, C, A, 1950, Ain. Water Works Assoc., 42 (1), op. 49°56.

Bunxr, G. W., 1926. J- Am. Water Works Assoc., 15, pp. 169-170.

Cuamot, E, M., and Pratr, D, $., 1909, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 31, pp, 922-8,

Cnamor, E. M,, Puave, D.S., snd Rewrieny, H, W., 1911. J. Am. Chem, Soc., 33, pp. 366-84.

Coxuins, GC. C,, aud Porxinhounr, H,, 1952. Analyst, 77, pp. 430-436,

Dun, H., Gorry, GC. A., und Hacu, C. C., 1950. Am. Water Works Assoc., 42 (1), pp.

244 B. R. JEPHCOTT

Hucxany, W. B., Wexcu, E, T., and Mrtier, A. V., 1957. Anal. Chem., 19, pp. 154-6.

Jerncorr, B. R. Unpublished data.

Jones, N. O., 1957. Preliminary Report on the Groundwater Reserves of the Alice Springs

Area, Bur. Min. Res.

Murray, L. R. Personal communication.

Owen, H. B., 1954, Report on Geological Investigations of Underground Water Resources

at Alice Springs. NT. Adm.

SCHWARZENBACH, G., and AcKERMANN, H., 1948. Helv. Chim. Acta., 31, p. 1029.

Scuwanzenbacn, G., and AckERMANN, H., 1947. Helv. Chim. Acta., 30, p. 1798.

ScuwarzenBacu, G., and BrepeERMANN, W., 1948. Chimia 2, p. 56.

SCHWARZENBACH, G., BrepenMANN, W., and BAancerter, F., 1946. Helv. Chim. Acta., 29,

p. 811,

Tanas, M. J., 1950. Anal. Chem., 22, pp. 961-1072.

Wison, T., 1957. Personal communication.

PSEUDO-IGNEOUS ROCKS IN THE TRIASSIC SUCCESSION OF THE

SPRINGFIELD BASIN, GORDON-CRADOCK DISTRICT.

BY W. JOHNSON AND M. J. BUCKNELL

Summary

The field occurrence and petrology of some rocks of igneous appearance occurring at the top of the

Triassic succession in the Springfield Basin are described. It is concluded that they are natural slags

formed by fusion of argillite and coal ash due to heat from a burning coal seam. Some forceful

ejection of the molten slag may have occurred. The peculiar mineralogical association in the slags is

due in part to the highly siliceous, lime and magnesia-free, composition of the coal ash and the

argillite.

PSEUDO-IGNEOUS ROCKS IN THE TRIASSIC SUCCESSION OF THE

SPRINGFIELD BASIN, GORDON-CRADOCK DISTRICT,

by W. Jounson, ann M. J, Buecxnen*

[Read 9 October 1958]

SUMMARY

The field cecurrence and petrology of some rocks of ikneous appearance

oceurring at the top of the ‘Iriassie succession in the Springfield Basin are de-

seribed. Tt is conchided that they are natural slags formed by fusion of argillite

and coal ash due to heat from a burning cowl seain, Some forceful ejevtion of

the molten slag may have oceurred. The peculiar mineralogical association in

the slags is due in part to the highly siliceous, lime and magnesia-free, composi-

tion of the co#l ash and the argillite.

INTRODUCTION

in 1957 2 party of students mapping in the Wilson area onder the super-

vision of Dr. A. W. Kleeman collected specimens of indurated or silicified pink

and buff argillite, containing leaf impressions of Triassic aspect. from an area

9 miles due east of Gordon.

The possible economic importance of this find was immediately obvious

and as soon as the Department was informed one of the authors (Johnson)

made a reconnaissance of the area (in November, 1957), when it was found

that the silicified pink and buff argillite was the top member of a relatively

thick succession of Triassic sediments forming a true structural basin of some

considerable areul extent,

On a subsequent brief yisit with L, W. Parkin fragments of a material re-

sembling scoria or clinker were picked up on the slopes of a small mesa at the

top of which the argillite occurs. At this stage, the analogy between the occur-

‘rence and that of the “burnt coal” at Leigh Creek (Parkin, 1953) obviously in-

viting comparison between the two, a similar origin for the igneous-looking

material at Springfield was considered. Then at a later stage, field and labora-

tory evidence, particularly the similarity between some of the fragments and

voleanic ejactamenta, led to our consideration of an igneous parentage for

them. Finally, more detailed examination of the occurrence in the ficld and

Jaboratory bas shown that the material originated chiefly from the fusion of the

argillite by burning of coal in situ.

Investigation of the field occurrence, described in the first part of this paper

was the responsibility of Johnson. Bucknell describes the petrology of the

material in the second part.

LOCATION, TOPOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY

As it is intended to publish a detailed deseription of the geclogy of the

Springfield Basin at a later date a brief account only is given here to assist in

the understanding of the occurrenec.

The Basin is situated some 9 miles due west of the abandoned township of

Gordon on the Quorn-Hawker road and is reached from a road running directly

between Gordon and Cradock.

® Department of Mines, South Australia.

Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust. (1959), Vol. 82.

246

W. JOHNSON anp M. J, BUCKNELL

Boked argitite

CHAINS

LOCATION

Hawker

Ha. Cyrdle Mudla

SPRINGFIELD

BASIN

PROTEROZOIC

QUATERNARY

AM uv

Ja cover

Sands foras ast

silfslones

Shales and

orgies

Base! canglomerste

Sate

Titlite

Geological sketch plan of the Springfield Basin near Cradock, South Australia,

PSEUDG-IGNEOUS ROCKS, SPRINGFIELD BASIN 2487

It lies in an area of moderate topographic relief and is almost bisected by

Slaty Cliffs Creek, a large tributary of Wirreanda Creek, It is elongated in a

divection slightly north of cast and is asymmetric, the eastern end heing broader

and having a semi-circular periphery, The length of the Basin is 28 miles and

its greatest width 1% miles.

The Triassic sediments have been extensively eroded and for the most part

lie in a topographic depression. A small central mesa, to which the pseudo-

vuleanic materials are confined, has been Icft and the basal conglomerate forms

a hounding ridge around three-quarters of the periphery of the basin.

Outcrop conditions are poor and nowhere is the full Triassic sueeession

exposed in one section nor is it possible to build up an accurate composite

seetion from a number of stratigruphically overlapping discontinuous sections,

Estimates of maximum thickness therefore vary and estimate of total maximum

thickness given in this paper is subject to an error which may be in excess of

+3500 feet. The succession as built wp from fragmentary sections is as [ollows,

starting at the top.

Thickness Deseription of Lithology

70-00 feet = Pink and buff baked aryillite with leaf impressions and fresh water

molluses underlain by whitish paper shales with ash beds at the

base.

900 feet Grey sandy shale, fine-grained sandstone with a coarse-grained

; lentienlar arkose or yvreywacke at the top.

150 feet Carbonaceous shales, argillites and siltstones with impure eoal

seams,

125-140 feet Chiefly white to yellow siltstone or fine-grained micaceous sand-

slones with interbedded carbonaceous shales and impure cecal

foams, Sandstones weathered to comeretionary ferrmginvus box

WOTKS,

200-700 fect Carbonaceous shales and argillites with impure coal seams,

Gypsum weitthers out of shiules.

170-940 feet Red, mauve and bof argillite with beds of red, grey, purple and

buff, very coarse-grained sandstone, some containing clay pellets,

At western end grades into a predominantly sandstone sequence.

At the eastern end arsillite is 600 feet thick and overlain by the

sandstone sequence 340 fect thick, May contain intorhedded. coal

seams. Sandstones contain leaf impressions.

16-000 feet Basal conglomerate. Consists of interbedded torrential ennglom-

erate and red and mauve coarse-grained current-bedded sand

stone. Conglomerate boulders are predominantly quartzite, Some

beds are vein quartz pebble conglomerate,

200) Feet Possible basal beds at eastern end of basin consisting of grey

gypsiferous shales. ; ‘

The best coal seam sc far discovered by drilling is 12 feet thick. It is possible

that the coal seams responsible for the formation of the pseudo-igneous rocks

were much thicker.

FIFL.D OCCURRENCE OF PSEUDO-IGNEOUS ROCKS

All the material of igneous appearance has been found on the top and the

side slopes of the small mesa, on the structural axis of the basin, The tup 70

to 90 feet of the mesa consists of baked argillite and shale with at least two

thin clinker beds at the base and psendo-basalt dispersed in isolated patches

amongst the argillite near the top, Clinker, ropy lava-like masses and “hambs”

of pseudo-basalt are scattered erratically over the side slopes and some black,

245 W. JOHNSON anv M. J. BUCKNELL

highly ferraginous lumps are concentrated about a small depression in the

surface of the mesa near its central point,

There is a clear-cut division between the normal sediments of the ‘Triassic

succession and the “abnormal” rocks on the mesa. The dividing Ine is the

lowest clinker bed, The succession above this bed, so Far as can be ascertained

from the talus obscured outcrops, consist of (from the top dawnwards):

Huff and pink argillite with plant remains and fresh water

60-80 beet molluscs.

White argillite with molluscs, white paper shale and plauts.

14 inches. Pink, red and greenish-black ash-like material.

6 inches Clinker.

#10 feet White and buff shale.

@ inches Clinker.

The thickness of the individual beds except for the clinker and ash cannot

be determined accurately owing to the talus cover.

‘he pink and bull argillite is highly siliceous (see analysis in the section

im Petrology) and massive, It is hard and tough, though light, and it breaks

with a conchoidal fracture and weathers in angular and cuboidal masses. It

contuims abundant leaf impressions and external casts of molluscs. These are

particularly well displayed on weathered faces of the cuboidal and angular

bhicks, Leaf impressions have been observed within 2 few imches of com-

pletely fused argillite,

The white “paper” shale beneath the pink argillite is 4 soft. crumbly rock

splitting into paper-thin layers with numerous poorly preserved leaf impressions

between the layers. In places the bedding of this shale dips vertically and,

although apparently in situ, is overlain by normally dipping shale.

The clinker at the base of the abnormal succession consists of immexular

small masses of black aphanitic vesicular material whose vesicies are filled in

art with white and yellow substances of possible secondary origin. It is em-

bedded in a layer of vari-coloured powdery material bearing a strong resem-

blance to coal ash, or clay soil strongly heated by buming tree roots.

The only other material of igneous appearance found in situ is the rather

eoarser grained greenish-black “basalt” occurring in flat slabs and thin seams in

the pink argillite. It forms chiefly orizontal tabular masses with irregular out-

lines apparently intrusive into the argillite, and in some places completely en-

veloping pieces of it, In other places thin seams of basalt can be observed in

vertical and subvertical cracks leading up into the horizontal layers, Adjacent

to the contact, in a zone of varying width, the normal pink or buff colour of

the argillite hus beem altered to a light or dark grey.

The other types of igneons-looking material found are small bomb-like

masses; ropy tava, black, highly ferrnginows lumps and louse masses. of heavy

basaltic clinker scattered over the side slopes and the top of the mesa, Ex-

amples are figured in the text and their microscopic appearance is described

in detail by Bucknell in the petrological section of this paper.

THE MODE OF ORIGIN OF THE PSEUDO-IGNEOUS MATERIAL

Although the remarkable resemblance between. some of the material and

volcanic ejectamenta led to 2 consideration of an igneous origin for it, the weight

of field and laboratory evidence points to it huving been formed from argillite

or shale by the heat from burning coal or from gases distilled from the coal.

Firstly, let us examine the evidence af the general circumstances of the

eceanence. In the coal-bearing basin of Triassic rocks at Leigh Creek, some

150 miles north, similar material has been proved hy Parkin (Parkin, 1953) and

PSEUDO-IGNEGUS ROCKS, SPRINGFIELD BASIN 249

Baker (Baker, 1953) to have been formed by heat from burning coal. Likewise.

in other parts of the world numerous occurrences af baked clays and natural

slags are described by various authors (Sherburne Rogers, 1917 ). In fact, it

seems 2 normal occurrence in coalfields, given the right type of coal, suitable

topography and climate.

On the other hand if the material in the Springfield Basin were trul igneuys |

it would be unique, for no other voleunic rocks of Triassic age are known in

Australia west of the Tasman Geosyncline, his, of course, cannot be taken as

proof and stronger evidence against the igneous origin and in support of the

burning coal hypothesis is supplied hy the turm af the material in situ and altera-

tion effects in the argillite. As mentioned above, apart from the clinker Inwer

dwn the. mesa, the “pseudo-hasalt” uecurs as thin, tabular, horizontal musses and

thinner vertical seams or veins. with irregular, but quite sharp, boundaries,

showing chilled edges against the argillite. The vertical scams fill small cracks

and join the horizontal masses frum belaw-

To explain this form of ovcurrence as due to igneous activity would require

a very fluid lava cither flowing by gravity into pre-existing holes and cracks in

the argillite or else intruding the argillite from below. Such a fluid lava implies

quiet volcanic or igneous activity on a large seale. The Auidity and the intru-

sive hypothesis are incompatible with the ropy lava and bombs and scoriaceous

basalt (clinker) and the postulated large-scale volcanic activity is incompathle

with the small volume of igneons material remaining on the mesa.

Two other tacts weighing against an igneous origin are the cumplete absence

of volcanic ur igneous material lower down in the Triassic succession of the

Springhcld Basin and the apparent absence of a neck or pipe representing the

souree of the material,

The unusual chemical and mineralogical composition of the psendo-igneous

material and the variation between its various forms also weigh heavily against

their heing uf common ijmeous origin.

Finally, there is the problem of the quantity of heat required to hake the

argillite. A layer 15 feet thick has been converted tu a hard, tough pink or buff

rock over an area of 400,000 square feet. Though the amonnt of heat needed

to effect this conversion cannot be calculated precisely, it obviously. must have

been large and could only have been supplied by a thick sill or lava flow.

Either of these would surcly have left more traces the fesy remnants found

scattered over the top and slopes of the mesa. Furthermore, it seems doubtful

if even a thick How or sil] could have caused such a thick zune of baking beneath

it becanse of the limited heat transfer in x downwards direction and the lack of

heat renewal in the sill, or lava ow, once emplaced.

To pursue the igneous hypothesis to the end it would be feasible to postulate

small-scale volcanic activity, operating about a locus centred on the mesa, as a

suurce of the heat. This aud have to have been cpi-Triassic to explain the

clinker or scoriae beds towards the base of the mesa, overlain by fossiliferaus

Triassic rocks and surely would have left more evidence of its occurrence.

Turning to tie hypothesis of Fusion of the argillite by heat from burning

coal we find that it presents no inexplicable difficulties. Firstly, coal seams are

known to occur at various levels in tha Triassic succession of the basin, and they -

ave of a similar type to Leigh Creek coals, which are notoriously liable to spon-

taneens combustion. Then, as previously mentioned, it requires no unique

sequence of events, as the formation of the pscudc-igneous rocks or natural

slags, and the large-scale baking of shales overlying coal seams as a result of

combustion of the scams, is a well-known phenomenon recorded at various

places throughout the world, including Leigh Creck.

350 W. JOHNSON anu M, J. BUCKNELL

The eumbustion of one or more thick seams beneath the mesa would have

quite adequately supplied the beat required to bake the argillite and shales at

the top and to partially fuse them.

The patehy occurrence in situ of the pseudo-basalt is explained by_ the

behavicur of the burning eval, Burning and super-heated gases resulting from

the partial combustion of the coal, penetrating upwards through cracks formed in

the strata overlying the coal, would fuse the argillite in situ in places where the

passage of the gases was restricted, or where further combustion tock place, Hot

gases could pass through cracks of capillary size or not much wider and hence

the presence of Java-like material in thin vertical and subverti¢al seams is ade-

quately explained. The presence af quite extensive slabs of pseudu-basale is no

doubt in part due to fowage of completely fused argillite in the hugtest zunes oF

to the extrusion of fused coal ash as postulated by Bucknell.

The presence of bomb-like fragments of pseuda-basalt implies Forceful

ejection of lava im small masses. It is suggested here that the hot and burning

ases from the coal were channelled principally up a crack near the centre o

the wmesa and eventually travelled upwards at sufficient velocity to simulate

the effect of a small volcano, In this phase the small bombs were ejected and

perhaps part af the molten fused argillite extiuded in the form of ropy lava.

The site of this pseudo-volcano is thought te be the small depression near the

centre of mes which is marked by a concentration of heavy, highly ferruginous,

black, angular blocks, A concentration of iron near the channel ways for the

burning gases is noted by Sherburne Rogers (Sherburne Rogers, 1917),

Further support to the burning coal hypothests is given by the variation in

the mineralogical and chemical composition of the natural slags. This is also

discussed in detail by Bucknell.

Other evidence is given by the two clinker beds situated near the base of

the mesa. These consist principally of irregular masses of vesicular light and

lack coloured clinker in a reddish vari-coloured, fine, powdery material identical

with the unfused ash from burning coal, and are overlain in places by white

paper shales tilted on edge. The latter occur erratically around the mesa and

are almost certainly due to slumping of the beds following withdrawal of

support by consumption of the coal beneath.

Taking all the evidence into consideration and coupling it with the wenesal

circumstances of the occurrence there seems little doubt that the pseudo-igneous

rocks aad the baking of the argillite and shale were caused hy heat emanating

from a burning coal seam or stams.

COMPARISON WITH LEIGH CREEK

The two occurrences obviously invite comparison and have many similari-

tics, such as the baking of the shales, the presence of ash from burning coal and

the resemblance of the black aphanitic vesicular clinker at both localities.

There are, however, a number cf differences which are probably chiefly

rb bathe differing topography in the two localities at the time when buming

tuok Place.

At Leigh Creek, so far as can be ascertained by personal inspection and from

descriptions by Beker and Parkin, coarse-grained material similar to the bombs

and “basaltic” slabs of Springfield, do not occur. The “basaltic” material at

SpringSeld also occurs in much larger masses and there is definite evidence that

it formed by fusion of the argillite.

The mineralogical and chemical composition are obviously different but this

may be due principally to difference in composition of the source material. ‘These

differences are discussed in more detail in the comments by Bucknell below.

PSEUDO-IGNEOUS ROCKS, SPRINGFIELD BASTS 351

The chief difference, however, appears to be the stratigraphic position of

the clinker and other pseudo-igneous material in relation to the burnt coal, At

Leigh Cresk it is apparently intermingled with the unfused ash formed by burn-

ing of the coul seam. At Springteld, the slabs, bomb-like fragments, some of

the clinker, and the highly ferruginous lumps are un top of the mesa, are inter-

mixed with the argillite, and on visual evidence, above the level of the burning

seam.

The mincralogical evidence suggests that the temperatures attained were

higher than at Leigh Creek and it is suggested here, that most of the differences

are due to the topographie situation of the coal seams at Springfield,

The mesa occurs on the synclinal axis of the Triassic basin. It is physio-

graphically normal for 4 mesa or ridge to be left by erosion in such a situation

and it is thought ignition of the coal seam or seams took place subsequent to

the cycle of erosion which formed the mesa,

This allowed oxygen to have access to the seams around the perimeter of

the mesa, Following ignition of the coal, cracking occurred in the overlying

rocks, more oxygen was admitted to the coal, and gas, distilled off the coal

ahead of the burning zone, began to pass up through the cracks to the surface

of the mesa. This would soon ignite at the surface and cause 4 forced draft up

the Jarger cracks, drawing in more oxygen from the atmosphere and resulting

in better combustion and higher temperature. The process would be vomnu-

lative, self-sustaining wid would eventually result in the formation of blast

furnace conditions in one or more of the larger cracks, with argillite being fused

up the cracks and at the surface, At the period of iniximum combustion and

emission of gas it is suggested that blobs oF molten fused argillite were ejected

to form the bomb-like fragments.

It seems probable that when the ignition occurred the mesa was not much

larger thun xt present, certainly not having more than twive its present surface

area, Baking of the argillite to a hard porcellanite type material would assist in

the preservation of the mesa by formation of a crust resistant fu weathering, It

seems probable that it uwes its present shape fo that cause.

The likely mechanism of ignition would be spontaneuus combustion after

sudden expusure of the coal seam or seams at one or more points around the

perimeter of the mesa by erasion following torrential rainfall, Burning vf coal

has been noted in America chiefly in areas subjected to rapid cutting of stream

ghannels (Sherburne Rogers, 1917, pp. 2-4).

An alternative explanation would be that the coal seams ignited at a stage

when the Triassic sediments were penepleined to a level approximately that

of the present surface of the mesa and that the mesa mwes its existence to the

reyistance of the hard-baked argillite, The coal searns could have still burnt out

completely due ta their synelinal basin structure. Towever, if this latter ex-

plimation were correct, one would expect remnants ot baked argillite, clinker

und pseudo-igneous material spread over a wider area than its present occur-

rence. The explanation alsa introduces difficulty in explaining the ignition uf

the coal, and on the whole the evidence favours the hypothesis of combustion

in comparatively recent tines when the mesa was not much different in shape

and size than at present.

PETROLOGY OF THE PSEUDO-IGNEOUS HOCKS IX THE

SPRINGFIELD BASIN

The host-rock for intrusive members of the pseudo-voleanic series is 2 sili-

cified, yet highly fossiliterous argillite. This is afteu mottled in pink and grey,

depending on the state of oxidation af the small armmunt of ferruginous matter

258 W. JOHNSON anb M. J, BUCKNELL

present. Sometimes the pink areas can be related to. small fissures; these would

cause oxidation, whether by atmospheric agency or by seepage of hot, oxidizing

vapour. Microscopic examination of a thin section from this material reveals

a mass of very fine, mainly kaolinitie clay which has been impregnated with

secondary silica, giving a hard rock with a conchoidal fracture. There is a

tendency for the clay mineral flakes to be orientated in parallel. The ground

mass also contains traces of zircon, rutile. a chlorite and ue matter, while

sporadic porphyroclasts of quartz coated with secondary silica occur as well as

cavities lined with chalcedony, The chemical analysis of this rock is recurded

in Table 1, column B.

Pseudo-volcanic rocks include the following:

Veinlets intruded into the argillite.

Extruded material resembling “ropy lava”.

“Volcanic bombs”.

Massive vesicular material,

Massive material slightly to non-vesicular.

An example of the argillite with an intruded veinlet is shown in Fig. 1.

Xencliths of the sediment can be seen floating in the intruded material, Fig, 2

is 4 photomicrograph of a thin section across the contact, showing the radial

structure of white and black minerals in the veinlet as well as the concentration

of opaque matter along the margin.

A sample of material having the texture of ropy lava is shown in Fig. 3, and

a chemical analysis is given in Table 1, column D. The rock contains pseudo-

spherulitic grains 0-4-0-8 mm. across, each having a fine-grained centre sur-

rounded by a slightly coarser margin. Rods of alpha-cristohalite, having a

roughly radial orientation, are assuciated with opaque members of the spinel-

magnetite family. A polished surface reveals three spinels, with differing reflec-

tivities, X-ray diffraction analysis showed that the unit cell dimensions in order

of abundance of the constituents were: 8-19A", 8-35A°, 8:40A°, The first of

these is slightly higher than hereynite (8-14A°), and implies same substitution

of ferric iron for aluminium in the octahedral positions of the lattice, siace the

chemical analysis shows no significant amount of any other element which could

enter the spinel structure. The unusual cell dimension suggests a metastable

variéty arising by rapid cooling from a high temperature. This is confirmed by

the presence of cristobalite, which does not normally form below 1470 C,

Photomicrographs illustrating the textures of the thin and polished sections

are shown in Figs. 4 and 5.

Seme small, rounded cobbles resembling volcanic bombs haye been ob-

tained (see Fig. fi), Under the microscope these were secn to possess a Similar

pseudo-spherulitic texture to that of the “ropy lava”. A lower temperature vf

formation is indicated by the occurrence of alplia-tridymite instead of cristo-

balite, as well as the formation of cordierite in the more coarse, outer zones nf

the spherical aggregates. This cordierite has refractive indices (1-56-1-58) cor-

responding tu the iron-bearing member of the series, and is pleochroic From

colourless to violet; the uptic axial angle is negative and low. It also vives a

slightly unusual X-ray diffraction pattern. Locally, this mineral has been pini-

tized lo a pale biotite, associated with chalcedony and silica class.

In Fig, 7 the texture of the material in thin section is portrayed, Fig, 8 is

taken from a polished surface, and shaws two members of the spinel family.

Most of the grains appear to he compusites of the two and would probably all

be so if the grain were viewed in three dimensivns; this suggests that unmixing

has taken place. The spinel and magnetite families probably form mix-crystuls

at very high temperatures. and these separate into two phases on cooling, ‘ Unit

PSEUDO-IGNEOUS ROCKS, SPRINGFIELD BASIN 253

cell dimensions similar to the extreme members in the “ropy lava” were obtained

from the X-ray diffraction pattern.

Similar textures are found in the massive vesicular material. But in this

case the cordierite has been completely altered to a pale biotite, while silica

glass separates the tridymite from the opaque fraction. Many of the cavities

are lined with chalcedony, geothite, or limonite; the formation of these sub-

stances, as well as the breakdown of the cordierite, was aided by the vesicular

texture. Small amounts of zircon and rutile may point to a sedimentary origin

for some of the material. A chemical analysis is given in Table 1, column C.

Rocks containing only a few vesicles, or none at all, have been studied. The

radial and “spherulitic” structures are absent and the individual crystals larger.

Chemical analysis (Table 1, column E) of one containing u few vesicles gives a

Si:Fe ratio approximating to fayalite. No fayalite has, however, been observed

in the specimen, which consisls of an irregular network of tridymite rods with

interstitial opaque grains. The latter are mostly titaniferous magnetite, which

is martitized to haematite in an irregular fashion. Every grain is criss-crossed

with exsolution lamellae, believed to be of another spinel, forming along definite

crystallographic directions in the magnetite, and persisting unaffected in the

haematite. Some of the grains are partly free of these exsolution bodies, the

clear portions being composed of spinel or titaniferous haematite. The features

of these opaque grains are shown in Figs. 9 and 10.

Iron-bearing chalcedony fills the interstices of the tridymite rods while some

of the former vesicles now contain ferric oxide in various states of hydration.

Fig, 11 is a photomicrograph of a thin section taken from this material.

The other variety is non-vesicular and highly magnetic. Roughly polygonal

grains of the various spinels already described are set in a siliceous matrix (sec

Fig. 12). No chemical analysis has been obtained for this rock-type, but it

certainly has lower silica and higher iron contents than any of the other species

described,

TABLE I,

A B Cc Db E

{ Highly vesicular Slightly

Coal Ash from! Argilites © “'spherulitie’ | “Ropy lava | vesicular

lower seam =} rock \ rok

si0, 69-14 6862 | 52°23 BO 4 wG-54

ALO 20-08 22308 17-78 17-88 6-43

Ke,0, 2-18 B03 es 12:7 45-20

Fa) 1a.) 12a VT

MgO 0-70 0-10 0-28 0-34 0-10

Cad 1-72 0-52 0-32 0-36 0-16

Nu,0 14d | = ~ =

K,0 98 _ — | — —

H,O - Nil 0-58 O31 \ 043 0-20

H,Q+ 0-24 — = — —

TiO, 1°75 1-94 12 1+A8 0-92

AQ 1-4¢ 0:04 08 \ (10 0-19

Ol 0-01 0-03 Ol Or 3 0:01

MnQ Ot 0-08 Oe 1h (25 0:48

Loss on

ignition ' ‘ Bedi 0-43 0-92 O-l4

Total ; 80 66 8-10 46-40 96-78 97-37

The Chemical Analyses; (Analyst P.. C. Hemingway)

23+ W, JOHNSON ann M. J. BUCKNELL

The first analysis given in Table L refers to the ash from a coal seam lower

in the succession. Apart from somewhat higher magnesia, lime and sulphur

in the former, the coal ash and the argillite ave strikin sly similar in compositinn.

Proportion of alkalies in the latter are not given, but the low lime and magnesia

content is consistent with deposition in a freshwater and slightly acid environ-

ment (Pettijolin, 1956). The low percentage of iron is 4 significant feature, while

the high titania content is not wholly explicable in terms of the mineral com-

usition.

d tn column E the composition of the massive. slightly vesicular rock iflus-

trated in Figs, Y-11 is given, This is cunsistent with the minerals present, Iighly

significant is. the fact that e:Si ratio closely conferms to that of fayalite.

~ Amilyses of the highly vesicular ruck clescribed ahove, as well as the “ropy

lava" (Figs, 3-5) are shown in columns C and D respectively.

It may he sately assumed that the “bombs” illustrated in Figs. 6-8 have a

kindred analysis. Columns C and D are alike, and both are intermediate in

cumpousitim between A and FE; in fact, a mixture of 14-2 parts of the argillite

with ene of the “fayalitic magna” would give a rock with a similar analysis. The

unly component thut does net conform is the magnesium —the high content of

this in C and D may be related to the subsequent development of biotite,

although the sontee of this element is obsente. The tise in SO,— content from

the arsillite to the “fayalitie rock” may have some hearing on the genesis of

this series,

Comparison with the Natural Clinker at Leigh Creek

BKueker (1953) has described tour samples of clinker collected from the upper

ena) seam, lobe “D") in the North basin at the Leigh Creek coalfield. This

includes Jight-and-dark coloured vesicular as well as non-vesicular types; he

also mentions that the associated shale has been baked and reddencd in a similar

manner to the argillite from the Springfield basin. Chemical analyses of the

eoal ash and of the varians clinkers are quoted; there has been a significant and

not nnexpected fall in the proportion ot soda, sulphur and chlorine from the

Farmer to the latter, as well as a notable rise in lime and alumina, Chemically,

the clinkers vary considerably amongst themselves only in their iron and silica

contents (inversely) and in the amount of residual soda and sulphur. These

facts are summarized in Table 2, columns F and G, in which the analyses are

reproduced for purposes of comparison, It is obyious that this material is quite

different from any of the specimens from the Springfield basin that have heen

analyzed. The high proportion of calcium and magnesium in the Leigh Creek

clinkers would probably lead to a higher range of fusion temperatures, a mare

sensitive equilibrium between liquid and solid, and a greater variety of miucrals,

including pyraxencs (Litunaugite, fassaite), plagioclase and gehlenite. Baker

quotes Fusion temperatures for the ash between 1250° C. and 1300° C. under

reducing conditions. Also the molten ash remained within, or close to, the

seam, where locally the teducing atmosphere aided the formation of native [ron

and iron sulphides.

In the Springfield basin the ash uppears ta have heen practically free of

the more refractory elements so that a liquid of Fayalitic compositian was ob-

tained it a tenmperuture of about 1205° C. (Bowen aud Schairer, 1938; Barrett,

1945).

The subsequent behaviour of this liquid would depend partly on the oxida-

tion-keduction potential and partly on the small amount of alumina present.

The Leigh Greck clinkers carry spinel, magnetite and haematite as do the

Fused rocks at Springfield, It seems that the former, by remaining in situ, became

PSEUDO-IGNEOUS KOCKS, SPRINGFIELD BASIN 253

lueally subject to more oxidizing conditions, as evidenced by the presence af

haematite and magnetite. Exsolution bodies of spinel fram magnetite (see

Figs. 9-10} occurring along definite crystallographic directions are reported from

both, The Leigh Creek spinel would appear to be more magnesian, 25 would

be expected [rom the composition of the mineral matter in the coal seam.

Comparison with Overseas Occurrences

Sherburne Rogers (1917) has discussed the factors conducive to spontaneous

combustion of a coal seam, and describes the effect of this on strata overlying

seams in various parts of Montana, U.S.A. The strata are silicified plant-bearing

shales; near the scam they are red or mottled by baking, as at Springfield.

Fusion has resulted in vitrified, glassy and recrystallised slags, the first some-

times having a ropy lava texture and the second containing true spherulites.

Both these varieties are devoid of recognisable crystals, The recrystallised

material from the sendy shale has diopside and labradorite. Magnetite and

almandite also ocenr; the latter should change to hereynite, iron cordicrite and

fayalite above 780° C. at normal pressures (Yoder, 1955) and this would be

an unusually low temperature of crystallisation, When derived from aluminous

shale, the slag has sillimanite, cordierite and ? spinel. In the chimney above

the coal seam is a mass of spinel and haematite, and it is suggested that iron is

distilled trom the seam as ferric chloride vapour.

At Springheld, however, the ash from a lower seam is practically devoid

of chlorine, and this element is not significantly enriched in the pseudo-volcanics

as compared to the argillite; contrast the rise in the sulphur content. The

chemical analyses of the two types of Montana clinker is shown in Table 2,

columns H and I, and the composition is intermediate between that of the

Springfield and Leigh Creek coal ashes for most of the constituents.

Fused shale from East Wyoming (Bastin, 1905) has oligoclase, pyroxene,

cordierite, magnetite and haematite, while magnetile, cordierite, epidote. placio-

clase, tridymite and spinel are reported in similar rocks from the Boehmischen

Mittelgebirge (Hibsch, 1908).

F Leigh Creek Upper Seam “D Lohe Ash (Analyst T. W. Dalwood)

G Leigh Crsek Clinker-—Average and varianco of four analyses (Analyst G. C. Carlas)

A Montana U.S.A. Reerystallisnd from Sandy Shale (Analyst G, C, Carlos)

fF Montana U.5,A, Reerystallised from Aluminous Shale (Anolyst G. 8. Ragers)

TARLE 3,

| G H | )

SiO, 2-3 | 25-5 9 (ib-41 58430

ALO, 14-Bh 21-6 ag 11-94 20450

Ka, (2-3 [2-4 =8+5 7-38 4:33

Fat) = Be 2-45 0-745 | 0-46

MgO ray 4:3 —O6 1-50 | 1st

CaO 14e78 Wed E18 5-02 | 4-40

Nu," Ld- 1g g-0 rad 2-R3 : 1-46

K,0 0-6 O-3 ba recy 2-28

Ho — | — fed -E0-3 O08 1-03

H,0+ = 12 70-6 0-50 1.90

TID, 1-260 1-4 “10-05 1-17 0-28

805 l4-SL Ss=2-11 261 0-22 o-U

Cl 2-86 O-2 “LO =

co, = 08 0-8 | 1-A7 3-37

PLO; t 1:76 20 -0+8 trace trace

MnO | ay OL 0-2 a 0-18

256 W, JOHNSON ano M. J. BUCKNELI.

Petrnyenesis

‘The spontaneous combustion of low-grade coal, whether at surface or in

(lisused mines, is a well-known phenomenon occurring in various parts of the

world. Ignition of surface exposures may arise where the surface gradient is

steep, such as would arise from a quick cutting streain (Sherburne Rogers,

1917) or where the seam is capped by a fairly hard indurated rock as at Spring-

field, Once the coal has ignited, it will bum away from the exposed face. As

the Springfield outlier has an elliptical shape the coal would have burned tu-

wards the centre, the overlying strata slamping down in the wake of the advanc-

ing fire. Both low and high angle fissires were probably developed, the former

acting as inlets for the air and the latter as chimneys for the combustion pro-

dnets and distilled volatile constitutents. Heat accumulated owing to the con-

fined space and poor thermal conductivity of the coal, and temperatures of 1200°

C. fr more were attained.

Reducing conditions prevailed at the level af the coal scam, so that at about

1205° C. a liquid of essentially fayalitie compusition was produced, The source

of the iron necessary for this liquid is obscure, since both the ash from a lower

seam and also the argillite are very deficient in this element; possibly it came

from ferruginous bands within the seam or immediately above it. Coal scams

alwavs fire at or near the top (Shechurne Rogers, 1917), However, a liquid of

fayalitic composition would melt ont, whatever the local Si;Fe ratio, and would

dissilye the residual constituent orly when the temperature was further elevated,

Generally, however, it would be squeezed up into the chimney cracks by the

pressure of the overlying strata, as a foaming liquid containing bubbles of dis-

tillate (methane and other hydrocarbons, hydrogen), carbon monoxide, and pos-

sibly some hydrogen sulphide. tn the upper fissures the addition of air led to

further oxidation of the volatiles, Heat from this reaction raised the tempera-

ture still further and enibled the liquid to dissolve up to twice its own weight of

emintry rock. When distillation ceased this was not possible, so that the non-

vesicular specimens ave poor in dissolyed_ silica.

At the surface a tunperature of more than 1470° C. was sometimes attained,

so that on chilling cristobalite was formed. Sudden slumping of the overburden

caused the liquid to spurt up and be extruded in the form of rounded nodules

or “ropy lava”. The former may have been ejected from smaller fissures, where

the high ratio of surface area tu volume resulted in a higher heat loss and a

iperet said temperatnre, so that tridymite mstead of cristnbalite was

ormed.

The change fram reducing to oxidizing conditions affected the subsequent

crystallization, Goldschmidt (1954) suggests that an oxidiving potential would

prevent the formation of fayalite, spinel and magnetite being produced instead,

lt has been caleulated that the complete combustion of a Foot of sub-

hitnminous coul would provide enough heat to raise the teraperature of 100 feet

of shale by 300° C. Considerzble heat loss would arise at the level of the seam

especially in the initial stayes as well as where the fused material was extruded.

Tluwever, heat Inss at the ends of narrow fissures would be small compared to

that conducted aut through the country rock. It therefore appears that enough

heat would be evolved ta bake and redden the argillite. This process wonld

carry On for some time after the material in the fissures had solidified.

CONCLUSION

The field evidence points tu the basult-lke clinkers and other material of

igneous appearance being natural slags formed during combustion of a coal

seam under a small mesa in the triassic sediments of the Springficld Basin, The

PSEUDO-IGNEOUS ROCKS, SPRINGFIELD BASIN 257

petrological evidence supports this and indicates that the slags were formed

by fusion of coal ash and argillite and modified by interaction between slag and

unfused argillite.

Combustion of the coal seam was complete due to its topographic situation,

outcropping around the perimeter and some height above the base of the mesa,

This probably also contributed to a rapid rate of burning and consequent tela-

tive rapid rise in temperature of the rocks above the coal seam.

Partial differentiation of the semi-fused: coal ash by pressure from the

supcrincumbent strata accounts for some of the peculiarities of composition of

the natural slags.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

This paper is published by kind permission of the Director of Mines.

Thanks are also due to Mr. L. W. Parkin for encouragement and helpful discus-

sion during the writing of the paper. Chemical analyses and X-ray diffraction

studies were made by P. C, Hemingway and A. E. Tynan, respectively, of the

Research and Development Branch, Department of Mines.

REFERENCES

Baker, G., 1953. Naturally fused coal ash from Leigh Creek, South Australia, ‘Trans, Roy.

Soc. S. Aust., 76, pp. 1-20,

Barrett, E. P., 1945. The fusion, flow and clinkering of coal ash—a survey of the chemical

background, Chemistry of Coal Utilization (AH, H. Lowry, Editor), chap. 15. (John

Wiley & Sons.)

Bastin, E, 5,; 1905. Note on haked clays and natural slags in eastern Wyoming, Jour.

Geology, 13, pp. 408-412.

Bowen, N. C., and Scitamen, J. F., 1938, Crystallisation equilibrium in nepheline-albite-

silica ‘mixtures with fayalite, Jour, Geology, 46, pp. 397-411.

Gorpscumipt, V, M,, 1954, Gcochemistry, p, 653 (Clarendon Press),

Hisscu, J. E., 1908, Geologische Karte des boehmischen Mittelgebirges; Min. pet Mitt., 27,

. 35-40,

Paaci, L. W., er ar., 1953. The Leigh Creek Coalfield, Bull. 31, Geol. Surv. S. Aust.

Prertiyonn, F. J., 1956. Sedimentary Rocks, p. 360. (Harper and Bros.)

SHERBURNE RoceRs, G., 1917. Baked slag and shale formed by the burning of coal beds.

United States Geological Survey, Professional Paper 108-A.

Yover, H. S,, 1955. Crust of the carth. Geol, Soc. Amer. Memoir,

a. EPL A UMAQNAD TULWOYS “ARE AOE JO Wetjoas Ley | —"F ‘SI oats [RINWO N By UAB] Adoy..—'¢ “Blyy

s(P YOO yoos 1 ply “aqyenay— pay

JOUNSON

|OHNSON AND BUCKNELL PLATE 2

possibly from mivx-

P=) EA

Zz SI

faa

z wn

bh S

Fs ‘

= =

o :

* =

z 9

~ +

e .

“ re

je] &

Re a

ee 2

om z

Fig,

= "3

a nf

is =

— a

wn #

re] =

= -

as =

rrr ~— &

= 2

. 2%

rai o

= in 2

= — =

o = @

o Sf &

Z oan

+ a °

S je

an =

¥ Fi

Pe 56

= “4

= ~ oh

5 -~ =

& 2a

igo) =

a 5

; E

te) |

&h ~

Joutds jo surei [et NOE X “aou YOF—sBl ‘Sty

JEAN

faa)

JOHNSON

A SURVEY OF THE MOSQUITOES OF COONALPYN DOWNS,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

by E. J. WATERHOUSE*

[Read 9 October 1958]

SUMMARY

A survey of the mosquitoes of Coonalpyn Downs during the period January

to March, 1952, is reported. Twelve species have been collected either as larvae

or as adults; three are recorded from South Australia for the first time.

The relationship of the distribution and abundance of various species of

adults to the type and frequency of breeding places has been investigated.

INTRODUCTION

The Australian Mutual Provident Society in 1949 initiated a land develop-

ment scheme in the Upper South-East of South Australia. During January to

early March, 1952, at the request of this Society, the author made a survey of

the mosquito fauna on a portion of the Coonalpyn Downs in the area to be

developed. The primary objectives were to determine the mosquito species

occurring in the area, whether these could be vectors of myxomatosis in rabbits,

and how the disease could be exploited. The area surveyed was approximately

200 square miles.

The present paper records some notes on the biology and distribution of

the mosquitoes collected during this survey. Mosquitoes had not previously

been collected from the area although Lines collected to the north-west and

west during 1951-1956 (in preparation), Waterhouse in 1953-1954 made col-

lections further north in the Murray Mallee in South Australia (in preparation),

and Douglas collected in the north-west Mallee area in Victoria in 1955-1956

(in preparation ).

Development of this land has been hindered by the low fertility of the soils

and by problems of management. Settlement is now rapidly expanding, largely

as a result of an increased knowledge of the fertilizer requirements of the soils

and improved methods of clearing. Much of the area in this survey had not

been cleared or settled. It was anticipated that an increase in the rabbit popu-

lation following clearing might menace sown pastures.

DESCRIPTION OF THE AREA

The topography, soils, vegetation and availability of water in the Coonalpyn

Downs area surveyed have been described in detail by Taylor (1933), Coal-

drake (1951), Blackburn et al. (1953), and by Jackson and Litchfield (1954).

The area is part of an extensive sandy plain between the South Australian

coast and the Victorian border and is covered mainly by low shrubs, known col-

lectively as heath, and by mallee-eucalypt rarely higher than 15 feet.

The area is in the “warm temperate” zone of Davidson (1936) with a mean

annual temperature of 55-60° F. and a growing season for pastures, as defined by

* Wildlife Survey Section, C.S.1.R.O., Regional Pastoral Laboratory, Armidale, New

South Wales.

Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1959), Vol. 82.

260 E. J. WATERHOUSE

Trumble (1948), from May to November. The rainfall has been analysed by

Coaldrake (1951), who indicates that the greatest local variations in the monthly

totals occur in the summer months. Because of the porous nature of the soils,

surface streams have not developed in the area, and surface waters are restricted

to shallow swamps, excavated water-holes and dams, and shallow wells.

Two approximately parallel ranges of sand-covered, limestone hills, the

Stirling Range and the Black Range, 100-200 feet in altitude and running north-

west to Southteawt divide the area surveyed (see Fig. 1).

SOUTH

AUSTRALIA

VICTORIA

9 4 6 MILES

Fig. 1—Locality Map: Location of portion of Coonalpyn Downs in South Australia surveyed

for mosquitoes—1952. Key to Hundreds: C——Cannawigara. L—Laffer. M—Marcollat.

P—Pendleton. PE—Petherick. S—Stirling. SE—Senior. W—wWillalooka. WJ—Wirrega.

The area south-west of the Black Range (referred to subsequently as Divi-

sion 1) was relatively undeveloped at the time of the survey and is comprised

largely of swampy flats. These flats are mostly very saline and carry either

samphire (Salicornia spp., Arthrocnemum spp.) in the wetter areas, or cutting-

MOSQUITOES OF COONALPYN DOWNS 201

grass (Cladium spp.) or red-gum (Eucalyptus camaldulensis) in those areas

which are wet for only part of the year and are less saline than the samphire

flats. In Division 1, during the period of the survey, most of the mosquito

breeding-places were waterholes. Most swamps were dry; those which did con-

tain water were relatively unproductive of mosquitoes.

Between Black Range and the Stirling Range (referred to subsequently as

Division 2) the area had been largely developed for agricultural purposes. The

natural vegetation consists of heath (Banksia spp., Casuarina spp., and Xanthor-

rhoea spp.), mallee-heath associations (Eucalyptus incrassata) on well-drained

soils, mallee-broom association (E. inerassata, Melaleuca uncinata) on the moder-

ately drained soils, and mallee-tea-tree associations (Eucalyptus spp. and Mela-

leuca spp.) on the poorly drained soils which are liable to water-logging and are

very saline.

In Division 2 the potential mosquito breeding-places are of two types: (1)

Shallow ground waters, which may be at the tivaes or down to 25 feet below

the surface. These are saline, but provide the bulk of the mosquito breeding-

places in the form of shallow wells and water-holes; (2) Much less saline waters

pumped from 100 to 200 feet; these supply the stock-watering tanks and troughs,

which are common. The latter potential mosquito breeding-places were of

much less importance than those provided by the shallow ground waters.

East of the Stirling Range (referred to subsequently as Division 3) the

area covered by the survey was mainly undeveloped. The vegetation is a

complex of mallee-broom-bush association (Eucalyptus incrassata, E, leptophylla-

Melaleuca wncinata) and pink-gum (E. fasciculosa).

In this division the only source of permanent underground water is in the

marine limestone 50 to 200 feet below the surface. The salinity of the water

is high. Surface waters in the form of soakages, springs and dams are not

common. Gilgai zones occupying the lowest or most poorly drained sites are

extensive in the Hundred of Senior and extend westward into the Hundred of

Cannawigara; small areas also occur in the Hundred of Pendleton. These gilgai

areas probably provide breeding places for mosquitoes during wet seasons.

METHODS

Ten visits were made to Division 1 from 12.1.52 to 29.2.52. Eighteen water-

holes, representing approximately a third of the estimated number within the

Division, were examined for mosquito larvae. Most of these were inspected

only once, three were visited twice, and two were visited on three dates, at

approximately weekly intervals in February. Two shallow wells, one inspected

twice, and one fresh-water rain tank, one small dam, and two swamps were also

examined. Of the latter group, the swamps provide the major potential breeding

areas for mosquitoes. Because this Division is relatively undeveloped, wells,

tanks and dams were rare.

During the same period, six visits were made to Division 2 where three

waterholes, nine wells, five tanks, and eight troughs were examined for mos-

quito larvae; these all received one visit each. Water-holes were not as frequent

as in Division 1; the important breeding places were provided by shallow wells.

Only a small proportion of the total potential breeding areas was visited.

Four visits were made to Division 3 from 17.1.52 to 11.3.52. Nine water-

holes or soakages (practically the total number in the Division), two of which

were dry, seven wells, and two dams were examined. The wells comprised

approximately half those present in the area; only two could be examined for

mosquito larvae as the depth to the water surface in the others was over 100 feet.

262 E. J. WATERHOUSE.

Mosquito larvae were sampled by dipping from surface pools and shallow

wells, and from deeper wells by lowering a conical net which had a glass tube

fitted at the bottom of the net. Individual larvae were reared where possible, the

resulting adults pinned, and the corresponding larval and pupal sloughs and

representative samples of larvae preserved in Pampel’s fluid. Adult mosquitoes

were collected in the field in a cyanide killing bottle as they came to man.

RESULTS

Larval Mosquitoes

Five species of mosquito were collected as larvae. These were:

Anopheles (Myzomyia) annulipes Walker

Aedes (Finlaya) notoscriptus (Skuse)

Aedes (Ochlerotatus) camptorhynchus (Thomson)

Culex (Culex) globocoxitus Dobrotworsky

Culex (Culex) pipiens australicus Dobrotworsky and Drummond.

Of these five, An. annulipes and C. globocoxitus were commonly found to-

gether and were the most widespread. ‘The latter were frequently more abun-

ant (5 to 10 per dip) than An. annulipes (1 to 5 per dip). Although adults

of Aedes alboannulatus were more abundant than other species of mosquitoes,

the larvae were not found.

Larval Habitats

The main mosquito breeding-places during this survey were water-holes and

shallow wells; 24 out of 28 water-holes, and 10 out of 15 shaJlow wells contained

larvae. Two out of six tanks contained larvae; one of these was the only fresh-

water rain tank with the top practically covered and it contained large numbers

of A. notoscriptus larvae. The other was an open tank with a few C. globocoxitus

larvae which were probably pumped into the tank with the water from a well.

Four out of eight troughs examined contained larvae of C. globocoxitus, An.

annulipes and C. pipiens australicus in that order of dominance and frequency;

these four troughs were very dirty and were those with the ball-float covered so

that a relatively sheltered situation was provided. The only species found in

the shaded edges of the swamps examined, or in the small pools nearby, was An.

annulipes in low numbers. No mosquito larvae were found in the eight dams

examined; which all had relatively large expanses of exposed windswept water-

surfaces with no emergent vegetation.

The water in most of the breeding places ranged from non-saline to slightly

saline as determined by tasting.

Details of the main larval habitats are as follows:

(a) Water-holes

The water-holes were of two main types — natural surface pools, and holes

excavated to expose the water table. The latter had three steep sides varying

in height from 3 to 6 feet, and the water, which was up to 3 feet below the

ground level, was directly available to stock on the fourth side. Thus the water

surface along three sides was relatively well sheltered. The surface areas of

these pools were rarely greater than 200 square feet.

The larvae of C. globocoxitus and An. annulipes were frequently found to-

gether. Neither species appeared to tolerate very saline conditions, but C.

globocoxitus seemed to be more tolerant of moderately saline conditions than

An. annulipes. A. camptorhynchus larvae were found only in very saline pools.

(b) Wells

Larvae were more common in wells in which the depth to the water surface

was less than 12 feet. Larvae of C. globocoxitus were collected from wells in

7 - "

MOSQUITOES OF COONALPYN DOWNS 263

which the water surface was as much as 24 feet below ground level; larvae, prob-

ably of the same species, but not specifically identified, were collected in the

Hundred of Pendleton (Division 3) from a well in which the water surface

was 80 feet below ground. C. globocoxitus occurred in both covered and un-

covered wells. In contrast, An. annulipes was found only in wells in which the

surface of the water was not more than 12 feet below ground level and was

exposed to sunlight. These two species were occasionally found together, and

one or the other species was nearly always found to be present in the wells.

Few C. pipiens australicus larvae were found, either associated with these two

species or alone.

Few of the larvae which were collected from wells were reared to adults

i as they had a much higher mortality rate in rearing tubes than those which

were collected from the sunlit water-holes.

Adult Mosquitoes

Eleven species of adult mosquitoes were collected. These were:

Anopheles (Myzomyia) annulipes Walker

Anopheles (Anopheles) atratipes Skuse

Aedes (Finlaya) alboannulatus (Macquart)

Aedes (Finlaya) notoscriptus (Skuse)

Aedes (Ochlerotatus) camptorhynchus (Thomson)

Aedes (Ochlerotatus) sagax (Skuse

Aedes (Pseudoskusea) bancroftianus Edwards

Aedes (Chaetocruiomyia) undescribed sp.

Aedes (Macleaya) tremula (Theobald)

Culex (Culex) globocoxitus Dobrotworsky

Culex (Culex) fatigans Wiedemann.

Of these, An. atratipes, A. bancroftianus, and an undescribed species of

Aedes (Chaetocruiomyia) were recorded for the first time from South Australia.

Locality and date records for these species are as follows:

Anopheles atratipes

Hundred of Marcollat, Section 7, “Leder Swamp”, 26.2.52.

Aedes bancroftianus

Hundred of Pendleton, Block H, 28.2.52.

Aedes (Chaetocruiomyia) sp. (undescribed )

Hundred of Senior, Section 42, 17.1.52; Section 36, 11.3.52;

Hundred of Pendleton, Section 3, 28.2.52;

Hundred of Petherick, Section 2, 23.2.52.

Adult mosquitoes generally, as determined by their biting of man, were

present in relatively low numbers. For those species present in sufficiently

large numbers to enable comparisons to be made, it appeared that in Divisions

1 and 2 A. alboannulatus was more abundant than An. annulipes. In Division 3

these two species were equally common but were much less abundant than in

Divisions I and 2.

The only other adult mosquito which was at all widespread or abundant

was A. (Chaetocruiomyia) sp. which was largely confined to Division 3.

| DISCUSSION

| At the time of the survey, C. globocoxitus, An. annulipes, and A. alboannu-

latus, either as larvae or adults, were widespread; these species occurred most

frequently in Division 1 and least in Division 3. This is closely related to the

relative availability of suitable breeding places in the three Divisions. Like-

264 E. J. WATERHOUSE

wise, A. camptorhynchus larvae and adults were found only in Division 1, the

only one in which very saline pools occur. C. pipiens australicus was found only

in the non-saline and very slightly saline waters in Divisions 2 and 3. The wide-

spread distribution of A. (Chaetocruiomyia) sp. in Division 3 suggests that its

range probably extends further east and north into similar country in the “Big

Desert” area in South Australia and Victoria.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Preliminary identifications of the mosquitoes were made by Mr. F. N. Rat-

cliffe, Officer-in-Charge, Wildlife Survey Section, C.S.I.R.O., and later were

checked by Mr. N. V. Dobrotworsky, Zoology Department, Melbourne Univer-

sity, Mr. D. J. Lee, School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, Sydney, and

Dr. E. N. Marks, Zoology Department, University of Brisbane.

The helpful suggestions of Mr. D. C. Swan, head of the Entomology De-

partment, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Adelaide University, and also

the special facilities made available by this Department during the course of

this survey are acknowledged. Special thanks are also due to Mr. David

Kentish, formerly the Research Liaison Officer of the Land Development Scheme,

A.M.P. Society, for his interest and help in the initial reconnaissance of the area.

Permission granted by the A.M.P. Society to publish the material contained in

this paper is acknowledged.

REFERENCES

Buackgurn, G., LitcurieLtp, W. H., Jackson, E. A., and Lovepay, J., 1953. A survey of

soils and land use in part of the Coonalpyn Downs, South Australia, C.S.I.R.O., Aust.

Div. Soils, Soils Land Use Ser. No. 8.

CoauprakE, J. E., 1951.—The climate, geology, soils and plant ecology of portion of the

County of Buckingham (Ninety-Mile Plain), South Australia. C.S.1.R.O., Aust. Bull.

No. 266,

Davison, J., 1936.—Climate in relation to insect ecology in Australia. Bioclimatic zones

in Australia, Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 60, pp. 88-92.

Jackson, E. A., and Lircarrerp, W. H., 1954.—Soils and land use of part of County Card-

well, Coonalpyn Downs, South Australia. C.S.I.R.O., Aust. Div. Soils, Soils Land Use

Ser. No. 14.

Taytor, J. K., 1933.—A soil survey of the Hundreds of Laffer and Willalooka, South Aus-

tralia. Counc. Sci. Industr. Res. Aust. Bull. No. 76.

Trumsie, H. C., 1948.—Rainfall, evaporation and drought frequency in South Australia.

J. Agric. S. Aust,, 52, pp. 55-64,

AN ACCOUNT OF PLAGIORCHIS MAC ULOSUS (RUD.), ITS SYNONYMY

AND ITS LIFE HISTORY IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY MADELINE ANGEL

Summary

A historical account of the parasitic ttematode Plagiorchis maculosus (Rud.) since its description in

1802 is given. An amended diagnosis of the species is given. It is recorded from South Australia

from the birds Hirundo neoxena, Rhipidura leucophrys, R, flabellifera, Gymnorhina hypoleuca, and

Pomatostomus superciliosus. Two trematodes from Grallina cyanoleuca may also be Plagiorchis

maculosus. To avoid confusion in taxonomy, it is urged that authors give full details of treatment

and fixation of worms. It is also desirable to know the age of the worm, and the number of

specimens examined. Given details such as these, it is possible to make allowance for characters

which may be variable. Tables are given, showing measurements of P. maculosus recorded by

different authors since Rudolphi; of other species which are discussed for synonymy; and of South

Australian specimens which have been studied in the present investigation. A history of knowledge

of the life history is followed by an account of the life history in South Australia, in P. mdosus

from swallows, wagtails, babblers and, experimentally, chickens. A description of the various laryal

stages is given. The size of the stylet in the cercaria should not be used as a diagnostic character in

this species. The synonymy is discussed. Plagiorchis clelandi, P. spatulatus, P. notubilis and P.

orientalis are given as synonyms. It is suggested that examination of the types of Plagiorchis sp.

from insectivorous birds, or animals which (normally or accidentally) ingest insects, may reduce the

number of species still further. Plagiorchis russii is shown to be invalid, being a synonym of P.

potanini. The three varieties, Plagiorchis muculosus anatis, P. maculosus citelli and P. maculosus

motacillae, are discussed. The variety citelli shows no differences from the typical form, and is

made a synonym. If the large size of the testes is a uniform character, the variety anutis stands, with

var. motacillae a synonym.

AN ACCOUNT OF PLAGIORCHIS MACULOSUS (RUD.), ITS SYNONYMY

AND ITS LIFE HISTORY IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by Mavrting ANcEL*®

[Read 9 October 1958]

SUMMARY

A historical account of the parasitic trematode Plagiorchis maculosus (Rub)

since its description in 1802 is given.

An-amended diagnosis of the species is given,

It is recorded from South Australia from the birds Hirundo neoxena, Rhipi-

dura leucophrys, R, flabellifera, Gymnorhina kypoleuca, and Pomatastomus

superciliosus, Two trematodes from Grallinu cyancleuca may also be Plagiorchis

maculosus.

To avoid confusion in taxonomy, it is urged that authors give full details

of treatment and fixation of worms. It is also desirable ta know the age of ihe

worm, and the number of specimens examined. Given details such as these, it

is possible to make allowauce for characters which may be variable,

Tables are given, showing measurements of P. maculosus recorded by

different authors since Rudolphi; of other species which ure discussed for

synonymy; and of South Australian specimens which have been studied in the

present investigation.

A history of knowledge of the life history is followed by an account of the

life history in South Australia, nm P. muculosus from swallows, wagtails, babblers

and, experimentally, chickens.

A description of the various Jarval stages is given. The size of the stylet

in the cercaria should not be used as a diagnostic character in this species.

The synonymy is discussed. Plegiorchis clelundi, P. spatuletus, P. notabills

and P.. orientalis are given as synonyms. It is suggested that examination of

the types of Plagiorchis sp. from insectivorons birds, or animals which (norm-

ay. accidentally) ingest insects, may reduce the mimber of spevics still

rther.

Plagiorchis russit is shown to be invalid, being a synonym of , prteanini.

The three varieties, Plagiorchis maculosus anatis, P. mutulosus eitelli ancl

P, maculosus motacillae, ave discussed, ‘The variety citelli shows no differences

from the typical form, and is made a synonym. If the large size: of the testes

is a uniform character, the variety anatis stands, with var. motacillae a synonyar

INTRODUCTION

In 1802, Rudolphi described Fasciola maculosa from the terminal part of the

intestine of Hirwndo rustica. He gave as synonyms Fasciola hirundinis Froelich

(1791) and Distema hirundinum Zeder (1800), from the rectum of Hirundo

apus and H. urbica respectively, mentioning that, though their descriptions

differed in many respects, the worm itsclf was very variable. In 1809 (p, 374)

he referred ta it as Distoma maculosum, and in 1819 (pp, 382-3) recorded it

(by this natne) fom Caprimulgus europaeus.

The species was recorded or listed by various authors in the following

century, but it was not until 1902 that an adequate figure was published, by

Braun, who assigned the species to the genus Plagiorchis Liihe (1899).t

* Departnent of Zoology, University of “Adelaide. -

+On the same day that Lithe’s generic name appeared, Looss published the name

Lepoderma for the same genus, Lithe did not name the genotype ¢ill later, and it would

seem that Lepoderma should have had priority. However, relatively few workers have used

the name since that time, and Plagiorchis. seerns now commonly accepted, although Dollfus

in 1949, referring to family Lepodermatidae, gave Plagiovchidae as a synonym.

Trans, Roy. Seo. 8. Aust. (1959), Vol, #2,

Ye L. M. ANGEL

Braun examined Rudolphi’s specimens, which he stated had deteriorated

over the years, so that the species could not be sufficiently described from these

specimens alone, However, they corresponded with similarly named examples

from the Vienna, Munich and Kénigsberg collections, He gave figures of the

dorsal and yeutral view of a specimen from Hirundo rustica from Kénigsberg.

From the magnification viven the worm would be 2:7 0°'8 min. Braun gave

rio real deseription of the species, but he referred to the variability in the size

of the suckers (even among animals of the same size) and in the arrangement

vf the yolk glands.

In 1909, Lithe gave a kev and a description of 6 species of Plagiorchis, As

this was the first real description of P. macrlosus to be published, a translation

is given here;—

"About 2-0-2:3 som. Tong: 0°5-0°7 ann. wide; oval in cross-section, Oral sneker about

0-2-3 nm. Ventral suckor approxinitels at and of first third of body Jength; about 0+15-

(20 gam. in dimneter, Pharynx smaller, and ovary usually somewhat mallee, than the

ventral sucker, Yolk glands lateral, extending from the pharynx to the hind end of the bodys

ouly at the hind end spreading out to meet on fle dorsal surface. ‘Testes comparatively

lurge, spherical, accupying about the third quarter of the body Jength. Uterus bchind testes

forming no clearly detined! loops.

Braun's figure and Lihe's diagnosis seem to have formed the basis of sub-

sequent identifications, Table U1 lists the measurements recorded for P.

maculosus from miny hosts since Liihe’s time,

Tn 1929 Massino gave a kev to 24 species of the venus. This was based

primarily on the position of the testes and secondarily on the relative sizes of

ovary arid testes.

In 1931, Schulz and Skorzow proposed two subgenera for Plagiorchis,

namely, Plagiorchis and Multiglandularls, according to whether the yolk glands

do not meet in front of the ventral sucker, or join to form a marked commissure.

Plogiorchis maculosus was placed in the subgenus Plagiorchis

In 1937 Olsen published 2 study of the Plagiorehiinae, which included a

key to the subgenera und species of Plaglorchis. There were 43 species and 2

subspecies. (Olsen also listed 4 specics the descriptions of which were not

available to hima.) it would seem that many of the characters given in Olsen's

key are subject to a good deal of variation within any one species, and the key

is, therefore, not very satisfactory. In 1932 Schulz had expressed the opinion

that a critical revision of the whole genus was necessary; Plagiorchis cuntained

same 50 species from various orders of vertebrates, but specimens shawed great

variability, and a much-needed revision might reduce the number of species ta

15 or 20. Other authors have shared Schulz’s opinion of the desirability of a

revision of the genus, but so far this has not been made.

There are now some 90 described species of Plagtorchis, and the number

seers likely to grow unless authors will appreciate the necessity of allowing for

some considerable amount of variation of characters within a specics, whether

due to differences in age, fixation or treatment, etc,, and for the possibility that

some species may neeur in a mare or less wide range of hosts.

Ulmer (052 in a critique of methods for the measurement of parasitic

worms, thought that much of the present-day confusion in taxonomic studies

night be avoided if authors would stute, as far as possible, the age of the worms,

whether specimens hud previously heen fattened, and what fixatives were cm-

ployed. Cover glass pressure may cause marked changes, not only in hody

size, but also in the shape and relationship of non-muscular organs, such as the

genitalia, which aré often of taxonomic importance.

Gilford (1955) exumined 300 specimens of Allussogonaporus marginalis,

wid reported that the relative positions of internal structures of the worm change

PLAGIORCIUS MACULOSUS 287

during growth. Flattening during preparation for staining alsu will alter size,

shape and pusitiun of these structures.

Callot (1946) gave measurements for a living specimen af Lepederma macu-

lastem (Rud.), and for the same specimen, fixed, These figuies are shown in

Table 3. It will be noticed that though the size of tho oral sucker remained

unchanged, the yentral sucker was smaller in fixed than in living material. The

pharynx, tue, 140% 75 p living, was only 75 * 50 p fixed,

One of the characters Olsen used in his key was the position of the ural

sucker, which, according to the key, is subterminal in Plagiorchis maculosus,

In his deseription, Rudolpbi stated that the mouth aperture was terminal,

Among 14 specimens collected from 7 swallows from Wellington, S, Aust. in

March 1956, most showed the oral sucker terminal, but in at least one it was

sub-terminal, It is clear from an examination of such a series, as syell as of

living animals, that the apparent position of the oral sucker may depend on tle

position and state of contraction of the animal at the time of fixation.

Again, too much stress should not be placed on the relative sizes of the

organs (oral and ventral suckers, pharynx, ovary and testes) and of their posi-

tions in the body. Descriptions of trematodes have often been given from one,

or very few, specimens, and the condition of the animal (whether living, com-

pressed, ete.) is seldom stated.

The absence of a receptaculum seminis was given by Lihe (1909) as one

of the characters of the genus Playiorchis, Olsen (1937) put P. noblei Park,

1936 inte 2 new genus (Plagiorchoides), on the grounds that it had a recepta-

culum seminis, and in the same year, for this and other reasons, Mehra trans-

ferred it to Neolepoderma ug. In 1939, Park suygested that if the possession

af a seminal receptacle is to be a generic charkidter the study of serial sectiuns ix

absolutely necessary for diagnosis. In 1943, Baer (p. 45) stated that the presence

of a seminal receptacle was typical of the genus Plagiorchis; this was quoted

by Dollfus (1949, p. 437) without comment.

Yamaguti (1954) recorded P. maculosus trom single specimens, from

Sturnia philippinensis and Passer montanus fram Macassar. The specimen from

the first host was examined as a mounted specimen; there was a prepharynx and

a smal] receptaculum seminis, which sugyests that the identification is doubtful.

On the other hand, the excretory system was studied in the second specimen,

living. The excretory formula was given as 2{(2+ 2)+(24+2)}=16, IE all

the flame cells were observed, the specimen cuuld not belong to Plagiorchis,

in which the flame cell pattern is 2{(3+3+93)+(3+3+3)} (McMullen,

1937). However. flame cells ave not easily seen, and with only one trematode

te study, it is prubable that some were missed.

The presence or absence of a receptaculum seminis seems thus to be a

character of dowbtful value. Without good serial sections, it would seem unwise

to be dogmatic on fits presence of absence in Plogiorchis species. It was wot

observed in the present investigation, although serial sections of two specimens

(from swallow and wagtail} were studied.

The shape of the cirrus has been made a descriptive character, especially

in the earlier accounts, Examination of a number of specimens of P. marculasus

in the present investigation suggests that its apparent shape and size are variable,

probably depending largely on the state uf contraction of the animal, and the

extent to which the cirrus is extruded. Fig. 1 shows a relatively broad cirrus,

not greatly elongated; in most specimens in which it was everted, it was very

narrow, One specimen (from a chick) showed the narrow cirrus projecting a

265 L, M. ANGEL

distance of 245 » from the genital pore; in another {Frost a siallow), self-

fertilization was observed, the cirrus bemg inserted well into the metraterm.

From records of Plagiorchis maculosus (details of which appear in the fure-

golig pages und in the tables) and from observations recorded in the present

paper. the following amended diagnosis has been compiled:—

Plagiorchis maculosus (Rud.)

Diagnosis—Mainly in fnsectivarous birds; also occasionally in other birds

and in mammals, Snail bast a lymnaeid; second intermediate host an insect

with an aquatic larva.

Just under 1 mm.-t mm. long; 0-4-1-25 mm, wide. Suckers about the same

size, or oral sucker slightly larger than acetabulum. Acetabulum at end of first

third of body length, or further caudad; well behind intestinal bifureation. Pre-

pharynx, if present, very short, Oesophagus present in cercaria; very short or

apparently absent in adult. Intestinal cacca extend to near posterior end of

body; wide, though not necessarily fixed in this position, Ovary smaller thao

acetabulum, or nearly cqual to it; smaller than testes. Vitellaria extend

anteriorly and laterally between pharynx and anterior border of acetabulum;

posteriorly they extend to hind end of body, and Selds may remain separate

or may become confluent in mid-line.

The name maecntoses was evidently given by Rudolphi fur the testes and

evary—two or three “light spots* behind the ventral suckers which were especially

characteristic for this worm, Other authers have altributed the name to the

spination of the fore part uf the body, and even to “the diffuse geitnules. which

remain from the eyes af the cercaria”™.

This trematode is now identified from South Australia from the swullow

( Hirteulo neoxena ), the willy wagtail (Rhipidura letwcophrys), the grey fantail (R,

flabellifera), the magpie (Gymmnorhina hypoleuca) and the white-browed babbler

(Pomatostomus superciliosus). Measurements of the parasite from these hosts

and from two chickens infected experimentally are given in Table 1. This table

also includes measurements of two specimens of Plegtarchis from the Murray

magpie (Grallina cyanaleica). It is considered probable that they are Plovi.

orchis maculosus, but one specimen was not well preserved and does not look

quite typical, and the other showed the ovary relatively larger than in specimens

from other hosts, Tu the absenve of further specimens. from this host it is per-

haps safer to identify these two trematodes as Plagiorchis sp.

Most of the specimens from: Pomatostomus superciliosus did not resemble the

typical Plagiorchis maculosus ut first sight. They had been fixed, when alive, with-

out any pressure; they were relatively short and stout, the anterfor sucker way

always subterminal, and the two suckers appeared to be placed clase together,

due to the curvature of the body. The skin was wrinkled and rather dark. In spite

of this apparent dissimilarity it was net possible to name any essential differ-

ences, and sizes of organs conformed to the pattern of P. aaculosus from other

EXPLANATION OF FIGURES

Figs 1-10. Plagiorchis mactlosus, Figs. 13, 4. Adults from swallow (March. 1956);

N.B.—Variatlons in extent of vitellaria anteriorly, position of testes, oral sucker, eto.: 1, staimedt

alum carmins. Fig. 2, T.5. Adult from wagtail, through genital pore. Figs. 3-8, Aduilis fron

babbler, 6-8 fixed alive, uncompressed; 5, fixed after deutls, Pig, 9, Cerewia; fixed specimen,

pusitiog vf some flane cells shown, Fie, LO, Stylet,

Fiz. 4 is to the sumo scale at Pig. 3. Figs, 6, 7, 8 are to the same svale as Fin. &

b, bladder; ¢, cirrus; e, cxeretory canal; v.p., genital parc; i, intestme: moct,, metruterm:

m.%., Mehilis’ gland: yd., yolk duet; vg., yolk glinds: yr, yolk reservoir

PLAGIORCHIS MACULOSUS

274) L. M. ANGEL

hosts, although the distances between organs was generally reduced owing to the

contracted state of the specimens, A few of the trematodes from the same col-

lection had been fixed after death (Pig. 5); they were extended, were not dark

in appearance, and were much more like P, mdculosus from other hosts,

Of 8 specimens obtained experimentally from chicks, 4 were dissected when

alive to obtain the eggs, so that measurements uf only 4 are given. The suckers

of the dissected specimens were measured in formalin and are included in the

measurements,

LIFE HISTORY

Historical

As early as the 1850's there were suggestions concerning the life history of

Dixtomum maculosum, Filippi’s Cercaria virgula (named in 1837), the sporo-

eysts of which were found in Velevata piscinalis and Paludina impura, and which

encysted in perlids and some other aquatic insect larvac, was suggested as the

larva of Distomum maculosum. Filippi and Diesing, both referred to this. 1

have not had access to all of Filippis papers, but in 1901 von Linstow men-

tioned that Filippi (1857) assumed, and probably rightly, that D, maculosum

was the adult of these larval forms. Diesing (1858) stated that whether Cercurie

viegula was the true larva of Distomum macufosum was still sub judice,

These two molluscs belong to different families, neither of which is closely

related to the Lymnaeidae. The more recent work of Néller and Ullrich (1927),

Strenzke (1952), and the present investigation has shown a lyninaeid to be the

snail intermediary for Plagiorchis maculosus. tt seems likely that Filippi was

identifying two different cercariae in his Cercaria virgafe, and Chat neither ot

thei was the cercaria of Plagiorchis maculosus.

Von Linstow described thick-walled, oval cysts in the neuropteran, Drusus

trifdes. The contained metacercaria agreed so closely with Distomum macu-

losum that he considered it belonged to this species. He gave a figure af the

metacercaria which showed ovary, testes and cirrus, but no uterus. The figure

certainly suggests Plagiorchis, but from the description of the cyst, as well as

its size, it seems unlikely that the species is mactdosa.

Noller and Ullrich (1927) reported that a xiphidiocercaria of the “Armita™

group, from Limnaca stagnalis, encysted in chironomid larvac. After adult and

larval chironomids had been fed to canaries, finches and other small! birds, trema-

todes identified as Plagiorchis maculosus were recovered. (35 mature trema-

todes were found in a canary on the 9th day.) Photographs of the various

stages were given; though these do not show much detail, there is no reasen

(af appearance or size) te daubt that P. maculosws was the teematode involved,

Although 7-week-old clicks were fed many larvae on successive days, none be-

came infected. Néller and Ullrich did not give a description of the sporocyst

and cercaria, which they hoped to do Jater.

Strenzke (1952) gave an account of the life history and a description of the

various stages of P, maculosus in Holstein. Sporocvsts occurred in the mid-gut

of Radix auricularia, the cyst was found as a natural occurrence in the larvae of

Chironomus thummi and Psectrotanypus tarius, and experimentally in larvae of

the midge, Chaoborus crystallinus, and Culex pipiens. Two specimens uf Aide-

mosyne cantans were intected (with 85 and 262 trematodes respectively) by

feeding with infected chironomids,

Experiments in South Australia

On 5th March, 1955, 2 of 55 Lymnaea lessoni collected at Mannum (River

Murray) were found to be infected with a small xiphidiocercaria. One of these

snails wus used for the following work.

PLAGIOACHIS MACULOSUS 27L

The cercuriae were found to encyst in mosquito larvae, From 8/3/55 the

vereariae were put in small dishes eich day with a batch of mosquito larvae.

As the larvae and pupae died, or the adult aaa aS hatched, they were fed

to voung chickens. Two of these chickens were later found to be infected with

utult trematodes which were identified as Plagiorchis maculosus, and three were

uninfected.’ Must of the larvae could have contained several cysts, and some

of them possibly many. The attempted infections of these five chickens may be

summarised as follows:—

(1) Fed with 50 larvae; died 12 days after first, and 8 days after last larvae

fed. No trematodes recovered,

(2) Fed with 81 larvae, etc.; killed 49 days after first and 40 days after last

larvae fed. No trematodes recovered.

(3) Fed with about 250 larvae, ete.; killed 40 days after Grst and 25 days

alter last Jarvae fed. No trematodes recovered.

(4) Fed with 227 larvae, ete; died 13 days after the first and 3 days after

last larvae fed. Six adult trematodes recovered.

(5) Fed with 216 larvae, ete; killed 21 days after the first and 14 days after

last larvae fed. Two adult trematodes recovered.

The results from chicks (4) and (5) show that the trematodes had reached

maturity within 13 days, and possibly less, after the cysts were ingested.

(Stronzke fed finches with infected larvae and found tematode eggs in the

faeces 7 days later. In one finch he recovered 85 trematndes, and in the second

262 specimens; the birds died as a result of the infection.)

The foregoing results suggest that chicks, not being the natural dehnitive

hast of P, maculosus, do not become infected unless given a massive dose of the

cysts uc that the infections ure lost early.

The six Plagiorchis maculosus from chick (4) were left in saline from

48/4/55, and the eggs laid, with those dissected from three of the trematodes,

were kept for a further seven days in boiled water, which was changed daily,

No miracidia were seen during this time. On 15/4/55 the dish containing the

esos was put in w small infection tank with 12 young laboratory-raised Lajmnaca

lessoni, One snail was completely disintegrated when found, 32 days kiter. Of

the remaining snails, 10 died, in 39, 42, 43, 45, 48, 48, 4, 53, 53 and 53 days.

Sporocysts were found in all, tailed cercariae being present in those which died

in 43, 48, 49, 53 and 53 days, The twelfth snail was isolated, for the first time,

56 days ufter it had been placed in contact with the eggs, and was found to be

emitting cercariae; it died § days later.

Eggs from the two Plagiorchis nuculosus from chick (3) were left at room

temperature for 17 days before being placed with 9 young Lymnaea lessoni, It

is not knuwn whether the eggs were still viable. The snails died from 42 Lo 132

days afterwards, and none was infected.

Mosquito larvae were infected with cereariae trom the intected snail. Only

about 50 infected larvae were available tu feed to two chicks when the suail

died; the chicks were killed 7 weeks later, but were not infected-

Life history studies were alsa carried ont with Plagiorchis maculosus from

swallows, wagtails and babblers.

Eggs laid in normal saline were collected, and others were dissected from

the adult trematodes. The eggs were kept in boiled water at room Lemperature

during the week, and were examined daily when the water was changed. Over

week-ends they were kept at 4° C.

turkey) in the Natural History Musenm showed na cifferences from the sume speetes reeavered

fram the normal bird hosts,

bf f°) 1. M, ANGE,

Lyimnaed lessoni reared in the laboratory were used. Dead snails were dis-

sected under binocular microscope. Results are summarised below; the result

“apparently negative” means that larval stages were not seen. (Records of

deaths of snails which were too disintegrated for examination are not given, )

Pomatostomus superciliosus

Egys laid 13/3/56; dissected 7/3/56; put with snails 9/3/56,

One snail apparently negative in 14 days.

Four snails had sporocysts, but no free cercariae, at 27, 33, 34 and 39 days.

Hirundo neoxena

Eggs dissected from 4 trematodes 14/3/56; put with 12 snails 22/3/56,

Three snails apparently negative when they died in 15, 21 and 21 davs,

1 snail had sporocysts at 21 days.

One snail had numerons sporocysts and a few motile cereariae at 39 days.

One snail emitted cercariae when tested at 40 days. (It had not done so

when previously isolated at 26 days.) Died at 43 days.

Rhipidura Jeucophrys

Kuus dissected from 6 trematodes 13/3/57; and from 2 tremutodes 18/3,'57;

put with. snails 23/3/57.

Three snails were dead and apparently negative at 17, 24 and 36 days.

Remaining 7 snails all gave abundant cercariae when first isolated at 45

days, (These snails died at 45, 46, 47, 48, 50, 69 and 73 days.)

The above results show that the shortest time obseryed for the production

of cereariae was 39 days (in L, lessoni subjected to infection in March), and

it seems probable that this was not much longer than the actual time taken for

infections at this time of year:

Snails other than Lyninaea lessoni have also heen used in experirnents on

a number of oveasions. In the eurlier experiments the trematode eggs were put

with the snails within a day of being dissected from the trematode; although

all results were negative, this cannot be regarded as sivnificant, in the absence

of L. lessoni, since it is probable that the eggs would not be infective for several

days after being laid or removed from the adult. However, in March 1956, §

Amerianna sp. did not become infected in 21, 25, 38, 36 and 64 (4) days, in the

sume tank in which 3 Lymnaca lessoni were infected with Plagiorchis maculosus

from the swallow; and in the same month, 4 Amerianna sy. were uninfected after

56 and 62 (3) days, in the same tank in which 4 Lymnaea lessoni showed spore-

evsts as early as 27 days.

OBSERVATIONS ON STAGES IN LIFE CYCLE

The Egg and Mincidium

The eggs averaged about 30 » * 19 x, but the length varied From 29-31-5 a,

and the breadth from 17-20 ,.

There is no evidence as to the hatching of a miracidium. IE£ there is a

free-swimming smiracidium, the experiments suggest that hatching does nut

occur earlier than 7 days after the egg is laid. Strenzke did not find a mira-

cidium. It seems probable that hatching follows ingestion of the eges by the

snail host.

It was not possible ta make out any detail in viable eggs under ordinary

high power, though the miracidium was seen to move within the shell several

days after the cogs were laid.

PLACIORCHIS MACT'LOSUS eal)

The Sperecyst

The sporocysts were small and contained only a small wumber of cercariac.

They corresponded in appearance with that shuwn in Strenzke's photograph.

Formulinised specimens measured up to 0-8 * 0-14 mm, in snails infected 46

days previously; while in snails infected 39 days previously the largest sporocyst

observed was 0-54 ~ 0-14 mm. Strenzke’s figures were 0-7-1) mm, ™ 0» 20-0-25

mm.; his measurements were probably of living material aud in newly Killed

snails, In the present investigation sporucysts were not examined until the souil

was found dead, und under these circumstances most of the cercuriae have

escaped from the syarocyst, leaving it thinner in appearance. As shown by the

diynensions above, the size is probubly also dependent to some extent on age.

The Cercaria

The cerearia has been found as a natural infection of Lymnaea lessoni from

the River Murray swamps, from Wellington to Morgan, in 73 of over 8600 of

the snails examined between April 1937 and March 1953 (0:85 per cent. infec-

tion). It has also been found in a small pond in a garden at Tailem Bend in

37 of 1700 L. lessoni since 1943 (3-8 per cent. ).

The eercariac emerged normally in the early morning (before 9.30 a.m.),

Their activity diminished noticeably during the morning, and by afternaon only

a fow were still swimming: the remainder were stil alive, but Iving at_the

bottows ot the tube. About 4 pan. some cereariae were put at 5° C,, and 24

hours later, when brought vut to ruum temperature, they swam quite actively.

Measurements of cereariae collected st different times from naturally in-

fected individual L. lessuni, as well as fromm L. lessoni which had been experi-

mentally infected with eggs from different bird hosts, are given in Table 3, They

were fixed by adding an equal volume of boiling LO per cent. formalin to the

waiter in which they were swimming. It will be noticed thut there is a slight

variation in size range for the cercariae from individual hosts. This is regarded

ws beinw of nu significanve, considering the number of variable factors involved,

The cereariae were deliberately chosen for measurement from those which lad

been fixed in the most extended position, The tle af day at which they are

killed is likely also to affect the state, whether extended or otherwise,

Strenzke pave the following measurements for cercariae “killed by slight

heating”. Length 250-300 »; breadth 120-140 «2; diameter of oral sucker 60 jp,

ventral sucker 36 p.

The size vt the stvlet in this particular cercaria is somewhat variable, The

stylet is also rather fragile in formalin, and splits lengthwise under even moderate

pressure of a coverslip. Tt was difficult with almost all the formalinised material

to find an adequate number of stylets which were in good condition aud also in a

suitable position to be measnred accnrately. The actual range for length of

forinatinised stylets was 21-5-24-8 x,* in the comparatively small nomber nvea-

sured, while Cor living specimens it was 24-3-28-9 », In all cases measurements

an stylets uf living cercariac were greater (by 1-2-3-8 J than on stylets of

formaliniscd cercariae from the same sul. Strenzke gave a measurement of

25-27 », and this would probably be the normal range in oar material, though

larger and smaller specimens do occur. Precise length of stylet should not be

used as a diagnostic character for Plagiorchis maculosus,

The stylet is shapely, 6-7 » across the shoulders, the main stem being of

fairly uniform diameter except near the base, where it increases slightly, being

about 4-1-4°5.. The base itself is rounded aud hus no plop.

eercaria found by us in Lymnaea lessoni was a form with stylet 24 y lone "WNhia ds Te vercaria

naw identified us the larva of Plagiorehis muculosus.

274 L. M. ANGEL

The whole surface of the body is beset with rows of tiny spines. The accta-

bului is situated in the posterior half of the body.

There is an obvious pharynx, but the rest of the alimentary system is not

casily seen. Sometimes there appeared to be a slight prepharyuxs if this is

indeed present (and not an artefact), it is, as was noted for the adult, very

short, There is a short oesophagus; this, and the alimentary caeca, were very

narrow when seen at all.

The excretory system is very difficult to elucidate. Treatment with intra

vitam stains such as basic fuchsin in saline, improved it only slightly. The gland

and vystogenous cells which oceur throughout the body are sometimes ex-

tvemely opaque and murky in appearance, und it is impossible to see through

them. The bladder itself can generally be seen quite clearly. It is Y-shaped,

and in life is continually changing shape; the upper part of the stem sometimes

contracts so strongly that the bladder appears to consist of two parts, the pas-

terior One rounded, the anterior one with short, wide arms in the form of a V.

MeMullen (1937) showed the main excretory vessels arising from the tips of the

arms of the bladder for Plugiorchis spp. in the material examined here it was

almost impossible to come to u decision. At one time the vessels would appear

tn urise lerminally, at another it would seem cqually certain that they were

sub-terminal. It was puinted out for FP. jaenschi (Johnston and Angel; 195) )

that the twisting of the main and accessory tubes, with other factors, made the

supposed point of entry of the main vessels into the bladder a matter to be

regarded with some reserve, The anterior and posterior collecting vessels

diverge from the main excretory tuhe at a point level with the middle of the

acetabulum, burt, of course, lateral to it. Beyond this, little detail of the exere-

tory system was seen, with the exception of odd flame cells, as shown in Fig. Y.

Refrachle granules are scattered throughout the body. They are not abundant,

as in some cereariae; the size is variable, some being very small, The gland

celly occur in about 3 rows from just anterior to the acetabulum to midway

between it and the pharynx. Laterally. and also posteriurly to the acetabulum,

the body is filled with cells which stain with neutral red and faintly with methy-

lene blue. They may be only cystogenous cells, but if this is so it seems strange

that the anterior part of the body is quite free of them. These cells stain a

uniform pale pink with neutral red, some of the nuclei showing a bright red.

Without stain the cells appeur greenish, finely granular, with clear nuclei. In

the more darkly stained specimens the bladder shows up clearly as an unstained

area.

The ducts of the gland cells, which showed only in the pre-acetabular

region, were greenish, finely granular, aud seemed to be only about three im

mimber on each side.

The genital primordium shows after staining With teutral red as a mass

of small undifferentiated cells in the region of the future cirrus complex.

The Cyst

Cereariae encysted readily. in mosquito laryae.

The cysts were fod most commonly in the head and the abdomen, and

a few were found in the thorax. In the pupa it was difficult to determine the

exact site of infection. One larvae which was examined after 48 hours with the

hast snail contained 117 cysts—29 in the bead, 3 in the thorax, and 85 in the

abchunen,

The cysts resembled those figured by Noller and Ullrich (1927) and photo-

graphed by Strenzke (1952).

PLAGIORCHI3 MACULOSUS 275

They were small, rounded and fairly thin-walled; the dark conerctions in

the excretory bladder were a regular and characteristic feature, The bladder

showed through the cyst wall as a very dark Y or V shape, in which the arms

and tail stem were short and stout.

Cysts one day uld measured about 90-105 . x 90-08 », and three cysts of

20 dave old (which were the largest of alkomit 80 aaaeoredd ) were 106-12) p x

106-113 4. The average size of 80 cysts, most of which were from 1-6 days old,

was 106-100 jx.

Strenzke recorded the cysts as being usually round, seldam eval; an average

of 100 cysts 128 » in diameter, the range 109-150 «.

The cyst described by von Linstow which was mentioned previously in this

paper, was thick-walled, oval and measured 440 * 300 4. As stated above, this

Was probably another species of Plagiorchis, According to von Linstow, Filippi

gave the cyst diameter as 190 jx.

The natural secandary host is probably a chicouomid, though no doubt

the cercaria sometimes utilizes mosquito and other insect larvae under natural

conditions. Chironomid larvae were not available in the laburatury at any of

the times that infections were being tried,

Animals used in trial infections, from none of which were vevsts recovered,

were the crustaceans, Daphnia sp., shrimp (Puratya australiense), yabbie

(Cherax destructor), amphipod (¢ *hiltona subtenuis ); the molluscs Lenameria

sp., Planorbis isingi, Lymmuca lessani; 2 leeches; the fish Gambusia affinis, and

tadpoles ( Limnodynasies sp.).

The only other xiphidiocercaria which has been found as a parasite of

Lymnaea. lessoni in South Australia, Cercuria Plagiorchis jaenschi Johnston and

Angel, 1951, is very similar in size and appearance to C. Plagiorchis maculosus.

It is distinguishable in fresh material, without detailed microscopical examina-

tion, only by the size of the stylet, which is noticeably larger (34 ») in C. Plagi-

orchis jacnschi. The gland cells are more oxtensive in C, Plagiorchis maculasus.

The normal secondary intermecliate host of P. jaenschi was thought to be the

crustacean, Cherax destructor (in which encystation took place readily); in

Plagiorchis maculosus encystation occurs in insect larvae, but satirarenaty not

in crustaccans.

Plagiorchis maculosus has now been recorded from a large mamber af birds,

inust of which ace insectivorous, and from the rodent, Citellus musieus planicola.

It was Found in 50 per cent. of the Citellus oxamined by Schulz (1932) in what

was apparently a lairly wide suryey, Ht appears that Plaviorchis mactlosus has

ho great specificity for its adult host, thongh fle second intermediate hast is

very restricted, It seems likely that many species uf Plagiorchis have been de-

serihed as new largely because they occurred in nrelated hosts, and an examina-

thu of the types may indicate a large number of synonyms of P. maculosus.

T have been able te examine types of P, clelandi Johnstan, 1917, and P.

spatulatus Johnston, 1917 (Australian Museum W.435 and W.434 respectively),

and was unable to find any points by which they could be senahiabed from the

Australian specimens of P. maculosus I have examined, and measurements of

which are given in this paper.

ohnston stated that P. clelandi was more closely related to P. maculasus

(Rud.) than to any other species. [¢ differed mainly in the arrangenient of the

fields of the yolk glands, which in the Australian species vever extended as far

furwards us the fork of the intestine, and always remained separate in the pas-

terior region. In the type specimen the follicles of the yolk glands have taken

up the stain more deeply in some parts than in others; elose examination of the

a6 L. M. ANGEL

dorsal surtace shaws that some follicles do extend between the two main fields

and that there are even one or two follicles right in the median line, The testes

are bigger than in most spevimens examined, but t do not consider this justifies

the placing of the species in the varicty anetis.

The inclusion of P. spetulatus as a synenym oF P, indevlosus means that the

lower range for size of this species must be extended. However, there seem Te

other differences by which to separate the two species, Accortling to Johnston,

P. spatulatus resembled P. maculosus more closely than any other species. He

separated P. elelandi from P. spatulatus on a number of pints, Lut especially

in the extent of the yolk gland fields, which extended further forward, were more

lateral ia front of the testes and extended further in towards the middle behind

them in P. spatulatus.

Johnston (p. 248) noted that wheveas P. clelandi, P. maculosus, P. nishetit

were from passerine birds, P. sputiulatus wecurred in one of the Motacillidae

(Anthus australis), He did not compare it with P, notabilis Nigoll, 1905, which

was from Anthus obscurus and Motacilla flava, Nicoll gave as the chief diag-

nostic features of the species. the short cirrus-pouch and the forward position «F

the ovary. The figure is presumably drawn from the one adult specimen from

Anthes obscurus, which was described first, and “the main leatures of difference

in the specimen from Motaoilla” were then indicated, From the figure, the

anterior part of te worm is contracted, and this seems enough to explain the

apparent forward position of ovary and, with the fact that the cirrus is everted,

the shortness of the eirrus pouch. Yamaguti (1954, p. 337) noted that the

pasterior extent of the cirrus pouch heing subject to considerable variation in

the members of this geous, does not constitute by itself a decisive criterion in

specific determination.

In 1954, Hertuon-Smith and Long recovered 35 trematedes fram the snuill

intestine of a pullet from Scotland, which were identified as Plagiorchis notalilis

by Dr. S. Prudhoe of the British Museum {Natural History). The metacercariae

were found encysted in the larvae of chironomid and other fies.

T can find no record of where the type is deposited, It scems probable that

Plegiorchis notabilts is a synonym of P. qeerdesstis.

Nicoll (1909) described from Tuwnsville, Queensland, Lepoderna nisbeti

from Chibia (Dicrura) bracteata. Nicolls igure is not very detailed, and he

stated that the two specimens, from which the description was made, were

“somewhat macerated”. Nicoll did not designate a type, nor state where the

specimens were deposited, but Mr, A. |. Bearup, of the Australian Institute of

Tropical Medicine, has sent me two spirit specimens which are obviously the

ones from which Nicull gave bis description (A.T.M. No. 121). Mr. Bearup

tells me that the label is in Nicoll’s handwriting; the details ure similar to those

given in the paper. Onc worm was in pieces, the other very dark. Though

treatment with trisodium phosphate improved the intact wunn, it was not m

good enough condition to enable any real description ta be given.

It is not possible to say that this is a synonym of Plagiorchis maculosus,

though the differences (from the description and the figure) may well be attri-

butable to the poor condition of the specimens. Nicoll did not name any dif-

ferential characters for the specics.

Yamaguti and Mitunagea (1943) stated that it seemed probable that P-

orientalis Park (1939) from the Korean Hirundo daurica nipalensis was identical

with P, maculosus. Park had distinguished it from var, citelli by (1) the vitel-

laria heing confluent dorsally, and (2) the fact Wat the civrus sac extended only

ta the posterior margin of the acetabulum,

PLAGIORGHIS MACULOSUS a7F

VARIETIES OF PLEAGIORCHIS MACULOSUS

In 1928 Skrjabin described P. macvlosus var. enafis, from 1 specimen found

in | of 2 ducks (Casarca casarca) from Transbaikalia. A characteristic ciffer-

ence belween this variety and the typical P. maculesus was the structure of the

Vitelline follicles which, in the variety, were rather simall individually but very

closely placed, and in the typical form “plus gros, plus grands” and fess thickly

distributed. From Skrjabin's figure, the most ebviuus feature is the sizo of the

lestes, which appear selatively huge. The measurements given were 0-4 mm.

diameter for cach, which is appreciably larger than in any specimen pres ionsly

recorded, or in any examined in the present collection. “The size of the eggs,

ulso, 36 * 22 », is somewhat greater than in other P. maculosus,

The condition of the animal, whether living, dead, compressed, etc., was not

mentioned. To my knowledge, this variety has not been recorded since it was

described,

Massing, in 1929, included a description of Skejabin’s specimmen, His paper

has an obvious mistake in labelling, His Fig. § which was labelled P- maculasus

var. analinus, corresponds to Skrjabin’s. Fig. 2 of Plagiorchis potanini, while his

Fic. 8, called P, potanini, corresponds with Skrjabin’s Fig. 1 of P. maculasngs var.

eeretis,

Mehra (1937), who had apparently seen Massino’s fyures and not Skrahin's,

lransterred Lepoderma maculosus var. anatinus to a new species, 1. (Multi-

glandularis) russti on the grounds that it did put belong to the subgenus Plagi-

archis, us did P. maculosus. The species P. russii is thus invalid, being a synonym

of P. potanini.

P. maciulosus var. citelli was described by Schulz in 1932 from the redent

Citellus musicus planicola, Sehuly, stated that it did not really differ from the

typical Plagiorchis maculosus described in 1802, or from Skijabin's P. maculosus

anatis (from a duck); on the other hand, it was very near to P. popawt Palinp-

sestow which was described from a dog and was later found by Skworzow in

apig. Schulz placed it as a separate subspecies because of its hast, but thought

it possible that when more material was available and the biology of the parasite

hetter knuwn, it might be necessary to synonymise these previously mentioned

firms,

Ju 1930 Yamuguti described P. maculosus motacillae from Motacilla cinerea

easpica. He stated that it differed from the closely related Plagiorchis notabilis

Nicoll, 1909, F. spafulafus Johnston, L917, and P, meculosus (Rud.), in the pos-

terior position of the testes, From his figure, the anterior border of the anterior

testis is at exactly the middle of the body. The posterior testis docs appear to

lie nearer to the posterior end of the body than is trsual in P.. maculosus, but

this is partly due to the large size of the testes, and partly perhaps to the con-

tracted state of the body, which is evident fram the figure in the anterior region.

Yamuguti did not mention P. maculosus anatis, in which the testes ave large and

extend almost as far posteriorly as in P. maculosus motacillae. There seems no

valid distinguishing feature between these twu varictics. If the large size of

the testes is a uniform character, the variety dnetis should stand, with var. mota-

cillae a synonym, However, anutis was described from a single specimen, and

Yamagutis motacillae was described from only 3 specimens, 1-0-1+5 mm. long,

in which the range of size for the testes was 0-+15-0-3L * U-15-0-28 mm., while

the suckers varied only slightly. The size uf the testes may be variable, or

apparent differences may be attributable to treatment or fixation.

ST L. M. ANGEL

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The earlier collections of adult Plagiorehis maculosus were made by the

late Professor T. Harvey Johnston. Thanks are due to Mr. H, T, Condon and

to Mr. B. C. Cotton of the South Australian Museum; to Mr, Condon for advice

on the identification and relationships of the birds and to Mr. Cotton for advice

on the molluses. I am also indebted to the Director of the Australian Museum,

Sydney, and ta Mr, A. J. Bearup, of the Australian Institute of Tropical Medicine,

Sydney, for courtesy in enabling me to study type material,

REFERENCES

Basu, J. G., 1943. Bull. Soc. Neuchatel, Se. Nat. 68, pp. 338-84. ‘Les trématades parasites

de de musaraigne dean Neomys fodiens,

Braun, M,, 1902. Zool, Jahrb., Jena, Abt. Syst. 1G (1), pp, 1-162. Fascinliden der Vozul.

Catto, i 1946, Ann. Parasitol, 21 (3-4), pp. 199-201. Matériaux pour servir a la Raune

des Distomes de France.

Dresine, K. M., 1858. Sitzungsb, K, Akad. Wissensch. Wien, Math—Natunv. CL, 32 (23),

pp. 807-390. Revision der Myzhelminthen, Abtheilung: Tremuteden

Doutrus, R. Ph., 1949. Ann. Parasitol, 24 (5-6), pp. 436-442. Distama rubeng F. Dujarcin,

1845 (= exasperatum Rudolphi, 1819), retronvé en France et redeécrit.

be Finrppr, F., 1857. Mem. R. Accad. Se. Torino 2. 5., 16. Cl, Se. Fis..e Mut, pp, 419-142,

fis. 1-21. Deuxiéme uidinoire pour servir & Vhistoire génétique dex trénatudes (Read

Apr. 15, 1853), :

Gitroxw, J. H, 1955. J. Parasit., 41 (6), Scot. 2, Suppl, pp. 27-24. A re-study of the genus

Allassozonoporus (Olivier, 1938) Macy, (940,

Homrox-Smrri, P., and Lone, P. L., 1954, Vet, Reeord., 66 (41), p. G11. The occurrence

of the fluke Plagiorchis natabilis Nicoll, 1909 in the small intestine of iw domestic fowl

Jounsrox, S. J., 1917. Jour, Prac. Hoy. Soe, N.S.W,, 50, pp. 187-261, Plates IN-XIX. On

the tramatedes of Australian birds.

Jourstow. 1. H., and Ancen, L, M.. 195). Trans, Roy. Sow. $.4., 74 (1), pp. 49-55. The

lite. history of Plagiorchis jaenschi, 9 oew tremutade From the Ansteallan water rat,

vow Linsrow, O. F. B. 1901. Arch. Mikr. Anat, 58 (1), pp. 182-198) pls, 8-9, figs, 1-30.

Beghachtungen an Telminthen des senekenbergischen natarhistorischen Musenms, dex

Breslaner zoologischer Instituts wnt! anderen.

Lower, M.. 1909. Siisswasserfauma Deutschlands (Tiraner)}, Wett. 17, Vo) 217 pp. Para-

sitische Plattwiirmer: I Trematodes.

MoMuuton, D, B., 1937. Jour. Parasit, 23 (3), pp. 244-258, A discussione of the taxonomy

of the family Plagiorchiidae Lihe, 1901, and related trematodes.

Massrno, B. G., 1929. Zontralbl. Bakteriol, 2. Abt, 78 (1-7), pp. 125142. Die Trema-

tuden der Gattung Plagiarchis Lithe, 1899 der Vogel Russland, Beitrag zur Kenatnis

dey Helminthenfauna Russlunds.

Means, H, R., 1937. Ztschr. Parasitenk. Berlin, 9 (4), pp, 429-469, ffs, Certain new and

already known. distomes of the Family Lepodermatidae Odkner (Trematocda), with «a

discussion on the classification of the Family.

Nicora, W., 1909. Quart. J. Mier, Se. n, s., 53 (3). pp. S9L487, pis. 9-10. Studies on the

strueture and classificution of the divenetic trematodes.

Nicont, W.. 1914. Parasilolovy, 6 (4), pp. 333-350, pls, 23-24. The trematode parasites

of North Queensland. [.

Néuier, W., and Uneuricn, K., 1927. ‘Sitvungsh. Cesellsch, Naturf. br, Berlin (4-7), py.

§1-96, pl. 1 (Plate hound with (8-10), issued 1928). Die Entwicklung einer Plagivrehis-

Art. (Bin Buitrag zur Kenntnis der Cercariae arinatue.)

Ousen, O. W., 1937. ‘tr. Am, Mier, Sov. 56 (3), pn. 311-339. A systematic study of the

trematode sub-family Plagiorchiinae Pratt, 1902,

Park, J, T., 1939. Keijo J. Med., 10 (1). pp. 1-6, pl. 1. Trematodes from Mammaha and

Aves. II Two new teernatodes of Plagiorchidue: Plagtorehoides rhinolophi u. sp. aud

Plagtorehis orientalis n. sp. from Tyosen ( Korea).

Rexs, G., 1952. Purusitology, 42 (1 and 2), pp, 92-113, ‘The structure of the adult and

larval stages of Plagiorehis (Multiglandularis) megalurchis mn, wam, From the turkey and

an experiinental demonstration of the life history.

hachtungen tuber die Kingeweidewiitmer.

PLAGIORCHIS MACULOSUS 279

Rupotra, C. A,, 1809. Entozoorum sive vermium intestinalium historia naturalis, 2 (1)

457 pp.

Ruporrur C. A., 1819. Entozoorum synopsis X + 811 pp.

Scnuiz, R. E., and Skworzow, A. A., 1931. Ztschr. Parasitenk., Berlin, 3 (4), pp. 765-774.

Plagiorchis arvicolue aus der Wasserratte,

Scnurz, R. E., 1932, Vestnik, Mikrobiol., Epidemiol. i Parazitol., 11 (1), pp. 53-60. Trema-

toden ag Gattung Plagiorchis Liihe der Nagetiere. (Russian Text, German Summary,

p. 60.

Sxryapin, K. 1, 1928. Ann. Parasit., 6 (1), pp. 80-87. Sur la faune des trématodes des

oiseaux de Transbaikalie.

Srrenzke, K., 1952, Ztschr. Parasitenk., Berlin, 15 (5), pp, 369-391. Der Wirtswechsel

von Plagiorchis maculosus.

Utmer, M. J., 1952. Pap. Mich. Acad. Sci. Arts and Letters. Year 1950, 36, pp. 149-152.

A critique of methods for the measurement of parasitic worms.

YamacutTl, S., 1935. Ztschr. Parasitenk., Berlin, 7 (4), pp. 513-514. Plagiorchis maculosus

(Rud., 1802) aus der japanischen Schwalbe, Hirundo rustica gutturalis (Scopoli),

Yamacutt, §., 1939. Japan. J. Zool., 8 (2), pp. 129-210. Studies on the helminth fauna of

Japan. Part 25. Trematoces of birds. IV.

Yamacutr, S., and Mrrunaga, Y., 1943. Tr. Nat. Hist. Soc. Taiwan (241), 33. Trematodes

of birds from Formosa 1.

Yamacutt, §., 1954. Acta Med. Okayama, 8 (4), pp. 329-340. Parasitic worms mainly

from Celebes. Part 4, Trematodes of reptiles and birds.

ANGEL

28()

pamajounha

SEXP: | LT ee | LL XBS- 9-1 T Jpuag wore, meee? | orurl

i nonaqounhs

Ge K RG | BI-X bE | OD % FE 0% T [pring wiopey, muna | 1 | Owes

ig) (gs) |e) ([BrUsuaed xy)

6L-* GOL | OF“ 9s | Ge * Fa PET $ UUM |

BO-X T1- | LAL | IDX eb: OTE | Uyesp tage pax | 2

atnssaacl |

orp pay ‘oars vnsouuouadis |

nanajouliy

AU-XGLr | LEX BS | BT SUG: | BRK GE > BE * Cer GG LT T (preg were, wugysouudlity! —T GF SEG

(g) (g) (g) |

fe Lge ~ += 4h ;

z | puey shaydoonay

QL-X9T: | Ta * Ms: | Ge X ea. Bex Te | Lio-st Heel | I WS]. winpeelay ey g LEST

t shaydvonay |

GLAST | BE XRE | 126-0 z UBS LOT, vanpadigy | T | 9oe'e

sfiaydoona)

(s) (g) (a) (9) (9) ousxoer

| | . nuawoou

Uy-r0e: Sear | pause, | 9 /PMeE are opureln yy i 8F'6°S1

“uu ‘uM Barare “Wut ats it; a a Une sitters pes |

, pan -aofin

94894 s1ytay jyng | syong “SHUT Sp.00G

AqWAQ, | couaqsog | dows | [gto A, reat) ype | yysuoy UGLY EXIT “ONT Appear] SOL JovoN! aan

2 Oe

‘LUpBUTIO, TH paxy steumaeds ]py “‘KI@r7Pwaq TL WOAIE s1 suRFLO ayy oaMsRoUr oF ayessod Sut

4b WANT ul BuotIVEds JO LequINY oy, ‘SprRaseye YYpPIAr “Pap U

pan yysiia soy syuamommsveur yo UBue ayy, '("g9Z"tl pxor Say) ‘ds siyaiodvingg, SR ATWO POYyTPUSp! wae TANI,OUD/Y WUE) WHOS] Sau

WIIVHGSOV HLIOS NI SAUId WOUd SASOTQADV NH STHOdOIOrTd

*l ATEVEL

iaaTd sTIPHIO Jo Yuwry “SoBeAVAT SF WOATT x1 GNBBAO Jo e7Is ayy HUAALT BF YApeAa

dors OaNg OU, "EN

TABLE 2.

RECORDED DIMENSIONS AND HOSTS OF PLAGIORCHIS MACULOSUS.,

Measurements in inverted commas estimated from drawings, or by converting ‘‘linies’’ into millimetres,

Measurements, in mm, are given to nearest decimal place; in some cases, c.g. for P. orientalis, approximate measurements are estimated.

Eggs

Date Anthor Name Hosts No. Fixation Lenuth | breadth |Oral Sucker}! Ventral Anterior | Posterior Ovary |—————)—_——_

Sucker Testis Testis Length | Breadth

Tinh. mitt. Tren, mm. mm. mm. mim. microns | microns

1802 Rudolphi | Fasciola Hirundo = — ee al “OB.

maculosa rustica 0-7"

1902 Braun Plagiorehis Hirundo 1 os “66” | hoes

maculosa rusticu

1909 | Lithe Plagiorchis Riparia riparia 2h | USOT] -20--30 15-20

maculose Delichon urbica

Caprimulyus

Tat | eruropmews__|_]

1928 Skrjabin | P. maculosus | Cusarca 1 2-2 u+75 “25 40% 40 | 40% 40 | -22e 24 36 22

Var, anus casnrca

P. macnlosus | Citellus 2-0-2-6 | 6-1-0 *30--31 20.°25 138-27 -29--27 30-34 19

1932 Schalz var. citelli musicus % +26--82 | & -28-+26 * +28 * 2-27

planicola

1985 Yamaguti} P. muaculosus |Hirendo rustiet| 3 1-60- H7-)70 | -20--8o “same? ~' 25 25 16-22 32-36 20-24

guituralis 1-92 | wx 14--16

1039 Yamaguti| J. maeulosus |TTirundo rustica) ? Fixedinaeetic | 1-f-3-9 |+S6-1-25 | -20--94 -20--35 +22--50 8 - 18-943 16--34 30-39 18-24

gutturalia sublinkyte 13-+30

H, dauriva under slight

nipalensis eover-wlass

pressure.

1930 P. maculosus | Motacilia 3 — 1:0-1-5 | O-4-0°% | LHe Ts “14-) 15 “16-31 -15--u8 *10--19 80-33 18-19

yar. molacillae\ cinerea cospica (subglobular) rounded

P. maculogus |Hirundo rustica) 6 — 1-6-1-8 ) 52-80 19-24 *20-°25 « -20--26 “15-18 30-34 18-21

crutturalis x 120--26 x 17+.20

Parus t _— 2-2-9 | -7Th-1-00) +19--30 “21-30 “21--35 « -20--35 *20-+28 33-39 18-21

atricapillya ms 20-+80 | o -21--30 3 28-+29

restricts

Lepoderma Apus aps 1 ) Living 2a 0-380 “30 32 *34x%°30 | +85 & -26 “30

maculosum

1 Same specimen, 23% O85 30 125 40-32 20

fixed,

1952 Strenzke | F. maculosugs | Aidemosyne “30" mature, with | 1:6-2-0 | 0+5-0-°8 34-47 21-23

eamlans eggs

with only 1+1-1-4 | 0-1-0-2

few eggs

1909 FP. notabilis Anthuz 1 - 1-6 AT 20X-18 | -16% +16 | 258-16 | “About | -1hs -12 a1 19

ohscurus game”

Motacilla flave 1 — 1-4 — AZ X WH | -14e +13 | -19%+15 | 17 «+15 |} +11 % +10 aL 21

1914 Nicoll P, nishetii Chibia 2 | “Somewhat 1°25 40 226-24 | lie -14 ‘llong | “Slightl ‘ll« 11

bracteata macerated" “Elongate | larger”

oval”

1916 | Johnston,| P. epatulatus | Anthus Balsam mount) #-s0+-90) 85-30 V6 13 ‘Wx-12 |-14«-12 +08 29-33 17

J. australis

1916 P, clelandi Fenthelasin 1 | Balsam mount) *2-2 “06 au 4-26 “25 “BL x -29 | +87 %-29 | -17« +23 | 30-33 17-22

ariel

P, orientatia “Swallow” "20x26 | -2B8*%-22 | 16x20 | 28-34 14-19

* Type specimens. In the case of P. xpatulatus, the range of length and breadth

Q)-99 mm. x 0-3 mm,

is given for an unspecified number of worms; the type was

PLAGIORCHIS MACULOSUS 251

TABLE 3.

DIMENSIONS OF THE CERCARIAH OF PLAGIORCHIS MACULOSUS

Length Breadth Oral Ventral

= —— : | Sucker Sucker

Date Host, Locality (Average) | (Average)

Range Average Range _ | Average

microns microns microns | microns} microns microns

17.2.41 From4Lymnaea| 151-236 180 66-106 86 36 < 36 25 x 28

Tailem Bend

6.1.51 From1 Lymnaea} 124-157 141 84-102 94 38 x41 28x31

Mannum

5.1,51 From] Lymnaea) 135-168 150 78-97 87 38 X38 26 x 30

Mannum

9.1.51 From] Lymnaea! 109-158 132 83-107 91 35 x 38 26% 30

Tailem Bend

5.3.55 From] Lymnaea) 150-236 175 81-107 ; 94 4. x41 30 x 34

Mannum

28.5.55 (Chicken) 145-191 172 81-97 91 41 «40 28 x 33

2.5.56 (Hirundo 119-147 132 74-109 86 33 x36 26 x 30

neowena)

7.5.57 (Rhipidura 142-190 167 64-87 76 40% 35 28 x 30

leucophrys)

Ca, Ce es

NOTES: All measurements in microns, of 10 specirnens fixed in boiling 10% formalin.

The last three sets of measurements were from Lymnaea which had been infected ex-

perimentally with egg of Plagiorchis maculosus from the given hosts.

ON BETTONGIA CUNICULUS OGILBY, 1838 (MARSUPIALLA)

BY H. H. FINLAYSON

Summary

An analysis of the characters of a small series of Bettongia cuniculus Ogilby from Tasmania is

made for comparison with mainland forms of B. penicillata Gray and B. lesueuri Quoy and

Gaimard.

ON BETTONGIA CUNICULUS OGILBY, 1838 (MARSUPIALLA)

by H. H. Fixiayson

{Read 9 October 1955]

SUMMARY

An analysis of the characters of a small series Of Beltongia cuniculus

Ogilby from Tasmunia iy made for comparison with mainland forms of

penicilaia Gray and B, lesueuri Quoy ancl Gaimard.

This species was formerly regarded as exclusively Tasmanian in occurrence,

and its supposed insularity has tended to minimise somewhat the importance in

practical taxonomy of several areas of vagueness and conflict in its description.

Since Brazenor (1950) confirmed the Victorian status of the species, as origin-

ally claimed by Hall and Kershaw (1917), the necessity for clarifying its dis-

tinctions from the well ascertained mainland species has sharpened. A small

series of four skins and cleyen skulls personally collected in the district of the

upper Macquarie River in eastern Tasmania, while inadequate for complete

re-description, has prompted the examination summarized belaw, which may

reduce these uncertainties. The comparisons instituted are vhieHly with B. peni-

cillata ogilbyi of South and Western Australia, and B. lesweuri of South and

Central Australia; B. gaimardi and the eastern form of B, penicillata, which may

be closer to B, ctrniculus, have not been available locally,

EXTERNAL CHARACTERS

Rhinarium very coarsely granular, much more so than in B. penicillata and

B, lesueuri, but its upper margin with a backward and upward directed spur, as

in the former,

Facial vibrissae weuk in comparison with body size, the mysticials reaching

37 mm. as a maxirnum; the lower rows are white, the upper brown and none

black. The supra orbitals may be longer than the mysticials (max, 42 mm.) and

are pale brown, as are the genals also with length ranging from 29-36 mm.

Black eyelashes are present on both upper and lower eyelids, but are weakly

developed, On the lower border of the orbit a crescent of stout black bristics

is developed, the longest 17 mm., and there is a similar but weaker series on

the upper border: the development of these bristles is very strong. in Aepy-

prymnus and falls off in the order B. cuniculus, B. penicillata, B. lesueuri. Sub-

mentals and interramals were not checked in the fresh material and are incom-

plete in the skins; the interramals present are two in number, silvery white and

from 12-17 mm. Jong, springing from a common median site about 20 mm. pus-

terior to the mid poimt of the lower lip.

‘The manus is much stouter than in B. penicillata; the digital forinula is.

3>4>o0r=2>5> or =1; the 2nd digit is shorter relative to the 3rd than in

that species and the 4th is much stouter than the 2nd, and its claw is both

stouter and longer, so that its general size superiority over the 2nd is more

decided than is indicated by the formula. The claws are straighter and wider

at the base and taper more to the point in a superior view than in B. penicillata

in which they are nearly parallel sided, when seen from above; 3rd claw (maxi-

mam) 15:5 mm.; 4th claw 13-5 mm.

Trans, Roy. Sec. 8. Aust. (1959). Vol. 82-

264 IJ, W. FINLAYSON

Pes stout with short blunt digits and nails; the plantar surface is completely

naked as in Aepyprymmnus, therein differing from B. lesuevri and B, penicillata

in which it is more or less completely haired in the young animal; in colour of

integument it is dusky though less so than in B, penieillata; granules 14 per em.

nailer the midmetatarsus, as in B. lesueuri, coarser than in B. pentcillata, nails

witite.

The tail is stout and in the single example measured has the length about

106 per cent. of that of head and body, as in the Central Australian B. lesuecuri,

and relatively Jonger than in Aepyprymnus and B.p. ogilbyi,

DIMENSIONS

The following figures give the dimensions in mm. of an adult male {P4M*)

measured in the Hesh; head and body, 325; tuil, 345; chest givth, 180; manus

lenwth, 28; nail of 8rd digit, 16; pes, 121; 4th toc. 57; nail of 4th tue, ted, ear,

43 % 23; rhinarium to eye, 46; eye to ear, 28; eve {intercanthal), 15; weighl,

1590 yg,

PELAGE

The texture af the coat is intermediate —crisper than in B. lesueuri, much

sufter than in adults of B.p, ogilbyi; it is longer than in either but not denser

as to umderfur, There is a strong overlay of guard hairs over all the dorsum,

except on the nape, where the fur is longer and looser and rutf-like. General

colour a pale, strongly grizzled brownish grey, with the head and tail some-

what darker, and the limbs decidedly lighter than the body. In two examples

a well-marked pale hip stripe is present, contrary to Thomas's statement.

The composition of the pelage is similar to that of B. lesueuri. and Hp.

esilbyi, but somewhat more complex. Mid-dorsally the main pile of undertur

is from 20-23 mim, long; the basal three-quarters of which is Ridaway's blackish

pluinheous, a subterminal band of 3-4 mm. wood brown and the points clove

brows, not black. Guard hairs vary in length from 27-30 mm. and show some

variation in the number of colour bands and their length. The more numerous

and stouter have the normal [ow bands as in the aboye named species, ic, 20

mm, plumbeous, 4 mm. sepit, mm. ivory shading to buff and sepia, and 5 mm-

sepia, The minority are more slender and the ivory band is split into two by

interposition of a very narrow, durk sepia band. There is also a sparse repre-

sentation of a 3rd category of very stout, all dark guards, reaching 36 mm, and

medium sepia. The resulting external colour dorsally is a pale, strongly grizzled

drab — the pallor due largely to the blend of ivory and ash buff, which is not

much darkened by the overlay af weak sepia points. The colour is warmer un

nape and crown and slightly paler on rump. Ventrum, basally deep plumbeous,.

externally greyish white washed lightly with yellow buff. There are two piles—

the undertur of 23 mm, ca. in which the basal half is plumbeous and the rest

creamy white and the sparse guard hairs of 30 mm. in which the basal ¥ths is

plumbeous, median &th sepia and terminal Sths creamy white. The sides are

slightly paler than the dorsum, the subterminal colour being reduced to tilleul

buff us on the rump. The head is slightly darker than the mid back with a

small variable area on the muzzle bistre. The ear backs are well furred a pale

tawny olive, lighter than the head, but variably darkened on the murgins; inner

surfaces a pale buff; antitragoid tuft nat conspicuous. Fore aod hind limbs like

the sides externally, but less grizzled; internally, like the ventrum. Manus and pes

much paler than in the forms of B. lesueuri and in B.p, ogilbyi; a uniform greyish

white, very faintly tinged with buf. Teil with the dorsal hairing proximally

BETTONGIA CUNICULUS 285

more erect than in the species named; colour distribution much as in the latter

but with the proximal russet areas dulled to buffy drab, gradually darkeniny, to

bluckish brown oyer the crest which may occupy ! of the length of the tail and

reach 25 mis in two specimens the terminal 12 mm. is pure white; the crest is

less defined than #.p. ogilbyi and its darkest parts are still grizzled with white;

the lateral surface is buff fading to buffy white on the ventral surface.

Three of the skins examined were taken in mid-winter and the other in mid-

summer, but though they show slight differences in general warmth of colour,

degree of grizzling and density, these are not oliviously related to a seasonal

or sexual factor,

In comparison with B, lesuetri aad Bop. ogilbyt the pelave of B. cunloulus

is gencrally conspicuous for pallor; its lighter exmples are decicdely paler, colder

in tone and more canspicuously prizzled thau vither of these. Its darker variants

peu them in colows, but have the further distinction of a much longer

pelage, a ruff on the nape, and near white hands and fect. The diagnostic

vilue of the hip stripe is doubtful.

CRANIAL CHARACTERS

In the 11 skulls examined, 10 are fully adult at the P‘M* dental phase aad

oue is subadult and at the taath change, The series is more uniform both metric

ally and non-metrically than any other Betfongia group revently examined

(1958), the meant variation in 20 linear dimensions being 9 per cent.

The skull is the largest of the genus, the range ol its chief dimensions vver-

lapping the maxima tor B,p, vgilbyi and B, lesueuri or showing a plus clearance;

with un wverage deviation of the mean values of +7 per vent. trom those of the

former. The mean displacement volume is 66 cc. as against 64 oc. for B.p. agilbyi

und a sage of 53-64 cc. in three popwations uf B. fesueurt recently studied.

‘The assification is light—the mean adult weight of the prepared skull being

16 gw. as in the smaller penicillata; its surfaces smooth and with muscular ridging

even more reduced.

{n general outline (Pl. 1, Fig. A-E) the skull is close tu Byp, ogilbyi with

which comparison is chiefly made hereunder. The breadth/length ratio is +34-+37

(°55); the rostral index is -41--43 (-42), and the facial index 223-241 (232).

The rostram is conical and steeply tapering, hut shallower, The praper-

tions of the nasal bones are much the same, but the expanded portion is more

extensive and its posterior margins bowed hackwards and gently rounded at the

vueners, and commonly just reach ov slightly exceed the interorbital law. The

zygomatic arches slightly wider anteriorly, their maxima at or anterior to the

midpoint. Interorbital space relatively still wider, remaining quite parallel sided

in the oldest skulls available, its concavity rather greater aad its edges smooth

and rounded. Temporal crests very weakly developed; the interparietal per-

sistent and constant, sharply triangular not sémiliar nor creseentic.

Jn Jateral aspect the premayillue usually make a smaller contribution to the

wall of the orbit than in B.p. ogilbyi, but with wide variation in the extent of

the premaxilliary and maxilliary suture with the nasals. The orbital plate of

the lachrymal is very large and the maxilliary process belww it, correspondingly

reduced, sometimes to a mere splint and in three cases to extinction, In these

latter skulls the lachrymal articulates directly with the palatine as in Patorous

and Onychogale and many polyprotodouts. This feature is a good distinction

of B. cuniculus from B. lesueuri and B. penicillata, in which as in mast Macro-

podidae the orbital process of the maxilla is a substantial squarish element fre-

quently more than half the area uf the lachrymal and sealing off the latter from

256 H. H. FINLAYSON

contact with the palatine. The zygomata are weak and shallow as in B.p. ogilbyi.

The supratympanie canal is uot completed by bone, though the process of the

squamasal which is chiefly responsible for the closure in B, lesteurl is strongly

developed. The squamosal frontal contact ou the temporal wall is constant,

The strncteres of the palate are venerally similar, such propurtional ditter-

eulees as occur being caused chiefly by the different character of the secator P4

ansl the greater parallelism of the molar rows. The anterior palatal foramina

are both absolutely and relatively larger, and the breadth of palate at M* also

—the latter averaging 20 per cent. of the basal length. The diastema and the

pusteripr vaenities ure relatively shorter, the latter reaching to about the middle

of the anterior lobe of M®; they are equally broad and ure almost entirely in-

vested by the palatine, a small portion of the anterior margin only, sometimes

formed by the mavillae, paired satellite vacuitics are sometimes developed in

the maxillae, The bulla is much simaller, its length averaging about 10 per cent,

aml its breadth 26 per cent. less than in the smaller B. penicillata skull and its

volume is probably less than one-half; as in that species, however, when aged, a

thin lumella descending from the ectopterygoid margin of the alisphenoid muy

veach the auterointernal wall of the bulla, roofing over the foramen ovale and

its attendant eroove to form a closed canal.

The occipital plane ig much as in B, penicillata, the paraoccipitals and the

mastoid process also, but rather stouter and the latter ure not always closely

contoured to the bulla,

Mandible, comparatively slight, the maximum breadth, breadth of ascend-

ing provess and depth af ramus helow Mz and breadth of condyle all relatively

lower; masseterie fossa and foramen with a similar range of development. but

the process of the angle is shorter and more obtnse.

DIMENSIONS

The following figures give the range and approximate mean of the dimen-

sions ina bisesal series of 9 skulls of adults at the P'M! stage: Greatest length.

7H:7-84-1 (82-2): basal length. 68:6-72'9 (71-2); zygomatic breadth, 44-0-46-6

(45-4): nasals length, 33-636-8 (34-8); nasals yreatest breadth, 13-6-16-0

(14-3), nasals least breadth, 7-0-8-3 (7-8); rostrum depth, 15-0-16-0 (13:3);

interahital constriction, 19-0-21-0 (19:6); palate length, 45:°6-48:0 (46-7):

palate breadth inside M*, 14:0-15.2 (14-5); anterior palatal toramina, 3-4-4-9

(4-3), diastemu, 19-5-14-2 (13-4); bulla length, 12-9-13-4 (13+1); bulla

lweadth, 6-7-8-0 (7-3); basicranial axis, 20°$22-2 (21-4); basifacial axis,

484-517 (50-4): facial index, 223-241 (232); mandible maximum breadth,

BY d-ble+ (40-4); depth of ramus helow Ms, 5°5-9-6 (9-41); breadth of ascend-

Ing process. 12-4-13-4 (12-9).

SKELETAL CHARACTERS

The following data is derived from the complete prepared skeleton of the

young adult male, the flesh meusurements of which are given above: Vertebrae;

cervieuls, 7; tharacie, 13; lumbar, 7; sacral, 2; caudal, 22. Seapula leneth, 44:

dv, maximum Treadth, 21: claviele length, 25-5; humerus length, 39; do. distal

breadth, 13:7; radius Jongth, 45-5; do. maximum breadth, 3-5; ula Jength, 55-5:

do. maximum breadth (coronoid), $-0; femur length, 93-7; do. proximal (tro-

chanteric) breadth, 19-5; do. distal (condylar) breadth, 18-0; tibia length, 115;

do. proximal breadth (inedial aspect). 19-5, fibula length, 112; do. greatest

breadth (proximal), 7°9; pelvis maximum length, 58; do, iliac breadth, 51-0; do.

BETTONGIA CUNICULUS S87

acetubulur bread, 52-6; do, isehtal breadth, 60-5; epipubie maximum length,

125; do, avtivukar breadth, 7-7.

DENTITION

The semblances of the dentition (PI. 1, Fig. F-1) are divided, the incisors

favouring B, penicillata, the premolars B, lesvenri with sume degree of inter-

mediacy, and the molars combining the crown features uf the former, with

metrical characters quite different from both; the mean variation in linear dimen-

sions Of post-ciasternal teeth is 12 per cent.

The incisor rows meet at a somewhat wider angle than in B. penicillata.

I isa relatively small tooth, its dimensions about as in B.p, ogilbyi and decidedly

smaller than in B, lesueuri. Tate (1948) implies that this tooth is longer in cunt-

eylus, though he does not quote dimensions tor it, but 1 cannot substantiate this

in the present material tt is comparatively upright and the medial surfaces

wre separated by a wider interval than usual, and in anterior aspect have an out-

ward (lateral) curvature culminating in eversion of the tips (Pl. 1, Fig. F); dorso-

ventral height 4°7-6°6 (5-8); antero-posterior breadth, 2:4.3°6 (3:0), I is

larger than in penicillata but has much the same proportions; it is much narrower

trunsversely and less rugged than in lesveuri. The height of its erown is much

reduced in aged skulls, a condition which may exaggerate the apparent height

of 1; antero posterior length, 3°0-3°2 (3-0); transverse breadth, 1:8-2-0 (1-9).

I’, as represented by the scrics means, is somewhat shorter dorso-ventrally

and longer anterv-posteriorly than in either of the above species, but changes in

shape of this tooth are so rapid that without more age phases chan are avail-

able, it is difficult to decide whether this is characteristic of the species or simply

of the phase measured. Its general resemblance to that of By. ogilbyt is close,

and in particular there is no inturning of (he crest as in B. lesweurt and Aepy-

prymnus; dorso-ventral height, 2°5-3-6 (3-1); antero-posterior length, 2°5-3°6

(3-0). J, is a larger tooth than in peniecillata hut similarly proportioned; nar-

rower than in B. lesen; anteroposterior Iength, 12-8-14-6 (13-3) and Irewdth,

3°253°6 (3-3).

The nti is smaller than in B.p. egilbyi and about equal to that in the

lower South Australian B. lesueuri: its alveolus lies on the mavxillo-premaxillary

suture wich, as Tate has shown, often approaches it obliquely from belind

rather than above; dorso-yentral height, 3-3-1-4 (3'8):

Both the 3rd (anc more especially) the 4th premolars are much longer

teeth) than in B.p. ogildyi and in this approximate to the standards of B. lesweseri.

Their wlignment in the tooth rows is wormal, the axts in the upper teeth being

nearly parallel to the midline of the palate. The profile of the crests is straight

ox nearly so, though in P! when quite unworn, if may show a slight posterigr

vomeavily and although the wall is higher anteriorly than posteriorly, the dis-

proportion is much less than in B. penicillata. Uysodontism as gauged by the

ratio of greatest beight (of enamel) to length is intermediate but much nearer

to B. lesueuri,

P* wairvower and less bulky than in the other species, its maximum breadth

pusterior ty midpoint and with ie constriction at about its anterior 4, and its

outline as seen from above more clongute and less regularly oval; grooves 5. Ps

is very similar, the length as compared with its opponent, reduced by about

6 per cent. and the breadth and height by ahont 5 per cent.; grooves 5. The

dimensions of u single exumple of P® and Py are respectively; length, 5-1, 4-3;

breadth, 2-5, 2-4; height (of enamel wall), 3-3, 3-3,

P!, the secator, is also a narrower tooth than in either B.p. ogilbyt av

lesteouri, but is much longer than in the former, its length overlapping that of the

288 H, H. FINLAYSON

Central Australian population of B, lesyeuwri which it resembles in general rather

closely; its postero-internal talon and ledge are equally variable and may be

virtually absent, but the maximum development af these features is less, and

it differs in the deeper hollowing of the buccal face below the cingulum. Though

the touth as a whale is nearly parallel to the intermaxilliary suture, there is

some torsion of erest, with very slight cxtraversion of the anterior portion, which

is aecentuated by wear. Distinct grooves 6 in 70 per cent., 7 in 30 per cent. of

examples, hul additional vestiges are sumctimes present as in all the species,

P, is similar in its general characters ta the upper tooth; its length is reduced

by 1] per cent., but its breadth and height are both slightly increased; the over-

all size reduction is therefore less than in the other bye species; a posterior

talon and ledge are not developed, Grooves 6 in 30 per cent., 7 in 70 per cent, of

examples; they are shorter than in the other species and lave a tendeney to

hifureate in their lower course und become lost in obscnre crenellations of

enamel, Range and approximate mean of dimensions in J0 slightly to moeler

alely worn examples of Pt and P, respectively are: antero-posterior length,

7-5-5-9 (8-2), 7-0-7-6 (7-3): breadth, 2-7-3-1 (2-9), 9°8-3-2 (3-0); height

(ol enamel), 2°9-4°2 (3°7), 3-6-4-3 (4-0).

The milk premolars are larger than those of Bip. ovilhyi and B, lesueuri

hut appreciubly narrower, MP! is about equal in crown area to M* and its

trenchant antero-external cusp is very strongly developed; much more so than in

these Lwo species and almost as in Aepyprymnus. MP, much smaller, its crown

nearly triangular through reduction of the antero-external cusp. Dimensions nf

a single example of MP! and MP, are respectively; antero-posterior length, 3-9,

3-5; breadth anterior lobe, 2+8, 2-4; breadth posterior lobe, 3-3, 2-8.

The upper molar rows are very weakly arched, with the anterior interval

but slightly greater than the posterior. The metrical characters of the molars

uf B, cuniculus are markedly distinet from those of B. penteillata und B, lesuenri;

absolute dimensions are hivher in most categories, the length wh Ms 1-3 in slin,

exceeding the means of the comhioed South und Central series of B. lesueuri

by 10 per cent. und the sum of the crown areas by 30 per cent, while the

superiority aver B.p. egiliryi is still greater.

In relative size as interpreted by the sectional crown areas, the 2nd ts in-

variably the largest malar both above and below, while in the upper jaw M? is

sometimes smaller than M*, a condition not seen in the uther species examined;

My, is invariably smaller than My, The overall antero-posterior declension in

size is also much less than in B. penicillata or B. lesveuri, the index of reduction

being 1-5-2-1 (1-8) in the upper and 1-3-1-7 (1-4) in the lower teeth. The

molar formulae and their approvimate frequencies in the upper jaw are

M? > M'> M*>M" 70 per cent,, and M*> M* > Mt>M?*, 30 per cent; and

in, the: Inwer jaw, My > My > My > My, 100 per cent.; the range and approximate

mean uf the crown areas expressed as percentages of (hose uf the first molars

are: M' (100); M* 104-123 (111); M* 90-107 (97); M* 59-72 (62); and M,

FI), My 117-154 (125); My LOT-125 (114); M, 81-96 (88).

In the size relations of upper and lower molars a notable feature is that

M3 us well as M! and M° is invariably Jarger than its lower opponent, M, alane

of fle lower series exceeding the upper tooth with a frequency of 86 per cent.

Shape differences are also appreciuble; there is a general tendency towards nar-

rowing o£ the molars and breadth > length occurs as a minority frequency in

two molars only (M', M®@), whereas in B.p. ogilbyl and B, lesueurt this condi-

tim is répresented in all molars. and is dominant in four teeth in the former

species und in three of the latter. Further, the condition, posterior lobe > anterior

BETTONGIA CUNICULUS 29

lobe, which is dominant in both M! and M, of the above species, is lost in M?

WB. cuniculus, but persists in M; with a frequency of 100 per cent.

The range and approximate mean of the antero-posterior length, breadth of

wnterior lobe and breadth of posterior lobe, in the molars of a bisexual series

of 11 skulls, is as follows; M', ¢-2-4-9 (4-5); 4:23-4:68 (4-5); 4-0-4-6 (42);

M2, 4°6-5:1 (4:8), 4°5-5:+1 (4:7); 4-1-4-6 (4:3): M8, 4-3-5601 (4°7); 4eb-47

‘0 (2°9); Ms?

(4:3); 3:4-3-8

(3-5); 3-5-4-0 (3-8); My, 4:6-5-0 (4-8); 4:0-4:6 (4-2); 3°7-4°2 (40); My,

4-3-4°6 (4°5); 4:1-4:4 (4:3); 3-6-4-1 (3-8); My, 3-8-4-3 (4-1), 3-6-3-9 (8:8);

3-0-3-3 (3-2); Msi-g (in situ), 13-1-14-0 (13-5). In examples showing heavy

wear on the crowns, interproximal wear between mulars is also appreciable, and

the valwe for Ms‘ may fall to 12:3.

The molars are slightly more brachydont than in B. penicillata and de-

cidedly more so than in B. lesveuri and the working surface occupies a larger

proportion of the crown than in cither. The crown pattern is relatively unde-

veloped as in the former, the cusps and lophs being generally low and obtuse,

with the longitudinal elements reduced much below the B. lesueuri condition;

the midlinks well developed in that species and feebly in B. penicillate, are

ithsent. The posterior lophs. on the upper 2nd and 3rd molars are scarecly de-

veloped as continuous transverse ridges, the buceal and lingual cusps being

almost completely separated down to base level by a longitudinal median Assure.

The anterior ea af these teeth, and both anterior and posterior lophs of the

lower molars nevertheless, although lower, are often more continuous and more

extended transversely than in either B.p,. ogilhyi and B, lesnezri.

Accessory cuspules corresponding to those of B.p, ogilhyi are very weak!

developed on the Ist and 2nd upper molars in two skulls only. In one skull, M+

in one maxilla is much smaller and simpler than in the other; in all others the

posterior molars are structurally and functionally normal bilobed teeth, appear-

ing regularly in the succession, There are no exarnples of supernurmary molars

or incisors,

In the single example of the tooth change afforded by the series, P' is

erupting simultaneously with M+,

REFERRNCES

Brazenon, C, W., 1950, “Mammals of Victoria” Melbourne, p, 46.

TMintayson, IT, H.. L9BS. Tac. S. Austr, Musenm, MV, pp. 235-302

Tare, G. H, A.. i948. Bull, Am, Mus. Nat, Hist., $1_ p. 288.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE 1

» Dorsal aspect of the skull of an acdale ¢ from the upper Macquarie Tver, easton

Tasmania. (x 0-1.)

Palatal uspect of the same, (x U-9.)

Lateral aspect of the same. (x 9-9.) The pterygoid plate is not shown,

Ovvipital aspect of the same. (x 0-9.

Lateral aspect of right mandibular ramus wf the same. (x 1-0.)

Anterior aspect of upper Ist incisors of the same. (x 4-4.)

Buceal aspect of an unworn P+ of the right side in another young adult Sar

locality, (x4-7.)

eal

oanpoae

big. TH. Biuweal uspeet of slightly worn Py of the right side in another young adult. Some

lovality. {x 4-3.)

Fic. 1 Phe right rmasillary tooth change in oan advanced subuadult from ths same Jocality.

P4 (upper) is simultaneuusyly displaeing P4 (lower right) und MP! Gower jiidedle);

M! (lower left) persisting in sith, is repvesentecl hy its anterior lohe. (4 4°7,)

H. H, Fintayvsonx PLATE |

SUBFOSSIL POTOROINAE (MARSUPIALIA) FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY H. H. FINLAYSON

Summary

Collections of cranial and dental material of subfossil Potoroinae from South Australia are reviewed

and compared with recent populations. In B. lesweuri Q and G. the wide range of variation in skull

characters and the sporadic dwarfism found in recent populations are confirmed in a cave series of

smaller average size from Yorke Peninsula. A small form of B. penicillata Gray, close to B.p.

ogilbyi Gould but with smaller 4th premolars, is noted as persisting in the Devon Downs

archaeological site in the lower Murray Valley from about 5000 B.P. almost to the present. A phase

of B. cuniculus Ogilby, at present an exclusively Tasmanian species, is recorded from volcanic ash

beds at Tantanoola. Potorous morgani Finlayson closely allied to P. platyops Gould of Western

Australia and originally described from Kangaroo Island is now recorded for the mainland of South

Australia in the middle and upper levels of Devon Downs.

SUBFOSSIL POTOROINAE (MARSUPIALIA) FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by H. H. Fixcaysox

[Read ¥ October 1953]

SUMMARY

Collections of eranial and dental material of subfossil Potoroinae from

Soulh Australia are reviewed. and compared with recent populations.

In B. feaveuri Q and G, the wide range of variation in skyll characters

und the sporadic dwarfisny found iu recent populations are confirmed in a cuve

series of sraaller average size from Yorke Peninsula,

A small form of B, penicilluta Gray, close to Bip, agilbyi Gould but with

smaller 4th premolars, is noted as persisting in the Devan Downs urchacologiesl

site ia-the lower Murray Valley from about 5000 B.P, almost to the present.

A phase of B. eunieulus Ogilby, al present an exclusively Tasmanian speciys,

is recorded from volcanic ash beds at Tantanoola.

Poturgus murgani Fiolayson closely allied to. P.. platyops Gould of Wesleru

Australia and originally dexerihed from Kangaroo Island is now recorded for

the mainland of South Australia in the middle and upper levels of Devon Downs.

During a review (1958) of recent members of this sub-family, chiefly from

South and Central Australia, the characters and status of its representatives in

some ostedlogical material from aboriginal archaeological sites and cave deposits,

have come up for consideration. The collections studied are for the most part

in the Sonth Anstralian Museum and have been culled from 13 sites extending

from the North Flinders Ranges to Kangaroo Island and the lower South-Eastern

district, the chief collectors being Mr. N, B, Tindale and Mr. H, M. Cooper of

the Anthropological Department of the Museum and the Cave Exploration Group

of South Australia. Brief references by the writer in the form of provisional

identifications have already appeared in contributions by the above authors,

For the most part, the age of the deposits yielding the material is only vaguely

known from field observations on the site; but in the case of the Deyon Downs

collections, dates tor several horizons based upon Cl4 determinations have

heen published by Tindale (1957) and the earliest of these, relevant here, is

about 5000 B.P. Much of the collection, however, is munch more recent and

some of it may he no more than a century or so old-

Four species are represented, referable to described forms but providing a

useful extension of Imoewledge on the variation in cranial and dental characters

which must be expected within their limits.

BETTONGIA LESUEUBI Q & G-

The cranial material onder this head falls into two main groups; a miscella-

neous assemblage of specimens consisting mostly of mandibular fragments de-

rived from widely scattered sites —and a serics of relatively complete skulls from

eaves in the Curramulka district of Yorke Peninsula, The latter provides the

greater interest and will be dealt with first.

Material from these caves was first obtained about 30 years ago and has

since been augmented at intervals, most recently by the Caves Exploration

Group, so that 25 skulls from the very restricted area of the site are now avail-

able. The bone is heavily impregnated with deliquescent calcium and magne-

sium salts, but ig otherwise unmineralized and well preserved; about 4 of the

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1959), Vol. 82,

202 H. H. FINLAYSON

skulls are stained a deep choentate colour, but the remainder are almost as cleun

as a recently macerated preparation, and with one possible exception, are entirely

free from soft tissne and fat, The series is well balanced between adults at the

P'NG phase, and-sub-adults from P*M* onwards and in these respects gives more

informution on age changes than could be safely inferred from the recent series

from Jower South Australia and Central Australia just studied (supra). Pleven

separate mandibular rami were also taken and some of these were associated by

the collectors with individual skulls; but as dental unconformities asperse the

validity of this in some eases, | have disregarded it in all and studied the

mmundibles separately as a nondependent group, Other genera of mamunals asso-

ciated with Belfongia in the deposit are all of recent facies and include Lagur-

chestes, Thylogale, Trichosurus, Thalacomys and Canis.

CRANIAL CHARACTERS

Metrical. The largest adult skulls are decidediy smaller than the Jargest in

the recent series from lower South Australia and about equal to the largest fram

Central Australia. However, the size range though considerable is less than in

the other groups, and its smallest skulls are bigger than in these and there are

unmucous intermediate conditions, which are indistinguishable in this regard in

all theee. In detailed linear dimensions the average range is smaller than in the

lower South Australian group in the proportion of 14 to 22 and in most items

can) be completely merged. The approximate means, however, in 17 of 23

dimensions exiumined are lower by from 2-14 per cent. with a mean difference

oF 6 per cent,

Outstanding differences in the upproximate means of absolute dimensions

une depth of rostcum which is less than in either; length of anterior palatal

foriminu which is equal to the recent South Australian figure and 15 per cent.

Wher than for Central Australia; lurge size of balla in which leneth is equal

ta the recent South Australian mean and the breadth 4 per cent greater; while

both are 6-7 per cent. greater than in Central Australia: and a slight mandible

in whieh breadth of ascending process and cvondvle are again lower than in

either,

On eliminating the size factor by expressing ubsolute dimeusiuns as per-

ventages of basal length a comparison of mean proportional development be-

tween the three groups is possible. This indicates that the chief average dis-

tinctions of the lower South Australian skull from that of Central Australia are

maintained by the Curramulka series in the lower zygomatic breadth, shallower

rostrum, lower facial index, shorter mandibular body and narrower condyle and

asevnding process, while the distinction of the longer anterior palatal foramina

is accentnated, these being both absolutely and relatively longer than in either,

On the uther band, intermediate conditions occur and in a few items the agree-

nent js with the Central Australian group, as for example in the falling off af

relative depth of mandibular ramus and in the oxreased relative length and

breadth of bulla —the last is particularly notable.

The overall metrical balance arrived at by this lysonian method fivours the

Central Australian condition in absolute dimensions and the lower South Aus-

tralian in dimensions relative to basal length; but there are wide overlaps In

many items and no clearance in the range of any.

Non-metrical Morphology

Features such as the taper of the rostrum and interorbital space, shape of

the nasal bones, shape of the zygomatic arch, curvature of interparietal, extent

and position of temporal crests and axial inclination of hulla are as variable

SUBFOSSIL POTOROINAE 283

here within strictly limited uge groups (as interpreted by dentition) as in the

recent South and Central Australian series, and serve to connect all three by

numerous links. The skull is generallhy smoothly rounded and with slight

wusculur impressions and less fonst in substance and less rugged than in

Central Australia. The general resemblance in non-metrical characters is

possibly mure often with the South Australian series; but some of the largest and

broadest skulls are a close mate for Central Australian types.

The foramen ovale is partially canalized in three examples but to a fesser

extent than occurs in B. cuniculus. The orbital process of the maxilla is invari-

#hly present and the lachrymal is never in contact with the palatine. The fromto-

sguamosal contact at the temporal pterion is constant; hut in two examples is

exceedingly narrow, 2 mm. or less, and more irregular that T have yet seen it in

this species.

The Subacult Skull

A difficulty in interpreting cranial variation in series of Beltonyid arises in

the comparatively slight differences which distinguish the adult from the sub-

adult skull, both in relutive proportions and in non-metrical features, This is true

ol all Potoroinae in greater or less degree: but is. particularly so with short

muzzled forms such as the present species, in whieh differential factors in -

regional growth rate of the skull are much less responsive to age changes than

in the Macropodinae. The Curramulka series consists of nearly equal numbers

ef adults (P'M') and subadults of the dental categories P?M*, P*M", and PMA,

and the opportunity has been taken therefore of making comparisons hetween

them under more favourable conditions than obtained with other series examined.

Taking the subadelts en bloc, it would appear that neither the tugial index;

rustral index (length of muzzle/greatest loneth), nor breadth index (zygomatic

breadth/areatest length) afford any appreciable distinction between these

geoups. In long muzzled forms, such as B. penicillata, the testimony of the

rostral index and facial index is often quite contradictory; the former mereasing

with age. while the latter may do so or not; in B. lesueuri neither appears to

respond tehably. In relative dimensions as shown by ihe percentage basal

length relation, 15 items of the 21 examined show substantial arecment (less

than 3 per cent. difference), while of the remainder the length of nasals, least

heeadth of nasals, and breadth of palate average 6-7 per cent. lnwer in sub-

adults and the breadth of condvie. ant. palatal furamina and intervrbital breadth

4-7 per cent. higher. The most consistent difference is in the relative dimensions

of nasals and interorbital breadth, but here as in all not a few examples fail

to conform, and a conclusion tentatively reached in earlier tests is therefore

confirmed — namely. that within these dental limits a characteristic subadult

skull form, if it can be said to exist at all, is largely swamped hy individual varia-

tion and its metrical definition rendered impracticable,

The position is similar in nen-metries) characters, and practically all shape

variants hoth of the entire skull and of its constituent bones occur irrespective

of age. A zygomatic outline, whieh tapers anteriorly, somewhat as in Tricho-

strug, is more frequent in subadults but by uo means confined to them, Closure

of the basioccipite-sphenoid suture appears to take place generully between the

dental stages P'M* and PYM? but it is not reliable as an indicator of adult status:

clased sutures have been observed in skulls with tinworn P#M? and open in

skulls with worn P/M* With experience it is possible to sort skulls into approxi-

mate age groups without reference to dentition, by employing subjective quali-

tative tests not easy to define in few words, but the P*M®* coincidence is hy

far the hest criterion and is not, in my present belief. liable to serious error.

294 H, H. FINLAYSON

Dwarfed Skully

The Curramulka material provides further evidence of the characteristic

condition of sporadic dwarfism, which has already been noted in recent series

of B. lesuewri both from Central and lower South Australia and in B. penicillata

ogilbyi (op. cit.). The size reduction of the smallest examples as compared with

the rest of the series is less extreme in the present case than in either of the recent

series, but they occur with greater frequency. This has provided an opportunity

of testing and confirming the tentative conclusions which were based upon the

single examples which were found in the other geographically widely separated

groups.

The examples are fully adult skulls at P/M? and the chief dimensions of the

two smallest are set out in tabular form below for comparison with their recent

analogues and with a skull of the largest size group of each series,

TABLE 1],

Comparison of some dimensions of w skull {rom the largest size group with the smallest, in 3 series

of Betton leaaeuri.

(All at [4 M+)

, Central Australia, Lowér Santh Cosvimulka

Recent, Australia Recent Subtossil

Gasal lengrh 60:0 | g4-4 65-5 54-0 61-0 | 7-2 h7-8

Zygoinatie broadth 45°6 40-6 45-7 | 39.4 44-() | 41-7 aged

Nasals langth 26-2 22-8 | 29-6 ; 23-3 j 27% 25-6 | a0

Depth rosnram | TH-@ | a7 | aet | ee | 18-6 | Wek | Tes

Interorbital breadth la 18-2 16-1 | 15-6 ed 137 140%

Palate lengih 37°45 34-3 ay-d 43-3 373 | 34-0 34°58

Ant. palatal forurnins 2-7 SR of BH 4-2 | 2-7 a2 BF

Diasterna, 73 8-3 | 7:8 | BT 7-0 | BO ras)

Bulla length 17-0 | 15-1 | 183 | 146 ITB | LTB) BU

Bulla brewdths ins | Mes | 18 ton ee | 1a-7 | 12-7

Sacial index Wl Ww ) 170 | 165 | 178 | 174 72

Ma'—* 13-0 | T-t | Ten 113 lS | Peel | lbeT

ps 87 | 1-6 | 8-8 | TT 8-0 | na | Bs

ere | SSS ecre nN Ss

Examination of these figures and of their percentage relation to the respec-

tive basal lengths shows a somewhat higher degree of total differentiation, both

in size reduction and detailed proportion in the dwarfs of the recent series than

in those from Curramulka. There is very lite correspondence in the nature of

the proportional change in the three cases; the sign of the change is the same

for nasals, anierior palatal foramina and diasterna, but the amount varies within

wide limits and in other items is quite erratic and unpredictable. In the case of

the two Curramulka dwarfs also the divergence occurs in different and unre-

lated items and is sometimes of opposite sign, These quantitative relations

support the qualitative morphology of the skull in denying any special com-

munity of structures to the dwarfs, which are obviously as closely related ta

the rest of the pavent series as they are to one another. A notable difference in

the two Curramulka dwarfs is the failure of the dentition to keep pace with the

cranial reduction, though the difference in this is less when the comparison in

these items is extended to the range and mean for the series (infra).

Similar dwarfing almost certainly exists in the subadult graup, but it is

difficult ta define; inequality in general size at the same dental phase is fre-

quent in young skulls, but may be due in part at Jeast to differences in growth

SUBFOSSIL POTOROINAE 2h

rate which would have been later equalized before reaching the adult condi-

tiun; at the more or less static P*M? stave sneh differences may be safely re-

gurded as permanent.

Dimensions

The following feures give the range and approximate mean in (1) 15 adult

skulls at P*M! and (2) 12 subadults at P"M>~+ greatest length, 66-7-71-L (69-3),

63°8-68-6 (66°3); basal length, 57:2-61:6 (59°8), 55-5-60-°0 (57-5); zygomatic

breadth, 40:0-44-5 (42-1), 38-8-43-8 (41-7); nasals length, 25:9-25-0 (26-6),

92°8-25-°3 (24-1); nasals greatest breadth, 11-2-13:9 (19°5), 1L-0-14-0 (123);

nasals least breadth, 4:6-6°5 (5-8), 4:2-6-2 (5-2); rostrum depth, 11-8-13-2

are 11:4-12°5 (12-1); interorbital constrietion, 13:7-15°5 (14-9), 13°5-15°6

14-8): palate longth, 34-8-37-3 (35-9), 51-0-36-9 (34-4); palate breadth ins.

M* 11-0-12-6 (11-7), 9-5-12-1 (10-5); anterior palatal foramina, 2+7-3°7

(3-3), 2-7-4:5 (3-4); diastema, 7-0-10-0 (62), 6-6-9°5 (7:8); bulla length,

16-1-18-5 (17-4), 16-0-18-2 (17-0); bulla breadth, 12-5-14-2 (13-2), 11-7-14-2

(12-5): basieranial axis, 21-3-93-7 (22-2), 19+0-22+3 (21-3); bast facial axis,

37: 1-41-U (38-8), 33°8-39-4 (36-6): facial index, 163-190 (174), 168-183 (173)

and in 4 adult and 2 subadult mandibular rami: depth below Ms, 8-0-9-7 (8-9),

§:2-8-8 (8-4); breadth ascendiig process, 13-1-L4-6 (13-8), 12°3-14-0 (13-3).

DENTITION

The range in dimensions in the majority of items overlaps the minima for

the recent South and Central Australian series and the means are usnally below

beth, though nearer the Jatter; the mean variation for post diastemal elements

is 15 per cent. The dentition as a whole has a tendency to slightness, the reduc-

tion in_most items being relatively greater than the skull size (basal length)

demands and where there are differences in antero-posterior as compared with

lransverse diameters, the change is almost always in the direction of narrow-

ness, as in the South Australian group.

Prediastemal teéth are too few or alveolar damage too frequent to permit

of strict comparisons, but 14, and the canine tend to be smaller teeth than in

either of the recent series, while F and F are intermediate. The greatest breadth

(af enamel) for 9 examples of I! is 2-3-2-8 (2-6) and 7 examples of 1, give a

constant value of 3 mm.

P* is proportionally reduced in both length and breadth and is close to the

recent South Australian condition and narrower than in Central Australia; its

noves vary frem 5 te 7 —35 vecurring in 6 of the samples examined, 6 fn 4, and

7 in 2; the 7 grooved yariant has not been observed in recent material, but the

extra grooves are vestigial and posterior. Py las 5 yrooves only in the 3 ex-

amined, The range and approximate mean of antero-posterior length in 12

examples of P! and 3 of Ps are respectively: 4:7-5:5 (5:1), 4-d4-5 (4-4): and

the maximum transyerse breadth of the same 2:5-3:0 (2-6), 2-2-2-7 (24),

The secator Pt has dimensions close to the means’ for Central Australia and re-

duved by 5-6 per cent. as compared with those of the recent South Australian

material. Its talon development is frequently as marked as in the latter, but is

equally variable and the cusp may he almost suppressed; the yatio of posterior

breadth to length in the range of wear illustrated is ahout as in the recent

material, but the body of the tooth is frecuently slimmer, Grooves vary from

7 tu ¥. with the maximum frequency with the latter, as is usual; a [0 grooved

variant does not occur, Two examples are of interest as showing very slight

extraversion of the anterior portion al the crest, reminiscent of the condition in

the anomalous Frm recently referred ta tentatively as B, penicillata anhydre.

296 H. H. FINLAYSON

P, is also jt} narruwer tooth than in the revent series, but its grooves are con-

stantly 8 which is the higher frequency in these also, Anteroposterior length

in 13 examples of P* and 4 of Py (with slight or moderate wear) are respec:

tively 7'2-8-°8 (8:1). 6:5-7-0 (6-7) and maximum transverse breadth in the

same 2'3-3-2 (2-8) and 2-3-3-5 (2-4),

Of the milk premolars the lower tooth js reduced slightly further when com-

pared with the means of the recent series than the upper one, and the posterior

lobe in both is narrower especially in comparison with the Central Australian

condition, dimensions in 13 examples of ME* and 3 of MPy are respectively;

anteroposterior Jength, 3:3-3-8 (3:5), 3°1-3:3 (3-2); breadth anterior lobe,

2823-0 (2-9), 9.0.2-3 (2-4): and breadth posterior lobe 3:0-3-5 (32),

2:6-3'0 (2°7).

The molar size as ussessed by the approximate crown area (length lalt

sum of the breadth of the two lobes) is smaller in all catepories Chain in either

uf the recent series; the reduction being particularly marked in M%, und M‘y as

compared with recent South Australian yalues. The interrelatiuns of molars in

point of size, gauged in the sume wity, is decidedly nearer the Central than the

South Australian condition, The relative enlurgement of the 2 pusteriur teeth

characteristic of the latter is mot shown. Both M’ and M® are large teeth which

increase a collateral superiori{y of this pair over M* and M!' in the upper jaw.

und in the lower, the mean increase of My, with respect to M“ is accentuated

sill further than im Central Australia, The index of reduction (largest/smallest

molur) is 2-4-6+3 (3-@) in the upper jaw and 2°5-3'2 (2°8) in the lower; the

mean value for both is higher than in the recent South Australian series and

that for the lower jww is higher than in Central Australia as well. The molar

formulae and their approximate frequencies, and the percentage relation of the

crown reas of the several teeth to the corresponding first molars is as follows: in

the upper jaw M* > M!>M*> M! {00 per cent. (the conditions M? > M# and

M*= Mt° being absent) and M! 100; M* 101-115 (108); M* 54-93 (77); M!

16-43 (32). In the lower jaw Ms >Ms>M,>My 50 per cent. and

M.>M,>Ms>M, 50 per cent. (M'=M® being absent) and M; 100; M:

107-131 (124); My 88-113 (99); M, 41-53 (42).

fn shape of molars as shown by the relation of antero-pasteriur length to

greatest breadth and anterior to posterior lobe the agreement is with the recent

South Australian condition, many of the molars beiny still narrower than in that

series. The maxima for linear dimensions are here not infrequently with the

sihadult group, and the following figures for antero-posterior Jength, breadth of

anterior lohe and breadth of pusterior lobe are derived from 25 crania and 7

mintlibles, irrespective of age: M1 3-7-4-2 (4-0), 3-5-4-2 (3-8), 3-7-4-2 (4-0);

M® 3-9-4-5 (4°32), 38-44 (4:1), 9-64-2 (3-9): M® 3-14-0 (3-6), 3-0-3°9

(3-5), 2-4-3°5 (2-0); Mt? 143-0 (2-4), 1-7-98 (2-4), 142-0 (18); My

3-6-4-0 (3-8), 303-4 (3-2), 3-5-3-9 (3-7); My 4:1-4+5 (4-4), 3°7-4-0 (3:9),

3-5-4) (3-8); My 3-6-4-0 (3-9), 3-5-4-0 (3-7), 3-135 (3:4); My 2-4-2-9

(2-6), 2-5-2-7 (2-6), 1-7-2-1 (1-9). The length of the molar rows in situ are:

M.'* 10-9-12-4 (11-8); Mgrs 11-6-12-3 (11-9).

The Curramulks series is of interest as confirming in a strict homupatric

group of examples what may be called the normal heterogenity of B. lesweuri

in cranial characters as already seen in the Central and lower Soutli Australian

groups, which were drawn from much wider geographic limits, What was true

for the earlier dual comparison is equally so in the present tripartite one, differ-

ences being manifest in the average characters of groups rather than in indivi-

duals, a large proportion of which are indistinguishable, or so dubjously so, as

to be beyand the reach of a practical taxunumy,

SUBPFOSSIT., POTONOINAR 297

There is ut present no information on the age of the Curramulka cave

deposit, and an alternative view of the high vaviahility of the series might be

based on the reasonable assnmption that the caves have been acting ws traps

for a very long time during which the B. lesuerri population has undergone

changes in averuge character, particularly in sizo, and that possibly the smallest

adult forms represent an earlier population, and the largest, a later one. Nothing

in the appearance of the material as 2 whole suggests such a stratification. The

species was known to occur on Yorke Peninsula in the early days of setUlement

cher but nu recent examples are available for direct comparisons, Moreover,

the occurrence of similar dwarfs in recent populations of Central and South Aus-

tralia would still reyuire explanation, This might perhaps be met by invoking

the phenomenon of re-emergence, as accepted in the physical anthropology of

Europe in explanation of the appearance of archaic types in urban populations,

but there is mnch against this in the present case.

While there may well be cunsideruble differences in the antiquity of dif-

ferent portions of the series, its dwarfs, as pointed out earlier, do not Form i

recognisable structural type apart fram the similarity in overall size, 'Uhe posi-

tion adapted elsewhere (op. cit.) in discussing the same problem as it vecurs in

B. penicilluta ogilbyi still seems the mure probable; namely, that the dwarfing

in (his species is due to individual physiological anomulies, which either prede-

tonmine the subject ta stunted maturity, or at least predispose it ta such when

the life eyele is run under adverse conditions,

MATERIAL FROM MISCELLANEOUS SITES

For reasons developed above in connection with the normal variability of

the spectes little of theoretical interest can safely be inferred from isolated spect-

mens of infra specific distinction and all that can be done is to record the more

warspieuaus variations which accur, irrespective of their possible significance,

‘Two such claim attention. :

In the lower South-East district af the State at Mount Gambier and Tan-

tanoala, in beds which have been regarded as coeval with the last phase of

vulcanism there, examples oceur with a narraw P; upon which the grooves of the

external face are reduced to 7, thus adding cousiderably to the difficulty of dis-

Linguishing, the species from others which accompany it (infra).

A specimen from the Baldina Creek in the Burra district of the mid-nerth

af South Australia is remarkable for its large size. It is a nearly complete sku!!

without mandible of a young adult at P'M? and is the largest example of any

series of B. lesucnri measured by the writer, Most of its dimensions exceed the

maxima for the recent series from lower South Australia and many of them

exceed those of the available skulls from south-western Western Australia. The

chief maxima are: greatest length 78-5, basal length 67-8; nasals length 30-7;

rostrum depth 14-2; interorbita] breadth 17-5; anterior palatal foramina 5;

diastema 10-5; bulla 18-8 * 15-0; basicranial axis 94:5; hasifacial axis 44-4.

Dental dimensions ure within the recent Suuth Australian range and the molars

(Ms' *, 13:0) are characteristically narrow. The Icft zvgoma is lacking, but the

estimated zygomatic breadth of 44-6 yields a breadth index of +57, which is

li for the species. The skull has ne claim to age and its place is obviously

with the recent series; tartar crusts are still firmly adherent to the molars, and

the circumstances of the find (@ fect deep in loam) which were responsible for

its relegation ta the subfossil collection are not significant of age in an animal

which lives {and dies} in deep burrows of its own making.

206 H. H. FINLAYSON

BETTONGIA CUNICULUS Qgilby

I identifying collections of mandibular fragments of Bettongia trom the

lower South-East distuict of the State, the inherent difficulties due to normal

overlap in dimensions are much increased by the occurrence of a 3rd species,

somewhat intermediate between B. lesueurt and B. penicillata, In examples

with worn dentition the difficulties of discriminating between this and B,

lusueur? may be almost insuperable if the molar sets are incomplete, owing to

the oecurrence of a 7-grooved and somewhut reduced variant of Py. in the latter

(supra). By a fortunate chance the position was clarified by the recovery of

wi unworn P, from the erypt of a mandible, which proved that the intermediute

form was a somewhat microdont phase of B, cuniculus and the evidence of the

premolar was then found to be supported by the molar condition, in which the

seadation of the series is slight, Ms, .; being subequal and M, remarkably large

—in one ease unprecedentedly so, in a mainland species,

The dimensions of P, in two examples from yeleanic ash heds of Tan-

tuntiola are: longth 6:4-6°7; breadth 2:6.2-7; H/L -51--54; grooves 7; Msy-s,

12:3+12 5; My crown area, 10°2-11-7.

B. cuniculus as an extant species is exclusively Tasmanian; it lias been

elaimed as a recent species for Victoria, but us tar as 1 am aware no evidence

af its former presence. in South Atstralia has been previously adduced.

BETTONGIA FPENICILLATA Gray

(1) From southern districts (Kongarati, Mypolonga, Moana, ete.) come a

series ol specimens broadly referable to the modern form 8. penicillata ogilbyt

recently extinct in South Australia. The range of dimensions determined upon

them is wider in most items than in the recent series (op. cit.), Prequently over-

lapping both maxima and minima, but the means are generally equal or slightly

lower, The group is not only reconcilable with B,p, ogiibyi as recently defined,

bul in some structural details may be said to represent that form in excelsis.

The premolar P, in particular while equal to the modern tuoth in size has several

of its characteristic features accentuated. The grooves on the external wall are

sumoetimes incretsed from 7 to 8 and are frequently so on the internal wall and

they are deeply incised and conspicuous and continue so almost to the lower

margin! of the enamel. Extraversion of the axis is marked, the crest making an

angle 15° or more with the lingual margin of M, and the height of the hlade

(enamel) reaches a maxbnum of 4-6 mm. in unworn tecth, yielding the very

high H/L ratio of -70,

The molar rows reach a maximum of 12-8 for Ms;-3 with a mean of 11-6;

M, is extremely variable, its crown area ranging from 5:2-10-3 (8-1), this maxi-

imam exeereding that of modern Bp. oatlbyi as represented here, The size

sequence is generally Me >M, > Ma > M, as in the recent series; but there are

examples of Ms > My > Mio My and these when they incorparate a large M;

present a molar combination scarecly distinguishable from that of B. cunieulus

of Tiwhineola,

A cemarkahle feature in this group, foreshadowed in a milder form in the

recent series, is the anomalous distribntion of tooth wear as between molars

ant premolars in same examples, Mandibles occur in which the molar series

is so worn as to be almost denmded of crown detail, even on Ma, while Ty is

intact in every detail and dimension. Normally, the crowns of molars teamed

with an naworn premolar are themselves scarcely touclied by wear, while on

the other hand a premolar working with molars as worn as these subfussils woulel

be denuded of grooves and reduced to one-half of its nascent height. A vela-

tively lute tooth change was inferred {from indirect evidence) for the recent

SURFOSSIL POTGROINAE 258

series (1958) and these present anomalies may be due simply to cases of extreme

retardation in eruption of P;, On the other land, they may possibly indicate a

revolution in the feeding habits of some individuals, either abnevrmally en-

vironecl or abnormally selective of foodstuffs,

(2) A cullection from the archacolugical site of Devon Downs in the lower

Murray Valley is of interest as being derived from a series of stratified beds,

svstematically excavated by Hale and Tindale (1930) und in part dated by

C14 determinations (1957).

The material corisists of about 50 fragments uf maxillae and mandibles with

teeth both in situ and displaced, the mandibles being about 4 times 25 numerous

as the manillaue, Rettongia ix represented in levels 1, 3, 4, 6 7, 8, 8 and LI,

Wiving a lime span of approximately 5000 years, but % of the material was taken

from levels 6 and 7. A selection of 33 of the best preserved examples repre-

senting all the levels named has been measured and examined in detail, but in

forming Conclusions as to identity, reliance has been chiefly placed upon speci-

mens with premolars, as these are diagnostic to a much greater degree than

molars. All premolars examined are tndaubtedly ot B. penicillata s. lato and

as all mular sets sot associated with premolars show ahout the same variety

as thase which are, there is a strong probability thut this is the ouly species of

Betton present,

The dental and mandibular characters indicate a small phase of the species

ruughly intermediate in size between the moder By. ogilbyi and the small skull

described as a dwact of that form (1958 op. cit. 287) and larger than the types uf

Rp. francisoa and B.p. anhydra. The series is comparatively uniform and al-

thengh most items measured give dimensions which overlap the minima vf the

range for Bip. ogilbyi, the means are decidedly lower and after a serial eompari-

son of all specimens it is considered unlikely that that form is represented any-

where in the collection, nor is there evidence of any progressive change from a

larger to a smuller type or vice versa with changing age of the beds.

The permanent premolars of both jaws in essential structural points, such

as extraversion, torsion and shape, and distribution of grooves are yery mu

as in B.p. ogilbyi, but they are narcower tecth, less high anteriorly and the

grooves in 50 per cent. of examples are reduced from 7 to & and on Pz from 4

to 4 The molars are also smaller: but althongh the size sequences are as in

By. ogilbyi, the size gradation of M*% and M?* with respect to the subequal Mt

and M? is frequently much sleeper, approaching the standard af B.p, francisce

and anhyedra; a well-marked example of this trend gives the relative cruwn areas:

M100; M798; M°63, M420, with a reduction ratio of 5-0, which is unequalled in

B.p. ogilhyi. Some dimensions of teeth with the numbers of each measured are

us tollows: P4(4) length, 6-1-7-L (64); do. hreadth, 2-5-2-8 (2-6): da. H/L,

H6--64 (-60), Py(8) lenvth, 5-5-6-3 (6-0); do, breadth, 2-1-2-7 (2-4); do.

T/L, +56--65 ( 62); P3(5) length, 4-6-4-0 (3-9); do. breadth, 2:1-2-5 (2-3);

MP,(7) length, 2:7-3-0 (2-9); da breadth posterior Jobe, 2-3-2-7 (2:5);

Ms'-8(7) 10-0-11-8 (11-3); Ms,-3(9) 10-5-11-7 (11:2); the minima for the

molar rows are derived frum very worn examples.

This population evidently persisted almost into modern times aml wis

coeval with that of B.y, egilbyi, but not sympatric with it, so far as the Deyon

Downs site is concerned. Its eaistence raises some curidus problems regarding

its possible relations to the hypothetical subarid race represented by the soli-

tary infantile specimen of the Waldana kurpitchi andl of which it may actually

project a former south-eastern extension,

300 H. H, FINLAYSON

POTOROUS MORGANI Finlayson

Since this was described from caves at the western end of Kangaroo Island

(1938), Mr. 11. M. Cooper has taken it in camp site debris at Pennington Bay

at the other extremity of the south coast of the island. The specimen was a

much-eroded fragment of a maudible, but yielded a perfect crown of Py from

its crypt. It proves to be a prominently 2-grooved and 3-cusped tooth with the

median cusp undivided, much smaller and distinctly lower than its fellows; the

axis is straight and the body constricted to correspond to the grooves uf the

crown, so that in the superior view it is distinctly trilobed with the maximum

width near the middle; its length and greatest breadth are identical with those

of the type, in spite of the difference in wear.

The species also occurs in levels 1, 6 and 7 of the Devon Downs deposits,

as mandibular purts, and comparison of these with the Kangaroo Isand man-

dible may be had from the following figures, which give in tum dimensions

for the single type mandible and the range in five specimens trora Devon Downs:

length, dental foramen to masseteri¢ fossa, 15-5, 15-5-16-3 (15-9) (2); depth

below Mo, 5-8, 6-0-6:8 (6-3) (5); P, length, 4-1, 4-1-4-2 (4-1 ca) (3); Pu

breadth, 1-7, 1-8-2-0 (1°9) (3): Msv-u, 9°35, 9-7-10-3 (10-0) (5). The main-

land mandible appears to be slightly heavier than in the type and the molar

rows are a little longer, but there is overlapping in some items and with more

insular specimens this would no doubt be increased. The premolar agreement

is close, both in dimensions and general structure, though they are all too worn

for fine detail to be assessed. The molar sequence is Ms > Ms > or = My > My

as in the type; the single mainland example of My is a larger tooth than its

Kangaroo Island counterpart, but empty alveoli in mainland jaws indicate that

it may sometimes be very minute.

Most of the dentitions are heavily worn and in this condition show a charac-

teristic pattern, in which a remnant of the Hoor of the midvalley persists as a

central island of enamel, sharply defined against the dentine by crescentic

margins -- they are suggestive of the worn crowns of the (?much larger) “Hypsi-

primnus” figured by Johnston in 1881 from the Tertiary of One Tree Point,

Tasmania.

Potorous cf tridactylus is chiefly represented by collections from cave de-

posits on the Glenelg River, and will be reviewed elsewhere with the recent

population.

REFERENCES

Funcayson, H. H_, 1938, ‘Frans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust. 62 (1), p. 152.

Fustayson, H. H., 1958. Rec, S. Aust. Muscum. XITL (2), pp. 236-302.

Haws, H. M., and Trxnate, N. B., 1930, Rec. S, Aust. Museum, 4, pp. 145-218.

Trpaue, N. B., 1935. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., LVI, p. 134.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE CAMBRIAN SOUTH OF ADELAIDE

(SELLICK HILL TO YANKALILLA).

BY C. ABELE AND B. MCGOWRAN

Summary

The Lower Cambrian rocks between Sellick Hill and Yankalilla have been divided into five

formations. In the continuous Precambrian-Cambrian sequence the base of the Cambrian has been

defined by the lowest known occurrence of Hyolithes in the area. The Cambrian sequence is

characterized by a much greater carbonate content than the underlying Marinoan. Correlation with

the Cambrian elsewhere in the State is only tentative. The Marinoan rocks in the central part of the

area are thrust over the Cambrian to the north-west, and the Cambrian is now found as a series of

folds lying mainly between the Black Hill Fault and the Willunga Fault.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE CAMBRIAN SOUTH OF ADELAIDE

(SELLICK TILL TO YANKALILLA).

C, Avrie Asp B. McGownan*

[Read 9 October 1958]

SUMMARY

‘the Lower Cambrian rocks between Sellick Hill and Yankahlla have been

divided into five formations. In the continuous Precambrian-Cambrian sequence

the base of the Cumbrian has been defined by the lowest known occurrence of

Hyolithes in the area. The Cambrian sequence is characterized by a muc

greater carbonate coritent than the underlying Marinoan. Correlation with the

Cambriin elsewhere in the Stite is only tentative.

The Marlnoan rocks in the cenlral part of the avea are thrust over the

Cambrian to the north-west, and the Cambrinw is now found as a series of folds

lying mainly between the Black Hill Fault and the Willunga Fault.

INTRODUCTION

The discoveries by Huwehin (1897) of Archaeocyatha in crystalline lime-

stone at Normanville and Sellick Hill, and of “pteropod remains” (Hyolithes

Bichwald) in “black marble near Normuanville’ by David (Howchin, 1597),

conclusively proved that at least a part of the rocks of the Mt, Lofty Ranges

was of Cambrian age. Howchin (1897) drew 4 rough geological section of the

strata at Sellick Hill, dividing the rocks into argillites, limestones and quartzites.

He considered the Archacocyatha to: occur at two main horizons and thut they

formed “a trne coralline reef in the Cambrian seas”. Howchin admitted the

possibility that the succession in the, Sellick Hill wrea was to some extent re-

versed or extensively faulted.

Madigan (1925) published a sketch-map of the yveolugy of the Fleurieu

Peninsula, together with geological sections at Sellick Hill, Myponga Beach,

Carrickalinga lead and Carrickalinga Creek. He also published a paper on

fossils and the indications of organic activities within the Sellick ITill Limestone

at Myponya Beach (1926). Mawson (1925) also examined this limestone, and

considered that its origin was assvciated with algal activity. We measured a

detailed section within the Cambrian at Sellick Hill,

The idea that the stratigraphic succession was overturned at Sellick Hill

wus definitely stuted in print by Mudigan in 1927. Madigan also mentiuns the

possibility of an unconformity between the Cambrian and the Precambrian

rocks. Seynit (1939) published a geoloyical mup with observations on the

Myponga Beach area,

The publication most helpful ta the writers was the geological map. of the

Yankalilla sheet and its accompanying explanation by Campana, Wilson and

Whittle of the Geological Survey of South Australia (1954, 1955).

PHYSIOGRAPHY

The north-western boundary of the area studied is formed by the Willunga

Fault scarp, bordering the Willunga Basin, which is filled with Tertiary and

Qnaternary sediments.

* University of Adelaide.

Trans. Ray. Soc. 8. Aust. (1959), Vol. 82.

3u2 C. ABELE sani B. McGOWRAN

To the south of the scarp the topography is the result of rejuvenation of the

old peneplained plateau of folded Precambrian and Cambrian rocks. Valley-

in-valley topography, indicating at least two periods of rejuvenation, is scen in

the creek to the south of the new Sellick Hill road.

The drainage system is oriented approximately perpendicular to the shore

line, with numerous bends und small branches at right angles to the main

direction. Creeks have cnt deeply into the hills, forming steep-sided gullies.

This fact, combined with the rough coincidence of the general strike of the beds

with the direction of the shore line, enables good structural sections to be ob-

served in the creeks.

Sinee the limestone is the most common rock type, with Cambrian sand-

stone practically absent, the arca consists of rounded hills. Most of the shore

line, however, is characterized by steep cliffs. Where the Sellick Hill Limestone

outcrops on the coast, wave-cut platforms are common; the Archaeocyatha

limestme sometimes forms narrow, sandy beaches.

In the southern part of the area a coastal plain, with sand dunes on its

western side, separates the sea from the hills. The plain is covered with Hat-

tying Quaternary and Permian sediments.

STRATIGRAPHY

INTRODUCTION

The locality in which most previous worl on the succession has been done

is Sellick Hill (Tlowchin, 1897; Mawson, 1925; etc.),. Henee the section through

the relatively undisturbed Cambrian strata in this locality is considered as the

type section for the Cambrian of the Willunga Scarp and the coastal areas to

the south-west. The writers divided the Cambrian rocks into five formations.

The lowest is referred to as the Wangkonda Formation and may be subdivided

in the north into two members; the Hyolithes sandstone at the base, and the

limestone member. At Carrickalinga Creek the formation is a calcareous sand-

stone. The Sellick Hill Limestone succeeds this, and is for the most part a

characteristically banded limestone. The Fork Tree Limestone includes the

dominant Archaeocyatha limestone with a thin mottled limestone at the top.

In ascending order, the rest of the succession is inclided m the Heatherdale

Shales, with a lower and a thicker wpper member, and the alternating sequence

of greywackes and shales of the Kanmantoo Group.

TABLE f.

Campana and Wilson 1955 Abele and MeGawran 1958

Groywacke Greywacke

KANMANTOO || GROUP

aes es =

npper member

upper slates with phosphatic nodules a HBATHERDALE

|| lower member SHALES

mottled limestone ; ry

FORK TREE

upper Archaocyathinze limestone Archacocyat ha LIMESTONE

limustone

1 mottled limestones-und calnaragis slates SELLICK HILL LIMESTONE

lower Archneocyathinae limestone limestone member | WANGEKONDA

-- —$ $$ FORMATION

Hyalithes s8-

MARINOAN i! MARINOAN

sEOLOGY OF CAMBRIAN SOUTH OF ADELAIDE 303

Geographical names used in naming the formations have been taken from a

well-known topographie feature (Sellick Hill) and from local pastoral praperticy

The Heatherdale farm extends over part of the area to the north, where good

exposures of the shales are found; similarly the Archaeocyatha and mottled

limestones are well exposed on the Fork Tree property, situated inland from

Carrickalinga Head, “Wangkonda” is the aboriginal name for a salt pan south

of Sellick Beach (Mr. N. B. Tindale, personal communication),

Since Campana and Wilsem carried out the most detailed geological map-

ping of the area previous to the writers work there, a comparison of their strati-

graphic units and the ones described in this paper is tabulated in Table 1,

CARRICKALINGA HREAO- NEW SELLICK HILL OLD SELLICK HILL~

ivro! A

CARRICKALINGA CREEK MIFONES: EACH MYPONGA OAD MYPONG A ROAD

5 Crake

= ET Aoethentlese

See

= 1¢ tower

u Lt meecrhes

r Atos tive aie

81%

a t +

in ws 4 fark Tree

> we ENE | 2s se 2877:

|} beeprce diowestore

o a

e4a

Siete Mobb

Formation

Fig. 1—Cambrian Sequences, Sellick Mill-Carrickalinga Creek.

| Sotarieartene

A serics of stratigraphic sections is given in Fig; 1. The section from the

new road inclides measurements of the muttled limestone and succeeding units

tuken where they outcrop on the coast to the south-west. The southernmost

section is also composite, and is poorly known duc to structural complications.

"Thus the thicknesses of the Fork Tree Limestone and younger formations can

only be indicated very roughly.

MARINOAN

Althouzh they haye not been specifically studied, these rocks of late Pre-

cambrian age are mentioned here because of their apparently conformable re-

lationship to the Cambrian strata. They occur in three structurally separated

areas: at Scllick Hill in the north and at Carrickalinga Creek in the south the

succession is evidently undisturbed; in the central part, from Black Hill to near

Carrickalinva Hill, the racks considered to be of Marinoan age are separated

from the Cambrian by the Black Hill Fault,

Below the lowest known fossiliferous unit at Sellick Hill the rocks sre

mainly shales and slatcs, sometimes ‘sandy and occasionally slightly calcareous,

Exposure is usually fairly good in the creeks, but poor on the hills. Massive

quarteites with a tendency to lense occur in the sequence, and felspathic sand-

stones have been found near the top. The uppermost Precambrian is well

exposed on the new Scllick Hill road, where hands of quartzite, interbedded in

shales, are better developed than on the old road.

The quartzite bands of Black [Till ure evidently equivalent to those on the

new road, although the two localities are structnrully separated by the fault.

The lithology of the sequence beneath these is fairly uniform. Slates are most

common. often phyllitic and often calcareons. Small hands and lenses of sandy

material may occur in the argillites, and the coarser matevial is frequently cross-

bedded. The sequence contains lensing hands of well sorted quartzite, und also

of dense blue limestone. In comparison with the Marinoan at Sellick Hill, #

higher carbonate content is evident,

The rocks below the Wangkonda Formation in the neighbourhood of Car-

rickalinga Creek are highly calcareous, These beds, considered to be of upper

Marinoan age, and to be in un undisturbed sequence, include slates, commonly

caleaveous, limestones, both massive and slaty, and quartzites.

A trend of overall increase in the carbonate content in rocks af this age, from

nerth-exst to south-west is evident. However, the trend is in the opposite direc-

tign in the Myponga Creek area, and the facies change to the south, toward

the highly calcareous Myponga Creek section, is very pronounced.

CAMBRIAN

WANGKONDA FORMATION

A peculiar heterogeneous sandstone outcrops above the Marinoin on the

new road, It persists to the north-east beyond Sellick Till and is found below

a massive limestone tu the south of Black Hill, The rock consists of quartz

and felspar grains, mainly angular, and contains dark discontinuous bands and

streaks uf clay, the whole being set in a carbonate matrix in fresh material. In

most outcrops, however, the rock is leached of carbonate. It is slightly more

than fifty feet thick on the new road, An important feature is the occurrence

of a deeply weathered band of clay containing numerous Hyolithes. ‘This band,

found on the new road, is only a few inches thick and may be of very limited

lateral extent, Although Hyolithes has not been found elsewhere in the poorly

outcropping unit, the latter is referred to as the Hyolithes sandstone because

of the importance of this earliest fossil occurrence in the area, and is mapped

as the lower menber of the formation,

The second member differentiated in the Sellick Hill region corresponds in

put to the “lower Archaeacyathinae” lirnestone of Campana, Wilson and Whittle

(1954, 1955) and is called the limestone member. It consists of massive, mainly

blne-grey and grey recrystallized limestone, with « median band rich in quartz

grains, ‘The: hewer cuntact of the member is gradational in some places, chang-

ing upwards from a thin, discontinuous layer of banded rock to massive lime-

stone, [n other localities the contact is weil defined,

The member is cut off by the Black Hill Fault to the north of Black Hill.

An isolated outcrop occurs to the south of Black Hill, possibly terminated by a

fault at one end and covered by Permian at the other. Another isolated outcrop

of the member, surrounded by younger formations, occurs slightly more than a

mile tu the west,

GEOLOGY OF CAMBRIAN SOUTH OF ADELAIDF B05

The outcrops of the Wangkonda Formation in the south of the area are

separated from those in the north, described above, by a distance of several

males, South af Myponga Creek, the northernmost occurrence of rock auteraps,

correlated with the limestone member, is withm a loop of outcropping quartzite

to the north of the sharp bend in the Myponga Beach-Normanville road. These

isclated outcrop patches consist of massive limestone. Tfowever, the pre-

duminant rock Lype in the Carrickalinga Creek and neighbouring areas is a

calcareous sandstone consisting of abundant quartz grains in a calcareous matrix.

it usually weathers to a light buff or greyish colour; fresh surlaces are most

commonly dark bluc, but less often a light bruwn, colour. It is essentially a

stratified rock, ulthough usually the bedding fs poor and parts are quite massive.

Less common rock types include pale grey massive limestone and reddish-brown,

cuarse, arkosic sandstone,

The calcareous sandstone is stratigraphicully immedialely below the Selick

Hill Limestone and is correlated with the two members of the Wangkonda

Formation at Sellick Hill (Fig, 1). Because of the geeat difference in lithology

of the sequence Lelow the Sellick Hill Limestone in the northern and southern

part of the area respectively, the correlation of the base of the Wangkonda

Formation is not as vonclusive as desirable,

The thicknesses of the subdivisions of the limestine member were measured

as Follows;

On the hill above the new Sellick Hill ruad:

Upper massive limestone - 100 Ft.

Median band . ; .

Lower massive band ~ , 210 ft,

At Sellick Hill:

Upper massive limestone be ‘ 105 fr.

Median band . 7 , 75 ft.

Lower massive band _, ' “4 200 ft.

The median band is a markedly lensiny unit. The thickness of the Wang-

konda Formation in Carrickalinga Creek was estimated by pacing as approxi-

mately 300 feet. It increases sornewhat inconsistently towards the north.

The writers have failed to find any fossils either in the calcareous sandstune

or in the limestone member, though microscopic Archacocyatha were recorded

in the latter by Campana, Wilson and Whittle (1955, p. ah These, however,

were stated to average 0-25 mm, in diameter, ie. much smaller than the earliest

known growth stages of this group (Dr. B. Daily, persinul communication ).

SELLICK HILL LIMESTONE

This formation, like the Archaeocyatha limestone ubove it, is persistent and

easily traced over nearly the whole length of the Cambrian in this arca, It

characteristically consists of an alternation of bands of pale or dark grey crystal-

line limestone with buff, shaly bands (Pl. 1, Fig. 4).

There is a wide variation in the thickness, clastic/non-clastic ratio and

degree of lateral extension of the bands, and the sharpness of contacts hetween

them. The “shaly” bands are commonly largely calcarcous and only relatively

mare shaly than the “calcareous” bands, Weathering exaggerates the difference

in composition, The average thickness of the bands is approximately 2-3 om.;

however, bands as thick as 10 cm. occur. The calcareous and the shaly bands

are not always of the same magnitude: sometimes the thicknesses of the shaly

bands exceed those of the calcareous bands or vice versa. The shaly layers

usually form continuous bands. The calcareous layers are more variable. They

are of irregular thickness, showing pinching and swelling, and often disappear-

306 C_ ABELE anv B. MeGOWRAN

ing entirely For short distances. Commonly the shaly bands are crudely bedded;

the limestone Jayers show such lamination only rarely,

Thin sections were made of part of the ruck where the caleareous bands

were discontinuous and Junyps of limestone were surrounded by more shaly

rock. In must sections the shaly laminae drape around the limestone lumps toa

some extent (this is often observed in the unit at Myponga Beach, sha Bak,

dingy planes, marked by a concentration of small Hyolithes (Pl. 1, Fig. 2) ex-

hibit wodulutions parallel to the Irregular upper surface of the limestone hands),

er end against the shale-limestone bouncy. In only cue section the calcareous

portions are weakly laminated, The thickwesses enclosed between any two

luminge are less in the shaly part than those between the correspunding laminac

in the caleareous lamps.

In the Sellick Hill area the formation consists of a lower, mainly clastic

part, characterized by an abundance of angular quartz yrains (from silt to

sand size) in a calcareous matrix. The upper part exhibits better developed

banding. ‘The boundary between the two subdivisions is rarely distinctly obsery-

able; hence the formation was mapped as a single unit.

At Myponga Beach and neighbouring areas the base of the Sellick Hill Lime-

stone is cavered by the sea. The exposed part exhibits well developed banding.

Bands rich in coarse quartz grains occur at some horizons, as well as internally

Drecetated layers,

In cuterops in the Carrickalinga Head region the formation commonly

corgisty of bands of massive, dark blue or purplish-black limestone and finely

laminated shale. Weathering produces a characteristic serrated surface — pro-

jeeting, more or less, consistently thick banels are separated by recessed layers.

Generally speaking, the formation is more shaly towards its base vertically

and tewards the south horizontally.

The thickness of the formation, as measured at Sellick Hill, is 580 feet. In

Cavrickalinga Creek it is about 310 feet; in the two creeks to the north it is

approximately 400 and 500 feet respectively (calculated from aerial photo-

graphs), At Myponga Beach a thickness of over 400 fect is exposed; the rest

is covered by the sea.

At Sellick Mill the tormation contains Hyolithes at various horizons from

just above its buse to 26 feet above il, as well as worm casts and burrows. At

M ypongs Beach a remarkably rich concentration of large Hyolithes is associated

with several layers of internally breceiated rock, each approximately 10 em. thick,

recording minor diastems within the unit, At this same general horizon (ap-

proximately 300 feet below the contact with the Archacocyatha limestone) less

notable concentrations of small Hyolithes occur at various levels within the shaly

bands. This is the best known locality for [fyolithes. The gastropod Helcionella

Grabau and Shimer and brachiopods (Dr. M. F. Glaessner, personal communi-

cation; Daily, 1956) also occur here. Hyolithes has been found at approximately

the same horizon to the east of Myponga Beach. Sponge spicule fragments

(Chancelloria Walcott) were discovered just below the contact with the

Archaeocyatha limestone in the creek about a mile to the south from Myponga

Beach, and a solitary Archaeotyathid within a caleareous band of the formation.

Hyolithes was found at an undetermiaable horizon within the formation to the

sunth-west of the isolated outerop of Archacocyatha limestone about a mile east

of Carrickalinga Head.

FORK TREE LIMESTONE

Taiwer member—Archaecocyatha limestone, Of Wl the Cambrian tock nnits

in the region the outerops of Archacocyatha limestoue necupy the largest area.

The major anticline, of which the Archaeocyatha limestone is the thickest cam-

GEOLOGY OF CAMBRIAN SGUTH OF ADELAIDE OF

petent member, is the dominant structural feature. The Archaeocyatha hme-

stone unit is Litholugically remarkably uniform,

The limestone is most commonly light grey to moderately dark blue on

fresh surtaves. It weuthers to a pale grey, nearly white or somewhat light

brownish colour. JE is generally a very pure, finely crystalline limcstonc, with

invre than 90 per cent, of carbonate minerals, A small amount of detrital minerals

js present, quartz being the most common, It is probably dolomitized to a certain

extent in various pacts.

The limestone is characteristically massive and occasionally jointed.

The thickness of the unit was measured as 570 feet at Sellick Till, Im the

Myponga Beach region the thickness is approximately 700 feet; in the southern

part no reliable measurements can be obtained of the total thickness becanse of

folding and faulting (in Carrickalinga Creek the observable thickness was esti-

mated by pacing as about 380 feet). The limestone thus varies in thickness

(Fig. 2), thinning to the north beyond Sellick Ail.

Upper member—mottled limestone. Towards the top of the Fark Tree

Limestone a marked change in lithology from a massive ta a mottled limestone

js observed, The characteristic appearance of this mottled limestone is that of

dark bluc (sometimes approaching black) angular lumps of Jimestone sur-

rounded by yellow-brown (sometimes reddish), somewhat more shaly material,

Characteristically the distribution of the two components is highly irregular,

olten indicating breeciations sometimes a degree of parallelism of the two distinct

lithologies is exhibited, here is only a slight differential weathering of the

two components.

The member is observed. or, in Some creeks, inferred, to extend as a eon-

tinuous bund from north of Sellick Hill to about two miles north of Myponga

Beach. The mottled limestone does nol outcrop between this locality and

Myponga Creek, to the south of which it continues for approximately twu miles,

until it is cut of by the Black Hill Fault, It reappears on the other side of

the majur anticline in the neighbourhood of Carrickalinua Mead, truncated by

the sea at its northern and by the inferred continuation of the Black Hill Fuult

at its southern extremity.

The thickness of the member was measured as 38 feet on the ald Sellick

Hill road, and 60 fect near the coast west of Bluck Hill, Near Carrickslinga

Head it is wpproximetely 100 feet thick. Even though the mottled limestone

is much thinner than the Archaeocyatha limestone, its greatly different lithology

am persistence and ease of mapping justifies its separation as an upper member

of the ork Tree Limestone.

Spicules of Chancelloria were found in this unit at Mt. Terrible Cully. A

brachivpod has also been found in the same locality by Dy. B, Daily (personal

eomumiinieation ), ,

THEATHERDALE. SHALES

This formation can be divided inta two members.

Lower member, The top of the mottlad limestone is taken as the formation

boundary. In some localities the contact is marked by an abrupt change in

weathering, The shales are here less resistant to leaching, and Ure member is

found as an alternation of very I'visble shales and more resistant limestone. On

the other hand, in other localities the lower few fect consist of highly caleareous

banded rock which does not disintegrate sa easily.

The shales are usually brightly coloured (red, pink), with colour banding,

The beds may he sandy and sometimes (rarely) show cross-bedding on a small

smile, The mure or less regular dark-blne bands of limestone which sltemate

with these tend to be replaced by large nodules tawurd the top of the member.

JOS C. ABELE ano B. MceGOWRAN

On the old road at Sellick Ifill this member does not outcrop. To the

south, the mottled limestone is succeeded by a well-bedded and banded sequence

of blue limestone and yellow or pink shaly limestune. Soft pink shales with

blue nodules follow these. To the north of the old road similar shales imme-

diately suceced the mottled limestone. In Mt. Terrible Gully and the next creek

to the south the rocks are deeply weathered. The sequence is apparently

almost complctcly clastic, and often sandy, There is little indication of the

abundant carbonate which characterizes this horizon in other parts of the area.

The uppermost few feet, especially in the creek to the south, contain numerous

ovoid hollows, which obviously once contained limestone nodules.

Still further south-west (on and near the coast to the west of Black Hill)

the rocks are highly caleareous. Dark blue limestone is found in bands, some-

times broken and a few centimetres thick, The shale/limestone ratio varies con-

siderably but in the sixty feet developed in this section there i. a definite but

irregular upward increase in the clastic component. Large ovoid nodules then

SANSS EY

Fig. 2,—Structural sections, Sellick Hill-Carrickalinga Head. The location

of each Section is shown on the map (Fig. 4). Topography accurate;

vertical seale not exaggerated.

GEOLOGY OF CAMBRIAN SOUTH OF ADELAIDE 309

PERMIAN

CAMBRIAN Greywacke

Heatherdale Shale

fork Tree Limestone

Selick Hit) Limestone

Bey Wen 7g kondse Formation

[-J---]

PROTEROZOIC Ee

SCALE 'N CHAINS

te] 40 80 120

a eee Se ae See |

oun C, ABELE axp BL McCOWRAN

appear and become common toward the top of the member. Many are 15

inches or more: in diameter (the largest found is over 3 feet across), Distorted

lutninations may be traced around these nodules, although the latter sometimes

sli laminations. A concentric structure is seen in thin sections of the nadules

which, although not phosphatic, contain quartz and some fine opaque dark

naterial, probably organic, The niodnles are arranged in rows: certain bedding

planes inay he traced for several yards with nodules regularly placed about six

feet apart. Where well preserved the shales at the top of the member are black

aml @ecasionally pyritic. Small phosphatic nodules and elongated segregations

veeur in the upper part of the member,

Many of these features are found at Myponga Creck, ‘The beds there are

deeply weathered, however, and large nodules are fomd only in a lew bands

immediately below the brinwwn shales of the upper member.

At Carrickalinga Head the member is aguin highly caleareous throughout.

In the cliffs about one-quarter of a mile to the north there is a sequence of

black nibbly limestone layers separated by black shales, with the latter deeply

recessed by weathering. This rock-+type ts found when occurring inland. to be

similar to the alternating limestone and shale bands described above. Shales

with urge nodules are again found above the hands, and they are pyritic when

well preserved,

The member is about 250 feet thick to the south of Sellick Hill; 225 feet

west of Black Mill; and about 200 feet (an estimation only) at Myponga Beach.

The incompetently folded seqneace at Carrickalinga Head could net be properly

measored: however, the unit is thicker here than to the north.

Abundant small ribbed yastropods were found as internal and external

moulds in the creek immediately south of the new road, They occur in the

deeply weathered shales about fifty feet above the uppermost outcrop. of

Arcbedeyatl limestone (the mottled limestone does not outcrop here). ‘The

gastrapods are un undeseribed species of Helicionella. Myolithes was found just

abuve this level, on hovizons a few inches apart. The fossils seem to be pre-

sorved largely as iron oxides, also in a deeply weathered matiix, and cach

bedding plane contains a large number of specimens. This indicates aceumu-

lation and sorting during the time break represented by each bedding plane.

Although flattened and altered, they are rather large, and are possibly H. plano-

cénvexn (Tate) (Dr. B, Daily, personal communication). Hyolithes is also

present al the same level (approximately). north of Sellick Hill; west of Black

Hill, wt Carrickalinga Head (found by Dr. 5. Daily), and on the coast abont

tHiree-<juarters of a mile to the north of the latter locality, Sponge spicules, over

ane ema. in length, oceur in the large nodules at Currickalinga Head.

Upper member, The contact between the two members [s well shown west

af Blavk Hill, and is also found at Mvponga Beach and south of Sellick THill,

Ahout five feet of shales sandwicluxl between the large nodules and the grey-

wackes at Carrickalinga ead are also considered to belong ta the upper mem-

her, Yhe Ileatherdale Shales cannot be subdivided sufficiently clearly, for the

purposes of mapping, south af Myponga Beach.

Th all cases a sudden decrease in carbonate content is evident. The contact

has been mapped as being the upper limit of the occurrence of large nodules,

Ahove this, and evidently conformable, is a uniform series of often dark, grey

ar brewnish shales often dominated by cleavage, so that the bedding planes

ure difienlt to detect, Small phosphatic uodules, cither concentrated on certain

bedding planes or scattered more nnifurmly, are common, Elongate inclusions

of the sume composition ovcur. In one of the sections west of Black Hill, how-

GEOLOGY OF CAMBRAIAN SOUTIT OF ADELAIDE 311

ever, large carbonate nodules are found 8 feel above the first appearance of the

upper member.

Red nodules ecenr in this area, in a sixefuot band several Feel belaw the

contact with the Tertiary limestoncs. These contain hematite and goyazite

(determined by Dr, B. J. Skinner), as well as apatite. The black nodules, which

are abundant throughout the area, have upatite, sometimes goyazite, and prob-

ably organic matter, Carbonate is lacking, as in the matrix.

Elsewhere in the region the scquenee is fairly uniform. The shales ave black

or grey on the fresh surfaces, and apatite nodules appeur at varying distances

above the liwer contact. The upper contact is not seen except at and to the

south-west of Myponga Creek, where the member is very greatly thinned, Ta

the north the Willunga Fault may have cut off the topmost beds, although it is

ussible that this is not the case (see Fig, 2), Consequent erusion of the searp

ack from the fault has resulted in the covering of others by Recent outwash

material. Campana und Wilson (Campana, Wilson and Whittle, 1955, p, 8)

give the observable thickness of the formation as 700 fect; it fs likely that the

figure for the upper member alone approaches 800 fect.

The only fossil found in the upper member of the Heatherdale Shales fs a

flattened gasteapod from north of Carrickalinga Head with a concentric structure

and ccoentric apex, Dr, B, Daily | person communication) has suggested that

it may be a species of Scenella Billings, and this seems likely.

GREYWACKE

Tn the cove north of Garrickalinga Head there are five feet of shales follow-

ing the uppermost appearance of the large nodules. ‘he rest of the sequence

is an alternation of greywacke and shale. or weathered slate. Each band of

greywacke seems tu he a unit of deposition, usually up to five fect thick. Such

units may be separated by a comparable thickness uf shale, or the two grey-

wacke units may be almost adjacent.

Several thin sections of greywacke were studied. The texture is the must

naticeable feature: the angularity of the coarse component, and the presence

of fine material, Quartz is the dominant mineral. The grains are in some cases

more than 0-2 mm. in maximum diameter with some more than 0-5 mim. in

others the average is less, the bulk being closer to 0-L mm, Other minerals of

similar grain size include microcline, plagioclase and epidote, all varying con-

siderably in amount. Rock fragments, of low regional metamorphic gradc, are

often Found, as is muscovite.

The interstitial material is apparently nearly all detrital matrix, cither uno-

altered or slightly metamorphosed since accumulation. A black component is

seen, under very high power, 1o be opaque and fibrous. This, according ts

Dr. B. J. Skinner (personal communication), is almost certainly organic, Tron,

perhaps in the form of goethite, accompanies this. Although the detrital inatrix

is very much in evidence in thin section, it tends to be wrapped around the

grains, and occupies less of the total volume of rock than is evident under lower

power,

The charser components af the rock wre within the sandstone range, The

mainly detrital interstitial matrix is more abundant than is the case in sub-

greywacke. It is concluded that the ruck may best be termed a greywacke

(taking the distinction between greywacke and subgreywacke as hased primarily

on degree of textural maturity, rather than on mineralogical grounds).

These rocks are found only in the southern part of the area, from Myponga

Beach to Carrickalinga Creek. Although the greywacke units retain their shape

during folding, they are very jumbled on the coust. This is evidently due to

312 Cc, ABELE axn B. McGOWRAN

the incompetent folding of the Ileatherdale Shales against the massive crystal-

line limestcne, Unfortunately neither group could be accurately measured, but

the maximum thickness of the exposed vreywacke-shale sequence is approxi-

inately 450 feet.

PERMIAN

Unconsolidated sand and boulder clay of glacial origin cover isolated parts

of the area. No detailed mapping of these subhorizontal sediments was ut-

tempted.

TERTIARY

Bryozoal Miocene limestones rest unconformably on the Cambrian rocks at

the edge of the Willunga Basin.

QUATERNARY

Qualernary deposits iu the area include coastal sand and dunes, subhori-

zontal alluvial clay and gravel, and kunkar.

SOME REMARKS ON STRATIGRAPHY

(a) The Precambrian

A close resemblance has been found between the pre-fossiliferous sequence

in this area and the Adelaide System of the western Mt. Lofty Ranges to the

north (Campana, Wilson and Whittle, 1954, 1955). AJI units thin to the south,

and some, such as the limestone correlated with the Brighton Limestone, dis-

appear locally, General similarities with the type areas are seen, as in the

Tapley’s Hill Slates, and the Sturt Tillite.

(b) The Base of the Cumbrian

As in many parts of the State, the Precambrian-Cambrian sequence is tran-

sitional, The Pound Quartzite, however, is not found. The total thickness of

the massive quartzite bands of the new road or Black Hill sections is less than

the known minimurn thickness of the Pound Quartzite. Shales occur in greater

quantity than in the Pound Quartzite. and the quartzite bands are not laterally

persistent. This change in facies indicates deposition further from the source

area,

The base of the Hyolithes sandstone is taken, for mapping purposes, as the

base of the Cambrian. No fossils have been found below the Sellick [ill Lime-

stone in the neighbourhood of Carrickalinga Creek, and there the boundary is

placed at the base of the calcarcous sandstone, which is equivalent to the Wang-

konda Formation at Sellick Hill.

(ec) Correlation

The association at Myponga Beach of Hyolithes communis Billings and

_Helcionella tatei Resser is referred by Daily (1956, p. 138) to his faunal as-

semblaye No. 3, which is elsewhere characterized by the trilobite Yorkella ans-

tralis CWneayant). Helcionella is a long-ranging form and the affinities of the

Myponga Beach fauna could be more with assemblage No. 4, although H.

communis is not listed here. Owing particularly to the failure to find trilobites

in the Sellick Hill-Myponya region, any biostratigraphic correlation with other

Cambrian rocks in South Australia must be somewhat inconclusive.

If the equivalence with assemblage 3 is valid, then the Archaeocyatha fauna

is younger than this assemblage, This helps to elucidate certain points in con-

nection with the Cambrian of South Australia.

GEOLOGY OF CAMBRIAN SOUTH OF ADELAIDE abs

Firstly, the earliest known appearance of Archacocyatha on Yorke Penin-

sula is somewhat later than in the northern part of the State (Daily, 1956, p.

129), Jtis now appurent that it is still later further to the south, at Sellick Hill

and Myponga Beach (assuming that, as it now seems, there are no Archaco-

evatha in the upper member of the Wangkunda Formation).

Secondly, the White Point conglomerate of Kangaroo Island contains

boulders af Archaeoeyatha limestone, The earlier lime limit foe movement in

the souree arca (whether in the formation of one or more fault scarps, or of a

broad uplift), was placed after that of assemblages 1 and 2, The limestone

component was transported as consolidated material. The later limit is below

the upper Lower Cambrian (the Emu Bay Shale of Kanyarou Island). If the

Fork Tree Limestone was developed to the west, where the movements evi-

dently occurred, then the lower time limit could be raised to beyond assemblace

3. Recent examination by Daily of a bore care Fram Catvamulka supparts this,

Beyund the possible correlation of part of the Sellick Hill l’ormation with

yart of the Pararic Limestone on Yorke Peninsida, little more ean be said, The

fyvtithes at the base of the Sellick Mill Formation is the oldest known Cambrian

fngsil in Sonth Australia, if the jellyfish-bearing Pound Quartzite is regarded as

uppermost Precambrian.

The fauna of the lower member of the Heatherdale Shales, with Hyolithes

(possibly planoeonvexa) and LMeleionella sp., is not knuwn from this level else-

wheres neither is the gastropod ? Seenella Killings, from the upper member.

STRUCTURE

The lfossiliferois Cambrian formations lie on the western flank of the

Mypenga Hill-Little Corge anticline, which has been shown by Campana and

Wilson to dominate the structure of the region. The structural relationships of

the Cambrian are shown on the tectunie sketch and in the structural sections

(Fig. 2), The Cambrian is separated [vom the older rocks by the Bluck [ill

Fault, except at the northern and svuthern ends of the region. ‘fo the north-west

af the fault the attitudes of the beds are controlled mainly by the development

of a series of south-west-north-east running folds, extending from south-west of

Carrickalinga Hill to north of Black Hill, The tectonic sketch (Tig. 3) indicates

the tendency toward development of a structure en echelon. It is convenient to

describe the structures on either side of the Black Hill] Fault separately.

At Sellick Ifill and to the north-east along the Willunga Searp the beds

are overturned (Fig. 2) as first stated in print by Madivan (1997). Farther

suuth-west, near the new road, the upper member of the Wangkonda Formation

may be traced over the axis of an anticline, and around onto the eastern flank

of the adjacent syticline, The anticline pitches south-west, and to the north-

cast the stress is taken yp in the contortions of Lhe Marinoan. This axis is the

first of the series. The continuity of the latter is broken hy a transverse fault,

about at right angles to the Black Hili Fault, one mile cast of Myponga Beach.

The coastal section to the north of the transverse fault is very complicated.

Above the Archaeucyatha limestone in the first creek north of the fault the

mottled limestone is found ta be repeated at least three times, as is the Archaen-

evatha limestone, and certain pink shales and limestones. Brown and preeh

shales outcrop in the cliffs. These may be a drag back of the upper Heatherdale

member, but the lower was not recognized. Further north there is evidence

vf tight folding, and some indications of faulting, but it is not knuwn how this

fits into the regional structural pattern, and the area is too eomplex fur details

ta be shown on the map.

McGOWRAN

ABELE anv B.

314

QvaH = YONIYNOINYVS — IH MONTES

HDLAYS

goueg andtyeng 1

PUB [PLY INYS ——= =

Asgpuneg Loijeu tay

froedee,

Bayles Ut BROS

a i a

DINO LIAS

paiazgiy ANE

eemurnosdde 10 Are

panwasgo Annan

4084

ayeurnorwe _ pte

persesyo

eed

areuyrosdde -+-

Panszosqo ¥

BUY IUAS

UbOUeyYy rs)

uoeuos epuovbuem [@ }

Votpeursog jth YAIAS CE

auoyseuin ea wea [F]

SB/EYS S\epleusRay a

ayzemdoin [2]

uewiseg [i]

GEGLOGY OF CAMBRIAN SOUTH OF ADELAIDE 515

The cliff sections at Myponza Beach (ig. 2) are on the southern Aank

ot the most persistent anticline in the series. The rocks, including the succession

trom the Sellick Hill Limestone to the greywacke at the top of the sequence,

dip inland at successively lywer angles. Tu the south-east the greywacke is

abruptly succeeded by steeply dipping phyllitic and calczrvous slates. The

snecession at Mypunga Beach ts not overturned, and it is evident that the

relationship of the Cumbrian to the older rocks to the south and south-east is

a fault contact, not a relatively uncomplicated, although overturned, sequence

through the Marinoan and Sturtian (o the Torrensian basal grits and conglomer-

ates above the Archacan, as has usually been stated or inferred in the past.

This. sequence may be Gaced along the coast for about two miles to the

sonth-west of Myponga Beach. Beyond this the Archaeocyatha limestone onl

is found, and here, as over an extensive area inland, the attitude of the beds

can rarely he detected. It seems fairly certain, however, that the beds are

flatter than to the north, as (he anticline pitches south-west. Further south the

beds ure cut off by the major fault, but small folds are developed to the west

(Fig. 2). hese small flexures inland from Currickulinga Head are indicated

in the outerop trace of the mottled limestone. ‘To the south, beyond the lime-

stone, folds are inferred in the greywackes and shales.

The thick Archacocvatha limestone has dominated the structural evolution

mM the area; the more argillaceous units on cither side show signs of relative

incampetency. with contortions and drag folds near the contact. The most pru-

nounced vesult of this is the apparent variation in thickness in the Heatherdale

Shales at Carvickalinga Head. All the Cambrian aud older limestones are re-

crystallized, and many show signs of stress They have sometimes became very

blocky, due to the formation of & svstem of joints.

Structural trends to the south-east of Black Hill Fault are shown on the

tectonic sketch. Truncated cross-hedding in the sequence invariably shows

the beds to be the right way up. Hence it appears that the Black Hill Fault

cuts off beds successively lower in the sequence, from Black Hill to Mypou

Creek, Outeropping further east up Myponga Creek, however, is a south-

dipping, limestone. blue or buff in colour. According to Campana and Wilson,

who have mapped it, it is a “blue siliceous limestone grading in places to a haff-

coloured dolomite” (Campana, Wilson and Whittle, 1955, p, 9). They correlate

it with the Brighton Limestone. Still further to the east are characteristic

Sturtian und. Torrensian horizons, including the Sturt ‘Tillite, Tt is evident that

this part of the succession is averturned.

{soclinal, synelinal tolding, probably with accompanying strike faulting, is

provisionally postulated, although the ficld evidenee has not been examined in

detail. ‘The tectonic sketch shows sume quartzite bands of the Black Hill area.

It is sormewhat diagrammatic, us there is extensive soil cover in places and it

seems that the bands have been broken feclonically, but the general irends

ean be followed. In the creek to the south of Black Hill the quartzites on either

side of the Wangkonda Formution are dipping south-east at about the same

angle, The structure is considered to be a syncline, overturned toward the

north-west, The southern limb is postulated as haying been thrust over the

other, with nan-repetition of the younger beds as a result. The Emits of this

fault are net known: to the north-east it disappears under the Permian; to the

south-west it dies out, However, the syncline may continue with a flexure to-

ward the south, To the north of Carrickalingy Hill syncline is indicated by

the outcrop trace of quartzites, and the core contuins a massive limestone cor-

yelated with the upper part of the Wangkonda Formation, Since there is a

normal sequence further south in Carrickalinga Creek, a transverse fault may

separate these two localities; the significant areca, however, is covered by the

Permian-

Although the Black Hill Fault plane has not been observed, there is abundant

evidence for its existence, Successive cutting off of heds on either side has been

mentioned, This, together with the sudden change in lithology and attitude on

either side, is shown on the maps. The fault is the result of an overthrust to-

ward the north-west, and some of its effects are shown in Fig. 2. Other evidence

for its existence may be found east of the new road, Campana and Wilson have

mapped, beyond the Permian outlier, a straight, overturned sequence from the

Cambrian to the Sturt Tillite, Assuming the Tapley Hill Slates to he equivalent

to the slates to the south-east (there is no development of “Brighton Limestone” ).

the Sturtian is seen to be displaced. The syncline of Black [ill (Cambrian and

Upper Marinoan) also continues to the south of part of the Sturtian. Tight

folding, or thrusting, or both seem to have occurred. ‘This could be an extension

of the fault, as the latter is broadly arcuate in outcrop trace, and convex toward

the north-west.

To the south, the fault probably extends beyond Carrickalinga Creek, but

there is little Geld evidence for this. Lt is indicated, huwever, by the proximity

of the greywacke to the Fork Tree Limestone in Currickalinga Creek. In this

area there is fossiliferous Cambrian on either side of the fault. To the west

of Carrickalinga Hill the sequence from calcareuus sandstune (Wangkonda

Formation) to Archacocyatha limestone occurs in a syneline, cut off on the

north side by a transverse fault and on the east by anvther fault. The evidence

for these includes structural disecrdancy and Jithological discontinuity. The

extent of the eastern fault to the south, toward the undisturbed sequence {from

Marinoan to Fork Tree Limestone) is unknown; there is also the problem of

the syneline still further to the cast and its relationship to the Carrickalinga

Creek section, as indicated earlier,

Campana, Wilson and Whittle (1953, pp. 16-17) have discussed the Wil-

lunga Fault, which has been the locus of several episodes of movement since

the early Paleozoie. The fault evidently originated in the same stress field re-

spousible for the thrusting along the Black Hill Fault plane (Fig. 2). Later

movement wits important in the formation and cvolution of the Willunga Basin

(Glaessner, 1953, text-fig, 1.

* The Miovene Port Willunea Beds overly the Heatherdale Shiules, haviag

transgressed to the south-east beyond the earlier limits of the sedimentutional

basin (Campana, Wilson and Whittle, 1955, Pl. 1, Figs. 2,3), These beds have

been tilted steeply to the west hy movement along the old fault plane { Fig. 2),

The existence of late- and pust-Pleistowene disturbances has been claimed by

Campana and Wilson.

SEDIMENTATION

Sedimentation in the Adelaidean geosyueline continued from late Proterozoic

inte Cumbrian (Duily, 1956, p. 135). Rapid thinning of the Adelaide System

toward the south has. been interpreted by Campana and Wilson (Campana,

Wilson and Whittle, 1955, p, 17) to indicate that this area was situated toward

the suathem limit of the sedimentational trough. Daily (1956, pp. 135, 136)

hus made an alternative suggestion, considering it likely that the area was a

local isolated high within the geosyncline, The writers agree that the belt now

vecupied by the Archaean core of the Mypenga Hill-Little Gorge anticline was

prubably mobile during the Lower Cambrian.

There are some indications of earlier mobility in this general region. The

nature of the sediments described by Forbes (1957) and correlated by him with

SELLICK’S HILL— YANKALILLA

ey, :

Sargichaliogn SEE 1 Ay ‘ f J 3 ; AREA

GEOLOGICAL MAP

+7,

Slluyium ef

Ca aw

Mottled tmesifoce Bowroeries daerved? a ie

fork Tree

Limestone " iferced a

TERTIARY HHUA Archacacyath? iimestone (os pe * [- igo

Feults faowe

PALAEOZOIC Sellick Hil Limestone

z 7

” infercel

PERMIAN

Seren Strike znd dip ¢ bedding

CAMBRIAN

Creywacke

Hy offfhes sandstone Fertica! Beold ye

Maper enember PROTEROZOIC

Heatherdale Shefes SCALE IN CHAINS

lower member PA Merman ao oo

A EE ESS ee.

C. Abele and B. McGowran. Fig. 4—Geological Map of the Sellick Hill-Yankalilla Area. Sections A-A to G-G are illustrated in Fig. 2.

GEOCLOGY OF CAMBRIAN SOUTH OF ADELAIDE 317

the basal Torrensian, suggests a nearby source area of tectonic origin. A later

gap in sedimentation seems indicated by the absence of the upper members of

the Adelaide System to the east of the Archaean core of the Myponga Range

(Campana, Wilson and Whittle, 1955, p. 17). Thinning of Proterozoic forma-

tions. west of the core points to uplift in this anticlinal area, This could inhibit

deposition without heing important at this stage in the formation of a source

area, Muringan sedimentation in the Scllick Hill area seoms to reflect the con-

ditions present elsewhere in the State al this time. Absence of the typical

Pound Quartzite may be due to non-deposition, as suggested by Daily t 956,

p. 156) On the other hand the quartzites of Black Hil and to the north, not

far below the Hyolithes sandstone, may be its stratigraphic equivalents in a

somewhat different facies, There ig evidence of shallow water conditions, but

no breaks in deposition have so far been found,

The fMyolithes sandstone, with angular grains of quartz and felspar in a

partly detrital matrix, suggests transportation over a short distance. Rather

than from a distant souree in the west, it was more likely derived from nearby

in the east. More of this material was brought in during the succeeding time

of formation of the limestone member, In the north a lensing, elastic band is

found within the limestone: more rounded sand grains characterize the undif-

ferentiated Wangkonda Formation in the neighbourhond of Carrickalinga Creek.

The carbonate of the limestone member is completely recrystallized, and

no evidence for the possible importance of biological activity in its deposition

has been found, Any evidence of deposition as a ealearenite has also been

destroyed.

Another influx of angular clastics occurred later, during the initial time af

deposition of the Sellick Hill Formation. It is concluded that an area with inter-

mittent uplift tendencies existed net far to the east.

The origin of the Sellick Hill Limestone is a puzzling, unsolved problem.

No single explanation is sufficient hecause of the lithological and textura! differ-

ences within the unit due to horizontal and vertical variation,

The cause of the most striking feature of the rock, namely, the rhythmic

alternution between the shaly and the calcareous layers, is unknown. Two ex-

planations are suggested for the pinch-and-swell structure commonly observed

in the limestone bands and the relations between the laminae in the shaly parts

to thase in the calcareous parts as obscrved in thin sections. The first ane pos-

tulates differential compression of the calcareous and the shaly bands respec-

tively, prohably during the subsequent tectonic disturbances, The second ex-

planation attributes the formation of the calcareous bands to a biochemical

agency, such as caleyreous algac (Mawson, 1925). Variations in their rates of

wrowth resulted in different thicknesses at different positions in the limestone

hands, At the loci of rapid limestone accumulation (swells) the depositional

interface was at a higher level than in the intervening depressions (pinches),

where cuntemporaneous deposition of more shaly material took place at a slower

rate. It must be emphasized that no positive pronf of algal action can be pro-

dueed, If any microstructure was present. it vias recrystallized beyond recog:

nition,

Although conditions of vigorwus wave or current action were present at

various times during the deposition of the Sellick Hill Limestone, intraforma-

tional brecciation is considered to be of restricted importance in the formation

of the textural and structural features of the unit.

The Archaeocyatha limestone was deposited in a environment at sufficient

distance from a source area to receive only a small amount of fine clastic material.

Reerystallization of this “normal marine limestone” {Krumbein and Sloss, 1951,

alk CG AGELE ann BR. MeGOWTAN

p. 137) has destroyed any evidence of whether the precipitation of calcium

carbonate was due to purely chemical or biochemical causes.

Archaeocyatha lave been found very close ta both the upper and the lower

contacts, but occur in patches rather than being evenly distributed throughout

the november, Contrary to the expressed opinion of several workers, the writers

do not consider the term “reef” to be at all applicable to this limestone. This

is particularly so when the essential reef property of active growth is considered,

Archaeocyatha did not form mounds or banks fv the Fork Tree Limestone. This

view has already been expressed by Daily, who says that “they [Archaeocyatha]

are true biostrome organisms” (105fi, p. 137). It should he mentioned, how-

ever, that Twenhofel (1950, p. 189), in his discussion of Cambrian reefs, men-

tions that some large aceumnulations of Archacocyatha in Labrador are im the

form of rects; and Rodgers (1956, p. 375) speaks af Archaeoovatha reefs in the

Lower Cambrian of the Appalachians.

The Facies change from Archacocyatha limestone to Heatherdale Shales is

essentially gradational, although mappable units with fairly clear-cut boundaries

are recognized within this transition. The change is one of increasing clastic

deposition in an environment with a high carbouate content, with the disap-

pearance of the benthonie Archacocyatha at the begining of the transition.

Sedimentation again became rhythmic, allhough nat to the same extent as before.

The origin of the large carhonate concretions is unknown. Apart from the

high concentration of calcite their composition is very similar to that of the

shales. Clifton (1957) has given a clear description af events in account For the

growth of a nodule from a point af orystallization. Ife <tistinguishes three pos-

sible times of formation: contemporancous (syngenetie), penecontemporaneous

(shortly after deposition) and subscquent, after consolidation. That the nodules

of the lower Heatherdale member ate not subsequent is shown by their orien-

tation on eertain bedding planes, where the longest axis is always parallel to

the bedding and the nodules are spaced over a plane. Clifton postulates »

penecontemporzneous origin for the nodules of the Ohio Shale, evoking vertical

compaction and tle restriction of water circulation tn horizontal movement, due

to the Impervicns nature of the finely divided enclosing sediments. Thus laleral

wtlt would tend to exceed that in a vertical direction, especially during the

ater stages, and large nodwes would be more flattened than smaller ones. This

agrees with observations at Carrickalinga Head and elsewhere. Compaction

and orientation of intranodular material is suggested by horizontal laminae in

the centres of the Ohio Shale concretions. The South Australian nodules have

a dense fine-grained texture, bit similar latmirition is indicated hy differential

weathering on the surface, Finally, compaction restricted and stopped cireu-

lation and growth ceased. Laminae then arched over the nodules.

Such an explanation does not explain why outward growth starts from a

certain favourable locus, although a penecontemporancous origin would help ta

explain why nodules form instead of beds of carbonate. Thus seuregation, for

whatever reuson, is more likely to have ocenrred below the depositional inter-

face, Both nodules and beds of limestone are found in the Sellick Hil]-Curricka-

linga Head area, sometimes tending to alternate.

The “dark carbonaceous phyllites” of the Rapid Bay-Cape Jervis region have

been considered to be the metamorphic equivalents of what are lere described

as the Heatherdale Shales (Campana, Wilson and Whittle, 1935, p. 8). Nodules

are said to occur at the south of Campbell Creek, but their nature is not stated,

These beds ure described from Rapid Bay by Skinner (umpublished thesis), whe

does not mention any nodules. It seems most probable, then, that the beds are

equivalent ta the upper Heatherdale member (with small nodules, but not

GHOLOGY OF CAMBRIAN SOUTH OF ADELAIDE wg

nodular throughout), rather than to the shales, large nodules and limestone

bands of the lower member, The latter thins out towards the north and was

probably not developed above the marblo of Rapid Bay. The black shales with

occasional pyrite toward the top of the member at Carrickalinga Head indicate

oxygen deficiency in the environment.

A break in sedimentation could have secompanied the subsequent change

in envirommental conditions. The upper member, which contains a few silt-

stunes, is more clastic than the lower; there are nv dimestone nodules or bands;

and no disseminated carbonate Tas heen found in the shales. Thus the next

phuse was the accumulation of fine muds with a high phosphatic content, which

eoicentrated to form xpatite-hearing nodules and elongated segreygations,

Whether these formed on isochemical surfaces at or below the depositional

interlace is not known, The upper parts of this member, too, show some ind-

cation of the existence of a reducing environment.

The greywackes. appear successively higher in the sequence from Second

Valley (Campana and Wilson, 1955b, plate 6) to Myponga Beach. They were

deposited intermittently as well defincd units. With regard to the phosphatic

shale-grevwacke relationship, the alternatives are interfingering of the two units,

ie Sones ot most of the deposition of the former before the appearance of

the hitter.

The second alternative is favoured, Althongh nodules are abundant in the

upper Heatherdale member, they are not found in the shales separating the grey-

wacke units. This suggests a change in depositional environment before the

advent af the coarse material,

Tt is therefore considered probable that the clastic fractions of the Heather-

dale Shales come from the west and north-west. From the onset of greywacke

deposition the poorly sorted material was introduced possibly from the opposite

direction. The Myponga-Little Gorge anticline could have acted us a barrier

in. this material during the relatively slow accumulation of shales and limestones,

‘The: first cycle quartz and felspar found in the earlier sediments is considered to

he derived from the exposed core, but this was unimportant as 2 source area

during greywacko sedimentation as low rank metaphoric rovk fragments are

éymmon and felspar is unimportant in the greywackes.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Dr. M. F, Glaessner ( University of Adelaide) suggested and supervised the

project, and the writers are indebted to him for such helpful advice and

criticism. Stimulating discussion of the problems with Dr. B, Daily (South

Australian Museum), Miss M. J. Wade (University of Adelaide), and others on

the staff of the School af Geology of the University must also be acknowledyed,

Mr. L. Stacey provided accommodation during part of the time spent in the field.

Thanks are due to Miss B. G. Storer, wha typed the mawuscript, and to Miss

A, M,C, Swan, who assisted in much of the drafting,

REFERENCES

Campana, B., 1954. “lhe Structure of the Bastera Soulli Australian Ranges: the ME Jofoe

Olary Are”. Journ, Geol. Soe, Aust.. 2. pp. 47-61,

Campana, B., and Wiuson, R. B., 1955, “Villites and Related Clavial Topography af South

Australia.” Eclogae Geologicue Helvetiae, 46, pp. 1-30.

Campana, B,, Wison, BR. B., and Winrrie, A. W. G, 1954, Geol. Atha S, Aust, Yauka-

lilla Sheet; Geol. Survey S, Aust, }

Campana, B., Wiison, R. B.. and Wrirrrie, A. W. G., 1955. “The Geology of the Jervis

and Yankalilla Military Sheets”. Rept. Investigations No. 3; Geol. Survey S. Aust,

320) . ABELE anv B. MeGOWRAN

Cuark, E. V.; 1899. “Geological Notes on the Cliffs Separating Aldinga and Myponga Bays”.

Trans. Roy. Soc. §. Aust, 24, pp. 1-5,

Curton, H. E., 1957. “The Carbonate Concretions of the Ohiv Shale.” Obie Journ, Science,

57 (2); pp, 114-124.

Dury, B., 1956. “The Cambrian in South Austria,” XX Congreso Geologico Internacionid,

Yomo 2, Parte 2, pp. 91-147.

Eruermar, R., Jus. 1890, “Qn Some Australian Species of the Family Archaeneyathinae,”

Traus. Koy. Soc. §. Anst., 13, pp, 10-22.

Forsrs, B. G., 1957. “Stratigraphic Succession Hast of Grey Spur, South Austria” “True,

Roy, Soc. §. Aust., 80, pp, 59-86.

Gnarsswen, M. F., 1953. “Some Problems: of ‘Tertiary Geology in Southorn Anstralia.”

Clarke Memorial Lecture, Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc, New South Wales, 47, pp, 31-45,

Howenm, W.. 1897. “On the Occurrence of Lower Cambrian Fossils in the Mount Lolly

Ranwes.”” Trans. Roy. Soc. $. Aust, 21, pp. ‘74-86.

Howcnin, W., 1004, “The Geology of the Mount Lolty Ranges, Part [. The Coastal Dis-

trict.” ‘Trans. Roy. Sou. S. Aust., 28, pp. 253-2500.

HMowecam, W., 1907. “A General Description of the Grambriun Series of South Australia.”

Austral. Assoc, Ady, Sci,, EL, pp. 414-422.

Howe, W., 1921. “Description of a Disturbed! Area ol Caingzoie Rocks in South Avs-

pene with Remarks on its Geologiesl Significanve’™. V'rans, Noy, Sov. 8, Aush. 33, pp

47-50,

Krumums, W. C., and Sioss, L. G, 1951. “Stratigraphy and Sedimentation”

Manrean, C, ‘T., 1925. “The Geology of the Fleurieu Peninsula, Part Ty ‘The Goust fiom

Sellick Hill to Vietor Harbor.” “Vrans. Roy. Soc. $. Aust., 49, pp, 198-212,

Manican, C. T., 1925, “Organic Remains from Below the Archacocyathinae Limestoun at

Myponga Jetty.” ‘Trans. Roy- Soc. 'S, Aust, 50, pp. 31-34,

pp. 30s-409,

Mawson, D., 1925. “Evidence and Indications of Algal Contrilmtions in the Carmbrian sind

Procambian Limiestones of Sonth Australia.’ Truns. Ray. Soc, S. Aust., 49, pp. 186-LHU,

Oru, A. A, 1957. “Cambrien Paliwoxeorraphy of Australia,” XX Cougteso Ceologicn

Internacional, Tome 2, Purte 2, pp. 23-284.

Raceary, IL G., et at., 1956. “Anstraliza Code of Strutigraphic Nomencliture.” Must.

Journ. Sci. 18 (4), pp. 117-121.

Roncens, J, 1956. ~The Known Cambtian Deposits of the Southern and Central Appalachian

Mountains.” XX Congreso Geolomeo Internacional, Toma 2, Putte 2, pp. 353-354.

Srenir, R. W., 1980, “Geology of the Myponga Jetty District.” Geol. Survey $. Aust., Bull.

L& Part NI, pp, 193-142,

Srravyx. ALR. C., L880, “Geolowienl Notes.” S. Anst, Parliament Paper No. 20.

Smaren, H.W, and Stree. RR, Lad. “Index Fossils of North America,”

SKINNER, B. J. “Geology of the Rapid Bay Arew, South Australia”” University of Adelaide

(unpublished thesty }.

Syricg, RK, C., 1952. “Sedimentation in the Adelnide Geosyncline and the Formation of the

Continental Terrave.” Sir Donghis Mawson Aan, Volume, University: of Adeliide.

Sprice, H.C. and Campana, B, 1953. “Lhe Age and the Facies of the Ranmiantoo Grouy,

Fastern Mount Lofty Ruiyes and Kangaroo Island, S.A." Aust. Journ, Sei, L6 (1),

pm 12-14,

Tayton, T. G., 1910, “The Archaeoeyathinge from the Gambritn of Sonth Australia.” Mem-

Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust., 2, Part 2, pp. 55-155,

TWENHOFEL, W. H., 1950. “Coral and other Organie Reels in Geologic Colimin,” Bull. Am,

Assoc. Petr. Geol, 34 (2), pp. 182-202.

Weers, L. G., 1953. “Enviroment and Mode of Origin and Facies Relationships wi Car-

honate Coneretions in Shales.” journ, Sed, Petrology, 28 (3), pp. 162-173.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE 1

Seale below cach figure represents. T om,

Fig. 1—Mottled limestone member of the Fork Tree Limestone, Mt. Terrible Gally. Ap-

proximately perpendicular to the bedding, which runs. from Joft to right.

Fiy. 2—Parullel orientation of Hyolithes on a hedding plane in the Selhetk Mill Limestorie.

Myponga Beach.

Fig. 3.—Small phosphatic nodules in the upper member of the Heatherdale Shales. Wavescut

platterm 14 miles N.W. of Black Hill.

Fig 4—Sellick Hill Limestone, Selick Hill. View perpendicolar ta the bedding.

C. ABELE AND B,. McGowran PLATE 1

* 8h

CHECK LIST OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN PLANTS

BY G. M. CHIPPENDALE

Summary

The Central Australian area is delineated for the purposes of a Flora. There is brief mention of the

main vegetation types, probable refuge areas, and the collection of plants within the area. A check

list of the plants recorded for Central Australia is given.

CHECK LIST OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN PLANTS

by G. M. CHrerenpate*

[Read 13 Novernber 1958]

SUMMARY

The Central Australian area is delineated For the purposes of a Flora,

There is bricf mention of the main vegetation types, probable refuge areas, and

the collection of plants within the arca, A cheek fist of the plants recorded

for Central Australia is given,

THE FLORA

The value of a regional flora, when, published, can be ganged by its useful-

ness to agrienltural workers, pastoralists, botanists, and other workers. A flora

of an area was outlined by Bentham (1863) as “to afford the means of deter-

mining any plants in it, whether for the purpose of ulterior study or of intel-

lectual exercise”. The need for a knowledge of the plants in Central Australia,

and indeed in the whole of the Northern Territory, has grown from the impetus

und encouragement given the cattle industry in the Northern Territory, In

particular. gaining a proper knowledge of poisonous and edible species of in-

terest to pastoralists in Central Australia, as anywhere, means, firstly, to gain as

completely as possible a knowledge of the whole flora. There is a further value

in such a projected Flora of Central Australia in that it can show the true rela-

tionship with other State Floras. This can be important m providing a link

butween the astern States, South Australia and Western Austria, for the areas

of these States adjacent to the Northern Territory are stil] little visited by

hotinists.

A consideration of the flora of the Northern Territory leads to the conclu-

sion that there are at least two Horistic groups. with a fairly natural boundary

al the 12-inch rainfall isohyet. There is the nurthern “wet” country, and the

central arid country, A Consideration of the northern area show the advisability

of Further regional divisions, such as the Barkly Tableland and related zones.

For the purpose of a Flora, Central Australia is best regarded as the area

bounded east and west by the Qneensland and Western Australis borders re-

spectively, on the south by the South Australia border and on the north by the

20th parallel. Though this area can hardly be considered a distinct geographical

entity, there is some great convenience in treating it as a single unit. It can be

divided in turn into three broad yoncs, (a) the Saltbush country and Spinifex

sandridge country south of the Mucdunnell Ranges, where the urea is drained

by a system of rivers, including the Hale, Todd. Finke, Hugh, Palmer and

Goyder, which food out towards and into the Simpson Desert. Gibber plains.

claypans and minor watercourses are common, with some saline lakes. (b) The

mountain ranges in the centre dominated by the highly tilled and folded Mac-

donnell Ranges, stretching east and west from Alice Springs, and associated

with the James, Waterhouse and Krischauff Ranges, and (c) the various Acacia

scrubs, on desert sandplains, desert loams. avid desert sandhills northwards from

the latitude of the Macdonnell Ranges. The number of species over this Central

® Animal Industry Branch, Department of Territories, Alice Springs, N.T.

Trans. Roy. Svc. S. Aust. (1959), Vol. 82.

322 G, M, CHIPPENDALE

Australia ureu is not great considering it covers approximately 240,000 square

miles, Baotanivally, the east, west and south boundaries are not good, for the

plant groups at those positions extend into the adjacent States, but until botanical

Week 4 he treated on a national basis, this objection cannot he overcome satis-

acLlorily

There ts at this time no published work on the Flora of Central Australia,

for until recent years it has been little visited, and there has been no resident

botanist until 1954. Ewart and Davies, “Flora of the Northern Territory” (1917),

possibly fulfilled a need at that time, but it was not a tme Flora, being compiled

mainly of survey yeports, So many Central Australian plunts even known al

thal time were excluded, and the localities of collections vf those mentioned

were often vague. This latter point is, of course, not entirely due to the authors

of the book. Other inaccuracies as reported by Willis (1942 and 1945) can be

added to. and in Fact a general lack of a true knowledge of the area make

Bivurt and Davies “Flora of the Northern ‘Cerritory” useless today in Central

Australia,

The Macdonnell-James-Krischaull Range system has in the past heen shawn

to be an important rehive area. Here we can accept the view, as did Spencer

(1821), and Cocker and Wood (1947), that species such as Livistona mariae

F, Muell. and Mucrozamia macdonnellit ¥, Muell. axe undoubted relies, low-

ever, in anch areas as Palm Valley, Standley Chasm. Tallaputta Gorge, and other

similar places, there is still work to be done, in analysing the occurrence of

many smaller plants than these bwo prime examples. Plants are being collected

in varying seasons to get as complete as possible the record of these areas, Al-

ready many nev records huve been made here, and several probably unde-

sevibed species will need evaluation.

In the past there have been two tendencies with Central Australian plants,

Sume material occurring widely throughout Australian arid areas has been de-

scrihed by early authors as separate species, Other Central Australian material

has been placed into species occurring elsewhere, despite morphological differ-

ences. While realising the dangers of accepting too many taxa based on regional

differences, there seems to be gond reasons for treating a number of taxa as

subspecies, A. Lee's (1948) remarks concerning regional variants heing pertinent.

It is probable also, that some of the “limped” species will show as truce variants,

and same varicties will be dropped. As Burhidge (1953) pointed out, it is

characteristic of the inland Hora “that the variations that do occur tend to he

repeated through the range of distribution”.

COLLECTION OF PLANTS

Tate's flake essay on Larapintine and Eremian plants was an outstanding

summary of the knowledge of Central Australian plants to that time, A list af

lants compiled from other collectors, including Macdouall Stuart (1860-2),

tiles (1872-4), Kempe (1877-90), Tietkens (1889), and Gillen, together with

those uf Tate (1894) gave some reasonable localities and included a remark-

uble percentage of the total known species taday, Since that time, the collee-

tions of G. F. Hill (1911-12) and $. A. White (1913) have added new records,

umd then there have been many itinerant collectors whose specimens are scat~

tered throughout the herbaria of Australia.

Collections by J. B. Cleland, E. H. Ising, H. H. Finlayson, and some others,

and J. M. Black’s descriptions in the Transactions nf the Rayal Society of South

Australia fram 1909 to 1049 lave been the only reliable systematic work on

Central Australian plants, and these, together with the references in both edi-

CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN PLANTS 323

tions Of Blick’s “Flora of South Australia” have been the basis vf all work un

these plants, In this respect, however. there is still a cereal deal of work in

same groups to elucidate whether Black’s coneeption of certain species is

wecurate for these Central Australian plants.

In revent years, members of the Division uf Land Research and Regional

survey oF the C.S.1.R.0. ineluding R. Perry, A. Winkworth, M, Lazarides, and

N. Forde have contributed large collections. Members of the Animal Industry

Branch of the Territories Department have collected specimens in most areas

af Central Australia to build up an Herbarium at Alico Springs, and searches

for some rarer species have been made, but more collections are planned to

expand locality records for individual species und to obtain first-hand know-

ledve of little known species.

As a result of collections ) have made in the last few years, the plants in

the urea east of the Stuart Highway to the Queensland border, but including

only the fringe of the Simpson Desert, are fairly well represented. R. Crocker’s

collection and C. Kardley’s (1946) enumeration of the species from Madigan's

Simpson Desert Expedition have given a good, if not complete, record of an

area still not easily accessible, West of the Stuart Highway, cullections have

been made in the area for about 150-200 miles, but the area of semi-desert west

of the Devil's Marbles still uceds investigation. Collections have been made

as far as the Lake Mackay arca and also along the George Gill Bange and the

Petermann Range, though these were in an unfavourable season.

Monugraphic works generally lack adequate records for Central Australian

species because of the absence of collections, The impression from such mono-

graphs could he that some species are rarely, or not, represented in Central

Australia, though A, Lee (1948) stated that the area was“. . not so much

barren of Stwatnsona as insufficiently collected”,

CHECK LIST

The following check list has been compiled from records of historival speci-

mens, together with the records of more recent collections, as mentioned earlier,

! have been able to examine « large number of the historical specimens housed

in Sydnwv, Melbourne and Adelaide, and these have enabled me to alter the

lists of plants given for the early expeditions and to bring their nomenclature

into line with more recent works. Ilowever, there are some little collected

specimens as vet not examined, and these have boon included. Ie is felt that a

list_of species will form a basis for work on the Flora of Central Australia, and

undoubtedly there will be some chanyes in determinations and nomenclature

in the preparation of such a work, A number of undeserihed species mentioned

in the list are either awuiting description by specialists at the various State

Hyetharit, or will be described when a better indieation of their distribution is

own,

Tate ( 1896) stated tliat 602 species were recorded for the Central Australia

area following the Norn Expedition. Thiy has been reduced to 510 species due

to misrecords or redeterminations, 62 of these species have not been re-recorded

in Central Australia to my knowledge,

Including the species listed by Fardley (1946) for the Simpson Desert

Expedition, the number of species to that time was 683. Of these, 71 species

are still rather rarely eollected in Central Australia.

Since 1946, collectors have recorded a total of 919 species, including 156

species not listed in literature for Central Australia, but possibly some of these

have been recorded in the various State Herbaria,

324 G. M. CHIPPENDALE

The total number of species, including naturalised plants, is 1101.

Naturalised plants are listed separately. Mainly, these are only found near

settlements, but several have spread further, notably Xanthium spinosum, and

Citrullus colocynthis and Citrullus vulgaris, Sonchus oleraceus has been found

in so many localities where there is no settlement that it has been included in

the main check list.

CHECK LIST

PTERIDACEAE

Gymnogramme reynoldsii F, Muell.

ASPLENTACEAE

Pleurosorus rutifolius _ Br.) Fee.

Pleurosorus subglandulosus (Took. et

Grev.) M. Tindale

MARSILEACEAL

Marsilea drummondii A. Br.

Marsilea exarata A. Br.

Marsilea hirsuta R. Br.

Marsilea mutica Meitt.

POLYPODIACEAE

Adiantum hispidulum Swartz.

Cheilanthes lasiophylla Pic.-Ser.

_ Cheilanthes sieberi Kuntze

Cheilanthes tenuifolia (Burm.t.)

Swartz.

Cheilanthes vellea F. Mucll.

Cyelosorus gongylodes (Schkuhr. )

Link.

Histiopteris incisa (Thonb.) J. Smith

Lindsaca ensifolia Swartz.

Nephrolepis cordifolia Presl.

Pteris tremula B. Br.

PSILOTACEAE

Psilotum nudum (L.) Grisebach

CYCADACEAE

Macrozamia macdonnellii F. Muell.

CUPRESSACEAE

Callitris hugeltt (Carr.) France

TYPHACEAE

Typha angustifolia L.

POTAMOGETONACEAE

Potamogeton tricarinatus A. Bennett

Ruppia maritima VL,

NAIADACEAE

Naias major All.

SCHEUCHZERIACEAE

Triglochin calcitrapa Hook.

Triglochin. centrocarpa Hook.

Triglochin hexagona J]. M. Black

HYDROCHARITACEAE

Ottelia ovalifolia (R. Br.) L. C, Rich

GRAMINEAE

Amphipogon caricinus F. Muell.

Amphipogon caricinus F. Muell. var.

sericeus J. Vickery

Aristida anthoxanthoides (Domin)

Henr.

Aristida arenaria Gaud.

Aristida biglandulosa J. M. Black

Aristida browniana Hen.

Aristida capillifolia Henr.

Aristida inaequiglumis Damin

Aristida latifolia Domin

Aristida nitidula (Henr.) 5. T. Blake

Aristida obscura Henr.

Aristida. pruinosa Dommin

Aristida ramosa FR. Br.

Aristida strigosa (fenr.) S. T. Blake

Astrebla elymoides F. Muell.

Astrebla lappacea (Lindl.) Domin

Astrebla pectinata (Lindl.) F. Muell.

ex Benth.

Bothriochloa ewartiana (Domin)

C. &. Hubbard

Bothriochloa intermedia (R. Br.) A.

Camus

Brachiaria gilesii ( Benth.) Chase

Brachiaria holosericea (R. Br.)

Hughes

Brachiaria miliformis ( Presl,) Chase

Brachiaria notochthona (Domin)

Stapf

Brachiaria pilizera (F. Muell,)

Hughes

Brachiaria practervisa (Domin)

Cc. E. Hubbard

Brachyachne ciliaris (Benth,) C. E.

Iiubbard

Chloris acicularis Lindl,

Chloris pectinuta Benth.

Chloris scariosa F, Muell,

Chloris virgata Swartz.

Chrysopogon fallax S. T. Blake

CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN PLANTS 325

Chrysopogon pallidus (R. Br.) Trin.

ex Steud.

Cymbopogon bombycinus (R. Br.)

Domin

Cymbopogon exaltatus (R. Br.)

Domin

Cymbopogon obiectus §.'T. Blake

Daetyloctenium radulans (R. Br.}

Beauv.

Danthonia bipartita F. Muell.

Dichanthium annulatum (Forsk. )

Stapt

Dichanthium humilius J. M. Black

Dichanthium seviceum (R. Br.) A,

Camus

Digitaria qinmophila (F. Muell,)

Hughes

Digitaria brownii (R. & 8.) Hughes

Digitaria coenicola (F. Muell.)

Hughes

Digitaria ctenantha (F. Muell.)

Hughes

Diplachne fusca (L,) Beauv.

Diplachne muelleri Benth.

Diplachne parviflora (R. Br.) Benth,

Echinochloa turneriana Domin,

Ectrosia leporina R. Br.

Elytrophorus spicatus (Willd.) A.

Cumns

Enneapogon avenaceus (Lindl. )

C, E, Hubbard

Enneapogon clelandii N. 'T. Burbidge

Enneapogon cylindricus N. 'T, Bur-

bidge

Enneapogon lindleyanus (Domin)

C. E. Hubbar

Enneapogon oblongus N. T, Burbidge

Enneapogon pallidus (R. Br.) Beauv.

Enneapogon polyphyllus (Domin)

N. T. Burbidge

Enneapogon pubescens (Domin)

N. T, Burbidge

Eragrostis australasiea (Steud.) C. E.

Hubbard

Lragroslis barreliert Daveau

Eragrostis concinna (R. Br.) Steud.

Eragrostis. confertiflora |. M. Black

Eragrostis cumingli Steud.

Eragrostis dielsti Pilger

Eragrostis elongata (Willd_) Jacq.

Eragrostis eriopoda Benth.

Frayrostis falcata Gaud.

Exigrostis japonica (Thunb.) Trin.

Eragrostis kennedyae F. Turner

Eragrostis lacunaria F, Muel). ex

Berth.

Eragrostis laniflora Benth.

Eragrostis leptocarpa Benth.

Eragrostis parviflora (R. Br.) Trin.

Eragrostis setifolia Nees

Eragrostis speciosa (R. & §,) Steud.

Eragrostis xerophila Domin

Eriachne aristidea F. Mucli.

Eriachne aristidea F. Muell.

Eriachne benthamii W. Hartley

Pepcke helmsit (Domin) W. Hart-

Kriachne mucronata R, Br.

Eriachne nervosa Ewart ct Cookson

Kriachne obtusa R. Br.

Eriachne pulchella Domin

Kriachne scleranthoides F. Muell.

Eriochloa australiensis Stapf ex Thell.

Eriochloa longiflora §, T. Blake

Eriochloa pseudoacrotricha (Stapf ex

Thell.) C, E, Hubbard

Eulalia fuloa (R. Br.) O. Kuntze

fchnanthus australiensis (Domin)

ughes

fveilena dolotrichum G, &, Hubbard.

Tseilma eremaeum 8. T. Blake

Iseilema macratherum Domin

fseilema membranaceum (Lindl. )

Domin

Iseilema vaginiflorum Domin

lseilema windersit C. E. Hubbard

Leptachloa digitata (R. Br.) Domin

Neurachne alopecurotdes R. Br.

Neurachne mitehelliana Nees

Neurachne muellerit Hack.

Neurachne munrot F. Muell,

Panicum cymbiforme Hughes

Panteum decampositum B. Br.

Panicum effusim R, Br,

Panicum whitet J, M. Black

Paractaenium novae-hollandiac

Beauv.

Paspalidium. constrictuin (Dorin)

C. E. Hubbard

Paspalidium rarum (RR. Br.) Tfughes

Perotis vara R. Br.

Phragmites karka ( Retz.) Trin, ex

Stend.

Plagiosetion refractam (EF. Muell.)

Benth.

Plectrachne helmsii C. i. Wubbard

326 G. M, CHIPPENDALE

Plectrachne pungens (R. Br.) C. E,

Hubbard

Pleclrachne schinzii Tenr.

Setaria brownii Herrm.

Setaria dielsii Herrm.

Spathia neurosa Ewart et Archer

Sporobolus actinocladus (F. Muell.)

F. Muell.

Sporobolus australasicus Domin

Sporobolus caroli Mez.

Sporobolus elongatus R, Br.

Sporobolus mitchellii (Trin.) C. E.

Hubbard

Sporebolus sp. nov.

Themeda australis (R. Br.) Stapf

Themeda avenacea (EF. Muell.) Dur.

et Jacks,

Tragus australianus S. T. Blake

Triodia basedowii E.. Pritz.

Triocdia irritans R. Be, vav. irritans

N. T. Burbidge

Triodia longiceps J. M. Black

Triodin pungens R. Br.

Triodia spicata N, T. Burbidge

Triodia sp. nov. aff. brizoides

Triodia sp. nov. aff. pungens

Tripogon loliiformis (F. Muell, )

C. E. Hubbard

Triraphis mollis R, Br.

Uranthoecitum truncatum (Maid. et

Betche) Stapf

Zygochloa paradoxa (BR. Br.) S, T.

Blak

CYPERACEAE

Bulbostylis barbata (Rotth.) C. B.

Clarke

Cyperus aristatus Rotth.

Cyperus bulbostus Vahl.

Cyperus. conicus Boeckel

Cyperus cunninghamii (C. B. Clarke)

C. A. Gardner

Cyperus dactylotes Benth.

Cyperus difformis L.

Cyperus fasciculigerus (F. Muell.)

Domin

Cyperus gunnii Took,

Cyperus gymnocaulos Steud.

Cyperus. irta Li.

Cyperus ixiocarpus F. Muell.

Cyperts relzii Nees

Cyperus rutilans (C. B. Clarke)

Maid. ct Betche

Cyperus vaginatus R. Br.

Cyperus victoriensis C. B, Clarke

Cyperus sp. noy,

Cyperus sp. nov.

Eleocharis. geniculata (L.) R, et 8S.

Eleocharis pallens 5, T. Blake

Fimbristylis diphylla (Retz.) Vahl.

Fimbristylis ferruginea Vahl.

Fimbristylis humilis $. T. Blake

Fimbristylis oxystachya F, Muell.

Fimbristylis squarrosa Vahl.

Fimbristylis sp, noy, af. dichotoma

Fuirena glomerata Lam.

Fuirena incrassala §. T. Blake

Lipocarpha microcephala (R. Br.)

Kunth,

Scirpus litoralis Schirad.

Seirpus maritimus L.

PALMAE,

Licistona mariae F. Muell.

ERIOCAULACEAE

Eriecaulon graphitinum F, Muell. et

Tate ex Ewart et Cookson

CENTROLEPIDACEAE

Ceutrolepis polygyna (R. Br,) Hieron

COMMELINACEAE

Commelina ensifalia R. Br.

Commelina andulata BR. Br.

JUNCACEAE

Juncus sp. nov.

LILIACEAE

Anguillaria dioica R. Br.

Corynotheca lateriflora (R. Br.) ¥.

Muel.

Lomandra sp. nov. aff. dura

Lomandya leucocephala (R, Br.)

Ewart var. nov.

Thysanotus exiliflorus F. Muell,

Thysanoltus tuberosus R. Br,

Xanthorrheca thorntonii Tate

AMARYLLIDACEAE

Crinum. flaccidum Herbert

CASUARINACEAE

Casuarina decaisneane ¥. Muell,

ULMACEAE

Trema aspera Bl,

MORACEAE

Fieus plafypeda A. Cunn.

URTICACEAE

Parietaria debilis Forst. £.

CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN PLANTS a7

PROTEACEAE

Grevillea eriostachya Lindl.

Grevillea juncifotia Hook,

Grevilléa nematophylla F. Muell,

Grevillea refracta R, Br.

Grevillea stenobotrya F. Muell.

Grevillea striata R. Br.

Grevillea wickhamii Moissn.

Hakea chordophylla ¥. Mucll.

Hakea intermedia Ewart et Davies

Hakea leucoptera R. Br,

Hakea lorea (R. Br.) R. Br,

Hakea macrocarpa A. Cunn. ex R. Vr.

Hakea multilineata Meissn. yar.

grammatophylla F. Muell.

Hakea purpuree Wook. _

Hakea sp. (possible hybrid chardo-

phylla x intermedia)

Hokea sp, (possible hybrid inter-

media x lorea)

Hakea sp. nov,

LORANTHACEAE

Amyema bifureate (Benth.) Ticgh.

Amyema gibberula (Tate) Danser.

Amyema hilliana (Blakely ) Danser.

aeueet miquelit (Lehm, ex Mig.)

Tiegh.

Amtyema preissii (Miq.) Tiegh,

Amyema quandong (Lindl.) Tiegh.

Amyema sanguinea (VT. Mnuell.)

Danser.

Diplatin grancdibractea (FF. Muell.)

Tiegh.

Diplatia maidentit (Blakely) Danser.

Laysiana exocarpi (Behr. ex Schlecht. )

Tiegh.

Lasiana exocarpi (Behr. ex Schlecht.)

Tiegh. var,

Lysiana murrayi (F. Muell. et Tate)

Tiegh.

SANTALACEAE

Anthobolus leptomerioides F. Muell.

Encarya ucuminata (RB. Be.) Sprague

ct Summerhaycs

Exocarpos sparteus BR. By.

Santalum lanecolatum BR, Br,

Santalum lanoeolatum R. Br. var.

angustifolium Benth.

POLYGONACEAE

Muehlenbeckia ounninghamii

(Meissn.) F. Muell.

Polygonum atenuatum R. Br.

Polygonum lapathifolium KR. Br.

Polygonum minus Huds,

Polygonum plebeium R. Br.

Rumex erystallinus Lange

CHENOPODIACEAE

Arthrocnemum halocnemoides Nees

Arthrocnemunt leiostuchyum

(Benth.) Paulsen

Atriplex angulata Benth.

Atriplex condiplicata F, Muell,

Atriplex elachophylla F. Mucell,

Atriplex holocarpa VY. Muell,

Atriplex incrassata F. Muell.

Atriplex limbata Benth,

Atriplex lindleyi Moq.

Atriplex muelleri Benth.

Atriplex nummularia Lindl,

Atriplex semilaccata R, Br.

Atriplex spongiosa F. Muell

Atriplex turbinata (R, H. Anderson)

Aellen

Atriplex velutinella F. Muell. ‘

Alriplex uesicaria Heward ex Beoith.

Babbugia acroptera F. Mucll, ct Tate

Babbagia diplerocarpa F, Muell,

Bassia andersonii Ising

Bussie unisacanthoides (F, Muell,)

R. H. Anderson

Bassia bicernis (Lindl) F. Muell,

Bassia biflora (Ri. Br.) F. Muell.

Bassia birchii (F. Muell,) Fo Muell,

Rassia convexula R. H. Anderson

Bassia cornishiana EF. Muell,

Bassia costata R. H. Anderson

Bassia divaricata (i. Br.) F. Muell,

Bassin echinapsila F. Muell.

Bassia criacantha (F. Muell.) R. VW.

Anderson

Kassie. intricata K. H, Anderson

Bassta lanicuspis F. Muell,

Bassia langicuspis F. Muell.

Bassia Iuehmannii. F. Muell.

Bassia paradoxa (R. Br.) F. Muell.

Bassia parallelicuspis R. H- Anderson

Bussia patenticuspis R, A. Anderson

Bassia scleraluenoides F. Muell.

Bassia spinosa Ewart et Davies

Bassia uniflora (R. Br.) F. Muell.

Bassia sp. all. quinguecuspis

Chenopodium anidlophyllum Aellen

Chenopodium auricomum Lindl.

Chenopodium eristatium F. Muell.

32s G, M, CHIPPENDALE

Chenopodium. cristatum x C. melano-

carpum (possible hybrid )

Chenopodium melanocarpum (J. M-

Black) J. M. Black

Chenopodium. nitrariaceum (FP,

Muell.) F, Muell, ex Benth.

Chenopodium rhadinostachyum-

F, Muell.

Dysphania littoralis R.. Br.

Dysphania plantaginella F. Muell.

Dysphania simulans F. Muell, et Tate

Enchylaena tomentosa R. Br.

Kochia aphylla BR. Br.

Kochia appressa Benth.

Kochia astrotricha L. Johnson

Kochia brevifolia R. Br.

Kochia corenata J, M. Black

Kachia enchylaenoides |. M. Black

Kochia zeorgei Diels

Kochia lanosa Lindl,

Kochia lobiflora F. Muell,

Kochia planifolia F, Muell.

Kochia scleraptera J. M. Biack

Kochia spongiocarpa F. Muell,

Kochia tomentosa (Moq.) F. Muell.

Kochie triptera Benth.

Kochia sp. nav. aff. spongiocarpa

Pachycornia tenuis (Benth.) J. M.

Black

Pachycornia triandra (F. Muell.)

]. M. Black

Rhagodia nutans R. Br.

Rhagodia parabolica R, Br,

Rhagodia spinescens R. Br.

Salsola kali L.

Salsola kali L. var. strobilifera Benth.

heeiecnme cinerea (F, Muell.) F. M.

Bail.

Threlkeldia inchouta J. M. Black

Threlkeldia proceviflora F. Muell.

AMARANTHACEAE

Achyranthes aspera L,

Alternanthera angustifolia R. Br,

Alternanthera denticulata R. Br.

Alternanthera nana KR, Br,

Alternanthera nodiflora BR. By.

Amaranthus grandiflorus (J. M.

Black) J. M. Black

Amaranthus interrupius BR. Br.

Amaranthus mitchellié Benth.

Gomphrena brownit Moq.

Gomphrena sp. aff. brachystylis

Gomphrene sp. all. conferta

Gomphrend sp. aff. pusilla

Ptilotus alopecuroideus (Lindl.) F.

Muell. var. alopecuroideus

Ptilotus alopecuroideus (Lindl) F.

Muell. var. alopecuroideus torma

rubriflarus (J. M. Black) Benl.

Plilotus arthrolasius ¥. Muell.

Ptilotus. atriplicinifolius (A, Gunn, ox

Mog.) Ben.

Ptilotis calostaehyus (PF. Muell.) F.

Muell,

Ptilotus clementii (Farmar) Benl.

Ptilntus exaltatus Nees

Ptilutus gaudichaudii (Steud.) J. M-

Black

Ptilotus helipteroides (¥, Muell,) F.

Muell.

Ptiloiys hoodii F. Muell,

Ptilotus incanus (R, Br.) Por.

Ptilotus latifolius R. Br.

Ptilotus leucocoma (Moy.) F. Muell.

Ptilotus macrocephalius (R. Br.) Poir.

Ptilotus imurrayi F. Muell.

Ptilotus nobilis (Lindl.) F. Mucll.

Ptilolus obovatus (Gaud.) F, Muell.

Prilotus parcifolius F. Muell.

Plilotus schwartaii (F. Muell.) Tate

Piilotus spicatus F. Muell. ex Benth.

NYCTAGINACEAE

Boerhavia diffusa L,

Boerhavia repanda Willd.

PHYTOLACACEAE

Codonocarpus cotinifolius ( Desf.) F.

Mucell,

Gyrostemoan australasicus (Moq.)

Heim.

Gyrostemon raimulosus Desé.

Gyrostemon sp. (mss. nomen C, A,

Gardner )

ATZOACEAE

Aizoon zygophylloides F. Muell.

Glinns lotoides Loefl

Glinus oppositifolia (L.) A.DC.

Glinus orygioides F. Muell,

Mollugo cerviana (1L.) Ser.

Mollugo molluginis (F. Muell.)

Druce

Trianthema australis Melville

Trianthema crystallina Vahl,

Trianthema. crystallina Vahl. var,

clavata J. M. Black,

CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN PLANTS 329

Triunthema valericulata Melville

frianthema pilosa F. Mouell.

PORTULACACEAE

Calandrinia balonensis Lindl.

Celandrinia eremaea Ewart

Calandrinia polyandra Benth.

Calandrinia ptychosperma F, Muell,

Calandrinie pumila F, Muell.

Calandrinia remota J. M. Black

Calandrinia spergiularina F. Muell.

Calandrinia stagnensis J. M. Black

Portulaca filifolia F. Muell.

Portulaca intraterranca J, M. Black

Portulaca oleracea L.

CARYOPHYLLACEAE

Polycarpaea breviflora F. Muell.

Polycarpaea corymbosa (L.) Lam,

Polycarpaca involucrata F. Muell.

Polycarpaca synandra F. Muell.

Polycarpaea triloba Ewart et Cookson

Spergularia rubra (1.-) J. et C. Presl.

MENISPERMACEAE

Tinospora snvilacina Bentb.

LAURACEAE

Cussytha glabella R. Br.

CRUCIFERAL

Blennodia blennodiaides (F. Muell.)

I’. Muell.

Blennodia canescens R. Br.

Blennodia pterosperma J. M, Black

Lepidiunt muelleri-ferdinandi Thell.

Lepidium oxytrichum Sprague

Lepidium papillosum F. Muell.

Lepidium rotundum DC. (includin

var. phlebopetalum (F, Muell.

Maid. et Betche)

Menkea sphaerocarpa F. Muell.

Menkea villosula (F. Muell, et Tate)

J. M. Black

Phicgmatospermum cochlearinum (PF.

Muell.) O. FE. Schulz.

Stenopetalum lineare R. Br. ex DC.

Stenopetalum nutans F. Muell.

Stenopetalum velutinum F. Muell.

CAPPARIDACEAE

Capparis lasiantha BR. Br,

Capparis. mitchellii Lind],

Capparis spinosa L.

Capparis umbonate Vind).

Cleame viscosa L.

DROSERACEAER

Drosera burmannii Vahl.

Drosera inulica L.

_ CRASSULACEAE,

Crassula sieberiana (Schultes) Druce

PITTOSPORACEAE

Pittosporum phylliraeoides DC.

ROSACEAE

Stylobasium spathulatum Dest.

LEGUMINOSAE

Aeschynomene indica L.

Brachysema chambersii (F. Muell.)

I. Muell. ex Benth.

Burtonia polyzyga (F. Muell,} Benth.

Clianthus formosus (G. Den) Ford

et Vickery

Crotalaria crispata F. Muell. ex

Benth,

Crofalaria cunninghamiti R. Br.

Crotalaria dissitiflora Benth.

Crotalaria dissitiflora Benth, var-

rugosa Benth.

Crotalaria incona L.

Crotalaria linifolia L. £.

Crotalaria mitchellit Benth. vay,

tomentosa Ewart

Crofalaria novae-hollandiae DC.

Crotalaria strehlowti E. Pritz.

Crotalaria trifoliastrum Willd.

Daviesia arthropoda F. Muell.

Desmodium muelleri Benth.

Desmodium neurocarpum Benth.

Erythrina vespertilio Benth,

Gastrolobium. grandiflorum F. Muell.

Glycine clandestina. Wendl.

Glycine falcata Benth,

Glycine sericea (F, Muell,) Benth,

Indigofera basedowii F. Pritz.

Indigofera brevidens Benth,

Indigofera brevidens Benth, var.

uncinata Benth.

Indigofera enneaphylla L.

Indigofera georzei V1. Pritz.

Indizofera hirsuta L.

Indigofera linifolia Retz.

indigofera monophylla DC.

Indigofera parviflora Hevne ex Wight

et Arm.

Indigofera viscosa Lam.

Indigofera sp. nov. aff, hirsuta

430 G. M. CHIPPENDALE

Tsotropis atropurpurea F. Muell.

Tsotropis wheelert F. Muell,

Tsotrapis winneckeana F. Muell.

Jacksonia anomala Ewart et Morrison

Jacksonia odontoclada ¥. Muell.

Kennedya prorepens F, Muell,

Lotus australis Andr. var. exstipula-

tus J. M, Black

Lotus coccineus Schlecht.

Mirbelia viminalis (A. Cunn.) C. A,

Gardner

Paratephrasia lanata (Benth,) Domin

Psoralea balsamica F. Muell,

Psoralea cinerea Lindl.

Psoralea eriantha Benth. or sp. nov,

(mss, N, T. Burbidge)

Psoralea leucantha F, Muell,

Psoralea patens Lindl.

Psoralea pustulata F. Mucll. or un-

described C, Aust. form

Psoralen walkingtonii ¥. Muell,

Piychnsema unomalum F. Mucll.

Piychosema stipulare J. M. Black

Ptychosema trifoliolatum IF. Muell.

Rhynehosia australis Benth.

Rhynohoasia minima (L.) DC.

Sesbania benthamiana Domin

Swainsona beasleyanu F. Muell.

subsp, beasleyanu (F. Muell,) A.

Swainsona burkei F. Muell, ex Benth.

subsp, acuticarinata A. Lee

Swainsona campylantha F, Muell.

Swainsona canescens (Benth. ex

Lindl.) F. Muell. var. canescens

(Benth. apud Lindl.) A, Lee

Swainsona cuneseens (Renth, ex

Lindl.) F. Muell, var, horniana

J. M. Black

Swainsona cyclocarpa F. Muell. var.

cyclocarpa {(F.Muell.) A. Lee

Swainsonu flavicarinata J. M. Black

Swainsona microcalyx J. M. Black

subsp. microcalyx A. Lee

Swainsona microphylla A, Gray

subsp, affinis A, Lec

Swainsona microphylla A, Gray

subsp. glabrescens A. Lee

Swainsona microphylla A, Gray

subsp. pallescens A. Lee

Swainsona oligophylla F, Muell.

Smeainsona oroboides F, Muell. subsp,

oroboides (F. Muell. et Benth.) A.

Lec

Swainsona phacoides Benth, subsp,

phacoides (Benth.) A. Lee

Swainsona rigida J. M. Black

Swainsona slipularis F. Muell, var,

venteulata J. M, Black

Swainson unifoliata VY. Mucll.

Suninsona. villosa J. M. Black

TVempletonia ezena (F, Muell,)

Benth,

Templetonia hookeri (F. Muell,)

Benth.

Tephrosia brachyecarpa F, Muell, ex

Benth,

Tephrosia eriocarpa Benth,

Tephrosia filipes Benth.

Tephrosia phacasperma F, Muell, ex

Benth.

Tephrosia purpurea Pers. sens. lat.

Tephrosia purpurea Pers, var longi-

folia Benth.

Tephrosia sphaerospora F, Mueil.

Tephrosia uniovulata F. Muell.

Trigonella suavissima Lindl.

Vigna lanceolata Benth.

Zora diphylla Pers.

MIMOSACEAE

Acacia adsurgens Maid. et Blakely

Acacia ancistrocarpa Maid. et

Blakely

Acacia aneura F. Muell.

Acacia aneura F, Muell. var. latifolia

J. M. Black

Acacia basedowit Maiden

Acacia basedoteii Maiden var. virtdis

Blakely

Acacia hrachystachya Benth.

Acacia bynoeana Benth.

Acacia calcicola Forde et Ising

Acacia cambagei R. T. Baker

Acacia colletioides A. Cinn,

Acacia coriacea DC,

Acacta cowleana Tate

Acacia cuthbertsonii Luehrm.

Acacia cyperophylla F. Muell.

Acacia dtetyoptleba F. Muell,

Acacia estrophiolata F. Muell,

Acacia farnesiana Willd.

Acacia galioides Benth.

Aeacia georginae F. M. Bail.

CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN PLANTS 331

Acacia hemizgnasta F. Muell.

Acacia hilliana Maiden

Acavia jennerae Maiden

Acacia kempeana F. Mucll,

Acacia lieulata A, Cunn. ex Benth.

Acacia linophylla W. V. Fitzg.

Acacia luerssenii: Domin

Acacia lycepadifolia A. Cymn. ex

Hook.

Acacia lysiphloia F. Muell. ex Benth.

Acacia mangium Willd. yar. holo-

sericeum (A. Gunn.) C, T. White

Acacia microbotrya Benth.

Acacia minutifolia F. Muell.

Acacia monticola J. M. Black

Acacia murrayand F, Muell, ex Benth.

Acacia patens TF. Mucll,

Acncia peuce F. Muell.

Acacia pyrifolia DC.

Awicia ramulosa W. V. Fitz.

Acacia retivenia F. Muell.

Acacia salicina Lindl.

Acacia sessiliceps F. Muell,

Acacia spondylophylla F. Mucll.

Acacia stenophylla A, Cunn. ex.

Benth.

Acacia stinuligera F. Mucll,

Acacia strongylophylla F. Muell

Acacia tetragonophylla F, Mucil.

Acacia translucens A, Cunn.

Acacia umbellata A, Cunn. ex Henth.

Acacia validinervia Maid. et Blakely

Acacia victortae Beuth.

Acacia xylocarpa A. Cunn. ex Benth,

Acacia sp. nov. aff. notabilis

Acacia sp. nov. aff. ostealdii

Acacia sp. noy. aff. signata

Acacia sp. nov. aff. sibirica

Acacia sp. nov. aff. doratoxylon

Acacia sp. nov. ait. kempeana

Neptunia dimorphantha Domin

Neptunia dimorphantha Domin var.

clementii Domin

Neptunia gracilis Benth.

Nepiunia monospernuc ¥. Muell.

CAESALPINIACEAE

Cassia artemisioides Gaud,

Cassia artemisioides x C. desolata var.

involucrata (presumed hybrid)

Cassia chatelainiena Gaud.

Cassia concinna Benth.

Cassia curvistyla J. M. Black

Cassiv desolata ¥, Muell,

Cassia desolata F. Muell. var. involu-

crata J. M. Black

Cassia cremophila A. Cunn,

Cassia eremophila A. Cunn, var.

platypoda (R. Br.) Benth.

Cassia eremophila A. Cun. var. zyya-

phylla (Benth.) Benth.

Cassia glutinosa DC. -

Cussia notabilis F. Mnell.

Cassia oligophylla F. Mucli.

Cassia phyllodinea R. Br,

Cassia plewrocarpa F. Muell,

Cassia pruinosa F. Muell,

Cassia sophora L.

Cassia sturtil R. Br,

Cussia venusta F. Muell.

Lysiphyllum cunninghamii {BKenth,)

de Wit

Petalosiylis labichevides BR. Rr. yar.

cassioides Benth.

Petalostylis spinescens EB. Pritz.

CERANIACEAE

Erodium aurcum Carolin

Erodium crinitum Carolin

Erodium cygnorum Nees subsp.

eygnorum

Erodium cygnorum Nees subsp,

glandulosum Carolin

OXALIDACEAE

Oxalis corniculata L,

ZYGOPHYLLACEAR

Tribulus angustifolius (R; Br.) Benth.

Tribulus astrocarpus F. Muell.

Tribulus hystrix R. Br.

Tribulus macrocarpus F, Muell.

Tribulus occidentalis BR. Br.

Tribulus terrestris L.

Zygophyllum ammophilum F. Muell.

Zygophyllum apiculatim F. Muell.

Zygophyllum aurantiacum (Lindi. )

F, Muell,

Zygophyllum compressum J. M. Black

Zygophyllum glaucescens ¥. Muell.

Zygophyllum howittii F, Muell,

Zygophyllum prismatothecum F.

Muell.

Zygophyllum tesquorum J. M. Black

RUTACEAE

Eriostemon argyreus F. Muell. ct

Tate

332 G. M. CHIPPENDALE

MELIACEAE

Owenia acidula F. Muell.

Owenta reticulata F. Muell.

POLYGALACEAE

Comesperma sylvestre Lindl.

Comesperma viscidulum F, Muell,

Polygala chinensis L. var. squarrosus

(Benth.) Domin

EUPHORBIACEAE

Adriana hookeri (F. Muell.) Mnell.-

Arg,

Euphorbia australis Boiss.

Euphorbia coghlanii F. M, Bail,

Euphorbia drummondii Boiss.

Euphorbia eremophila A. Cunn.

Euphorbia finlaysonii J. M, Black

Euphorbia stevenit F, M. Bail.

Euphorbia wheeleri Baill,

Petalostigma quadriloculare F. Mucll.

var, nivrum Ewart et Davies

Phyllanthus fuernrohrii F. Mucll.

Phyllanthus lacunarius F. Muell,

Phyllanthus rhytidospermus F. Muell.

Phyllanihus thesioides Benth,

Phyllanthus trachyspermus F, Muell.

Sebastiania chamelaea (L.) Muell.-

Arg,

STACKIIOUSIACEAL

Muceregoria racemigera F, Muell,

Stuckhousia intermedia F. M. Bail.

Stackhousia megaloptera F. Muell.

Stackhousia vimined Sin,

SAPINDACTHAR.

Atelaya hemiglauca (F. Muell.)

F, Muell. ex Benth,

Diplopeltis stuartit F. Muell.

Dodontea attenuata A. Cun.

Dodonaca lanceolata F. Muell.

Deadonaea microsyga F, Muell,

Dodonaca peduncularis Lindl. (incl.

var. coriacea Ewart et Davies)

Dodonaea viscosa (L.) Jacq. var.

spathulatum {Sm,) Benth.

Heterodendrum floribundum. ¥, Pritz.

Heterodendrum oleifolium Desf.

RHAMNACEAE

Spyridium spathulatum (F, Muell.)

F. Muell, ex Benth.

Ventilage viminalis Hook,

TILIACEAE

Corchorus elderi F. Muell,

Corchorus sidioidcs F. Muell.

Triumfetta micracantha F. Muell.

Triumfetta winneckeana F. Muell.

MALVACEAE

Abutilon eryptopetalum F. Muell.

Abutilon fraseri_ ( Hook.) Hook. ex

Walt,

Abutilon leucopetalum F. Muell.

Abutilon malvifolium (Benth.) J. M.

Black

Abutilon olccarpum F, Muell.

Cienfugosia gossypivides (R. Br.)

Hochr.

Hibiscus brachychlaenus F, Muell,

Hibiscus crassicalyx J, M. Black

Hibiscus farraget F. Muell.

Hibiscus: intraterraneus J, M. Black

Hibiscus krischauffianus F. Muell.

Hibiscus pinonianus Gaud.

Hibisens radiatus Cav.

Hibiscus sturtii Hook.

Hibiscus sturtii Hook, var. grandiflora

Benth.

Hibisens sturtii Hook, var. muelleri

Benth.

Hibiscus sturtit Tlaak. var.

platychlanys Benth.

Hibisens sturtit Took. var. sturtii

Benth,

Uibiscus trionun L,

Lavalere plebeia Sims

Malcastrum spicatum (I..) A. Cray

Nofoxylinon australe (Benth. )

Lewton

Nofoxylinon pedatum (F. M. Buil.)

Lewton

Placianthus elomeratus (TWook.)

Benth.

Sida cardiophylla F. Muell.

Sida corrugata Lindl.

Sida corrtgata Lindl. var. angustifolia

Benth,

Sida corrugala Lindl, var. goniocarpa

F, Muell.

Sida. cryphiopetala F. Muell.

Sida cunninghamii C. T. White

Sida fibulifera Vind).

Sida. filiformis A. Cunn.

Sida intricata F. Muell.

Sida lepida F. Muell.

CENTRAL AUS'TRALIAN PLANTS G33

Sida macropoda F. Muell, ex Benth.

Sida platycalyx F. Muell. ex Benth.

Sida rhombifolia 1. var. incana Benth.

Sida rohlenae Domin

Sida trichopoda F, Muell.

Sida virgata Hook.

Sida virgata Hook. var. phaeotricha

(F. Muell.) Benth, —

STERCULIACEAE

Brachychiton gregorii F, Muell.

Commersonia crispa Turcz.

Caommersonia mélanopctala F, Mucll,

Crlesia biniflora F. Muell.

Hannajordia bissillii F. Muell,

Keraudrenia integrifolia Steud.

Keraudrenia nephrosperma (F.

Muell.) Benth.

Melhania incana Heyne

Rulingia kempeana (F. Mucell.) F.

Muell. ex J.. M. Black

Rulingia loxophylla F. Muell.

Rulingia magniflora F. Muell,

Waltheria indica L,

DILLENIACEAE

Hibbertia glaberrima F. Muell.

GUTTIFERAE

Hypericum erqininetym Forst. F,

HLA TINACEAE

Bergia perennis (F, Muell.) F. Muell.

ex Benth.

Bergia trimera Fisch, ct Mey

Elatine grativoloides A. Cuan.

FRANKENIACEAR

Frenkenia connata Sprague

Frankenia cordata J. M. Black

Frankenia eracilis Summerh,

Frankenia muscosa J. M. Black

Frankenia planifolia Sprague et

Summerh,

Prankenia serpyllifolia Lindl.

Prankenia speciosa Summnierh.

Heankenia stuartit Summerh,

VIOLACEAE

Hybanthus enneaspermus (L,) F.

Muell.

THYMBELAEACEAL

Pimelea ammocharis F. Muell.

Pimelea microcephala R. Br.

Pinelea trichostachyn Lindl.

LYTHRACEAE

Ammannid auriculata Willd.

Ammannia multiflora Roxb-

Rotala diandra F. Muell.

Rotala tverticillaris L.

MYRTACEAE

Baeckea polystemona ¥. Muell,

Callistemon viminalis (Sol. ex

Gaertn.) G. Don. ex Loud, or yel,

Calytrix longiflora F. Muell.

Calytrix microphylla A, Cunn.

Eucalyptus aspera F. Muell.

Eucalyptus brevifolia F. Mucll.

Eucalyptus camaldulensis Dehnh.

Enculyptus dichromophloia F. Muell.

Eucalypins dumasa A, Cunn. ex

Schau.

Eucalyptus gamophylia F, Muell.

Eucalyptus gangylocarpa Blakely

Encalyptus interiexta BR, T. Baker

Eucalyptus microfheca F, Mueil.

Eucalyptus morrisii R. T, Baker

Encalyptus normantonensis Maiden

et Cambage

Eucalyptus odontecarpa F. Muell.

Bucalyplus oleosa T, Muell, ex Miq.

var, glauca Maiden

Enealyptus oxymitra Blakely

Euealyptus pachyphylla F. Muell.

Mucalyptus papuana TY, Muell,

Eucalyptus pruinosa Schau.

iucalyptus sessilis (Maiden) Blakely

Exealyptus setasa Schau.

Mucalyptus terminalis V. Muell.

Lucalyptus thosetiana F. Muell.

Mnealyplus sp. nov. aff, ewartianu

Eucalyptus sp. nov.

Meluleuea acacivides TY. Muell.

Melaleuca bracteata F. Muell.

Melaleuca dissitiflora F. Mucell.

Melaleuca glomerata F, Muell,

Melaleuca lasiandra F. Muell.

Melaleuca linariifotia Su,

Micromyrtus flaviflora (F. Muell.)

F. Muell. ex J. M. Black

Thryptomene maisonneuvii VY’, Muell,

HALORAGIDACEAE

Haloragis gossei F_ Muell.

Haloragis heterophylla Brongn.

Haloragis odontocarpa F. Muell.

334 G. M, CIMIPPENDALE

Loudonia roei (Endl.) Schlechtd.

Myriophyllum verrucosum Lindl.

UMBELLIFERAE

Actinotus schwarzit Y’. Muell.

Daucus glochidiatus (Lab.) Fisch.

Mey, et Ave-Lavy-

Hydrocotyle trachyearpa F, Muell.

Trachymene gillenae (Vate) B. L.

Burtt

Trachymene glaucifolia (F. Moucll,)

Benth,

Trachymene hemicarpa (EF. Mucll,)

Benth,

EPACRIDACHAE

Stjphelia mitchellii F. Muell.

PRIMULACHAEK

Samolus repens Pers. var. nov,

PLUMBAGINACEAE

Phranbago zeylanica 1..

OLEACEAE

Jasminum caleareum VF. Muell.

Jasminum lineare BR. Br,

GENTIANACEAE

Centourium spicatum (L.) Druce

Nymphodes geminata (Griscb,) O,

Kuntze

APOCYNACEAE

Carissa lanceolata R. Br.

ASCLEPIADACEAE

Cynanchium floribundum RB. Br,

Muarscdenia australis (R. Br,) Druce

Pentatropis kempeana F. Muell.

Penfatropis linearis Dene.

Sarcostemma australe R. Br.

CONVOLVULACEAE

Bonumia brecifelia Benth.

Bonamia rosea (F. Muell.) Hall, £.

Contoltulus erubescens Sims

Cuscuta. atestralis R. Br.

Evolculus alsinoides 1. var. villosi-

calyx v. Oeststr,

Ipomoea aquatica Forsk.

Ipomoea costata F, Muell.

Ipomoea davenportii F. Muell.

Ipomoea fonchophylla J. M. Black

Ipomoea muelleri Benth.

Ipomoea racemigera I’. Muell. et Tate

BORAGINACEAE

Cynoglossum australe R. Br. var,

drummondii Brand.

Halgania cyanea Lindl.

Halgania cyanea Lindl. var. preissiana

(Lehm,} Maiden et Betche

Halgania crecta Ewart et Rees

Halgania glabra J, M. Black

Halgania solanacea F. Muell.

Heliotropium asperrimum BR. Br,

Heliotropium bacciferum Forsk.

Heliolropinm crispatum F, Muell. ex

Benth.

Heliotropium curassavicum L.

Heliotropium diversifolium ¥. Muell,

Heliotropium fasciculatum RB. Br.

Heliotropium filaginoides Benth.

Heliotropium heteranthum F. Muell.

Heliotropium ovalifoliam Forsk.

Heliotrapium ovalifolium Forsk. var.

epacile R. Br,

Heliotropium pdniculatum R. Br.

Heliotrapium pleiopierum F. Muell.

Heliotropium strigosum Willd. ex DC,

Heliotropium tenuifolium R. Br.

Heliotropium tenuifolium BR. Br. vay.

parviflorum J. M. Black

Heliotropium sp. uoy, aff. fascieu-

latum

Omphalolappula concava (F, Muell.)

Brand.

Trichodusnia seylanicum (Burm, f.)

R, Br. (incl. var. sericeum Benth. )

EFHRETIACEAE

Ehretia saligna R. Br.

VERBENACEAE

Cleredendrum floribundum R. Br.

Dicrastylis beveridgei F, Muell.

Dicrastylis costelloi F. M. Bail.

Dicrastylis doraniit F. Muell. var.

eriantha F. Muell.

Dicrastylis exsuccosa (F. Muell.)

Druce

Dicrastylis gilesii F. Muell.

Dicrastylis lewellinit (F. Muell.) F.

MueJl.

Newcastlia bracteosa F. Muell.

Newcastlia cephalantha ¥, Muell,

Newcastlia spodiotricha F. Muell.

Spartofhamnella puberulus (F.

Muell.) Maiden et Betche

CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN PLANTS 335

Spartothamnella teucriiflora (F.

Muell.) Moldenke

Verbena macrostechya F. Muell.

Verbena officinalis L.

LABIATAE

Mentha australis R. Br.

Microcorys macredieana F. Muell.

Plectranthus sp. noy, aff. parviflorus

Prostanthera baxteri A, Cunn. var.

crassifolia Benth,

Prostanthera baxteri A. Cunn. var.

sericea. J. M, Black

Prostanthera schultzii F. Muell. ex

Tate

Prostanthera striatiflora F. Mucll.

Prostanthera wilkieana F.. Mucll.

Teterium grandiusculum F. Muell. et

Tate

Teucrium integrifolium F. Muell. cx

Benth.

Teucrium racemosum KR. Br.

SOLANACEAF

Datura. leichhardtii F. Muell.

Duboisia hopwoodii F. Mucll.

Nicotiana benthamiana Domin

Nicofiana excelsior J. M. Black

Nicotiana gossei Domin

Nicotiana ingulba J. M. Black

Nicotiana occidentalis H. M, Wheeler

Nicotiana rotundifolia Lindl.

Nicotiana velutina H, M, Wheeler

Solanum chenopodinum F. Muell.

Salanum coactiliferum J. M. Black

Solanum diversiflorum F. Muell-

Solanum ellipticum R, Br.

Solanum eremophilum F. Muell.

Solanum. esuriale Lindl,

Solanum ferocissimum. Lindl, or vel.

aff.

Solanum nemophilum F. Muell.

Solanum nigrum L.

Solanum, orbiculatum Dun.

Solanum petrophilum F, Muell.

Solanum phlomoides A. Cun. ex

Benth. :

Solanum quadriloculatum F, Muell.

Solanum sturtianum F. Muell.

SCROPHULARIACEAE

Adenosma coerulea R. Br,

Buchnera linearis R. Br.

Elacholema hornit F, Muell. et Tate

iysanthes lobelioides (F. Muell.)

Benth.

Limosella australis R. Br.

Mimulus gracilis R. Br. ~

Morgania floribunda Benth.

Morgania glabra R. Br.

Morgania gracilis R. Br.

Murgania pubescens R, Br,

Stemuadia lythrifolia F. Muell.

Stemodlia viscosa Roxb.

Stemodia viscosa Roxb. var. nov.

BIGNONIACEAE~ -

Pandorea doratoxyton J. M, Black

PEDALIACEAE

Josephinia cugeniae F. Muell.

ACANTHACEAE

lusticia kempeana F, Muell.

fusticia procumbens F. Muell,

Ruellia corynotheca F. Muell. ex -

Benth.

Ruellia primulacea {. Muell, ex. ,

Benth,

MYOPORACIAE

Eremophila battii F. Muell.

Eremophila battit F, Muell. var.

major). M. Black

Eremophila calycina §. Moore

Fremophila castelli arminit E. Pritz. .

Kremophila christopheri F. Muell.

Kremophila cordatiszpalea L. Smith

Eremophila duttonii F. Muell.

Evremophila elderi F. Muell.

Eremophila exotrachys Kraenzl.

Evemophila freelingii F. Muell. |.

Eremophila gibsonii !". Muell.

Eremophila gilesii ¥, Muell.

Eremophila gilesié F. Muell, var.

argentea Ewart ,

Bremophila gilesii F, Muell, var.

jiliforme Ewart .

Eremophila glabra (R. Br.) Ostenf.

Eremaphila goodwinit F. Mucll.

Kremophila latrobei F. Muell.

Premophila leonhardiana E. Pritz.

Eremophila longifolia (R. Br.) F.

Muell.

Eremophila macdonnellii F. Muell,

var. glabriuscula J, M. Black

Eremophila macdonnellit F, Muell.

var, mocrocarpa Hwart et Davies

336 G. M. CHIPPENDALE

Eremophila maculata (Ker,) F,

Muell.

Eremophila ebovata L, Smith

Eremophila paisleyi F. Muell.

Eremophila rotundifolia F. Muell.

Eremophila serrulata (A. Cunn.)

Druce

Eremophila strehlowti E. Pritz.

Eremophila strongylophylla F. Muell.

Eremophila sturtii BR. Br.

Eremophila willsii F. Muell.

Eremophila willsii F. Muell. var.

integrifolia Ewart

Myoporum montanum BR. Br.

PLANTAGINACEAE

Planiago varia R. Br.

RUBIACEAE

Borreria australiana R. L. Specht

Borreria brachystema (R. Br. ex

Benth.) Valet

Canthium atfenuatum R. Br. ex

Benth.

Canthium latifolium F. Muell. ex

Benth.

Canthium lineare E. Pritz.

Canthium sp. nov. aff. luctdum

Deniella asperata Airv-Shaw

Dentella_ pulvinata Airy-Shaw var.

repanda Airy-Shaw

Oldenlandia galioides F. Muell.

Videnuniats pterospora (F, Muell.)

F, Muell.

Oldenlandia tillaeaceae (F, Muell.)

F. Muell.

Pemax umbellata Sol.

Spermacoce scabra Ewart

CUCURBITACEAE

Cucumis chate Hesselq,

Melothria maderaspatana (L.) Cogn.

Melothtia micrantha F. Muell.

Cogn

CAMPANULACEAE

Tsotoma petraea F. Muell.

Lobelia heterophylla Labill.

Wahlenbergia sieberi A.DC.

Wahlenbergia sp. nov-

Wahlenbergia sp. nov.

GOODENIACEAE

Calogyne berardiana (Gaud.) F.

Muell.

Catospermum. goudeniaceum (F.

Muell.) Krause

Dampiera candicans F. Mucll.

Dampiera cinerea Ewart et Davies

Goodenia armitiana F, Muell.

Goodenia armitiana F, Muell. var.

multicaulis Blakely

Goodenia azurea F, Muell.

Goodenia basedowii Krause

Goodenia cycloptera R. Br.

Goodenia erecta Ewart

Goodenia glabra R., Br,

Goodenia glauca F. Muell,

Goodenia grandiflora Sims

Goodenia heterochila F. Muell.

Goodenia hirsuta F. Muell.

Goodenia horniana Tate

Goodenia larapinta Tate

Goodenia linifolia W. V. Fitzg. ex

Krause

Goodenia lunata J. M. Black

Goodenia microptera F. Muell.

Goodenia mitchelliana Benth.

Goodenia mueckeana F. Muell.

Goodenia ramelit F, Muell.

Goodenia strangfordii F. Muell.

Goodenia subintegra F. Muell, ex

J. M. Black

Goodenia vilmorinae F. Muell,

Leschenaultia divaricata F. Muell.

Leschenaultia striata F. Muell.

Scacvola aemula F. Muell.

Scaevola collaris F. Muell.

Scaevola daleana Blakely

Seaevola depauperata R. Br.

Scacvola ovalifolia R. Br.

Scaevola ovalifolia R, Br. var. glabra

* r.

Scaevola parvifolia F, Muell, ex

Benth.

Scaevola spinescens R. Br.

Scaevola sp. aff. aemula

Velleia connata F. Muell.

Velleia paradoxa R. Br.

BRUNONIACEAE

Brunonia australis Sm.

STYLIDIACEAE

Stylidium floodtt F. Mueil.

Stylidium floribundum B,. Br.

Stylidium inaequipetalum. J. M, Black

COMPOSITAE

Angianthus pusillus Benth.

Bidens bipinnatus L.

CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN PLANTS 337

Brachycome blackii G, L. Davis

Brachycome ciliaris (Lab.) Less, var.

ciliaris G. L. Davis

Brachycome ciliaris (Lab.) Less. var.

lanuginosa (Steetz) Benth,

8rachycome iberidifolia Benth.

Brachycome lineariloba (DC.) Druce

Calocephalus knappit Ewart et White

Culocephalus platycephalus (F.

Muell.) Benth.

Calotis cuneifolia R. Br.

Calotis cymbacantha F, Muell.

Colotis erinacea Steetz

Colotis hispidula F. Muell.

Calotis kempei F. Muell.

Calotis latiuscula F. Muell. et Tate

Calotis multicaulis (Turez,.) J. M.

lack

Calotis porphyroglossa F. Muell. ex

Benth-

Centipeda minima (L.) A. Br. et

Aschers

Centipeda thespidioides F. Muell.

Coleocoma centaurea F. Muell.

Epaltes australis Less.

Flaveria australasica Hook,

Glossogyne tenuifulia (Lab.) Cass.

Gnaphalium japonicum Thunb.

Gnaphalodes uliginosum A. Gray

Gnephosis eriocarpa (F. Muell.)

Benth,

Gnephosis gnephosioides (F. Mucell.)

Druce

Helichrysum ambiguum Turez,

Helichrysum ambiguam Turcz. var,

paucisetum J. M. Black

Helichrysum apiculatum (Lab.) DC.

Helichrysum ayersii F. Mucll.

Helichrysum bracteatum (Vent.)

Aner,

Helichrysum cassinianum Gaud.

Helichrysum kempet ¥, Muell.

Helichrysum ramossisimum Took.

Helichrysum roseum (Lindl,) Druce

var, davenportii Benth,

Helichrysunt semifertile F. Muell,

Helichrysum thomsonii ¥. Muell.

Helichrysum sp. nov. aff. ambiguum

Lelipterum charsleyae F. Muell.

Helipterum corymbiflorum Schlechtd.

Helipterum fitzgibbonti F, Muell.

Helipterum floribundum DC.

Helipterum moschatum (A, Cunn, ex

DC,) Benth.

Helipterum pterochaetum (¥, MuclL)

Benth.

Helipterum stipitatum (F, Muell.)

F. Muell,

Helipterum strictum (Lindl.) Benth.

Helipterum tietkensii F. Muell.

Helipterum sp. nov. aff. albicans

Ixiolaena leptolepis (DC.) Benth.

Millotia kempet F. Muell,

Minuria cunninghamii Benth.

Minuria denticulata (DC.) Benth.

Minuria integerrima (DC,) Benth,

Minuri« leptophylla DC.

Myriocephalus rudallit (F. Muell.)

Benth,

Myriocephalus stuartii (F, Muell. et

Sond.) Benth,

Olearia ferresti (F. Muell.) F. Muell.

ex Benth.

Olearia stuartii (F. Muell,) F. Muell,

ex Benth,

Olearia subspicata (Hook,) Benth.

Pluchea dentex R. Br. ex Benth.

Pluchea rubelliflora (F. Muell.)

Druce

Pluchea rubelliflora (F. Muell,)

Druce yar. major Benth. ex J. M.

Black

Pluchea squarrosa. Benth.

Pluchea tetranthera ¥. Muell. var,

tomentosa Benth.

Podecoma cuneifolia R. Br.

Podocomu sp. nov. aff, nana

Podolepis canescens A, Cann, ex DC.

Podolepis capillaris (Stectz) Diels

Podolepis georzei Dicls

Pterigeron adscendens Benth.

Pterigeron cylindriceps J. M. Black

Pterigeron cdecurrens (DC.) Benth.

Pterigeron dentatifolius Y. Muell,

Pterigeron liatroides (Turcez.) Benth.

Pterigeron odorus (IF. Muell.) Benth,

Pterocaulon glandulosum (¥. Muell)

Benth. et Hook, .

Pterecaulon glandulosum (F. Muell.)

Benth. et Hook, var. velutinum

Fiwart et Davies

Plenpbuton sphacelatum (Lab.) F.

fuell,

335 ( M, CHIPPENDALE

Rutidosis helichrysoides DC, NATURALISED SPECIES

Senecio zregorii ¥, Muell. (in alphabetical order)

Senecio laceratus (F. Mucll.) Belcher Alternanthera pungens H.B.K.

Senecia lautus Sol. Brassica lournforttt Gouan.

Senecio magnificus F. Mucll. Carthamus lanatus L.

Senecio odoratus Hornemann Cenchrus ciltaris L,

Senecio sp. noy, aff. cunninghamii Citrullus colocynthis (L.) Schrad.

Sigesbeckia orientalis L. Ciltrullus vulgaris Sehrad-

Senchus oleraceus L. Cynodon dactylon (L,) Pers.

Vernonia cinerea Lees Wehinm plantaginewm. L.

Vitladinia pterochacta (¥. Muell, ) Emex australis Steinh

J. M. Black Lrizeron floribundus (H.B.K.)

Vitladinia scabra DC. Sch, Bip.

Vittadinia triloba (Gaud.) DC. Maloa parviflora L,

Waizia acuminata Steetz Nicotiana glauca Grah.

Waitzia citrina (Benth.) Steetz Polyzonum. aviculare L.

Wedelia asperrima_(Dene.) Benth. Ricinus communis Ly,

Wedelia spilanthvides F, Muell. Ruwnex vesicarius L,

Wedelia tverbesinoides F, Muell, ex Sisymbriun: érysimoides Desf,

Beuth. Xunthium spinosum L.

ACKNOWLEDCMENTS

Tbe co-operation of botanists at interstate herbaria in searches for speci-

mens and in corrections to the list is much appreciated, as is also the action of

the Directors of the Herbaria in Brisbane, Sydney, Melbourne and Adelaide in

allowing me to borrow specimens.

REFERENCES

Benruam, G., 1863. Flora Australiensis, Vol. 1.

Buack, J. M., 1948-1957, Flora of South Australia, Parts [-4, 2nd Ed,

Brack, J. M., 19)4. Transactions of the Royal Society af South Australia, XXXVI (1614)

pp. 460-471. “Scientific Nutes on an Expedition into the Interior of Anstralia. Botany.

Buacg, J. M., 1936. Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia, LX (1936), pp

XXKI-KEXV.

Burpiwce, N, T., 1953. Austrilian Journal of Botany 1. No. 1 (1953), pp, 121-184, “The

Genus Triodia”. '

Cieuanp, J. B. (unpublished). ‘List ot species collected in Centrul Australia.

Crocker, R. L., and Woon, J. G,, 1947, Transactions of the Royal Society of South Aus-

tralia, 71, part 1 (1947), pp. 91-136, “Some Ilistorical Influences on the Development

vf the South Australian Vegetation Conmiunities.”

Basorey, C. M,, 1946. Transactious of fhe Royal Society of South Australia, 70 (1946), pp.

145-174. Catalogue of Plants of the Simpson Desert Expedition (1939),

Ewarr, A. J., and Davies, O. B., 1917. The Plora af the Northern Territary.

ar B., 1875. Geographic Travels in Central Australia (1872-4), pp. 211-223. List of

Plants.

Kempe, H., 1881-2.. Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia, V (1881-2), pp,

19-23. “Plants Indigenous to the Neighbourhood of Hermauusburg,”

Kemper, H., 1879-80. Ibid.,. 111 (1879-80), pp. 129-137,

Lee, Aca, 1948, Contributions from the New South Wales National Herbarin, 1 No. 4

(1948), pp, 131-271. “The Genus: Swainsona.”

Muetzer, F., 1884-5. Proceedings of the Royal Society of South Australia, § (1884-3), pp.

10-13. “Plants Collected in Central Australia by Charles Winnecke.*

Murcer, F.. and Tare, R., 1889-90.° Transactions of the Ruyal Society of South Australia.

13 (1889-90), pp. 94-109. “List of Plants Collected During Mr. Tietken’s Expedition

. into Central Australia (1889). :

TATR, inh 1896, Report of the Horn Expedition to. Central Austealia—Bolany 3 (1896). pe,

LL7-204,

Witus, f., 1942. The Vietorian Naturalist, 59 (4), p. 73-

Wittis, J. 1945. Tbid., 61 (10), p. 175.

JOHN BURTON CLELAND - A TRIBUTE ON HIS

EIGHTIETH BIRTHDAY

Summary

JOHN BUNTON CLELAND—A TRIBUTE ON HIS

EIGHTIETH BIRTHDAY

John Burton Cleland, the senior fellow of the Society, was barn on

22nd June, 1878, und was elected. to fellowship of the Royal Society of

South Australia in 1895, His father, Dr, W. Lb, Cleland, was already a

member when the Adelaide Philosophical Saciety became the Royal

Society in 1880. J. B. Cleland has been a member of the Council of the

Society at various times from 1921 until 1942 and was President in

1927-28 and again in 1940-41. He wus awarded the Sir Joseph Vereo

medal in 1933,

Cleland belongs to the old. tradition of the medical man whe is

also a naturalist. The following appreciations of his work in three fields

of Natitral History have been contributed by Miss C, M, Fardley, Dr.

C. G. Hansford and Professor T. D. Campbell.

J. B, CLacanp as A BoTANIsT

Dr, J}, B. Cleland’s botanical activities have always been recreational and

non-professioual, but so well-directed, continuous and serious in their aims that

ft scientific achievemeuts bear favourable comparison with thase of professional

otanists.

His major publication, Toadstaols and Mushrooms and Other Larger Fungi

of South Australia, Parts I and {1 (1934-35, Adel, Govt. Printer), was the result

ot his observations, collections and extensive field experience, together with long

study. In scope, the work is a taxonomic textbook for South Australia, but

useful beyond that State; it also contains many fine illustrations and coloured

plates of great perfection, together with genera! chapters on the uses, edibility

and poisonous nature of many of the species.

These two books are the standard reference text on toadstools and mush-

roums in this State and of a high, scholarly level; they were published in the

series of “Handbooks of the Flara and Fauna of South Australia", and the

author is an acknowledyed authority on this subject.

This is perhaps the best place tu reler to Dr. Cleland’s large part in the

foundation of this series of Handbooks. The idea grew rather naturally out of

the need felt by him, as a keen and lifelymg field botanist, For a good handbook

on the Hora of South Australia. Many of his scientific colleagues were in a

similar position with regard to other branches of local natural history and were

vntlasiastic about this vision of a set of Handbooks, though the work was all

still to come. Dr, Cleland himself has told the story of this beginning ( Australian

Herbarium News, No. 2, March, 1948), but it will bear repeating. It gous back

tu 1920-21 when the South Australian Branch of the British Science Guild (no

longer existing .as’ such) was particularly interested in the wider dilfusion of

seientific knowledge and methods among aniuteurs and the general public.

Cleland had already collaborated with the amateur systematic botanist, J. M.

Black, and subsequently published various papers with him in these Transac-

tions, recording collections of plants made in the more inaccessible northern

and western parts of the State, as well as comprehensive censuses of southern

areas, like Kangaroo Island, Monarta South and Encounter Bay especially, the

perennial holiday home of his family. Black already had to his credit a small

published work, The Neturalised Flora of South Anstralia (1909), and Cleland

Trans Roy. Soc. 8. Aust. (1659), Vol. Xt.

44 TRIBUTE

recognised his genius for this task of preparing a Hora of the native plants of

the State. Cleland was instrumental in proposing to the British Science Guild

that Black be invited to nndertake this task; there remained the large question

nf publication and it was agreed thal the South Australian Government might

be approached on this matter.

Cleland and his colleagues could see the potential authurs of other science

handbooks in their immediate circle —on Mammials, Fishes and, indeed, @ com-

prehensive list— and the proposal that was finally put before the Government

by a deputation, consisting, of Professor Wood Jones, Professor T. G, B. Osharn

and Professor Cleland. The scientific deputation could offer a scheme for pre-

paring and editing the volumes under the control of the Suuth Australian Branch

af the British Science Guild, with tho voluntary labours of the specialist authors

contributing the text — no mean offer — the scientific, educational, and economic

value to agriculture and other industries wus stressed. Could the Government

aecept this offer and in retum arrange for publication by tho Government

Printer? The immediate reaction of the Premier, Sir Henry Barwell, as he

became later, was that this was a very handsome offer; Cabinet concurred and

setwrted a favourable reply in a fortnight, early in 1921. Since then, Handbooks

have appeared in a dozen or more special fields, and they have enjoyed a high

repulation. The Handbooks Committee of four or five still contains two OF its

original members, namely, J. B. Cleland and H. M. Hale, Editor sinee its incep-

tion: this is a very proud record of nearly 40 ycars’ generous service,

Cleland was able tn give J, M. Black quite expert help with the drudgery

of getting such technical matter printed, because of his own familiarity with the

subject. And similarly about 1940 when Black, as a man of aver 80, was

persnaded to undertake a Second Edition of Part 1 of his Flora, J. B. Cleland

was the prime mover and it is duc largely to his activity that arrangements were

anade for the completion vf the Second Edition after Black’s death. One has the

impression that Cleland labuured almost more to promote Black's Flora than in

the cause of his own Handbooks on the Toadsteols and Mushrooms, Black's

Flora in twa editions of four volumes each has certainly been the mast ambitious

publication of the Handbook’s Committee.

Cleland’s knowledge of plants has its basis in the great love of an active

man for outdoor life and his talent for field studics; there could not have been

many weeks in his life when he failed to go for an outing ar expedition, These

were always oecasions for collecting and noting or listing plants and always

directed to the end of increasing the store of knowledge about plants in the field

in Anstralia. He could name almost any plant at sight and could therefore

quickly pick out rarities, for which he was always searching. His mental and

physical energy are equally great and he has laboured continually to record

ohservations which could be useful. Countless short papers recording local lists

of plant distribution have flowed from his pen, many of these being published in

the South Australian Naturalist. The memorable and frequent Jonger expede

tions to the north of the State, and the far west and Central Australia have

yielded big collections which have been faithfully worked up and published,

sometimes with another botanical collaborator, usually in these Transactions.

New or interesting plants were turned up quite frequently and passed on to a

taxonomist, particularly J. M. Black, for description and publication; many of

Black’s new species were collected by Cleland, who has really acted in the

capacity of a discriminating plant explores. '

Black described four new genera which are still standing and Cleland was

the first collector of two of them; one was a small shrub of the tamily Violaceae

collected in Wilpena Pound and named in 1932 after the collector — Clelandia —

JOUN BURTON CLELAND 341

it resembles another plant of the same family in its habit, Hybanthus floribundus;

the other was a small annual herb of the family Boraginaceae which was pob-

lished us Embadium in 1931, having been collected west of Lake Torrens after

rains. To find unknown genera of plints in Australia at this time implies the

handling of thousands of specimens and closely observant eyes,

The number of new species which came to Black via Cleland was consider-

wble, some were named after the collector and others received the usual de-

scriptive epithets; moreover, the literature of Australian plant taxonomy also

cummemorates J. B, Cleland’s forbears in the matter of names.

Sets of many of his more interesting collections and vare specimens went

to the Kew Herbarium; Mr, Black had whatever he needed and the rest went

into Cleland’s large private collection, which was only kept within reasonable

proportions by giving away a large section of it periodically to one or other of

the important public herbaria in Australia, especially Adelaide, where he and

his interests are very well known, There were collections from successive

periods of residence in Perth, Syduey, and then fram 1920 Adelaide again: South

Australia lus certainly been the centre of most of his botanical activity, and we

owe a good deal of our knowledge of the extent of distribution of individual

species to his activities.

‘lhe approach to plants was also influenced by his other strung interests —

medicine, anthropology, zoology and ornithology; he published papers on poison

plants, with medical case histories, on drug plants used by the abariginals, on

native plants eaten by animals and birds, There are also several important

papers on the uses of plants by the aboriginals, especially the food plants, often

published in collaboration with scientific colleagucs in whose company he made

many anthropological expeditions. These munerous publications are a mine of

doforatiqn for subsequent workers and many are valuable records of a dying

culture.

Cleland has made very efficient use of time; odd moments, walks and drives

ure regularly spent in observing plants ar collecting them, and the notebook is

never far-distant; when in the city and suburbs he observes introduced weeds

and has regularly furnished an exhibit of fresh named weeds to the South Aus-

tralian Museum during recent years; if a plant lias escaped or became natural~

ized, he is generally among the firsl to record or notice it, for he has travelled

widely and conslantly about the State,

Cleland has made his mark as one whu has loved and filled his leisure with

the study of Australian plants, especially in the field, to such a degree that

science has reecived much benefit, and ‘also as one who has conceived great

plans fur the advance wf systematic Botany in Anstralia and who has not spared

vimsell in assisting to carry them «ut,

C.M.E,.

J, B, Creiann as A Myconocrst

Diring the past halfcentury J. B. Cleland has been a mast assiduous cnl-

lector of Australian Fungi, and has accumulated what is undoubtedly the most

extensive herbarium of these in existence. His main collecting grounds have

been New South Wales and South Australia, but on his journeys around Aus-

tralia and abroad, he has supplemented his collections with specimens from

other parts of the continent, from New Zealand, North America and Europe. In

addition, he has received many named specimens of foreign fungi in exchange

for his own from Australia.

Cleland has been unique as an Australian collector of fungi, in that he has

paid particulur attention to the larger fungi, especially the Agaricales, which

342 TRIBUTE

have been almost totally neglected since the appearance of Cooke's Handbook

of Australian Fungi (1892), a work which was very unsatisfactory and even

misleading. Cleland, with the assistance of E. Cheel of Sydney, and of other

specialists in various groups of the fungi, published the results of his collections

in New South Wales in a scrics of papers from 1914 to about 1925, and on his

return to the University of Adelaide, continued the collection of the fungi of

South Australia, His results on the latter were gathered into his monograph,

The ‘'vadstools and Mushrooms of Sout: Australia, in 1934, since when a few

additiinal specics have been published, This monograph represents the any

major work on the Agaricules of Australia to appear since 1592; unfortunately, it

has not been followed up by similar accounts of these fungi in the other Stites

of the Continent, so even today we have litle or no data on the distribution

of individual species in Australia, nor any general picture of the agarie flora here.

Since 1934, a new system of classification of the Aguricales has been de-

yaloped ontside Anstralia, largely as a result of the investigations of Dr. R.

Singer; the older “Friesian” classification was hased maiuly on macroscopic

characters, ¢radually supplernented by microscopic details of spores, cystidia

and other orguns of the fructifieations. The newer classification is fundamentally

diferent, being based primurily upon details of the microscopic structure of the

frre hodies, und hay vesulted in the amalgamation of many of the older “genera”

and the segregation of others into separate new genera, Hitherty no specialist

has arisen in Australia to apply Unis new classification to our agarics, and at

present such work is most urgently needed, before the accumulation of spect-

mens and “species” hecomes tou great fur a siagle specialist to ultempt to sort

oat, Unfortunately, such a work requires the services ot a specialist familiar

with: similar fungi in other parts of the world and thus capable of pronouncing

with some degree of certainty whether the specimens encountered here are

identical with species recordéd clsewhere, This necessitates examination of

living material of cach species and variety in the field, followed by relation to

existiee herbarium specimens: only after such study can the latter be utilised

as the basis for specific and varietal names. Recent attempts lo induce De. Singer

himself to come to Australia and undertake this work proved unsuccesstul, and

the whole study of Australian Aguricules must remain im abeyance until he or

sine similar specialist arrives.

The Cleland specimens ace particularly valuable in that a complete deserip-

lion vf macroscopic characters is inchided with each, and there is no doubt that

eventually this herbaria will form the foundation. collection of Australian

uguries, i position similar to the Friesian herbarium in Europe, The material

exists, coupled with all information at present available on euch speenien; i

now needs working through in the light of modern concepts of classifiention

and specific determination, There is na doubt in the: present setters mind that

most, if not all, the aew species and varieties described by Cleland and his co-

workers from his specimens will stand in the future, though complete new de-

suriptions of cach will be necessary to includes details of microscopic structive

On the other hand, it is doubtful whether many of the European and American

specific names attuched to the remaining specimens will stand close exurina-

tion: Here is a geand deal of reasun to suspect that these specimens difler materi-

ally from their relatives in other countries, and they may have to be deseribed

4s new species oY varicties.

[. B. Cleland has generously donated the entire collection of some groups te

the Plant Pathology Herbarium of the Waite Institute, Adelalde, whieh new

howses the Lollowing:

JOHN BURTON CLELAND 343

Lichens, Unfortunately, it has not yet proved possible to locate any specia-

list in this group willing to undertake the determinution of the 1,500 specimens

of the colleetion, Hitherto, in Australia there are records of over a thousand

species and varieties, based mainly on collections made in 1890-1910 in Queens-

land and Victoria, It is prohable that the Cleland specimens include many new

records for the Australian Lichen Flora.

Gasteromycetes, The Cleland specimens were revised by Dr. G. H. Cun-

ningham and included in his book, The Custeromycetes of New Zealand anid

Australia, though further collections have heen made since this appeared. ‘he

specimens of Tulostoma are now under further revision by Dr. Jorge Wright of

Argentina, in connection with a new world monograph of this genus.

Discomycetes, The whole Cleland collection at this group is now being

worked out by Dr. Dennis of Kew; it is probable that many of the existing re-

cords of Australian species ave inexact,

Clavariaceae, The new: classification of this family dates from Comet’s

monograph (1950); Mrs. Womersley, a former student of Corner, has com-

menced working out the Cleland specimens.

Myxomycetes, These have now been determined by the present writer

from Lister's monograph.

Polyporaceae, Thelephoraceae, etc. The Cleland specimens at present in

the Waite Institute comprise mainly the foreign specimens he received as ex-

changes; his own Australian specimens are still in his own charge; they will

require very detailed revision in the light of Cunningham's work on the New

Zealand specimens; this has involved what is virtually a completely new classi-

fication of these families, based upon microscopic structure. The revision of

Australian specimens can ouly he undertaken by a specialist, and it is to be hoped

that Dr. Cunningham himself may find time to undertake this work. '

C.G.1L,

). B. CLetaNn Ano ANTHROPOLOGY

The interest of J, B. Cleland in the natural history of man and, in particular,

of the Australian aboriginal, was probably stimulated during his boyhood through

his father’s professional association with the Parkside Mental Hospital and the

absariginal inmates of that institution,

With his muaturer interest in natural history, it was inevitable that he be-

came one of the enthusiastic members of the University staff who joined in the

local revival of interest in Australian anthropology. stimulated by the presence

here of the late Protessor Wood Jones.

Cleland was ouc of the University parly who accompanied Professur Clark

Wissler and Mr. Edward Embree (of the Rockefeller Fonndation) on a visit

ty Wilgena, in the far north-west of South Austealia in 1925. These Rvo Ame-

ricari visitors were here in connection with the proposed establishment of an

Austrtlian School of Anthropalogy. The visit to Wilgena gave the Americans

their first acquaintance with aboriginal life and no doubt stimulated their interest

in Australian. anthropology,

From then onwards, Adelaide University field studies ou aboriginal life —

revived after the long past work of Sir Edward Stirling — became almost annual

events. In all this activity, Cleland was among the earliest workers. To pro-

mote these stuclies, a Board for Anthropolayical Rescarch was formed in 1927-

For several years the late Dr. W. Ray was Chairman: but in 21930 Cleland he

came its Chairman, a position he has held up to the present time.

The first of these Central Australian major field expeditions was in 1927,

with visits la Macumba and Alice Springs; and Cleland was a member of that

344 TRIBUTE

first project. In the following years, he maintained his active participation in

many expeditions to the outback of Central and South Australia. In 1928, to

Koonibba; 1929, Hermannsburg; 1930, Macdonald Downs; 1931, Cockatoo

Creek; 1932, Mt, Liebig; 1933, Ernabella; 1934, Diamantina, 1936, Granites;

1937, Nepabunna; 1939, Ooldea,

During the period prior to World War I, Cleland accompanied several

minor excursions to more accessible native Settlements in South Australia. —

Since the War, field expeditions tv Central Australia were revived in 1951,

and Cleland still continued his active work among the natives at Yuendumn;

with earlier visits to Haasts Bluff and Aryonga Settlements.

All these activities were not enough to absorb all of Cleland’s enthusiasai,

He was among the foundation members of the Anthropological Society af South

Australia, founded in 1925, He occupied the position of President for three

sessions and has been almast continuously a member of its council throughout

the history of the Suciety. For a number of years he was a member of the State

Aborigines Advisory Council. In 1939 a new Aburiginal Act was passed; and in

1940, the Aborigines Protectiyn Board was constituted. For eighteen years he

has been Deputy to the Minister's Chairmanship of this Board and has given

valuable and unremitting service in its duties. The fictions of the Board have

necessitated many visits of inspection to the far ontback of the State. Cleland

has been untiring in these ardous excursions, and his well-maintained physical

energy was evidenced on one occasion in relatively recent years when visiting

Ernabella Settlement in the Musgrave Ranges; he was one of a small band of

enthusiasts who climbed to the summit of Mt. Woodroofe — the highest peak in

South Australia,

From all this wide and varied experience, Cleland has. placed many of his

observations on permanent record in a long list of valuable publications. These

are too numerous to list in detail; but altogether they make an outstanding con-

tribution to the ecology of the Australian aboriginal. To mention only some of

his major works, these have dealt with: diseases of the natives; his pioncer in-

vestigations in blood grouping; indigenous plants as native food materials; and

his remarkable story of the aboriginal’s discovery of the properties and uses of

the plants Nicotiana and Duboisia, is a subject far more fascinating historically

and scientifically than the traditional romance of Sir Walter Raleigh and tobacco.

Just as impressive as Cleland’s extensive experience and unbounded enthu-

siasm in these anthropological studies, has been his sincere interest and affection

for the aboriginal as a human being, His studies and interest in these native

folk will long remain as one of the fitting memorials to a lifetime of faithful

service to science and his State.

TDC.

LIST OF LECTURES GIVEN AT MEETINGS DURING THE

YEAR 1957-58.

Summary

Oct., 1957.

Nov.,

April,

May,

June,

July,

Sept.

LIST OF LECTURES GIVEN AT MEETINGS DURING THE

1957,

1958,

1958.

YEAR 1957-58.

Presidential Address by Mr. [. M. THomas: “The Evolution of the

Thyroid”.

Mr, J. Strspury, Dept. of Agronomy, Waite Institute: “Some As-

pects of the Ecology and Distribution of the Genus Kennedya

(Leguminosae) in Western Australia”.

Dx. M. F. Griarssner, Dept. of Geology, University of Adelaide:

“The Oldest Fossils of South Australia”,

Prorrsson R. K. Morton, Dept. of Agricultural Chemistry, Waite

Institute: “The Fine Structure of Cells in Relation to Biological

Activity”.

Dr. W. G. Etrorp, Lecturer in Physics, University of Adelaide:

“Artificial Earth Satellites”,

Mr. J. C. Fornacuon, Director of Research, Australian Wine Re-

search Institute: “The Organisation, Function and Programme of

the Wine Research Institute”.

Dr. F. W. Woon, Superintendent of Range Development, Weapons

Research Establishment; “The International Geophysical Year”.

BALANCE SHEET

Summary

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED)

Receipts and Payments for year ended 3°th peat, 1958,

g& ss a £ 5

To Balance 1/10/57 1,453 15 0 By Printing and Publishing Vohune 8),

» Subscriptions 296 7 10 Reprints, ete. 1439 6

3,» Government Grant 1775 0 0 » Library Assistants 5 107 0

3» Sale of Publications, cte. 352 8 6G » Printing and Stationery 129 18

» Interest— . Postages, Duty Stamps, ete. 78 #0

Endowment Fund £229 19 3 » Cleaning 58 7

Savings Bank of - Insurance 58 1

S.A. Co 51 1 9 » Lighting 6 10

——————_ 281 1 0 » Binding Volumes: 1,175 19

» Shelving te 114 1

» Packing Transactions . Al 16

;, Vacuum Cleaner 21 9

, Periodicals, etc, 14 10

, Cartage 5 3

» Sundries 9 7

;, Balance—

Savings Bank of

_ S.A., Rundle St. £914 7 9

Less outstanding

cheques 15 9

898 18

£4,158 12 4 £4,158 12

Audited and found correct.

N.S, ANGEL, A.U.A. Com. | Hon.

Adelaide, [st October, 1958. F. M. ANGEL | Auditors

ENDOWMENT FUND

Receipts and Payments for year ended 3Cth September, 1958 -

£& s. da | £ os

.. Interest— ., Balanee—

Inscribed Stock . £224 9 3 C’wealth Inscribed

Gas Co. 516 0 Stoek £6,010 0 0

229 19 3 S.A. Gas Co,

Bonds 100 0 O

—_——. 6,110 0

£6,339 19 3 £6,339 19

Audited and found correct.

tive institutions.

F. M. ANGEL

Adelaide, Ist October, 1958.

N. S, ANGEL, A.U.A. Com, | Auditors

The Stuck and Bond have been verified by certificates from the respe

Hon. H. WOMERSLEY,

Hon. Treasurer,

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

Summary

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

1929 Pror. Waiter Howcrmy, F.C.S.

19380 Jorn McC. Buacx, A.L.S.

1931 Pror. Sm Dovetas Mawson, O.B.E., D.Sc., B.E,, FBS,

1933 Pror. J. Burton Crevanp, M,D.

1935 .Pror. T. Haryey Jonnston, M.A., D.Sc,

1938 Pror. J. A. Prescorr, D.Sc., FA.C.1,

1943 Hexserr Womenrstey, A.L.S., FREES.

1944 Pror. J. G. Woon, D.Sc., Ph.D.

1945 Crom T. Manican, M.A., B.E., DSe., F.G.S.

1946 Herpent M, Hare, OBE.

1955 L. Kerra Wano, 15.0., B.A., B.., D.Sc

1956 WN, B. Trnparn, B-Sc-

1957 C, S, Per, D.Sc.

LIST OF FELLOWS

AS AT 30th SEPTEMBER, 1958-

Those marked with an astesick (*) have contributed papers published in the Sucicty’s

Transactions. Those marked with a dagger [ +) are Life Members,

Any change in address or any other changes should be notified to the Secretary.

Note—The publications of the Socicty are not sent to those menibers wliose subscriptions

> ' are in arrears.

ate

Date oF = Tinsorary RAR LLOWS

Election Election Hona ¥ FE ah

1855 1949 *CLeLanp, Pror. J. B., M.D., Dashwood Road, Beaumout, $.A.—Verco Medal,

1933; Council, 1921-26, 1932-37; President, 1937-28, 1940-41; Vice-.

President, 1926-27, 1941-42.

1905 1955 "Mawson, Pror. Sm Dovcuas, O.B,.E., DSc, B.E,, F.R.S., University of

Adelaide—Verco Medal, 1931; President, 1924-25, 1944-45; Vice-President,

1924-35, 1925-26; Counsil, 1941-43. (Sir Douglas Mawson died on 14th

October, 1958, )

1913 1955 *Osnonn, Pror. T. G, B., D.Sc. St Mark’s College, Pennington Terrace,

North Adelaide-Couneil, 1915-20, 1922-34: President, 1025-26; Vice-

President, 1924-25, 1926-27.

i9t2 1955 *Wanv, L. K., LS.0., B.A. B.E., D.Se., 22 Northumberland Street, Heath-

poal, Marryatville, S,A—Council, 1924-27, 1933-35; Vice-President,

1927-28: President, 1928-30.

Date of :

Election FELLows

1946. Annir, Prov, A. A, M:D,, D-Se., Ph.D., University af Adelaide.

1958. Anere, K., Dr. Phil. (Marburg), Dr.Phil.Nat. (‘artu-Dorpat), M.Sc. (Riga), 42

Kildonan Road, Warradale Park, S.A.

1953, Apcocg, Miss A., 4 Gertrude Street, Norwood, S.A.

1927. *AupERMAN, Pror. A. R., Ph.D., D.Se,, F.G.S., Department of Geology, University of

Adelaide—Council,, 1937.42, 1954-57.

1951. Awnrrson, Mrs. S, H., BSc., 3) Lakeman Street, Narth Adelaide.

1935, *Anparwartua, H. G., M.Ag.Sc., D.Sc, Zoology Dept., University of Adelaide —

Council, 1949-50: Vice-President, 1950-51, 1952-53: President, 1951-52.

1935. °AnnrewArTHa, Mrs. H, V., B-AgrSe., M-Se. (nee IT. V. Steele), 29 Claremont

Avenue, Netherby, 5.A.

1929. °AnceL, F. M., 34 Fullerton Road, Parkside, §.A.

1939. ®AnceL, Miss L, M., M,Se., c/o Mrs. C, Angel, 2 Moore ‘Street, Toorak, Adelaide, S.A.

1945. °Bantiett, H. K., L.Th., 2 Abbotshall Road, Lower Mitcham, S.A. ‘

1950. Bec, R. G, B.Ag.Sc., RD.A, Lynewood Park, Mil-Lel, yia Mount Gambier, S.A.

1932. Brac, P. R., D.D.Sc., L.D.S., Shell House, 170 North ‘Terrace, Adelaide.

. D.Se., F.A.CL, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

|: A.S.A.S.M., M.I.M.M., 36 Woodaroft Avenue, St. Georges, §.A.

1934. Brack, E, C., M.B,, B.S., Magill Road, Tranmere, Adelaide.

1950. Gownin, N, J., M.B, BS., F-RG.S. (Fing.), F.R.A.C.S., 40 Barnard Street, North

1940, Bowxron, Sm J, Lavincron, 263 East Terrace, Adelaide, .

1945. *Boomsaa, C. D., M.Sc., B.Sce,For., 6 Celtic Avenue, South Road Park, S.A,

314

Date «ul

Blewiun

L037.

1939,

1937.

Lot,

1925,

1958.

TA22,

1953.

1957.

1829,

1958.

1940.

1928S

1936,

19356,

1951

1958.

LIST OF FELLOWS

*Brooxes, Miss H. M., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, No. 1), Adeluida,

Brookman, Mrs. KR. D. (neo A. Harvey), B.A. Meadows, S.A,

Buicx, W. G., B.A. ¢/o Country Lending Service, Poblic Tdbyary, South Australia.

sByesner, Miss N. T,, MSc. CS.LR0., Div. Plant Industry, P.O, Box 109, Can-

erra, A.C.T.

Benoon, Kh. §., D.Sc,, University of Adelaide—Couneil, 1946-47, 1947-45, 1Od8-19

Boring, L., 54 Richmond Road, Warradale Park, S.A.

°Camparnt, Prop, '!', D,, D,D.Se., D.Sc, Dental Dept., Adelaide Huspital, Adelawle—

Gouneil, 1928-32, 1935, 1942-485: Vice-President, L942-34; President, 1930-45.

Canren, A, N., B.bc., 70 Madeline Street, Burwood, E.13, Victoria.

*CrrpeNpALE, G. M,, B.Sc, Lindsay Avenue, Alice Springs, N<I',

Copa, We M.B., B,S., 7 Walter Street, Hyde Park, Adelaide, S.A—Prewsueer,

Py CATS t. a.

Crotroer, EL A., Hydroelectiic Commission, Hobart, Tas,

Cournmen, F. S., Ceology Department, University of Quecnslonsl,

*Corton, B. C,, S.A, Museum, Adelaide—Council, 1943-16, Lis—-ld: Vice President,

1919-50, 1051; President, 1950-31. .

Crawronn, A. B,, B.Sc., Dept. of Mines, Adelaide.

Datiy, B,, PhD, S.A. Museum—Programme Secretary, 1957-59

Davivson, A. C. L., Ph.D, BSc, c/o Burns Philp Tiust Go, 7 Bridge Steet

Sydney, N.S.W,

Derann, C. M., M.B., BS,, D.PIL, D,T.M,, 29 Gilbert Street, Goodwuvidl, S.A—

Council, 1949-51, 1954-59: Vice-President, 1951-52, 1953-54: President, 195253,

Drx, E. V., Hospitals Departincat, Rundle Street, Adelaide, S_A. ‘

Doutt, K. M., M.Ag.Se., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, No. 1), Adelatle,

Douxsions, 6 M, L., M.B.. B.S, 170 Payneham Rad, St. Peters, Adelaide.

Dwyrr, J. M., M.B., B.S., 10 Port Road, Hindmarsh, S.A.

“EBarnonny, Mrss C. M,, MLSo, PLS, University of Adelaide —Cohneil, [$43-48.

*Epstonps, 8. J., B.A, M.Se., Ph-D., Zoology Department, University al Adelaidu—

Council, 1954-55; Programme Secretary, 1955-56; Secretary, 1956-57.

°Epgutst, A, G., 19 Farrell Street, Glonely, S.A—Council, 1949-53,

*Ercuuer, H., Dr.ret.nat., State Herbarium, Botanic Gardens. Adelaide,

*Fincayson, H. H., 305 Ward Street, North Adelaide—Council, 1447-41).

Fisuer, R. H., 21 Seaview Road, Lynton, South Australia,

Honnes, B. G., Ph.D., F.G.5,, 9 Flinders Road, Hillerest, S.A,

Torn, A, W,, F.LGS,, A.C.C.S,, 390 South Terrace, Bankstown, N.S.W,

*Pny, H. K., D.S.0., M.D., B.S., B.Se., FRAC... Town Hall, Adulatde—Conned,

1933-37; Vice-President, 1037-38, 1999-40; President, 1938-39

Qreson, A. A., A.W.A.S.M., Ceologist, Mines Department, Adelaice.

*"Goiarssnen, MF. DSc. e/o Geolovy Department, University of Adelaide—Corneil,

1953-54; Vice-President, 1958-59,

Gooenny, F. K., 5 Robert Street, Payneham, South Anstralia.

{Gotnsacz, H., Coromandel Valley, S.A;

Gori, H. D., 13 Dunrohin Road, Brighton, §.A.

Gross, G. F,, M,Se., South Australian Musvum, Adelvide—Seerctury, 1950-53,

Gurpy, D. J., B.Sc, c/o W.A. Petrolerm Co., 251 Adelaide Terrice, Perth, W-.A,

*Ilatz, H. M., O.B.E., c/o S.A, Museum—-Vereo Medal, 1046; Canneil, 1931,

1950-33, 1956-39; Vice-President, 1934-36, 1937-38: President, (W36-47; I reasurer,

_ 1938-50, 1953-56.

Hazz, D. B., Tex Tree Gully, $_A.

Hancock, N. L., 3 Bewdley, 66 Berestord Road, Rose Bay, N.S.W,

°fTanse\en, 2 V., B.A, Queen Elizabeth Schoul, Creditou, Devon, Keister. -

*Hanoy, Mns, J, E, (nee A, C, Beckwith), M.Sc, Box 62, Smithtem, Tus.

Hane, J. R., B.Sc, ceo Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide

Werrrot, FB, 1., B.Agr.Sc.. 49 Tlalsbury Avenue, Kingswood, 8.A,

Hu-rox, F. M., H.AgrSe, 17 Kay Avenue, Berri, 5.A

Wockrne, L. J., The School Scott’s Creek, S.A. :

*Hossrrin, P. §., Ph.D., 132 Fisher Street, Fullarton, &-A.

Houser, D. S. W., MBS. J.P., 238 Payneham Koud, Paynelhani, $.A.

Hotton, J. T., B.Se, A.S.A.S.M., 10 Bellevue Place, Unley Park—Council, 1957-59.

lrovurn, P., 14 Wyatt Road, Burnside, S.A.

*Jessur, R. W.. M.Sc, Division of Plant Industry, C.5.1.8.0., Canberra, A.C.T,

*Jonns, R. K,. B.Se,, Department of Mines, Adelaide, S.A.

Jounson, B., B.Sc.Agr., Ph.D., Waite Institute (Vrivate Mail Bag), Adelatde,

Jounson. W.. B.Sc. (Hons.), 33 Ryan Avenue, Woodyille West, S.A,

LIST OF FET LANWS 249

Wate ot

Mioction

1954. Knats, A. L., B.E,, 44 LeFevre Verrace, North Adclaide.

1939, fies, Ht M., Ph.D. M.B., F.R.GS., Khakhar Buildiyes, C2. Yank Road, Bom-

AY, Anda,

1933. *Krevaran, A. W., Ph.D., University of Adelaide—Secreiary, 1945-48; Viee-Prevident,,

1045-49, 1950-51; President, 1949-50. .

1982. Lenuon, G.A,, M-D., B.S, FR.C.P., AMP. Building, King William Strect, Adelaide-

1958. Tanpsay, H. Ay, 110 Cross’ Road, Hivheate, S.A, ;

1948. _Lorutan, T. R. N.,. N-D.ITL. (N.Z.), Director, Botanic Gardens, Adelaide—Treusurer,

1932-53; Couneil, 1953-57; Vice-President, 1957-58; President. 1955-59.

1931, “Lunsroor, Mrs. N. IL, MA, Ph.D. DIC, F.G.S,, Department of Mines, Adelaide

—Council, 1955-59,

1953. Maar, D.A., B.Sc. (Hons.), Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, No, 1). Adelaicle.

1939. Maxsuane, T, J, M.Agr.Se., Ph,D., C.S.1.R.0., Division of Soils (Private Mail Bag,

Noa. 1), Adelaice—Cauneil, 1948-52,

1920. Mayo, Sa Mexsear, LL.B, Q.C., 19 Marlborough Street, Gollege Park, S.4

1950. =Mayo, GC. M, B,, BAe Sco., PND. 146 Melbourne Street, North Adelaide,

1943. MeCarrisy, Mos D. F., B.A, BSc, 17 Brookside Ave,, ‘Tranmere,

1948, MeCuutont, 5 N,, M.B.E., B.Se., B.Agr.Se., Roseworthy Agricultural College, Viuse-

worthy, S.A.

1945, {"Mmos, kK. RB. DiSe., P.C.$,, 11 Cliureli Road, Mitcham, S.A.

1951, Mires, J. A, R., MLA. M.D., W.Chir. (Cant,), University of Otago, N.Z

1952. Mine, K. 0., F.C.A,, 14 Burlington Street, Walkerville, $.A.

1939. Mincuam, V. H., 30 Wainhonse Street, Torrensville, S.A.

1951. Mrrourn., F, J., c/o the South Australian Museum, North 'levrace, Adelaide,

1933, 0 Murcuiety, Pror. Sm M. L., M\Se., ¢/o Elder's Tristec uncl Rxeautor Go. Ltd. a7

Currie Street, Adelaide.

1925, {Mitrerect, Pror. Sin W., K.C.M.G., M.A., D.Se., Fitzruy Terrace, Prospect, S.A.

1938. Moorsovsn, I. W., M-Se., Chief Inspector of Fisheries, Stiinpson Buildings, Gawler

Place, Adelaide,

1936, *Mounirorp, C, P., 23 First Avenue, St Peters, Adelaidy,

1957, Munir, Ivan A., B.Sc, (Hons,), Depl. of Mines, Adelaide,

1944, Munagni, J. W:, Engineering and Water Supply Dept., Vieturia Squaw, Aclelaicde,

1944. Ninnes, A. R., B.A., R.D.A,, 2 Sheffield Street, Malvern, S.A,

1945, *NogtHcore, K. H., BuAgrSe., AJAS,, C.S.L,R.0., Division of Soils, Private Mail

Bag, Nu. 1, Adelaide.

1930, Ocxennan, G. P,, BA., 108 Hockey Street, Whyalla South, S.A.

1956. O'Dnriscour, E. $., B.Sc., 9 Vinall Street, Dover Gardens, S.A,

1937, °Pankix, L. W., M.Se,, ASIC, c/o Mines Dept, Adclaide—Serretery, 1953-56;

Vtee-President, 1956-57, 1958-59; President, 1957-58.

1949. Parkinson, K. J., BSc, Birdwoud, S.A,

1929, Paunn, AG. MLA, BSc; 10 Milton Avenue, Fullarton Estate, S.A,

1926. °Pirrr, C, $,, D.Sc, G.S.1.R.O., Division of Soils, Private Mail Bag, No, 1, Adelaide—

Verea Medal, 157; Council, 1941-43; Vice-President, 1943-45, 1946-47; Pre-

sident,, 1945-46.

1948. Powrm, J. K., B.Sc. C.S.LEO,, Keith, S.A.

1925. *Prrscotr, Prom, J. A, CALE. D.Sc, FRAC, F.RS.. 82 Cross Road, Myrtle

Rank, S.A—Vereo Medal, 1938: Council, 1937-30, 1433-39: Vice-President,

1930-32; President, 1932-33; Editor, 1965-59.

1857. *Princtz, Miss L. A. B,, Box 876c, G.P.0., Adelaide,

1945, *Pryon, L. D., M.Se., Dip.For., 32 La Perouse Street, Grilfith, Canberra, A.C.T.

1950. “Rarrigan, J. 11, M.Se,, Bow 229%, G.P.O., Melbourne, Vietoria.

1944. Rrerman, J). 5., M.Sc. B.Agr.Se., C.S,I,R.0., Division of Biochemistry, Adelaide.

1947. Hievexr, W. R., B.Se,, c/a Seripps Institution af Oceanography, Dept. of Palaeon-

tglogy. La Jolla, Galifernia, U.S.A.

1947. Rix, C. E., 42 Waymouth Avent, Claidore, S.A.

1933. Roaccrs, Paor. S. W. P,, Ph.D, F.A.A., Zoology Department, University of Adelaide.

1951. Rowe, S. A., 22 Shelley Street, Firle, S.A.

1951. Rowe, S, E., B.Sc,, Gordon Institute of Technology, Geelung, Vivlorix.

1950. Rupp, Paor. E. A., B’Sc., A.M., University of Adelaide, S_A.

1951. Russexy, L. D., c/a Mivh School, Port Pirie, S.A.

1945. Rysiurs,, J. R., Old Penola Estate, Penola, 3.4,

1933, Scunemrr, M., M.B., B.S., 175 North ‘Terrace, Adelaide,

1951, *Scorr, I, D., M.S8c., S.A. Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S,A.—Frogsumme

Secretary, 1953-54, 1956-57; Seeretary, 1957-55.

ah LIST OF FELLOWS

Date of

Election

1957, Suarsran, C. B,, B.Sc.. Department of Zoology, University of Actelside,

1928, “°Srearp, H., Port Ellivt, S.A.

1936. “‘Sararv, Du, K., D.Sc., Fisheries Research Div, C.SR.O., University of WA,

Nedlands. W,A,

1954, Sernenn, R. G,, B.Sc., c/o Department of Mines, Adelaide,

1934. Sinxerenn, R. C., 57 Canterbury Avenue, Trinity Cardens, S.A.

1925. {Saseu, T. E, Bana, B.A. 25 Cucric Street, Adelaide.

194, "Smarn, T. L., B.Sc., Dept. of Ceugraphy, University of Sydney, N.S.W.

1941, “Sourscorr, A. V., M.D,, T.8,, DoIM. & HL, 13 Jasper Street, Ayde Park, S.A—

Council, 1949-3), 1952-53, LY57-5Y: Vreasurer, 1051-52; Vice-President, 1953-54,

1955-36; President, 1954-55

1936. Sourrwoop, A. BR, M.D., M.S, (Adel.), M.R.G.P,, 170) North Terrace, Adelwide,

1947, *Srecnt, R. L., Ph., Botuny Department, University of Adelaide —Council, 1951-52,

1958-59; Programme Secretary, 1952-53,

1936. f*Smicc, KR. C., MSe., 5 Baker Street, Somerton Park.

L95l, SreapmaAn, Rev, W, Rh. § Blairgowtie Road, St. Georwes, S.A,

1947, Sporuinc, M. B., B.Ag.Se., Horticultural Branch, Department of Agriculture, Bos

901 FE, G.B.O,, Adelaide.

1949, *Seny, A. H., M.Sc., Geology Department, University of Tasmania

1938, *Stermens, C, G,, D.Sc, C.5.1-R.0., Division of Soils, Private Muil Baz, No- 1, Ade-

Taide—Conmeil, 1958-54; Vice-President, 1954-55, 1956-57: Presieleut) 1955-36,

1855. Swaine, C, D., M.B,, B.S,, 220 Esplanade, Largs Narth, §.A.

1992, Swan, D, C., M.Sc,, Waite Tostilute (Private Mail Bag, No. 1). Advlaice—Seerctury,

1940-42; Vice-President, 1946-47, 1948-49; President, \947-48; Couneil, 1953-58,

1951, Swirsx, P., M.Ag.Se,, 11 Wall Street, Norwood, $.A.

L934. SYMONE G,, 35 Murray Street, Lower Mitcham, §,A,— Felitrr, 1947-55; Council,

1958. Twytor, D. J., B.Sc, F-RE.S., Department of Entomology, Waite Institute, Private

Mail Bag No, 1, Adelaide.

1929, °Taynon, J. K.. B.A, M.Sc, OS.0.0.0,, Division of Svils. Private Mail Bag, No. 1,

Adelaide—Council, 1940-43, L947-50: Librarian, 1951-52. Vice-President, 1952-

53, 195d-53: Prevident, 1953-54. Corneil, 1955.

1948. °Trosas. I. M., M.Sc. (Wales), Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide—

Secretary, 1948-50; Council, 1950-53; President, 1956-57: Vice-President, 1955-56,

1957-58; Assistant Ielitur, 1958-59.

1938. "Txonas, Mrs, 1, M. (nee P, M, Mawson), M.So., 36 Naig Street, Brighton.

1957. “Tuomas, J., B.Se., Wondleigh Road, Blackwood, S.A,

194%, °Tnompson, Carr, J. M., 135 Military Road, Semaphore South, $.A-

1923. “Tinpate, N. B., B.Se., South Australian Museum, Adelaide-Veren Medal, 1956;

Serretary, 1935-36; Council, 1946-47; Vice-President. 1947-48, 1949-50; President,

1948-49; Librarian, 1952-59,

1955. °TueKer, BH. M,, B.Sc, O.S...R.0., Division of Soils, Private Muil Bag, No. 1, Adelaide

1950, = Verren, J. T., Box 92, Port Tiincoln, S.A.

1953. Weseinaan. R. A. B.A. M.A., PhD., Northwestern Universtty, Rvanstan, TMinala,

S.A.

1954. Wren, B. P.. MSc, Mines Dept. Kondle Street, Adelaide.

1954. Werirs, G. B., B.Av.Se,, Broadleas, Waverley Ridge, Crafers, S.A.

1956, = Wuharter-Danr, E. E., V.Inst.Ex.B,.

1946, *Weorrre, A. W.G., M.Se., Mines Department, Adelvide.

1950. Wiortams. L. E.. “Dumosa,"” Meningle, S.A.

146. °Wison, A. F., D.Se., Dept. of Geology, University of W.A., Nedlands, WA,

1938 *Waxsom, J. O., 42 Wilson Terrace, DaCosta Park, Glenelg, S.A,

1983. *Wonmensuex, H., FRE.S., ALS. (Hon, causa), S.A. Museum, Adelaide — Veres

Medal, 1943; Secretary, 1936-37; Editer, 1937-43, 1945-47; Prosiclent, 1943-44;

Vice-President, 1944-45; Rep. Fauna end Flora Proteetian Committee, 1945;

Treasurer, 1950-51, 1956-59,

1954. *Wonens.ry, IT. 8. $., Ph.D., Botany Departrnent, University of Adelaide,

1944. Wooarmnsurr, J. .$., B.Se,, Lae, New Guinea.

1923, *Waoon, ror, J, G. I8e,, PlnD., F,AA,, Botany Dept., University of Adeluide—Veroa

Medal, 1944; Council, 1938-40; Vice-President, 1940-4), 1943-43; Hep, Pound und

Flora Boatd, J940-; President, 1941-42; Council, 1944-48,

1857. Wooos, R, V., B.Se., Mt, Crawford, S.A,

1949. Yann J. N., A.M.LE., A.M.I.M.E., Highways and Local Goverument Dept.

olaide,

1944. “Zimmer, W.J., Dip.For., F.L.S. (Lon.), 7 Rupett Street, Footscray West, W,12, Vict,

GENERAL INDEX

Summary

GENERAL INDEX

Names printed in italics as separate entries indicate that the forms ure new to science.

Abele, C., unk MeGowran, B.; The

geology of the Cambrian south of

Adelaide (Sellick Hill ta Yanka-

Hilla) 301-320

Abele, K.: Cytological studies in the

gouus Dunthonia 163-173

Acarina (Some) from Australia and

New Guinea paraphagie upon mil-

lipedes and cockroaches and on

beetles of the family Passuliilae:

I, Womersley » L154

Alice Springs town water supply

(The correlation between salinity

and river flow): B. BR. Jepheott 235-244

Anampses lennarddi e &6

Angel, Madeline: An aceonnt of

Plagiorchis muculosus (Rud.), i

synonymy and its life history an

South Australia 265-281

Bettongiw cunienlus Ovgilby, 1838

(Marsupialia); H, H. Finlayson 283-259

Blackburn, G. (ITutton, J. T.. ancl

Clarke, A. R. P.): identification of

volcanic ash in svils near Mount

Gambier, South Australia, . 93-98

Bowes, D. Ry: The distribution anet

field relations of the granitic rocks

of Part Elliot, South ~ Australia - fo

Bucknell, M. J. ( Johnson, W., and);

Pscndo-ignéous rocks in the Trias-

sic succession of the Springfield

Basin, Gordon-Cradock district 245-257

Cambrian-Precainbrian boundary in

the eastern Mt. Lofty Ranges re-

gion, South Australia: B.C.

Horwitz, B. P. Thomson, and

B. P. Webb 205-218

Cambrian south of Adelaide—Sellick

Uill to Yankalilla (Geology of

the): C, Abele and B. MeGow-

ran » : 301-320

Cepillaria miniopterad , _ 151

Chaerodon ribicdiis F gy

Check list of Central Australian

plants: G. M, Chippendale - 321-338

Chippendale, G. M.: Check Tist of

Central Australian plants 321--338

Clarke, A, B, PL (Hutton, J, T.,

Blackburn, G., and): Identification

of volcanic ash in soils near Mt-

Gambier, South Australia 3-98

Cleland, J. B., and Tiidale, N. Bi

The native amames and uses of

plants at Haast Bhiff, Central Aus-

tralia * 123-141)

Cleland, Joho Burton---a tribute on

his eightieth birthday 339-344

Cooper, TH. M.; Large archaco-

lngical stoue implements from

Hallett Cove, South Australia .. 55-60

Dampieria ignlte. , 75

Danthonia (¢ rytological studies in

the gems): K. Abele 163-173

de Mooy, C. Ji: Notes on the geo-

niovrplic history of the area sur-

rounding Lakes Alexandrina and

Albert, Semth Australia 99-118

Dosinia (Phacosoma) — wedithbiur-

gensts 4. 7 . 228

Egy-layine (Communal) im the

lizard = Lewilapisma — gteichenuti

(Dumerit and Bibron): F. fj,

Mitelicll "i 7 wf 121-122

Hedrizatia barnemissagi 4 - 26

Fedvrizzia carabi . 20

Fedrizzia derricki sy : 29

wake oudemansi —_. : 24

inzia sellnicki z ; 18

Finlayson, H. H.: On Bettongia

cuniculys Ogilby, 1338 ( Marsu-

pialia) . . 283-269

Finlayson, H. 1: Subfossil pota-:

romae (Marsupialia) from South

Australia 291-300

Rishies <( Notes an Westera Anson}

:T. D. Scott _ ; 73-91

Granitic: racks of Port Elliot (Dis-

tibution and field relations);

D. fi. Bowes 7-4

Geomorphice history ( Notes an the)

of the area surrounding Takes

Alexandrina and Albert, Suuth

Australia: C, J, de Mooy 99-116

Hedruris longispicula — ... 160

Horwitz, RB. C., Thomson, ‘B. P.,

and Webb, B, P,; The Cambrian

Prevambrian boundary in the east

ern Mt. Lotty Ranges region, South

Australia 205-218

Hutton, J. T., Blackburn, G., and

Clarke, A. R, P.; Identification of

yoleanic ash * soils near Mt,

Gambier, South Australia 93-98

352, GENEBAL INDEX

Jepheott, B. R.: The correlation be-

tween salinity and river [low in

the Alice Springs town water

supply 235-244

Johnson, W., and Bucknell, M. [.:

Pscudo-igneous rocks in the Trias-

sie suceession of the Springfield

Basin, Gordon-Cradock districe 245-257

Kanmantao Group in the Strathal-

byn-Harrogate region, South Aus-

tralia: A. W.. Kloeman al B. J,

Skinner 61-71

Kleeman, A. W., and Skinnet, B, J:

‘The Kanmantoo Group in the

Strathalbyn - Harrogate yecion,

South Australia = 61-71

Lac insect Austrotachardia aeaciae

(Chemical eerapanents of the vests

H. F. Lower 173-181

Laciolina aldimgae i 229

Lower, H. Fy: ‘The chemical com-

ponents of the fest of an Austra-

lian Jac insect Atstrofachardia

aedciae (Maskell) { Homoptera:

Lacciteriduc) — - : ~ 175-81

Ludbrook, N. U.: A widespread

Pliovene Molluscan Fauna with

Anoqlontia in South Australia 219-233

Ludbrook, N, H.; Revision of the

Tate Molluscan types—Seaphor

hfe be: 141-149

Mawson, Sir Douglas — Memoir and

Bibliography a - ~ 1-6

McGowran, B. (Abele, C., and):

The geology of the Cambrian

south of Adelaide: (Sellick Hill to

Yankalilla) f 301-320

Mitchell, 1°. J.z Communal egg- laying

in the lizard Leiolupisma guiche-

notit (Dumeril and Bibron) 121-122

Molinostrongylus dollfusi ' 156

Mosquitoes of Commalpyn Downs,

South Australia CA survey): | Oa

Waterhouse 250-264

Native namos and uses of plants at

Vaast Bluff, Central Australia:

J. B. Cleland and N, B. Vindale 123-140

Nematode parasites from Australian

hosts; P, M. ‘Ihormas - 151-162

Nemipterus samsonensis . 17

Neofedrizzia brovoksi - 45

Neofedrtaria camini . 37

Neofedrizzia cunestrinit : r 33

Nenfedrizaia cynota he = 35

Neofedrizzia yuyi 4 ; : 31

Neofedrizzia gorirossiag - P. 39

Neofedrizaia acutata - 7 AT

Neofedrizzia tragardhi ~ 4 _ Al

Neofedrizsia vidua 43

Nicolling canteruni ; . 54

Parafedriszia buloloensis 52

Plagiorchis maculasus (Kud,);

synomymy and life liistory im

South Atstralia: Madeline

Angel 4 2 265-281

Plectarhynechus ordinalis 7 tj 79

Pleisigceno strandlines of the Upper

South-Fast. of South Australia:

N. B. Tindale 119-120

Pliovene mollusean fauna with Ano-

dontia in South Australiu: N. H.

Ludbrook 219-233

Potorvinae ( Subfassil ) { Marsu-

pialia) from South Australias

H.W. Finlayson 291-300

Psendo-igneous rocks in the Triassic

suceession pf the Springfield

Basin, Gordon-Cradock — district:

W, Johnson and M. Ff. Buek-

nell “ 245-257

Seuphapada—- Revision of the Tate

molhiscan types: N. HW. Lud-

brook * L£I-149

Scott, T. D.: Notes on Western Aus-

tralian Fishes, No. 1 he _ 738-91

Skimmer, B. J. (Kleeman, A, W.,

and); The Kanmantog Croup in

the Strathalbyn-Harrapate region,

South Australia : _ 61-71

Sprigg, KR, C.: Presumed submarine

volcanic achyity near Beachport,

South-East South Australia 195-203

Sprige, R. G.: Stranded sea beaches

and associated sand aecunula-

lions in the Upper South-East 183-193

Stethojulis rubromacula . &7

Stone implements (Larwe archaeo-

logical) from Hallett Gove, South

Australia: EL M. Cooper |. . 55-60

Stranded sea beaches and associated

sancl aceumulations of the Upper

South-East: RB. C. Sprigg 183-193

Thalassoma septemfasciata $4

Thomas, P, M.: Nematode partite

from Australian )osts F

Thomson, B. P. (R. C. Tlorwitz and

B, P, Webb): Cambrian-Precam-

brian bonndary in the eastern Mt.

Lofty ranges region — South Aus-

tralia 205-215

‘Tindale, N. B. (Cleland, ‘J. B., “and):

The native names and ses of

plants at Haast Bluff, og ai

Australia

Tindale, N. B.: Pleistocene strand-

lines of the Upper South-East of

South Australia ! : 119-120

151-162

123-140